Masonry Designer's Guide PDF

MASONRY
DESIGNERS
GUIDE
Based on
Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures

(AC1 530-92/ASCE 5-92/MS 402-92)
and
Specifications for Masonry Structures
(AC1 530.1-92/ASCE 6 - 9 2 m S 602-92)
with
Illustrated Design Applications
COPYRIGHT ACI International (American Concrete Institute)

Licensed by Information Handling Services
A C 1T I T L E * H D G
93
O b 6 2 9 4 9 0508489 715
MASONRY
DESIGNERS
GUIDE
Based on
Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures

(AC1 530-92/ASCE 5-92/TMS 402-92)
and
Specifications for Masonry Structures
(AC1 530.1-92/ASCE 6-92/TMS 602-92)
with
Illustrated Design Applications
John H. Matthys, editor

A C 1 T I T L E t M D G 93
O 1993
O b b 2 9 Y 9 0508q90 437
The Masonry Society

American Concrete Institute
The Masonrv Desimers Guide is not intended to teach a novice how to design or build
masonry structures, or to replace sound engineering knowledge,experience, and judgment.
The Guide should be used by professionals who are qualified to evaluate the significance,
limitations, and applicability of the information reported, and whowill
accept the
responsibility for its proper use.
Direct all correspondence to:

Masonry Designers Guide
The Masonry Society
2619 Spruce Street
Boulder, Colorado 80302-3808
(303) 939-9700

A C 1 T I T L E + M D G 93
m Obb2949 050B49L 373
FOREWORD
This Masonrv Desieners Guide (MDG) is intended to assist those involved in the design,
construction, and regulation of masonry structures, The Guide was prepared to help users
apply the provisions ofBuildine; Code Reauirements for Masonrv Structures (AC1 53092/ASCE 5-92DMS 402-92) and SDecificationsfor Masonry Structures (AC1 530.1-92/ASCE
6-92DMS 602-92). These two documents were developed by the Masonry Standards Joint
Committee (MSJC) which includes membersof the American Concrete Institute, American
Society of Civil Engineers, and The Masonry Society.
Emphasis in the MDG is on application of the two documents. Background information on
the development of the Code and Specifications provisions is not emphasized. For such
information the reader is referred to Commentarv on Buildine: Code Reauirements for
Masonrv Structures (AC1
530-92/ASCE
5-92DMS
402-92)
and
Commentarv
on
SDecifications for Masonrv Structures (AC1 530.1/ASCE 6-92/TMS 602-92).
For ease in referencing the documents described above, an abbreviated notation has been
used in the MDG. Building Code
Reauirements for Masonrv Structures is shortened to
MSJC Code or Code. Specifications or Specs. means SDecificationsfor Masonry Structures.

Code C and Specs. C refer to the respective commentaries.
The MDG is a first-of-its-kind document for the masonry industry and is a culmination
of
the efforts of The Masonry Society (TMS), the Councilfor Masonry Research (CMR), and
theAmerican Concrete Institute(ACI).TMS,
industry,providedthemasonryexpertise
the professionalsociety of the masonry
of their members to write the document. The
CMR, a consortiumof masonry industry associations, hadthe financial resourcesto fund the

A C 1 T I T L E + M D G 93
Obb2949 0 5 0 8 4 9 2 20T
Guides development. AC1 had the qualifications and resources
to publish the MDG.
The MDG should be a valuable reference to engineers, contractors, architects, inspectors,

building code authorities, and educators.The first chapters address materials, testing, quality
assurance, quality control, and construction methods, with reference to specific provisions
of the MSJC Code and Specifications. Following chapters on design illustrate applications
of Code provisions to the structural design of masonry. There are more than 80 numerical
example problems. A Code Reference Index and a SpecificationReference Index correlate
each discussion and design application example to a particular MSJC Codeor Specification
section.
The Guide was developed under the auspices of The Masonry Society under the direction
of John H.Matthys,Professor
ofCivil
Engineering and Director of the Construction
Research Center, The University of Texas at Arlington. Dr. Matthys provided guidance to
individual authors in development ofall
chapters,servedasmanagingeditor,
and
coordinator for the production of the document.

The production of Part I, General, was the direct responsibility of John H. Matthys.
The production of Part II, Materials and Testing, and Part III, Construction, was the direct
responsibility of the TMS Construction Practices Technical Committee chairedby Howard
Droz.
The production of Part IV, Design, was the direct responsibility
of the TMS Design Practices
Technical Committee chaired by John Tawresey.
The voluntary contributions of allprimary authors and reviewers are recognized. Each
section/chapter of the finished Guide is a meshing
of concepts of authors and numerous
reviewers. In addition manyof the example problems were developed

and refined by several
authors.
iv

Authors/Sections/Chapters
Dr. Daniel P. Abrams - Professor of Civil Engineering, University of Illinois, ChampaignUrbana, Illinois - Sections 11.2 and 12.3 on Pilasters
Dr.Subhash C. h a n d - Professor of Civil Engineering,ClemsonUniversity,Clemson,
South Carolina
Section 9.0 Introduction and Section 9.3 on IntrawallLoad
Distribution
Jefferson W. Asher - KPFF Consulting Engineering, Santa Monica, California
Load Distribution
ChristineBeall
- Lateral
- Computer Calculations for RCJ Hotel
Architect,Austin,Texas
- Section 5.1 on Submittals,Section 6.1 on
Preparation, Section 7.1 on Hot Weather Construction, and Section
7.2 on Cold
Weather Construction
WilliamBretnall
Gensert BretnallAssociates,Cleveland,Ohio
Chapter 8 onDesign
Methodology and Philosophy

Dr.RussellBrown
Chairman, Department ofCivil
Engineering,ClemsonUniversity,
Clemson, South Carolina - Section 12.1 on Columns and Section 12.2 on Walls
Mario J. Catani - Dur-O-Wal,Inc.,ArlingtonHeights,Illinois
- Section 3.5 on Metal
Connectors and Reinforcement

Howard Droz - Architect, Smith, Hinchman & Grylls, Detroit, Michigan - Section 6.3 on
Tolerances
- Former ExecutiveDirector,MasonryInstitute
Missouri - Section 5.2 on Sample Panels - Deceased 1992
Harry A. Fine

ofSt.
Louis,St.Louis,
A C 1T I T L E * M D G
Richard Gensert
93
0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0 5 0 8 4 9 4 O82
Gensert Associates,Sewickley,Pennsylvania
Chapter 8 on Design
Methodology and Philosophy

Clayford T. Grimm
Masonry Consultant, Austin, Texas
- Section 3.4 on Masonry and
Chapter 10 on Movements
Dr. Ahmad A. Hamid
- Professor ofCivil
Engineering, Drexel University, Philadelphia,
Pennsylvania - Section 13.2 on Shear Walls and Chapter 16 on Provisionsfor

Seismic Design
- Smith & Huston, Consulting Engineers, Seattle, Washington - Lateral

Load Distribution - Hand Calculations for RCJ Hotel
Edwin T. Huston
Albert W. Isberner - Consultant, Portage, Wisconsin
- Chapter 3 on Materials,
Chapter 4
on Testing and Section 5.5 on Compliance

Rochelle C. Jaffe
- Raths, Raths, and Johnson, Willowbrook, Illinois - Development and
BasicDesign
of theTMSShopping
Center, DPC Gymnasium andRCJ
Chapter 8 onDesignMethodologyandPhilosophy,
Hotel,
and Section 6.5 on Quality
Assurance/Quality Control Checklist

Dr. Richard E. Klingner - Professor of Civil Engineering, The University of Texas at Austin,
Austin, Texas
- Chapter 14 on Reinforcement and Connectors
Robert Kudder - Raths, Raths, and Johnson, Willowbrook, Illinois - Section 5.4 on Testing
Dr. W. Mark McGinley
- Professor
of Architectural Engineering, North Carolina A&T
University, Greensboro, NorthCarolina
- Section 9.1
Section 9.2 on Intenvall Load Distribution
vi

on BuildingExamples and
A C 1 TITLE*MDG
W. Thomas Munsell
93
0662949 0508495 T L 9
- MunsellAssociates,Inc.,Southfield,Michigan
- Chapter 15 on
Empirical Design
Dr.Max Porter
Professor of CivilEngineering,Iowa
State University,Ames,Iowa
Section 13.1 on Design for Shear in Masonry Components

John G. Tawresey - VicePresident, KPFF ConsultingEngineers, Seattle, Washington Development of TMS ShoppingCenter, DPC Gymnasium, and RCJ Hotel - Section
11.0 Introduction and 11.1 on Walls,Section
12.0 Introduction and Section 13.0
Introduction
Al Tomassetti - Masonry Consultant, Louisville, Kentucky
- Section 5.3 on Inspection and
Section 6.4 on Cleaning

Terence A. Weigel - Professor of CivilEngineering,University
of Louisville, Louisville,
Kentucky - Section 11.1 on Walls
- Professor of CivilEngineering,University
College Park, Maryland - Section 11.3 on Beams and Lintels
Dr.Amde
M.Wolde-Tinsae
Gary L Zwayer
- Wiss, Janney, Elstner Associates, Northbrook, Illinois
of Maryland,
- Section
6.2 on
Placement and Section 6.5 on Quality Assurance/Quality Control Checklist

Reviewers
To encourage input and acceptance of the Guide by the design communityand themasonry
industry as awhole,numerousreviewsduring
planned.Appreciation
the development of this document were
is extended to allreviewers for their voluntarycontributionsin
production of this unique document.
vii

A C 1T I T L E * N D G
73
Obb27q7 0508496 955
Review of the first draft of Part II, Materials and Testing, and Part III, Construction, was
conducted by a Technical Review Committee of:
- National Concrete Masonry Association - Herndon, Virginia

Mario Catani - Dur-O-Wal, Inc. - Arlington Heights, Illinois
Howard Droz - Smith, Hinchman, & Grylls - Detroit, Michigan
John Grogan - Brick Institute of America, Region 9 - Atlanta, Georgia
Dr. John Matthys - University of Texas at Arlington - Arlington, Texas.
Kevin Callahan
Review of the first draft of Part IV, Design,wasconducted
by aTechnicalReview
Committee of:
Dr. James Colville
- Professor ofCivil
Engineering
- University of
Maryland and
Chairman of Masonry Standards Joint Committee - College Park, Maryland

Ed Huston - Smith & Huston - Seattle, Washington
- Raths, Raths & Johnson - Willowbrook, Illinois

Dr. Richard E. Klingner - University of Texas at Austin - Austin, Texas
Dr. John H. Matthys - University of Texas at Arlington - Arlington, Texas.
Rochelle Jaffe
A review of the revised first draft was conducted by a Combined Review Group of:
J. Gregg Borchelt - Brick Institute of America
- Reston, Virginia - Representing
CMR
Dan Shapiro - SOHA - San Francisco, California
J. A. "Tony"Wintz,III
- Representing TMS
Wiss, Janney,ElstnerAssociates
- Washington, D.C.
Representing ACI.
Afinaltechnicalreview
of thesubmittedproposeddocumentwasconducted
by the
Technical Activities Committeeof TMS, the Technical Activities Committee

of ACI, and the
Technical Committee of CMR.
viii

AC1
TITLE*NDG 93 m Obb2949 0508497 891 W
A final editorial review of the entire Guide was conducted by an editorial committee of:
Rochelle C. Jaffe - Raths, Raths & Johnson - Willowbrook, Illinois

Dr. Richard E. Klingner - University of Texas at Austin - Austin, Texas
Dr. John H. Matthys - University of Texas at Arlington - Arlington, Texas
The staffof
theConstruction
Research Center (CRC) at theUniversity
of Texas at
Arlington was in charge of the production of the Guide in camera ready form, both hard
copy and electronic disks. Special thanks go to:
Barbara Wallace - CRC secretary for the word processing of the chapters text.
Debra Roberts
CRC staffandcivilengineering
student forproduction
of the
design example problems and coordinating production of all figures.

Finny Samuel, Titus Benny, and Asher Mahmood- students at UTA for production
of the electronic graphics.
Although this document has undergone numerous examinations, errors and inconsistencies
are sure to exist. The Masonry Society would appreciate the findings of such discrepancies
being brought to its attention.
John H. Matthys
Professor of Civil Engineering
Director of Construction Research Center
University of Texas at Arlington
ix

93
m 0662949
0508V98 728
Masonry Materials/Construction Team
Masonry Design Brain Trust

Photographer - R. C. Jaffe
X

A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93 M 0662949 0508499 664
CONTENTS
PART I GENERAL
1.
2.
FOREWORD ................................................
CONTENTS ...................................................
CODE REFERENCE INDEX ...................................
SPECIFICATIONS REFERENCE INDEX .........................
INTRODUCTION .............................................
NOTATIONS, DEFINITIONS, AND
ABBREVIATIONS
..............
iii
xxv
xxx
1-1
2-1
PART II - MATERIALS AND TESTING
3.
MATERIALS
3.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................
General Intent
3.0.1
3.0.2
Specifications-Preface and Checklists
3.0.3
Mandatory
Specification
Checklist
3.0.4
Optional Specification
Checklist
3.0.5
Submittals
3.0.6
Material Specification References
3.0.7
Material Specification Requirements (ASTM)
3.1
3.2
UNITS
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
................................................
3-1
3-5
Product Specifications for Clay or Shale Masonry Units

Product Specificationsfor Concrete Masonry Units
Product Specifications for Stone Masonry Units
Product Testing and Conformance
Product Receipt and Storage
Manufacturers Recommendations
MORTARS ............................................
3.2.1
Selection of Mortar Type
3.2.2
ASTM C 270 Mortar Types
3.2.2.1 Proportion Specification
3.2.2.2 Property Specification
3.2.3
Cementitious Materials
3.2.4
Aggregates
3.2.5
Mortars Containing Hydrated Lime
3.2.6
Mortars Containing
Masonry Cement
3.2.7
Admixtures
xi

3-11
A C 1T I T L E a M D G
m 0662949
0508500 Lob
3.3
GROUT
..............................................
3-17
3.4
MASONRY ............................................
Brick
Masonry
In
Compression
3.4.1
3.4.2
Brick
Masonry
Elastic
Modulus
3.4.3
Brick
Masonry In Flexure
3.4.4
Brick
Masonry In Shear
3.4.5
Concrete Masonry
In
Compression
3.4.6
Concrete Masonry
Elastic
Modulus
3.4.7
Concrete Masonry
In
Flexure
3.4.8
Concrete Masonry
In Shear
3.4.9
Grout
3.4.10
Steel Reinforcement
3-17
3.5
METAL CONNECTORS AND REINFORCEMENT

General
3.5.1
3.5.2
Steel Wire
3.5.3
Steel Sheet Metal
3.5.4
Reinforcing
Bars
3.5.5
Connectors
3.5.6
Corrosion Protection
3.5.7
Deformed vs. Smooth Reinforcement
REFERENCES
4.
93
............. 3-23
..............................................
3-26
TESTING
4.0
INTRODUCTION
.......................................
4-1
4.1
MATERIALS TESTING ..................................

4.1.1
Preconstruction
4.1.2
Construction
Testing
4-2
4.2
ASSEMBLAGE TESTING .PRISMS
........................
4-4
PART III - CONSTRUCTION

5.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
5.0
INTRODUCTION .......................................
5.0.1
Quality
Assurance
5.0.2
Quality Control
5-1
5.1
SUBMITTALS ..........................................
5-4
xii

A CT 1I T L E a M D G
0662949 0508503 0 4 2
5.2
SAMPLE
PANELS
......................................
5.2.1
Recommended Practices
5.2.2
Suggested Criteria for Construction
5-5
5.3
INSPECTION ..........................................
5.3.1
Purpose
5.3.2
Planning
5.3.3
Material Submittals
5.3.4
Inspection Files
5.3.5
Construction Inspection
5-7
5.4
TESTING .............................................
5-10
Testing as Part of a ConstructionQualityAssurance Program
5.4.1
5.4.1.1 Initial Rate of Absorption Tests
5.4.1.2 Testing to Verify the PrismCompressive Strength of
Masonry
5.4.1.3 Testing to Evaluate Mortar
5.4.1.4 Testing to Evaluate Grout
5.4.1.5 Testing to Determine the FlexuralModulus of Rupture
5.4.2
Procedures Useful for Inspection Programs
5.4.2.1 OmittingMasonry to Permit Inspection Within a Cavity
Wall
5.4.2.2 Fiber-optic Borescope
5.5
COMPLIANCE
REFERENCES
6.
93
.........................................
..............................................
5-18
5-20
QUALITY CONTROL
6.0
INTRODUCTION
.......................................
6-1
6.1
PREPARATION ........................................
6.1.1
Material Delivery, Storage, and Handling
6.1.2
InspectingSurfaces to ReceiveMasonry
6.1.3
Masonry
Units
6.1.4
Reinforcement, Connectors, and Accessories
6.1.5
Mortar and Grout
6.1.5.1 Mortar
6.1.5.2 Grout
6.1.6
Protections
6-1
6.2
PUCEMENT ..........................................
Mortar Placement
6.2.1
6-11
...
xlll

A C 1 TITLE*MDG
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.2.7
Obb2949 0 5 0 8 5 0 2 T 8 9
Reinforcement Placement
Tie
and
Anchor
Placement
Unit Placement
Grout Placement
Flashing and Weephole Placement
Movement Joint Construction
6.3
TOLERANCE ..........................................
6.3.1
Introduction
6.3.2
AC1
530.1/ASCE 6/S
602
Reference
6.3.3
Tolerance
6.3.4
Tolerance Examples
6.3.4.1 Mortar Joint
6.3.4.2 Masonry
Openings
6.3.4.3 VerticalExpansionJoints
6-25
6.4
CLEANING
............................................
6-31
6.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL CHECKLIST
REFERENCES
7.
93
. . . . 6-32
..............................................
6-33
HOT ANDCOLD WEATHER CONSTRUCTION
7.0
INTRODUCTION
.......................................
7-1
7.1
HOT WEATHER CONSTRUCTION ........................

Performance of Masonry and Mortar
7.1.1
7.1.2
Material Storage, Protection, and Preparation
7-1
7.2
COLD WEATHER CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Performance of Masonry and Mortar
7.2.1
7.2.2
Material Storage, Protection, and Preparation
REFERENCES
..............................................
7-9
PART IV DESIGN
8.
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY AND METHODOLOGY
.......................................
8-1
...................................
8-3
8.0
INTRODUCTION
8.1
WHATIS MASONRY.
8.1.1
Masonry
Units
XV
i

A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 93
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.6
m 0662749
0508503 915
Mortars
Grout
Masonry
Assemblages
Volume
Changes
Details of Construction
...................
8.2
STRUCTURAL ANALYSISANDDESIGN
8.2.1
General Requirements
8.2.2
Analysis
Considerations
8.3
LOADS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS
8.4
STRUCTURAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR MASONRY WALLS . . . 8-14

8.4.1
WallContinuity and Support Conditions
8.4.2
Vertical Loadbearing Walls
8.4.2.1 Types of Vertical Loads
8.4.2.2 Failure Mode
8.4.2.3 Effects of Openings
8.4.2.4 Gravity Stresses Resultingfrom Interaction ofWalls and
Horizontal Diaphragms
8.4.2.5 Engineering
Analysis
8.4.3
Shear Walls
8.4.3.1 Horizontal Diaphragm
Stiffness
8.4.3.2 Effects ofWall Proportions
8.4.3.3 Effects ofAxial Loads
8.4.3.4 Effects of Openings
8.4.3.5 Effects ofWall Placements
8.4.3.6 Effects of Interconnection of Perpendicular Walls
8.4.3.7 Effects of Location of Plan Center of Resistance
8.4.3.8 Wall Reinforcing Patterns
8.4.3.9 Engineered Design of Masonry Shear Walls
8.4.4
Progressive
Collapse
8.5
STRUCTURAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR MASONRY BEAMS

8.5.1
Beam
Behavior
8.5.2
Engineered Design of Reinforced MasonryBeams
8.6
STRUCTURAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR MASONRY

BEAMCOLUMNS ......................................
8.6.1
Beam
Column
Behavior
8.6.2
Engineered Design of MasonryBeamColumns
8.6.3
Interaction Diagrams
REFERENCES
......................
..............................................
xv

8-7
8-12
... 8-45
8-52
8-55
A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
9.
Ob62949 0 5 0 8 5 0 4 851 D
DISTRIBUTION OF LOADS
9.0
INTRODUCTION
.......................................
9-1
9.1
BUILDING EXAMPLES ..................................

9.1.1
TMS
Shopping Center
9.1.1.1 Gravity
Design
Loads
9.1.1.2 Lateral Design
Loads
9.1.2
DPC Gymnasium
9.1.2.1 Gravity
Design
Loads
9.1.2.2 Lateral DesignLoads
9.1.3
RCJ Hotel
9.1.3.1 Gravity
Design Loads
9.1.3.2 Lateral Design
Loads
9-2
9.2
INTERWALL LOADDISTRIBUTION .......................

9-49
9.2.1
Global Lateral LoadDistributionon Shear WallsinBuildings with
Flexible Diaphragms
9.2.2
Global Lateral LoadDistributionon Shear Walls in Buildings with
Rigid Diaphragms
9.3
INTRAWALLLOADDISTRIBUTION
....................... 9-56
General
9.3.0
9.3.1
LocalDistribution UnderConcentrated Loads
9.3.2
LocalDistribution of Concentrated LoadsActingonBondBeams
9.3.2.1 Hollow
Masonry
Walls
9.3.2.2 SolidMasonryWalls
9.3.3
EffectiveBearing AreaUnder Concentrated Loads
9.3.4
LocalLoadDistributioninMultiwytheNoncomposite(Cavity)Walls
9.3.5
LocalLoadDistributioninMultiwytheCompositeMasonryWalls
9.3.6
Local Lateral and Axial Load
Distribution
Single
in Wythe
Loadbearing Wall Systems
9.3.7
LocalDistribution of Lateral LoadWithin PerforatedShear Walls
REFERENCES
..............................................
9-63
EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 6 5
9.2-1
TMSShopping Center - Lateral LoadDistribution
9.2-2
DPC Gymnasium - Lateral LoadDistribution
9.2-3
RCJHotel - Lateral LoadDistribution - Hand Calculations
9.2-4
RCJ Hotel - Lateral LoadDistribution - Computer Calculations
9.3-1
TMSShopping Center - LoadDistributionWithinSingleWythe
Walls Under Concentrated Loads
9.3-2
T M S Shopping Center - Distribution of Concentrated Loads Acting
xvi

AC1
9.3-3
9.3-4
9.3-5
9.3-6
9.3-7
9.3-8
9.3-9
9.3-10
9.3-11
9.3-12
10.
TITLExNDG 9 3
0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0508505 7 9 8
on a Bond Beam
TMS Shopping Center - Effective Bearing Area Under Concentrated
Load
TMS ShoppingCenter - Effective BearingArea Under Concentrated
Load
TMS ShoppingCenter - Effective BearingArea Under Concentrated
Load
Moment in
DPC Gymnasium - Distribution of GravityLoad
Multiwythe Noncomposite (Cavity) Walls
DPC Gymnasium - In-Plane Lateral Load Distribution in Multiwythe
Noncomposite (Cavity) Walls
DPC Gymnasium - Distribution of Out-of-Plane Lateral Loads in
DPC Gymnasium - Shear Stress Distribution in the Collar Joint of
a Multiwythe Composite Wall Due to Out-of-Plane Wind Load
TMSShopping Center - Lateral and Axial Load Distribution in
Single Wythe Loadbearing Wall Systems
TMS Shopping Center - Distribution of Horizontal Load Within
Reinforced Perforated Shear Walls
TMS Shopping Center - Distribution of Horizontal Load Within
Unreinforced Perforated Shear Walls
MOVEMENTS
10.1 CAUSES AND CONSEQUENCES OF MOVEMENTS
. . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.2 DETERMINATION OF STRUCTURAL MOVEMENTS . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Probabilistic Concepts
10.2.1
Short-Term Movements Due to External Forces
10.2.2
Long-Term
Movement of Masonry
10.2.3
10.2.3.1 Creep of BrickMasonry
10.2.3.2 Creep of Concrete Masonry
Thermal Movement
10.2.4
10.2.4.1 Temperature Change in Exterior Walls
10.2.4.2 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
Moisture Movements
10.2.5
10.2.5.1
Brick
10.2.5.2 Mortar
10.2.5.3 Concrete Masonry
Freezing Expansion
10.2.6
Restraint of Masonry
10.2.7
10.3 STRUCTURAL MOVEMENT
10.3.1
Frame Movement
xvii

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
A C 1 T I T L E a M D G 73
0662749 0508506 624
10.3.1.1 Concrete Column

Shortening
10.3.1.2 Steel Column Shortening
10.3.1.3 Sidesway
Deflections of Horizontal Members
10.3.2.1 Beam
Deflection
10.3.2.2 ShelfAngleDeflection
Foundation Movement
Slab
Movement
Differential Structural Movement
10.3.5.1 Nonloadbearing
Walls
10.3.5.2 Loadbearing Walls
10.3.5.3 Loadbearing/Nonloadbearing Wall Intersection
10.3.2
10.3.3
10.3.4
10.3.5
10.4 ACCOMMODATION OF MOVEMENTS .....................

10.4.1
Design of Movement Joints
10.4.1.1 Sealants Used in Movement Joints
10.4.1.2 Control Joints
10.4.1.3 Expansion Joints
10.4.1.4 Construction Joints
REFERENCES
EXAMPLES
10.4-1
10.4-2
10.4-3
11.
.............................................
10-8
10-14
...............................................
10-22
TMS Shopping Center - Vertical Control Joint Location
RCJ Hotel - VerticalExpansion Joint Size and SpacingDesign
RCJ Hotel - DifferentialMovementin BrickBlock Exterior Wall
FLEXURE
11.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................

11.0.1
Organization of Chapter 11
11.0.2
Flexural
Masonry
Design
11.0.3
Direction of Flexure
11.0.4
Effects of Bonding Pattern
11.0.5
Flexure:
Working Stress Design
11.0.5.1 Unreinforced Masonry
11.0.5.2 Reinforced Masonry
11.1 WALLS ..............................................
11.1.1
FlexuralDesign of Unreinforced MasonryWalls
11.1.2
FlexuralDesign of Reinforced MasonryWalls
11.1.2.1 Initial Depthand Steel Estimate
11.1.2.2 Balanced
Design
xviii

11-1
11-10
A C 1 TITLEtMDG 93
Obb2949 0508507 560
11.2 PILASTERS ..........................................

11.2.1
General Description
11.2.2
Role of Pilaster in Resisting Loads
11.2.3
Coursing
Layout
11.2.4
Effective
Section
11.2.5
Flexural
Design Considerations
11.2.5.1 Unreinforced Pilasters
11.2.5.2 Reinforced Pilasters
11.2.6
Shear Design Considerations
11-15
11.3 BEAMSAND LINTELS .................................

Introduction
11.3.1
11.3.2
Assumptions
11.3.3
Basic Equations - Singly Reinforced Sections
11.3.4
Basic Equations - Doubly Reinforced Sections
11.3.5
LoadDistributionsonLintels
11.3.6
Beam Depth Determination
11.3.7
Deflection
11.3.8
Deep Beams
11-25
.............................................
11-42
REFERENCES
EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 - 4 4
11.1-1 TMS Shopping Center - Design of Unreinforced CMU
Nonloadbearing Wall for Flexure Only
11.1-2 TMS ShoppingCenter - Design of Reinforced CMU Nonloadbearing
Wall for Flexure Only
11.1-3 TMS Shopping Center - Unreinforced Wall Designfor Out-of-Plane
Flexure
11.1-4 DPC Gymnasium - Design of an Unreinforced Multiwythe BrickBlock Noncomposite (Cavity) Wall for Flexure Only
11.1-5
DPC Gymnasium - Design of an Unreinforced Multiwythe
Composite Wall for Flexure Only
11.1-6 DPC Gymnasium - Design of a Reinforced Multiwythe Composite
11.1-7
Wythe
Reinforced
DPC Gymnasium - Design of a Single
Nonloadbearing Hollow Clay Masonry Wall for Flexure
11.1-8 RCJ Hotel - Design of a Reinforced Clay Brick Lintel
11.1-9 RCJ Hotel - Unreinforced Retaining Wall Design for Out-of-Plane
Flexure
11.1-10 RCJ Hotel - Reinforced Retaining WallDesign for Out-of-Plane
Flexure
11.1-11 RCJ Hotel - Design of an Unreinforced Multiwythe Noncomposite
(Cavity) Brick-Block MasonryNonloadbearing Wall for Flexure Only
XiX

A C 1T I T L E r M D G
RCJ Hotel - Design of a Reinforced Clay Brick Nonloadbearing

DPC Gymnasium - Design of Unreinforced Pilaster for Flexure
DPC Gymnasium - Design of Reinforced Pilaster for Flexure
RCJ Hotel - Design of a Singly Reinforced Masonry Beam
TMS Shopping Center - Doubly Reinforced Masonry Lintel Design
DPC Gymnasium - Design of a Steel Lintel
RCJ Hotel - Wall Beam Design
RCJ Hotel - Coupling Beam for Flexure Only
RCJ Hotel - Design of a Continuous Masonry Beam
RCJ Hotel - Design of a Masonry Coupling Beam
DPC Gymnasium - Design of a Steel Lintel
11.1-12
11.2-1
11.2-2
11.3-1
11.3-2
11.3-3
11.3-4
11.3-5
11.3-6
11.3-7
11.3-8
12.
93 W 0662949 0508508 4 T 7
FLEXURE AND AXIAL LOAD
12.0 INTRODUCTION
.......................................
12.1 COLUMNS ............................................

12.l.1 General
12.1.2
Development of Interaction Diagram
12.1.2.1 Compression
Controls
12.1.2.2 Tension
Controls
12-1
12-2
12.2 WALLS ..............................................

Unreinforced Masonry
Walls
12.2.1
12.2.1.1 Unity
Inequality
12.2.1.2 Euler Buckling
12.2.1.3 Flexural
Tensile Stress
12.2.2
Reinforced Masonry
Walls
12.2.2.1 Interaction Diagram for Reinforced Walls
12.2.2.2 Typical Iterative Method
12-18
12.3 PILASTERS ..........................................

12.3.1
Critical
Loading
Cases
12.3.2
DesignConsiderations for Unreinforced Pilasters
12.3.3
DesignConsiderations for Reinforced Pilasters
12-42
.............................................
12-48
REFERENCES
EXAMPLES
12.1-1
12.2-1
12.2-2
12.2-3
...............................................
12-49
RCJ Hotel - LobbyColumnDesign
TMSShopping Center - Design of Reinforced Loadbearing Wall
TMS Shopping Center - Design of Unreinforced Loadbearing Wall
DPC Gymnasium - Design of Unreinforced Multiwythe

Noncomposite Masonry Wall

DPC Gymnasium - Design of Unreinforced Composite Masonry
Wall
DPC Gymnasium - Design of Reinforced Hollow Clay Masonry Wall
DPC Gymnasium - Unreinforced Pilaster Subject to Flexure and
Axial Load
DPC Gymnasium - Reinforced Pilaster Subject to Flexure and Axial
Load
12.2-4
12.2-5
12.3-1
12.3-2
13.
73 H Obb2747 0508507 333 m
SHEAR
13.0 INTRODUCTION
.......................................
13.1 DESIGN FOR SHEAR INMASONRY COMPONENTS

13.1.1
OverallPhilosophy for Shear Design
13.1.2
Unreinforced Masonry Shear Design
13.1.3
Reinforced Masonry Shear Design
13.1.3.1 Shear Reinforcement Not Required
13.1.3.2 Shear Reinforcement Required
13.1.4
SpecialProvisions for Diaphragms
13.2 SHEAR
13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
13.2.4
13.2.5
13.2.6
13-1
.......... 13-2
WALLS .......................................
Definition of a Shear Wall
Function of Shear Walls
Layout of Shear Walls
Analysisof Shear Walls
Flexural
Design
13.2.5.1 Unreinforced Shear Walls
13.2.5.2 Reinforced Shear Walls
Shear Design
13-10
.............................................
13-22
REFERENCES
EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 - 2 3
13.1-1
RCJ Hotel - Shear Design of a Reinforced BrickCouplingBeam
13.1-2
RCJHotel - Shear Design for CanopyBeam
13.1-3 RCJ Hotel - Shear Design of Continuous MasonryBeam
13.1-4
RCJHotel
- Shear Design of a Reinforced ClayBrickNonloadbearing Wall
13.1-5
DPC Gymnasium - Shear Design for a CompositeMasonryWall
13.1-6
TMS Shopping Center - Shear Design of an Unreinforced Wall Due
to Out-of-Plane Bending

9 3 H Obb2949 05085LO 055
DPC Gymnasium - Shear Design of a Reinforced Composite Wall

RCJ Hotel - Shear Design of a Coupling Beam
TMSShopping Center - Shear Design of a Reinforced CMU
Nonloadkaring Wall
13.1-10 TMS Shopping Center - Shear Design for a Doubly Reinforced
Masonry Lintel
13.2-1 TMS Shopping Center - Unreinforced Shear Wall Design
13.2-2 TMS Shopping Center - Reinforced Shear Wall Design
13.2-3 DPC Gymnasium - Shear Wall Design
13.2-4 RCJ Hotel - Design of Unreinforced Masonry Shear Wall for InPlane Lateral Loads
RCJ Hotel- Design of Reinforced Masonry Shear Wall for In-Plane
13.2-5
Lateral Loads
13.2-6 RCJ Hotel - Reinforced Masonry Shear Wall Design
13.1-7
13.1-8
13.1-9
14.
REINFORCEMENT ANDCONNECTORS
14.1 GENERAL ............................................

14.1.1
Steel Reinforcement
14.1.2
Connectors
14.1.3
ConnectionsBetween Intersecting Walls
14-1
14.2 STEELREINFORCEMENT ...............................

14-6
14.2.1
Requirements for Steel Reinforcement
14.2.1.1 Strength Requirements for Reinforcement
14.2.1.2 Corrosion Resistance and Protection Requirements for
Reinforcernent
14.2.1.3 Embedment Requirements for Reinforcement
14.2.2
Design of Steel Reinforcement
14.3 CONNECTORS .........................................
14-8
Requirements for Connectors
14.3.1
14.3.1.1 Strength Requirements for Connectors
14.3.1.2 CorrosionResistanceand Protection Requirements for
Connectors
14.3.1.3 Embedment Requirements for Connectors
14.3.1.4 Stiffness Requirements for Connectors
14.3.2
Design of Connectors
REFERENCES
.............................................
14-11
EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4 - 1 3
14.2-1 T M S Shopping Center - Design of a Straight Bar Anchorage
14.2-2 TMSShopping Center - Design of a Hooked Bar Anchorage
xxii

A C 1 T I T L E + M D G 93
14.2-3
14.3-1
14.3-2
14.3-3
14.3-4
14.3-5
14.3-6
14.3-7
14.3-8
14.3-9
14.3-10
14.3-11
14.3-12
14.3-13
14.3-14
14.3-15
14.3-16
15.
0662947 05085LL T91 D
TMS ShoppingCenter - Design of Anchorage at a Simple Supported

Lintel
Design of Anchor Bolts of a Shear Wall to Roof Diaphragm
DPC Gymnasium - Design ofWall
Ties in an Unreinforced
Multiwythe Noncomposite (Cavity) Masonry Wall
DPC Gymnasium - Design of Shear Wall-Floor Connection for
Composite Nonloadbearing Wall
DPC Gymnasium - Design of Shear Wall-Floor Connection for
Unreinforced Multiwythe Noncomposite (Cavity) Wall
TMS Shopping Center - Joist Connection to Loadbearing Wall
RCJ Hotel - Connection Between Canopy Beam and Column
Typical Reinforcing Details
RCJ Hotel - Connection of RigidRoof Diaphragm to Exterior
Loadbearing Wall
RCJ Hotel - Connection of Floor Diaphragm to Nonloadbearing
Wall
- Connection of Floor Diaphragm to Interior
RCJ
Hotel
Loadbearing Wall
TMS Shopping Center - Connection of Steel Beam Bearing Detail
TMS ShoppingCenter - Roof Diaphragm Connection to ShearWall
RCJHotel - Connection of Exterior Nonloadbearing Wall to
Exterior Loadbearing Wall
RCJ Hotel- Connection of Interior Nonloadbearing Wall to Interior
Loadbearing Wall
DPC Gymnasium - Roof Diaphragm Connection to Nonloadbearing
Wall
RCJ Hotel - Termination of FlexuralReinforcement for Continuous
Masonry Beam
EMPIRICAL DESIGN
15.1 HISTORY
.............................................
15-1
15.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
15-2
15.3 LIMITATIONS
...............................
.........................................
15-3
15.4 EMPIRICAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ....................

15.4.1
Materials and Specifications
15.4.2
Lateral Stability
15.4.3
Compressive Stress Requirements
15.4.4
Lateral
Support
15.4.5
Thickness of Masonry
15.4.5.1 Minimum
Thickness Criteria
15-4
xxiii

AC1
TITLESMDG 9 3
15.4.6
15.4.7
15.4.8
REFERENCES
0662749 0 5 0 8 5 3 2 928
15.4.5.2 Foundation Walls

Bond
15.4.6.1 Masonry Headers
15.4.6.2 Metal Ties
Anchorage
15.4.7.1 Intersecting Walls
15.4.7.2 Floor and Roof Anchorage
15.4.7.3 WallsAdjoining Structural Framing
Miscellaneous Requirements
15.4.8.1 Chases
and
Recesses
15.4.8.2 Lintels
15.4.8.3 Support on Wood
15.4.8.4 Corbelling
.............................................
15-13
EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . 1 5 - 1 4
15.4-1 TMSShopping Center - EmpiricalDesign of MasonryWalls
15.4-2 DPC Gymnasium - EmpiricalDesign of MasonryWalls
15.4-3
RCJ Hotel - EmpiricalDesign of MasonryWalls
16.
PROVISIONS FOR SEISMICDESIGN
16-1
16.2 MATERIALS
16-2
16.3 DESIGN OF MASONRY ELEMENTS
.......................
...........................................
16-3
16.4 DETAILING
16.4.1
Reinforcement
16.4.2
Anchorage
16.4.3
Minimum
Dimensions
16-4
..............................................
16-8
................................................
ClayMasonrySection Properties .................................
Concrete MasonrySection Properties ..............................
Conversion Factors .SI Units ....................................
A-1
REFERENCES
A
.......................................
..........................................
16.1 INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
XXiV

A-1
A-4
A-7
A CT1I T L E * N D G
93
0662949 05085L3 BbY 9
CODE REFERENCE INDEX
Code
Section
MDG
MDG
Pages
Code
Section
A2
A3
k3.1
k3.4
k3.5
k3.6
k3.7
k3.8
16-2
15-25, 15-35, 16-2
16-3
16-3
15-31, 15-33
15-35, 16-7
12-2, 15-35
11-10,
13-76,
13-82,
15-21,
15-25,
15-28,
15-31, 15-33, 15-35,
16-4
16-4
16-2
16-3
16-2
11-10,11-106,13-86,
13-88, 13-96, 16-6
11-10, 12-3, 12-57,
16-6
16-6
11-150, 16-4
12-3
16-7
16-7
13-67,
13-84,
13-95,
16-3
6-14
13-10
8-6, 11-10, 12-2, 14-3
3-1, 8-2, 8-11
3-17
6-16
4-4
8-2, 8-7, 9-2, 13-12
11-62
5.2
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.3
5.3.1
k3.9
A4
k4.2
k4.4
k4.5
k4.6
k4.6.1
k4.7
k4.8
k4.8.1
k4.8.2
A4.9.1
1.2.1
2.1
2.2
3.1.1
3.1.2
4.3
4.3.3.4
5.1
5.1.3.3

5.3.2
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.1.1
5.5.1.2
Pages
8-12, 13-12, 16-7
8-12
8-13
6-23
13-12
8-13, 11-162, 12-44,
12-49,
12-55,
13-63,
13-64, 13-68, 13-77,
13-91
8-11, 8-14, 8-28,
11-13,
9-134,
11-12,
11-24,
11-46,
11-49,
11-63, 11-68, 11-74,
11-77, 11-81, 11-84,
11-100, 11-102,
11-108,11-114,
11-119, 11-152,
11-162,12-24,12-28,
12-45,
12-50,
12-72,
12-93,
13-26,
13-27,
13-37,
13-39,
13-41,
13-44,
13-45,
13-47,
13-48,
13-73,
13-75,
13-80,
13-81,
13-94,
13-95,
14-19,
14-22,
14-25,14-29,14-31,
14-38, 14-40, 14-49
8-8
8-8
8-8
8-8, 10-22
5-11, 11-12
3-22, 11-118, 11-123,
11-155, 11-161
3-19, 5-14
Code
Section
5.5.1.3
5.5.1.4
5.5.2
5.5.2.1
5.5.2.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.4.1
5.5.4.2
5.5.5
5.5.5.1
5.5.5.2
5.6
5.6.1
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.1.1
5.8.1
5.8.1.1
5.8.1.2
5.8.1.2(b)
5.8.1.3
5.8.1.5
5.8.2
5.8.2.1
5.8.2.1(b)
5.8.2.1(c)
5.8.2.1(d)
5.8.2.1(f)
5.8.2.2
5.8.2.2(c)
5.9
MDG
Pages
Code
5-14, 11-64, 11-114,

12-93
3-22
8-11
10-3, 10-24, 10-26
10-3, 10-22
8-11, 10-3, 10-24,
10-26
8-11, 10-4
10-22
10-27
8-11, 11-41
10-2
10-2, 10-28
10-6, 11-26, 11-131,
11-136, 11-168,
15-12
8-51
13-12
9-72, 11-99
8-10, 9-101, 11-12
8-6, 8-9
9-61, 13-74
8-10, 9-61, 9-134,
11-71, 13-45, 13-74
13-39
8-10
9-124,
11-75,
13-74,
14-9, 14-20, 14-35
8-5, 8-9
9-59, 12-69
9-123,12-68,12-71
8-11, 9-127
8-10, 12-71
8-10, 14-9
9-60, 9-128, 12-72,
14-9, 14-11, 14-20,
14-35
14-11
8-53, 12-2
5.9.1.1
5.9.1.2
5.9.1.3
5.9.1.4

Section
5.9.1.6
5.9.1.6(a)
5.10
5.10.1
5.10.2
5.11.2
5.12
5.12.1
5.12.2
5.12.3
5.13
5.13.1
5.13.1.1
5.13.1.2
5.13.2
5.13.4
5.13.4.1(b)
5.13.4.2
5.13.4.2(c)
5.13.4.2(e)
5.13.4.2(e)l
5.13.4.2(e)2
MDG
Pages
11-10
11-10
12-49
11-10,
11-15,
12-51,
12-54, 12-55
8-51, 8-53, 11-7,
11-10, 11-21, 12-6,
12-10, 12-30, 12-55,
12-58
14-35
8-16, 11-15
11-108
11-116
12-2
11-37
8-17, 9-56, 9-57,
9-111,9-112,9-115,
11-37,
12-78,
15-30,
15-32
8-18, 9-58, 9-118,
9-120
8-18, 9-57, 9-58,
11-91, 11-139,
11-169,14-38,14-42,
14-44
9-57
8-9
9-112, 9-115
8-10, 8-51, 9-131,
11-71, 12-3, 13-70
8-10, 9-125
8-37, 11-12, 13-18
14-34
8-10, 8-15, 8-37,
9-101, 10-8, 11-12,
11-108
11-19, 11-113
11-19, 13-18, 14-5
8-38, 11-18, 14-34
8-38, 11-18, 14-34
A C 1 TITLE*MDG
73
m O662747
Code
Section
MDG
Pages
5.13.4.2(e)3
5.14
8-38, 11-18, 14-34

6-17, 14-1, 14-9,
14-10
14-18, 14-29
11-10
13-10
8-27, 8-28, 11-63,
12-82, 13-60, 13-74,
13-75, 13-81
12-82
11-62, 12-83
3-14, 11-3, 11-15,
11-46,
11-63,
11-65,
11-68,
11-74,
11-93,
11-100,ll-108,12-28,
12-82, 13-18, 13-59
11-12, 12-22, 13-6
8-28, 8-41, 13-2,
13-6,13-10,13-20,
13-72
8-43,
11-74,
11-93,
11-111,12-88, 13-39,
13-40, 13-60
8-11,8-42, 8-43,lO-8,
11-25, 11-94, 11-111,
13-5, 13-20, 13-41,
13-60,
13-73,
13-81,
14-21,
14-23,
14-25,
14-26
2-3, 8-16, 8-33, 8-43,
12-88,
14-22,
14-38,
14-40
11-13, 12-3, 12-45,
13-19
11-24, 11-32, 14-6
11-114
8-44, 8-54, 11-28,
11-49,
11-78,
11-84,
11-89,ll-102,ll-118,
11-123, 11-146,
5.14.2.2
5.16
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.l(a)
6.3.l(c)
6.3.1.1
6.4
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.2(c)
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.l(b)
7.2.1.1
Code
Section
7.2.1.l(b)
7.2.1.2
7.2.1.2(a)
7.3
7.3.1.1
7.3.1.2
7.3.2
7.3.2.1
7.3.3
7.3.3.1
7.3.3.3
7.3.3.4
7.3.3.5
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.2.1
7.5.2.2
mil

0508535 637
MDG
Pages
11-152, 11-155,
11-162,12-30,12-59,
12-93, 13-48, 13-55
14-40, 14-49
11-28, 11-125
12-30
13-10
8-27,8-53,8-54, 12-3,
12-13
8-28, 8-29, 8-54,
11-13, 11-24, 11-28,
11-32, 11-50, 11-78,
11-80, 11-84, 11-96,
11-115, 11-118,
11-123, 11-155,
11-161, 12-3, 12-45,
12-50, 12-59, 13-19,
13-63, 13-94
11-13
11-53, 12-79
8-50, 11-26, 15-12
11-123, 11-146,
11-155
8-50, 11-87, 11-123,
11-155
8-48
8-51
8-29, 11-25, 13-2,
13-6, 13-10
8-42
13-8, 13-19, 13-71
8-43, 11-90, 11-97,
11-115,ll-147,13-24,
13-30,
13-37,
13-43,
13-44,
13-47,
13-52,
13-54, 13-95
8-41, 8-42, 8-43,
11-97, 11-115, 13-24,
13-27, 13-30, 13-37,
13-43,
13-44,
13-47,
A C 1 TITLE*NDG
Code
Section
7.5.2.2(a)
7.5.2.3
7.5.2.3(a)
7.5.3
7.5.3.1
7.5.3.2
7.5.5
8.2.1
8.2.3
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.5
8.4.1
8.4.l(a)
8.4.l(b)
8.5
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.3.1(d)
8.5.3.1(e)
8.5.3.1(f)
8.5.3.2
8.5.3.3(b)
8.5.4.1(b)
9 3 W Obb2949 05085Lb 573
MDG
Pages
Code
Section
MDG
Pages
13-52,13-54
8-51, 11-91
8-41,8-42,8-43,8-44,
8-51, 13-30,13-31,
13-47,13-54,13-95
11-147
8-42,8-43,8-44,8-51,
11-147,11-149,13-31,
13-48, 13-55, 13-96
11-148, 11-149, 13-9,
13-21,
13-31,
13-48,
13-55
8-44, 11-148, 13-9,
13-21, 13-25, 13-33,
13-49, 13-55, 13-85,
13-96
11-91, 11-147, 13-24,
13-27, 13-30, 13-37,
13-43, 13-47, 13-52
13-54
3-24, 14-7
12-55
14-8
11-57,ll-128,ll-159,
13-25, 13-49
11-58,11-128,11-159,
13-25, 13-49
11-128
11-58
11-159
14-7
11-149,13-34,13-57,
14-13, 14-56
11-153
14-59
14-59
11-149
14-16, 14-55
14-8, 14-57
14-56
8.5.5.1
13-34, 14-56
13-57, 14-8, 14-14
14-56
13-57
13-57
13-34
14-57
8-8
15-3
15-14, 15-21, 15-,28,
15-31, 15-33
15-14, 15-21, 15-28,
15-31, 15-33
15-14, 15-23, 15-28,
15-31, 15-33
15-4, 15-15, 15-21,
15-29, 15-33
15-15, 15-17, 15-21,
15-22,
15-23,
15-29,
15-34
15-4, 15-15, 15-17,
15-22, 15-29, 15-34
15-4, 15-22, 15-23,
15-24, 15-33
15-18
15-5, 15-15, 15-20,
15-29, 15-31, 15-34
15-5
15-16, 15-18, 15-23,
15-24, 15-31
15-6
15-7
15-3, 15-8
15-6, 15-16, 15-18
15-9
15-6
15-10
15-10
15-6, 15-10
15-3
8.5.5.2
8.5.6
8.5.6.1
8.5.6.1(e)
8.5.7.1.1
9.1
9.1.1
9.1.1.1
9.1.1.2
9.2
9.3. l.1
9.3.1.2
9.3.1.3
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.5
9.5.1
9.5.1.1
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.6.3
9.7
9.7.2
9.7.2.1
9.7.2.2
9.7.3
9.7.5.2
xxviii

A C 1 TITLE*NDG
Code
Section
MDG
Pages
9.8.2
9.8.2.1
9.8.2.2
9.8.2.5
9.8.3
9.8.4
9.9.1
9.9.2
9.9.3
9.9.4
15-10
15-11
15-11
15-11
15-11
15-12
15-12
15-12
15-13
15-13
93
m 0662749

0508537 4 0 T
Code
Section
MDG
Pages
A C 1 TITLErMDG 93
0662949 0508518 3 4 6
SPECIFICATIONS REFERENCE INDEX
Specifications
Section
MDG
Pages
Specifications
Section
MDG
Pages
1.3
1.5
1.5.1.2
1.5.1.3
1.5.2
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.2.1
1.6.2.2
1.6.3
3-4
5-17
6-4, 6-37
3-18
8-9
5-14
8-9
5-11, 8-9, 12-93
5-16, 6-36
5-16, 6-36, 11-115
3-19, 4-2, 5-11, 5-14,
11-55, 11-115, 12-93
4-4
5-15
6-22
3-3, 5-5
4- 1
6-35
6-36
6-35
6-35
6-35
6-35
6-35
5-5, 6-35
5-5
5-5
4-1
6-36
6-36
6-36
4-2, 5-12, 6-36
4-2, 5-15, 6-36
4-2, 6-36
6-2, 6-6
2.1.4.4
2.2.1
2.2.1.1
2.2.1.2
22.1.3
2.2.2
2.2.2.1
2.2.2.2
2.2.2.3
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.3.1
2.3.1.l(a)
2.3.1.l(b)
2.3.1.l(d)
2.3.1.l(e)
2.3.1.2(b)
2.3.2.1
2.3.2.1.1
2.3.2.1.2
2.3.2.2
2.3.2.3
2.3.2.4
2.3.2.4(a)
2.3.2.4(b)
2.3.3.2
2.3.3.2(a)l
2.3.3.2(a)2
2.3.3.3
2.3.3.3(d)2
2.3.3.3(d)4
2.3.3.3(e)
2.3.3.3(f)1
2.3.3.6(f)
2.3.3.6(g)
6-2
8-9
3-6
3-5
3-7
3-11, 8-9
3-11
3-16
3-16
6-23
6-32, 6-35
5-8
6-36
6-36
6-36
6-36
6-37
6-4, 6-26
6-37
6-4
6-37, 7-3, 7-6
6-20, 6-37, 7-2
6-19
6-5, 6-19
6-5, 6-36
6-26
6-29
6-29
6-12, 6-18
14-22
6-20
6-12
6-18
6-22
6-23
1.6.3.2
1.6.3.3
2.1.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.2.1
2.1.2.l(a)
2.1.2.1(b)
2.1.2.l(c)
2.1.2.l(d)
2.1.2.1(f)
2.1.24g)
2.1.2.1(h)
2.1.2.2
2.1.2.2(b)
2.1.2.3
2.1.3.2
2.1.3.2(a)
2.1.3.2(b)
2.1.3.2(c)
2.1.3.3
2.1.3.4
2.1.3.5
2.1.4
MM

A C 1 TITLExMDG 9 3 9 0662947 0 5 0 8 5 3 9 282 9
Specifications
Section
MDG
Pages
2.3.3.9
2.3.3.11
3.1.2.1(a)
3.1.2.l(b)
3.1.2.l(c)
3.1.3
3.1.3.1
3.2
3.2.1.1
3.2.1.1.1
3.2.1.1.2
3.2.1.2
3.2.1.3
3.2.1.4
3.3
3.3.2.1
3.3.3.1
3.3.3.2
3.3.3.2(c)
3.3.3.4
3.3.3.4(b)
3.3.3.4(c)
3.3.3.4(d)
3.3.3.5
3.3.3.5(a)
3.3.3.5(b)
3.3.3.5(c)
4.1.2
4.1.2.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.2
4.2.2.2
4.3
4.3.3.6
6-10
6-9
6-6, 6-35
6-35
6-35
6-2, 6-6
6-3
5-9, 14-1
14-1
3-25
3-25
14-3
3-24, 14-9
3-24, 14-9, 14-20
5-9
6-6, 6-17
6- 16
6-15, 6-26
6-15
6- 15
6-16
6-16
6- 15
14-10, 14-20, 14-35
6-17, 6-18, 14-9
14-9
6-17
5-5
6-35
4-2, 5-16, 6-36
6-2, 6-6
5-16
6-8, 6-36
6-20
6-21

A C 1 T I T L E s M D G 93 m 0662749 0508520 T T 4
1
INTRODUCTION
Early masonry codes were totally empiricalas evidenced by requirements of minimum wall
thicknesses, maximum building heights, etc. The so-called modern empirical masonry code,
ANSI A41.1, has for years been the basis for the empirical design provisions for masonry
found in model building codes.
In the early 1960's, masonry industry associations began development
of a technologicaldata
base of masonry materials and assemblage performance through internally
sponsored research and testing programs.
or externally
The result of these efforts culminated in such
design standards as the Brick Institute of America's (BIA) Recommended Practice For
EngineeredBrickMasonryin
(NCMA)SDecifications
1966 andthe
National Concrete MasonryAssociation's
for Loadbearing;ConcreteMasonryin
addressed only selected masonry materials. In

Committee 531 published
a
1970. Each document
1970 American Concrete Institute (ACI)
report, "Concrete
Masonry
Structures
Design and
Construction" and in 1976 published Specificationsfor Concrete Masonry Construction(AC1
531.1-76). Both of these documents servedas the basis for Building Code Requirements for
Concrete Masonry Structures (AC1 531-79), which addressed only concrete masonry.
In the mid-70's The MasonrySociety(TMS)begandevelopment
masonry standard that addressed both clay and concretemasonry.
1-1

of a single structural
The TMS standard,
A C 1 TITLE*NDG
93
Obb2949 0 5 0 8 5 2 1 930
completed in 1981, served as the source document for the major changes to Chapter 24 of
the Uniform Building Code that first appeared in the 1985 edition of the UBC.
The masonry industry associations recognized the need for a national design code covering
all masonry materials. The American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) and the American
Concrete Institute undertook this activity in the late 1970's. An agreement resulted in the
ACI/ASCE 530 MasonryStructuresJointCommittee,formed
consensus standard formasonrydesign.
in 1978, to developa
The committeemembersconsisted
of building
officials,contractors,researchers,professors,consultants,andmaterialproducers.
developeddocumenthad
The
to meet the rigid procedural and consensusacceptance
requirements of both organizations. A code, to address design, and specifications,to address

construction,weredraftedforcommitteeballot
by 1984.
Final adoption of Code,
Specifications, and Commentaries by ASCE and AC1 occurred in October 1988. The 530
Building: Code Requirements for Masonry Structures is primarily directed
to the designer
and code enforcement officials. The 530.1 Soecifications for MasonrvStructures is primarily
directed to the contractor and inspector. Significant aspects related to these documents are
that:
1.
Brick,block,andcombination
ofbrick
andblock
are covered in asingle
document.
2.
Designisbasedonthepremise
3.
Acceptancehascomefrom
that allworkwill
be inspected.
the masonryindustry,engineeringorganizations
and model code groups.

This MDG and all design examples hereinare based on the allowable stresses for insDected
masonryconstruction.
Thereare no alternativeallowablestressesbecause
uninmected
workmanship is not permitted.

Seminars on the 530 Codeand 530.1 Specificationshave been conductedthroughthe
auspices of ASCE and the sponsorship of the Council for MasonryResearch (CMR) for the
1-2

A C 1 TITLEWMDG 93
0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0 5 0 8 5 2 2 877
past several years. The original joint ACUASCE530 Masonry Structures Committeeis now
under the auspices of TMS/ACI/ASCE and hasbeen renamed the Masonry Standards Joint
Committee (MSJC). This committee oversees revisions and expansions to the original 530
Code (MSJC Code) and the original 530.1 Specifications (MSJC Specifications). The first
revision of the original document passed public review of the sponsoring organizations in
1992. This document reflects those revisions.
Based on these activities, it becameevident
to TMS,CMR,
and AC1 that amanual,
handbook, or guide type document that specifically addressed the application of the MSJC
Code and Specifications with illustrative examples would be a tremendous benefit to the
industry. An agreement was made among TMS, CMR, and AC1 to address this issue. The
Masonry Society would writethe document, CMR would provide financial resources during
its development, and AC1 would review and publish the product. The result of these efforts
Guide.
is the Masonrv Designers
The Masonrv Desipners Guide (MDG) is composed of four major parts divided into 16
chapters. Part I, General, is administrativeandapplies
to all other parts.Background
information on development of MDG including author and reviewer contributions is given

in the Foreword andChapter 1 on Introduction. The Code Reference Index and the
Specifications Reference Index tie discussions and design example problem
procedures to
the appropriate MSJC Code/Specifications sections. Chapter 2 on Notations, Definitions,

and Abbreviations presents the MSJC Code notations and definitions with modifications
and
abbreviations found in
the MDG. Where appropriate, notations are defined within the
MDG text.
Part II, Materials and Testing, primarily addresses the Specifications provisions as related
to materials and testing. The Code dictates compliance with the Specifications. Chapter 3
on Materials examinesthe provisions for clay or shale masonry units, concrete masonry units,
stone masonry units, mortar, grout, masonry assemblages, reinforcement
and connectors.
Chapter 4 on Testing addresses Specificationsrequirements on testing frequencyand quality

1-3

A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93
m 0662949
0508523 703
assurance provisions. The material provisions during preconstruction and construction are
addressed along with assemblage testing.
Part III, Construction, addresses quality assurance, quality control,
and hot and cold weather
construction. Qualityassurance includes the administrative policiesand requirements related
to quality control measures that will provide the ownersqualityobjectives.
addresses the items comprising quality assurance including
Chapter 5
organizational responsibilities,
materials control, inspection, testing and evaluating, noncomplying conditions,

and records.
Quality control is the systematic performance of construction, testing, and inspection. It
consists of the operationsof the contractor at theconstruction site to obtain compliance with
the contract documents. Chapter 6 addresses quality controlby examining the Specifications
provisions for masonryconstruction
preparation, suchas:
materials, placement of materials,includingunits,
storage and protection of
mortar, grout, reinforcement and
connector; and tolerances. The MDG Chapters 5 and 6 deal with masonry construction, in
particular in light of quality assuranceand control provisionsas related to the
Specifications.
The Specifications contain some
requirements that arealways mandatory and others that are
optional. The latter become mandatory when required by the specifier. A compilation of
these requirements in the form of a checklist is given in MDG Table 6.5.1. The extent of
the quality assurance and quality control program
willvary with the sizeof the project.
Suggested applications of the Specifications QA/QC provisions to three typical types of

masonry buildings (TMS Shopping Center, DPC Gymnasium, RCJ Hotel) are presentedin
MDG Table 6.5.2. Chapter 7 addresses hot and cold weather construction.
Part IV, Design, basically covers the application of the Code provisions to the structural
design of different types of masonry assemblages (beams,
walls,columns, pilasters) for
different types of construction(multiwythecompositeandnoncomposite,singlewythe,

unreinforced and reinforced) based on the structural analysis of three typicaltypes of
masonry buildings (TMS Shopping Center, DPC Gymnasium, RCJ Hotel) for various load
conditions. These are the same buildings for whichQualityAssurance/Quality
recommendations are suggested in Chapter 6.
1-4

Control
A C 1 T I T L E L M D G 73
Chapter 8 on DesignPhilosophy
Ob62747 0508524 b4T
and Methodologygives
strengths, loads, masonry construction,
the background on material
and performance that have produced a masonry
philosophy of structural design. Loads and load combinations are covered. Significant time
is spent covering the structural behavior of walls under different load conditions; boundary
conditions and wall configurations. Basic beam behavior is examined along with the design
equations. Basic axial column behavior
is presented and the effect of the combination of
axial loads and bending is presented with Interaction Diagrams.
The design methodology
for each component type as found in the Code is discussed and referenced to appropriate
Code sections in this chapter.
With the basic design philosophy and methodology established, appropriate application of
the conceptsfoundin
the Code is accomplished by conducting structural analyses of
structures and presenting design examples.These structural application aspects are covered
in MDG Chapters 9 through 16. One of the unique features of the MDG is that the
applications of the Code provisions are based on the same three typical masonry structuresa one-story strip shopping center, a one-story gymnasium, and a four-story hotel.
Chapter 9 deals with structural analysis aspects
ofgravity and lateral load distributions.

the three basic structures - TMS Shopping
These are evaluated first in global terms for
Center, the DPC Gymnasium, and the RCJ Hotel. Next the evaluation of the global loads
into loadson orwithin individual components is considered. Example problems with respect
to globalgravityand
lateral load distribution,alongwithinterwall
and intrawallload
distribution, are presented at the end of the chapter.

Chapter 10 on Movements covers causes and consequences
masonry construction.
of movements as related to
Methods for determination of the magnitude of specifictypes of
movements are presented. The chapter deals with ways of accommodating the calculated
movement in masonry construction. Example problemson determining size and location of
control joints and expansion joints are given.
1-5

A C 1 TITLESMDG 9 3
Obb2949 0508525 58h
Based on the information generated in Chapters 9 (Loads) and 10 (Movements), design of

individualwalls,lintels,columns,
and pilasterscan be addressed inlight of the design
methodology in the Code.

Chapter 11on Flexure addresses the structural design aspectsof elements where flexure may
occur
walls,pilasters,
and beams.Bothunreinforced
considered. Design example problems
and reinforced elements are
detail the design procedure for elements such as
multiwythe composite and noncomposite walls, unreinforced and reinforced retaining walls,
unreinforced and reinforced pilasters, lintels,and simple and continuous reinforced masonry
beams.
Chapter 12 expands Chapter 11 into the flexural and axial load structural design aspects of
columns, walls,and pilasters. Columns are examined onlyas reinforced elements as required
by the Code. Walls and pilasters are addressed for both the unreinforced and reinforced
state.Designexampleproblems
from the three masonry structures illustrate the Code
methodology.
Chapter 13 on Shear presents the topic from the viewpoint of out-of-plane loads (Shear in
Masonry Components) and in-planeloads(ShearWalls).Exampleproblems,some
coordinated to previous problems consideredfor flexure only, show applicationof the Code
shear provisions.
Chapter 14 on Reinforcement and Connectors addresses strength requirements, corrosion
resistance and protection
provisions,
embedment
criteria,
and design aspects of
reinforcement and connectors.Numerousdesignexampleproblemsshow
not only
application of specific Code provisions for reinforcement and connectors but also typical
design methodology for several typical connections.
Chapter 15 on EmpiricalDesign
presents the background of the originalempirical
Hammurabi Code through the present empirical provisions found in the Code. The Codes
1-6

A C 1 TITLE*:MDG 93
Ob62747 050852b 412
specific criteria on restrictions, strength requirements, support provisions, and minimum wall
thickness are discussed. Aspects of bonding wythesand anchoring intersecting walls, roofs,
and floor diagramsare presented. Design example problemsrelated specifically to thethree
designated buildings show application of the empirical provisions of the Code.
Chapter 16 presents Provisions For SeismicDesign as related to masonry construction.
Seismic resistant design of masonry buildings requires provisions for ductility not generally
required for wind or other lateral loads.This
presents thosecriteria
chapter discusses these provisions and
of Code Appendix A that includesminimum
requirements for
differentseismic zones intended to provide proper performance of masonry structures

subjected to earthquake shaking.
1-7

Obb2747 0508527 359
2
NOTATIONS, DEFINITIONS, AND ABBREVIATIONS
2.1 NOTATIONS
A, =
AA =
Ast
A', =
A, =
A, =
db = nominal diameter of reinforcement, in.

d, = actualdepth ofmasonry in direction of
cross-sectionalarea of element
cross-sectionalarea of an anchor bolt, in2
net cross-sectional area of masonry, in.2
projected area, on themasonry surface, of
a right circular cone for anchor bolt allowable shear andtension calculations, in.2
area of tension reinforcement, in.2
area of tension reinforcement for balanced
condition, in.2
A, + A'*,in.?
area of compression reinforcement, i n . 2
cross-sectionalarea of shear reinforcement,
in.?
pilaster cross-sectionalarea without flange,
shear considered, in.

D = dead load or related internal moments and
forces
E = strain, in./in.
E,,, = compressive strain in masonry, inJin.
es = tensile strain in reinforcement, in&.
e = eccentricity of axial load, in.
E = load effects of earthquake, or relatedinternal moments and forces
E, = modulus of elasticity of grout, psi
E,,, = modulus ofelasticityofmasonry
in compression, psi
E, = modulus of elasticity of steel, psi
E, = modulus of rigidity (shear modulus) of masonry, psi
f = calculated stress, psi
fa
= calculated compressive stress inmasonry
due to axial load only, psi
fob
= combined axial and flexure masonrycompressive stress, psi
fb
= calculated compressive stress in masonry
due to flexure only, psi
fb,
= calculated bearing pressure, psi
fb
= clay brick compressive strength, psi
fbt
= calculated tensile stress in masonry due to
flexure only, psi
PC = specified compressive strength of concrete,
psi
= CMU net area compressive strength, psi
fg = compressive strength of groutdetermined
in accordance
with
AC1 530.1/ASCE
6TMS 602 Section 1.6.2.l(c) or 1.6.2.2(c),
psi
fm
= masonrycompressive strength, psi
f m = Specified compressive strength of masonry,
in.2
AI
AI
A2
b
b,
= wall influence area per ASCE 7-88, ft2

= bearing area,
in?
= effective bearing area, in.2

= width of section, in.
= total applied design axial force on an an-
chor bolt, lb
the transformed section at the
plane of interest, in.
total applied design shear force on an anchor bolt, lb
width of wall beam, in.
allowable axial force on ananchor bolt, lb
allowable shear force on an anchorbolt, lb
distance from neutral axis to extreme fiber
in bending, in.
compression force, lb
numeric coefficient in seismic load calculations, ASCE 7-88
distance from extreme compressionfiber to
centroid of tension reinforcement, in.
distance from extreme compression
fiber to
centroid of compression reinforcement
b, = widthof
b, =
b, =
B, =
B, =
c
c =
c =
d
2-1

A C 1 TITLExMDG 9 3 W Obb2949 0508528 295
psi
fi
= modulus of rupture, psi
fs
= calculated tensile or compressive stress in
1,
f, =
fsa =
f, =
fy =
F, =
Fb =
Fb, =
Fbr =
F, =
F, =
=
h'
H =
Z =
Z =
Z, =
I,
Z,
=
=
Z, =
j
kc =
k, =
ki =
km =
k, =
K =
reinforcement, psi
steel compressive stress, psi
brickmasonry ultimate shear strength, psi
calculated shear stress in masonry,psi
specifiedyield stress of steel forreinforcement and anchors, psi
allowablecompressive stress due to axial
load only, psi
allowable compressive stress due to flexure
only, psi
allowable bearing pressure, psi
allowable tensile stress due to flexure only,
psi
allowable tensile or compressive stress in
reinforcement, psi
allowable shear stress in masonry,psi
ratio of distance between tension steel and
compression steel to the overallcolumn
depth
effectiveheight of column, wall or pilaster,
in.
height of column, wall, or pilaster, in.
lateral pressure of soil or related internal
moments and forces
moment of inertia of masonry,in.4
importance factor,ASCE 7-88
moment of inertia of cracked transformed
section, in.4
effective moment of inertia, in.4
gross section moment of inertia, neglecting
reinforcement, in.4
moment of inertia of the transformed area
about the neutralaxis, in.4
ratio of distance between centroid offlexural compressive forces and centroid of
tensile forces to depth, d
ratio of thedistance between theneutral
axis and the extreme fiber in compression
to the depth, d
coefficient of creep of masonry, per psi
coefficient of irreversible moisture expansion of clay masonry
element stiffness, in."
coefficient of shrinkage of concrete masonry
coefficient of thermal expansion of masonry per degree fahrenheit
horizontal force factor in seismic
load
lk =
1,
1,
=
=
LB =
L, =
M =
M. =
Mb =
Mc*=
Mm=
M,=
M" =
M, =
M, =
M? =
n =
N, =
P =
P, =
Pl =
P =
p' =
Pt
Q =
R =
R =
Ri =
S
2-2

1,
calculations, ASCE 7-88

clear span between supports, in.
effective embedment length of plate, headed or bentanchor bolts, in.
anchor bolt edge distance measured from
the surfaceof an anchor bolt the
to nearest
free edge of masonry, in.
embedment length of straight reinforcement, in.
equivalent embedmentlength provided by
standard hooks, in.
horizontal length of wall, in.
live load or related internal moments and
forces
bearing width, in.
length of bearing plate, in.
maximum moment occurringsimultaneously with design shear for V at the section
under consideration,in.-lb
maximum moment in member at stage
deflection is computed
moment at balanced condition without
compression steel, in.-lb
cracking moment, in.-lb
moment as limited by allowable bending
compression stress in masonry, in.-lb
midspan bending moment of members
member nominal moment strength
moment of applied load with respect to the
centroid of internal compressive for
moment as limited by allowable tension
stress in reinforcement, in.-lb
moment due to compression steel, in.-lb
modular ratio of elasticity
force acting normal to shear surface,lb
design axial load, lb
Euler buckling load, lb
lateral load, lb
ratio of tension reinforcement = AJbd
ratio of compression reinforcement =
A 'Jbd
AJbt
fnst moment about the neutral axis of a
section of that portion of the cross section
lying between the plane under consideration and extremefiber, in.3
radius of gyration, in.
radius of curvature, in.
slenderness reduction factor
relative rigidity
spacing of reinforcement, in.
A C 1 T I T L E * N D G 9 3 H Obb2749 0508529 L21 H
S,
S =
S =
T =
T =
r;,
v =
W =
W =
W
y =
YI
z =
a,,, =
a+,,,=
a, =
0: =
A =
A =
2.2
which a masonry unit is laid.

Budding cy).icial - The officer or other designated
authority chargedwith
the administration and
enforcement of this code, or his duly authorized
representative.
CoZZur joint - Vertical longitudinal joint between
wythes of masonry or between masonIy wythe and
back up constructionwhich is permitted to be filled
with mortar or grout.
Column - An isolated vertical member whose
horizontal dimension measured at right angles to
the thickness does not exceed 3 times its thickness
and whose height is at least 3 times its thickness.
Composite action - Transfer of stress between
so that in
componentsofamemberdesigned
resisting loads, the combined componentsact
together as a single member.
Composite masonry - Multicomponent masonry
members acting with composite action.
Compressive snength of masonry, fm - Maximum
compressive force resisted per unit of net crosssectional area ofmasonry,
determined by the
testing of masonry prismsor a function of individual masonry units, mortar and grout in accordance
with the provisions of AC1 530.1/ASCE
6EMS 602.
Connector - A mechanical device for securing two
or more pieces, parts, or members together, including anchors, wall ties, and fasteners.
Diaphragm - A roof or floor system designed to
transmit lateral forces to shear walls or other
vertical resisting elements.
Eflective height- Clear height of a braced member
between lateral supports and used for calculating
the slenderness ratio of a member.Effective
height for unbraced members shall be calculated.
Head joint - Vertical mortar joint placed between
masonryunitswithin the wythe at the time the
masonry units are laid.
Heder (Bonder) - A masonry unit that connects
two or more adjacentwythes of masonry.
Load, dead - Dead weight supported by a member, as defined by the general building code.
Load, live - Live load specified by the general
building code.
Modulus of eZusrcry - Ratio of normal stress to
corresponding strain for tensile or compressive
stresses below proportional limit of material.
Modulus of r&t
-yRatio of unit shear stress to
unit shear stress for unit shear strain below the
proportional limit of the material.
Project Dawings - The drawings which accompany
= total linear drying shrinkage of concrete
masonry units determined in accordance

with ASTM C 426
section modulus, in?
soil factor, ASCE 7-88
tension force, lb
fundamental elastic period of vibration of
the building or structure, ASCE 7-88
nominal thickness of wall, or overall depth
of member cross-section, in.
thickness of pilaster, in.
shear stress given in Code 6.5.2(c), psi
design shear force, lb
wind load or related internalmoments and
forces
total dead load, ASCE 7-88
uniform loading, plf
distance from neutral axis to a fiber in
cross-section, in.
centroid of compression forces, in.
distan from centroidal axis of gross section, neglecting reinforcement, to extreme
fiber in tension
seismic coefficient, ASCE 7-88
masonry compressive stress, psi
stress in masonry at location of compression reinforcement, psi
steel tension stress, psi
steel compression stress, psi
change in length or deflection, in.
distance from the axial load to the centroid
of the tension steel divided by d
long term deflection factor
DEFINITIONS
Anchor - Metal rod, wire or strap that secures

masonry to its structural support.
Architect/Engineer - The architect, engineer, architectural firm, engineering firm, or architectural and
engineering fiim, issuing project drawings and
specifications, or administering the work under
contract specifications and drawings, or both.
Area, gross cross-sectional - The area delineated by
the out-to-Out dimensions of masonry in the plane
under consideration.
Area, net cross-sectional - The area of masonry
units, grout and mortarcrossed by the plane under
consideration based on out-toautdimensions.
Bed joint - The horizontal layer of mortar on
2-3

A C 1T I T L E x M D G
93 W Obb2949 0508530 943
Code or MSJC Code or 530 Code or ACIIASCE

- Building Code Requirements for Masonry
Structures (AC1 5301ASCE 5/TMS 402)
Code C - Commentarv on Building Code Reauirements for Masonry Structures (AC1 530/ASCE 5
/TMS 402)
CMR - Council For Masonry Research
CM - center of mass
CMU - Concrete Masonry Unit
CR - center of rigidity
IRA - Initial Rate of Absorption
LLRF - Live Load Reduction Factor
MDG - Masonrv Designers Guide
MOR - Flexural Modulus of Rupture
MSJC - Masonry Standards JointCommittee
N.A. - Neutral &is
NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association
PCA - Portland Cement Association
PCL - Portland CementIHydrated Lime
pg - pounds per squarefoot
plf - pounds per linear foot
QA - Quality Assurance
QC - lluality Control
SCF - Slenderness Correction Factor
Specs. or 530.1 Specifications - SDecifications for
Masonrv Structures (AC1 530.1lASCE 6/TMS602)
Specs. C - Commentary on SDecifications for
Masonry Structures (AC1 530.1/ASCE6DMS 602)
STP r Special Technical Publication
TMS - The Masonry Society
UBC - Uniform Building Code
Project Specifications for the construction of the

work and complete the descriptive information for
construction work required or referred to in the
Project Specifications.
Running bond The placement of masonry units
such thathead joints in successive mursesare
horizontally offset at least onequarter the unit
length.
Specified compressive strength of masonry, f
Minimum compressivestrength expressed as force
per unit of net cross-sectionalarea required of the
masonry used in construction by the project documents, and upon which the project design is based.
Whenever the quantity f I,,, is under the radical
sign, the square root of numerical value only is
intended and the result has units of pounds per
square inch.
Stack bond - For the purpose of this code stack
the
bond is otherthan runningbond.Usually
placement of units is such that the head joints in
successive murses arevertically aligned.
Stonemasonry
- Masonrycomposed of field,
quarried, or cast stone units bonded by mortar.
Stone masonry, ashlar - Stone masonry composed
of rectangular units havingsawed, dressed, or
squared bed surfaces and bonded by mortar.
Stone masonry, rubble - Stone masonry composed
of irregular shaped units bonded by mortar.
Tie, lateral - Loop of reinforcing baror wire
enclosing longitudinal reinforcement.
Tie, wall - Metal connector whichconnects wythes
of masonry walls together.
Wall - A vertical element with a horizontal length
at least 3 times its thickness, used to enclose space.
Wall, load bearing - Wall carrying vertical loads
greater than 200 lblft in addition to its own weight.
Wythe - Each continuous,vertical section of a wall,
one masonry unit in thickness.
530
I,,,
2 3 ABBREVIATIONS
ACI - American Concrete Institute
AIE - ArchitecEngineer
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers
ASCE 7 - AmericanSociety of Civil Engineers
Minimum Loadsfor Buildings and OtherStructures
ASTM - American Society of Testing and
Materials
B U - Brick Institute of America
2-4

A C 1 TITLE*flDG 93
0662949 0508533 A B T
3
MATERIALS
3.0 INTRODUCTION
Specification criteriafor structures designedunder the Code are written in conformance with
AC1 530.1/ASCE 6TMS 602. The Specifications encompass provisions for commonly used
masonry materials and the Specifications integrate provisions for construction
and quality
assurance common to these materials.

By direct reference in Code 3.1.1, the Specifications become a part of the Code and have
the same force of law as the Code when the Code is adopted by a local governing body.
Code 3.1.1 states:
"Composition,quality,storage,handling,
materials, quality assurance for materials
preparation andplacement
of
and masonry and construction
of
masonry shall comply with AC1 530.1/ASCE6TMS 602."

ThisMSJC
Code requirement dictates as aminimumcompliancewith
the MSJC
Specifications.
The variety and availability of materials producedby the masonry industry provides designers
with extensive options to satisfy structural, aesthetic, fire resistance, andother requirements
3-1

A C 1T I T L E + M D G
93
Obb29Y9 0508532 716
for construction.
3.0.1 GeneralIntent
The general intent of the material provisions of the Code and Specifications is to ensure that
products of acceptable and defined quality are used throughout the masonry construction.
3.0.2
Specifications PrefaceandChecklists
To assist all members of the design and construction team, the Preface (Specs. P3) and the
Specification Checklist (Specs.P5) identify those areas of the Specifications where decisions
regardingadministration
of thejob,materials,andsubmittalshave
to be made. The
Specification Checklist consists of three parts:
*
*
*
Mandatory
Checklist
Optional
Checklist
Submittals
3.03 MandatorySpecificationChecklist
Mandatory items required by the A/E are significant since the A/E designates the desired
level of quality and performance of the masonry.
A typical example of the Mandatory Specification Checklist

in Section 2--Masonry,2.2.1 and
2.2.2, Masonry units and mortar--alerts the A/E to:
"Specify the masonry units and mortar to be used for the variousparts of the project
and the type of mortar to be used with each type of masonry unit."
3-2

3.0.4
93
Obb2949 0508533 b 5 2
Optional SpecificationChecklist
The Optional Specification Checklist lists various items

that should be considered by the A/E
while preparing the ContractDocuments.
The decision to incorporate specificitems
depends on the level of quality assurance required or, where project
requirements may
necessitate, more specific information, suchas: bond pattern, mortar bedding, cold weather
constructionprocedures,etc.When
no decisions are madewhilerequiringcertain
specifications, the provisions revert to default requirements. Caution and care are required
to ensure the quality of the end product. Each project is different and decisionsfrom
previous projects should not be applied indiscriminately to new projects.
3.0.5
Submittals
The Submittals portion of the Specification Checklist addresses Specs. 2.1.2, Submittals.
When required by the Contract Documents, various submittals are to be made. These are
optional requirements of the Specifications.
Good industry practice requires submittals.
These submittals, after approval, become the
reference for quality control acceptance/rejection of materials and construction practices.

Submittals should be maintained throughout the entire construction period and be handled
in accordance with the Quality Assurance program.
Masonry units should be submitted whenever aesthetics are a primary consideration. Units
submitted should reflectthe full range of colors, textures,and finishes. Additionally, mortar
samples shouldbe submitted when coloredmortars are to be used. These submittals should
reflect the acceptable ranges.
When required, mortar material proportions resulting from mortar test results obtained in
accordancewith the property specificationrequirements
3-3

of ASTMSpecificationC
270
A C 1 TITLE*MDG 9 3 M 0662749 0508534 5 9 9 M
should be submitted.
3.0.6
MaterialSpecificationReferences
Materials standards are referencedwithinSpecs.
1.3. It is important that the specific
standard be used for acceptance or rejection of a given material, basing such acceptanceor
the standard.
rejection onconformance/nonconformance with requirements contained within
Product standards may contain provisions for Manufacturers Certification of Compliance
of the product. Such certification by the manufacturer provides an alternate to extensive
testing before product acceptance.
3.0.7 MaterialSpecificationRequirements (ASTM)
ASTM material specifications contain provisions for acceptance or rejection of a material.

The provisions are either chemical or physical or both depending on the specific product.
Product classifications are used to further identify the desired product from within a range
of similar products with differing performance characteristics. Acceptance without concern
as to product sub-classificationsresultsinconfusionunless
the materialsspecification
contains
default.
a
Intheabsence
the defaultbecomes
requirement. For example,ASTM
of specificdirection
C 270 contains both aproportion
the
and a property
specification for mortars for unit masonry. The A/E may select either mortar specification
but not both from within the standard. If the A/E fails to indicate the mortar specification
that will apply, the standard dictates that the proportion specification shall apply.
Material specifications are identified by designation number and the year given in Specs.
1.3. If a manufacturer supplies materialunder a standard with a different year, the designer
needs to examine the standard for variations from the required Code version.
3-4

A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0508535 425
3.1 UNITS
The A/E should select the desired unit based on compliance with
product specification,
including requirements such as aesthetics, strength, durability, availability, and such other
attributes as may be important.
Masonry units covered within
the Specifications includeclay or shale masonry units,concrete
masonryunits or stone. Providing the design criteria are met, individualunits selected
during design may be of varied composition and possess differing chemical and physical
properties. In addition to the design and serviceability criteria, the longevity and durability
of the unit in service and under expected exposure conditions must be considered.
3.1.1 Product Specifications for Clay or Shale Masonry Units
Clay or shale masonry

units
are available
with
varied
coring
and performance
characteristics. These units are covered by several product specifications per Specs. 2.2.1.2:
34
Structural Clay Load-Bearing Wall Tile
ASTM C 56
Structural Clay Non-Load-Bearing Tile
ASTM C 62
BuildingBrick(Solid
ASTM C 126
Ceramic Glazed Structural ClayFacing Tile, FacingBrickand
ASTM
C
Units fromClay or Shale)
Solid Masonry Units

ASTM
C
212
Structural Clay
Facing
ASTMC216FacingBrick(Solid
Tile
Units from Clay or Shale)
ASTMC652HollowBrick(Hollow
Units fromClay or Shale)
As indicated by the title of the individual specifications, the specifications address clay or
shale products consisting of brick, both solid and hollow, and tile, both loadbearing and
nonloadbearing. Ceramic glazed units are available as facing brick and tile and as solid
units.
3-5

93
Ob62949 0508536 3bL
These specifications for the units containrequirements addressing durabilityand appearance

when units are intended for use as facing components as well as structural components of
the masonry. For examplemostbrickused
requirements of ASTM C 216
for facing will be required to meet the
or ASTM C 652. The only difference between these two
specifications is the allowable percentage of void area. Under these specifications the Grade
classification addresses durability and the Type classification addresses appearance. Color,
texture, and size are not covered by the specification and must be specified by the
purchaser. Brick strength requirements in ASTM standards are for durability consideration.
Brick produced inthe US. typically have compressive strengthsthat substantially exceedthe
ASTM minimum values. The average compressive strength of brick in the marketplace is
in the order of 12,000 psi. Strengths needed above the required ASTM minimums mustbe
specified by the designer.
Acceptance/rejection of the product is based on conformance to the requirements of the
specification. The requirements for Clay or Shale Masonry units are listed in MDG Table
3.1.1.
3.1.2 ProductSpecificationsforConcrete Masonry Units
Concrete masonry
units
are available
with
varied
compositions
and performance
characteristics. These units are covered by several product specificationsper Specs. 2.2.1.1:
ASTM C 55
Concrete Building
Brick
ASTM C 73
Calcium
Silicate
Face Brick
ASTM C 90
Load-Bearing
Concrete Masonry Units
ASTM
C
129
Non-Load-Bearing
ASTMC744Prefaced

Concrete and CalciumSilicateMasonryUnits
3-6

A C 1 T I T L E r M D G 73
m 0662747 0508537
2TB
Common to each of the product specifications are classifications, i.e., Types, Grades, and
Physical Requirements. Additionally, the optional combination of materials, i.e., cement and
normal weight or lightweight aggregate, lime and aggregate, are covered within the material
specification. The limits on certain properties of the concrete masonry units vary so the
individual specification should be consulted.
specification. The classification and physical requirements for concrete masonry units are
listed in MDG Table 3.1.2.
ASTM standards include provisions for limiting the moisture content of block, depending
upon their shrinkage properties and the environmental moisture conditions (averageannual
relativehumidity)
at the job site. These provisions are structured so that similar
performance (residual shrinkagepotential)can
be expectedregardless
of the inherent
shrinkage properties of the units. Units with higher shrinkage potentialare required to have
lower moisture content than units with low shrinkage potential. Maximum linear shrinkage
is limited to 0.065% for these units, which are classified as Type I, moisture controlled units.
Type II units are classified as non-moisturecontrolled.
These provisions for moisture
content were formulated to eliminate the need for specifying shrinkage limits.
Concrete masonry units are typically manufactured to the minimum compressive strength
as listed in the ASTM standards. Where design requires higher strength units,
the higher
strength must be specified.

3.13 ProductSpecifications for StoneMasonryUnits
ASTMspecificationscover
an array ofbuilding
stoneswithcompositionsvaryingfrom
marble to slate. These are covered by several specifications per Specs. 2.2.1.3:
ASTM C 503
Marble
Building
Stone (Exterior)
3-7

AC1TITLElwMDG
73
0662947 0508538 L34
ASTM C 568
Limestone Building Stone
ASTM C 615
Granite Building Stone
ASTM C 616
Sandstone Building Stone
ASTM C 629
Slate Building Stone
These specifications classify the building stone by composition, density, and application.
The specification requires conformance to physical requirements including one or more of
the following physical properties: absorption, density, compressive strength, tensile strength
(modulus of rupture and flexural strength), abrasion and acid resistance.
specification. The classifications and physical requirements for
stone masonry unitsare listed
in MDG Table 3.1.3.
3.1.4 ProductTestingandConformance
Individual product standards reference the applicable test methods used

physical properties identifiedasrequirements.
Test methods of special interest to the
designer and the properties covered in each include:
Clay and Shale Masonry Units

A S N C 67SamplingandTestingBrickandStructuralClayTile
Modulus of Rupture
Compressive Strength
Absorption
Saturation Coefficient
Freezing & Thawing
Efflorescence
3-8

to measure the
A C 1T I T L E t f l D G
93
m 0662949
0508539 O70
Initial Rate of Absorption

Weight
Size
Warpage
Length Change
Void Area
Out of Square

ASTM C 140
Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units

Absorption
Weight
Moisture Content
Dimensions
ASTM C 426
Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Block

Drying Shrinkage
Stone
ASTM C 97
Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity

of Natural Building Stone
Absorption
Bulk Specific Gravity
ASTM C 99
Modulus of Rupture of Natural Building Stone

Modulus of Rupture
ASTM C 120
Flexural Testing of Slate

Modulus of Rupture
Modulus of Elasticity
3-9

A C 1 TITLE*HDG
ASTM C 121
93
Obb29Y9 05085YO 892
Water Absorption of Slate

Water Absorption
ASTM C 170
CompressiveStrength
of NaturalBuilding
Stone
The test procedures are delineated for each of the individual physicalproperties of interest,
pertaining to a specific product.
Test methods provide no acceptance/rejection criteria.
Acceptance/rejection criteria are contained in the product specification.
3.1.5ProductReceiptandStorage
With acceptance of the product, handling and storage
quality of the product. Basically, the units should
of the units on site
will affect the
be received and stored to prevent the
degradation of desired properties. See MDG 6.1.1.

Unprotected units and stone can be degraded both by allowing water to contact the units,
thereby altering their moisture content, and
by allowingground or soil to contaminate
surfaces, thereby altering the bonding characteristics and/or appearance of the units.
The degree of protection to be provided a product from the time of its manufacture until
the time of its use should be mutually agreed
to by the manufacturer and the purchaser.
Plasticwrapping that envelopspalletizedproductsprovide
an easysystemforproduct
protection.
3.1.6Manufacturers'Recommendations
Productmanufacturers
are inkeypositions
to learn of successfulapplications
procedures.Unsuccessfulapplicationsandprocedures
and
are also wellknown to them. In
specifymg product applications and procedures, manufacturers' recommendations usually

received in a product description, technicalsheet or reflected on a tag attached to palletized
3-10

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
Ob62949 0 5 0 8 5 4 1 7 2 9
units, should be considered together with past performances of the products and personal
experiences of the designer.
3.2 MORTARS
Mortar is the bonding agent that holds the individual units and connectors together to act
as a complete assembly.Mostmasonry
mortars are produced at the constructionsite,
though pre-batched mortars are available in certain geographical areas. The Specifications
address mortars prepared at the constructionsite.
By exception to Specs. 2.2.2 and to
ASTM C 270, the Contract Documents may permit the use of ready-mixed mortars or
pre-batched mortar mixes. Dry mortar ingredientsmayalso
be delivered to the job in
pre-batched silos whichare capable of producing highly controlled, on-siteautomatic mixing.
3.2.1
Selection of Mortar Type
The selection of the proper mortar coupled with a specified masonry unit to attain the
desiredmasonry strength and other performance characteristicsshould be basedona
knowledge of the units, the various mortar types available, and the compatibility of the two
components. No single mortar type or composition of mortar type and unit type is
considered appropriate for allapplications.Allowableflexuraltension
as afunction of
mortar type and mortar materials is given in Code Table 6.3.1.1. The compressive strength
of clay masonry and concrete masonry as a function of mortar type is given in Specs.Tables
1.6.2.1 and 1.6.2.2, respectively.

Specs. 2.2.2.1 requires the use of ASTM Specification C 270 on Mortars for UnitMasonry.
The mortar specification consistsof a proportion specification and a property specification.
When neither the proportion or property specifications are specified, the proportion
specification is the governing requirement. Bothspecificationsrecognize
four types of
mortar. Cementitious materials that can be combined in the production of the mortar will
involve portland cement, lime, and masonry cement. Ten individual mortar combinations
3-11

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93 W Obb29Ll9 0 5 0 8 5 4 2 6 6 5
are listed. To ease selection of the mortar type, ASTM C 270 contains an extensive
appendix that lists and discusses many considerations.
The A/E should recognize that the provisions of the proportion specifications of ASTM C
270 are based on performance of the indicated combinations of cementitious materials and
aggregate ratios. The combinations have been time tested.
The A/E should weigh the merits of the various mortar compositions and types with the
materials available within the project area. The following considerations are considered to
be good practice:
1.
Use the mortar type that provides the desiredphysicalcharacteristics; do not

use a higher compressive strength mortar type than necessary.
2.
Unlessdictated by compressive strength requirement, avoid the selection of
Type M mortar over Type S mortar. However, when masonry

contact withsoil,e.g.inretainingwalls,
isin direct
Type M mortar should be used
regardless of strength requirements.

Mortar shall be specified either by proportion or by property, but not by both.
3.2.2 ASTM C 270 Mortar Qpes
3.2.2.1 Proportion Specification - Under the proportion specification within ASTMC 270,
four mortar types are recognized. Composition of the mortar is based on the selection of
portland cement in combination with hydrated lime, portland cement in combination with
masonry cement, or masonry cement alone.
The proportions of cementitious materials(portland cement, limeand masonry cement) and
the ratio of aggregate to the sum of the cementitious materials are prescribed.
3-12

A C 1 TITLEsMDG 9 3
m 0662949 0508543
The proportion specificationgivesmorecontrol
5TL
to the specifier. It is not equivalent in
performance to the property specification, yielding higher compressive

strength mortars than
their property specification counterparts.
3.2.2.2 Property Specification - Under the optional property specification within ASTMC
270, combinations of cementitious materialsand aggregates are laboratory tested to establish

the proportions of ingredients which yield a mortar which complies with the specifications.
The property specification allows any combinationof permitted cementitious materials with
2-1/4 to 3-1/2 volume parts of damp, loose aggregate per volume part of cementitious
materials. Additionally, water retention testing is mandatory. In-situ mortar compressive
strength is not covered in ASTM C 270.
3.23
CementitiousMaterials
Cementitious materials used in

the production of masonry mortars include portland cements,
blended cements,slagcements,masonry
cements and hydratedlime.
Each of these
materials is covered by a material specification. Of the variouscementitiousmaterials,

combinations of portland cement with lime, combinationsof portland cement with masonry
cement, and masonry cements are the most common in masonry construction. Slagcements
are allowed when used under the property specification of ASTM C 270.
Individual materials possess certain desired characteristics that influence masonry mortar
workability. Masonry cements are now available as Types M, S and N. These cements are
special formulations addressing the needs of the masonry industry. In some geographical
areas, mixtures of portland cement and hydrated lime identified variouslyas being suitable
for the production of ASTM C 270 mortars, TypeM, S and N are available. These
preblended cementitious materials, thoughnot covered by an existing product specification,
provide the one-bag advantages common to masonry cements.
3-13

For masonry structural design considerations involving flexural tension,

the design allowable
per Code Table 6.3.1.1 is influencedby the type of cementitious material used inthe mortar.
Code 6.3.1.1 assigns lower allowable flexural tension values
for masonry that consists of
masonry cement or air entrained portland cement and lime mortar as compared to non-air
entrained portland cement and lime mortars. Type N mortar and masonry cement are not
allowed to be used in any part of the structural system in Seismic Zones 3 and 4.
3.2.4 Aggregates
Aggregates for masonry mortar are covered by ASTM C 144. This specification recognizes
the need for certain chemical and physical characteristics of fine aggregate used in
production of masonry mortars.
the
The specification recognizes natural and manufactured
sand, while requiring conformanceto grading, composition controls on deleterious materials

and organic impurities, and soundness.
The mostdesiredmasonrysand
is one that impartsgoodworkability
and strength
characteristics to the masonry mortar. Fine, round particles are desired, along with uniform
gradation to allow support of masonryunits after placement.Masonrysandsgenerally
possessfinegradationswhichwhenusedin
mortar facilitateshandling and placement.
However, with fine gradations, the ratio of paste to aggregate of mortar composed of such
aggregates is low, resulting in
greater extensibility of the mortar and lower compressive
strengths.
Acceptance of the sand, even if it does not comply with the grading requirements, should
be based on conformance to the specification using the waiver clause of ASTM C 144 that
requires testing in accordance with the property specification of ASTM C 270.
3.2.5 Mortars ContainingHydratedLime
Masonry mortars prepared using a combination of portland cement and hydrated lime have
3-14

AC1
TITLErMDG 93 m 0662949 0508545 374 D
performance characteristics dependent on the amount of the hydrated lime added to the
mixture. Low lime content mortars possess higher compressive strength; high lime content
mortars possess more desirable workability characteristics. These properties are influenced
by the composition of the hydratedlime.Normally,dolomiticlimesyield
more desired
workability characteristics than their high calcium counterparts.

Portland cement-lime mortars generally require high water contents and have higher water
retention characteristics,consideredbeneficial
absorption and cement hydration.
for satisfymgwater
demand for unit
The paste resulting from the combination of cement,
hydrated lime and water promotes the intimate contact of mortar with unit, thus enhancing
bond between the two components. Hydrated lime
hardens upon contact with air.
Thus
complete hardening of PCL mortar takes place over a long time period. This characteristic
aids in recementing small hairline shrinkage cracks.
During cold weather masonry construction, high water
contents of portland cement-lime
mortars makes them more susceptible to early freezing. For above normal temperatures,
dry conditions or while using highly absorptive masonry units,portland cement-lime mortars
perform better as their lime content increases.
Unhydrated oxidesin
mortar will hydrateovertime,causingmasonryexpansion
and
consequent cracking. ASTMC 207 gives the limits on the unhydrated oxide content of Type
S , special hydrated lime, and Type N, normal hydrated lime. ASTM C 270 permits the use
of ASTM C 207 Types S or SA lime. Type N or NA limes may be permitted provided tests
or performance records are acceptable.

3.2.6
Mortars Containing Masonry Cement
Manufacturing masonrycement involves blendingor intergrinding portland cement with filler

materialssuch
as groundlimestone.Air-entrainingadditives
are added to improve
freeze-thaw durability, workabilityand water retention characteristics. The portland cement

3-15

AC1
TITLErMDG 93
0662947 050854b 200
fraction of the masonry cement is a finer grind and is more activethan mixtures containing
the same ingredients but produced under different processes.
ASTM Specification C 91 recognizes three types of masonry cement, i.e., types M,
S, and
N. All of these masonry cements promote ease of mortar preparation at the project. The
single bag concept tends to reduce on-site variables during mortar preparation.
Masonry cement mortars, becauseof their intentionallyentrained air, require less water
than
portland cement-lime mortars. -The lower water content is beneficial during cold weather
masonry construction. However the lower water content becomes a detriment when using
very absorptive masonry units on hot,
low relative humidity days.
The information in the
Appendix of ASTM C 270 provides the designer guidance in determining the selection of
mortar for a specific use.
3.2.7 Admixtures
As indicated in ASTM C 270, the use of admixtures is prohibited, unless specified by the
A/E or the owners designated representative. This attitude is in keeping with the concepts
that admixtures should not be used indiscriminately, and
that proof of the suitability of
admixtures should be demonstrated by tests involving the materials under temperature and
relativehumidityconditionswhichpresumablyrequiretheiruse.Admixturescontaining
chlorides are disallowed by Specs. 2.2.2.3.
When specified, mineral oxidesor carbon blackmay be used to impart color to the mortars.
Specs. 2.2.2.2 delineates types and proportions of pigment in masonry mortars that may be
used. Using excessive amounts of pigments may reduce compressive and bond strength of
mortars.Providinglimits
in theSpecifications is an attempt to keep suchlosses to an
acceptable level.
The Specificationsimply that only job sitepigments are considered.However,colored
3-16

AC1
TITLE*MDG 9 3 W 0 6 6 2 9 4 90 5 0 8 5 4 7
cementitiousmaterials
are availablefromvariousmanufacturers.
147
If specified,colored
mortar must comply withthe property specification ASTMC 270 no matter what procedure
is used for obtaining the colored mortar.
Testing in accordance with the property specification of ASTM C 270 is recommended for
any mortar containing an admixture.Acceptance
of themortar mixturecontaining
an
admixture shouldbe based on materials tested under temperature and relative humidity that
will prevailduringuse.Considerationshouldbe
given to the effect of admixtures on
embedded materials, i.e., steel, aluminum, etc.

3 3 GROUT
Grout is a fluid cementitious mixture used either to bond adjacent masonry units, wythes,
or tobond the steel reinforcement positioned in the collar joint between adjacent wythesor
in cores of masonry units to the masonry.
Grout material and proportionrequirements
are specified in
ASTM
C 476. This
specification includes provisions for

both fine and coarse grout. Selectionof the appropriate
grout depends on thegrout space available inthe masonry; selectionof either fine or coarse
grout is controlled by the Code 3.1.2.
Fine grout is composed of one part of portland cement, O to 1/10 part of hydrated lime, and
fine aggregate, as defined by product specification ASTM C 404. The aggregate to cement
ratio is 2-1/4 to 3 parts per volume of cementitious material. Coarse grout is similar to fine
grout but contains an additional 1 to 2 parts per volume of coarse aggregate as defined in
ASTM C 404. Both fine and coarse grout should have a slump of 8 to 11 in.
3.4
MASONRY
The basic materials used in masonry assemblages include clay units,

concrete units, mortar,
3-17

AC1
TITLEtMDG 93 m Obb2949 0508548 O83 M
grout, and steel reinforcement. Masonry physical properties used by the designer in sizing
an assemblage or evaluating performance include compressive strength, flexural strength,
shear strength, and modulus of elasticity. Fire rating, accoustics, and unit size also must be
considered.
Masonry strength in compression, flexure, and shear is directly affected by many different
factors. Its strength willvary
depending on the mortar type selected, by themortar
materials, by the units used, and by the workmanship. The unit size as well as the direction
of loading, parallel or perpendicular to the mortar bed joint, affects masonry strength.
Specs. 1.5.1.3 requires that all masonry work be inspected.
Bond strength results are affected by the initial rate of absorption, texture, and the
cleanliness of the masonry units. Mortar water retentivity, flow, cement,and air content also
affect the plastic properties and the bond relative to strength.
3.4.1 Brick Masonry inCompression
Specs. Table 1.6.2.1 permits the assumption that for Types M or S mortar f, (psi) = 0.25
fb
+ 400, and for Type N mortarf, (psi)
= 0.2fb
+ 400.
Typically, the mean compressive
strength of brick masonry is about 40% greater than the values assumed in Specs. Table
1.6.2.1.
The mean expected compressive strength perpendicular to bed joints of standard modular
brick masonryat 28 days, built with inspected workmanship
and ASTM C 270 Type S mortar
without air-entrainment, may be estimated (3.4.1) as:
f, (psi)
= 0.283
Cf'), + 8,380)
Eq. 3.4-1
That strength is reduced about 29% by use of Type N mortar (3.4.2), 27% by uninspected
workmanship (3.4.2), and 10% to 20% by increasing mortar air content from 5% to 18%
3-18

A C 1 TITLE*llDG 93
m 0bb2949 0508549
TLT
(3.4.3, 3.4.4, 3.4.5). Other sources indicate little or no effect of mortar air content on brick
masonry compression strength (3.4.6, 3.4.7). Mortars without air entrainment typically have
air contents of 5% or less. The specification for Type N masonry cement (ASTM C 91)
permits air content of 22%, which may result in typical mortar air content of 24% (3.4.8,
3.4.9). Strength is increased about 6% by use of Type M mortar (3.4.2) and 22% by use of
3-5/8 in. high brick with
3/8 in. mortar joints rather than a 2-1/4 in. high brick
(3.4.10).
Other things being equal, compressive strengthof brick masonry is reduced a total of about
36% by use ofhigh
air-entrainment and uninspectedworkmanship
(3.4.1, 3.4.5). Brick
masonry in compression has a mean cracking strength of 47% of its ultimate strength (Jrn)
with a coefficientof variation of 15% (3.4.11). Frequent application and withdrawal of load
may cause fatigue and strength reduction, and may therefore increase cracking probability
(3.4.12).
3.4.2 BrickMasonry ElasticModulus
Masonry elastic modulus in compression is rather constant over the stress range from 5%
to 33% of the masonry's ultimate strength. Over that stress range the mean chord modulus
of elasticity of solid brick masonry with a prism aspect ratio of five is 464 fm (psi) with a
standard deviation of 185 fm (psi) (3.4.13). E, is reduced about 24% when stress is parallel
to bed joints (3.4.14). E,,, and fm may be determined in accordance with Code 5.5.1.2 and
Specs. 1.6.3.
Code Table 5.5.1.2 states that with Type N mortar the elastic modulus of clay masonry can
be taken as E,,,(psi x 106)= 0.20 [(f',/lOOO)
+ 21; with Type S mortar &(psi
[(f'b/1000)+ 1.61; and with Type M mortar E,,, (psi x 106) = 0.30 [(f',/~ooO)
x 106) = 0.25
+ 1.331.
3.43 Brick Masonry inFlexure
Flexural cracks in masonry form primarily at the unit-mortar interface. Resistance to such
cracks depends on the tensile bond strength of the unit-mortar combination. Bond strength
3-19

A C 1 TITLE*flDG
93
m 0662949
0508550 731
is an important physical property of masonry, because higher bond strength reduces cracking,
leaking, staining, and spalling. Bond strength is a function
of:
l.
Initial rate of absorption,texture,andcleanliness
2.
Mortar waterretentivity,flow,
3.
Quality of workmanship.
In somecasestheallowablestress
of brick;
cement andaircontent;
and
inflexuraltensionwithnonair-entrainedportland
cement-lime mortars is 100% greater than for masonry cement or air-entrained portland
cement-lime mortar, but averages about 56% higher. The higher bond strength achieved by
the use of nonair-entrainedportlandcement-lime
mortar is indicated in Code Table
6.3.1.1.
The 28-day flexural strength of brick masonry walls built with ASTM C 270, Type S , PCL,
non air-entrained mortar, and inspected workmanship, with stress perpendicular
joints, has a
mean value of 140 psi with a
accordancewithASTM
to bed
standard deviation of 31 psi, when tested in
E 72. Wallswith Type M mortar are about 10% stronger in
flexure. With Type N mortar, strength is reduced about 23% (3.4.2). Increasing air content
reduces flexural bond strength
(3.4.15, 3.4.16). Uninspected workmanship reduces mean
strength by 23% (3.4.2). Other things being equal, the use of Type N rather than Type S
mortar, of air content of 18%,and of uninspected workmanship, typically collectively reduce
flexural strength about 60%. For 4 in. wythes of standard modular brick, flexural strength
is about 3.7 times greater when stress is parallel rather than perpendicular to bed joints.
The Code allowable stresses are based on inspected workmanship.
The Code makes no
provisions for allowable stresses for uninspected construction.

The first crackin brick masonry in flexure occursat about 80% of ultimate strength. Out-ofplane cracking occursat a deflectionof about 0.05% of wall span (Z/2,000),with a coefficient
of variation of 26% (3.4.2).

3-20

A C 1 TITLExMDG 9 3
m 0662749
0 5 0 8 5 5 1 678
3.4.4 Brick Masonry inShear
(shear modulus) E, is about 40% of E,.
The modulus ofrigidity
In the absence of
compressive stress the ultimate shear strength of brick masonry can be approximated as
follows with a coefficient of variation of about 30%:
fsb
(psi)
40 esp
(A]
1,780
Eq. 3.4-2
ConcreteMasonryinCompression
3.4.5
Compressive strengthof concrete masonryis a functionof unit compressive strength,mortar

type, stress direction, and workmanship. For ASTM C 270 Type M or S non air-entrained
mortars, stress perpendicular to bed joints, and inspected workmanship, the mean 28-day
compressive strength on the net area of a standard prism of concrete masonry
(Jm)
has an
estimated mean value of:
fm
(psi) = pa - 576
Eq. 3.4-3
Strength is reduced about 25% for Type N mortar, 35% for uninspected workmanship,10%
by increasing air content from 5% to 18%, and 25% for stress parallel to bed joints (3.4.17,
3.4.18,3.4.19,3.4.20,3.4.21,3.4.22,3.4.23).
inspected
workmanship.
The Codeallowablestresses
The Code
makes
are based on
no provision
for
allowable
stresses
for
uninspected construction.
Specs. Table 1.6.2.2 permits the assumption that for Types M or S mortar fm (psi)
fa
+ 391 and for Type
N mortar fm (psi)
0.555
0.508 fa( 396. Typically the compressive
strength of concrete masonry is about equal to the values assumed in Specs. Table 1.6.2.2.
3-21

3.4.6ConcreteMasonryElastic
Modulus
The mean chord modulus of elasticity of ungrouted concrete masonry with a prism aspect
ratio of two is 615
fm
(psi) with a standard deviation of 365
fm
(psi)based
on 374
measurements (3.4.13).
3.4.7ConcreteMasonryinFlexure
Concretemasonrywalls
28 daysoldconstructedwithhollowConcreteMasonryUnits
(CMU) with ASTM Type S mortar, inspected workmanshipand stress perpendicular to bed
joints has an estimated mean flexural tensile strengthof 76 psi with a standard deviation of
about 12 psi (3.4.13). Strength is reduced 21% by use of Type N mortar (3.4.24). High air
content associated withthe use of masonry cement and air-entrainment in portland cementlime mortars reduces flexural strength about 50% (3.4.15). Strength is increased by 105%
by the use of solid units instead of hollow units for flexure normal to bed joints (3.4.25).
Strength is more than doubled when bending stress acts parallel rather than perpendicular
to bed joints. Deflection at flexural cracking is about 0.036% of wall span (1/2800).
3.4.8ConcreteMasonry
in Shear
The mean shear stress at first crack in concrete masonry
is about 64% of the ultimate
compressive strength, with a coefficient of variation of 25%.
3.4.9
Grout
Code 5.5.1.4 gives the modulus of elasticity of grout as 500 fr
3.4.10 Steel Reinforcement

The modulus of elasticity of steel reinforcement, per Code 5.5.1.1, is taken as 29,000 ksi.
3-22

AC1
3.5
3.5.1
T I T L E x M D G 93 m 0662949 0508553 440 m
METALCONNECTORSANDREINFORCEMENT
General
Connectorsused
for modernmasonryconstructioninNorthAmerica
are allmetallic.
Connectors can be made from wire, sheet metal or structural steel shapes. MDG Table
3.5.1 indicates the majority of the metals used in masonry.

3.5.2
Steel Wire
Steel wire used for reinforcement or connectors is cold drawn wire. Wire must conform
to
the requirements of ASTMA 82. Thistype of wireusually does not have a verywell
definedyieldpoint.Yieldstrengthisgenerallydefined
as the stress at an extension of
O.OOSin./in.of gage length. In addition, ASTM A 82 specifies a minimum amount of area

reduction at the point of rupture to evaluateductility.
See MDG Table 3.5.2 for wire
properties.
Stainless steel wire is nickel-chromiumsteel manufactured in accordance with ASTMA 580
and is annealed in the manufacturingprocess.Annealednickel-chromiumsteels
austenitic and as a result are non-magnetic. This is
applications reinforcement in masonry walls
are
an important property since in some
is undesirable due to its effect on magnetic
fields created by medical diagnostic equipment and some military equipment.
3.53 Steel Sheet Metal

Sheet metal used for connectors is made from either cold-rolled carbon steel conforming to
ASTM A 366 and galvanizedinaccordancewith
ASTM A 525, or from stainless steel
conforming to ASTM A 167 Type 304. See MDG Table 3.5.3 for sheet metal sizes and
weights. The colddrawncarbon
steel is not as ductile as the annealed stainless steel
material.
3-23

m 0662749
0 5 0 8 5 5 4 387 W
3.5.4 Reinforcing Bars
Reinforcing bars are the same as used in reinforced concrete work. The bars can conform
to a number of ASTM Specifications (A 615, A 616, A 617, and A 706) depending on the
materialstrength(grade)
orother
properties desired. A majordistinctionbetween
reinforcing bars used in masonry and concrete is the limitation on size of bars for masonry
to #11 as stated in Code 8.2.1, and the limitation of the maximum yield strength that is
obtained with Grade 60 reinforcement. ASTM A 706 should be specified when controlled
tensile properties or controlled chemical composition for weldability, or both are required.
See MDG Table 3.5.4 for reinforcing bar sizes.
3.5.5 Connectors
Structural steel connectors such as those used
to support stone work, or as strap ties at
intersecting walls are required to conform to ASTM A 36. This is the steel typically used
throughout the industry.
3.5.6 CorrosionProtection
All steel except reinforcing bars and wire fabric is required to be corrosion protected. This
can be accomplished by galvanizing (Specs. 3.2.1.4) or by the use of Type 304 stainless steel
(Specs. 3.2.1.3). Galvanizing must be by hot dipping. Electro-galvanizing is not permitted.
The amount of zinc coating required on the galvanized product varies in accordance with
the exposure (exterior vs. interior) and the amount of protection afforded by the mortar.
Three different conditions of galvanizing are specified.
For metal in interior walls, the galvanizing results in0.1 oz of zinc per sq ft of surface area.
For sheet metal it amounts to 0.6 oz of zinc per sq ft of area (0.3 oz on each side). For
and hence there
ASTM A 525 and A 641 the metal is normally galvanized before fabrication
is no zinc coating on sheared ends, at holes or atwelds. Also since the metal is usually bent
3-24

A C 1 T I T L E S M D G 93
Obb2949 0508555 213
during fabrication, the thickness of zinc coating is limited to prevent flaking when metal
forming takes place.
For exterior walls, sheet metal ties and wire ties mustbe "hot dipped" galvanized per ASTM
A 153. If galvanizing is performed after a part is fabricated, the sheared edges and welds
are coated with zinc.
Galvanic action can occur whenever dissimilarmetals are in contact with each other. Many
timesconditionsexist
where an A/E may want to usedissimilar metals together. The
severity of thisgalvanic
action depends on the relativeposition
electrochemical series.
See MDG Table 3.5.5(3.5.1).
of the metals in the
In somecases
(for example,
aluminum and structural steel), the possibility of galvanicaction is serious enough to warrant
use of an insulating separator between the two materials. In other cases (for example, steels
withslightly
different alloy contents), galvanicaction
is theoreticallypossible
but not
sufficiently serious to warrant the use of insulating separators.

3.5.7
Deformed vs. SmoothReinforcement
All bar reinforcement is required to be deformed per Specs. 3.2.1.1.1. There can be no
confusion for reinforcing bars since the standards are clearly defined and virtuallyall
reinforcing barsare
deformed. This is not the case for wire products. Thereare
specifications for deformations in wire used to make deformed mesh (ASTM A 496) but
there are no standards for deformations of wire used to make joint reinforcement. As a
result, Specs. 3.2.1.1.2 contains special requirements for wire deformations in joint
reinforcement. It is also important to note that reinforcing rods are hot rolled to form
protrusions or lugs, but wire is cold formed by rolling indentations into it.
Wire fabric isallowed
tobe used for principal reinforcement of masonry walls. The
application of this wire fabric would be in multiwythe walls which have continuous grout
space between masonry wythes. When this material is used it must conform to eitherASTM
3-25

A C 1 TITLE*MDG 93
0662949 0 5 0 8 5 5 6 I S T
A 185 or A 497. Welded wire fabric of plain wire is acceptable since wire fabric derives its
bond from the grip of the cross-wires in the grout.
REFERENCES
3.4.1 National Testing Program, Brick Institute of America, October 1964, pp. 5-16.
3.4.2
Gross, J. G., R. D. Dickers, andJ. C. Grogan, Recommended Practice for Engineered

Brick Masonry, Brick Institute of America, McLean, VA, November 1969, pp. 252262.
3.4.3
Allen, M.H. and R.B. Taylor, "Compressive, Flexural, and Diagonal Tensile Testing
of SmallScaleFour-inchBrickMasonrySpecimens,"Progress
Report 1, Brick
Institute of America, McLean, VA, October 1964.

3.4.4 Allen,M.H.and
C.B. MonkJr., Tompressive andTransverseStrengthTests
Eight-InchBrickWalls,"Research
Report No. 10, BrickInstitute
of
of America,
McLean, VA, October 1966.

3.4.5
Davison,J.I.,"EffectofAir
Content on Durability of Cement-LimeMortars,"
Durabilitv of Building Materials, Elsevier Scientific PublishingCo., Vol. 1, 1982, pp.

23-34.
3.4.6
Fishburn, C.C., "Effect of Mortar Properties on the Strength ofMasonry,"U.S.

National Bureau Standards, Monograph 36, November 1961, pp. 1-45.
3.4.7
Matthys, J.H., Tonventional Masonry Mortar Investigation,"

National
Lime
Association, August 1988.
Current
3.4.8 Huizer, A., M.A. Ward, and H. Mustead, "Field and Laboratory Study Using
and Proposed Procedure For Testing Masonry Mortar," Masonry: Past and Present,
ASTM STP 589, American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA, 1975,
PP. 107-122.
3.4.9
Dubovoy, V.S. and J.W. Ribar, "Masonry Cements
- A Laboratory Investigation,"
Construction Technology Laboratories Inc., Skokie, IL, January 1989, pp 9 and 12.
3.4.10 Grimm, C.T. and J.T. Houston, "Effect ofBrick Height on Masonry Compressive
Strength," Journal of Materials,AmericanSocietyforTesting
3-26

and Materials,
A C 1 TITLElrMDG 9 3
0662949 0508557 O96
Philadelphia, PA, September 1972, Vol. 7, No. 2, pp. 388-392

3.4.11 Grimm, C.T. and C. Fok, "BrickMasonryStrength
at FirstCrack,Masonry
International, University of Edinburgh, Edinburgh, Scotland, UK,Vol. 1, No. 2, July

1984, PP. 18-23.
3.4.12 Abrams, D. P., J. L. Noland, and R. H. Atkinson, "Response of Clay-Unit Masonry
To Repeated CompressiveForces,"Proceedings
Masonry
Conference,
Brick
Development
of the 7th International Brick
Research Institute,
University
of
Melbourne, Australia, February, 1985, p. 565.

3.4.13 Atkinson,R.
H. and G. G. Yan,AStatisticalStudy
of MasonryDeformability,
Atkinson-Noland & Associates, Boulder, CO, February 1990, pp. 20-21.

3.4.14 "Testing forEngineered Brick MasonryDetermination of Allowable Design Stresses,"
Technical Notes on Brick Construction, #39A, Brick Institute
of America, Reston,
VA, July/August, 1975.

3.4.15 Johnson, W. V., "Effect of Mortar Properties on the Flexural Strength of Masonry,"
Master Thesis, Clemson University, May 1986.
3.4.16 Ritchie, T., and J.I. Davison, "Factors Affecting Bond Strength
Moisture Penetration of Brick Masonry," Symposium
and Resistance to
on Masonry Testing, ASTM,
STP 320, June 1962, p. 16.

3.4.17 Commentary on SpecificationsforMasonryStructures(AC1530.1-88),American
Concrete Institute, Detroit, MI, 1990.
3.4.18 Cheema, T. and R. E. Klingner, "Compressive Strengthof Concrete Masonry Prisms,"
AC1 Journal, Detroit, MI, January/February 1986, pp. 88-97.
3.4.19 Hamid, A. and R. G. Drysdale, Toncrete Masonry Under Combined Shear and
Compression Along the
Mortar Joints," AC1 Journal,
Detroit, MI, September/October
1980, PP. 341-320.
3.4.20 Drysdale, R. G. and A. A. Hamid, "Behaviorof Concrete Block MasonryUnder Axial
Compression," AC1 Journal, Detroit, MI, June 1979, pp. 707-721.
3.4.21 Drysdale, R. G.
and A. A. Hamid,"Capacity of Concrete BlockMasonryPrisms
Under Eccentric Compression Loading,"

AC1 Journal, Detroit, MI, March/Aprill983,
PP. 102-108.
3-27

3.4.22 Maurenbrecher, A.H.P., "CompressiveStrength of Hollow Concrete Blockwork,"

Proceedings of the 4th Canadian MasonrySvmposium, Universityof New Brunswick,
N.B., Canada, Vol. 1, June 1986, pp. 553-568.
3.4.23 Compressive Strengthof Composite Masonry Prisms
and Walls, NCMA/BIA, Reston,
VA, May 1972.
3.4.24 Recommended BuildingCode Requirements forEngineered
Concrete Masonry,
"Research Data and Comments," NCMA, Herndon, VA, 1967.

3.4.25 Drysdale, R. G. and A. Hamid, "Effect of Grouting on the Flexural Tensile Strength
of Concrete Block Masonry," The Masonry Society Journal, Vol. 3, No. 2, 1984, pp.
T10-Tl9.
3.5.1
"Curtain-Wall Connections," Architectural Technology, May/June 1986, p. 37.
3-28

A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93 M Obb2949 0 5 0 8 5 5 9 9b9
Table 3.1.1 Product Specifications and Requirements
Item
C34
C 56
3-29

C 62
- Clay or Shale Masonry Units

C 126
C 212
C 216
C 652
AC1
TITLE*NDG 9 3 m 0662949 0508560 680
Table 3.1.1 Contd.
Item
C
C 34
C56
1 Physical Requirements
E
D
Specification Entry
Default Specification
3-30

62
C 126
C 212
A C 1 TITLE*IDG
0662949 0508563 517
93
Table 3.1.2 Product Specifications and Requirements
E
D
I
U
Specification
Entry
Default
Specification
Type I units,
singly
Base
Unit
Specification
Applies
3-3 1

- Concrete Masonry Units
A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 9 3 H 0662949 0508562 4 5 3
Table 3.13 ProductSpecificationsandRequirements

Item
C 503
C 568
- Stone
C 615
C 616
Specification
Entry
3-32

C 629
A C 1 T I T L E U M D G 93
c1
S S
G
c
O
.I
P
3-33

0662949 0508563 39T
A C 1 TITLE*flDG 93
Table 3.5.2
Nominal"
Nominal
Diameter,
Area
in. in. sq in.
1/4"
Nominal
Tensile Strength
O. 1205
0.379 0.0114
O. 1483
0.465 0.0173
1,210.
1,380.
O. 1620
0.5 09 0.0206
1,442.
1,648.
0.5 89
2,220.
O. 1875
**
Properties of Wire for Masonry'
Wire Size
Obb2949 0 5 0 8 5 6 4 22b
0.0277
0.2500
1,940.
0.785 0.0491
909. 797.
3,935. 3,430.
Basedon requirements ofASTM A 82forcolddrawn steel wire

ASTM A 82 permits variation of plus or minus 0.003 in. from diameters
shown
Table 3.53 Sheet MetalThicknesses
3-34

AC1
T I T L E t M D G 9 3 m 0662949 0508565 Lb2 m
Table 3.5.4 StandardReinforcing Bars

Nominal
Bar Size
Diameter
in.
Nominal Area
Nominal Weight
sq in.
Plf
#3
0.375
0.11
0.376
0.500
0.20
0.668
0.625
0.3 1
1.043
0.750
0.44
1.502
O. 875
0.60
2.044
1.000
O. 79
2.670
1.128
1.00
3.400
10
1.270
1.27
4.303
11
1.410
1.56
5.313
3-35

AC1
TITLE*MDG 7 3 m Obb29Ll7 0508566 O T 7 m
Table 3.5.5 Galvanic Compatibility of Metals'
Lead
LI
LI
LI
Brass
LI
LI
LI
Bronze
LI
LI
LI
Monel
LI
LI
LI
Uncured Mortar or Cement
LI
LI
LI
Woods With Acid

(Redwood and Red Cedar)
Iron/Steel
Galvanic
action
will
occur
LI
Galvanicactionmayoccur
under certaincircumstances and/or overaperiod
of time
Galvanicactionisinsignificantundernormalcircumstances
This table compares galvanic compatibility of metals commonly used with

some of the more common building materials. Galvanic reactions occur most
readily when materials touch, but may also occur when water runs from one
material onto another.
3-36

A C 1T I T L E w M D G
93
0bb2949 05085b7 T 3 5 W
4
TESTING
4.0
INTRODUCTION
Test report requirements are identified by the Specificationsandserve
as the Quality
Control portion of Quality Assurance Program. The A/E determines when the testing is to
be included. Test reports are given to the A/E as required in Submittals: Specs. 2.1.2.1
(b)
Results of mortar testsperformed
in accordancewith
the property
specification requirements of ASTM C 270.

(Frequency indicated - once, when required.)
(h)
Results of tests of masonryunits and materialsattestingcompliance

with the specified requirements.
(Frequency indicated - once, when required.)
Testingdoes
not affect the quality of the masonry,itonly
determines compliance to
specifications. See MDG 5.0.1 for resolution of noncomplying conditions.

Testingfrequencies are indicated in the Specifications for the followingmaterials
assemblages:
QualityAssurance:Specs.
.2
Masonry
units
2.1.3
are tested
in
accordance
with
indicated
materials
specification.
4-1

and
AC1
.3
T I T L E m M D G 93 W Ob62949 0508568 971 m
Masonry
prisms
when
required.
(Preconstruction and one testper 5000 square feet of wall) per Specs.
1.6.3
.4
Mortar tests in accordance with ASTM C 270

preconstruction
evaluation of property specifications (once for each mortar type)and
ASTM C 780 (When required)
.5
Grout tests - Specs. 4.1.3

(When required)
Quality Assurance: Specs. 4.1.3

Grout tests ASTM C 1019
(When required - one test per each 5000 square feet of masonry.)
4.1 MATERIALS TESTING

4.1.1 Preconstruction
Preconstruction testingis recommended to ensure that materials selectedby the A/E comply
with the requirements of the product specification and provide the required performance.
In many casesthe Manufacturers Certificationmay be acceptable in lieu of preconstruction
testing.
The selected masonry mortar must be in compliance with ASTM C 270. For this mortar
selected physical tests from ASTM C 780 should be completed prior to construction, so a
set of comparative values is produced. Test results obtained during construction are more
easily interpreted when compared with preconstruction tests.
It is not the intent of ASTM C 780 that tests are performed at some fixed frequency. The
test methods are classed as quality control tests that allow rapid isolation of the reason for
any loss of quality control
that might occur. The array of tests, except for compressive

4-2

AC1
TITLE*NDG 73 m 0662949 0508569 808 m
strength and tensile splitting tests, can easily

be performed in a periodof one or two working
days. Thus, immediate appraisal
of the quality control exercised at the projectmay be
documented. Variations from batch to batch and day to day can be easily evaluated.
In performing preconstruction tests, materials
to be used during construction should
be
sampled, combined and prepared using equipment and procedures that will be used during
actual construction. The merits in performing these tests in addition to establishing basic
comparative values are that they allow all
parties to agree on the interpretation of the
project specification and to the execution of the specification requirements.

4.1.2
Construction Testing
Testing done during actual construction should be directed toward establishing compliance
with the Specifications requirements and the quality control requirements delineated in the
project specifications.
As indicated in ASTM C 270, testing of hardened masonry mortar samples removed from
a structure is not addressed.Specializedchemical
and petrographic tests can be used;
however, the qualitycontrol tests ofASTM C 780 are more easilycompleted.Testing

during construction is preferable to testing after construction has been completed.
Strength characteristics of masonry mortar prepared at the project are not related to the
property requirement strengths of ASTM C 270. This is due to theincreased water content
of jobprepared
mortars. Mortar qualitycontrol
under C 270 is actuallyobtained
by
measurement of materials used to mix the mortar. Any testing of site prepared mortars
should be referenced back to ASTM C 780, namely the preconstruction tests and the base
test results.
Testing of masonry mortars during actual construction should involve selected
tests from
ASTM C 780. If the intent is to track air content of mortars, the air content test should be
4-3

Obb2949 0508570 52T
A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
performed. If the intent is to establish the exercise of qualitycontrolduring
mortar
preparation, both water content and cement to aggregate ratio tests should be performed.
The test results should be referenced back to the preconstruction test results. External
factors, such as temperature, may influence the results so the external influences should be
systematically recorded. The data sheet provided as a part of ASTM C 780 (Annex A8) is
suggested as a general format.
The selectedmasonrygroutmust
provisionsfor
either finegrout
be incompliancewithASTM
or coarsegrout
C 476 whichmakes
using acceptablematerialsbasedon
proportions by volume. This ASTM standard does not require any physical testing. Code
4.3.3.4, however, requires a minimum compressive strength
of 2,000 psi and 28 days. The
sampling and testing of grout is conducted in accordance with ASTMC 1019. This standard
can be used to initially select the ASTM C 476 materials and proportionsto satisfy the Code
minimum compressive strength requirement. ASTM
C 1019 can also be used as a quality
control test for uniformity of grout preparation during construction.

4.2
ASSEMBLAGE TESTING - PRISMS
Testing for compressive strength of masonry with the masonry units and mortar combined
in an assemblage, will be as indicated by the M. The test method involves fabrication of
brick or concrete masonry assemblages called masonry prisms, in accordance with ASTM
E 447 Method B as modified in Specs. 1.6.3.2. Because masonry units are of different sizes,
the test method indicates the number of units to be used during the fabrication of the test
specimen.
The A/E may require that prism testing be a part of the design process and the materials
selection process. Thereafter, the masonry prism test may be required during construction,
serving as a quality control test. The combined materials forming the assemblage should
reflect the individual materials, as used, and also the workmanship. The specimen may be
4-4

A C 1 TITLE*flDG
93
0662349 0508571 466
subject to temperature influences; so, similar to mortar testing in accordance with ASTM
C 780, interpretation of test results mustbe tempered with knowledgeof external influences.
In performingprismcompressivestrengthtests,assemblages
are loaded concentrically.
Because test specimen size and shape influence indicated compressive strength, the tested
strength must be corrected depending upon height to thickness ratio. Test specimens with
a lower height to thickness ratio produce higher indicated strengths. Correction factors for
clay brick masonry and concrete masonry units are listed in the Specs. Table 1.6.3.3(b) and
Table 1.6.3.3(c), respectively.
4-5

A C 1 TITLExNDG 93
0662947 0 5 0 8 5 7 2 3T2
5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
5.0
INTRODUCTION
Both quality assurance and quality control requirements should be incorporated within the
Project Specification. Quality assurance provides administrative policies
related to the quality control measures expected
and requirements
to assure the Owners quality objectives.
Quality control is the systematic performance of construction testing and inspection. The
extent of the quality assurance and the quality control program generally will vary with the
size of the project. The quality objective of the Owner should be met when construction is
completed in accordance with
proper design concepts, acceptable construction practices,
and
materials complying with product specifications. Success is dependent on open, but direct,
communicationsamongresponsiblepartieswithinthedesign
and constructionteam.
Records documenting the successful completion of the structure in accordance with
the
Owners objectives complement the Contract Documents.
5.0.1
Quality Assurance
The quality assurance program incorporated in the contract documents, includes both the
project specifications and drawings, and should address
1)
organizational
responsibilities,

the following:
AC1
T I T L E x M D G 9 3 W 0682949 0508573 2 3 9 m
2)
materials
control,
3)
inspection,
4)
testing and evaluation,
5)
identification and resolution ofnoncomplyingconditions,
6)
records.
and
Quality assurance considerations are delineated in an AC1 Committee 121 report, entitled
"Quality Assurance Systems for Concrete Construction" (5.1.1).
According to Specs. C.1.5, it is necessary to delineate the responsibility, authority,and lines
of communication of the parties involvedinqualityassurance.
Procedures should be
established for the identification and resolution of nonconformances.

Materials control verifies the chemical and physical characteristics of individual materials
requiredin
the contractdocuments.
These controlsshould
be monitoredthroughout
construction for compliance with the contract documents.

Inspectioncontrolshould
be established to assure thatthe
masonrymaterials
and
construction practices comply with the requirements of the contract documents. Inspection
program, personnel, and records should be regarded as inspection control measures.
Testing and evaluationshould
be describedin
the qualityassuranceprogram.
The
or noncompliance
evaluation of test results by the testing agency should indicate compliance
with a referenced standard.
Procedures for identification and resolution of noncomplying conditions shouldbe described
in the contractdocuments.In
agreement with others in the desigrdconstructteam,all
resolutions should be either accepted as is, or rejected and repaired or reworked. Repaired
and reworked conditions should initiate reinspection.
5-2

AC1
TITLE*MDG 93 m 0662949 0 5 0 8 5 7 4 L75 m
Records control should be described in the contract documents. Distribution of documents

during and after construction should be delineated. Review of documents should continue
throughout the construction periodto ascertain that all partiesare informed and thatrecords
for documenting construction occurrences are available and correct after construction has
been completed.
As an example of quality assurance, the general contractor may require that the masonry
subcontractor submit a written procedure for cold weather masonry construction practices.
5.0.2
Quality Control
The specific requirements of the projectspecification
related to design,materials
procurement and use should be implemented by quality control measures. Quality control
measures may be dictated by the Owner's representative or self-imposed by a responsible
party charged with the conductof a specific task associated withor contained in the project
specification.
The qualitycontrolprogramessentiallyfollows
the qualityassurance
requirements as
documented from a specific project specification section or allied sections. Members of the
Design and Construction team affected by quality control requirements include the owner,
A/E, inspection agency, contractor and subcontractor.

The person responsible for the quality assurance provisions contained within the Contract
Documents should impose certain responsibilitieson those whowill perform quality control
testing while granting them authority to access the construction site forthe performance of
sampling, testing, and inspection. Those Inspection and Testing Agencies being considered
for performance of the Quality Control tests should be evaluated for their conformance to
the requirements of the "Standard Practice for The Accreditation of Testing Agencies for
Unit Masonry," ASTM Designation C 1093.
5-3

A C 1 TITLESMDG 93
O b b 2 9 4 9 0508575 001
The Testing Agency should be required to produce its laboratory accreditation document
whichisessentially
their qualityassuranceprogram.Thisdocumentshouldindicate
organization, testing capabilities, qualification of personnel, test procedures, presende and

calibration of physical test equipment, and records control.
The approved Testing Agency should document its representatives who
will be a part of the
quality control segment,hisher qualifications and procedures duringthe performance of the
qualitycontrolphase.Knowledge
of the proper procedures for sampling and testing
masonry materials is essential.
As an example of quality control, the masonry subcontractor may be required to carry out
the cold weather masonry construction practices described
in the approved quality assurance
program.
5.1
SUBMITTALS
Prior to construction, the A/E or the owners representative who is responsible for submittal
acceptance/rejection and compliance can require establishment
of conformance of a product
either by sampling and testing prior to construction or acceptance of the Manufacturers
Certification for Compliance.
Tests allow establishing conformance with a product specification.The measured test result
is compared with the specification limit for the chemical/physical property.
The alternative to sampling and testing the product is to rely on the manufacturers quality
control data obtained during production of the actual product to be used on the project.
Certification by the manufacturer provides the consumer with documentation indicating
that
on a certain date the product was tested in accordance with indicated test methods and
measuredtestresultsconfirmingcompliancewith
the requirements of the product
specification. The documentation is certified by the company representative. The consumer

5-4

A C 1T I T L E W N D G
93
0662949 0508576 T 4 8
using these data can reduce overall testing during the product selection phase.
The specifiermustidentifyallsubmittalsrequired.(SeeSpecs.
Optional Checklist and
Specs. 2.1.2 and 4.1.2). Documentation of all submittals should follow the guidelines given
in MDG 5.5.
5.2 SAMPLE
PANELS
5.2.1 Recommended Practices
The Specs. 2.1.2.2 states that "When required, construct sample panels
of masonry walls
using materials and procedures conforming to the Project Specifications." See also Specs.
2.1.2.3.
In accordance with Specs. 2.1.2.2(b), job-site sample panels should
be constructed for the
purpose of establishing an accepted standard of qualityfor the project. Sample panels

should be used to evaluate the appearance and construction of the finished masonry work.
Job-site sample panels should contain all aspects
of the combined masonry materials
and the
specified construction procedures per MDG 5.2.2. The representative of the owner and/or
PJE may choose to use more than one type of bond and mortar joint finish on the sample
panel to help make final choices as to the finished appearance. The mortar joint finishes
greatly influence the appearance of the wall. All submittals should be approved before the
sample panel is constructed.
The panel should be constructed by the mason contractor
selected for the project before the masonry work begins, and should not be removed or
destroyed until al1,work has been accepted (Specs. 2.1.2.3).
The construction of the sample panel is based on the contract documents and is approved
when the owner or their authorized representative acceptsthe appearance and construction
characteristics of the panel.Whenapproved,
the constructionproject
may proceed.
Usually, one panel is constructed forappearance, any required tests (e.g., ASTM C 780), and
5-5

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
0662949 0508577 98Y
workmanship. The panel is then referred to as the approved project standard. It becomes
an important device in the evaluation and acceptance of the masonry work during
constructionperiod.Opinionsrelating
toappearanceare
much easierto
the
resolve if a
standard of quality, embodied by an approved sample, is available for evaluation at the

construction site. Therefore, it is to everyones benefit that sample panels be made a part
of the project requirements for masonry work. It is especially important where appearance,
establishment of procedures, and construction are important issues.
5.2.2
Suggested Criteria for Construction
SAMPLE PANEL LEVEL 1 SCOPE OF COMPLIANCE SHOULD INCLUDE

Masonry unit types, sizes, shapes, color range, texture, surface configuration, and
other characteristics. Chippage dimensions, and warpage limits
of units controlled
by product specifications or more restrictive in wall criteria determined by the A/E.

Mortar joint size, alignment, color, tooling configuration,
and texture. Mortar should
be evaluated for appearance after it is surface dry.If
colored mortar is used, the
color should be judged after the sample panel has had sufficient time to dry (5.2.1).
Bond pattern and color pattern if masonry units are more than one color.
The conformance of workmanship representative to that specified in the contract
documents.
Quality of appearance of approved cleaning material applied by the approved
methods proposed for the finished work if required.
Quality of appearance of approved water-repellent masonry surface treatment
material applied by the approved methods proposed for the finished workif required.
Workmanship with respect to mortar placement and dimensional tolerances.
SAMPLE PANEL LEVEL 2 SCOPE OF COMPLIANCE SHOULD INCLUDE:

In addition to Level 1 items, characteristics should include:
5 -6

93
0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0 5 0 8 5 7 8 810
Weephole type and spacing, and finish material, if any.
Flashingmaterial,configuration,lapping
and sealing joint details, end dams,
back-dam height, and termination conditions.

Anchors and tie types, material, spacing, and placement requirements.
Reinforcement type, location, and securement methods.
Expansion joint and control joint material and configuration.
Joint sealant type, color, and configuration.
Gasket and joint filler type and configuration.
Port holes for observation of hidden construction components, clean-outs,and other
items as specified in the contract documents.
O
Full capability for testing the sample panel for tests as required by the code and/or
the contract documents. Sample panels shouldbe sized accordinglyand verified with
applicable industry standards for tests.
5.3
5.3.1
INSPECTION
Purpose
Thepurpose
of inspection is to observe and record thatthe work performed during
construction is
in
compliance
with
the contract documents.
Thus the duties and
responsibilities of the inspector are to observe that the work generally complies with the
drawings and specifications of the
A/E. The inspector can be the A/E or an independent
consultant.
The intent of the Code and Specs. is to require inspection, at anextent and frequency to be
determined by the A/E,based on theproject requirements. Possible inspection activities
and
procedures are presented in this section.
5 -7

A C 1 TITLEtMDG 93
53.2
Obb2949 0 5 0 8 5 7 9 757
Planning
The inspector represents the owner. The inspector should have a complete knowledge of
the contract documents, construction practices, materials, and test procedures. Ideally the
inspector should attend pre-bid meetings with the A/E and project bidders. The inspector
should attend pre-construction meetings with the A/E and the successful contractor.
5 3 3 MaterialSubmittals
Products specified in the contract documents must meet applicable material specifications.
All submittals shallbe approved by the A/Ei or the owners designatedrepresentative before
any construction begins as described in MDG 5.1 and 5.2.

All changes must be approved by the A/E or owners designated representative in writing
prior to installation.
All shop drawings must be approved by the N E or owners designated representative in
writing before beginning fabrication or production.
53.4 InspectionFiles
The inspector should have all approved submittals, shop drawings, changes, job site and
laboratory tests, as required by the contract documents, for all products, techniques, location,
and procedures.
In accordance with the procedures established in the quality assurance program, accurate
quality control records should be kept ofall material deliveries, as to type of product,
manufacturer, date of delivery, where it is placed on the job site, and how it is protected
from the environment (Specs. 2.3.1).
5-8

AC1
TITLE*NDG 93 m 0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0508580 477 m
In accordance with the procedures established in the quality assurance program, a daily
quality control log should be kept which includes weather conditions at the job site (e.g.,
temperature, relative
humidity,
general conditions, both A.M. and P.M.) and any
observations not in compliance with the contract documents.

53.5 ConstructionInspection
Inspectors should observe such things as workmanship, masonry bond, mortar joint finish,
and placement of connectors, reinforcement, and grout.
As designated by the owner, the inspector hasthe authority to judge materials, workmanship
and procedures employedinconstruction,based
on contract document requirements.
Approval or disapproval should be reported to the owner and contractor. The inspector
does not have the authority to direct the work of the contractor.
The inspector should observe how materials are stored and handled and also observe the
handling of equipment used to prepare, transport, and install masonry materials to be sure
it is being used properly and will in no way adversely affect the finished wall.
The inspector shouldunderstand the materials andthe effect that weather changes may have
on them. For example, the effect of high and low temperatures and humidity on a mortar
systemmay be extremely important.
The absorption of clayproducts and the moisture
content of concrete masonry products mustbe considered. Material properties and weather
can have a direct effect on the quality and performance of the finished masonry.
Where required, the use of reinforcingsteel,
joint reinforcement,ties,
anchors and
accessories shouldmeet the requirements of Specs. 3.2 and 3.3. Verify that the appropriate
corrosion resistant material is used.
Flashing,weepholes,anchors,ties,
wall vents,etc. are installedin accordance with the
5-9

contract documents. See MDG 6.2.6.

Weepholes are constructed as detailed and at the specified spacings. Weepholes constructed
as a void or with prefabricated units should be installed over all flashingat 24 in. intervals.
Rope weepholes should be installed at 16 in. intervals. See MDG 6.2.6.
Observe the constructiqn of movement joints installed as called for in the contract
documents. See MDG 6.2.7.
Observe and note preparation of jobsite test samples.
5.4
"ING
A well planned, thoroughly specified and properly implemented testing program during the
construction of a project is an important component of an overall inspection and quality
control program. Tests are performed to verify the consistency of materials, workmanship,
protection and curing conditions,and the in-place performance and strengthcharacteristics
achieved during construction.
The tests discussed below are commonly applied to masonry construction. In most cases,
the procedures are well established and governed by standards. The interpretation of test
results is based on job requirements.
5.4.1 Testing as Part of a Construction Quality Assurance Program
Correct implementation of a testing program should result in productive and meaningful

activity serving the interests of all parties involved in the project. The construction testing
program must be rationally related to preconstruction testing requirements, and be based
onthe
knowledge of masonrybehavior,
the required properties,andthe
performance of the completed masonry.

5-10

required
AC1
TITLE*HDG 9 3 m 0662949 0508582 241 m
Projectdesignassumptionsandmaterialacceptancecriteriacan
be based on the unit
strength method in Specs. 1.6.2, in which the required properties of the individual masonry
materials are verified by testing. A rational quality control program for a project based on
the unitstrengthmethodmightinclude
a plannedrepetition
of the unittestsforthe
materials in construction, accompanied by an inspection program. Sampling
and testing
should be in accordance with ASTM C 67 for clay masonry units and ASTM
C 140 for
concrete masonry units.
For grouted masonry, the grout may be
proportioning and materialrequirements
required to satisfy the
in ASTMC 476. For aprojectdesigned
and
specified on the basis of the unit strength method, it should

not be necessary to test masonry
assemblies fabricated during construction specifically for testing purposes.
As an alternative to the unit strength method, design assumptionsand materials acceptance

criteria could include measured
properties of masonry assemblages. These criteria could
include: the prismstrengths,Specs.
1.6.3; measuredmodulus
permeabilityperformance;modulus
of rupture; and other physical properties of the
completed masonry. Testing
of elasticity,Code
is normally required before construction begins,
5.5.1;
to develop
acceptable and agreed upon values. Similar tests are repeated during construction as apart
of a quality control program.
Specifications for a properly implemented construction testing program must include more
than a simple requirement for a certain number of tests. The program will only serve its
intended purpose if the following issues are addressed in the project specifications:
a.
Correspondingpreconstruction testingrequirements.Constructiontestsshould
not be specifiedunless
an equivalentpreconstructiontesthasalso
been
specified.
b.
A clear definition of an acceptance criterion, which should be based on careful

consideration of actual project requirements. Minimum test results for
both
the preconstruction and construction tests must be specified,

and they must be
related to each other. It would not be unreasonable for required test results
5-11

AC1
T I T L E x M D G 9 3 m Ob62949 0508583 188 m
during construction to be less stringent than corresponding preconstruction

laboratory test results.Initssimplest
form, a minimumaverage
can be
specified. For designs based on strength, a minimum average related to the

measured coefficient of variation of the test results is more appropriate.
c.
A cleardefinition of the requiredfrequency
of testingbasedontime,
the
maximum constructed area, or the maximum number of installed masonry

units between test cycles. As a minimum, require the testing of prisms and
thus the application of Specs. 2.1.3.3 which when specified, requiresone prism
test for each 5,000 square feet of wall area or portion thereof. The sampling
method, sample handling, and the test methods must also be specified.
d.
A protocol for recording,reporting, and disseminating the test results, and a

process for obtaining
written
review
of the results
from
the design
professional.
e.
A planned response for test results that do not meet the specified acceptance
criteria. The response could include retesting, re-evaluation of strength and
performance requirements by the design professional specificallyfor the area
affected, and finally, a rejection protocol.
f.
A cleardefinition
ofwhichpartyisresponsible
for scheduling the tests,
performing the tests, obtaining the samples, and paying for the tests.
g.
A clear statement on the reconstruction of rejectedwork.
In thesections below, various tests,

that areuseful for a construction quality control program
are briefly discussed. Not all
of the tests are necessarily needed for every project.
design professional should formulate a construction testing program
The
to address masonry
properties that are necessary for compliance with the Code,and those critical to the success
and durability of the project.
5.4.1.1
Initial Rate of Absorption Tests
- Both laboratory
and field investigations have
shown that high suction clay brick may cause excess loss of mixing water from the mortar,
resulting in poor adhesion, incomplete bond and water-permeable joints of low strength.
5-12

A C 1 TITLE+MDG 93
m 0662949
0 5 0 8 5 8 4 014
Thus, some clay masonry products may require wetting so that the proper interaction with
the mortar can be achieved, and proper bond and weather resistance can be realized
(5.4.1). The initial rate of absorption (IRA) test is used to determine if wetting is necessary.
Preconstruction IRA testing will determine if wettingshould
be a general project
requirement. Construction IRA testing can be used for periodic quality control checks or
as part of a response to extreme temperature and wind conditions which might adversely
affect the curing of the mortar and
necessitate a temporary adjustment in construction
procedures.
ASTM C 67 contains two methods for measuring the IRA. The brick is suspended in a pan
of water. For laboratory tests, the amount of water absorbed by a dried unit is determined
by weighing the brick before and after soaking, using an accurate balance. For field tests,
the amount of water absorbed by the unit can be determined by measuring the volume of
water in the pan before and after soaking, using a graduated flask called a pycnometer.
Weighing the brick is best suitedas a laboratory procedure; the pycnometer method can be
used on-site, butmay be difficult because of the precision necessary in controllingthe depth
and levelness of the soaking process.
Masons often use a more convenient approximate method to determine the I R A A circle,
one inch in diameter, is marked with a wax pencil on the bedding surface of the brick, and
25 drops of water are deposited using an eyedropper. The outline of a quarter ($0.25) is
the customary guide for this circle. If it takes more than 1%minutes for the brick to absorb
the dropsof water, wetting is usuallynot required. If this procedure is allowed on a project,
its acceptability should be determined by preconstruction laboratory tests for comparison
with the more rigorous ASTM C 67 IRA test.
5.4.1.2
Testing to Verify thePrismCompressiveStrength
of Masonry
Testing to
determine the masonry compressive strength, fm, is a useful quality control procedure for
comparison with preconstruction qualifymg tests,
and is required when specifiedor when the
properties of the masonry materials or construction do not qualify for the use of the unit
5-13

73
Obb27Y7 0 5 0 8 5 8 5 T 5 0
strength method by Specs. 1.6.. Code 5.5.1.3 permits designing on the basis of the actual
modulus of elasticity of masonry usedfor a project. The modulus of elasticity is determined
duringaprismcompressive
strength test. The standard procedure for prismtests is a
modification of ASTM E 447 as described in Specs. 1.6.3; for the modulus of elasticity, the
secant method and theprocedures of ASTM E 111are permitted by Code 5.5.1.2 and Code
5.5.1.3.
Using project materials and techniques, three prisms are fabricated in stack bond one unit
wide and thick,
with
full
a
mortar joint.
Clay
masonry
prisms
must
have
a
height-to-thickness ratio between 2.0 and 5.0. Concrete masonryprismsmusthavea

height-to-thickness ratio between 1.33 and 5.0, and contain at least one mortar joint. If a
prism is too large for the intended testing machine, half units can be used for the top and
bottom as shown in Fig. 5.4-1.
Solid Joints
e'
Unit
'
/
h Full
Unit
Minimum:
One M o r t a r
Clay Brick
Concrete Block
Fig. 5.4-1 PrismCompressiveStrengthTestSpecimens

After fabrication, the prisms are stored on-site for 48 hours in an environment similar to the
air exposure conditions of the masonry wall, and wherethey
will not be disturbed.
Temporary plywood top and bottom caps are then strapped onto the
transported to a laboratory for additional curing. On-site storing
prism, and it is
and transporting of the
prisms must be done carefully to avoid damaging the bond between the mortar and the
5-14

AC1
TITLE*IDG 9 3 m 0662949 0508586 9 9 7 m
masonry units, which will cause invalid test results. The prisms are cured in the laboratory
until theyare 28 days old,capped, and tested in compression to failure. Prism weight should
be limited to approximately 150 pounds unless special
arrangements are made with the
testing laboratory for handling and capping. The physical size and load capacity of the
testing machine should also be considered in determining the size of a prism. Test results
are corrected for the aspect ratio of the prism using the factors in Specs. 1.6.3.3.
5.4.13
Testing to Evaluate Mortar
Mortars are classified by type using theletter
designations M, S, N and O. Two methods of specifymg mortars are given in ASTM C 270
(1)proportion specifications and (2) property specifications. One or the othermethod, but
not both, should be used to specify the mortar. The procedures and criteria for testing in
ASTM C 270 are for laboratory-prepared samples only,
and should be thought of as a
method for qualifymg materialsand the mix design for use in a project. The strength criteria
of ASTM C 270 are therefore not the appropriate basis for a construction quality control
testing program unless specifically so stated in the project requirements, as suggested in

Specs. 2.1.3.4. Once a mortar mix design qualifies in accordance withthe laboratory ASTM
C 270, the volume proportions of ingredients, as added to the mixer, serve as the quality
control measure. Alternatively the procedures of ASTM C 780 can be used to establish a
preconstruction datum and a construction quality control testing program.
Seven test procedures are given in ASTM C 780: (1) consistency by cone penetration, (2)
consistency retention, (3) mortar aggregate ratio, (4)mortar water content, (5) mortar air
content, (6) compressive strength of molded mortar cubes and cylinders, and (7) splitting
tensile strength of molded mortar cylinders. The results of one or more of these procedures,
repeated over the course of construction, are compared to preconstruction results from the
same procedure. Currently,
mortar compressive strength and mortar air content tests are
the two most common procedures specified for quality control testing. Perhaps the results
of these procedures are more easily and intuitively related to projectperformance
requirements. However, the other five tests shouldnot be ignored (5.4.1). Consistent results
within acceptable bounds based on the preconstruction evaluation tests is a good indicator
5-15

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
Obb2949 0508587 823
of consistent batch-to-batch mortar properties and reliable in-place mortar properties. The
test procedures, and the appropriate interpretation of results for allseventests,
are
thoroughly discussed in ASTM C 780. The mortar compressive strength and mortar air
content tests are briefly discussed below.
Mortar compressive strength tests are performed on cubes or cylinders cast from samples
of the project mortar.Sincemosttesting
laboratories havejigs for cappingcylindrical
specimens, it may be easier to achieve top and bottom caps that are flat and parallel for
cylindrical specimensthan for cube specimens. To achieve consistency inthe cast specimens,
complete instructions for filling the mold, spading the wet mortar, and curing, transporting,
storing and capping the specimen are given. They are similar to the instructions for the
more familiar concrete cylinder tests. There is also a prescribed protocol for rejecting data
from specimens which are judged to be "manifestly faulty".
Mortar air content is determined using special apparatus. Either a volumetric method or
a pressure method can be used. The air in the mortar sample is replaced with water. The
volume of water necessary for a thorough replacement of the air is a measure of the air
content of the mortar. For the volumetric method, the sample is jarred and rolled to cause
the air to migrate out of the mortar and be replaced by water. For the pressure method,
air pressure is used.
Mortar compressivestrength and mortar splittingtensiontests
require time for curing
specimens. Therefore, they cannot provide immediate information necessary for adjusting
mortar batching procedures in a timely fashion.
5.4.1.4 Testing to Evaluate Grout - Specs. 1.6.2.1, Specs. 1.6.2.2, Specs. 4.1.3, and Specs.
4.2 require that grout conform to the proportion requirements of ASTM C 476 and thatits
strength be determined in accordance with ASTM
C 1019. The procedures of ASTM C
1019 can be used both to verify compliance of a grout designmix and as thebasis of a grout
quality control testing program. The objective of the test is to subject the grout specimen
5-16

AC1
TITLESUDG 9 3 U 0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0508588 7bT m
to curing and absorption conditions similar to those in the wall. To achieve this objective,
masonry units, intended for use in the wall, are used as the form for grout specimen. As in
prism testing, the storage, handling, and transport of the grout specimen must be done
carefully to avoid damage which will invalidate the test results. The grout must be removed
from the masonry form for testing, so it is necessary to prevent bonding by lining the form
with a permeable sheet such as a paper towel.
5.4.1.5 Testing to Determine the Flexural Modulusof Rupture - If the flexural modulus of
rupture (MOR) is important for the performance of a project, preconstruction testing should
be specified to demonstrate the compatibility of masonry materials and their ability to
provide the required flexural bond strength. Corresponding MOR tests can be performed
during construction as a quality control procedure, and should be specified if the reliability
of a design depends on theMOR. However currently neither the Code or the Specifications
require such testing.

Laboratory MOR tests are performed on a stack bond prism fabricated in a jig
to assure
flatness and proper alignment of the masonry. After curing, the sample can be tested either
as a beam in bending, according to ASTM E 518, or by peeling the bricks from the prism
using a special bond wrench device, according
to ASTM C 1072. Neither test method is
referenced in the Code nor in the Specs. Thus they would haveto beincluded in the project
specifications. There is currently no correlation between the test results from these methods
of test and the allowable flexural tension values in Code Table 6.3.1.1.
5.4.2 ProceduresUsefulforInspection
Programs
Specs. 1.5 discussesan inspection program duringthe construction process. Important items,
such as anchor and tie spacing, filling of collar joints, grouting, flashing installation details,
clearances and obstructions inthe cavity, clogging of the weep system and flashing, and joint
filling are easier to observe while a wall is being built
than to evaluate after the wall is
completed. There may be occasions when it is necessaryto determine conditions which are
5-17

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
0662947 0508589 bTb
concealed by the finished masonry, and several techniques are available for this purpose.
5.4.2.1 Omitting Masonry to Permit Inspection Withina Cavity Wall - The most direct way
to facilitate inspection of conditions within a wall after it is built is to anticipate the need,
and to specify that masonry be periodicallyomitted to provide an inspectionopening.
Inspection openings are particularly useful immediately above flashing
and at the bottom of
grout pours. They can also
be used to clean out debris which falls on the flashing during
construction. If inspection openings have not
been left during construction, they
can be
created by removing one or two units of masonry. If done carefully, adjacent construction
will not be damaged, and only the removed units will require replacement. After inspection,
the opening mustbe closed and properly pointed. Exactly matching the surrounding mortar
color is virtually impossible, and some allowance must be made for color variations.
Looking through an opening to observe the adjacent construction requires the use of a small
inspection mirror and a flashlight. By shining the flashlight beam at the inspection mirror
along the line of sight, the area within view in the mirror can be illuminated from outside
the wall. With a little practice, a sense
of orientation and distances will develop.
5.4.2.2 Fiber-optic Borescope - A fiber-optic borescope can be used to inspect concealed
conditions. The viewing wand of the device is inserted in a small hole which can usually be
drilled inthe mortar joints without damage to the adjacent masonry. Light to illuminate the
view is transmitted from a light box to the end of the wand along optical fibers,
imageistransmitted
to an eyepiecealong the samefibers.
and the
The resulting image can
be
recorded by replacing the eyepiece with a camera.
5.5 COMPLIANCE
Documentscontainedwithin
the qualityassurancefileshouldshowcompliance
of all
construction activities withthe individual specification requirements.The documents should

reflect the following:
5-18

A C 1 TITLE*RDG 93
O662949 0508590 318
1.
Documentation for approved submittals.
2.
Documentation for masonry materials certifiedor tested and in conformance with

the
product specification.
3.
Documentation for mortar selection and conformance of thatmortar
to the
requirements of ASTM C 270.
4.
Documentation of mortar quality control measures and tests.
5.
Documentation of masonry materials quality control tests.
6.
Documentation of masonry prism compressive strength tests.
7.
Documentation of special construction practices:

a)
b)Hot
Cold weather masonry

protection.
weather masonry
protection.
8.
Documentation of grout compressive strength.
9.
Documentation of inspection and findings.
practice
with
Compliance of the construction
the Specifications requirements is
demonstrated by: identifylngthe Project Specification requirement; entries reflecting action

taken as required, suchas sampling and testing; test reporting indicatingboth test results and
imposedlimits;signatures
by tester and agency; and receipt and approval of the QA
manager. The supporting documents are appropriate for materials submittals and testing,
as well as inspections required by the A/E to assure quality.
Compliance isindicatedwhenaspecific
part of the QualityAssuranceplan
has been
completed in its entirety.Any nonconformance that occurs duringthe construction sequence

should be documented to reflect: specification requirement,nature of the nonconformance,
correctiveactiontaken,
and verification that correctiveaction
occurrence, and changes to prevent its recurrence.
taken has resolved the
Appropriate signatures and approvals
by the A/E or the owners designated representative should be a part of the documentation.
Basically, what is sought is certification
that the requirement was completed and where
completed improperly, has been corrected to restore the structure to its designed condition.
5-19

A C 1 TITLE*flDG 93
0662949 0 5 0 8 5 9 1 254
For example, if quality control tests of a material, e.g., masonry units, are found to be in
nonconformance with the materials specification, documentation should allow tracing the
sample from manufacture to and through testing, duringwhich testing the nonconformance
was detected. The same document should establish the people involved and the corrective
action taken, and should verify that no part of the masonry or that part of the masonry
structure containing questionable materials hasbeen impaired or degraded by the inclusion
of the product. The corrective measures should also consider additional
steps to prevent
been sampled, tested, and

recurrence, such as non-use of that product until on-site lots have
approved.
An additional part of the compliance should include record retentionand disposal. Records
should be provided to the Ownerfor
useby
maintenancepersonnel
and consultants
attempting to recreate past happenings.
REFERENCES
5.1.1 American Concrete Institute, "Quality Assurance Systems
for Concrete Construction",
AC1 121R-85, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, 1985.
5.2.1 Beall, C., "Coloring Mortar (Mortar--How to Specify and Use Masonry Mortar),"
Aberdeen's Magazine of Masonrv Construction, October 1989, p. 33.
5.2.2
Beall, C., Masonrv Design and Detailing for Architects, Engineers and Builders, 2nd
ed., 1987, p. 361.
5.4.1 Brick Institute of America,"MortarsforBrickMasonry,"Technical
Note No. 8,
Revised, Brick Institute of America, Reston, Virginia, November 1989.
5.4.2 McGinley, W.M., "IRA and theFlexural Bond Strengthof Brick Masonry," Masonry:
ComDonents to Assemblages,
ASTM STP 1063, John H. Matthys, Ed., American
Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, 1990.
5.4.3 Sarker, A, R. H. Brown,"FlexuralStrength
of BrickMasonryUsing
the Bond
Wrench," Research Reuort Number 20, BrickInstitute of American, Reston, Virginia,

November, 1987.
5 -20

AC1
TITLErMDG 9 3 m 0662947 0508572 170 m
6
QUALITY CONTROL
6.0
INTRODUCTION
Quality Control, as discussed

in this section, consistsof the operations of the contractors and
other members of the design team at the construction site to obtain compliance with the
contractdocuments.
The CodeandSpecifications
operations may be desirableorhelpfultoachieve

operations at the sitebeginwith
mandate certain operations; other

the desiredlevel
of quality. The
the receipt,inspection,storageandhandling
of the
materials. Prior to beginning the work,the areas to receive the masonry should be inspected
to ensure that they are ready to receive the workand that the specified tolerances havebeen
met. The actual placement of the masonry begins with the preparation of the mortar and
continues through the installation of a variety of differing materials and products that, when
properly combined, forms the completed product. The partially completed and completed
portions of the work should be protected during the work to prevent damage.
6.1 PREPARATION
Preparations for masonry construction include proper storage and protection of materials
from the weather, inspectionof supporting elements for completion
and accuracy, examining
units and materials, and providing construction protections.
6-1

A C 1 TITLE*:MDG 93
m 0662949 0508573
027
6.1.1 Material Delivery,Storage,andHandling
The methods of material delivery, storageand handling prior to placement are critical to the
performance and appearanceof the finished masonry. Improper procedures can easily result
in physical damage to units and accessories, or contamination or degradation of mortar and
grout ingredients. Materials should
always be stored off the ground and protected from
weather (Specs. 2.1.4, 3.1.3, and 4.1.4).

Masonryunitsshould
be delivered and stored to preventmoisturemigration
from the
ground, and covered with water-repellenttarps or plastic coversto protect from the weather
and from staining or discoloration during construction (Fig.6.1-1). Units should be handled
to avoid chipping or breaking. Aggregates should also be protected against contamination
from rain, ice and snow and from blowing dust and soil during construction (Fig.
Different aggregates should always
be stored in separate stockpiles (Specs. 2.1.4.4).
Fig. 6.1-1 Protection of Units

6-2

6.1-2).
A C 1 TITLE*flDG
93 M 0bb2949 0508594 Tb3
Fig. 6.1-2 Protection of Aggregate

Packaged mortar and grout ingredients should
be stored off the ground and covered to
prevent moisture penetration, deterioration and intrusion of foreign materials (Fig. 6.1-3).
Also, packaged mortar and groutingredientsshould

manufacturers labels intact and legible. Broken packages,
be in originalcontainerswith
open containers, or materials
with missing or illegible labels should be rejected.

Reinforcement, tiesand metal accessories should beprotected against permanent distortion,
and should be stored off the ground to prevent soiling or wetting that could inhibit bond or
promote corrosion (Specs. 3.1.3.1).
Weather conditionsshould not affect the performance of weather-protected materials.
Masonry units properly stored and covered immediately after delivery will remain in good
condition. Dry masonry units that are subjected to freezing temperatures may be used in
construction without damage to the units or to the masonry under the proper procedures.
Wet masonry units that have frozen, however, must be thawed prior to use.
6-3

A C 1T I T L E S N D G
93
Obb2949 0508595 9 T T
Fig. 6.1-3 Protection of Mortar and Grout Materials

For special material storageand protection requirements duringhot and cold weather, refer
to MDG 7.1 and 7.2.
6.1.2 Inspecting Surfaces toReceiveMasonry
The Specifications state that, when required, foundations be inspected prior to the start of
masonrywork(Specs.
1.5.1.2 and 2.3.2.1). Supporting elements must be levelled within
acceptable tolerances set by the Contract Documents (seeMDG 6.3). Concrete foundations
and brick ledges should be inspected for correct conformanceto design, dimensions and for
condition of surfaces. Other masonry supports above the foundationlevelshould
be
inspected for correct location. Deficiencies should be noted and corrected by the General
Contractor before masonry construction begins.
Specs. 2.3.2.1.2 requires that the masonry contractor remove laitance, loose aggregate and
6-4

A C 1 TITLE*flDG
93
0662943 0508596 836
other substances which would prevent mortar from bonding to the foundation.
6.13 Masonry Units
Masonry units mustbe examined and sometimes modifiedfor installation. The color, texture
and size of units delivered to the job site should be compared with the approved sample
panel. Both concrete
and clay units should be checked for cracks, chips, and warpage and
size tolerances as defined by the appropriate ASTM Standard.

During construction the product should be maintained in the "as received" condition
or
upgraded to benefit the masonry. On receipt, protected products should be maintained in

this condition until use. Nonprotected products may haveto be upgraded prior to use in the
masonry. Drying and cleaning of the units may forestall their rejection.
The IRA (initial rate of absorption, or suction) of clay brick units must be checked well in
advance of construction. Specs. 2.3.2.4(b) requires
that clay brick with IRA's in excess of
one gram per minute per sq in., when measured in accordance with ASTM C 67 field test,
be wetted to produce an IRA not to exceed one gram per minute per sq in. when the units
are used.Brickshould
be wetted by spray,dip, or soaker hose.Brickmay
immediately before laying, but it is recommended
be wetted
that they be thoroughly wetted 3 to 24
hours prior to use to allow time for moisture to become distributed throughout the unit.
Units should be saturated but surface dry when laid. They can be broken in half to check
wetting conditions as shown in Fig. 6.1-4. Brick generally should
not be wetted in winter
because some higher suction units in cold

weather could produce better bond strength than
low IRA units (see MDG 7.2 on cold weather construction). Brick having an IRA of less
than 0.10 gr/in.2/min should not
be wetted, and concrete masonry should not be wetted
before placement (refer to Specs. 2.3.2.4(a)
and ASTM C 90).
All masonry units, however, should be clean and free of contaminants such as dirt, oil or
sand that might inhibit bond or proper suction. See MDG 3.1.5.
6-5

Dry
Moist
Saturated
Surface
Saturated but Surface
Dry
Fig. 6.1-4UnitMoistureState
6.1.4Reinforcement,ConnectorsandAccessories
Per Specs, 3.1.2.l(a) reinforcement, ties and accessories should be checked for correct size
and configuration. Before placing reinforcing steel or metal accessories in the wall, Specs.
3.3.2.1 requires that oil, dirt, iceand other contaminants be removed so that good bond with
the mortar or grout can be achieved.
6.1.5MortarandGrout
Mortar and grout ingredients should be checked for compliance with Contract Documents
and with the material storage and protection requirements of Specs. 2.1.4, 3.1.3, and 4.1.4
(refer to MDG 6.1.1). Mortar and grout are usually mixed at the job site throughout the
work day, but ready-mixed
and pre-batched mortars and grout are also available. These
newer mortar and grout systems prepared at central batching locations attempt to control
field variables that often adversely affect the quality and consistency of mortar.
6.1.5.1Mortar
- Mortar mixturesshould be prepared so thatthe desiredproportions
(either selectedfrom
the proportionspecification
of ASTM C 270 or derivedfrom
laboratory tests in accordance withthe property specificationof ASTM C 270) are obtained.
The method of measuring and batching dry ingredients should be either by weight or by
6-6

A C 1 T I T L E s M D G 93
m 0662949
0508598 609
volume, so that the specified proportions can be controlled and consistently maintained.
Ingredient proportions and properties of the various types of conventional ASTM C 270
mortar are covered in MDG 3.2.
Inspection should concentrate not on actual water content, but on assuring batch to batch
consistency of the volume of cementitious ingredients and aggregate.
The mortar should be prepared by mixing the ingredients in a mechanical drum or paddle
type mixer. A good mix generally results when about three-fourths of the required water,
one-half the sand, and all of the cementitious materials are briefly mixed together.
The
balance of the sand is then added, along with the remaining water. Mixing time should
usually be a minimum of three minutes and a maximum of five minutes after thelast mixing
water has been added. Overmixing causes segregation of ingredients, and also entraps air
in the mortar, thus reducing bond strength.
After all other ingredients are mixed, specified admixtures and pigments should be added
in the approved quantities. Pigments should always be added in pre-batched amounts.
Retempering of non-pigmented mortars should be permitted, but onlyto replace water lost
by evaporation. Retempering of pigmented mortar may cause changes
of mortar color.
Retempering slightly decreases mortar compressive strengthbut restores bond strength. The
amount of strength loss increases with time after mixing. Mortar will begin to stiffen and
lose workability as it loses its moisture. Moisture
loss is a function of cement hydration,
wind, temperature, humidity, and time. Mortar that has begun to set should be discarded.
6.1.5.2 Grout - Neither the Specifications nor ASTM C 476 address many of the specifics
regarding grout preparation. ASTM C 476 requires that themethod of measuring materials
be such that specified proportions can be controlled and accurately maintained. Required
mixing time is a minimum of five minutes. Air-entraining admixtures are not recommended
when bond to reinforcing steel is required. The use of expansive admixtures in grouts is
6-7

AC1
T I T L E x M D G 9 3 m Obb2949 0508599 5 4 5 H
encouraged.
Considerations should be given to grout preparation so costly surprises dont occur at the
job site such as low strengths or segregation when grout is pumped (6.1.1). ASTM C 476
listsgroutproportions
byvolume.However,testinglaboratories
suppliers typically batch by weight. Volume proportions can
and ready mix grout

be changed to weight values
by using the specific gravitiesof the materials. The design criteria for grout should consider
compressive strength, durability, grout space, and consistency. The Code requires grout to
have compressive strength equal to or exceeding the specified compressive strength of the
masonry, f m , but not less than 2,000 psi.
The durability of grout is typically not a concern since the grout is usually protected from
moisture saturation and not susceptible to freeze-thaw conditions.
ASTM C 476 classifies grouts as fine or coarse depending on the maximum aggregate size
used. If the maximum aggregate size is less than 3/8 in. the grout is classified as fine; 3/8
in. or larger is classified as coarse grout. Since grout must flow easily into confined spaces,
the smaller the space the smaller the grouts maximum aggregate size. However, coarse
grout is preferred when possible because it shrinks less, requires a smaller
proportion of
cement, and is more economical. Specs. Table 4.3.3.4 gives recommended grout types for
different grout spaces. For a project that requires grouting of both a collar joint and cells
of masonry units, two different grout mixes might possibly be used on the job.
To flow around reinforcement and to completely fill cavities, grout,
whether pumped or
poured, needs to be very fluid. This necessitates a higher water content than for masonry
mortars. Specs. 4.2.2.2requires a consistency that is achieved when the slump falls between
8 and 11 in. Use the lower slump for masonry units with low absorption
and the higher
slump for masonry units with high absorption. In addition consideration should be given to
temperature and humidity conditions and sizes of cavities in determininggrout consistency.
Cavity size affectsthe grouts contact surface area. The greater the surface area the greater
6-8

AC1
TITLE*MDG 93 m 0662947 0508600 0 7 7 m
the amount of water absorbed.

Although a contractor can use volume proportioningon the job, usually a contractor selects
a grout producer to providegrout
that economically meets designcriteria.
The grout
producer or test lab will make trial batches using materials

that conform to ASTM standards
in developing a grout mix that meets design requirements.
6.1.6
Protections
Masonry should be covered at the end of each day and when work is not in progress per
Specs. 2.3.3.11. Excess moisture entering
the masonry during construction
can cause the
masonry to become saturated. Such masonry may take weeks or months to dry out. Such
prolonged wetting will dissolve even slightly soluble salts,
and may result in efflorescence.
Covers such as water-repellent tarps or heavy plastic sheets should extend at least two feet
down each side of the masonry and be held securely in place (Fig. 6.1-5).
Fig. 6.1-5 Wall Protection

6-9

93
Obb2949 0508603 T23 W
Mortar boards and scaffold planks are not acceptable as covers.

During construction, scaffold boards should be turned on edge whenever work
is not in
progress, so that rain will not splash mortar droppings or dirt onto the face of the masonry
and causestaining(Fig.6.1-6).
The base of masonryshouldalso
be protected from
rain-splashed mud andmortar droppings by spreading plastic sheets3 to 4 ft. on the ground
and 2 to 3 ft. up the masonry.
Fig. 6.1-6 Scaffold Board Storage
Partially completed work should be braced
per Specs. 2.3.3.9 during construction against
lateral loads from wind or other forces applied before full design strength is attained (Fig.
6.1-7). Bracing should remain in place until sufficient strength
is reached or elements of
permanent construction provide adequate support.

Protection of work necessary during extremely hot or cold weather is outlined in MDG 7.1
and 7.2.
6-10

0662949 0508b02 9bT H
Adjacent work shouldbe protected from damage during masonry construction.

In particular,
door and window frames, sills, ledges
and exposed finish materials should be covered to
avoid mortar splatter. During cleaning operations, these elements should also be protected
from stains caused by cleaning solutions that run down the masonry.
Fig.6.1-7
6.2
Wall Bracing
PLACEMENT
Specifications give requirements for the placement of mortar, reinforcement, ties, units,
grout, flashing and weepholes, and movement joints. This section discussesthe purpose of,
Code/Specs. mandated procedures for the placement of items. Fig. 6.2-1 diagrammatically
shows many of the items that are discussed.
Joint Reinforcement
Fig.6.2-1
Wall Components
6-11

A C 1 T I T L E v f l D G 93
6.2.1
0662949 0 5 0 B b 0 3 BTb
Mortar Placement
The specific requirements of Specs. 2.3.3.3 are:

l.
Use bed joint between 1/4 in. and 3/4 in. thick at foundations;
2.
Use 3/8 in. thick joints between units;
3.
Tool all joints with around jointer when the mortar is thumbprint hard, unless
otherwise required by the Contract Documents;
4.
Place mortar on clean units while the mortar is soft and plastic;
5.
Do not disturb the unit after it is initially positioned;
6.
Place mortar so that all joints of solid units are fully filled with mortar;
7.
Fill the bed and head joints of hollow units with mortar, spread across the
width of the face shells;
8.
Mortar cross webs in hollow unitsfor the following situations: (a) adjacent to
cells to be grouted for partially grouted construction, (b) starting course on
foundations, and (c) all piers, columns and pilasters that are to be fully filled
with grout;
9.
Remove protrusions of mortar into collar joints, cavities and cells of hollow
units if they project more than 1/2 in.;
10.
Do not slush mortar into head joints;
11.
Fill all holes in the mortar.
Furrowing of the mortar bed joints is discouraged, since it can reduce the contact area and
create voids as shown in Fig. 6.2-2. Specs. 2.3.3.3(e) prohibits deeply furrowed
bed joints.
Slushing to fill the head joints after the units are placed is to be avoided, because slushed
mortar will not be placed under compression and may not develop proper contact for bond.
The slushing process could also disturb the unit and break the contact which occurs when
the unit is initially placed. Disturbing the unit at any time after it has initiallyset breaks the
initial bond of the mortar to the unit. Any unit that is disturbed should be removed and
reset, using new mortar.
6-12

A C 1 T I T L E l r M D G 73
0662747 0508604 732
Fig. 6.2-2 Furrowed Mortar Bed Joint

In walls to be fully grouted, only the face shells of hollow units need to be fully mortared.
Where only selected cells are to be grouted, crosswebs adjacent to those cells should also
be fully mortared. Cells should align. Protrusions that exceed 1/2 in. should be removed in
hollow cells and collar joints to be grouted. Protrusions in spaces for collar joints or cells
that are to remain open or to be grouted can fall to the bottom and block weep holes,
inhibit free flow of moisture along the flashing, or prevent the proper filling of the space by
the grout. At levels abovethe flashing inthe wall, mortar that bridges across the collar joint
can transfer moisture. Three methods assist in keeping the spaces clean (6.2.1, 6.2.2). Fig.
6.2-3 shows two of the methods that can be employed to keep the spaces clean and free of
unwanted mortar protrusions. The properplacement of mortar along the bed jointincludes
not placing excessive amounts of
mortar and beveling the back sideof the mortar bedbefore
placing the next unit. A wooden
strip should be used in the cavity to catch the mortar
droppings and facilitate their removal. A similar system usinga compressible material could
be employed in cells to be grouted. A
third method is to use cleanout openings
6-13

at the
A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
Obb29Y9 0508b05 6 7 9
Beveled Bed Joints-,
nn
Fig. 6.2-3 Techniques for Maintaining a Clean Cavity

6.2.2 ReinforcementPlacement
Placement of reinforcing bars and joint reinforcement are quite different. Reinforcing bars
must always be embedded in grout; joint reinforcement is embedded in mortar and grout.
Individual ties and anchors are discussed in MDG 6.2.3. Code 1.2.1 requires that the size,
grade, type, and location of reinforcement be shown on
the project drawings and typical
details. These requirements are to be followed during the placement. If this information
is not provided in the contract documents, the contractor should obtain that information
before proceeding with the work.
It is generally acceptable to lay joint reinforcement directly on top of the masonry course.
Mortar is then spread over the wire and face shell in one operation. Due to irregularities
in the
masonry
and the wire, mortar surrounds the wire and provides

strength
6-14

A C 1T I T L E * f l D G
73
Obb2747 0508bOb 5 0 5
development.Fullscaletestshaveconsistentlyverifiedthisphenomenon.
It is not
recommended to place the wire between thin layers of bed-joint mortar, since this mortar
has a tendency to dry out and lose bond.
Cover requirements for joint reinforcement per Specs. 3.3.3.4(d) are 1/2 in. on the inside
face and a minimum of 5/8 in. on the exterior face of a wall; these are clearly less than that
recommended for other reinforcement.
The placement of reinforcement has to be carried out carefully to ensure that there is
enough grout around the bar, and to ensure that the bar is located where theA/E intended.
In order to guarantee proper bond between reinforcing steel and grout, bars must have a
clear distance from any face of masonry or formed surface of 1/4 in. for fine grout and 1/2
in. for coarse grout per Specs. 3.3.3.4.
In order to ensure that bars are in the proper location to resist stresses, bars mustbe placed
within specific tolerances as listed in Table
6.2.1 per Specs. 3.3.3.2. If interferences exist that
require movement of the reinforcement greater than one bar diameter or the specified
tolerances, the A/E or the owners designated representative should be notified as stated in
Specs. 3.3.3.2(c).
Table 6.2.1 ReinforcementPlacementTolerances
I Distance From Centerline of Steel To the Opposite Face

Element
of Masonry
> 8 in. but S 24 in.
> 24 in.
Walls and Flexural Elements
2 112 in.
f 1 in.
& 1 1/4 in.
For vertical bars, 2 in. from location along length of wall
Walls
indicated on the Project Drawing
S
8 in.
6-15

A C 1 TITLE*:MDG 93
m Obb2747
0508b07 4 4 1
Reinforcing bars must be held in position during grouting. This

ofways;
one of themostreliableis
can be done in a number
to use reinforcing bar positioners. There are no
requirements for the spacing of these positioners, but they are generally located at the
bottom and top of the wall and at 10 foot intervals. Typical reinforcing bar positioners are
shownin the commentary inSpecs.C.Fig.3.3-1.
Galvaniccorrosion can occurwhen
dissimilar metals are placed in contact with each other. Therefore Specs. 3.3.3.1 states that
contact of dissimilar metals is not to occur. Reinforcing bar positioners should either be of
plastic, or of the same material as the reinforcement.
Reinforcement is not to be bent after being embedded in the mortar or groutunless
approved by the PJE or the owners designated representative per Specs. 3.3.3.4(c). Bending
of the reinforcement can
break bond, create voids in mortar or grout, and weaken the
reinforcement.
To ensure the adequate transfer of the forces that the reinforcement is intended to resist,
Specs 3.3.3.4(b) stipulates that all splices madeto connect reinforcing together should be as
indicated in the contract documents or as approved by the A/E or the owners designated
representative.
6.23
Tie and Anchor Placement
The Specifications requirements for placement of individual ties and anchors are the same
as for reinforcement. Code 4.3 states that the type, size and location of connectors shall be
shown or indicated in the contractdocuments, and that these requirements are to be
followed during the placement. While it is not the intent of the Code that every connector
must be shown, there should be enough information on the drawingsto make it clear to the
contractor whatisrequired.
These requirements are necessary to achieve the design
strength and provide proper connection. If this information is not provided in the drawings
and specifications, the contractor should obtain the information before proceeding with the
work.
6- 16

AC1
TITLEaMDG 9 3 m Obb2949 0508608 388 m
Proper interactionbetween
the tiesandanchorsand
the masonry elements relieson
sufficient bond to the embedded portion of the tie or anchor in the mortar or grout. Per
Specs. 3.3.2.1 the embedded portions per Specs. 3.3.2.1 should be kept free of laitance, dirt,
sand, oil, or debris that will inhibit bond with the
mortar and grout. By Specs. 3.3.3.5(c)
portions of the ties and anchors are not to be bent after being embedded in the mortar or
grout unless approved. Bending of these items can break the bond that exists, create voids
in the mortar or grout and weaken the member through improper bending techniques.
The Code and Specifications do not require the use of extra wall ties around the perimeter
ofwall panels and around openings.Both
the BIA and NCMA recommend extra ties.
Using those recommendations, wall ties should be spaced at 12 in. around openings and at
the edges of masonry walls.
Code 5.14 coversstructuraldesignaspects
of anchor boltssolidlygroutedinmasonry.
Spacing and location are addressed in light of potential failure modes.

Wall ties and anchors can be placed directly on top of masonry units and covered with the
bed jointmortar; alternatively the embedded portion canbe placed in the fresh mortar prior
to the placement of the next unit, so that the embedded portion is fully surrounded and the
specified reinforcement minimum coveris achieved. Because joint reinforcement should be
placed in fresh mortar, two-piece ties are better suited for multiwythe walls in which the
wythes are not constructed simultaneously.
to be embedded at least
For solid units and hollow units with cells filled solid, wall ties need
1-1/2 in. per Specs. 3.3.3.5(a). Minimum wall tie cover requirements from the exterior face
of the masonry are not given; however the requirements for joint reinforcement serve as a
good guideline. Hence, for a 3-5/8 in. brick unit the wall ties can be embedded from 1-1/2
in. to 3 in. into the brick. This allows standard sizes of wall ties to be used for a variety of
cavity widths.
6-17

A C 1 TITLE+MDG 93
Obb2949 0508609 214
Specs. 3.3.3.5(a) also stipulates that for hollow units, ties must extend to the outer face shell
and be embedded at least 1/2 in. into it. This is clearly less embedment than that typically
obtained with solid units. For this reason, anchors extending into grouted cores should be
considered. The placement of connectors on mortared crosswebs of hollow units is not
recommended since crosswebs seldom line up.
6.2.4 UnitPlacement
The placement of the units, Specs. 2.3.3.3, is an operation that occurs in conjunction with
the placement of the mortar. The requirements governing placementof mortar are equally
important in the placement of the units. The plastic mortar serves as a separator to allow
for dimensional tolerances in
the units. The hardened mortar is the bonding agent that
holds the individual units together
to act as acompleteassembly.Unless
the units are
properly placed, the mortar bond will be weakened or destroyed, creating paths for air and
water infiltration.
All units should be cut with a masonry sawor other means that will not damage the exposed
manufactured faces or edges. Wet cutting of units will add moisture to the units. Failure
to allow the moisture to evaporate before the unit is set in the mortar could inhibit bondby
decreasing the units ability to absorb water-cement matrix. Concrete masonry units must
be allowed to dry before laying to reduce subsequent shrinkage. Dry cutting is preferred if
the units are to be set immediately after they are cut.
Bond strength beginsto develop the instant the unit comes in contact withthe mortar. This
makes itessential that theunit is shoved tightlyinto position so that thejoint size is achieved
without disturbing the unit. Disturbing the unit after it has been placed breaks the initial
bond of the mortar to the unit and will reduce bond. Per Specs. 2.3.3.3(f)1 any unit that is
moved after initial set will require: the unit be removed, mortar to be removed from the
unit and masonry be reset after placement of new mortar. Fig. 6.2-4 shows the unit being
properly shoved into position. To enable the appropriate amount of water cement matrix
6-18

to be absorbed from the mortar by the unit, the units should be free of laitance or other
bond inhibitors, such as dirt, sand, oil, or debris that will inhibit suction by the units. The
placement of the units should be soon after mortar placement to prevent water loss from
the mortar by evaporation.
Fig. 6.2-4 UnitPlacement

The performance of the units during the normal course of construction may require some
modification. On dry, normal temperature days, absorptive clay masonry units may haveto
be wetted to reduce the initial rate of absorption. See MDG 6.1.3 and Specs. 2.3.2.4. Water
additions should be adequate to alter theabsorption characteristics to the desired range at
the time of laying, i.e., 5 to 30 grams of water per minute per 30 sq in. of masonry unit.
Bond strength will be increased, provided the units are essentially uniform in their rate of
suction. Concrete masonry units normally should not be wetted before use in masonry per
Specs. 2.3.2.4(a).
6-19

By altering normal constructionpractices,

performance of the masonryassemblyin
the masoncontractorcanalsoinfluence
the
the completedconstruction.Duringdry,high
temperature periods, the mortar bed length laid in advanceof placing the subsequent course
must be reduced(Specs. 2.3.2.3).
See MDG 7.1. The "pick and dip"method,whereby
mortar sufficient for one unit is laid and the upper unit is immediately laid, is one method
for increasing the bond strength of the masonry under these conditions.
Moist curing of masonry will promote further hydration of the cement and increase all
performance characteristics, most significantlythe bond strength of the masonry. The field
application of excess water should be avoided as soluble bases and salts may be dissolved
and concentrate on the surface of the masonry as efflorescence. See MDG 6.1.
Cells in hollow units to be grouted are to be aligned per Specs. 2.3.3.3(d)4. Consideration
should be given to the coring pattern of the unit so that core alignment can be achieved.
6.2.5
GroutPlacement
The preparation of spaces to be grouted andthe
placement of the groutshould
be
performed in accordance with Specs. 4.3 and with the project drawings and specifications.
Prior to placing the grout, the cells or voids to receive the grout should be inspected to
ensure that they are clean and free of all debris that could inhibit the free flow of the grout
and complete filling of the space. All reinforcement in place shouldbe inspected to ensure
that it is properly located, supported to minimize movement, and has sufficient surrounding
space for grout. Proper bond between the grout and the reinforcernent and the proper
placement of the reinforcement will not occur if the reinforcement is forced into the grout.
All required cleanouts should be in place and fillers ready to plug the cleanouts. Cleanouts
are required at vertical reinforcement bar locations and at a minimum horizontal spacingof
32in.when
the groutpourexceeds
5 ft inheight.
The minimumcleanoutopening
dimension shall be at least 3 in. and of sufficient size to permit removal of the debris. See
reference (6.2.3).
6-20

Grout should be placedwithin 1 1/2 hours from the time water is introduced into the
mixture to ensure that the proper flow and bond is achieved. Cold
weather procedures
discussed in MDG 7.2 apply to the placement of grout. The grout shall be confined to the
spaces to be grouted without inhibiting the bond between the masonry unit and mortar.
Grout is poured in lifts not more than 5 ft high. Lifts should
not be terminated at a bed
joint in the masonry. Stopping 1-1/2 in. below the bed joint is recommended. One or more
lifts comprise a grout pour. A grout pour is the total height of grout placed in a masonry
wall before constructing additional masonry; it usually should not be higher than 24 ft. The
maximum height of a grout pour is limited by the type of grout (fine or coarse) and the size
of the grout space. See Specs. Table 4.3.3.4. This table gives maximum grout pour height
for minimum width of the grout space or minimum grout space of cells in hollow units when
either fine and coarse grouts are used. The maximum lift heightsand pour heights specified
for each project must take into account the ability of the wall, with or without bracing, to
resist the fluid grout pressure without damage to the wall.
Each lift of grout should be properly consolidated and reconsolidated per Specs. 4.3.3.6 to
ensure complete filling of the space, surrounding of the reinforcement, and the filling of
voids created by water loss and settlement. The Specifications require mechanical vibration
of the grout during the placement and reconsolidation after the initialwaterloss
and
settlement for all pours exceeding 12 in. high. Pours 12 in. or less in height need only be
vibrated or puddled. The vibrator size and type, velocity, time in the grout and spacing of
the points vibrated are a function of the type of grout and the size of the space being
grouted. Generally, a low velocity vibrator placed in cells
12 to 16 in. apart for one to two
seconds is considered sufficient.

Additional discussions on theconventional methods of low lift groutingand high lift grouting
are found in reference (6.2.4). In some parts of the USA full-height grouting(24 foot height
of wall in one lift at one time) has been successfully used and is acceptable by the UBC
(6.2.5).
6-21

A C 1 TITLExMDG 9 3
Obb2949 0 5 0 8 b L 3 745
6.2.6 Flashing and WeepholePlacement
Flashing and weepholes are required to be in accordance with the Contract Documents by
Specs. 2.1.1.1 and are mentioned in Specs. 2.3.3.6(f). Proper placement of the flashing and
weeps is required to allow them to perform their intended purpose. Thus suggestions are
presented in the MDG.
The specified flashing and weep systems should be installed in a manner that will direct
water to the exterior of the wall without allowing it to flow to the interior. Flashing should
collect and contain the water; the weepholes providea conduit for the water to travel to the
exterior. Typically flashing is installedat all interruptions in the vertical plane of a masonry
wall, such as tops of the foundation, above shelf angles, over openings, above bond beams,
etc. All lap joints should be sealed with adhesive to maintain continuity of the flashing and
prevent intrusion of water into the exterior wall and the interior of the building. End dams
should be used where required; i.e., at ends of flashing runs.
The flashing should alsobe installed so that it channelsthe water to the exterior of the wall.
This requires that the flashing extend to or beyond the exterior face of the masonry. Some
flashing materials cannot maintain a permanent configurations such as a formed drip with
a hem.
Weepholes transfer watercollected by flashings to the wall exterior. Theyshould be
installed and protected during construction to maintain drainage. Types of weepholes used
in todays construction are open head joints, open head joints filled with louvers or cellular
material, cotton sash cord, and polyethylene tubes. Cotton sash cord and the polyethylene
tubes do not provide a direct path for the water to follow. The base of the flashing should
be keptclean to prevent accumulated debris from blockingthe open path. Small open holes
and polyethylene tubes can be clogged by much smaller pieces of mortar or other debris
than open head joints. Open head joints result in a larger opening for positivedrainage, but
could also allow intrusion from bugs,
dirt and water. Louvers or cellular material should

6-22

A C 1 TITLE*NDG
93
0662949 0508634 bBL
inhibit intrusion while still allowing drainage.Cotton sash cord weeps remove the water by
absorption and evaporation and may become clogged by remaining salts. This is a slower
means of removing the water than open paths.However,
the sashcord also prevents
infiltration. To allow for significant absorption it is best to leave an 8 in. minimum tail of
sash cord in the cavity. Open weepholes are normally recommended to be spaced at a
maximum of 24 in. on center, and sash cord or other wick type at a maximum of 16 in. on
center. Care must be taken when sealants or paints are applied in the area of weepholes
to prevent clogging or coating the weeps and inhibiting the flow or evaporation.
6.2.7 MovementJointConstruction
Code 5.2.4 requires considerations of the effects of forces and deformations involved in
movement due to manyfactors.
MDG Chapter 10 specifically addresses suchfactors.
Control joint and expansion joint materials are specified in Specs. 2.2.6; the installation is
required to be in accordance with
the Contract Documents by Specs.2.3.3.6(g).
Proper
placement of the joints is required to allow them to perform their intended purpose.
Control joints and expansion joints should be installed in a manner that will allow for the
expected movement and provide a watertight condition. These joints should be located and
detailed on the drawings and described in the project specifications. If this information is
not
provided
in
the contract documents, the contractor should request it before
construction. Control joints in concrete masonry create a weakened section forcing cracking
to occur at that predetermined locationwheretensilestress
from restrained shrinkage
exceed the material strength. Expansion joints in clay brick masonry are intended to allow
for the expansion from thermal effects, moisture effects,and freeze-thaw effects. Both joint
types should have their exterior surface sealed to prevent water penetration.
Control joints in concrete masonry are typically constructedby aligning a vertical head joint,
raking back the mortar in the joint to create a weak plane for the crack to occur and
installing sealant to prevent migration of moisture. The ends between the units may be
6-23

93
Obb2949 0508635 5LB
laterally supported with an interlock, cross-shaped gasket,
or cementitious fill and bond
breaker such as building paper is installed to prevent bond to one side. Fig. 6.2-5 shows
three methods of constructing control joints.
Preformed Gasket
Special
Joint
Units
Units
Rake Joint
and Caulk
Fig. 6.2-5 Control Joint Wpes
Expansion joints are made by leaving an unobstructed void in clay brick masonry, thus
allowing the two way movement.
joints,keeping
These joints are constructed by aligning vertical head
the joints free of all mortar or other materials that couldrestrict
the
movement of the masonry units toward each other, and sealing the exterior with a sealant
and backer rod or a manufactured joint cover to prevent moisture from entering the joint.
Compressible materials such as those shown in Fig. 6.2-6 can be placed in the joint during
construction and left in placeif they havethe ability to be compressed the necessary amount
to prevent damage to the units.
6-24

AC1
T I T L E x M D G 93 W 0662949 0 5 0 8 6 3 6 4 5 4 m
/-2o
-Sealant
OZ
foam
7Premolded
rubber or plastid
Copper
and
backer rod
-Sealant
and
backer rod
/-Extruded pad -Neoprene
-Sealant
plastic
and
backer rod
-Sealant
and
backer rod
Fig. 6.2-6 ExpansionJoint mpes

6 3 TOLERANCE
63.1 Introduction
Construction is not an absolute and completely controllable process. As such, consideration
for dimensional limitations of materials and systems and for workmanship is essential. Every
building component and construction operation is subject to dimensional variations which
must be understood and allowed for in the design and constructionprocess.Thismust
include not only the masonry components and assemblages, but also
systems
such
the other building
as foundations, structural frame, floor slabs and finishes. The final
manufactured or fabricated product must be integrated with the ongoing construction.

be detailed and identified as totolerances.
During the design process, building systems must
This establishes the dimensional relationships among the various building systems. These
dimensional tolerances accommodate the needed variations and allow the various systems
and components to form an integrated building.
It should be anticipated that design dimensions applied during constructionare not absolute
but in fact vary. Some aspects in design are more critical than others and require more
6-25

A C 1 TITLE*UDG
93
m 0662949 050BbL7 390 m
attention. These variations are the difference between the theoretical size and location (as
designed) and the finished size and location (as-built). The design dimension (absolute)
combined with the tolerance dimension (controlled variation) locates
within the established limits. This anticipated dimensioned range
than the design dimension. This method
the design elements
can be larger or smaller
of dimensioned work in design provides
for the
variation so materials and components will fit when constructed.

The constructionprocessconsists
of a series of independent actions that must be
coordinated to result in a predictable product.

example, windows must fit
All of the building systems must fit.
into openings, concrete foundation walls must align with
For
the
construction above, steel supports must be level and align within the wall. These are real
every day conditions that need to be considered. The different trades working together as
a team will coordinate with each other on how their work will interface with existing and
of anticipating tolerance requirements can
future construction. Only through this process
the completed construction meet the design requirements.

63.2
AC1 530.UASCE 6/TMS 602 Reference
Most successful construction work is based
on repeated successes involving professionals
working together in a timely manner. Design professionals maintain these successes from
project to project by following the standards recommended by each industry. The masonry
industry has provided recommended tolerances. Specs.
2.3.2.1, 2.3.3.2 and 3.3.3.2. include
the present masonry standards on tolerances. Specs.

2.3.2.1 addresses foundation tolerances,
Specs. 2.3.3.2 presents tolerances on erecting masonry, and Specs. 3.3.3.2 covers tolerances
on placing reinforcement.
633 Tolerance
Product placement or fabricated units shouldbe located at the specified location withinthe
established deviations. The theoretical line or plane should be plumb, in alignment or level
6-26

93 W Ob62949 0508618 2 2 7
for that reference construction. These conditions are defined as follows: (1) alignment
(plan or elevation oriented) is an in and out placement variation (tolerance) from the design
dimension (absolute) measured from the control reference; (2) the level (elevationoriented)
is an up and down placement variation (tolerance) from the design dimension (absolute)
measured from the control reference in elevation- floor elevation; and (3) plumb (vertically
oriented) is an in and out placementvariation
(tolerance) from the designdimension
(absolute) measured from the control reference in section, see Figs. 6.3-1, 6.3-2, and 6.3-3.
In the three figures the actual element variation is not shown but would fall within the
boundary represented by C. These dimensionaldeviationsshould
be annotated in the
contract documents where required.
Also, tolerance restricts the size of construction elements. For example, the thickness of the
mortar joint, the collar joint width, the thickness of the masonry walls, the size of openings
in the wall and other conditions are controlled to account for variations in size of masonry
units and workmanship of the mason.However,
the specifications does not nowgive
dimensional tolerances for movement joints. Tolerance requirements set the limits for how
workshould
be performed to fitwithinthedesign.
Remember, tolerances are not
cumulative.
...
?-
Plan View (Looking Down)

Legend
A
B-
C-
Control Reference;i.e.,
Grid Centerline
Design Dimension
(Absolute)
Fig. 63-1 Line Tolerance
6-27

Tolerance Range
(Limited Variation)
Theoretical Line
(Absolute Location)
Elevation View
Legend
ControlReferen; i.e.
Finish Hmr Elevation
Top of Steel or Concrete
Top of Foundation
Design
Dimension
(Absolute)
Toleran Range
(Limited Variation)
Theoretical Line
(Absolute Location)
Fig. 63-2 LevelTolerance
Vertical Section View
Control
Reference;
i.e.
Grid Centerline
Vertical D
Orientation
Dimension
BDesign
(Absolute)
A
Legend
C-
Tolerance
Range
(Limited Variation)
- Theoretical Line
Location)
(Absolute
Fig. 6.33 PlumbTolerance
6-28

A C 1 TITLESMDG 93
0 6 6 2 9 4 9 O508620 985
63.4 Tolerance Examples

63.4.1 Mortar Joint - The most basic tolerance contribution in the exterior masonry wall
construction is the variation in the mortar joint thickness. This variation compensates for
the nominal changes in actual size in the manufactured masonry units and for the dexterity
and skill level of the mason in determining the amount of mortar that should be placed on
each joint. The Specs. 2.3.3.2(a)2 requirement for the mortarbed joint states thattolerance
should not vary more than +/- 1/8 in. If the design thickness is 3/8 in., the maximum bed
joint thickness variation would be from a minimum of 1/4 in. to a maximum of 1/2 in. The
same design thickness for the mortar head joint could vary from the design value by -1/4
in. to +3/8 in. as given in Specs. 2.3.3.2(a)2, equivalent to a minimum joint thickness of 1/8
in. to a maximum width thicknessof 3/4 inch. These variations in the mortarjoint thickness
are in part caused by the unit variation and the workmanship of the individual mason.
63.4.2 Masonry Openings - From Specs.2.3.3.2(a)lamasonry

elevation dimension from -1/4 in. to
opening can varyin
+ 1/2 in. If the actual masonry opening width is 4 ft-O
3/8 in., the actual permissible dimension could range from 4 ft-O 1/8 in. to 4 ft-O 7/8 in. If
the A/E designs the sealant joint width to be 1/4 in. as shown in Fig. 6.3-4, the sealant will
fit only if the masonry openingis constructed accordingto the design dimension which isnot
always possible. The window manufacturer will fabricate the window to 3 ft-11 7/8 in. A
potential for the masonry opening being constructedat the smaller dimension exists, leaving
the possibility for the joint width to be O in. on one side and 1/4 in. on the otherside, or 1/8
in. on both sides (see Fig. 6.3-5). Three out of the four combinations are not acceptable
relative to the minimum sealant width requirement of 1/4 in. Therefore, wider perimeter
sealant joints should be designed. To anticipate variations inthe construction of a masonry
opening, the minimum perimeter sealant joint should be 1/2 in. wide instead of the 1/4 in.
shown in the example.
6-29

A C 1 TITLE*NDG
W,
93
m 0662949
050Bb2L Bll
4'- O 318"
M .O.
3"11 718"
W .o.
114" Sealant
Aluminum Frame
Glass
M.O.- Masonly Opening

W.O.
Design Dimensions
Legend
- Width
Window
Fig. 63-4 Comer of Window as Designed (Elevation)

M.O.constructed -1/4" from the
design dimension
Unacceptable Sealant Width
AluminumFrame
r
F
-
M.O.- Masonry Opening
Constructed Condition
Legend
Glass
W.O.- Width
Window
Fig. 63-5 Comer of Window as Built (Elevation)

6-30

TITLE*HDG 9 3 m 0662949 0508622 758 m
AC1
63.43 Vertical Expansion Joints
- Vertical expansion
joints in brick masonry are often
undersized; and one such aspect not considered usuallyis tolerance. Other factors, such as
aesthetics, have causedthe undersizing of this type of joint in cases, where narrow
joints are
desired to match the design width of the mortar joint. In fact no expansion joints at all are
used in some projects. If, for example, the joint width were designed for 3/8 in., this width
would be inadequate if construction tolerances were
not considered. See Fig. 6.3-6. The
tolerance for expansion joint width must be specified. The tolerances should be such that
the minimum sealant joint width as recommended by different sealant manufacturers is met.
This sealant joint would not perform under these circumstances.
Backer -
I
Design
f
Tolerance As Specified
Fig. 63-6 Undersized Expansion Joints

6.4
CLEANING
Even with construction protection in place,some mortar smears and splatters will inevitably
occurduringconstruction.Whilefresh
mortar splatters can be cleanedfairlyeasily,
6-31

removing stains may not be as simple. Cleaning operations affect the finished appearance
of masonry. Improper cleaning materials or procedures can often be the source of difficult
or permanent discolorations.Specs.2.2.7addressesmasonrycleaners.
For specific
information on identifylng unknown stains

and determining optimum cleaning methods,
refer
to Grimm, Tleaning Masonry - A Review of the Literature" (6.4.1).
6.5
QUALITYASSURANCIYQUALITY CONTROL CHECKLIST
MDGChapters 5, 6, and 7 deal withmasonryconstructionmaterials,testing,quality

assurance, and qualitycontrolprovisions
related to the Code and Specifications. The
Specifications provide either mandatory or optional quality assurance and quality control
requirements compiled in MDG Table 6.5.1, Quality Assurance/Quality Control Checklist.
This table references sections of the Specifications and MDG and states
provisions are mandatory or optional.ThisChecklistshould
whether the
be applied to allmasonry
projects. Quality assurance and control requirements can vary from project to project. A
requirement for one project can be different for another. The design dictates what aspects
are tobe used and what importance it will have for that condition. Generic examples should
not be applied without evaluating each aspect under consideration. These conditions have
to be evaluated for each project.
Application of the Checklist to an individual project should begin with the identification of
the materials to be used in the construction. This willallow immediate identification of
those itemsthat are eithermandatory or not applicable. For example, certificationand shop
drawings for reinforcing would notrequire shop drawings sincejoint reinforcing is considered
to be a tie and not reinforcement. To complete the Checklist for an individual project, the
remaining items must be analyzed to determine their importance tothe
successful
completion and serviceability of the building. An example of this would be where a specific
manufacturer's product is specified and no substitutions are allowed. In this case samples
may not be necessary once certification is received that these products will be used.
6-32

A C 1 T I T L E W N D G 73
Obb2949 0508624 5 2 0
To illustrate the application of this Checklist, MDG Table 6.5.2 is a suggested application
to the threedistinct masonry buildings: 1) T M S Shopping Center, 2) DPC Gymnasium, and
3) RCJ Hotel that arespecifically presented in MDG Chapter 9 and used throughout MDG
Chapters 9 through 16 for application of the structural design methodology and provisions
found in the Code. Each building can have different wall construction types (options) as
follows:
TMS Shopping Center

Unreinforced Concrete Masonry (A)
Reinforced Concrete Masonry (B)
DPC Gymnasium
Unreinforced Brick-Block Noncomposite (A)
Unreinforced Brick-Block Composite (B)
Reinforced Brick-Block Composite (C)
Reinforced Hollow Clay Masonry (D)
RCJ Hotel
Unreinforced Brick-Block Noncomposite (A)
Reinforced Hollow Clay Masonry (B)
Based on thewall systemand the significance of the facilities, Table 6.5.2 indicates the most
appropriate options: (1) Mandatory = M; (2) Not Applicable = -- (3) Recommended =
R, (4) Not Recommended = N.
REFERENCES
6.1.1 "Designing Grout Mixes," Magazine of Masonry Construction, Addison, Illinois, June
1991, PP. 218-220.
6-33

A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93
6.2.1
Ob62747 0 5 0 8 b 2 5 4b7
"Recommended Practice For Engineered Brick Masonry," BrickInstitute of America,

Reston, Virginia, 1969, p.263.
6.2.2
Brick
Technical Note 7B, "Water Resistance of
Masonry Construction and
Workmanship Part III of III," Brick Institute of America, Reston, Virginia, April
1985, PP. 3-4.
6.2.3 "How to Place Grout," Magazine of Masonry Construction, Addison, Illinois, June
1991, PP. 216-217.

May 1988,
6.2.4 "High Lift Grouting," Magazine of Masonry Construction, Addison, Illinois,
PP. 60-62.
6.2.5
"Grout 24-Foot-High Wall inOne Lift," Magazineof Masonry Construction, Addison,

Illinois, April 1989, pp. 137-139.
6.4.1
Grimm, C. T., "Cleaning Masonry - A Review of the Literature," Arlington, Texas,

Construction Research Center of the University of Texas at Arlington, 1988.
6-34

AC1
TITLE+MDG 93
0662949 0508626 3T3
Table 6.5.1 Quality Assurance/Quality Control Checklist
O = Optional
M = Mandatory
Quality Assurance (Owners effort to measurequality and determine its acceptability)
Certification
Brick Units (Specs. 2.1.2.1 h) ......................................O

CMU Units (Specs. 2.1.2.lh) ...................................... O
Mortar Mix (Specs. 2.1.2.lh) ......................................O
Grout Mix (Specs. 2.1.2.lh,4.1.2.2)
................................. O
Reinforcing Steel (Specs. 3.1.2.lb) ..................................
M
Joint Reinforcing (Specs. 3.1.2.1~) .................................. M
Anchor Bolts (Specs. 3.1.2.1~) .....................................
M
Ties and Anchors (Specs 3.1.2.1~) ..................................
M
M
Metal Accessories (Specs. 3.1.2.1~)..................................
Hot Weather Construction (Specs. 2.1.2.ld) ...........................

Cold Weather Construction (Specs. 2.1.2.1~)...........................
Cleaning Method and Materials (Specs. 2.2.7) .........................
O
O
O
Material Samples
Brick Units (Specs.2.1.2.la) ......................................

O
CMU Units (Specs.2.1.2.la) ......................................
O
Colored Mortar (Specs.2.1.2.la) ...................................
O
Sample Panel (Specs. 2.1.2.2) ......................................
O
Joint Reinforcing (Specs. 3.1.2.1~) ..................................
O
Anchor Bolts(Specs. 3.1.2.1~) ..................................... O
Ties and Anchors (Specs. 3.1.2.1~) ..................................
O
Metal Accessories (Specs. 3.1.2.1~)..................................
O
Flashing and Joints (Specs. 2.1.2.lg) .................................
O
Shop Drawings
Reinforcing Steel (Specs. 2.1.2.lf, 3.1.2.la) ............................

M
Lintels and Door Frames (Specs. 2.1.2.lf 3.1.2.la) ...................... M
Shelf Angles and Lintels (Specs. 2.1.2.lf, 3.1.2.la) ......................
M
6-35

73
m 0662749
0508627 2 3 T D
Table 6.5.1 Contd.

~
Quality Control (ContractoWManufacturerseffort to achieve a specified result)
Pre-Construction Testing
Brick Units .Compression ASTM C 67 (Specs. 2.1.3.2b) ................. M

Brick Units .IRA C 67 (Specs. 2.3.2.4b) .............................
O
CMU Units .ASTM C 140 (Specs. 2.1.32) ..........................
M
Structural Granite .Compression ASTM C 97 (Specs. 2.1.3.2~) ............M
Building Sandstone.Compression ASTM C 120 (Specs. 2.1.3.2~) ........... M
Structural Slate .Compression ASTM C 99 (Specs. 2.1.3.2~)............... M
Exterior Marble Building Stone-CompressionASTM C 170 (Specs. 2.1.3.2~) ... M
Limestone Building Stone .Compression ASTM C 121 (Specs. 2.1.3.2) ...... M
Masonry Modulus of Rupture (MDG 5.4.1.5) ..........................
O
Freeze-Thaw Durability (MDG 3.1.4) ................................
O
Prism Compression Strength (Specs. 2.1.3.3) ...........................
O
Mortar Compression Strength (Specs.2.1.2.lb,2.1.3.4)
................ O
Grout Compression Strength (Specs.1.6.2.1,1.6.2.2,2.1.3.5,4.1.3)
.......... O
Grout Slump (Specs. 4.2.2.2) ......................................
M
Construction Testing
Brick Unit Compression (Specs. 2.3.1.ld) .............................

CMU Unit Compression (Specs, 2.3.1.ld) .............................
Prism Compression Strength (Specs. 2.3.1.ld) ..........................
Field IRA (MDG 5.4.1.1) ........................................
Mortar (Specs. 2.3.1.lb) ..........................................
Grout (Specs.2.3.1.lb,4.1.3) ......................................
M
M
M
O
O
O
Review Manufacturers Reports
Brick(Specs.2.3.1.la) ...........................................
CMU (Specs. 2.3.1.la) ...........................................
Mortar (Specs. 2.3.1.lb) ..........................................
Grout (Specs. 2.3.1.lb) ...........................................
Cement Materials (Specs. 2.3.1.le) ..................................
Aggregate(Specs.2.3.1.le)
.......................................
Reinforcing Steel (Specs. 2.3.1.le) ..................................
Ties and Anchors (Specs. 2.3.1.le) ..................................
11
6-36

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
Obb2747 O508628 176 m
Table 6.5.1 Contd.
Inspection
Delivery, Storage, and Handling (Specs. 2.3.1.2b) .......................

O
Brick Units (MDG 6.1.3) .........................................
O
CMU Units (MDG 6.1.3) ......................................... O
Mortar Mixing (MDG 5.3.5) ......................................
O
Grout Mixing (MDG 5.3.5) .......................................
O
Reinforcing Steel (MDG 6.1.4) ....................................
O
Joint Reinforcement (MDG 6.1.4) ..................................O
Ties and Anchors (MDG 6.1.4) ....................................O
Flashing and Weephole Materials (MDG 6.2.6) ........................
O
Movement Joints (MDG 6.2.7) .....................................
O
Foundation Tolerances (Specs. 2.3.2.1.1) .............................
M
O
Dimensional Tolerances (MDG 6.3) .................................
Foundations (Specs. 1.5.1.2) .......................................
M
O
Attend Pre-Bid Meeting (MDG 5.3.2) ...............................
Attend Pre-Construction Meeting (MDG 5.3.2) ........................
O
Procedures
Hot Weather Construction Procedure (Specs. 2.3.2.3) ....................

M
Cold Weather Construction Procedure (Specs. 2.3.2.2) ...................M
O
Unit Placement (MDG 6.2.4) ......................................
Steel Placement (MDG 6.2.2) .....................................
O
Tie and Anchor Placement (MDG 6.2.3) .............................
O
Mortar Placement (MDG 6.2.1) ....................................
O
Grouting (MDG 6.2.5) ...........................................
O
Flashing and Weephole Placement (MDG 6.2.6) .......................
O
Movement Joint Placement (MDG 6.2.7) .............................
O
Cleaning Procedure (MDG 6.4) ....................................
O
Maintain Daily Log (MDG 5.3.4) ...................................
O

A C 1 TITLE*UDG
93
0662747 0508627 002
Table 6.5.2 Quality Assurance/Quality Control Checklist For Masonry Buildings
--
R = Recommended for this project

N = Not recommended for this project
= Not applicable to this project
M = Mandatory per Specs. 530.1
q E E E
Wall Construction Type
Quality Assurance
Certification
Brick Units
CMU Units
"
"
R
R
--
Reinforcing Steel
--
Joint Reinforcing
Anchor Bolts
Ties and Anchors
Metal Accessories
Hot Weather Construction
Cold Weather Construction
Cleaning Method and Materials
Brick Units
CMU Units
Mortar Mix
I Grout Mix
II
R
"
"
R
M
M
M
PIWedureS
Material Samples
Colored Mortar
"
R
"
"
Sample Panel
Joint Reinforcing
6-38

A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93
0bb2747 0508b30 8 2 4
Table 6.5.2 Cont'd.
DPC Gymnasium
Building
RCJ Hotel
Anchor Bolts
Ties and Anchors
Metal Accessories
Hashing and Joints
II
Shop Drawings
Reinforcing Steel
__
__
--
Lintels and Door Frames
Shelf Angles and Lintels
6-39

"
M M
Obb2949 0508b3L 760
Table 6.5.2 Cont'd.
Building
DPC Gymnasium RCJ
Wall Construction Type
A l B l C l D
Hotel
CMU Unit Compression
Prism Compression Strength

Field IRA
Mortar
--
- - I R I R I R
Grout
Review Manufacturer's Reports

Brick Units
CMU Units
Mortar
Grout
Cement Material
Aggregates
Reinforcing Steel
RIR
Ties and Anchors

Inspection
Delivery, Storage, & Handling
Brick Units
CMU Units
Mortar Mixing
Grout Mixing
Reinforcing Steel
x-
Joint Reinforcement
Ties and Anchors
Flashing and Weephole Materials
"
Movement Joints
Foundation Tolerances
M I M I M
>
6-40

"
"
93 H 0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0508632 b T 7
Table 6.5.2 Cont'd.
Hot Weather Construction Procedure
Cold Weather Construction Procedure
Unit Placement
Steel Placement
"
Tie and Anchor Placement
Mortar Placement
N
R
Grout Placement
"
Cleaning Procedure
Maintain Daily Log
Flashing and Weephole Placement
Movement Joint Placement
6-41

"
A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0508633 5 3 3
7
HOT AND COLD WEATHER CONSTRUCTION
7.0
INTRODUCTION
Weather conditionsduringconstructionaffect
the performance of completedmasonry
structures. Special precautions must be taken during both hot and cold weather to assure
the desiredquality,
and the masonrycontractorshouldfollow
Contract Document
requirements or submit proposed procedures for approval before beginning work
7.1 HOT WEATHER CONSTRUCTION

Hot weather causesspecialproblems
temperatures, lowhumidity
inmasonryconstruction.Combinations
of high
and wind create conditions that mayadverselyaffectthe
properties and performance of materials and components.

7.1.1 Performance of Masonry and Mortar
Rapid evaporation during dry weather reduces the water

lowering both compressive and bondstrength.
reduced, and set occursfaster.With
content of mortar and grout,
Mortar workability and grout flow are
high temperature, mortars shouldhavelowerair
contents and high water retention. Board life of mortar is shorter, and joints must be tooled
sooner than normal. Rapid evaporation at the exterior face of mortar joints decreases
7-1

73
m 0662947 0508634
47T
durability and strength at the surface.

When the water needed for mortar and grout curing is lost byevaporation and unit suction,
the hydration
process
may
actually
stop, and is reactivated

only
by subsequent
re-introduction of moisture. This phenomenon, known as dry-out, canbe avoided by careful

attention to material selection, storage and preparation and masonry protection.
7.1.2 Material Storage,Protection, and Preparation
Specs. 2.3.2.3 requires that approved hot weather procedures, as outlined in the Contract
Documents or proposed by the masonrycontractor,
be implementedwhen
ambient
temperatures exceed 100" F, or 90" F with wind velocities greater than 8 mph. Materials
should be stored in a cool, shaded location. Covering aggregate stockpiles with
a plastic
sheet will retard the evaporation of moisture.

High-suction brick canbe wetted, and additional mixing water maybe needed in mortar and
grout. Metal accessories, reinforcing steel, wheelbarrows, mixersand mortar boards should
be kept cool by flushing with water. Increasing cement content accelerates early strength
gain. Adding extra lime also increases water retentivity. Adding ice
or cooling the mixing
water significantly lowers the temperature of mortar and grout. Hoses stretched too great
a distance from
the source to the mixer can allow the water to become hot, potentially
contributing to flash set of the mortar.

Set-retarding or water-reducingadmixturesshould
be usedonlywhen
approved by the
Owner's representative, and should be tested in advance in accordance with ASTM C 780
and C 1019 (see MDG 5.4).
Sun shades,wind screens and water fog sprays can reduce
the effects of dry, windy weather.
Mortar should not be mixed too far ahead and, when mixed, should
be stored in a cool,
shady location. Hot weather construction requirements, Specs. 2.3.2.3., prohibit spreading
7-2

A C 1 TITLElKMDG 9 3
0662949 0508635 306
mortar beds more than four feet ahead of the masonry and mandate that units be set within
one minute of spreading mortar. A good rule of thumb to remember is that if the mason
has to tap the unit down to the line with his trowel, the mortar bed has probably lost most
of its plasticity and ability to developitsfullbondpotential.Wetting
the constructed
masonry by water spray after the tooled joints have set provides moisture needed for curing,
preventsdry-out,
and effectivelyincreases
the tensile bond strength of the masonry.
Covering masonry slowsthe natural rate of evaporation and creates a greenhouse effect that
aids in moist curing. However, this could cause increased efflorescence.
When temperatures
are extremely high, consideration should also
be given to scheduling work to avoid the
hottest part of the day.
7.2 COLD WEATHER CONSTRUCTION

Cold weather also poses special concerns
for masonry construction and for protection of
completed work. Cold weather construction is defined as any construction occurring when
either the ambient temperature or the temperature of the masonry units is below 40" F.
Temperatures below 40" F affect both materials and performance, and as temperatures
drop, additional protective measures are required (Specs. 2.3.2.2). It is recommended that
the suggestions in "Recommended Practices
and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather
Masonry Construction" by the International Masonry Industry All Weather Council (7.2.2)
should be followed unless amended to more stringent requirements based on experience or
preference. Some A/E firms require that, when the ambient temperature falls below 40"
F, the masonry construction shouldbe protected to maintain the temperatureof the masonry
at or above 40" F for 24 hours.
7.2.1Performance
of Masonry and Mortar
Plastic properties of mortar and grout are changed significantlyat low temperatures. Water
requirements for a given consistency are less, air entraining admixtures are more effective,
and initial and final sets take longer. Early strength development is slower in cold weather,
7-3

A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93
Obb29Y9 0508636 2 4 2 M
but final strength is equal to or greater than that attained at normal temperatures.
One particular concern in cold weather is the possibility of masonry freezing. The rate at
which masonry freezes is influenced by the severity of ambient temperature and wind, the
temperature andabsorption characteristics of the units, the temperature of reinforcing steel
and metal accessories, and the temperatureof the mortar mixture when placed. When fresh
mortar freezes, its performance characteristics
are affected by several factors including water
content, age at freezing and the amount of strength developed prior to freezing. Hydration
of the mortar cannot take place when the temperature is below 40"
content (internal relativehumidity)isless
F and the moisture
than 75%. Frozen mortar takes on all the
outward appearances of hardened mortar. It develops some compressivestrength
as
indicated by its ability to carry loads, and some bond strength as evidenced by its ability to
adhere to other materials. But it is NOT cured, and does not develop full design strength
until thawed and water is again available to complete the cement hydration process. Spring
rains and watering the masonry walls will help provide enough water
to starthydration again
so that the mortar can reach minimum strength.

Water in the mortar expands when it freezes.The higher the water content, the greater the
expansion. If the moisture content is low, expansive forces willbe minimized, so low water
content mortar and high suction units are desirable. Grout is not as weather sensitive as
mortar because it is not exposed to wind, but because of its higher water content, freezing
grout can cause significant disruptive expansion.
Mortar dry-outs can occur during winter
as well as in summer. Heated walls must have
moisture to cure, and walls may have to be wetted to provide adequate water. Sublimation
may also require the addition of water to assure hydration.
Heating and protection of masonry materials prior
to construction are the best defense
against adverse cold weather effects, but mortar and grout mixtures may also be modified
for better performance.
Type III portland cement provides

higher
early
strength
7-4

93
Obb29q9 0508b37 189
development but can also cause color variations. Air

entrainment increases workability and
freeze-thaw resistance. Excessive entrapped air lowers the compressive and bond strength
of mortar and grout, so mortar mixing time should be carefully controlled.
Dispersing agents used in some color pigments have a retarding

and drying effect on cement
hydration. This is particularly undesirable in cold weather. Accelerating agents increase the
rate of early strength development by promoting more rapid cement hydration. Calcium
chlorideaccelerators,however,should
not be usedinmasonryconstructionbecause
of
adverse side effects such as increased efflorescence and corrosion of embedded metals.
Non-chloride accelerators such as soluble carbonates, silicates and fluorosilicates, calcium
aluminate, and triethanolamine are available. These should be approved and tested before
use since potentially they could cause
other problems. So called "anti-freeze" admixtures
that claim to lower the freezing point of mortar must be used in such large quantities to be
effective that theylower both compressive and bond strengthbelow acceptable levels.
Proposedadmixtures
for masonry mortar or groutmust
be approved by the Owner's
representative, and should be tested in advance in accordance withASTM C 780 or C 1019

at the lowest expected temperature at which they will be used in construction (see MDG
5.4). Admixture manufacturers shouldbe required to provide written certification that their
products do not contain chlorides, and do not have adverse effects on either the plastic or
hardened properties of the mortar, grout, or the masonry.
Any masonry that has been constructed during cold weather should be inspected to ensure
that no frozen mortar is present, and that mortar strength development has begun and
continues. Frozen mortar can be detected inseveral ways: (1) a''crow's
feet"pattern
appears on the surface of tooled joints; (2) flaking indicates freezing expansion; and (3)
friable material scratched
from the joint surface indicates frozen
mortar dried through
sublimation. When frozen mortar is detected, the masonryshould be thawed and then
sprayed with a water fog to reactivate hydration. Additional
necessary to assurecontinuation
of the hydrationprocess
strengths.
7-5

heat should be provided as

and development of design
7.2.2
93
Obb2949 0508638 015
MaterialStorage,Protection,andPreparation
The cold weather considerations given in the Specifications are intended to permit masonry
construction to proceed during inclement weather. The protection required is considered
adequate, but minimal for the temperature ranges listed. Proper storage and protection of
materials, heating of materials and mortar ingredients before construction, and protection
of completed work duringmortar and grout curing will prevent early freeze damage. MDG
Table 7.2.1 summarizes the minimum requirements of Specs. 2.3.2.2 for heating and
protection.
Table 7.2.1 Summary of Specifications Requirements
I Mean Daily Air Temp., I
Construction
Requirements
Deg=F
Heating of Materials
Protection
32 - 40
Heat mortar sand or mixing water to

produce mortar between 40-120F at
time of mixing; maintain mortar above
freezing until used in the masonry
Protect completed masonry from rain

or snow with weather-resistant
membrane for 24 hours after
construction
25-32
In addition to the above, thawing wet,

frozen masonry units; heat dry masonry
units to not less than 20F when laid in
the masonry
Completely cover completed masonry

with weather-resistive membrane for24
hours after construction
20-2s
In addition to the above, thawing wet,

units to not less than 20F when laid in
the masonry
Install wind breaks when wind velocity

exceeds 15 mph; provide heat sources
on both sides of masonry under
construction; completely cover
completed masonry with insulating
blankets or equal protection for 24
Below 20
In addition to theabove, thawing wet,

units to not less than 20F when laid ih
the masonry
Provide enclosure for masonry under

construction; use heat sources during
construction to maintain temperatures
above 32F within the enclosure;
maintain 32F in the enclosure for 24
Heating of materials is intended to assure adequate cement hydration in mortar and grout
by maintaining temperatures above 40" F and moisture content above 75%. Mixing water
7-6

93
O662949 0508639 T51
is the easiest material to heat, and it also stores more heat per pound than any other
ingredient (Fig. 7.2-1). Water that is too hot (above 140" F) is a safety hazard.
Fig. 7.2-1 HeatingWater

Because water hotter than 180" F can cause flashset when it comes incontact with cement,
the sand and water should be combined in the mixer first to lower excessive temperatures,
before the cement is added. The temperature of the mixed mortar or grout should be
maintained between 40-70" F until it is used. Smaller batches will be used more quickly,
and will stay warm until placed in the wall. Some mortar silos can be heated to maintain
batch to batch mixtures at a constant temperature.
Sand is generally heated to a minimum temperature of 45-50" F to assure that all frozen
be mixedperiodically to assure uniform
lumps are thawed.Coveredstockpilesshould
heating, and to avoid any possibility of scorching near the heat source. The aggregate can
be piled over a metal pipe containing a fire, or can be heated by steam coils or an ordinary
water heater (Fig.7.2-2).
Cold or frozenmasonryunitscan
7-7

be heated withoil,gas
or
electric hot-air heaters. During verycold weather, frozen wallsmust be thawed before
grouting, and heated enclosures can also be used for this purpose. When air temperatures
are below 40" F, or have been below 32" F during the previous two hours, the air
temperature in the bottom grout space should be raised above 32" before beginning the
grout pour.
Fig. 7.2-2
Heating Aggregates
In addition to normal material storage and protection procedures, a temporary cover should
beerected
over themortar
mixing area to provide a sheltered location for mixing
operations. Temporary enclosures may also be necessary at work areas. Heated enclosures
of plastic sheeting or other materials attached to the scaffolding or supported on other
framework permit year-round construction, provide protection for materials and workers,
help maintain elevated mortar and grout temperatures, and assure sufficient heat for proper
cement hydration (Fig. 7.2-3). Heat can be provided by natural gas, fuel oil, electricity,
steam or bottled propane, but enclosures must also be well ventilated for safety.
7-8

0662947 0.508641 bOT
Fig. 7.2-3 Heated Enclosures
REFERENCES
7.2.1 Frohmader, D. L,"Cold Weather Checklist," The Magazine of Masonry Construction,
Addison, Illinois, November 1990, pp. 503-504.
7.2.2
International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council, Recommended Practices and

Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction, Washington, D.C.,
1970.
7.2.3
International MasonryIndustryAll-WeatherCouncilTechnical
Task Committee,
"All-WeatherMasonryConstructionState-of-the-ArtReport,"Washington,
1968.
7-9

D.C.,
A C 1 TITLEaMDG 93
Obb2949 0 5 0 8 b 4 2 5 4 6
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY & METHODOLOGY
8.0
INTRODUCTION
The design and analysis of masonry building structures is an art as well as a science, since
both creative judgment and engineering principles are required. Decisions must
about the type(s) of masonryunit(s)
accessoriesmust
be selected.
tobe
used.
be made
Mortar, grout, reinforcement, and
The configuration of the masonryassemblymust
determined.
Architectural
considerations,
such
be
as weatherproofing,
fireproofing,
soundproofing and appearance, must be coordinated withstructural behavioral requirements.

The nature and magnitude of loading that the structure will experience must be predicted.
Although building structure self weight can be determined fairly accurately, the magnitude
of live loads is more uncertain. Superimposed gravitydead andlive loads may vary overthe
life of abuilding.
Lateral loads, most often
due to wind or earthquake, are probability
based.
Just as loads can vary, so can the strength of materials that make up the structural system,
due to material inconsistencies and manufacturing tolerances. The quality of workmanship
used to assemble these materials is also variable, depending upon locale,the experience of
the mason, and the extent of inspection.
8-1

A C 1 TITLE*NDG
93
0662747 0508643 4 8 2
Previous masonry codes recognizedthe variability in workmanship quality

by differentiating
between "inspected" and "uninspected" construction. The designer wasrequired to use lower
allowable masonrystresses for uninspected construction. The design provisionsof the Code,
however, are predicated upon the fact that good workmanship is a
requirement of the
Specifications, withwhich compliance is required by Code 3.1.1. Good workmanship must

be verified by a qualityassuranceprogram.
The Code does not permit"uninspected"
workmanship.
Different design philosophies have
been developed to account for the load and material
variabilities and uncertainties. In the strength design method, applied loads are increased
by load factors, with gravity live loads
and lateral loads increased by larger factors than
gravity dead loads. The requiredstrengthbased
on factoredloads is compared to the
strength capacity of the section, reducedby a materials variability factor. The UBC permits
the strength design of shear walls and slender walls subjected to out-of-plane lateral loads.
The MSJC is currently developing a limit
states design standard for masonry structures.
Limit states design is based on the theory of probability in which statistically determined
"expected" valuesof materials, assembly,and system properties are used. Capacity reduction
factors and load amplification factors are applied similarto the strength design method.The
capacity reduction factor reflects not only the material variability, but also the reliability of
the design equation and the potentiallyundesirableconsequencesassociatedwiththe
occurrence of the limit state for which the capacity is being calculated.
The Code is based upon the allowable working stress design philosophy(Code 5.1.). In this
method, calculated stresses resulting from service or working loads (not increased by load
factors) are compared to Code-specifiedallowablevalues.
The serviceloads are of a
magnitude that may be assumed to actually occur during the lifetimeof the structure. This
design philosophy is discussed in more detail in MDG 8.2.
8-2

A C 1 T I T L E + M D G 93
m 0662949 0508644
319
8.1 WHAT IS MASONRY
Masonry consists of relatively small units bonded together with
mortar, and sometimes
grouted and reinforced with steel. Masonry units may

be stone, fired clay units, cementitious
concrete units, glass, or ceramics. The Code addresses only fired clay (brick) units, concrete
masonry units, and stone.
The strength of a masonry assemblage (wall, beam, etc.) depends upon the combination of
units, mortar, grout, and reinforcement. Assemblage strength depends on individual material
strengths, bond betweenmaterials,and
the dimensions of the components andthe
assemblage. For example, the strength of masonry construction depends on the strength of
the units, the strength of the mortar, mortar-unit bond,and the thickness of the mortar joint.
The use of grout in masonry in single
or multiplewythewalls
or in the collar joint in
multiwythe walls increases the masonry strength.

8.1.1 Masonry Units
The most commonly used masonry units
are made of clay brick and concrete block. See
MDG 3.1. Because of costconsiderations,concreteblockis

structural applications than brick,althoughbrickmay
more commonlyusedin
be more economicalwherehigh
strengths are required and where appearance is important. For exposed exterior wythes,
consideration mustbe given to appearance, weathering characteristics,and water permeance,
as well as structural requirements.
Various masonry unit properties are defined in the applicable ASTM specifications, listed
in MDG 3.1. The ASTM standards reflect minimum requirements for any project. If the
designer determines that a more stringent requirement is necessary, then this must be stated
in the contract documents in addition to the governing ASTM standard. In this way,
projects special requirements will be communicated to the contractor.
8-3

the
Masonry units are generally defined as eithersolid or hollow. In general, solid units are not
100% solid unless so specified. Units are usually formed with core holes, to allow for more
even curing or firing, and to decrease unit weight without significantly sacrificing crosssectional properties. Units having core holes that constitute 25% of the gross area or less
are considered solid units.
sectional area,the
If the core holes remove more than 25% of the gross cross-
units are hollow.Hollow
concrete masonry units are generally
approximately 50% solid. Hollow clay bricks are generally from 40% to 60% solid.
8.1.2 Mortars
Mortar holds the individual masonry units, reinforcement, and connectors together so that
the components act as a complete assemblage. Many mortar propertiescontribute to proper
performance of a wall. Compressive strength is only one of the properties, and may not be
the most important one. Mortar-masonry bond has a more significant impact on masonry
flexural strength and moisture resistance. Flowability
and workability affect the masons
ability to place the mortar, and may affect the quality of workmanship. See MDG 3.2 for
further discussion of these issues.
For construction projects in which masonrystrength properties arecritical, pre-construction
testing of prisms built with
the specified units and mortar may be warranted. Flexural
strength can be assessed by flexural prism tests or by bond wrench testing. See MDG 4.1,
4.2, 5.4.1.5.
8.13 Grout
Grout is made from portland cement and sand, withpea gravel sometimes added when large
spaces are to be filled. However, an ASTM C 476 fine grout is more commonlyused.
Slump ranges of 8 in. to 11in. allow the grout to flow properly into thecavities or cells. See
MDG 3.3. Grout is used to create a solid wythe by filling the cores of hollow units, or to
create a composite wall by filling the collar joint between wythes. Grout is also used to fill
8-4

A C 1T I T L E v M D G
reinforced bond beams.
93
ObbP947 0 5 0 8 6 4 6 191
Mortar shouldnot
be usedfor
these purposes, because its
flowabilty is inadequate to completely fill voids.

8.1.4 MasonryAssemblages
Masonry units, mortar, and grout can be combined in several ways to construct different
types of masonryassemblages.Mostmasonryassemblages
are walls.Wallsmay
be
classified by their construction type or by their primary load-resisting function.

Using construction type as the criterion, walls may be classified as:
Singlewythe:
A singlethickness(wythe)
of masonry,whichmay be reinforced or
unreinforced.
0
Cavity: Two similar
or dissimilar wythes of masonry separated by an air space, and
tied together with metal anchors. The cavity serves as a drainage path for any water
entering the wall and provides a space in which insulation can be placed. For this
type of assembly to function properly, the cavity must

be kept free of mortar bridges
and droppings, and flashing and weepholes must be correctlyinstalled.
There is
general agreement in the industry that a 2 in. air space, exclusive of insulation, is the
minimum that can be kept clean during construction. Code 5.8.2 defines this system
as a noncomposite, multiwythe wall.
0
Prefabricated: A plant-manufactured panelizedwallsystem.Connections
between
the panel and the supporting structure might haveto be designed to allow differential
movement between the two. Sources of differential movement are volume changes
in the panel, live load deflections, dead load creep of the supporting structure, and
wind or seismic drift. See MDG Chapter 10 - Movements. Panel connections to the
structure may be designedaccording
to the recommendations of the Precast
Prestressed Concrete Institute.

O
Barrier: Multiwythe construction with the collar joint grouted or mortared solid. The
filled collar joint acts as a barrier against water entering the inner wythe(s). Barrier
8-5

A C 1T I T L E t M D G
93
Obb2949 0.508647 0 2 8
walls require the same attention to flashing details as other walls. The wythes may
be of similar or dissimilar material units. Either masonry units or metalties are used
to mechanicallyconnect the wythes together. Code 5.8.1 defines thissystemas
composite.
Masonry Veneer: A single wythe of masonry mechanically tied to a backing with a
cavity between them. The Code does not apply to this type of assembly.
Masonry Bonded Hollow Wall: These walls are built of hollow or combined hollow
and solid masonry units with multiple wythesbonded by masonry headers.
Usingloadingas
the criterion, wallsmay
be classifiedas
veneer, nonloadbearing,
loadbearing, or shear wall. Veneer walls are not covered by the Code. The backing of the
veneer wall resists the lateral(out-of-plane) loads on the wall. A loadbearing wall is defined
by Code 2.2 as a wall carrying, in addition to its own weight, vertical loads greater than 200
plf. Walls which do not meet these criteria may be considered nonloadbearing. Shear walls
resist lateral loads such as wind or seismic by in-plane shear stresses and overturning
moments.
8.1.5 Volume Changes
As discussed in MDG 6.2.7 and Chapter 10,masonry units change volumedue to moisture,
temperature and other effects. Masonry units also
creep under sustained load. If these
movements are restrained, theresulting additional loads introduced into the masonry must
be considered. Unintended stresses may be avoided by introducing vertical and horizontal
movementjoints.
The geometry of the building,wallcomposition,masonry
material
properties, and anticipated differential movement must be carefully considered in locating

and sizing these joints.
8.1.6
Details of Construction
Proper performance of masonry walls requires attention toconstruction details as wellas to
8-6

A C 1 TITLE*NDG 9 3
structural analysis.Detailing
Ob62949 0508b48 Tb4
to accommodate water whichwill
penetrate single-wythe
exterior masonry walls is a critical design aspect affecting wall performance. The designer
may choose to prevent water entry by providing a barrier wall, or to control the water path
by providing proper flashing and weeping of a cavity wall. Proper cavity wall performance
depends on anunimpeded drainage path and flashings to collect and direct all water to the
exterior.Top-of-wallclosures
and sill materials/details that prevent water entryare
important to bothwall types.
To minimize water penetration, mortar joints should be completely filled and compacted
against the sides of the adjacent masonry units by concave tooling. Joints which are raked,
struck or not tooled are poor barriers to water entry. See MDG Chapter 6.
Construction details must be consistent with the assumptions of the structuralanalysis, since
each impacts the other. Forexample, if a joint is introduced between two intersecting walls,
a monolithic flanged wall analysis is not appropriate. Special CMU control joints, such as
those illustrated in Fig. 10.4-1, will transfer out-of-plane shear but not in-plane shear. Such
joints effectivelydivide a shear wall into segments.Flashingalsoaffectswall
structural
behavior, since it creates a discontinuity in the wall, limiting shear and bending moment
transfer across the flashed joint.
8.2
8.2.1
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN

General Requirements
The design procedures of the Code are predicated upon allowable stress methods, in which
the effect of service loads on structural members permits an elastic analysis, and computed
stresses arecompared to specifiedallowablestresses.
See Code 5.1. Serviceloads, or
working loads, are those which the general building code determines may actually occur
during the structures service life.
8-7

AC1
T I T L E x M D G 9 3 W Obb2949 0508649
9TO
In an elasticanalysis, it is assumed that the structuralmaterialsfollowHookes
Law:
deformations or strains are linearly proportional to the loads or stresses. It is also assumed
that all materialsare homogeneous, and sectionsthat are plane before bending remain plane
the specified compressive
after bending. To ensure that the materials remain linearly elastic,
strengthf,
(Code 5.4), is divided by a factor of safety to obtain the allowable stress. The
required factor of safety depends on the variability of material strength, the variability of
construction quality, the accuracy with which the applied forces can be predicted, and the
accuracy with whichthe actual stresses canbe calculated. Code stipulated allowable stresses
incorporate adequate factors of safety.
The Code requires that allstructuresandtheircomponentmembers
be designedin
accordance with Code Chapters 5 and 8. Additionally, structures and members must follow
the provisions of Chapter 6 or Chapter 7. Alternatively, structures or members may be
designed according to the provisions of Chapter 9 (Code 9.1). Chapters 6 and 7 are based
upon rational design methods, whereasChapter 9 presents an empirical design philosophy.
Empiricaldesign isonly
permittedforbuildingsthat
meet the sizeandconfiguration
limitations of the Code (see MDG Chapter 15) or for component members which are not
part of the lateral force resisting system of a rationally designed building.
Code 5.5 providesmaterial
properties of steelreinforcement,
claymasonry,concrete
masonry, and grout. See MDG 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, and 3.4. The specified compressive strength of
masonry,
fm,
is notdefinedfor
the variousmasonryunitand
However, Code 5.4.2 requires the design

designer to specify the required
fm
to be based upon fm.
mortar combinations.
Code 5.4.1 compels the
onthedesigndrawings,butdoesnot
mandate
specification of unit strength or mortar type. It is apparent that the intent of the Code is
for projects to be built under a performance specification, wherein the designer determines
the required level of performance
Vm),
and it is the responsibility of the contractor to meet
that level of performance. Specs. Tables 1.6.2.1and 1.6.2.2are intended for the contractors
use, and provide proven means of producing a
8-8

fm
that will satisfy the specified
fm
with
AC1
TITLE*NDG 9 3 9 O b b 2 9 4 9 0508650 b L 2 m
different masonry unit strengths and mortars, bypassing the need for prism testing (Specs.
1.6.1 and 1.6.2).
The Specifications require specifying not only f,
(Specs. 1.5.2), but also the masonry units
and mortar (Specs. 2.2.1 and 2.2.2). The masonry units and mortar are specified when the
structural designer needs modulus
of elasticityvalues for stiffnesscalculations.When
specified masonry unit and mortar combination cannot meet the specifiedf, requirement
according to Spec. Tables 1.6.2.1 and 1.6.2.2,prism testing must be conducted
to prove
compliance; i.e., f, equals or exceeds f,. Depending upon the masonry unit, mortar, and
f,
combination specified,it may be difficult for thecontractor to achieve the desired results.
This situation presents a condition which must be resolved.
8.2.2
Analysis Considerations
Masonrycomponentsmust
be analyzedforverticaland
lateral loads.Verticalloads
generally come from gravity loads or from wind acting on a roof. Lateral loads result from
wind, earthquake, or soil pressure.
Gravity loads are shared by all wythes in a composite multiwythe wall (Code 5.8.1). In a
is resisted
noncomposite wall (Code 5.8.2), the axial compression resulting from gravity loads
onlyby the wythe nearest the center of span of the supported members. However, any
bending about the weak axis of the wall, due to eccentric support of the gravity loadson one
wythe, is considered to be resisted by all wythes. The amount of bending resisted by each
wythe is determined by the flexural stiffness of that wythe relative to the others.
Stress computations are based upon the minimum net cross-sectional area of the masonry
(Code 5.13.1). Inmultiwythemasonryofdissimilarmaterials,
the section properties are
determined by transforming each minimum net cross-sectional area to that of asingle

material, using the relative elastic moduli of the different materials. This method uses the
8-9

A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93
Ob62949 0508653 5 5 9
elastic analysis concept required by Code 5.13.1.2 To determine the relative stiffness of
different wythes, a similar approach is used, except that the average net cross-sectional
member area may be used, per Code 5.13.2. Values for themodulus of elasticity of masonry
are given in Code Tables 5.5.1.2 and 5.5.1.3.
As a loadbearing wallbecomeshigher
and supports more floors, the loads at its base
increase. These increased loads can be accommodated by increasing the thickness of the
wall; grouting the wall solid; keeping the same thickness and increasing the strength of the
materials; reducing the size of any openings in the wall; or by any combination of these
options.
Lateral loads acting perpendicular to the plane of a masonrywall create out-of-plane
bending. All wythes of multiwythe masonry resistthese loads, in proportion to theirrelative
stiffnesses. See Code 5.8.1.3,5.8.2.1(d), 5.13.1.2. In composite masonry, the resulting shear
stresses between wythes is limited to the values specified inCode 5.8.1.2. In noncomposite
masonry, when the width of the space between wythes exceeds 4 in., a detailed analysis of
the wall ties is required per Code 5.8.2.l(f').
A wall without openings can be analyzed as an assemblage of crossing strips. Each strip is
considered a beam of unit width, spanning either vertically or horizontally. A wall with
openings canbe similarly analyzed, or can require a two way plate analysis to determine the
stresses around the openings.
The diaphragm action of floors and roof transfers lateral loads to shear walls that are
parallel to thedirection of the lateralload, resulting in in-plane shear and bending on those
walls. In performing the lateral load analysis on the structure, flanges of intersecting walls
may be considered as adding to the stiffness ofwalls resisting in-plane loads. See Code
5.7.1.1. Parameters that limit the stiffening effect of flanges are given in Code 5.13.4.2. The
stiffness of the horizontal diaphragms influences the distribution of the lateral loads to the
shear walls, and is discussed in more detail in MDG 8.4.3.1 and Chapter 9.
8-10

AC
T I1T L E * f l D G
93
0662949 0508b52 495
In composite multiwythe masonry, all wythesare considered to resist in-plane lateral loads,
in proportion to their relative stiffnesses. In noncomposite masonry, onlythe wythe to which
the in-plane lateral loads are applied resists the load. Any transfer of in-plane stresses
between noncomposite wythes is neglected, per Code 5.8.2.1(c).
Wallsegmentsin
the same plane may be coupled or uncoupled.
Coupled walls are
structurally linked together and, for resistance to in-plane lateral forces, must be analyzed
together. The shearresisted by each segment of the wall will be in proportionto its relative
stiffness, just asin uncoupledwalls. However, the link (or coupling beam) must be analyzed
for axial, shear, andbending forces, which result from the action of the wall segments. See
MDG 8.4.3.8 and RCJ Hotel in MDG 9.1.3. In Building Construction Option I of the RCJ
Hotel, the interior masonrywalls on Grid Line 2 are coupled shear walls. In Building
Construction Option II, the same shear walls are uncoupled.
Stresses are also introduced into masonry when it is restrained against thermal expansion
and contraction, moisture expansion and contraction, and shrinkage and creep. These
movements, and the extent to which the masonryis
restrained against them, must be
considered in structural design. Values for the magnitude of these effects are given in Code
5.5.2, 5.5.3, 5.5.4, 5.5.5, and MDG Chapter 10.
Allowable stresses in masonry are influenced by masonry unit type; bond pattern; mortar
type; unit compressive strength; specifiedcompressive strength of masonry; amount of
grouting; and the ratio of unsupported height to thickness. Stronger units and/or higher
mortar strengths permit higher allowable stresses.
masonrylaidinrunning
Higher shear stresses are allowed for
bond than in stack bond (Code 6.5.2).
The Code permits all
allowable stresses in Chapter 6 and Chapter 7 to be increased by one-third when the load
combination considered includes wind or earthquake togetherwith dead and/or live loads.
See Code 5.3.2 and MDG 8.3. Quality assurance and quality control to ensure good
workmanship are required by the Specifications, withwhich compliance isrequired by Code
3.1.1. Since "uninspected" constructionis not permitted, theCode does not have a provision
8-11

A C 1 TITLE*NDG 93
Obb29Y9 050Bb53 321
for reduced allowable stress in "uninspected" construction, as in earlier codes.

8.3
LOADS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS
Structures and theircomponents are required toresist gravity loads,lateral loads, and other
types of loads. Gravity loads act vertically; lateral loads act horizontally. The Code also
requires the designer to consider the effects of prestressing, vibrations, impact, shrinkage,
expansion, temperature changes, creep,and
differential movement.
See Code 5.2.
Restrained volume changes induce loads.

Gravity loads are of two types:live
and dead.
Live loads aretransientinnature,
representing theassumed weightof building occupants, furnishings,

equipment, and the like.
Minimum live loads for different occupancies are mandatedby the governing building code,
or by ASCE-7 (8.3.1). Reductions in live loads are permittedby the building code or ASCE7, depending upon the tributary areas supported (Code 5.2.2).
Dead loads are generally permanent in nature, and can be subdivided into structure selfweight and superimposed loads.
The largest portion of thedeadload
isusually
the
structure's self-weight; the smaller portion is the superimposed dead load. Superimposed
loads may include, but arenot
limited to roofingsystems;
concrete topping;ceilings;
mechanical equipment; and nonloadbearing masonry walls. Analysis of the structureduring

construction would not include superimposed dead loads which are generally placed later.
Lateral loads are typically inducedby wind, earthquake, andfluid or earthpressures. Other
lateral load sources include blast,crane loads, and horizontal thrust from untied sloped roof
framing.
Wind pressures are applied over the surface of a structure. The magnitude and distribution
of the wind pressures to the various surfaces are given in the appropriate building code or
ASCE-7. A document designed to assist the professional in the understanding and use of
8-12

93
m 0662747
0508654 268
the complex wind load provisions of ASCE-7 is available
(8.3.2). The surfaces, to which
wind is applied, usually span vertically between floors or horizontal diaphragms and are
analyzed for out-of-plane flexure. Horizontal diaphragms
span from support to support;
these supports often are shear walls. Shear walls and diaphragms are analyzed for in-plane
flexure, shear, and deflection. See Code
5.2.3.
Seismicloads are inertial forces, frequently expressed
as a fraction of the mass of the
building components. For purposes of design, these are often applied as lateral forces in
accordance with magnitude and distribution formulas defined by the appropriate building
code or byASCE-7.Likewindloads,seismic
forces are transferred by horizontal
diaphragms to the shear walls. Component analysis for seismic forces is similarto that used
for wind pressures. See Code 5.2.3.
Fluid and earth pressures are generally treated as linearly varying loads acting normal
to the
wall surface; these loads induce out-of-plane flexure and shear stresses in walls.
Loads must generally be consideredin combination with each other. Loading combinations
must be examined to identifywhich one causesthehigheststresses.Unless
mandated
otherwise by the governing building code, loading combinations given in

Code 5.3.1 must be
considered. These are:
1.
Dead load
acting
alone
2.
Dead load
plus
live
load
3.
Dead loadplus live loadplus
either wind or seismicload.Windload
and
seismic loadare considered as non-concurrent events. While

wind and seismic
loadscanactfromanydirection,they
are usuallyappliedin
one oftwo
orthogonal directions coinciding with the major

axis of the building, since these
are typically the critical directions.
oftheload
Per the UBC, one often considers 100%
in one orthogonaldirectionplus
perpendicular direction.
8-13

30% of theload
in the
93
Ob629490508b55
IT4
4.
Dead load plus wind load acting from any direction.
5.
0.9 times dead load, plus seismic load. In this combination the dead load is
reduced because it can help in resisting seismic overturning forces.
The 0.9
reduction factor recognizes that: a) the magnitude of the structureself-weight

may have been over-estimated, b) vertical acceleration can reduce dead load
effects.
6.
Dead load plus live load plus lateral load from fluids or earth pressures.
7.
Dead load plus lateral load from fluids or earth pressures. The dead load
component is not reduced when combined with fluidor earth pressures.
8.
Dead load pluslive
load plus the effects of restrained movementsfrom
temperature, shrinkage and creep, and other effects.
9.
Dead load plus the effects of restrained movements fromtemperature,

shrinkage and creep, and other effects.
Code 5.3.2 permits an increase in allowable stresses by one-third when considering load
combinations 3, 4, or 5 (8.3.3). When the structure is adequately provided with movement
joints, effects from restrained volume change are mitigated. However, consideration must
still be given to the effects of differential movement in noncomposite multiwythe walls of
multi-story buildings. See MDG Example 10.4.3.
8.4
STRUCTURAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR MASONRY WALLS
Walls act as:
nonloadbearing facade elements subject to out-of-plane flexure
loadbearing elements subject to axial compression
shear wall elements subject to in-plane shear and flexure
or combinations of the above elements
8-14

93
Obb2949 0508656 030
8.4.1WallContinuityandSupportConditions
A wall is described as having a simple span when it is laterally supported on two opposite
edges only, and when rotational fixity is not provided at the supports. A two-way simple
span wall is pin-supported on all four edges. The walls in most single story structures have
a simple span from the top of the foundation to the roof diaphragm.
A wall is described as multi-span when it is continuous across supports. Continuity may be

provided in only one direction (i.e., either vertically or horizontally), or it may be provided
in both directions. Fig. 8.4-1 is a schematicrepresentation of deflected shape of a multispan
wall subject to out-of-plane loading. Continuity, or rotationalfixity, between adjacent spans
depends upon the mortadunit bond, unit interlock, or reinforcement at the joint over the
support. Walls in multi-story and/or multi-bay
structures generally are continuous multi-
span.
Fig.8.4-1Multi-spanWall
The joint between perpendicular vertical panels can transfer shear forces between flanges
and the web of a shear wall as shown in Fig. 8.4-2. For this to happen, the connection at
the joint must meet the requirements of Code 5.13.4.2.
Fig. 8.4-2
PerpendicularVerticalPanelConnection
8-15

93
The joint between twoverticallyaligned
Obb2949 0508657 T77
elements and a horizontal panel can provide
buckling restraint for the vertical elements as shown in Fig. 8.4-3. The connection at the
joint between thewall and horizontal diaphragm mustbe able to resist the forces developed
when the diaphragm acts as a support for out-of-plane flexure of the wall.
Fig. 8.4-3 Horizontal to Vertical Panel Connection
- Out-of-PlaneLoads
The joint between verticallyaligned elements can resistin-plane shear resultingfrom

diaphragm action, by providingclamping
due to vertical compression, or by positive
connection with reinforcing steel. See Fig. 8.4-4 and Code 6.5.2(c).
Fig. 8.4-4 Horizontal To Vertical Panel Connection
- In-Plane Loads
Pilasters, addressed in MDG 11.2 and 12.3, act as vertical beams to support wall panels. See
Fig. 8.4-5. Panels, supported by pilasters, span horizontally between the pilasters, vertically
between horizontal diaphragms, or both ways. Pilasters at joints between panels may
provide continuity between panels and add stiffness. See Code 5.10.
8-16

A C 1 TITLErMDG 93 D 0662949 0508658 903
Fig. 8.4-5
8.4.2
IntegralPilasters
VerticalLoadbearingWalls
8.4.2.1 Types of Vertical Loads
- Uniform loads cause uniformly distributed stresses over
wall lengths as shown in Fig. 8.4-6.

Concentrated loads create concentrations of stresswherethey
are applied.Stress
distribution becomes uniform as stressesspread out across the wall length, as shown in Fig.
8.4-7.
Fig. 8.4-6 Uniform

Load
Fig.
8.4-7 Concentrated
Load
As a general rule, concentrated loads canbe considered to have the same effect as uniform
loads when their spacing is less
than or equal to the widthof bearing plusfour times the wall
thickness, per Code 5.12.1. See Fig. 8.4-8.
The effect of bond beams on the distribution of concentrated loads in masonry
presented in MDG Chapter 9.
8-17

walls is
A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 93 m 0662949 0508659 8 4 T m
P
I
Fig. 8.4-8 Concentrated Load Spacing for Uniform Wall

8.4.2.2 Failure Mode
Stress
- The capacity of loadbearing walls, shown in Fig. 8.4-9, is generally
controlled by compression failure of the material or by buckling of the panel.

Since masonry walls usually have a relatively small thickness, material compression failure
rarelyoccurs.Localizedcrushingmayoccur
under concentrated loads with inadequate
bearing area. See Fig. 8.4-10 and Code 5.12.2 and 5.12.3.
h
TEICKNESS
CONPRESSION
Fig. 8.4-9Crushing
8.4-10
Bearing
Mode
Fig.
Panel
Where large concentrated vertical loads exceed the bearing capacity of the wall, and
economic or architecturalconsiderations prevent increasing the wall thickness,pilasters may
be added at the concentrated load locations.
Wall panel buckling shown in Fig. 8.4-11, is a stability problem. Variables that influence
stability are: 1) the number of wall panel edges supported; 2) the thickness to span ratios
8-18

A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93
m 0662949 0508660
561
of the panels; and 3) the length to height ratios of the panels.
For means of comparison, assume that the panels shown in Figs. 8.4-12 through 8.4-14 all
have length equal to height, as well as equal thickness. The buckling resistance factor
relative to the support conditions is indicated for each figure.
Fig.
8.4-11
Buckling
Mode
Fig.
8.4-12
Supports
at Horizontal
Edges
Only:
Buckling Resistance = 1.0
Fig.
8.4-13
Supports
Horizontal
at
Fig.
8.4-14
All
Edges
Supported:
Edges
and
One Vertical
Edge:
Buckling
Buckling Resistance = 1.5
Resistance = 3.3
Increasing the number of supported edges increases the buckling resistance (8.4.1). For the
support conditions shown in Figs. 8.4-13 and 8.4-14, the buckling resistance decreases as the
wall length becomes increasingly greater than the height.
8.4.2.3 Effects
of Openings - The distribution of stresses and loads around an opening is
8-19

93
Obb2949 0508bb3 YTB
governed by the depth to span ratio of the masonry material above the opening. See Fig.
8.4-15.
Load
rcompression
Dept
orizontal Reaction
Fig. 8.4-15 PanelOpenings
- ArchAction
Where the deptwspan ratioof material above an opening is equal to 1/1.5 or more, vertical
load is distributed by arch action. For masonry above an opening to act as an arch, there
must be sufficient masonry masson eachside of the opening to resist the horizontal thrust.
Lintels at these locations only need to be designed for the weight of the triangular area of
masonry above the opening, and forany other loads applied within that triangle. See MDG
11.3.
With lesser deptwspan ratios, masonry above openings acts as a beam rather than anarch.
The resulting stresses are illustrated in Fig. 8.4-16. Lintels at these locations must support
all of the masonry above and all loads applied above. See MDG 11.3.
Load
-7-
Depth
Fig. 8.4-16 PanelOpenings
8-20

- Beam Action
A C 1 TITLE*flDG
93
0662947 0508662 334
It is preferable to locate openings so that vertical loads can be transferred directly to the
foundation through continuous vertical elements. See Fig. 8.4-17(a) or @).When openings
are not aligned, vertical loads must be transferred through lintels. See Fig. 8.4-17(c).
m
Loads
Direct Load
Paths
Indirect Load
Paths
0 )
Shaded Areas Denote Beam
(c)
Or Arch Action
Fig. 8.4-17 Vertical Load Paths
Arch action within a panel having non-aligned openings as shown in Fig. 8.4-18 is possible,
provided that the following conditions are satisfied:
M
1S d
Fig. 8.4-18 ArchAction

1)
The minimum vertical distance, d, between openings must be greater than or

equal to 2/3 maximum horizontal dimension of lower opening.
2)
Dimensions dl and da must be sufficient for the masonry to resist compressive

8-21

A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93 M 0662947 0508663 270 W
stresses by arch action without exceeding the allowable stress.
3)
There is sufficient masonry mass each side of the lower opening to resist the
horizontal thrust resulting from arch action.
As a buildings height and floor span increases, so do the vertical compressive stresses in
bearing wall elements. In a wall panel with openings, the masonry piers between openings
support the gravity loads, and must be designed accordingly.
Required minimum net wall area at the base is greater than that required at the roof, due
to the accumulation of loads as shown in Fig. 8.4-19. Since wall strength and thickness are
often kept the same throughout the height of the building, over-capacities exist at higher
levels in the building if the same opening pattern is used at all levels. For more uniform
capacity to required strength ratios, use smaller openings
materials at lower floors, or thinner walls at upper floors.
n
5th
4th
3rd
2nd
ist
Fig. 8.4-19 BuildingWall
8-22

at lower floors, higher strength
A C 1 TITLEvHDG 93
8.4.2.4
0662949 0508664 107 H
Gravity Stresses Resulting from Interaction of Walls and Horizontal Diaphragms
The deformed shape of a gravity loaded horizontal diaphragm restrained at its edges by the
supporting masonry walls is illustrated in Fig. 8.4-20. Each panel of masonry influences
adjacent perpendicular panels as the floor slab deflects.The influence resultsfrom restraint
at the joints produced by bonding of the
units.
Deformations
Stresses
slabs
in Stresses
in walls
Fig. 8.4-20 Interaction of Walls and Slabs Under Gravity Loads

The slab and wall flexural stresses resulting from their interaction under gravity loading is
illustrated in Fig. 8.4-21. The flexural stresses shown should
be superimposed upon the
vertical compressive stress in the walls resulting from gravity load support.
8-23

E:
Top Surfrn h
It.
(Typical A t Middle Of
Each Edge)
Clamping
Moments
From Roof And Floor Slabs
Tieing Stresses And Shear

Stresses
Corners
At
Fig. 8.4-21 Slab and Wall Stresses Under
8.4.2.5 Engineering Analysis
Of Walls
Gravity Loads
- Wall analysis depends upon the following assumptions:
1)
direction of span (horizontal or vertical)
2)
number of continuous spans
3)
degree of fjty at each end of each span
For example, a wall that is f i e d at its base by dowels embedded into the foundation, and
is laterally unsupported at its top,is designed as a pure cantilever as indicated in Fig. 8.4-22.
This situation occurs when an expansion joint is located at the top of a loadbearing wall.
8-24

~~
0662949 050Abbb T A T W
A C 1 T I T L E * N D G 93
P
Fig. 8.4-22 Unsupported Wall
A loadbearing wall that is rotationally unrestrained at the base, and is laterally supported
by a diaphragm at thetop, is analyzed with simplesupports at each end as

shown in Fig. 8.4-
23. Walls in typical one story buildings are analyzed in this manner.
Note that the Euler
buckling capacity of the pinned-pinned wall is four times as great as thecantilever wall.
[
\
Fig. 8.4-23 Pinned-Pinned Wall

The Eulerbuckling equation for a wall pinned at one endand fixed at the otheris presented
in Fig. 8.4-24. A one-story wall with lateral supports at the top and bottom of a deep roof
system may be considered rotationallyfixed at its top providing that appropriate connection
details are used at top and bottom of roof framing members and also provided that the
framing system is braced against lateral sway. The point offixitymay
8-25

be conservatively
assumed at the top of the wall as shown. One might consider placing
the fixity point at a
wall location between the top and bottom of the roof framing system.
i
P
Fig.8.4-24Pinned-FixedWall
Wall panels between intermediate floors of a multistorywall
are often analyzedas
continuous at each end. The bottom panel may also be considered fixed when adequately
attached to a rigid foundation. See Fig. 8.4-25. These assumptions are valid only when the
wall construction is not interrupted by the floor construction. The Euler buckling capacity
of a fiied-fixed wall isfour times as great as that of the pinned-pinned wall, or 16 times the
capacity of the cantilever wall.
i
F
h
I!
}3
= hl2
}3
= h12
T
P
Fig. 8.425 Multistory Walls (Fixed-Fixed)
F, is defined as the allowable compressive stressdue to axial load only, and is related to the
8-26

strength Sm. The value of F, is obtained by reducing
specifiedmasonrycompressive
specified masonry compressivestrength by a safety factor against compressive crushingand

a slenderness or buckling factor. In previous codes,the slenderness factor was based on the
ratio of masonry wall heightto thickness. The same wall thicknesses were usedwhether the
units were hollow or solid. In this Code,
height to the radiusofgyration
the slenderness factor is based on the ratio of
of the crosssection,where
r =
m. This results in
allowable stresses that vary with height, unit thickness, and grouting of the cells. F, is given
as 0.25 Sm[l-(h/l40r)q when h/r does not exceed 99, and as 0.25 Sm(70r//~)~
when h/r is
greater than
99.
See Code 6.3.1 and 7.3.1.1.
The slenderness reduction factors for h/r not greaterthan 99 are derivedfromtests.
Slenderness values for h/r greater than 99 are based on elastic stability failure theory. The
curve based on these values is shown in Fig. 8.4-26, which appears in Code C. Fig. 6.3.1.
O Test
Results
1.2
1.o
0.8
0.6
0.4
O
O
0.2
o !
O
10
15
20
25
30
40
35
45
hlt
I
25
50
75
hlr
99
150
125
Fig. 8.4-26 Effects of Slenderness On Axial Compressive Strength

If the wall design allows tensilestresses in the masonry (Code Chapter 6), an additional limit
8-27

~~
A C 1 TITLESMDG 93
Obb29Ll7 0508669 7 9 9
is placed on the allowable axial load. The design axialload, P,must be equal to or less than
0.25 P,,where P, is the critical Euler buckling load. P, is sensitive to slight variations in eh.
The basis and development of the basic equations for unreinforced masonry construction are
given in reference (8.4.3).
Pe =
Perthe
n2
(1 - 0.577
h2
4)'
Code the P, equation isused
for both hollow and solidcross-section.
The
mathematical relationship is developed by considering a solid section. The applicability of

the above equation to hollow cross sections or partially grouted masonry construction has
been examined (8.4.4).
Allowable flexural tension due to out of plane loading in unreinforced masonry is given in
Code Table 6.3.1.1. Actual flexural tensilestresses under service loadingare limited to these
allowables.
Fb is defined as the allowable compressive stress due to flexure only, and is given as l/3f,.
See Code 6.3.1 and 7.3.1.2. An unreinforced wall, subject to axial load and bending from
sources other than wind or earthquake, isdesigned by the interaction equation (unity
equation) f'/F,
+ fJFb S 1.00 per Code 6.3.1.
When the bending stress results from wind
or seismic loads,the allowable stresses are increased by 1/3 per Code 5.3.2. In this casef,/F,
+ fdFb <
1.33.
The interaction equation recognizes that compressive stresses may
simultaneously occurfrom two types of loading: axial and bending. The unity equation can
be extended to biaxial bending by simply adding the ratio of the calculated bending stress
to the allowable bending stress for the additional axis of bending. It should be noted that
this equation ignores the secondary bendingstresses resulting from the axial load. Although
this omission is not conservative, the Code committee felt that it was not significant. See
Code C.6.3.1. Flexural shear for unreinforced walls due to out of plane loading is seldom
a controlling design criterion. See Code 6.5 and Code C.6.5.
8-28

~~
93
m 0662949 0508670 400 m
+ fb is limited to 1/3 r,,,(or 1.33 times 113
In reinforced masonry design, the s u m of fa
when wind or seismic loads are considered); also fa must be less than Fa. See Code 7.3.1.2
The interaction formula Code Eq. 6-1is applicable only to unreinforced, uncracked masonry.
The reinforced masonrysectionisassumed
to be cracked. Therefore,the interaction
equation (unity equation) is technically not valid; however it is conservative when used to
check the adequacy of the compression portion of the wall, beam, or column. The designer
must also check stresses in the tension reinforcement. Flexural shear for reinforced walls
due to out-of-plane loading is rarely a design problem. See Code 7.5.
MDG 11.1 discusses the provisionsof
the Code pertaining to structural design of
unreinforced and reinforced masonrywallssubject

structural design of wall systems
to flexural loads.
MDG 12.2 covers
under combined flexural and axial loading. MDG 13.1
addresses shear design in walls due to out-of-plane loading. Shear due to in-plane loading,
examined in MDG 8.4.3 and MDG 13, is often a controlling design condition.
8.43 Shear Walls - Transverse lateral loads, applied to walls spanning vertically between
horizontal diaphragms, are transferred to shear walls located parallel to the applied load.
This transfer takes place through the horizontal diaphragms whichspan between shear walls.
The shearwalls stabilize a building by transferring lateral forces to the foundations, and by
resisting overturning with the gravity loads on thewalls and/or with reinforcement. See Fig.
8.4-27. If the uplift due to lateral loads cannot be resisted by the gravity load of the
Flexural
Tension
Vertical
Reaction
Flexural
Compression
Vertical
Reaction
Fig. 8.4-27 Schematic Representation of In-Plane Load Transfer by a Shear Wall

8-29

A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 93
Ob62949 0508671 3Y7
structure and foundation, special soil anchors may be required. See MDG Chapter 9 for
masonry shear wall analysis methods.
The following factors are known to affect wall resistance:
1.
Horizontal diaphragm stiffness (MDG8.4.3.1)
2.
Shear wall proportions (MDG8.4.3.2)
3.
Shear resistance and axial load in stacked walls (MDG8.4.3.3)
4.
Openings in walls (MDG8.4.3.4)
5.
Placement of walls (MDG 8.4.3.5)
6.
Interconnection of perpendicular walls (MDG 8.4.3.6)
7.
Location of center of resistance (MDG 8.4.3.7)
8.
Reinforcement (MDG 8.4.3.8)
8.43.1 Horizontal Diaphragm Stiffness- Horizontal diaphragms must be carefully analyzed

and designed.
Diaphragm to shear wall and non-shear wall connection details must
correspond with the design assumptions. The stiffness of diaphragms is critical for several
reasons. Excessive in-plane deflection under lateralloads may overstress the masonry walls
perpendicular to the load. Nonstructural interior elements, such as drywall partitions, may
experience distress due to the
unintentional transfer of lateral
loads through connections to the
diaphragm.
Because shear walls are usually stiff
in their own planes, the drift of a
masonry
illustrated
shear
wall
system,
in Fig.
ordinarily
small.
However,
designer
should
verify
8.4-28,
is
the
Fig. 8.4-28
thatthe
8-30

Shear Wall Drift Under Lateral

Loading
AC1 TITLE*MDG
93
Obb2949 0 5 0 8 b 7 2 283 H
computed drift will not distress interior nonstructural components connected to the wall.
The in-plane stiffness of the floor diaphragms, relativeto the rigidity of the supporting shear
walls, determines the distribution of loads to the shear walls. A rigid floor diaphragm
transfers loads to the walls in proportion to the walls relative stiffnesses. Flexible floor
diaphragms transfer loads to the
walls in proportion to the distance
of the walls fromthe applied loads.

In
reality,
diaphragms
purelyrigid
are not
hear Wall
or flexible, butare
generally assumedto be one or the

other for the purposes of analysis.
The determination of
rigid
flexiblediaphragms
based
on
or
is commonly
the type of
Horizontal Load
Fig.8.4-29
Span to Width Ratios

For Floor Diaphragms
floor
construction and the diaphragms span to width ratio, as shown in Fig. 8.4-29.
MDG Table 8.4.1 gives the critical span to width ratios, within which the diaphragms of
various materials may be considered as rigid. When the diaphragm of the structure has a
greater span to width ratio, it should be analyzed as a flexible diaphragm (8.4.2).
Table8.4.1MaximumSpan-to-WidthRatiosforRigidFloorDiaphragms
Floor Construction
Span-&Width
Cast-in-place solid concrete slab
5: 1
Precast concrete interconnected
41
Metal deck with concrete fill
3:1
Metal deck with no fill
21
Cast-in-place gypsum deck (roof)
3: 1
8-31

Effects of Wall Proportions - Shear walls resist in-plane lateral loads through shear
and flexure. Depending on the wall proportions, the shearing or the flexural response can
8.43.2
sometimes dominate the behavior with the other response being of secondary importance.
Fig. 8.4-30 divides shear walls into three categories, based upon the height to length ratio.
P 4
Type I: hllw I 0.25
Type II: 0.25 c h/lw c 4.0
Type III: h/$ >4.0
Fig. 8.4-30 Flexure vs. Shear Resistance in Shear Walls

Type I -
wall drift dominated by shear deformation. Wall lateral load capacity

is governed by shear resistance.
Type II -
wall drift depends on shear and flexure deformation. Wall lateral load
capacity depends on both shear and flexural resistance.
Type III
wall drift dominated by flexural deformation. Wall lateral load capacity

is governed by flexural resistance.
Thus wall drifts are sometimes computed considering only shear or flexure deformations.
However, for stress design, one must consider both shear and flexure.
In unreinforced masonry, Types I & II shear walls are more common, since their most
efficient resistance is primarily in shear.
8-32

A C 1 TITLEsMDG 9 3
Obb29q9 0508674 056
The distribution of lateral loads to all shear walls from a rigid diaphragm, or to shear walls
in the same line from
a flexible diaphragm, depends upon the relative stiffness of those
walls. Wall stiffness is a function of the material used and the wall proportions. For Type
I walls of the same materials and heights, lateral stiffness isproportional to wall lengths. For
Type III walls of the same materials and heights, lateral stiffness isproportional to the wall
moments of inertia (the cube of the wall length). For example, in Fig. 8.4-31,suppose that
h '/Zw < 0.25 for both walls. Their lateral stiffness w

l
i be proportional to their areas (or
lengths, in the case of uniform thickness). Therefore Wall 2 has 10 times the length of Wall
1 and will receive approximately 10 times the shear resulting from a lateral load.
AResistance
Wall 1
Wall 2
L e n g t h = 101,
Length = I ,
Fig. 8.4-31 Lateral Force Distribution
If, however, h '/Zw > 4 for both walls, their lateral stiffnesses will be proportional to their
moments of inertia (length cubed). Therefore, Wall 2 will receive approximately1,000 times
as much lateral load, or flexure as Wall 1.
Stiffness-based load distribution assumes that a continuous load path (usually a continuous
diaphragm) exists to transfer the lateral load to allresistingwalls.
For example, if the
horizontal diaphragm in Fig. 8.4-31 were interrupted by flooropenings,
it would be
reasonable to provide a load path to transfer 90% of the load to Wall 2.
8.433 Effects of Axial Loads - As shown in Fig. 8.4-32,compressive axial loads may coexist
with shear forces. Masonry in compression is better able to resist shear. This phenomenon
is recognized by Code 6.5.2(c).
8-33

A C 1 TITLE*flDG
93
Obb29Y9 0508675 T92
Roof
Fig. 8.4-32 Action of Shear and Vertical Load

Thus, shear walls in compressionhave
an increased shear capacity.Addingvertical
compression is best accomplished by making the shear walls loadbearing.
Effects of Openings - Fig. 8.4-33 illustrates the behavior of an unperforated shear

wall under in-plane lateral force P,.Lateral forces are transferred to the shearwall through
shear in the
the horizontal diaphragm connections to the wall. As showninFig.8.4-33,
8.43.4
masonry is resisted primarily by a diagonal compressionstrut. In an unreinforced wall, shear

capacity is usually governed
by diagonal tension capacity, where
the diagonal tension is
perpendicular to the compression strut.

Floor Diaphragm
Connection To
Wall Panel
P,
r-
"
J
Floor Diaohtanm
Connect& T
d-,
ZPl (Reaction At
Base Of Wall)
Wall Panel
Fig. 8.433 Shear Resistance Mechanism in Unperf'oratedWall

Walls with openings resistlateral load in flexureas well as in shear. Fig. 8.4-34(a) shows the
primary shear resistance mechanismin a wall with a large central opening. The stiff portions
8-34

93
Obb2949 0 5 0 8 6 7 b 929
of the panel above and below opening resist shear through diagonal compression strut
either side of the panel opening deform in
action. The more flexiile pier portions on
flexure as well as shear as shown in Fig. 8.4-34@). Based on aspect ratio, their resistance
may be governed by flexure as well as shear.
pI hlLw
I
Pl hltw
(b) Pier Deformation
(a) Compression Strut
Shear Resistance Mechanism of Perforated Walls
Fig. 8.4-34
Fig. 8.4-35 illustrates how the size of the opening affects the mode of shear wall resistance.
If the opening is relatively small,as in Fig. 8.4-35(a), the diagonal shear stresses flow around
the opening and the behavior is similar to a wall without openings.
Compression Strut
Fig. 8.4-35
Effect of Opening Size on Diagonal Strut
Large openings divide the panel into smaller shear resisting panels that are tied together by
connecting portions subject to flexure and shear. This is illustrated in Fig. 8.4-35@), which
shows a wall panel divided into two portions connected by coupling beams above and below
the opening.
8-35

8.43.5
Effects of WallPlacements
Lateral loads are distributed amongwallsin
proportion to their lateral stiffness. Since the lateral stiffness of a wall about its weak axis
(Fig. 8.4-36(a)) is relatively small,
it is often neglected in analysis. Only the walls parallel
to the applied load are considered (Fig. 8.4-36@)).

Neutral Axis
Neutral Axis
Lateral
Force
lb
'
FLateral
o r e r f J
I
Plan View
Plan View
a) negligible lateral stiffness

Fig. 8.4-36 Effect
b) significant lateral stiffness

of Wall Orientation on Stiffness
Since lateral loads act in any direction, as indicated in
Fig. 8.4-37, shear walls must be
oriented along both majoraxes of a building. If shear wallsprovideresistancein
one
direction only,other lateralforce resisting elements must be provided in the other direction.
Force
L a t e r a l
Lateral
Force
Plan View
Plan View
Fig. 8.4-37Multi-AxisLateralWalls
8.43.6 Effects of Interconnection of Perpendicular Walls - Connecting perpendicular walls
can greatly enhance the structure's resistance to lateral loads. For example, without the
8-36

TITLEtMDG 93 m 0662949 0508678 7TL
AC1
interconnection of perpendicular walls in Fig. 8.4-38(a), the lateral flexural stiffness is only
12
. If the wall connections meet the requirements of Code 5.13.4, the flexural stiffness
2
increases to
t(1J3
):+()G(.
12
. In a multistory building, the walls are usually tall enough
for flexural deformation to dominate lateral drifts and, the increased stiffness will
significantly reduce lateral drift.
Wall
(a>
Plan View
Must Resist
SIhnetaerr f a c e
(b)
For Composite Action
Fig. 8.4-38 AdjacentWallInterconnection

However, if movement joints are required at these locations, the designer cannot utilize the
extra stiffness potential of the perpendicular wall. Thus the designer must carefully review
volumechange
requirements in ordertoensurethattherestraint
provided by these
perpendicular wall connections will not adversely affect the structure's performance. (See
MDG Chapter 10).

The requirements and limitations of Code 5.13.4.2, relative to the connections of flanged
walls, are presentedin Figs. 8.4-39 through 8.4-42. The designer has the option of providing
wall connections in accordance with Fig. 8.4-39 and Fig. 8.4-40, or Fig. 8.4-41 or Fig. 8.4-42
8-37

Flange
Thickness
Flange
'Flange
Fig. 8.4-39 Flanged Wall
'Flange
Effective Flange = Six Times Flange Thickness
- T Intersection
Fig. 8.4-40 Flanged wall L Intersection

(Code 5.13.4.2(e)l)
(Code 5.13.4.2(e)l)
Wall Flange Thickness

Wall And Flange
Interface
Regularly
Tooth With
8" Maximum
Offsets
1Reinforcing (If Required)
Strap Anchors
Maximum Spacing Of
4 Feet Vertically On
Center. 4"x$" x 28Grout in Wall
24 "
2"
m2"
Or
2"
Fig. 8.4-41 FlangedWall
- L Intersection(Code5.13.4.2(e)2)
Intersecting
Reinforced Bond
Beams
At 4"O" On Center
.um
Continuous Reinforcing Bars

Grout In Wall (If Required)
cWebBondBeam
Reinforcing
BondBeam Reinforcement = 0.1 i& er f t . Of Wall Minimum

Develop Reinforcement EachSide !O Intersection.
Fig.8.4-42FlangedWall
- T Intersection(Code5.13.4.2(e)3)
8-38

A C 1 TITLE*MDG
8.43.7
73
m 0662749 0508680
35T 9
Effects of Location of Plan Center of Resistance - Ideally, the line of action of
lateral loads should coincide in plan with the line of action of resistance of the structural
system, as shown in Fig. 8.4-43 (a). In that situation, the shear walls are subject to direct
shear only.If
8.4-43(b), a
these two lines of action do not coincide, as showninFig.
torsional moment equal to PItimes e develops. In this situation, the walls parallel to the
applied lateral force are subject to direct shear, and all wallsare subjected to torsional shear.
Line Of Action Of
Load And Resistance
Line Of Action Of
Resistance
Lateral
Loa+
Twist of
Structur
L L i n e Of Action
Of Load
Plan View
Plan View
(a) Concentric Load
(b) Eccentric Load
Fig. 8.4-43 Lines of Action of Lateral Load and Lateral Resistance

To determine the magnitude of torsional shear force applied to each wall, determine the
ratio of each walls stiffness to the total stiffnesses for allwallsin
both directions. The
torsional shear force is equal to P, times e times the stiffness ratio divided by the walls
distance from the applied load. See MDG 9.2.2.
8.43.8
Wall
Reinforcing
Patterns
In masonry
construction,
placement of
wall
reinforcement is influenced bywall configuration, wall openings, and the walls intended
structural action. For example, consider the shear walls of Fig.
8.4-44. Because they are
intended to be uncoupled under lateral load, the walls are connected only by a shallow floor
slab, and they are reinforced for individual cantilever action. In contrast, the shear walls of
Fig. 8.4-45, which are intended to act as a unit, are coupled by deep, appropriately
reinforced masonry lintel beams and are reinforced for coupled wall action.
8-39

A C 1 T I T L E x N D G 93
0662747 0508682 296
Continuous Tie
Reinforcement At
Roof Diaphragm
(If Required)
Wall To Diaphragm
Connections Required
To Activate All Shear
Wall Panels
Continuous Tie
Reinforcement A t Floor
Diaphragm(1f Required)
Panel
Joint Reinforcing
Continuous Reinforcement
At Ends Of Walls
(If Required)
Fig. 8.4-44 Typical Reinforcement Pattern for Uncoupled Shear Walls
Continuous Tie
Reinforcement At
Roof Diaphragm
(If Required)
Continuous Tie
Reinforcement At
Floor Diaphragm
(If Requited)
Panel
Horizontal Reinforcement
A t Coupling Beam
Shear Reinforcement In
Coupling Beam
Joint Reinforcing
Continuous Reinforcement
A t Ends Of Walls
(If Required)
Effective Length
Fig. 8.4-45 Typical Reinforcement Pattern for Coupled Shear Walls
'8-40

A C 1 TITLE*NDG
8.43.9
0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0508b82 1 2 2
93
EngineeredDesign of MasonryShearWalls
- The shear
design of shear walls
depends upon the magnitude of axial load in the wall. If the axial load is sufficient
to
overcome the flexural tension resulting from lateral loads, the section may be designed as
unreinforced in accordance with Code6.5. Shear reinforcement is onlyrequired iff. exceeds
F, If flexural tension exists inthe wall, F, is first calculated fromCode 7.5.2.2 Iff. exceeds
F, shear reinforcement must be provided, and F, is recalculated from Code 7.5.2.3. If f v
exceeds the recalculated F,,,the wall must be increased in size.
Fig. 8.4-46 illustrates wall sections without and withnet flexural tension (from Code C Fig.
7.5-1(a) and Fig. 7.5-l(b)). Fig. 8.4-47 presents a flow chart for shear design (adapted from
Code C.Fig. 7.5-1).
Flexural
Flexural
Axial
Axial
Combined Flexural
and Axial
Combined Flexural
and Axial
Shear fv =
Ib
Fig. 8.4-46(a)
Illustration Of Design
Fig.
8.4-46(b)
Illustration
Section
Without
Tension
NetSection
With
Tension
Net
8-41

Of Design
93
0662949 0508683 Ob9
Determine Design Forces

Campte Maximum
Stresses from Combined
Forces.
Designed per Chapter 7

Reinforced Masonry?
1
I
A
to Flexural
Tension?/
No
Code Eq. 6-7.

Calculate
f, by
No
I See Fig. 8.4-4Ka).
II
:A;' \
\Cade
65.2?/
Calculate f,
Reinforce According
to Code 7.5.1 and
Redesign
by Ccde Eq. 7-3.

See Fig. 8.4-4qb).
Shear Requirement
Satisfied
rement
1
I
Fig. 8.447 FlowChartforShearDesign
8-42

No
Shear
Requirement
"~_.-*.->
A C 1T I T L E S M D G
93
m 0662749
O508684 T T 5
8.43.9.1 Shear Walls Without Net Flexural Tension If M/S is less than PIA,,, then theaxial
compressionexceeds the flexuraltension,and

illustrated in Fig. 8.4-46(a).
no net flexuraltensionresults.Thisis
In this case, the actual shear stress is calculated from Code
6.5.1, and the allowable shear stress is calculated from Code 6.5.2.
F,,is the least value of
fv
V0
"g
a)
1.56
b)
120 psi
c)
U +
0.45
4
N Y
(see Code 6.5.2(c) for u)
d) 15 psi other than running bond with

other than open end units grouted solid
Iff,, is less than or equal to F,, the section is satisfactory. If not, the wall must be increased
in size, or reinforced to resist all calculatedshear. If the designer elects to reinforce the wall,
the allowable shear stress is calculated from Code 7.5.2.3 and the amount of reinforcement
is calculated from Code 7.5.3. See MDG 8.4.3.9.2.
8.43.9.2 Shear Walls With Net Flexural Tension
- If M/S exceeds PIA,,, then the wall has
net flexural tension, as illustrated in Fig. 8.4-46(b). In this case, the actual shear stress is
calculated from Code 7.5.2.1. It isusually desirable to avoid the requirement for shear
reinforcement. Therefore the allowable shear stress is first calculated from Code 7.5.2.2,
where shear reinforcement is not provided to resist the shear.
M
Vd
If-<
I f -M2 1
Vd
Iff,, is less than or equal to F,, the section is satisfactory. Iff,, exceeds F,, calculated above,
8-43

Ob62747 0 5 0 8 b 8 5 931
shear reinforcement is required, and F, is recalculated from Code 7.5.2.3.
If-<
Vd
If-r1
Vd
Fv = 1.5
and Fv
If f v stillexceeds F,, the wallmust
be increased in size.
fi
75 psi
Whenever reinforcement is
necessary, the required area of reinforcement is calculated by Code 7.5.3, where F, is the
allowable stress in thereinforcement.
Steel tensilestressallowables
are giveninCode
7.2.1.1.
The shear reinforcement is placed parallel to the direction of the applied shear force. The
reinforcement spacing is limited to the lesser of d/2 or 48 in. Additional reinforcement,
perpendicular to the shear reinforcement, is required by Code 7.5.3.2. The total additional
reinforcement area must be at least one-third of the shear reinforcement, and is spaced
uniformly at a maximum spacing of 8 ft.
MDG 13.2 specifically addresses the provisions of the Code to the structural design aspects
of unreinforced and reinforced masonry shear walls.
8.4.4
Progressive Collapse
Failure of an individual element that leads to failure of additional elements is referred to

as progressive collapse. The initial localized failure maybe relatively insignificant; however,
the progressive failure may be major and may include complete collapse of the structure.
See Fig. 8.4-48.
8-44

A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 9 3 D 0bb2947 0508b8b 8 7 8
Impact Destroys Relined Boundq:

DiaphragmAction of Floor Act1 I S a Beam
Between Adjacent Undamaged W%.
Explosion Damages Unreinforced Panel
Continuity
Tie Reinforcement
Precast Flous:
Explosion Removes Unreinforced or
LlGhtly Reinforced Section of Wall.
Reinforced Boundaries Remain And Carry
Buildin Loads A s Masonry Columns.
At h m r Line Develops Resulting A n h, Action
Fig. 8.4-48 Progressive Collapse
\ .
Vehicle Removes
Wall Panel And
Exterior Reinforced
Vertical Boundary
Reinforced Boundaries Remain

And Carry Buildiag Loads As
A Masonry Column And As ATic
- Examplesin Masonry Structures
Although not required by the Code, it is prudent for an engineer to provide sufficient
element continuity to reduce the risk of progressive collapse. The key to achieving masonry
element continuity is to tie the structural elements together with reinforcing steel.
The
following items should be considered: vertical reinforcement at each end of a bearing or

shear wall; horizontal reinforcement inwalls at the floor levels; reinforcement around
openings in walls; anchorage between walls and floor/roof diaphragms; redundant systems;
and alternate load paths. For example, verticalreinforcement at the endsof all walls serves
as compression or tension reinforcement. Horizontal reinforcement in walls at the floor
levels can serve as a tensile tie for a masonry arch if part of a wall is removed.
8.5
8.5.1
STRUCTURAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR MASONRY BEAMS

Beam Behavior
A beam is a horizontal member that is subjected to vertical or horizontal loads, and that
spans between points of support. Axial loads in beams are usuallyignored for design
purposes except in shear wall coupling beams.
8-45

A C 1 TITLEvMDG 9 3
0662949 0508687 704
Beams, like other structural elements, must satisfy conditions of equilibrium, stress-strain
relationships, and kinematics(deformations).
supported beam isshowninFig.
The deformation pattern of a simply
8.5-1. The upper fibers shorten, and the lower fibers
lengthen. Fiber strain is proportional to eachfiber's distance from the beam's neutral axis.
For linear elastic material, stress is proportional to strain; therefore, stresses also increase
in proportion to distance from the neutral axis.
Radius of Curvature (R)
Fig. 8.5-1 BeamBending

Axial equilibrium requires that the beam's neutral axis lie at the geometric centroid of the
cross-section. The resultingdistribution
of stresses isshowninFig.8.5-2(a)
foran
uncracked, unreinforced rectangular section, and in Fig. 8.5-2(b) for a cracked, reinforced
rectangular section. In the latter case, the section is often treated as being of a single
material. For this purpose, the reinforcement is transformed into an equivalent area of
masonry by multiplying the steel area by the modular ratio (steel modulus divided by the
masonry modulus).
fbt
k"+
Ir
a) Unreinforced
b) Reinforced
(Cracked)
(Uncracked)
Fig. 8.5-2 FlexuralStressDistribution

8-46

A C 1 TITLE+MDG 93
m 0662947 0508688 h40
The requirement that the internal

resisting momentequal the external applied moment leads
to therelationship between moment and flexural stress at a distance y from the neutralaxis.
f = M,Y
The maximum internal flexure stress occurs inthe extreme fiber, located at a distance c from
the neutral axis, and is given by
Mc - M
f = S - The quantity S iscall the sectionmodulus.Given
the same external moment, a larger
section modulus will result in lower stresses.

Kinematics leads to thefollowing relationship between the beams radiusof curvature, R, and
the change in the length A of a fiber at a distance y from the neutral axis, and the
corresponding strain in the fiber.
The two previousexpressionscanbecombined
to obtain a singleexpressionrelating
moments and curvatures:
The quantity EI is sometime referred to as the flexural stiffness of the cross section. A
larger modulus of elasticity or moment of inertia will result in smaller deformations, given
the same external moment.
The compressive portion of a beam is subjected to flexural stresses that are similar to those
in a beam column. Like a beam column (MDG 8.6), a beam can buckle sidewaysif it is not
sufficiently supported laterally. Factors that affect transverse stability are illustrated in Fig.
8.5-3.
8-47

AC1
TITLE*NDG 93
Ob62949 0508b89 587
Lateral Buckling Is Proportional

To The Unsup orted S an The
Beam Depth, lnnd The$ak Width
Compression
Tension
Reaction
Y
Fig. 8.53
Lateral Buckling
To avoid the need to reduce the allowablecompressive stress inbeams,similar
to the
column design method, Code 7.3.3.4 requires bracing of the compression flange against
lateral displacement. Supports must be provided at the level of the compression face at a
distance not to exceed 32 times the width of the compression face.
In addition to bending moments,beams are also subjectedto shear. Like bending moments,
shear forces are required to maintain beam equilibrium. As illustrated in Fig. 8.5-4, for the
case of a simple beam with uniform load,shear is equal to the rateof change (slope) of the
bending moment diagram.
Fig. 8.5-4 Relation Between Shear And Bending Moment

Shear forces acting on a beam produce shear stresses, which act horizontally and vertically.
8-48

A C 1T I T L E * U D G
93
Ob62949 0508690 2 T 9
As shown in Fig. 8.5-5, the magnitude of the horizontal stresses can be computed from the
stresses (proportional to the shear), and the properties of the cross-
change in flexural
section. In general, horizontal shear stress is given by
Difference Of Flexural Stresses
1 1
Vertical Shear Stress
dx
a)
Derivation of Horizontal
Shear Stresses
Equilibrium
b)
Vertical
and
of Forces From Horizontal

Shear Stresses
Fig. 8.5-5 Beam Shearing Stresses

As shown in Fig. 8.5-5, to achieve equilibriumof a differential element, the horizontal shear
stresses must be accompanied by equal and opposite vertical shear stresses.
For the particular case of a crackedsection, the aboveexpression for horizontal (and
vertical) shear stress leads to the following expression for maximum shear.
fv
bjd
Under combinations of moment and shear, a beam is subject to combined flexural and
shearing stresses. The directions of the resulting principal tensile and compressive stresses
can be shown in the form of stress contours, illustrated in Fig. 8.5-6 for a simple beam with
uniformload.
Atthe
beam midspan,where
8-49

shear is zero, pure tension and pure
93
Obb2949 0508b93 II35
compression act on the bottom and top of the beam, andthe
principal stresses are
horizontal. Near the beam ends, principal stresses act at an angle.
Pure Tension
Tendan and Compression
Fig. 8.5-6 Stress Contours

8.5.2
Engineered Design of Reinforced Masonry Beams
Code 7.3.3 defines beam span length for the purposes of analysis. Simple span beams, or
those not built integrally with supports, have a span length equal to the lesser of the clear
span plus the member depth, or the distance between centers of supports. The span length
of beams continuous over supports is the center to centerdistance between supports. Code
7.3.3.3 further specifies that the minimum length of masonry beam bearing over supports is
4 inches in the direction of the span. The span of a cantilever beam is not defined by the
Code but is usually measured to the face of the support.

For the reinforced rectangular beam illustrated in Fig. 8.5-2, the equations for flexural and
shear stresses in the beam (see MDG 11.1) are as given below.
C = T
c r --
-bkd
2
8-50

M
1
-bjkd2
2
A C 1T I T L E * I I D G
93 M Ob62949 0508692 0 7 2 D
The allowable masonry flexural compressive stress is 1/3rm.

The allowable tensile stress for steel reinforcement is 20,000psi for Grade 40 or Grade 50
steel, and 24,000psi for Grade 60 steel. The resistance of steel reinforcement in the
compression zone is neglected, unless lateral reinforcement that meets the requirements of
Code 5.9.1.6 is provided. In that case, the steel is transformed to the equivalent masonry
area as defined in Code 5.13.1.2.
The design for allowable shear follows the flow chart presented in Fig. 8.4-47. Since beams
are usually subject to flexural tension, the allowable shear stress F, is first calculated from
Code 7.5.2.2(a):
F,=@oPsi
If f, is less than or equal to F,,,no shear reinforcement is required. If f, calculated above

exceeds F,,shear reinforcement is required, and the amount is calculated by Code 7.5.3.
Either the calculated shear stress must be less than the allowable stress F, recalculated by
Code 7.5.2.3, or the cross section must be increased.
F,,= 3.0/$$ S 150 psi

Code 7.3.3.5 and Code 5.6.1 limit the deflection of beams supporting unreinforced masonry
to U600 or 0.3 inch.
MDG 11.3 specially addresses the Code provisions for flexural structural design of masonry
beams, while MDG 13.1 addresses beam shear considerations.
8-5 1

TITLE+MDG 93
AC1
8.6
8.6.1
Obb2949 0508b93 T08
STRUCTURAL CONSIDERATIONSFORMASONRY BEAM COLUMNS
BeamColumnBehavior
Columns resist compressionand flexure. As discussed inMDG 8.4.2.3 for loadbearing walls,
columns may fail in one of two modes.
1. Material compression failure, illustrated in Fig. 8.6-1:
Load
Strength is proportional to the ultimate

compression or bearing capacity of the
material, and the cross-sectional area of
the column.
-.-.
0.
/*
Fig. 8.6-1 MaterialCompressionFailure

2. Buckling, illustrated in Fig. 8.6-2
Column II carries 4 times the buckling
IP
Fixed
load of Column I. See Fig. 8.4-22 and 8.4-
24 for other end fixity conditions.

For any end condition:
h'
',
\
h '14
Fixed
Column I
Column II
Fig. 8.6-2 CompressiveBucklingFailure

8-52

A C 1 TITLE+MDG 93
Ob62949 0508694 9 4 4
Column buckling load is proportional to the material's modulus of elasticity and the crosssectional shape, and isinversely
proportional to thesquare of the column'seffective
unbraced length.
The shape of the cross section determines the moment of inertia and the area An index
for thecross sectionalshape is expressedas@,
and is called the radius of gyration, r. The
slenderness of the column is expressed by hlr.

8.6.2
Engineered Design of Masonry Beam Columns
Code 5.9 gives general requirements for column dimensions, reinforcement, and analysis.
Each nominal side dimension mustbe at least 8 in., and the ratioof effective heightto least
nominal side dimension must not exceed 25. Columns must have a minimum of 4 vertical
reinforcing bars, and the areaof reinforcing steel may not be less than 0.0025 A,, nor exceed
0.04An. Lateral tie reinforcement at least 0.25 in. in diameter must be provided at a spacing
and configuration s-pecifiedby
Code 5.9.1.6.
For analysispurposes,columnsmust
be
designed assuminga minimum axial load eccentricity

equal to0.1 times each side dimension,
where each axis is considered independently.
Beam columns are designed for axial load, axial plus flexure, and shear as needed.
The allowable masonry compressive stress due to flexure plus axial load, is 1/3fm, provided
that the calculated compressive stress due to the axial load component, fa, does not exceed
the allowable stress F,, given in Code 7.3.1.1.
For hlr c 99, F,, =
1
-$,
4
8-53

93 M 0662949 0508695 880
For hlr r 99, Fa =
$r
id(
4
Previous codes and industry standards permitted the area for

allowable axialstress to include
some percentage of the transformed steel reinforcement area. However, the Code is silent
on this issue. The MSJC is currently considering a revision to address this subject.
MDG 12.1 specifically addresses the provisions of the Code to the structuraldesign aspects
of reinforced masonry columns.
8.63 Interaction Diagrams
Columns can be subject to both axialloadandflexure.
Depending on the relative
magnitudes of the axial load and bending moment, one of three cases will exist:
I.
The allowable axial load on the beam column (independent of moment) is based on
the net area of masonry only, and is governed by the allowable axial compressive
stress, F,, as defined in Code 7.3.1.1.
II.
Combinations of allowable beam column moment and axial force, computed using a
cracked transformed section, are governed by the allowableflexuralcompressive
stress, Fb, as defined in Code 7.3.1.2.
III.
Combinations of allowable beam column moment and axial force, computed using a
cracked transformed section, are governed by the allowabletensile
stress in
reinforcement, F,, as defined in Code 7.2.1.1.
As discussedin detail in MDG 12.1, these three casescan be graphicallyexpressed as

interaction diagrams. A simplified diagram is shown in Fig. 8.6-3.
8-54

A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 93 W Ob62949 0 5 0 8 b 9 b 717 W
Bending Moment
Fig. 8.63 InteractionDiagram

Combinations of beam column axial load and bending moments lying within
the shaded area
are allowed; combinations outside the shaded area are not allowed.
REFERENCES
8.3.1 ASCE Standard, ASCE 7-88, "MinimumDesign Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures," American Society of Civil Engineers, New York, NY, 1990.
8.3.2 Guide to the Use of the Wind Load Provisions of ASCE 7-88, American Society of
Civil Engineers, 1992.
8.3.3 Ellifrit D. S., IlThe Mysterious 1/3 Stress Increase",AISC Journal, 4th Quarter,
American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL, 1977.
8.4.1 L
McGraw-Hill, 1965.
8.4.2 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, American Concrete Institute,
Detroit, Michigan, 1988.
8.4.3 Colville,
James,
"Service
Load
Design
Equation for Unreinforced Masonry
Construction," TMS Journal, Vol. II, No. 1, August 1992.
8.4.4 Colville, James, "Stability of Hollow Masonry Walls,"

August 1992.
8-55

TMS Journal, Vol. II, No. 1,
A C 1 T I T L E + M D G 93
m 0662949 0508697 653 m
DISTRIBUTION OF LOADS
9.0
INTRODUCTION
A major criterion that influences the design of any structure is the distribution within the
structure of the effects of dead, live, and other superimposed loads. This chapter deals with
the various load distribution concepts with respect
to the design and analysis of masonry
structures.
Two types of load distribution in masonry structures are considered. Global distribution is
concerned with the transfer of loads to the various components of the structure (i.e., slabs,
beams,walls,pilasters,columns,
and footings).Thisdistributionmayhave
to take into
account the stiffness of structural components, and must consider the existence and location
of control and expansion joints. Local load distribution is concerned with how loads
are
distributed within individual structural components; i.e., the distribution of concentrated

loads in single wythe, multiwythe
and composite walls, distribution
of loads under bond
beams, and load distribution within perforated shear walls.

The concepts of loaddistribution,
as well as the application of the Code to the
comprehensive design of typical masonry buildings,are presented in this Guide using three
typical, and realistic masonry structures as examples. The three structures and their design
loads are describedin MDG 9.1. The global distribution of these loads to the various
components of each structure is presented in MDG 9.2, Interwall Load Distribution. Typical
component examples considering various construction options
are examined. The local load
9-1

AC1 TITLExMDG 93 m 0662949 0508698 5 9 T m
distribution within a wall is presented in MDG 9.3, Intrawall Load Distribution. Numerous
situations commonly found in structural design of masonry elements are examined.
9.1 BUILDING EXAMPLES
Three buildings arepresented
in thissection:
a singlestory
strip shopping center, a
gymnasium, and a four story hotel. These buildings and their masonry elements will be used
in subsequent chapters to demonstrate masonry structural design procedures. The purpose
ofusing three typical buildings is not
to provide the reader with final designs
for each
structure, but to illustrate the application of design methodology and philosophy presented
in MDG Chapter 8 to typical real life situations and to provide some insight into the
practical masonry design requirements of the MSJC structural masonry design code.
Each masonry system (suchas anexterior loadbearing wall) may havea number of different
configurations(forexample,solidwall,noncompositewall,etc.).Both
reinforced and
unreinforced examples of different configurations will be investigated for each building.

Since the design of masonry structural systems requires a detailed analysis of the building
loads, a typicalgloballoadanalysis
will be performed and presented for each building
example. Code 5.1 requires that structures and their components be designed by elastic
analysis under service load conditions. The following analyses are based on elastic material
behavior nd will be restricted to the determination of gravity loads on walls, and global
earthquake andwind loadings. Lateral load distribution to individual building elements can
involve the determination of masonry wall stiffness and will
be addressed in MDG 9.2
Interwall Load Distribution. Specific examples
loads are distributed within
ofhowwall
individual wall elements are presented within MDG 9.3 - Intrawall Load Distribution.
9.1.1 TMS ShoppingCenter
Figs. 9.1-1 and 9.1-2show the plan and elevations of a single-story, 16,000 square foot
9-2

A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93
Ob62949 0508679 426
shopping center. The north, east, west and central fire wall are constructed of concrete
masonry. The south wallisprimarily
a glass curtain wallwith one masonry shear wall
element.
The roof framing system consistsof a one-way steel joist and beam system supported on the
concrete masonry wallsand steelcolumns, with a five-foot overhang on thesouth side. This
roof framing system is typical of many low-rise masonry commercial buildings.
To illustrate the application of the Code to typical structural design considerations for this
type of structure, 29 example problemsare presented throughout the MDG Design Chapters
9 through 16 for theT M S Shopping Center. A listing is included in thissection to assist the
reader in correlating the illustrated example design issue to the plans and elevations of the
structure.
T M S SHOPPING CENTER EXAMPLE PROBLEM INDEX

All Wall Construction Options
Examule #
Desim Issue
9.2-1
Lateral load
distribution
(all
walls)
9.3-1
Concentrated load
distribution
without
bond
9.3-2
Concentrated load
distribution
9.3-3
Concentrated load bearing area(east
and west
walls)
9.3-4
Concentrated load
bearing
and west
walls)
9.3-5
Concentrated load bearing area(ea@ and west

walls)
9.3-10
Out-of-plane lateral and axialload
beam(north
wall)
with bond beam (north wall)
area(east
distribution within peforated wall
(east wall)
14.3-5
Joist bearing connection to wall (north wall)
14.3-11
Steel beam bearing connection to wall (eastand westwalls)
14.3-12
Roofdiaphragm to shear wall connection (interior wall)
9-3

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
0662949 0508700 T78 M
va
o
Fig. 9.1-1 TMS Shopping Center
9-4

~~
ACI TITLErMDG 93 m 0 b b 2 9 4 9 0508703 904 m
Fig. 9.1-2 T M S Shopping Center Elevations

9-5

A C 1 TITLE*UDG
93
m 0662949 0508702 840
Wall Construction Option A (Unreinforced CMU)

Example #
Desim Issue
9.3-12
In-plane lateral load distribution within perforated wall (east wall)
10.4-1
Control joint locations (all walls)
11.1-1
Wall
design
for out-of-plane flexure (east wall)
11.1-3
Wall
design
12.2-2Walldesign
for axial and out-of-plane flexure (north wall)
13.1-6
Wall
design
for out-of-plane shear(interior wall)
13.2-1Walldesign
for in-planeflexure and shear(east wall)
15.4-1
Empirical wall
design
(all
walls)
Wall Construction Option B (Reinforced CMU)

Examde #
9.3-11
Issue
Design
In-plane lateral load distribution within perforated wall (east wall)
11.1-2
Wall
design
11.3-2Doubly

reinforced masonrylinteldesign
for flexure (east wall)
12.2-1Walldesign
for axial and out-of-plane flexure (north wall)
13.1-9
Wall
design
for out-of-plane shear(east wall)
13.1-10Doubly
13.2-2Walldesign
reinforced masonry lintel design forshear(east

for in-planeflexureand
shear(east wall)
14.2-1
Straight bar foundation dowel anchorage (all

walls)
14.2-2
Hooked bar foundation dowel anchorage (all

walls)
14.2-3Doubly
wall)
reinforced masonrylintel reinforcement anchorage (east wall)
Miscellaneous
Example #
14.3-1
Roof
Desim Issue
diaphragm to
shear
wall connection
9.1.1.1 Gravity Design Loads - The gravity load analysis is straightforward, requiring the
application of the tributary area concept and simple statics.
It is assumed that the dead load of the roofing system, including all framing members,
9-6

mechanical systems and ceiling, is a uniformly distributed 15 psf. The governing roof live
load is a 30 psf snow load.
In addition, the height of the parapet wall is such that lateral
drift need not be considered.

The steel joists spanning between Grid Lines A and B are spaced at 5 ft, so that each is
uniformly loaded by:
W =
(30psf x 5 ft) + ( 15 psf x 5 ft) = 150.0 plf
Live Load
75.0 plf = 225 plf
Dead Load
Assuming an average wall thickness of 8 in., the joist reactions on the north bearing wall
(Grid Line A) and on the beams on Grid Line B are:
RA
RBI = (41
*-
h12 h*ft)
x 225 plf
2
4,538 lb;
use 4,540lb
For the cantilevered joist (steel joists with extended ends) spanning between Grid Lines B
and C, it is conservatively assumed that full snow and dead load on the center span and
dead load minus wind uplift on the cantilevered span will produce the greatest reaction at
Grid Line B. Assuming a fascia dead load of 10 psf (or 70 plf for the 7 ft deep fascia) and
a wind uplift of 1.5 x 20 psf = 30 psf, this reaction is:
RE=- 1
40.5 ft
-(70 plf
+ 225 plf x
RB2 = 4,536 lb;
5 ft
5 ft) + (30 psf- 15 psf)
5 ft
( 5 ftI2
2
2
use 4,540lb
(Note that thewind load is increasedby a factor of 1.5 to account for pressure build
up under the canopy)
The total load on Grid Line B from the joists is 4,540 lb
9-7

+ 4,540 lb = 9,080 lb.
A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 93
5 f t Typical
6,050 lb
Ob62949 05087011 b L 3
9,080 lb Typical
f l t t t - + t t t
I
4 " 1"
12 "9"
Suspended
Span
B- 1
Cantilevered Span
24 '- 1"
Fig. 9.1-3 Cantilevered Beam System on Grid Line B - Section A-A (Fig. 9.1-1)
These reactions are spaced at 5 ft centers along the cantilevered beam system.
The joist
reaction located at 1ft - 6 in. from the outside face of the walls is only 6,050 lb due to the
reduction in tributary area (see Fig. 9.1-3).
The total beam reaction load on the masonry walls at B-1 and B-3 is 15,770 lb, of which
5,090 lb is dead load and 10,680 lb is live load.
Assuming full dead and live load on the cantilevered joist between Grid LinesB and C, the
typical load from each joist on Grid Line C (ignoring the wind uplift under the canopy) is:
Rc
5,830 lb
(2,000 lb dead load and 3,830 lb live load)
The corresponding load from the joist located 1 ft - 6 in. from the exterior face of the wall
on Grid Line 1 onto the W 16 x 26 is 3,890lb (1,330 lb dead load and 2,560 lb live load).
9-8

A C 1 TITLESMDG 93
Obb2747 0508705 S S T
The W 16 X 26 beam reaction totthe masonrywalls at the junctions of Grid Line

C and Grid
Lines 1 or 3 is:
- 13,890lb
R1-C,3-C
Rl-C,3-C
x 20
11,940lb
ft
5,830 lb(15 ft + 10 ft + 5
21.167 ft
(4,090 lbdeadloadand
fi)]
7,850 lb live load)
(assumes an 8 in. wall thickness)

The reaction of the W 16 x 26 beam on the short wall at Grid Line C, between Grid Lines
1 and 2, is:
&z-z
= (5
&z-2
fi
10 fi + 15 ft + 20 fi) x
13,666lb
13,670lb
5,830 lb
21.33 fi
(4,690 lbdeadload
and 8,980lblive
load)
(assuming 6 in. of bearing of the steel beam onto the masonry wall fields a
21 ft - 4 in. span)
The reaction of the beam and joist at the junction of Grid Lines C and 2 is:
Rc-2 =
12 h/ft
5ft
12,412lb;
use 12,410lb
x 5,830 lb +
5,830lb ( 5 ft
(4,260 lb deadloadand
19
10 ft + 15 ft)
ft
8,150lblive
load)
The above calculation used the ratio of joist tributary widths to calculate the joist reaction
and assumed a beam span of 19 ft.
9.1.1.2
Lateral Design Loads - Both seismic and wind loads must be investigated for the
lateral loading on the strip shopping center.

9-9

A C 1 TITLE*NDG 93
Obb2949
050870b
496
Seismic Loads
The TMS shopping center is located in Seismic Zone 1. According to ASCE 7-88(9.1.1),
Section 9.4, the minimum total seismic force applied to a structure in the direction of each
principal plan direction is V,given by
v = ZIKCSW
For Seismic Zone 1, the various coefficients on the right hand side of this equation are
obtained from ASCE 7-88 as follows:
2 = Seismic Coefficient from Table 21 = 3/16,
I = Importance Factor from Table 22 = 1.0,
= Horizontal Force Factor from Table 23 = 1.33,
C = Numeric Cotficient =
1
15n
in which
T =
0.05 h,
where h, is the height and D is the lateral dimension of the structurein the direction under
consideration, and T is the fundamental elastic period of vibration of the building or
structure in the direction under consideration, in seconds.
S=
Soil factor from Table 24 in ASCE 7-88 = 2.5 assuming an S, soil profile due
to lack of soil information.
W = the total dead load.

For the east-west direction, the longest dimensionis approximately 204 ft and the height to
the diaphragm is 16 ft. Therefore:
9-10

A C 1 T I T L E S M D G 73 W Obb2949 0508707 322 W
C = Numeric Coeficieni L
= 0.282
15 40.056 seconds
but the maximum value of C = 0.12 Therefore use C = 0.12
By inspection, C in the north-south direction = 0.12
ASCE 7-88, Section 9.4.2 indicates that the product of C and S need not exceed 0.14.
x S =
0.12 x 1.5
:.
0.18,
Use C x S = 0.14
Thus,
3 X 1.0
16
1.33
0.14 X W
0.035 X W in both directions
Since the masonry walls in this example problem potentially may have many configurations,
assume that the average constructed weight of these walls is 60 psf. Assume that theweight
of the glass and the partitions is 10 psf each, and that 1/2 of the lateral inertia force from
the partition mass is transferred to the roof.
Ignoring the parapet and assuming an 8 in. thick wall, the total roof area =
(81.5ft
5 ft -
in*
12 in&
x (204.67
ft - 3 (8
12 in@
in*)
The weight of the roof and 1/2 of the partitions =
1@ + 15 psf)
A
x 17,400 f t 2 =
348,000 lb
The weight of the glass =

1 o p s f x - l2 ft x 182 ft
10,920 lb
The weight of the fascia =
10 psf x 7 ft x 204.67 ft
14,330 lb
The 1/2 weight of the short masonry wall on Grid Line C =
9-11

17,400 ft2
A C 1 TITLEtMDG 9 3 W Obb29Y9 0508708 269 W
The 1/2 weight of the short masonry wall on Grid Line C =
* x 21.33 ft
60 psf x-
11,520 lb
Assuming that the remaining masonry walls are simply supported at the roofline and
foundation, and extend 2 ft above the roof support, theweight of these walls applied tothe
roof =
( 6OPf
18ft
16 ft
=
Y ) x 202.67 ft
(6Opsfx18ftx~)
+
3 x
16 ft
82 ft
272,600 lb
348,000 lb
10,920 lb + 14,330 lb
11,520 lb
272,600 lb
657,400 lb
Therefore the total seismic force to be resisted (i.e., base shear) is,
0.035 x 657,400 lb
23,000 lb in either direction
The previous calculations didnot include anyportion of the roof live load in the calculations.
However, ASCE 7-88 requires the entire roof snow load to be included in the calculation
of Wwhen the ground snow load exceeds30 psf. To simplify the design example,the added
weight due to snow load was not included. In a real design situation this added weight must
be addressed.
Wind Loads
The wind loading on buildings can vary significantly.
Different building codes across the
USA use different wind load values and distributions. These vary from a simplistic value of
X psf over the wall surface, to the complexity of ASCE 7-88 with its internal and external
coefficients. A document designed to assist the professional in the understanding and use
of the complexwindloadprovisions
of ASCE 7-88 is available (9.1.2). Sincethisis
masonry design guide and not a wind manual, a simplistic approach to wind loads will be
followed. A wind pressure of 20 psf, acting uniformly over the wall areas, will be used. If
9-12

A CT1I T L E * M D G
93
Obb2949 0 5 0 8 7 0 9 I T 5
a more complex analysis were used the wind pressure on the individual elements, such as
the parapets and wall comers, would vary significantly.
The walls are assumed to be simply supported between the foundations and the roof
diaphragm, with a 2 ft cantilevered parapet.
For wind from the north:
I.,
(20 psf x 18 ft x 18 ft
mrUiload=
16 ft
203 plf
For wind from the south, blowing against the glass and fascia:
Windload=2Opsfx 12* + 7 f t ) =260plf

2
(Governs for the north-south direction)
For wind in the east-west direction:
Wind load
203 plf
Also, an additional wind load from the fascia of 4.5 ft x 7 ft x 20 psf
= 630 lb will be
applied
to the wall on Grid Line C.

It should be noted that wind loading produces the largest total force in the north-south
direction, and therefore governs. In east-west direction, the seismic loading produces the
largest total force, and governs in this direction.
The global distribution ofthese lateral design loads to individual masonry walls is discussed
in MDG 9.2.
9.1.2
DPC Gymnasium
Figs. 9.1-4 and 9.1-5 show the planandelevation
9-13

of a 7,500 square foot, single-story
Obb2949 0508730 917
A C 1 T I T L E * N D G 93
4t
'OH
.o-.81
1 .o-.zr 1
.o-.
.o-. PE
P9
Fig. 9.1-4 DPC Gymnasium Plan
9-14

A C 1 TITLEaMDG 93
m 0662949 0508711
853
l .
Fig. 9.1-5 DPC Gymnasium Elevations
9-15

A C 1 TITLE*:MDG 7 3
0 6 6 2 7 4095 0 8 7 l 1729 T
gymnasiumbuilding.Thisbuildinghas
four wall construction options, including two
unreinforced and two reinforced masonry wall systems. The roof framing system consistsof
gabled rooftrusses supporting a metal roof deck, insulation,a membrane, andmiscellaneous
equipment. The north and south walls are loadbearing.
The roof framing system is, again, a simple one-way system. Simple tributary area analysis
of the loading can be performed.
To illustrate the application of the Code to the typical structural design considerations for
this type of structure, 27 example problems are presented throughout the MDG Design
Chapters 9 through 16 for theDPC Gymnasium. A listing of theMDG Examples is
included in this sectionto assist the readerin correlating the illustrated example design issue
to the plans and elevations of the structure.
DPC GYMNASIUM EXAMPLE PROBLEM INDEX

Example #
9.2-2
Issue
Design
Lateral load
distribution
(all
walls)
Wall Construction Option A (Unreinforced Noncomposite Brick and Block)

Examde #
Desim Issue
9.3-6
Eccentric gravityloaddistribution to the wythes (northand south walls)
9.3-7
In-plane lateral load distribution to the wythes (east and westwalls)
9.3-8
Out-of-plane lateral load distribution tothe
11.1-4
Wall
design
11.2-1
Unreinforced pilaster design for out-of-plane flexure (east and west
wythes (all walls)
for out-of-plane flexure

(wast
wall)
walls)
11.2-2
Reinforced pilaster design for out-of-plane flexure (eastand westwalls)
11.3-3
Steel lintel
design
(south wall)
9-16

AC1
TITLE*HDG 9 3 M 0bb2949 0508733 626 m
12.2-3
Walldesignforaxial
12.3-1
Unreinforced pilasterdesign for axial and out-of-plane flexure (north
and out-of-plane flexure (north wall)
and south walls)
12.3-2
Reinforced pilaster design for axial and out-of-plane flexure (north and
south walls)
14.3-2
Walltiedesign
14.3-4
Shear wall to foundation connection (eastand westwalls)
14.3-15
Roof diaphragm toshear wall connection (east and westwalls)
for out-of-plane loading(allwalls)
Wall Construction Option B (Unreinforced Composite Brick and Block)

Examde #
Issue
Desien
9.3-9
Collar joint design for out-of-plane shear(eastand
11.1-5
Wall
design
12.2-4
Walldesign for axial and out-of-plane flexure (north wall)
13.1-5
Wall
design
13.2-3
Walldesignfor
14.3-3
Shear wall to foundation connection (east and westwalls)
15.4-2
Empirical wall
design
(all
walls)
westwalls)

(west
wall)
for out-of-plane shear(north
wall)
in-plane flexure and shear(east wall)
Wall Construction Option C (Reinforced Composite Brick and Block)

Examde #
Issue
Design
11.1-6
Wall
design
11.3-8
Steel lintel
design
(south
wall)
13.1-7
Wall
design

(west
wall)
for out-of-plane shear (west
wall)
Wall Construction Option D (Reinforced Clay Masonry)

ExamDle #
Issue
Desien
11.1-7
Wall
design
12.2-5
Walldesign for axial and out-of-plane flexure (north wall)

(west
wall)
9-17

Miscellaneous
14.3-7
Typical
reinforcing
details
Gravity Design Loads - It is assumed that the dead load of the roofing system,
9.1.2.1
including all framing members, mechanical systems and ceiling, is a uniformly distributed
load of 20 psf. The governing roof live load
is a 40 psfsnow load. This load
is either
applied across the entire span, or 20 psf is applied on one slope and 40 psf on the other
slope.
The building is64 ft wide; the masonry wall thicknesswill vary slightlydepending on the
wall
construction option selected. To determine the loads it is assumed that the wall width will
be 12 in. This assumption leaves a net truss clear span of 62 ft.
The reactions of the fully loaded truss under dead load and live load are therefore:
= [8
ft
(20 psf + 40 M)] X
62 ft =
2
14,880 lb
The reactions of the truss loaded with the unbalanced snow load are:
[ 8 f t x ( 2 0 p s f +40psf)] x
(31
2
11,160 lb
[ 8 f t x ( 2 0 p s f + 2 0 p s f ) ] x (31
fiY
R-
[ 8 ft x (20 psf + 40 psf)] x 31 ft x (31 fi +
13,640 lb
9-18

=)}
2
AC1
TITLEsMDG 93 D 0662949 0508735 4 T 9 m
The exterior trusses and the first interior trusses have a reduced tributary area. Taking into
account this reduction, reactions were calculated and are summarized in Table 9.1.1. This
table summarizes all the truss reactions.
Table9.1.1
Truss Reactions
Truss
Reaction
Tributary Width
(lb)
(fi)
Full Load Unbalanced
Snow
Maximum
Minimum
Typical
(Dead Load)
Exterior
(Dead Load)
1st Interior
8.00
3.50
(4,960)
6,5 10
11,160 14,88013,640
(4,960)
(4,960)
5,970
4,880
(2,170)
(2,170)
7.17
(2,170)
10,000 13,33012,220
(4,440)
(Dead Load)
(4,440)
(4,440)
9.1.2.2 Lateral Design Loads - Both seismic and wind loads must be investigated for lateral
loading on the DPC Gymnasium.
Seismic Loads
Using an analysis similar to that described for the TMS Shopping Center in MDG 9.1.1.2
the seismic loading for the DPC Gymnasium can be calculated using the formula
= ZIKCSW.
Z = 3/8 (category II building ASCE 7-88)
I = 1.25
K = 1.33
9-19

To find C for the north-south direction:

The mean roof height is:
h,
= 24.67
ft
5.33 ft = 26.44 ft
-
u ~ 26.5
e
C = Numeric Coeflcient =
ft
= 0.16 > 0.12
15 40.17 seconds
.:
use C = 0.12 (maximum allowed)
To find C for the east-west direction:
T = 0.05 x 26.5 ft
Jim?
C
= o.12
Numeric Coeficient =
= 0.19
> 0.12
15 40.12 seconds
2.
use C = 0.12
Using a soil factor, S, of 1.5 as in the TMS Shopping Center,
C x S = 0.18
However, use maximum of C x S = 0.14 (maximum required) in both directions.
The total seismic load is therefore the same in both directions, and has a value of:
3
8
1.25
1.33
0.14
= 0.0875
9-20

a variety of configurations, a 100 psf
Since the masonry walls in this example may have

average constructed weightisassumed.
It is alsoassumed that the gymnasiumhasno
partitions or any other items that add to its seismic weight. The walls are assumed pinned
at the top and bottom; thus, only half of that weight was included in the calculation of the
seismic forces.
The weight of the roof =
20 psf x 64 ft x 128 ft = 163,800 lb
The weight of north or south walls =

100 psf
24.67 ft
128 ft
=
2
157,900 lb
The weight of the east or west walls =

24.67 ft +
ft
2
84,740 lb
163,800 lb + 2 x ( 157,900 lb + 84,740 lb )
649,100 lb
Note that the snow loads on the roof are not included in the weight calculation to
simplify the problem (see discussion in MDG 9.1.1.2).
The total seismic load is therefore:
= 0.0873 x 649,100
lb
56,700 lb in each direction
Wind Loads
The same assumptions used for the TMS Shopping Center apply to the DPC Gymnasium.
9-21

93
Obb29Y9 0508718 108 M
Wind load in the north and south direction =
Assuming the east and west walls span from the foundations to the roof, the average
span =
Wind load in the east-west direction =
The global distribution of these lateral loads to individual masonry walls is discussed in
MDG 9.2
9.13 RCJ Hotel
Figs. 9.1-6 through 9.1-15 show the typical floor plans, elevationsand details of a multi-story
hotel. The north and south walls are glass curtain walls and the masonry walls are shown
hatched. General notes for the RCJ Hotel are given on pages 9-29 and 9-30.
There are two wall construction options. Option A uses unreinforced single wythe concrete
masonry units on the interior walls. The exterior walls are composed of 4 in. face brick, a
3 in. air cavity, 1 in. of insulation and an interior wythe of concrete masonry units. Option
B uses reinforced single wythe hollow clay masonry for both exterior and interior walls.
9-22

A CT1I T L E a M D G
93
Obb2949 0 5 0 8 7 3 9 044
(-J;I
-a
II
.I
11
Fig. 9.1-6 RCJ Hotel Floor Plan

9-23

A C 1T I T L E r U D G
9 3 W Obb29Y9 0508720 8bb
f "T
I
a
B
;;
ri
i?"-
!
!
Fig. 9.1-7 RCJ Hotel Floor Plan

9-24

A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 93 W Ob62949 0508723 7 T 2 W
Fig. 9.1-8 RCJ HotelBuildingSection
9-25

A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 93 m Obb2949 0 5 0 8 7 2 2 639 m
Fig. 9.1-9 RCJ HotelElevations
9-26

93 W 0662749 0508723 575 W
L
k
L
r,
Fig. 9.1-10 RCJ HotelBuildingSection
9-27

A C 1 TITLESMDG 93
Obb2949 0508724 401
;
I
!
-!!
I
!
!
I
!
I
!
+
I
!
!
!
+
!
!
1
j
!
!
4;.
!
I
I
!
!
!
ll
!
!
!
!
+j
!
!
I
!
I
I
!
!
!
!
!
!
i
!
-8-. 6
"8-.8
Fig. 9.1-11 RCJ Hotel Elevations

9-28

93
0662949 0508725 348
RCJ HOTEL NOTES

1.
Design
Dead
Loads
Roof (Hotel)
95 psf
Roof (Canopy)
50 psf
Floor
110 psf
10 psf
Glass curtainwall
2.
(includes partitions)
Design
Live
Loads
Roof
20 psf
Dwelling Rooms
40 psf
Public Rooms
loo psf
1st Floor Corridor
100 psf
Corridors above 1st
100 psf
Stairways
loo psf
No Snow
Wind pressure or suction
3.
on vertical surfaces
25 psf
Wind uplift on open roofs
40 psf
Seismic Zone
See Item 4c
Conditions
Soil
4000 psf
Allowable soil bearing pressure
30 pcf
Equivalent fluid pressure

S
4.
Building
Construction
a.
Floor and Masonry

Elevations
Option I
Option II
10 - 10
9 - 8
First floor to second floor
40 - 4
Overall masonry wall height
Floor to floor above second floor
- 10
First floor to second floor
9-29

Ob62947 050872b 284
8 - 8
Floor to floor
above
second
floor
35 - O
b.
Overall
masonry
wall
height
Roof and Floor Construction
8 precast hollowcore planks with 2 thick normal-weight topping at Hotel

4 precast hollowcore planks with no topping at Canopy
C.
Wall Construction
Option A - Non-Reinforced, Seismic Zone 2
Interior loadbearing and nonloadbearing walls, and retaining wall,
single wythe CMU
Exterior loadbearing walls
4 face brick, 3 cavity with 1 rigid insulation
interior wythe of CMU
Option B - Reinforced, Seismic Zone 4
All walls - single wythe hollow clay masonry
d.
Canopy Construction
Beams and columns - reinforced clay masonry
e.
Lintels and Beams

Beam B1
W21 x 78
+ 2 - L 3-1/2 x 3-1/2 x 3/8 - bear each end on
stiffened grillage beam W8 x 21 x 2-O at Wall Construction

Option A only
Beam B2 -
W10 x 26 with 6 long bearing each end andbearing plate 3/4

X
Lintel L1 -
O8
W8 x 18 with 8 long bearing each end at Wall Construction

Option A or reinforced masonry beam at Wall Construction
b
Option B
Lintel L2 -
2 Angles 3-1/2 x 3-1/2 x 1/4 with 4 long bearing each end
Lintel L3 -
W8 x 15with 6 long bearing each end

Add 5/16 thick bottom plate for Wall Construction Option A
f.
Masonry
Openings
All door openings are 3-4 wide x 7-O high, unless noted otherwise
9-30

93 H 0 b b 2 9 4 9 0 5 0 8 7 2 7 110
Fig. 9.1-12 RCJ HotelSections

9-31

Obb2949 0508728 057
c
-1
Fig. 9.1-13 RCJ Hotel Section
9-32

AC1
TITLE+MDG 93 m Obb2949 0508729 T93 m
Fig. 9.1-14 RCJ Hotel Sections
9-33

93
Obb2949 0508730 705
8
."c
o"
Fig. 9.1-15 RCJ Hotel Sections

9-34

93
m Obb2949
0508732 b4L
To illustrate how to design both coupled and uncoupled shear walls the hotelwill have two
possible elevation configurations, Building
Option I (40 ft- 4 in.overall masonry wallheight)
and Option II (35 ft- O in. overall masonry wall height), respectively. See Figs. 9.1-8, 9.1-9,
9.1-10, and 9.1-11.
As shown in Fig. 9.1-6 and in canopy section N 6 of Fig. 9.1-12, there is a canopy over the
entrance to the lobby. This canopy issupported on reinforced masonry columnsand beams.
The columns have an unsupported height of 12 ft.
To illustrate the application of the Code to typical structural design considerations for this
type of structure, 31 example problems are presented throughout the MDGDesign Chapters
9 through 16 for the RCJ Hotel. A listing of the MDG Examples is included in this section
to assist the reader in correlating the illustrated example design issue to the plans and
elevations of the structure.
RCJ HOTEL EXAMPLE PROBLEM INDEX

Example #
Issue
Desien
11.1-9
Unreinforced retaining wall

design
11.1-10
Reinforced retaining wall

design
11.3-1
Singly reinforcedmasonry beam design for flexure (canopy)
13.1-2
Singly reinforced masonry beam design forshear (canopy)
14.3-6
Beam to column
connection
(canopy)
Wall Construction Option A (Unreinforced Noncomposite Brick and Block)

Example #
Issue
DesiFn
9.2-3
Lateral load
distribution
(all
walls)
10.4-2
Expansion joint locations (all walls)
10.4-3
Differential movement between wythes

(all
walls)
9-35

AC1 TITLE*NDG 93 m 0662949 0508732 588 m
11.1-11
Wall design for out-of-plane flexure (stairwell wall)
11.3-6
Continuous masonry beam design for flexure (Grid E)
12.1-1
Column design for axial and flexure (Grid E-3)
13.1-3
Continuous masonry beam design for shear (Grid E)
13.2-4
Wall design for in-plane flexure and shear (Grid C)
14.3-8
Roof diaphragm to shear wall connection (Grid F)
14.3-16
Continuous masonry beam reinforcement termination (Grid E)
15.4-3
Empirical wall design (all walls)
Wall Construction Option B (Reinforced Clay Masonry)

Examde #
Desim Issue
9.2-4
Lateral load distribution (all walls)
11.1-18
Singly reinforced masonrylinteldesign
11.1-12
Walldesign
11.3-4
Wall beam design for flexure (Grid E)
11.3-5
Coupling beam design for flexure (Grid 2)
11.3-7
Coupling beam design for flexure (Grid B)
13.1-1
Coupling beam design forshear
13.1-4
Wall
design
13.1-8
Coupling beam design for shear (Grid B)
13.2-5
Walldesign for in-planeflexure and shear (Grid C)
13.2-6
Walldesign for in-planeflexure andshear (Grid 2)
14.3-9
Floor diaphragm to wall connection (Grid 2)
14.3-10
Floor diaphragm to wall connection (Grid D)
14.3-13
Wall to wall connection (Grid 2)
14.3-14
Wall to wall connection (Grid 2-C)
for flexure (Grid B)
for out-of-plane flexure(stairwellwall)
(Grid 2)
for out-of-plane shear (stairwell

wall)
9.13.1 Gravity Design Laads - The analysis of this structure is significantly more complex
than the previous two building examples. The floor and roof framing systems are hollow
core planks which are assumed to be simply supported on the masonry walls and beams on
9-36

Obb2949 0508733 4L4
the Grid Lines running in

the north-south direction. Figs. 9.1-16 and 9.1-17 show the vertical
load carrying elements on the first and second through fourth floors, respectively.
The dead load on the roof is 95 psf and the dead load on the floor systems is 110 psf. The
roof has a minimum live load of 20 psf and a wind uplift of 40 psf. Each floor has a live
load of 40 psf and the corridor live load is 100 psf.
An average selfweight for the wall
systems was assumed to be 70 psf and the curtain walls have a selfweight of 10 psf.
For live loads less than or equal to 100 psf, ASCE 7-88 allows a reduction in live loads on
any member supporting influence areas in excess of 400 ft2. Influence areas are taken as
twice the tributary areafor beams and fourtimes
the tributary area for columns. A
maximum reduction of 50 percent isallowed for members supporting one floor and a
maximumof 60 percent for members supporting more than one floor. ASCE 7-88 also
allows a different reduction inrooflive
loads for tributary areas inexcess of 200 ft2.
However, the maximum allowable reduction only changes the total loads on the top of the
fourth floor walls by 14 percent. The change in the lower floor loads is significantly less
than
this value. Since the reduction in loading is small, no reduction of the roof live load was
calculated for this building example. This simplifies the analysis and produces slightly
conservative loadings. If so desired, the designer may reduce these live loads as defined in
ASCE 7- 88, Section 4.8.
Using the tributary areas shown in Figs. 9.1-16 and 9.1-17 the uniform loads on top of each
wall at each floor level can be calculated.
The total uniform roof load on top of the fourth floor wall on Grid Line C, between Grid
Lines 1 and 2 is
WC,l-Zp =
( 95 psf + 20 psf ) x 30 ft = 3,450 plf
(2,850 plf dead load)

9-37

O
cv3
' m l
d
"L
""_
o
-
Fig. 9.1-16 RCJ Hotel Vertical Load Carrying Elements O n First Floor
9-38

93
A CT 1I T L E * M D G
0bb2949 0508735
297
L!
cy!
W
c?
a
d
"
"
"
"-F
m
o
-
Fig. 9.1-17 RCJ Hotel Vertical Load Carrying Elements On Second Through Fourth
Floor
9-39

93
0662949 0508736 1 2 3
Since roof uplift mayproduce a critical loadingfor shear evaluation on these walls, this load
combination should be calculated, and is
I
Wc,l-w
= (95 psf
- 40 psf)
30 ft
1,650 plf
The roof loads on the remainder of the building elements on the top of the fourth floor
walls are summarized in Table 9.1.2.
Similarly, the total uniform load on top of the third floor wall on Grid Line C, between
Grids 1 and 2, is calculated as follows:
Tributary Area
29.67 ft x 30 ft
890
ft2
The above calculation ignores the tributary area of the beam in the corridor. However,
since the beam has a higher live load and produces a concentrated load on the wall, it isnot
included in the calculation.
Assuming the wall influence area, AI is twice the tributary area
A,
890
fi2 =
1,780
fi2
From ASCE 7-88the live load reduction factor, LLRF,is
URF
15
= 0.25 + - = 0.25 +
l5
= 0.606
Note: The Code does not specifically address walls, and some designers may not apply a
live load reduction for a wall.
The wall load from the fourth floor is therefore,
F h r wall load
(110 psf + 40 psf x 0.606) x 30 ft
4,027 pl
The total load on the top of the third floor wall on Grid Line C, between Grid Lines 1 and
2 is:
-23 =
4,027 plf + 3,450 plf + 9.67 ft x 70 psf = 8,154 plf
(6,827 plf dead load)
9-40

A C 1 TITLE*MDG 93
Obb29Y9 0.508737 ObT
12
3-
4,8 4
Y
5
M"
4"
?$!
Po
P<
9-41

A C 1T I T L E l r M D G
93
0662747 0508738 T T 6
where 9.67 ft x 70 psf is the wall weight from the story above
The wall loads should be reduced by 1 x 70 = 70 plf for the shorterwall construction option
dimensions, Building Option II (8 ft - 8 in. floor to floor instead of 9 ft - 8 in.).
The loads on the top of all the masonry elements from the third floor to the first floor are
summarized in Tables 9.1.3 to 9.1.5.
Stair Well Landings

The stringers on the stairs have a dead load of 129 psf due to theincreased concrete weight
of a slab and treads, and the 3 ft
- 6 in. wide
landings have a dead load of 85 psf. The
landings transfer the stair load to the walls on Grid Lines 2 and 3. It is assumed that the
stair load is applied to the walls over a 2 ft section near the ends of the landing slab. This
portion of wall also supports the landing load over a 2 ft section. The 1.5 ft stairwell wall
section on Grid Lines 2 and 3 nearest the doorways supports only the landing loads (see
Fig. 9.1-18). For each section, the loads on these walls at each landing are:
W on Grid Lines 2 and 3, 2 ft section
(129psf+ lOOpsf) x **]x;+(SSpaf
2,630 plf
+ l O O p s f ) x -8.67 ft
( 1,400 plf dead load)
(assumes 1/2 the stair load goes to each side and is distributed over 2 ft)
W on Grid Lines 2 and 3, 1.5 ft section

W = ( 8 5 p ~ f +lOOpsf)x-
802 plf
8.67 ft
2
(368 plfdead load)

9-42

93
m 0662949 0508737 932 m
Rm-
r4
c1
B
E;
21
(*
21
f
(*
9-43

A C 1T I T L E s N D G
93
Obb2949 0508740 654 M
QS
CJ
CJ
9.
v)
r(
9-44

Ei
- - O
A C 1 T I T L E * N D G 93
0662947 0508741 570
c
v
c
9-45

A C 1 TITLEwMDG 9 3
0662949 0508742 427
9-46

A CT 1I T L E t M D G
93
Obb2949 0508743 3 6 3
Fig. 9.1-18TypicalStairwellAma
No live load reduction is taken for the stairwell area, the loads on the walls immediately
below each landing are summarized in Table 9.1.6. Table 9.1.6 also summarizes the loads
on the canopy.
9.13.2 Lateral Design Loads - The lateral loads applied to the hotel are produced by wind
or seismic forces. The determination of seismic forces on the four story hotel is relatively
complex and will be discussed in MDG 9.2.2.
Wind Loads
For the same reasons described in MDG 9.1.1, a simplistic approach will be taken for wind
loading. It will be assumed that all vertical faces have a uniform 25 psf suction or pressure
applied to them, and that the first floor wall transfers 1/2 the force applied to it directly to
the foundation. This assumption produces a total wind load in each direction for Building
Option I Dimensions of,
Wind load in north-south direction =
(9.67, x 3
+ 0.5
ft x 150 ft x 25 psf
9-47

A C 1T I T L E I M D G
93
0662747 0508744 2 T T
9-48

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
m 0662747 0508745
L3b
Wind load in east-west direction =
(9.67 ft x 3 + 'OA3 ft + 0.5 ft x 67.67 ft x 25 psf

2
(neglecting differences in grade)

The global distribution of the above loadsto eachstory, and to each resisting element within
the story, is discussed in MDG 9.2.2.
9.2 INTERWALL LOAD DISTRIBUTION

The global distribution of loads to walls withina masonry building is discussed in this section.
This discussionwill be restricted to theglobal distributionof lateral forces to the top of wall
elements since the global distributionof vertical loadsfollows commonengineering principles
as discussed previouslyin MDG 9.1. The local distributionof both lateral andvertical forces
within a wall will be discussed in MDG 9.3.
The global distributionof lateral forces to the resisting masonry wall systems
depends on the
rigidity of the floor or roof diaphragm used to transfer the lateral loads to the top of the
walls, and on the relative rigidity of the wall elements themselves.
9.2.1 Global Lateral Load Distribution
on Shear Walls in Buildings with Flexible
Diaphragms
The in-plane flexibility of the roof diaphragm is evaluated relative to the flexibility of the
supporting walls. If the diaphragm undergoes significantlateral deformation when compared
to the deformation of the supporting walls, the diaphragm is considered flexible. When
flexible diaphragms are used, the lateral loads are distributed to the resisting elements in
proportion to each elements tributary area. MDG Examples 9.2-1 and 9.2-2 illustrate this
concept n the TMS ShoppingCenter and the DPC Gymnasium, both of which have flexible
9-49

A C 1 TITLEvMDG 9 3
m Obb2949
0508746 O72
roof diaphragms.
9.2.2
Global Lateral Load Distribution on Shear Walls in Buildings with Rigid

Diaphragms
If a diaphragm does not undergo significant in-plane
deformation relative to the lateral
deformations of supporting walls, it isconsidered rigid. When a rigid diaphragm is used, the
lateral loads are distributed to resistingwall elements in proportion to each element's
relativestiffness and distance from the plan center of rigidity. The eccentricity of the
applied load (torsion effects) from the center of rigidity also affects the amount of load
distributed to the shear wall elements. The type of construction used in the RCJ Hotel
would classify the floor diaphragms as rigid.
Several methods are currently used to determine the relative stiffness of the wall elements,
and to subsequently distribute the lateral loads to the top of each wall. Schneider and
Dickey (9.2.1) list three methods; Amrhein (9.2.2) shows two variations on another method.
Other authors use similar methods. However, when certain configurations of wall openings
are analyzed, some of these methods produce results that erroneously suggest that a wall
with openings is stifferthan a wall without openings! In fact, the applicability of one method
over another may depend on the building configuration.
Only one "hand calculation method,"Schnieder and Dickey's Method I (9.2.1), will be briefly
presented in this chapter. This method has the advantages of being simple to apply and
generally avoids the erroneous stiffness results described above. For more information on
these methods, detailed descriptions are included in the indicated references. It should be
noted that this method does not accurately describe the lateral deformation of the building
system and should not be used to calculate building drift. Using Method I, a hand analysis
of the RCJ Hotel was made and is presented in MDG Example 9.2-3.
With increasing micro-computer use
and the development of relatively inexpensivestructural
9-50

93
m Obb2949
0508747 T 0 9
analysis programs, more and more structural analysis is performed electronically. These
programs allow a more rational 3-dimensional vertical andlateral load analysis of masonry
buildings and, presumably, a more accurate distribution of lateral loads. A computerized
analysis of the RCJ Hotel was made, and the results are presented in MDG Example 9.2-4.
Hand Calculation Method

By hand calculations Schneider and Dickey's Method I takes the total lateral load at each
diaphragm location(Vm,al)
and distributesthe load to eachresisting element according to the
ratio of the element's stiffness (ki)and the sum of the stiffness of all the elements at this
elevation (kmal).In equation form this is
vr
VAd x
(2)
Eq. 9.2-1
The stiffness of individual elements is determined based on the assumption that the walls
act as beams that have significantshear deformations. These beams are assumed to be fixed
at the base of the structure and either free atthe diaphragm location (a cantilevered beam -
Ac), or free to translatebut fully restrained against rotation (fixed end -Ap) (see Fig. 9.2-1).
Boundary conditions determine which equation should be used.
Fig. 9.2-1 Deflection of a Shear Wall Element

Assuming linear elastic behavior, the deflection (A,) at the top of a cantilevered, solid,
9-51
,

A C 1 TITLELMDG 93
m Obb2949 0508748 945 m
rectangular shaped wall element is given by:
Ac =
Pl (h')3
3 E,,,Z
1.2 Pl h'
Eq. 9.2-2
Ev A
Since only relative stiffness is being considered, the value of P can be set to an arbitrary
value and E, assumed to be approximately 0.4 x E,. Including the formulas for A and I,
Eq. 9.2-2 becomes

Ac
3
*
Em
(81
Eq. 9.2-3
A similar expression can be developed for the deflection at the top of a solid, rectangular
shaped wall element, where both ends are fixed against rotation (Ap).
Eq. 9.2-4
Pl can be taken as any convenient constant value.

If all walls are of the same material Emf
Eqs. 9.2-3 and 9.2-4 do not account for flanged walls or cracked section behavior.
The
designer can use Eq. 9.2-2 for Ac and a similar equation for A p to include these effects.
However, in light of the assumptions used for Method I, it is questionable whether these
refinements will produce significantly more accurate results.
The element stiffness is calculated by taking the reciprocalof the deflection at the topof the
wall under the applied load, P.
Ri
1
-
Eq. 9.2-5
For perforated shear
walls,Eqs.
9.2-3 and 9.2-4 cannot be useddirectly to determine
deflection. Schneider and Dickey (9.2.1) suggest a method for calculating the deflection at
the top of perforated shear walls. In their Method I, this deflection is approximated using
9-5 2

A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93
Obb2949 0508749 881
the following procedures:

1.
The deflection atthetop
of the wallis
calculatedusingEq.
9.2-3. This
assumes that the wall acts as a cantilevered beam.
2.
The deflection of a section of the wall equal in height to the tallest opening
is calculated using Eq. 9.2-3 (again assumes cantilever action). The total wall
depth is used for I,.
3.
The deflection obtained in step 2 is subtracted from that obtained in step 1.
4.
The deflection ofall piers lying within the strip used for step 2 are calculated
assuming these piers are fixed, top and bottom (Eq. 9.2-4).
5.
The stiffness of each pier is determined using Eq. 9.2-5 and the stiffness of all
piers in the opening strip are summed. The total deflection of the opening
strip is obtained by taking the reciprocal of the stiffness sum. If there are
additional openings in the strip, the wall is separated into sections and the
deflection at the top of each pier within the section is calculated using steps
1 through 5.
6.
The deflection of the piers in the opening strip is addedtothe
deflection
calculated in step 3.
7.
The stiffness of theperforated wallis then the reciprocal of the deflection

obtained in step 5.
It should be noted that there are some significant inconsistencies in
the above method,
particularly with respect to compatibility and load distribution. However, the method has
been found to give both reasonable and, in most cases, conservative results.
When a rigid diaphragm analysis is used and the lateral resisting elements are not placed
symmetrically, or if they have unequal length and cross-section, the center of rigidity of the
systemmust be determined. The center ofrigidity
can be located by determining the
stiffness of the walls resisting the load in each of the coordinate directions (Xand Y) and
then calculating the static moments of these stiffnesses about the center line of one of the
9-53

AC
T I1T L E * U D G
0662949 0508750 5 T 3
93
wall systems (see Fig. 9.2-2). The formulas used are
c Ri xi
c R,
Eq. 9.2-6
'Y
Eq. 9.2-7
where
x, = the distance to the center of rigidity, along the x axis
y, = the distance to the center of rigidity, along the y axis

Rt, = the relative rigidity of each wall element resisting forces in the x
direction
(21,
Rb= the relative rigidity of each wall element resisting forces in the y
xi = the distance to the center of the wall element, along the x axis
yi = the distance to the center of the wall element, along the y axis
' ,1
Y
/Center
Fig. 9.2-2
of Rigidity
Center of Rigidity
9-54

A C 1T I T L E m M D G
73
0662749 0 5 0 8 7 5 1 4 3 T W
The distance fromthe centerof rigidity to the centerof mass for seismic force, or to the line
of action of resultant wind force, produces a torsional moment in the plane of each rigid
diaphragm. This moment must be resisted by the lateral resisting elements as a shear that
acts in addition to direct shear forces each receives. Schneider and Dickey (9.2-1) suggest
distributing both direct shear and the torsional shear using the following equations.
Eq. 9.2-8
Eq. 9.2-9
where
(K)i
is the total shear force applied to a particular wall element oriented to

resist loads parallel to the y axis
is the total shear force applied to a particular wall element orientedto
resist loads parallel to the x axis
PY
is the y component of the resultant lateral force at the diaphragm

elevation
Px
is the x component of the resultant lateral force at the diaphragm

elevation
X'
the distancefrom the center of the wall to the center of rigidity,

parallel to the x axis
Y'
the distancefrom the center of the wall to the center ofrigidity,

parallel to the y axis
the distance from the center of rigidity to the line of action of P,
parallel to the y axis
the distance from the center ofrigidity to the line of action of P,,,
parallel to the x axis
J,
relative polar moment of inertia
E (R& Y'2
Riy X'2)
9-55

Eq. 9.2-10
AC1
TITLE*MDG 9 3 W Obb29490508752376
This method of analysis has been applied to the RCJ Hotel to illustrate hand calculation
procedures. Refer to MDG Example 9.2-3.
9 3 INTRAWALLLOADDISTRIBUTION
93.0 General
MDG 9.1 and 9.2 described the procedures for calculating global loadsthat act on masonry
structures and theirdistribution to various componentsof a structure. MDG Examples 9.2-1
through 9.2-4 give illustrative detailed steps of this process.
The second area of interest in the load analysis of masonry structures concerns the further
distribution of the loads within each component element. The various phenomena which
have been considered here include distribution of in-plane and out-of-plane vertical and
horizontal loads on cavity walls and composite walls. In addition, distribution
of in-plane
loads on perforated shear walls is also calculated. The designs of some typical elements of
the example buildingsare then presented in the subsequent chapters and examples of MDG.
93.1 Local DistributionUnderConcentratedLoads
To calculate the compressive stress
va)on a wall system subjected
to concentrated loads,
the wall system mustbe made.

some assumptionof the concentrated load distribution within
The Code C 5.12.1 suggests distributing the load using an angle of 45" from the vertical.
Schneider and Dickey (9.2.1) suggest that a 30" angle might be used. The designer must
determine what angle should be used with the knowledge that the smaller the angle, the
smaller the effective length values. Whateverthe angle, Code 5.12.1 states thatfor walls laid
in running bond, the effective wall length resulting from the assumed distribution is limited
to the width of the bearing plate plus four times the thicknessof the wall, but not to exceed
the center to center spacing between the concentrated loads.
9-56

A CT1I T L E * H D G
0662949 0 5 0 8 7 5 3 202
93
93.2 Local Distribution of Concentrated Loads Acting on Bond Beams

93.2.1 Hollow Masonry Walls
- Bond beams are often used in masonry construction
for
distribution of concentrated loads on hollow walls. Sincethe Code 5.13 requires that applied
loads be resisted by net area only, the use of bond beams allows concentrated loads to be
distributed over lengths greater than those directly under the bearing plates. The absence
of bond beams could result in bearing stresses which exceed the maximum bearing stress
allowed by Code 5.12.3. Neither the Code nor the Commentary provide any information
regarding load distribution through bond beams. However,
research carried out by Page and
Shrive (9.3.1,9.3.2)
has shown that the angle of load distribution in a bond beam for a
hollow wall is smaller than the commonly assumed value of 45"
from the vertical. Their
research shows that this angle varies according to the number of courses used in a bond
beam. For an 8 in. deep bond beam an angle of distribution equal to 30" from the vertical
should be assumed. For a 16 in. deep bond beam, the suggested angle reduces to 25". The
bearing area can then be calculated as if the load were applied as a patch load on the
hollow wall. The effective length for calculation of compressive stresses is determined by
assuming that the angle of distribution changes to 45" from the vertical once the load has
been transferred into the hollow masonry section. According to Code 5.12.1 the effective
length shall be limited to the bearing width (LB)plus four times the thickness of the wall,
but not to exceed the center-to-centerdistance betweenthe concentratedloads. Code 5.12.1
applies to walls laidinrunning
bond; for wallslaid
in stack bond, the load transfer
terminates at the head joint nearest to the edge of the bearing area. See MDG Example
9.3-2 for distribution of concentrated load acting ona bond beam in a hollow masonry wall.
93.2.2 Solid Masonry Walls- The following statement from the paperby Page and Hendry
(9.3.3) concerns loads on bond beams in solid masonry walls:
in this area,the
logical approachto
thisproblem
l'In the absence of research
is to assume a dispersion of the
concentrated load through the beam (say at 60" or 45" from the vertical) and then to
evaluate the bearing strength enhancement for the masonry beneath the beam as though it
was loaded by a patch loading of this size."
9-57

A C 1 T I T L E * N D G 93
0662949 0508754 L49
No example is presented for the case of solid masonry walls since the procedure of load
distribution is verysimilar to the onegiven in MDG Example 9.3-2 for hollow masonry walls.
9 3 3 Effective Bearing Area Under Concentrated Loads
When calculating the effective bearing area of a concentrated load on a wall system, the
Code allows for an increase in area if the supporting masonry is larger on all sides than the
direct bearing area. This increase ispermissible because the confinement of the direct
bearing area by the surrounding masonry increases the bearing capacity of the wall in the
vicinity of the concentrated load.
The Code 5.12.2 states that thebearing stresses in a wall shall be computed by distributing
the load over an area determined as follows:
direct bearing area AI, or
(a)The
(b)
A,
\i 5
but not greater than U ,
A,
where A2is the supporting surface wider than AI on all sides, or A2 is the area of the lower
base of the largest frustrum of a right pyramid or cone having AI as upper base, sloping at
45 o from the horizontal, and wholly contained within the support. Area A2 shall terminate
at head joints in other than running bond.
The Code 5.12.3 also states that the bearing stress shall not exceed the allowable value of
0.25 Pm. Typical situations related to effective bearing area under concentrated load are
presented in MDG Examples 9.3-3, 9.3-4 and 9.3-5.
9-58

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
9.3.4
Obb2949 0508755 0 8 5
Local Load Distribution in Multiwythe Noncomposite (Cavity) Walls
Multiwythe noncomposite masonry walls, also
known as cavitywalls, are a type of wall
construction in which an aircavity isprovided betweenthe wythes of a multiwythe wall. This
type of wall construction is widely usedand, if properly constructed, has excellent moisture,
sound, and thermal resistance. The Code 5.8.21 states that each
wythe of the noncomposite
wall is to be designed to resist individually the effects of loads imposed on it. It continues
by saying:
"Unless a more detailed analysis is performed, the following requirements shall be
satisfied...
Gravity loads from supported horizontal members shall be resisted by the
wythe nearest to the center of span of the supported member. Any resulting
bending moment about the weak axis of the wall shall be distributed to each
wythe in proportion to its relative stiffness.
Loads acting parallel to the plane of a wall shall be carried only on the wythe
on which they are applied. Transfer of stresses between wythes from such
loads, shall be neglected.
Loads actingtransverse to the plane of the wall shall be resisted by all wythes
in proportion to their flexural stiffness..."
The noncomposite wall in MDG Examples 9.3-6, 9.3-7, and 9.3-8 consists of an 8 in. hollow
concrete block wythe, a 4 in. cavity, and a 4 in.claybrickwythe.
The three examples
presented cover the following load distributions:

(a)
Eccentrically placed vertical gravity load from a roof truss transferred to the
block wythe of the wall (MDG Example 9.3-6).
(b)
Lateral in-plane loads transferred to the wall through the roof system which
acts as a flexible diaphragm (MDG Example 9.3-7).
(c)
Lateral out-of-plane loads,suchas

9-59

wind or seismicloads,which
act on an
AC1
TITLElwMDG
93
0662797 0508756 T l 1 1
individual wythe of the nonloadbearing multiwythe noncomposite wall(MDG

Example 9.3-8).
To design wall systemsfor out-of-plane lateral loads, suchas wind and earthquake loads, the
Code 5.8.2.2 requires that theload transverse to the plane of the wall be distributed to the
individual wythes of the wall system in proportion to their relative flexural stiffnesses. In
general, the stiffness of each wythe is affected by its height and boundary conditions. In the
three examples, i.e., MDG Examples 9.3-6 to 9.3-8, the height and boundary conditions of
each wythe of the noncomposite (cavity) wall are assumed to be the same.
However, for morecomplicatedsituations,
as in the case of the RCJ Hotel building
described in MDG 9.1.3, the story height and support conditions of the two wythes are
different. Shown below is the cross-section of the exterior wall system proposed in Option
A of the RCJ Hotel. In that option, the outerwythe is verticallycontinuous for four stories,
while the inner wytheissimply
location and axialstiffnessaffect
supported at each floorlevel.Since
factors such as tie
the transverseload distribution between wythes, it is
suggested that a simple plane frame model be used to determine thestresses in each wythe
of such a wall system. Since the wall system usually acts in one-way bending
between the
floor slabs, especially in the critical areas between wall openings, a simple two dimensional
model can be used in conjunction with any availablecomputer analysis program to quickly
provide a sufficiently accurate solution. The stresses and tie forces calculated from these
analyses canthen be checked for acceptability usingthe methods described in MDG 8.4 and
11.1.
In determining the member properties for theabove model, itis suggested that thetributary
width of the inner and outer wythes be taken as the horizontal distance between ties. The
stiffnesses of the wythes are based on this width andthe net area where the distributed load
is applied. When the vertical masonry strip modelled is adjacent to a window opening, the
load will include the load applied over the tributary width plus the load on one-half of the
adjacent wall opening.
9-60

Typical Exterior Wall
Suggested
Analytical
Model
4-
4-
tinuous
e
Out of Plane
Lord
4-
e
4-
Fig. 93-1 Wall System Model

Where opening edge stiffeners or building frame members are arranged to
permit significant
two-way action, other analysis methods that account forthe increase in load carrying capacity
of the wall system may be used.
The wind load on this system canbe determined using the procedures outlined in ASCE 788 or the governing building code. The critical sections forwind load will be near openings
or at the corners of the top level of the building.

93.5
Local Load Distribution in Multiwythe Composite Masonry Walls
The Code 5.8.1.1 states that a multiwythe wall designed
for composite action shall have
collar joints which are either

(a)
crossed by connecting headers or
(b)
filledwith grout or mortar and connected bywall ties
The composite wall thus becomes a structural assemblage whose mechanical properties are
dependent on those of its components (i.e., block, brick,and grout). The Code 5.8.1.2 states
further that the average shear stress developed in the planes of the interface between the
9-61

93
Obb2949 0508758 894
wythes and collar joint or within headers shall not exceed 5 psi for mortared collar joints,
10 psi for grouted collar joints, and
for headers. If the shear stress at the wythe-collar
joint interface becomes too large, delamination, or header splitting can occur. Then loads
can no longer be transferred between the wythes and the wallwill act as a multiwythe
noncomposite wall.
The above-cited average values of maximum allowable shear stresses in the collar joints of
multiwythe composite masonry walls
relate strictly to shear stresses due to out-of-plane
loads. The Code has as yet not addressed the situation of collar jointshear stresses
produced due to the applied in-plane vertical and horizontal loads acting onlyon oneof the
wythes in a composite masonry wall. Research at Clemson University(9.3.5,9.3.6,9.3.7) has
shown that the shearstresses in the collar joint for such in-plane loadingsituations are much
larger than 10 psi. Nevertheless, due to theabsence at the time of this writing of any Code
provisions for a detailed analysis of collar joint shearstresses due to in-plane loads, this load
case is not considered in the MDG. The load transfer in a multiwythe composite masonry
wall can be explained schematically with the help of the following figure.
Applied Load
Brick Wythe
Block
Wythe
L Grouted Collar Joint
Fig. 93-2 MultiwytheWall Load Transfer

The composite wall in MDG Example 9.3-9 consists of an 8 in. hollow concrete block wythe,
a 2 in. grouted collar joint and a 4 in. claybrick wythe. The example illustrates the
development of shear stress in the collar joint due to out-of-plane wind loads acting on the
9-62

A C 1 T I T L E * N D G 93
m O662947 0508757 720 m
wall. The various symbols used in this example have the same meaning as those presented
in MDG 9.3.4.
93.6 Local Lateral and Axial Load Distribution in Single Wythe Loadbearing Wall
Systems
To design a masonry wall system
and its constituent elements, one must determine the
distribution of the axial and lateral loads throughout the wall. For axial and out-of-plane
loads, critical wall sections are usually around openings. See MDG Example 9.3-10 for an
investigation of the lateral and axial load distribution in a single-wythe loadbearing wall.
93.7 Local Distribution of Lateral Load Within Perforated Shear Walls

See MDG Examples 9.3-11 and 9.3-12.
REFERENCES
9. l.1
ASCE Standard, ASCE 7-88, "Minimum Design Loads
for Buildings and Other
Structures," American Society of Civil Engineers, New York, NY, 1990.

9.1.2
Guide To The Use Of The WindLoadProvisionsOfASCE7-88,American

Society of Civil Engineers, 1992.
9.2.1
Schneider, R., and W. Dickey, Reinforced MasonrvDesign,Second
Edition,
Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1987.

9.2.2
Amrhein,J., Reinforced Masonrv Engineerine Handbook, Third Edition, The

Masonry Institute of America, Los Angeles, CA, 1987.
9.3.1
Page, A. W., and N. G. Shrive, "Concentrated Loads on Hollow Masonry - Load

Dispersion Through Bond Beams," The Masonry Society Journal, July-December
1987, PP. T45-T51.
9.3.2
Page, A. W., and N. G. Shrive, "Concentrated Loads on Hollow Concrete

9-63

AC1
TITLE*HDG 93 m 0662949 0508760 442 m
9.3.3
Masonry," AC1 Structural Journal, July-August 1990, pp. 436-444.

Page, A. W.,and A. W. Hendry, "Design Rules for Concentrated Loads on
9.3.4
Masonry," The Structural Enpineer, Vol. 66, No. 17, September 1988, pp. 273-281.
NCMA-TEK 141, "Concrete Masonry Section Properties for Design," National
Concrete Masonry Association, Herndon, VA, 1984.
9.3.5
Anand, S. C., Young, D. T., and Stevens, D.J.,"AModel

StressesBetweenWythesinCompositeMasonryWalls
to Predict Shearing
Due to Differential
Movement," Proceedings, 2nd North American Masonry Conference (2 NAMC),

University of Maryland, College Park, MD, August 1982, pp. 7.1 - 7.16.
9.3.6
Rahman, M. A., "AnalyticalInvestigations
of theBehavior
and Failure of
Composite Masonry Walls," a Dissertation submitted to the Graduate School of

Clemson University in partial fulfillment of the. requirements for the degree of
Doctor of Philosophy, August 1989.
9.3.7
Yalamanchili, K. IC,"Finite Element Computations on Super Computers and Their

Applications to FailureAnalysis of CompositeMasonryWalls,"August
9.3.8
1990.
NCMA-TEK 81, "Lintels forConcrete Masonry Walls,"National Concrete Masonry

Association, Herndon, VA, 1976.
9-64

A C 1 TITLEMMDG 93 W Obb2949 0508763 389 W
Example 9.2-1 T M S Shopping Center LateralLoadDistribution
The roof diaphragm in this example is considered flexible and is located at a height of 16
ft. All lateral loads will be assumed to be applied at this elevation. Determine the lateral
load distribution to the east-west walls on Grid LinesA and C and to the north-south walls
on Grid Lines 1, 2, and 3. Consider both seismic loads and wind loads.
o
V
2
v1
v3
Lateral Loads on Masonry Walls

~~
Calculations and Discussion
Code Reference
Seismic Loads:
East-West Direction
Since the roof diaphragm is flexible andthe tributary areas of the roof loads to the walls on
GridLines
A and C are equal, they sharethelateral
loadequally.Using
earthquake load computed in MDG. 9.1.1.2, each is subjected to a load OE
VA =
vc =
23'000 lb
2
11,500 lb
9-65

thetotal
m 0662949 0508762 215 m
Example 9.2-1 Cont'd.

~
Code Reference
North-South Direction
The tributary areas of the roof to the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 3 are equal. As explained
above, they will share the lateral load equally. The tributary area of the roof load for the
wall on Grid Line 2 is twice that of the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 3. The lateral load on
each wall is given as
VI =
v3 =
v2 =
23'000 lb = 11,500lb
2
23'000 lb
4
5,750lb
Wind Loads:
East-West Direction
The tributary areas of the masonry walls on Grid Lines A and C are equal. However, the
wall on line C also carries thewind load applied to the 4.5 ft projection of the fascia. Using
the distributed wind load calculated in MDG 9.1.1.2, wind loads resisted by these elements
are:
VA = 202.5 plf
plf
82 ft
= 8,300 lb
2
")
82
2
+ (4.5
ft
x 7
9-66

ft
x 20
psf) = 8,930 lb
A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
Obb2747 05087b3 L 5 L
Ejrample 9.2-1 Cont'd.

Reference
Code
The governing wind load will be produced by winds from the south applied to the glass and
fascia. The load is 260 plf, as given in MDG 9.1.1.2.
Since the tributary areas of the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 3 are equal, they will share the
lateral load equally. The tributary area of the wall on Grid Line 2 is twice that of the walls
on Grid Lines 1 and 3. The lateral load on each wall is therefore:
VI =
v3 = 260 plf x
204*7
4
")
204*7
4
13,300 lb
26,600 lb
9-67

AC1
TITLE*IDG 9 3 m 0662947 0508764 098 m
Example 9.2-2
DPCGymnasium
- LateralLoad
Distribution
Determine the lateralload distribution to the walls in the north-south (Grid Lines 1 and 2)
and east-west (Grid Lines A and B) directions consideringboth earthquakeloading and wind
loading. This applies to all four Wall Construction Options A, B, C, and D. The influence
of the pilasters in Wall Construction Option A is neglected.

TT
%S
128 '
\W
*
B-
64 '
v,,
U
B-
o
Lateral Loads on Masonry Walls
~~~
and
Calculations
Code Reference
Seismic Loads:
The seismic load on the DPC Gymnasium has been calculated in MDG 9.1.2.2 and is equal
to 56,700 lb in each direction, applied horizontally.
The roof diaphragm is considered to be flexible in its own plane. Wall shear is calculated
assuming that the horizontal seismic load in
each direction (north-south or east-west) is
distributed equally between the walls oriented parallel to the direction of loading.
9-68

Example 9.2-2 Contd.

and
Calculations
Conservatively, the shear acting on each wall can be applied at the level of the roof
diaphragm. More realistically,the seismic loadsproduced by the acceleration of each walls
mass can be applied at the walls centroid, and the roof load can be applied at the level of
the roofdiaphragm.
For example,east-westseismicloadingwouldapply
the following
horizontal shear to the walls on Grid Lines A and B:

a)
the product of the roof weight and the seismic coefficient, applied at the roof
diaphragm midheight;
b)
the product of each wallsself-weight and the seismiccoefficient, applied at

each walls centroid, and
c)
the product of one-half of each north-south walls self-weight and the seismic
coefficient, transferred at the roof diaphragm mid-height.
The remaining seismic forces from the north-south walls are transferred directly to the
foundations.
Both approaches result in the same wall shear. However, the second approach gives a lower
(and more realistic) overturning momentand a lower shear force to be transferred from the
roof diaphragm to the shear walls.
Under the conservative approach, each wall is subjected to an equal seismic load of:
Vm
vNs=
569700 lb
2
28,350 lb
28,400 lb
This load is assumedto be applied at the average diaphragm height (top of metal deck) of
9-69

AC1 TITLEIMDG 9 3 W 066271.19 0508766 960 m

~~~~~
Code Reference
27.0 ft on the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 2, and at a 24.33 ft height on the walls on Grid
Lines A and B.
Using the more realistic approach with the weights of the diaphragm and walls 'from MDG
9.1.2.2, the seismic loads are:
East-West Direction
'EW
D&p.= 0.0875
=
[ 163'800 lb
2
1.
+ 2 (2)(84,74O lb)]
14,580 lb
applied at the diaphragm height of 24.33 ft on the walls on Grid Lines A and B
and
VEw
= 0.0875 x (157,900 lb) x 2

= 27,630 lb
applied at the centroid of the walls on Grid Lines A and B

VNS Dhp. = 0.0875 x
=
163*800lb
+ (2) 2 (157,9OO lb)
20,983 lb
9-70

A C 1 TITLExMDG 9 3 M Obb2949 0 5 0 8 7 b 7 B T 7 M

and
Calculations
applied at the diaphragm height of 27.0 ft on the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 2
and
VNs
0.873
7,400 lb
(84,740 lb)
applied at the centroid of the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 2

Wind Loads:
East-West Direction
As calculated in MDG 9.1.2.2, the tributary areas of the walls on Grid Lines A and B are
equal, and each carries a load of
vew= 64 ft x
273 plf
2
8,750 lb
The tributary areas of the walls on Grid Lines1 and 2 are equal, and eachcarries a load of
VNs =
128 ft x 353 plf

2
22,590 lb
9-71

AC1
Example 9.2-3
TITLE*NDG 9 3
O662949 0 5 0 8 7 6 8 733
RCJ Hotel LateralLoadDistribution
- HandCalculations
In the following example, a load distribution to the resisting elements in the RCJ Hotel is
obtained by hand calculation using Schneider and Dickeys Method I (described in MDG
9.2.2). As directed by the Code 5.7.1, the method distributes the load with respect to each
elements relative stiffness.
The configuration of the RCJ Hotel is described in MDG 9.1.3 Figs. 9.1-6 through 9.1-15.
The unreinforced noncomposite masonry WallConstruction Option A with BuildingOption
II dimensions will be examined under Seismic Zone 2 loading.
Code Reference
The first step in the solution of any lateral load distribution is to determine whether wind
or earthquake loadings govern.
Seismic Loads:
Using an analysis similar to that described for the T M S Shopping Center in MDG
9.1.12, the earthquakeloading for the RCJ Hotel can be calculated usingthe formula
= ZIKCSW, per ASCE 7, Chapter 9. The canopy is free standing, and will be
analyzed separately.
= 318
I = 1.0 (category I building)

K = 1.33
To find the coefficient C for the north-south direction:
9-72

A C 1 T I T L E * N D G 93 W 0662947 0508769 b 7 T
Code Reference
The mean roof height is
h, = 34.83 ft
= 0.05 x
T = 0.05
34.83
(ASCE 7-88)
fi
= 0.21 sec
@mi
C = NumericCoffkient =
.=
15J E K G
= 0.14
> 0.12
use C = 0.12 (required by ASCE 7, Section 9.4.2)
To find C for the east-west direction:
T = 0.05
34.83 ft
= 0.14 sec
Jm
C = NumericCofficient =
= 0.18
use C = 0.12
15JCiGG
Since no information on the soil is given, assume that the product, C x S = 0.14
permitted by ASCE 7) in both directions.
9-73

( m a x.
A C 1 TITLE+MDG 73 H Obb2949 0508770 391

and
Calculations
Code Reference
The total seismic load is therefore the same in both directions and has a value of:
-3 X
8
1.0
1.33
0.14
0.07
Assuming each story height of wall mass is distributed equallyto the diaphragms above and
below, the total weight at each diaphragm elevation can be calculated.
The dead load of
each floor is 110 psf, including partitions, and the roof dead load is 95 psf. The weight at
each diaphragm level is calculated based on thetotal floor or roof area, the applicable dead
loads and the total area of masonry walls. The approximate weight of the masonry walls is
based on a 10 in. wall thickness, resulting in a 70 psf self weight. The weights at each floor
are summarized in Table 1. Note that per ASCE-7, only dead loads contribute to the
seismic lateral loads (except in storage or warehouse buildings).
Table 1
Level
h'
(ft)
(kips)
W
h
'
Story Shear
(kips) (kips) (ft-kips)
9-74

Floor Force
A C 1 T I T L E + M D G 93
m 0662949 0508771
226
ExamDle 9.2-3 Cont'd.
and
Calculations
Code Reference
The total building shear can therefore be calculated as
= 0.07 x 5,115
kip = 358 kips
The loads that are carried by the first floor diaphragm go directly to the foundations.
Since the period of the building is less than 0.7 seconds, the concentrated load that ASCE
7-88 requires at the top of the building can be taken as zero. The remainder of the shear
is proportioned to each floor using Equation 13 of ASCE 7-88. For example,
Tire force at the roof =
Wh'
J%'
x Total Shear
The force calculations for each floor and the story shears are shown in Table 1.
The total wind load at the base from the north or south is
The total wind load at the base from the east or west is
9-75

A C 1 TITLE*flDG
93 W 0662749 0506772 L b 4

Cade Reference
Since the seismic loads significantly exceed those produced by wind, seismic forces govern.
The next step in the lateral load analysis is to determine the center of mass and center of
rigidity at each diaphragm. Since the hotel is approximately symmetrical,the centerof mass,
CM,is assumed to be at the centerof each floor area. The location of these centersof mass
are shown in Figs. 1 and 2. These mass centers can be more accurately determined.
However, ASCE 7-88 requires that an accidental eccentricity of 5 percent of each of the
horizontal building dimensions be added to the actual eccentricity between the center of
mass and the center of rigidity. This
additional torsion will cover the inaccuracies in this
approximate hand calculation.

To locate the center of rigidity at each diaphragm, the relative rigidity of each resisting
element (walls and columns which support the diaphragm below the diaphragm elevation
must be determined. Fig. 1 shows the lateral resisting elements below the second floor
diaphragm, and Fig. 2 shows the lateralresisting elements below the third floor, fourth floor
and roof diaphragms. Since some of these elements have control joints that create a break
in the continuity of the wall, the wall segments between joints are analyzed as individual
piers. Fig. 3 shows elevations of the walls on Grid Line2 and Grid Lines B and C. The wall
on line 2 and the wall on the north side of the elevator shaft are assumed to resist shear in
the east - west, or x, direction. The walls on Grid Lines B through F are assumed to resist
shear in the north - south, or y, direction. The walls surrounding the stairwell on Grid Lines
3, A and G are not included in the analysis because holes in the diaphragms at the stair
openings make it difficult to transmit lateral loads to these walls.
9-76

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
Obb2949 0508773 O T O
Example 9.23 Cont'd.

Code Reference
Wall
Wall
B,1-2
Wall
C,1-2
B.3-4
LC4
LC3
tCM"0&
t
Y
x
LC1
J Lobby D.3-4
F.1-2
Wall
F,3-4
Wall
Wall
0 ,
E.1-2
I
I
Defines Lateral Load Carrying

Walls
For Canopy
Fig. 1: Lateral Load Resisting Elements Below Second Floor Diaphragm
Wall E.l-2
Wall B.1-2
Wall F,l-2
J
Wall C,1-2
J
2
3
CM0-l CR
1
Wall C,3-4
Wall
Y
4
83-4
Wall D,3-4
Wall
E.3-4
I
Wall F.3-4
Lobby
Defines Lateral Load Carrying Walls
Fig. 2: L a t e r a l Load Resisting Elements Below Third Floor Through Roof
9-77

A C 1 TITLE*IDG 93
0662949 0508774
T37
Example 9.23 Contd.

and
Calculations
Piers On Grid Line 2
9* 9.
?. Q. Roof
4th Floor
3rd Floor
2nd Floor
X Indicates Opening
8 ?Y ?
Piers On Grid Line B
Roof
4th Floor
8 7
Pier On
Grid 3
3rd Floor
2nd Floor
Piers On Grid Line
C Roof
4th Floor
3rd Floor
.MW
Piers On Grid Line D
2nd Floor
;:;;:h;
? Y
Pier On
Grid 3
m a ;;LI;;
2nd Floor
Piers On Grid Line E
2nd Floor
Piers On Grid Line F
Roof
4th Floor
3rd Floor
2nd Floor
Fig. 3: Piers on Grid Lines 2 and B through F

Due to the presence of control joints at the intersection of most perpendicular walls, none
of the walls are considered flanged.

9-78

m 0662949 0508775 973 m

Code Reference
To further simplify the analysis, the small piers formed in the walls on Grid Lines B and F,
between Grid Lines 2 and 3, are neglected. The stair doors are offset between the second
and third through fourth floors, creating small disjointed piers. As a result, these piers will
resist very little shear and can be ignored. Following this
same reasoning, the first floor
columns on Grid Line E, between Grid Lines 3 and 4, are also ignored in the analysis.
The stiffness of each pier is calculated using Eqs. 9.2-3 and 9.2-5. All piers are assumed to
be cantilevered from the foundations. Since only the relative stiffness of the wall elements
D
are important, and all wall thickness are assumed to be equal, the ratio of
'I
may be
Emf
taken as 0.10 in.

The stiffness of the pier on Grid Line B between Grid Lines 1 and 2 (Wall B, 1-2) at the
second floor is therefore
Ael
fi)]
0.10 X 4(8.83
ft
(8.83
+ 3 29.3 ft
29.3 fi
and
k = -1
MDG Eq. 9.2-5
A
1
k1
0.1012 in.
9.88 in."
9-79

0.1012 in.
A C 1 TITLESNDG 93
O b 6 2 9 4 90 5 0 8 7 7 6
BOT

~~
and
Calculations
The stiffnesses of the remaining piers below the second floor diaphragm are calculated in
the same manner, and the results are summarized in Table 2.
The origin is selected as thejunction of Grid Lines A and 4. The x and y coordinates of the
center of rigidity can be obtained using Eqs. 9.2-6 and 9.2-7. Since the relative rigidity, R,
is found by dividing the stiffness by the total stiffness, these equations can be modified to
incorporate stiffness values. Using the values in Table 2,
To determine the amount

of shear carried by each element, the torsional moment, MT, must
be calculated. This moment is
center ofrigidity.
produced by the story shear applied eccentrically to the
As mentionedpreviously,
ASCE 7-88 requiresthatan
accidental
eccentricity of 5% of the horizontal building dimensionbe added to any actual eccentricity

to determine thedesign torsional moment. Since this eccentricity can
force the applied story
shear to either side of the center of rigidity, four load cases must be investigated:
1.
Add 5% of the x buildingdimension
to the actual eccentricity in the x
direction
2.
Subtract 5% if the x buildingdimension to the actual eccentricityin the x
9-80

0662949 0508777 74b
A C 1 TITLE*MDG 93

and
Calculations
direction
3.
Add 5% of the y buildingdimension
to the actual eccentricityin
the y
direction
4.
Subtract 5% of the y buildingdimension tothe actual eccentricityin the y

direction
The governing lateral load is produced by earthquake forces.
Therefore,the
actual
eccentricity is the distance between the center of mass and the center of rigidity. For the
second floor level this distance is 3.54 ft and 3.30 ft in the x and y directions, respectively,
assuming the center of mass at the geometric center of the building. Five percent of the
building dimension in the x direction is 7.50 ft and five percent of the building dimension in
the y direction is 3.38 ft. MT for each load case listed previously is shown inTables 2 to 5.
The second floor shear can now be distributed to thewall elements using Eqs. 9.2-8 and 9.2-
P ey are replaced by the applicable MT and R is replaced by k,Eq. 9.2-8 for

9. If Pye, and '
the second story diaphragm, load case 2, becomes
Direct Shear
Torsional
Component
Component
The torsional component is added to the direct shear component when the wall under
9-81

93
Obb2949 0508778 b 8 2
Example 9 3 3 Cont'd.
Code Reference
consideration is on the same side of the center of rigidity as the application of load, and is
subtracted when the wall is on the opposite side of the center of rigidity as the application
of load. Since the accidental eccentricity may reverse the sign of the torsional moment, the
governing load case for a shear wall design may be the result of subtracting the accidental
eccentricity from the actual eccentricity.
Substituting relative stiffnesses for relative rigidities, the relative
polar moment of inertia, J,
is calculated using Eq. 9.2-10. For load cases 1 through 4, the calculations for shear applied
to eachresisting wall element atthe second floor diaphragm level
are summarized in Tables
2 to 5.
Piers located above the first floor openingsare assumed to cantilever from the base of the
structure.
Thisassumption
is madebecause
surrounding theseopenings.Thecalculations
of the restraint provided by the piers

for shear applied to each resistingwall
element at levels 3 through the roof are summarized in Tables 6 through 17.
Canopy
The canopy weight is 48.8 kips, including roof and masonry weight. Since the structure is
symmetrical, the center of mass and the center of rigidity coincide and are located at the
center of the canopy. This symmetry also allowsequal distribution of the direct shear force.
Seismic loading governs the canopy design, and the total diaphragm shear is calculated as
follows
9-82

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
0662949 0508779 519

and
Calculations
9-83

93 W 0bb2949 0508780 230

and
Calculations
Code Reference
9-84

A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 93 W Ob62949 0508783 177

and
Calculations
Discussion
Code Reference
9-85

AC1
TITLEvMDG 93 m Obb2949 0 5 0 8 7 8 2 003 m

Cade Reference
9-86

A C 1 TITLESMDG 9 3
Obb2949 0508783 T 4 T

Reference
9-87

Code
A C 1 TITLExMDG 93 D 0662949 0508784 98b

and
Calculations
9-88

93 D Ob62949 0508785 8L2

Reference
1111
9-89

Code
A C 1 TITLE*UDG 93
m O662949 0508786
759 D
Example 9.23 Contd.

Code Reference
9-90

AC1
TITLExMDG 93
Obb2747 0 5 0 8 7 8 7 695

and
Calculations
9-91

A C 1 TITLE*HDG 93
Obb2949 0508788 521 W
Example 9 3 3 Contd.

Code Reference
A C 1 TITLErflDG 93
0662949 0508787 4 b A

Reference
Code
9-93

93
Ob62949 0508790
LBT m

~~
Cade Reference
9-94

A CT 1I T L E t M D G
93
Obb2949 0 5 0 8 7 9 1 016

Reference
9-95

Code
93
m 0662949

and
Calculations
9-96

0508792 T 5 2
93
m 0662949
~~~~~
0508793 9 9 9

Reference
9-97

Code
A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93
Ob62949 0508794 825

Code Reference
9-98

A C 1 TITLE+MDG 93
Ob62949 0508795 761

~~
~~
Code Reference
3
-
0.14
48.8 kip
5.12 kip in
both directians
Allowing for an accidental eccentricity of 5 % of 20 ft, equal to1 ft, each column must resist
a maximum shear of
Shear to column in the &-west
The torsion of 5.12 kips
diredon =
'*O5 x 30
19 ft
kips
E)]
= 1.55 kips
19
0.43 kips due to north-south seismic loads is
resisted by the east-west portal frame.

These analyses assume that the columns are spaced at 19 ft on center. The columns form
a resisting couple in the east-westdirectiononly
because beams are provided in that
direction only. This is a conservative assumption, since it neglects the contribution of the
columns in the north-south direction, under north-south loading.
9-99

AC1
TITLExMDG 93 m Obb29Ll9 050879b bT8
Example 9.2-4
RCJHotel
- LateralLoadDistribution - ComputerCalculations
In the following example, a lateral load distribution to the resisting elements in the RCJ
Hotel is obtained using a computer analysis.
The configuration of the RCJ Hotel is described in MDG 9.1.3 Figs. 9.1-6 through 9.1-15.
ill be examined under

The Wall Construction Option B, with BuildingOption I dimensions, w
Seismic Zone 4 loading.
and
Calculations
Discussion
Reference
Code
Many PC-based structural analysis programs are available to the practicing engineer. Some
of the most common are ETABS, STAADIII, SAP90, and GTSTRUDL These programs
are simple to use and provide a variety of pre- and postprocessors.
If a computerized analysis program is used, a more detailed structural analysis of masonry
structures is possible. Applying this method of analysis to the RCJ Hotel allows the effect
of the coupling beams and openings in both the shearwalls and the diaphragm to be readily
incorporated in the analysis.
Most computer structural analysis programs model
degrees of freedom. The designer must review
diaphragms as rigid elements with 3
the program manual to ensure that the
element properties and limitations are clearly understood.

When determining the cross-sectional properties for use in the analysis, uncracked section
properties are used.
If a more refined analysis is desired, the individual elements can be subsequently checked
to ensure thatthey remain uncracked. If any element exceeds the cracking loading, cracked
9-100


and
Code Reference
Calculations
section properties can be calculated based on

analysis rerun.
the results of the initial loading and the
The analysis and crackedsectioncalculationscan
be repeated until
convergence is reached. However, unless the computed design forces in critical elements
changesignificantly as a result of the cracking the additional computational effort of
repeated iterations may not be justified.
If shear wall elements intersect, the designer is required by Code 5.7.1.1 to consider flanged
wall' actions. These wall connections must comply with the requirements of Code 5.13.4.2.
In many building configurations it is more conservative
to ignore flanged walls and Code
5.7.1.1 can be neglected.

Code 5.7.1.1 limits the effective flange width on each side of the web to 6 times the flange
thickness and requires minimum connection detail to ensure composite action. Since it is
often difficult to model the building with the 6 times the flange thickness limitation, the
designer must use sub-elements to determine the relative importance of these conflicting
Code provisions.
The lateral load resisting elements of a typical floor of the RCJ Hotel is shown in Fig. 1.
Thisconfiguration
isslightly
different from that presented for the previousexample,
incorporating the resistance of both North and South stairwell wallsand having removedthe
center column on Grid Line E, between Grid Lines 3 and 4. Note that the building is taller
with this building option as well.
Fig. 2 shows the pier and coupling beam configurations on the major Grid Lines. Where
there are perforations in the walls pier, identification labels are shown.
9-101

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
m Ob62949 0508798
470 W
&ample 9.2-4 Cont'd.

@-
Reference
Code
"
"
"
1
1
Tr
@-
o-
@-
"
Fig. 1 Latewl Load Carrying Elements of RCJ Hotel at First Floor (Neglecting Canopy)
9-102

A C 1 TITLExMDG 9 3
Obb2949 0508799 307

and
Calculations
Code Reference
Piers On G r i d Line 2
...
Roo1
4 t h Floor
3rd Floor
2nd Floor
m Indicates
Beam
Piers On Grid Line B
??
Piers On Grid Line E
Floor
Floor
Floor
4th
3rd
2nd
Floor
Floor
Floor
Pl
PP P
PRoof
4th Floor
3rd Floor
2nd Floor
Piers On Grid
Line
I n d i c a t eO
s pening
Roof
4th Floor
3rd Floor
2nd Floor
B
P
Piers On Grid
Line
Roof
4th
3rd
2nd
Roof
P P
Piers On Grid Line D
Pl
?Piers On Grid Line 3
3rd Floor
2nd Floor
Pl
P2
P1
P2
Pl
P2
P1
P2
Fig. 2 L a t e r a l Load Resisting Piers Along the Major Grid Lines
Using the modelof the lateral load resisting elements shown in Figs.1 and 2, an analysis of
9-103

A C 1 TITLEdMDG 9 3
Obb2949 0508800 7 5 7

and
Calculations
Discussion
Code Reference
the RCJ Hotel was performed using the ETABS program. Seismic loads govern and the
magnitude of the story shears were calculated usingthe procedures described in the previous
example. These calculations and their results are summarized below. The three load cases
shown in Fig. 1were analyzed to account for the accidental eccentricity described in MDG
Example 9.2-3. A fourth ,loadcase, the east-west shear applied north of the center of mass
was neglected, since by inspection it does not govern.
Load Calculations
The total seismic load is the same in both directions and has a value of:
= 1.0 x 1.0 x
1.33 x 0.14 x W
The loads presented in Table 1 wereused
(for Seismic Zone 4)
0.186 x W
in the analysis and the critical wall shears
produced by the three loading cases are summarized in Table 2. The critical end moments
on the coupling beams are summarized in Table 3.
Table 1 Analysis Loads
Level
h'
(ft)
m'
(kips)
(ft-kips)
Floor Force
(kips)
Roof
39.8
1,090323
43,200
323
4th Floor
30.2
1,320624
40,300
301
3rd Floor
20.5
1,320
27,400
205
2nd Floor
10.8
1,320938
14,700
110
Sum
939 5,050
125,600
9-104

Story Shear
(kips)
829
A C 1 T I T L E + M D G 93
m 0662749 050880L 875 m

and
Calculations
Table 2 Critical Shear Force Results

Code Reference
A C 1 T I T L E S H D G 93
0662949 0508802 721

and
Calculations
Discussion
Code Reference
9-106


~~
~~
Code Reference
able 2 Critical Shear Force Results (Contd.)
3rd
P5
58
P4
58
66
P5
9-107

A C 1 T I T L E * N D G 93 D 0662949 0508804 5 T 4
Examde 9.2-4 Contd.

and
Calculations
Table 3 Critical Beam Moment Reaction Results

Wall Bay
At Line B
I.D.
Moment At Left End

(in.-kips)
Roof
B3
B3 4th
B3
II
B1
I
B2
B1
I
303
450
446
65
-10
38
3rd
2nd
2nd
At Line C
Level
I
I
I
I
Line
At
2nd
B2
B1
I
m
40
Neglected
251
409
425
95
75
40
38
Neglected
h.
9- 108

(in.-kips)
A C 1T I T L E * R D G
93
m 0662949 0508805 430 m

and
Calculations
9-109

A C 1 T I T L E J M D G 93
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0508806 377
Example 9.24 Contd.

Code Reference
Table 3 Critical Beam Moment Reaction Results (Contd.)

Moment At Left End Moment At Right End
Level
Bay I.D.
Wall
(in.-kips)
(in.-kips)
461
533
-21
B7
B8
B9
B10
955
435
919
9-110

849
A C 1 TITLE*NDG 93
Example 93-1
Obb2949 0508807 203 W
T M S Shopping Center Load Distribution Within Single WytheWalls

Under Concentrated Loads
Determine the effective area ofwallacting

compressive stress
under concentrated loads for calculation
of
va).
The north loadbearing wall of the TMS Shopping Center, Grid Line A, is used to illustrate
the distribution of load under typical roof joist supports.The portion of the loadbearing wall
above the joist bearing elevation is ignored and the loading of a section of the wall is as
shown below.
t- Effective
-It;
Length
Effective
Length
a" CMU
Load
Spacing
and
Calculations
The limiting
effective
length
per the
Code
equals the bearing width
plus 4 times the wall thickness. See MDG Appendix A for concrete
masonry unit dimensions.
9-111

5.12.1
A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 9 3 W 0662949 0508808 L4T W
Example 93-1Cont'd.
~~~~
~~
Code Reference
Eflective Length
3 in. + ( 4 x 7.63 in.)
33.5 in.
(thickness of 8 in. nominal concrete block is 7.63 in.)

The Code states that the
effective length shall
not exceed the center-tocenter distance between concentrated loads.
33.5 in. < 5 ft x 12 in./ft

The net area of the wallis
60 in.
5.12.1
.: OK
then calculated based on the limiting
effective length calculated above. If the wall was grouted solid, the net
area would be:
A,, = 33.5 in. x 7.63 in. = 255
in?
If the wall was hollow, the Code would require that the minimum net
area be used; for face shell bedding thiswould equal 33.5 in. times the
thickness of 2 face shells, or 2.5 in.
5.13.1.1
For walls laid in running bond

the load distribution must be terminated
at movement joints if the distribution intersects the joint.
For walls laid inother thanrunning bond,the Code C.5.12.2 states that
no stress shall be transferred across head joints. Therefore, the load
distribution must stop at the head joint closest to each edge of the
bearing plate. The Commentary suggests distributing the load over a
45' angle. Thus, if the previous wall system was laid instack bond, the
distribution of load shown by the shaded areas in the figure below

should be assumed.Consequently,
the effectivelength
limited to one unit.Again,minimum
is
area (based on face shell
9-112

ofwall
9 3 W Ob62949 0508809 O8b W
Example 93-1Contd.
Code Reference
bedding) should be used if wall is not grouted solid.
9-113

Example 93-2
TMS ShoppingCenter
0bb29Ll9 0508810 B T B
- Distribution of Concentrated Loads Acting on
a Bond Beam
The north wall on Grid Line A of TMS Shopping Center is a loadbearing wall supporting
steel joists spaced on 5 ft centers. Assuming that the topcourse of the wall is replaced with
a bond beam, calculate the net bearing area of the hollow wall section and the effective
length over which the concentrated load can be distributed.
Code Reference
P
7.63"
1
8
"
It
The bearing plate dimensions are given in MDG Fig. 9.1-1 as 5 in. x 7 in. The nominal wall
thickness and the bond beam depth are assumed to be 8 in. The angle of load dispersion
through the bond beam is taken as 30" from the vertical as suggested in MDG 9.3.2.1. See
MDG Appendix A for properties of concrete masonry units.
The gross effective bearing area of the hollow wall that can be used to resist the loal
given by:
Gross Bearing Area
= t x
LB
9-114

AC1 TITLESNDG 93 m 0662747 05088LL 734 m
Example 93-2 Cont'd.

Reference
Code
in which t is equal to the nominal thickness of the wall and LBis calculated as
LB = [ L p + 2 ( 8 in.)(& 30)]
where Lp is the length of the bearing plate.
For this example, t = 7.63 in. (8 in. nominal block), and Lp = 7 in., which leads to a value
for LB OE
LB =
7 h + 2 ( 8 in.)(tan30" )
16.2 in.
Combining above equations and substituting these values gives:

Gross Bearing Area
= ( 7.63
in.) ( 16.2 in.) = 124.0 in?
The Code 5.13.1.1 requires that the load must be resisted by the net area. As the net area
for an 8 in. CMU is equal to 41.5 in.2, the net effective bearing area below the bond beam
can be calculated by proportionality as
41.5
Net Bearing Area =
The effective length over
ia2
(15.63 in.) (7.63 in.)
124.0 i a 2
which concentrated loads can
bearing width plus four times
43.1
ia2
be distributed is limited to the
the wall thickness, but not to exceed the center-to-center
spacing of the concentrated loads. For this example, the effective length is given by
Efective Length = LB + 4 (7.63 in.)

5.121
EflectiveLength
16.2 in. + 4 (7.63
in.)
9-115

46.7 in.
A C 1 TITLE*HDG 93
Obb29V9 0508832 670
Example 93-2 Contd.

Code Reference
Thisdistanceislessthanthecenter-to-centerspacing
of theconcentratedloadsand,
A,, for calculating compressive stressin the

therefore, governs. The net cross-sectional area,
wall can again be calculated by proportionality as
9-116

AC1 TITLEtMDG 93 m Obb2949 050BBL3 507
Example 93-3 T M S Shopping Center Effective Bearing Area Under Concentrated h d

For thewalls on Grid Lines1 or 3 of the TMS Shopping Center, theW 16 x 31 steel beams
running along Line B are supported on 5 in. x 10 in. x % in. bearing plates. Assume the
bearing plate is placed at the centerof an 8 in. grouted block wall laidin running bond. The
bearing plate is located at a distance of 1-5/16 in. from each face of the wall. Calculate the
effective bearing area for this plate location.
7.63"
Bearing Area Al
45
Bearing
Area 2
Section A
-A
Code Reference
Referring to MDG 9.3.3,
A,
5 in. x 10 in.
50 h2
A, = [Sin. + 2( 1.31 in.)][ 10 in. + 2( 1.31 h)]= 96.3

The load can be distributed over an area given by
9-117

in?
A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
m 0662949 0508814
443

and
Calculations
Area
Discussion
= A,
Code Reference
but
not
greater
than
5.12.2
2Al
Al
in?
Area
= 50
Area
= 69.4 in.2 but not greater than
50
in?
but
not
greater
than
100 in.2
Therefore,
Effective Bearing Area = 69.4 in.2
9-118

2(50 in.2) = 100 in?
A CT 1I T L E x M D G
Obb2949 0 5 0 8 8 3 5 3 8 T
93
Example 93-4 TMS Shopping Center Effective Bearing Area Under Concentrated Load
Assume the 5 in. x 10 in. x ?4in. bearing plate in MDG Example 9.3-3 is located at the edge
of the masonry wall. Calculate the effective bearing area for this plate location.
Bearing Area Al
Area A2 Is
Measured On
L
A
This Plane
Bearing
Area A2
and
Calculations
Reference
Discussion
Since the edge of the bearing plate, in this case, is in line with
Code
the face of the block, the
effective bearing area which can be considered is equal to the actual area of the bearing
plate.
Therefore,
Effective Bearing Area = 50 in.2

Note:Typically
the bearing plate is placed no closer
masonry unit.
9-119

than 0.5 in. from the face of the
Example 9.3-5
93 W Obb29Y9 OSOBBLb 2Lb
TMS Shopping Center Effective Bearing Area Under ConcentratedLoad
Assume the 5 in. x 10 in. x % in. bearing plate in MDG Example 9.3-3 is placed at the
center of an 8 in. grouted block wall laid in stack bond
but at a distance of % in. from a
head joint. Calculate the effective bearing area for this plate location.
>
"""""""""""
Area A2 Is Measured
On This Plane
Section B - B
ReferenceCalculations
Cade and Discussion
The Code states that A, shall terminate at head joints in other than
running bond. As the bearing plate is assumed to end at a distance of
% in. from the head joint of the stack bond masonry the value of A2
can be calculated as:
A2 =
[ 5 h. + 2(0.75 in.)][ 10 h. + 2(0.75 h.)]= 74.8 h2
The load can be distributed over an area given by
9-120

5.12.2
A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 93
m 0662949 050BBL7 L52 m

and
Calculations
Area
= A,
Area
= 50
Area
= 61.1 in.2whichis less than 100 in.2
in?
but not greater than
74'8 i a 2
50 h2
2A1
but not greater than 100 in.2
:. In this case, effective bearing area = 61.1 in.2
9-121

A C 1 T I T L E * l D G 93
Example 93-6
0662949 0508838 O99
DPC Gymnasium Distribution of Gravity Load Moment in Multiwythe

Determine the distribution of bending moment resulting from gravity loads that act on the
block wythe of a two-wythe brick block noncomposite wall on Grid Lines A and B in the
DPC Gymnasium, Wall Construction Option k

The following material properties have been assumed for the purpose of the load
distriiution:
Concrete Block
Masonry
Clay
Brick
Masonry
(Hollow Block)
2,000
Unit Strength (psi)

Mortar
6,000
Type N
Type S
fm
(psi)
1,500
2,500
E m
(psi)
1.8 x 106
1.9 x 106
Reference
Code
O*@
Roof Truss With Sloped Top Chord

With Continuous 6 x 4 To Support
Joint Reinforcement
Brick
Continuous Reinforcement Bond

Bearing Plate 6 x 12 With Headed
9-122

A C 1 TITLESMDG 93
Obb2949 0508819 T25
Example 93-6 Contd.

~~
Code Reference
Calculations and Reference
Loads for this wall are taken from the north wall (Grid Line A) of the
DPC Gymnasium
given
in
MDG 9.1-2. As the vertical

gravity
loads
5.8.2.1(b)
acts only on the block wythe, these will be .resisted entirely by that
wythe. At the point of load application, any bending moment caused
by the eccentricity of the load with respect to the centroid of the block
wythe will be resisted completely by the block wythe. Away from the
point of load application, however, some of this momentis assumed to
be transferred to thebrick wythe in proportion to the relative flexural
stiffness of the two wythes.

One can conservatively assumea triangular distribution of gravity load
bearing stress on the block wythe as shown.
The total moment, M,is then equal to load, P,multiplied by the eccentricity, e, where e is
measured from the centroid of the load distribution to the centerline of the block wythe.
9- 123

93
0662949 0508820 747

~~~
Code Reference
Thus, the total moment, M,is given as:
Pe
The critical truss reaction is calculated in MDG 9.1.2.1 as 14,880 lb. A bearing plate of size
6 in. x 12 in. placed one-half in. from the inner face of the block wythe, as shown, yields an
eccentricity, e, of
e = 7*63h* - 0.5
2
- 6
in.
(i)
=
1.31 in.
7.63"
Therefore, the total moment, M,is given by
Although this may not always be true, the wall ties connecting the two
wythes are assumed to have sufficient axial stiffness
so that the two
wythes must have equal curvature. This fact leads to the relationship
9- 124

5.8.1.5
AC1
TITLE*HDG 93 U 0662949 0508821 b 8 3 U
Examde 93-6 Cont'd.

Code Reference
that
In these equations, the subscripts 61 and br correspond to the block and

brick wythe, respectively. Assuming only face shellmortar bedding for
the block wythe, IN is given by MDG Appendix A as 309 in.4/ft. While
Code 5.13.2 permits the use of the average net sections, the minimum
section is used here for simplicity. The value of Ibr= (12)(3.625)3/12
= 47.6 in.ll/ft. Using the section and material properties above, each
wythe's share of the total moment acting in the wall can be computed
as follows:
Mar
19.5 h - kip [ (1.8 X lo6 psi) (309 h.")]

[ (1.8 x 106 psi) (309 in.")] + [ (1.9 x lob psi) (47.6 in.")]
M M = (19.5 h-kip) (556 X lob lb-h2)

(646 X
lo6 lb+.*)
or
M M = 16.8 h - k i ~
9-125

5.13.2
A C 1 T I T L E S f l D G 93
Obb29Y9 0508822 51T D

and
Calculations
and
Ma
19.5 h-kips [ (1.9 X 106 psi) (47.6 i

n
.
'
) ]
[ (1.8 x 106 psi) (309 in.3 ] + [ (1.9 x lob psi) (47.6 in?) ]
Ma
(19.5 in.-kip) (90.4 X lo6 1b-h2)

(646 X 106 lb-in?)
or
Ma = 2.7 i n . - k i p ~
Check
M M + Ma = 16.8
M
in.-kip~ + 2.7 h-kip
19.5 h.-kip
19.5 h-kips
Note: At the application point of the vertical load the block wythe is subjected to a total
moment, due to the eccentricity of the load of 19.5 in.-kips. Accordingly, the block
wythe must be designed for this moment magnitude at that level.
9-126

Example 93-7
DPCGymnasium
Ob62949 0508823 45b
- In-PlaneLateral Load DistributioninMultiwythe

~~~
Consider the noncomposite wall in the DPC Gymnasium on Grid Lines 1or 2 (Option A)
subjected to in-plane lateral loads. Determine the distribution of in-plane lateral load to the
individual wythes assuming Wall Construction
Option A (unreinforced brick and block cavity
wall).
Reference
Code
~~
Reinforced BondBeam
k TEK Screw
!
!
!
!
Strap Anchor
!
!
!
As in MDG Example 9.2-2, the roof system is assumed to be flexible

in its own plane, and is attached only to the block wythe, as shown.
Thus, according to the Code, the in-plane lateral load is resisted only
by the block wythe, and any transfer of loads between the brick and
block wythes is neglected.
9-127

5.8.2.1(c)
A C 1 TITLEzMDG 9 3
Example 9.3-8
DPCGymnasium
0662949 0508824 392
- DistributionofOut-of-PlaneLateralLoads
in
Consider the noncomposite wall (Wall Construction Option A) in the DPC Gymnasium on
GridLines 1, 2, A, and B. The wallis subjected to lateral loadsshownin
the figure.
Determine the out-of-plane lateral load distribution to the brick and block wythes.
RD:$ragm
Reaction
20 psf
and
Calculations
To design
wall
systems
for out-of-plane lateral loads,

such as wind and
earthquake loads, the Code requires that the load transverse to the
plane of the wall be distributed to the individual wythes of the wall
system in proportion to their relative flexural stiffnesses. In general,
the stiffness of each wytheisaffectedbyitsheight
and boundary
conditions. In this building, the height and boundary conditions of

each wythe of the cavity wall are assumed to be the same.
9-128

5.8.2.2
A C 1 TITLE*MDG 9 3
Ob62949 0 5 0 8 8 2 5 229
Example 93-8 Contd.

and
Calculations
Reference
Discussion
Code
Defining the distributed transverse wind load acting on the wall as equal to a force P per
unit area, the resulting load on each wythe can be obtained from:
inwhich the subscripts bl and br refer to the block and brick wythe, respectively. This
equation is valid regardless of the boundary conditions, as long
as they are thesame for both
wythes. Substituting the previously calculatedstiffnessvalues fromMDG Example 9.3-6 and
the design wind pressure of 20 psf into the above equation yields:
PM
(E%atal
(20 Psf) (556
106 1b-h2)
(646
106 lb-in?)
9-129

1,.2
Example 93-9
DPCGymnasium
m 0662747
0 5 0 8 8 2 6 Lb5
- Shear Stress Distribution in the Collar Joint of a
Multiwythe Composite Wall Due to Out-of-Plane Wind Load

Determine the maximum shear stress in the collarjoint of the multiwythecomposite masonry
wall on Grid Line 1 or 2 of the DPC Gymnasium Wall Construction Option B, due to the
out-of-plane wind loads.
The following material properties are used in the analysis.
Clay Brick
Concrete Block
Masonry
Masonry
(Hollow)
Unit Strength (psi)
Mortar
(psi)
Em or Es (psi)
f
'
m
and
5000
6,OOo
Type N
Types
1,500
2,5 O0
1.8 x 106
1.9 x 106
Calculations
2" Grouted Collar Joint

4"
Brick WytPe
18,' Block Wythe
30 ' max.
20 psf
9-130

AC1
TITLEtMDG 93 M 0662947 0508827 OTL M
Examde 93-9 Contd.

and
Calculations
The wind load for the wall is given previously in MDG 9.1.2 as 20 psf.
The highest point of the wall, which has a height of 30 ft, is utilized to
compute the maximum interface shear stress in the collar joint. This
shear stress due to out-of-plane loads is computed after the crosssection of the composite wall has been transformed into one material.
The standard shearstress formula of the Code, Eq. 6.7, is modified to
take into account the existence of more than one material in the cross
5.13.1.2
section as
The location of the neutral axis and the magnitude of the moment of
inertia of the composite section are calculated as follows:
According to the Code, in walls designed for composite
action, the
shear stress shall be computed using section properties based on the

~
5.13.1.2
minimum transformed
net cross-sectional area of the composite wall.
The generally accepted transformed area concept for elastic analysis,
in which areas of dissimilar materials are transformed according to

their relative moduli, shall apply.
Using the material propertiesof various components given above, a one ft width of wall can
be transformed to an equivalent concrete block as shown. The location of the neutral axis
from the centroid of the block is calculated by taking the first moment of area about the
block centroid as:
9-131

TITLE*MDG 9 3 m Obb2949 0508828 T38 m
AC1
Code Reference
From MDG Appendix A
P -"l"l
r
1
Block
I=309 in4
A=41.5
in.
12"
J4
J
7.63"
Grouted Collar Joint
-"
-
X = 4.11"
3.63"
/////
Brick
1L-E
c Fvst moment of
x 12=12.67"
area
r =
-x =
+ -2h)(2in.
2
x ,.,,in.)+( 7.63in.
2
2h
3*63in.k . 6 3in. x 12.67in.)
2
2in. x 6.67in. + 3.63in. x 12.67in. + 41.5in.2
414.41 h? = 4.11 in,

100.77
from the block centtoid
9-132

0662949 0508829 974
Example 93-9 Contd.

Code Reference
:.
Zw
6.67in.(2hJ3
3 W h 4 + 41.5in?(4.11i~~)~
+
12
+ 2h(6.67 in.)
Zw
1,639
ia4
7.63h + -2in.
r. , , -, . ,
2
12.67in.(3.63ix~)~
12
for a 12 in. wide strip
The value of the shear stress is critical at either the block-collar joint interface or brick-collar
joint interface depending upon where the value of the first moment of area
Q is larger. The
value of Q at these interfaces is computed from the transformed area as follows:
Qbl = 41.5
Qbr = 161
x 4.1 1
in. = 171 h
in.
Therefore, Qbl = 171 in.3 governs
9-133

93
Obb2949 0508830 6 9 6

Code Reference
The maximum shear stress at the block-collar joint interface is given by:
This value is less than (1.33)(10) = 13.3 psi
.:
OK
5.3.2
5.8.1.2
9-134

A C 1 TITLEsMDG 9 3 W 0662747 0 5 0 8 8 3 3 522 W
Example 93-10
TMS Shopping Center LateralandAxial Load Distribution in Single
Wythe Loadbearing Wall Systems

Determine the axial and out-of-plane lateral load distribution to the elements in a single
wythe wall system.
The east wall section under consideration is
located on
Grid
Line
3 of the T M S
Shopping Center layout shown in Fig. 9.1-1.

This
section
wall
ofis
subject to a
concentrated reaction from the roof girder
Pier t 2
(W 16 x 31) on Grid Line 3, near Grid Line
B.
Wind Load 20 psf positive pressure or
suction pressure (includes interior pressure
loading)
~~
Code Reference

Loading on Wall Pier 1:
Whendesigningmasonrysystems,
the Code requires a number of different load
combinations to be investigated to determine the critical loading conditions.
+ L, 0.9D + E, D + L + (W or E ) or D + W are the
govern the design of wall systems.
9-135

load combinations that usually
A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93
m 0662949 0508832
qb9
Example 93-10 Contd.

and
Calculations
Code Reference
For the purpose of this example, the following assumptions are made:
1.
When designing wall sections to resist out-of-plane loads in Seismic Zone 1, the D
+ W loadcombinationusuallygoverns
and will be assumed to governinthis
example.
2.
The wall system is constructed of 8 in. reinforced concrete block with a 88 psf dead
load.
3.
The roofsystemprovidessimple
lateralsupporttothe
wall at thebase
of the
parapet.
4.
The foundation providesnegligible restraint to out-of-plane rotations, i.e., it can be

assumed to act as a simple support.
It should be noted that when analyzing unreinforced wall systems, control joints will affect
the continuity of the wall system and therefore the load distribution. In these cases, the
designer can assume that the wall system is separated into discrete elements defined by the
control joints. In the subsequent analysis, it is assumed that the control joints transfer outof-plane shear but not in-plane shear or axial stresses.
Axial Loads:
From the analysis presented in MDG 9.1.1.1, the W 16 x 31 girder reaction, P,to the wall
at B3 is equal to 15,770 lb. It should be noted that the uplift effect of the dead load of the
fascia suspended at the end of cantilevered joists betweenGrid B and C was ignored in the
calculations. This uplift was ignored because
it simplified the calculations and the uplift
forces acting on the soffit would likely balance out a significant portion of the fascia dead
load. This simplification results in a slightly conservative value for the reaction.
9-136

A C 1T I T L E l k M D G
93
Obb2949 0508833 3T5 M
Example 93-10Contd.
and
Code Reference
Calculations
The girder reaction is applied to the wall at the center of a door opening. This girder
reaction is transferred symmetrically to thewall sections oneither side of the opening. Thus,
Pier #1 will be subjected to 1/2 of the girder reaction, 7,890lb. Even though the 7,890lb
axial load is applied to Pier #1 over the height of the wall above the opening, it can be
conservativelyassumed that the entire
loadcomes onto Pier #1 at the girder bearing
elevation.
The rotation of girder produces a varying bearing stress distribution on the wall.
in the figurebelow, a simplified triangular stress distributionisassumed
As shown
to model the
conditions under the bearing plate. The axialload applied to Pier #l will act at an
eccentricity fromthe centriodal axis of the wall cross section. For a 5 in. wide bearing plate,
Pl2
e =
( L x 7.63 in.) 2
(i
5 in. + 0.5 in.

5 in.
0.5 in
Interior
Other than thegirder reaction, the wall section has no other applied axial loads. However,
a portion of the dead loads from the sections above the door openings are also transferred
to Pier #l. Half of this load will be assumed to go to each side of these openings. The
additional axial load on Pier #1 (Po) is therefore:
Po = 88 psf
3.33 ft
x 12
ft
(y)
ft]
x
5,720 lb
This load is assumedto be applied to Pier #1 at the top of the tallest opening, i.e., at 10 ft
9-137

AC1
TITLESMDG 93 m 0662949 0508834 231

Reference
Code
from the floor level. If desired, the wall dead loads can be considered as two concentrated
loads applied at heights of 10 ft and 7 ft.
Lateral Loads due to Wind
It is assumed that the interior and exterior wind pressures combine to produce a uniform
wind loading of 20 psf on the wall system.
Because of the wall system configuration,these wind loads are primarily distributed in oneway bending to the foundation and roof supports. Further, due to the flexibility from the
openings, most of the load on sections of the wall system with openings is transferred first
to the continuous wall sections on either side, and subsequently to the foundation and roof.
Based on these assumptions, the uniform lateral load on Pier #1 is calculated as:
20 psf
It is important that the wall sections above the door openings be analyzed to determine
whether they have sufficientstrength to transfer the loads to the supporting piers. A simply
supported beam analysis usingthe opening length as the beam span
is suggested for this wall
section.
The total loading applied to Pier #1 is summarized in the figure below. From this loading,
critical moments and shears, and subsequently stresses, can be determined. These stresses
can then be used to evaluate whether the maximum stresses in the proposed wall section
design are within allowable limits. During this evaluation,the self weight of the wall system
must be added to the axial stress to provide an accuratestress determination at these critical
9-138

Obb2949 0508835 L78
Example 93-10Cont'd.
Code Reference
sections.
1.65"
In most cases, the suction wind loading (or the outward

Seismic loading), combined with
eccentric axial load,will
produce the critical
design
conditions
i%:
I p2+tl/ I
for a wall
system.
If the designer so desires the loading shown for Pier #1

can be further simplified by assuming that both axial
loads are applied at the girder bearing elevation.
Loading on Wall Pier #2

Using procedures similar to those outlined above,the axial and lateral loads on Pier #2 can
be calculated. To simplify calculations, since it is not subjected to an axial load from the
roof, Pier #2 is assumed to have a design width of 1ft.
Axial Loads at top of door:
Po
88 psf x
(y)
x 12
ft
1,760 lb
53.3 plf
Lateral Loads:
w=2opsfx
The loading for Pier #2 is summarized in the figure shown.
9-139
.
0662949 0 5 0 8 8 3 b 004

Code Reference
Design of Lintels A and B:

The analysis of the lintelsover
thedoor
openings issurprisingly
indeterminate. The
distribution of vertical load to the lintels will depend on the size of the opening, the depth
of the masonryabove
the lintel, the restraint provided by the piers on each side, the
presence of control joints, and the type of vertical loading. As the ratio of the length of
opening to the depth of masonry above the lintel decreases, more of the vertical load is
transferred to the piers by arching action. This arching action will only occur if sufficient
restraint is provided by a tension tie over the opening, or if sufficient masonry exists on
either side of the opening to resist the arch thrusts.
Tension ties can be provided by sizing the lintel reinforcement to resist the beam stress and
to provide the tie for arch action over the opening. This reinforcement must be adequately
anchored within the piers on either side if these bars are tobe expected to develop sufficient
strength to resist the arch thrusts.
For uniformly distributed vertical loadsapplied to walls which haveheights of masonry above
the lintel that are less than one-half the lintel support spacing plus 16 in., NCMA Tek-Note
81 (9.3.11) suggests that the lintel be designed for the entire vertical load, and be assumed
simply supported over the wall opening. This same analysis can be used for cases where
movement joints are present on one or both sides of the openings. Concentrated loads can
be distributed to the lintel in a manner similar to that described in MDG 9.3.1.
For lintels which have heights of masonry above the lintel that exceed one-half the lintel
span spacing plus 16 in., the designer can assume that all of the uniformly applied vertical
9-140

A C 1 T I T L E v N D G 93 W 0662949 0508837 T 4 0 W

and
Calculations
load above the opening, and above the apex of a 450 triangular area over the opening, is
carried by arching action. If arching action is taken into account, then the lintel should be
designed to support the sum of the dead weight of the masonry in a 450 triangular area
above the lintel and the self weight of the lintel (9.3.12). If a concentrated load is applied
to the wall away from the center of the lintel opening someof this load may be distributed
to the lintel and must be accounted. The reader should refer to Schneider and Dickey
(9.2.1) for further information on this subject and a suggested analysis method.
If the designer is uncertain whether there is sufficient masonry aboveor oneach side of the
opening to form the arch, arching action should be neglected.
Lintel A:
The location, dimensions and loads for lintel A are as shown.
A minimum bearing length of 4 in. is assumed on each side of the opening, so the span of
the lintel is:
Span
3.33 ft
4*0
in*
12 in./fi
3.67 ft
Apex
The height of the masonry above the lintel
19 ft
- 7.0 ft
12ft > -3+.67 ft

2
45O o+,
to the top of wall is:

Height
Arch
12 ft
in.
12 in./ft
3.17 ft
H
3.67
Therefore, arching action is present.
9-141

Loads Above
Of
Triangle, If Present.
Are Carried By Arching
Action
AC1
TITLE*NDG 93 W 0662949 0508838 987 m

and
Code Reference
Calculations
Since action is present, the lintel can be design for the weight of the lintel and the weight
of the wallwithin the triangular area defined by the arch. The loads on lintel A are
summarized below.
If a 45" angle of distribution is assumed,the arch thrusts can be calculated as the horizontal
component of the arch forces. Therefore the thrust is
[(19 ft
Thrust
"1'
- 7 ft) X 3.67 fi] - (3*67

2
x 88 psf x cos 45"
2,320 lb
- Assumed 90 plf Lintel
Lintel
J
3.67
'
and must be resisted with a tension tie or the in-plane shear capacity of the piers on either
side of the opening.
Lintel B:
The location, dimensions and loads for lintel B are as shown.
A minimum bearing length of 4 in. was assumed on each side of the opening, so the center
9-142

A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 93
0662949 0508837 813

and
Calculations
to center span of the lintel is:

P
The height of the masonry above the lintel (to Girder bearing elevation) is:
Height
4.3 ft
14.6 ft - 10.3 ft
10.3 ft
+
12 2
l6
4.3 ft
in'
in./ft
6.5 ft
Therefore, no arching action

The loading for the lintel is shown below. This load includes
the weight of the lintel, the
weight of the wall immediately above the opening and the distributed concentrated load.
Note that a distribution angle of 30" was used and the distributed length was limitedto the
bearing plate width plus 4 times the wall thickness (see MDG Example 9.5). The effect of
the bond beam was ignored since this results in a conservative loading
and simplifies the
analysis. If these loads producean uneconomical lintel designfurther refinement of the load
analysis can be conducted
9-143

A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93
Obb2949 0508840 535
Examde 93-10 Cont'd.

and
Calculations
Code Reference
o:['n:ght
Of
, .
,-, Bearing Plate
J. . "&L""""""""-A
15,770 1 (40.5I 12 ) = 4,670plf
10" + 4 X 7.63" = 40.5"
88 psf (9') = 792 plf
Lintel
Lintel B must be designed to resist the two distributed loads
9-144

A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93
0662749 0508841 471
Example 93-11 T M S ShoppingCenter
DistributionofHorizontalLoadWithin
Reinforced Perforated Shear Walls

Determine thehorizontal load distributionto the piers in a reinforced perforated shearwall.
The wall section under consideration is Wall Construction Option B located in the TMS
Shopping Center on Grid Line 3, between Grid Lines
A and C. This 8 in.reinforced,
partially grouted, concrete block wall has two door openings separated by a 2 ft - 8 in. pier
of masonry. The figure below shows the configuration of this wall and its openings.
82 '
J4-
4
1
and
13.300 lb
Calculations
Using Method I described in MDG 9.2.2, the lateral load applied to the top of this wall can
be distributed to each wall section.
Since the loads in this example are relatively small, it is appropriate to use a linear elastic,
uncracked section analysis for the distribution of the horizontal shear loads. With higher
loadlevels
and/or smaller wall piers, a crackedanalysis
may be more appropriate.
Furthermore, thesection analyzed is assumedto be reinforced and has no movement joints

9-145

A C 1 TITLEMMDG 9 3
Obb29Y9 05088q2 308

and
Calculations
within the wall. If movement joints are present, they will separate the wall into isolated
piers and must be accounted for in the analysis. See MDG Example 9.3-12.
As shown in MDG Example 9.2-1, the largest shear load applied near the top of the wall
on Grid Line 3 is produced by the wind loading and has a value of 13,300 lb.
It is assumed that only the stiffness of the wall below the diaphragm will be effective in
resisting the lateralloads. The totalcantilever deflectionof the wall can be calculated at the
16 ft elevation using MDG Eq. 9.2-3.
Since all walls have equal thickness and only relative stiffness is required, assume
pl
- 1 in.
Emf
10
The relative cantilever deflection of a solid 16 ft x 82 ft shear wall would be
Ae16x82
in. [4(=)
-10
82 A
This produces a relative stiffness, k16x
3(=)
82
= 0.062
0.062 in.
in.
16.3 in.-
The largest opening in the wall is the 10 ft by 10 doorway. Thus, the relative cantilever
deflection of a 10 ft by 10 ft opening strip,
A,, -
[ (i: ir
1
in.410
3 ( 3 ]
is
=
9-146

0.037 in.
A CT 1I T L E * f l D G
93
0662949 05088q3 244
and
Calculations
There are two sections of wall within the opening strip, a 10 ft x 36 ft section to the right
of the door opening, pier 3, and a 10 ft x 36 ft section to the left of the 10 ft by 10 ft
opening. The left section has a 3.33 ft x 7.0 ft opening and contains piers 1 and 2. For
either 10 x 36 section, the fixed pier deflection from MDG Eq. 9.2-4 is
4 0
36
1in.
- 10
x 36
'P10
[ (gr
'
3(%)
11.7
0.085 in.
0.085 in.
in.-'
Since there is a 3.33 ft by 7 ft opening in the left section, the composite stiffness of the two
piers, 1 and 2, must be determined before the stiffness of this section can be calculated.
The fixed pier deflection of the 7 ft x 36 ft section, ignoring the opening, is
AF7X36
- 10 in.
[ (Er ]
+
3(%)
= 0.059
in.
The fixed pier deflection of pier 1 is

F'
pier 1 -
therefore,
kph. 1 --
210 in.
' in.
[(ET
+ 3 ( 2 ) ] = 0.071 in.
14.0
in.-'
0.071
9-147

AC1
TITLEtMDG 93 W 0662949 0508844 L80 m
Code Reference
I
The fixed pier deflection of pier 2 is

' F pkr 2
- 10
-Lin.[(
2.67
7 f tftT + 3 ( 2.67
' * )ft] = 2 . 6 O h L
therefore,
Adding the stiffness of pier 1 and 2 results in a composite stiffness for this pier group of
14.03
+ 0.385
in.-1
in.-='14.4 in."
The deflection of this pier group is therefore,

'Fpier 1+2
--
1
14.4
in.-='0.069 in
The net deflection of the 10 x 36 section to the left of the 10 ft opening is
Al&+.nrOn
-- A c 1 0 x M -
A&# OectfON
= 0.085
A F 7 x 3 6 -b
P p k 1+2
in. - 0.059 in. + 0.069 in.
= 0.096
in.
therefore
kmwnlocl - 0.096 in.
= 10.4
in."
This left section stiffness, 10.4, is less than the solid right section stiffness,11.7, as expected.
The composite Stiffness of the two 10 x 36 wall sections is
kcaaiPlOw36 =
10.4 h-'+ 11.7 h-'= 22.1 h.-'
therefore producing a relative deflection of
9-148

A C 1 T I T L E r M D G 93 M 0662749 0508845 Olt7 D

and
Calculations
~co!mplOx36
0.045 in.
22.1 in."
The method discussed in MDG 9.2.2 defines the net stiffness of the perforated wall as the
reciprocal of the solid wall cantilever deflection, minus the cantilever deflection of a solid
wall with same heightas thelargest opening, plusthe f i e d end deflection of the piers in the
opening strip. While this
net wall stiffness will not be used for proportioning the loads
within the wall in the TMS shopping Center, it would be used to obtain the load on the top
of the wall if the building had a rigid diaphragm. To illustrate how this quantity would be
determined, the required calculations are shown below.
'CO
'netpqforated 16 x 82 =
'c
An#parforcrrcd
0.062 in. - 0.037 in. + 0.045 in. = 0.070 in.
16 x 82 =
'CO,
10 x 36
therefore
This stiffness compares well to the solid wall stiffness of 16.3 in.".
The loads are proportionedto each wall section by the ratio of their relative stiffness to the
total stiffness of the section. Using MDG Eq. 9.2-1, the load carried by the left section is
9-149

93
Obb2949 0 5 0 6 8 4 b T 5 3
Example 9.3-11Cont'd.
Code Reference
Similarly, the load carried by the right section is
v*.
3 =
13,300 lb x
[i:::
7,030 lb
The load in the left section is distributed to piers 1 and 2 in proportion to their relative
stiffnesses to the total stiffness of the section. Therefore, the shearforce applied to the top
of pier 1 is
=
6,270 lb
14.4 in."
and the shear applied to the top of pier 2 is
Check
7,030
lb
+ 6,100
lb
+ 168
lb
= 13,300 lb
..
OK
It should be noted that pier 2 resists very little of the lateral load and could have been
neglected in the analysis with very little effect, while greatly simplifylng the analysis.
Further discussion and examples of shear wall load distribution are included in MDG 13.2.
9-150

A C 1 T I T L E j N D G 9 3 M 0662749 0508847 99T
Example 93-12 TMS ShoppingCenter
Distribution of Horizontal Load Within
Unreinforced Perforated Shear Walls

Determine the horizontal load distributionto the piers in the unreinforced perforated shear
wall on Grid Line 3 (East Wall) of the TMS Shopping Center for Wall ConstructionOption
k
The analysis will considertheexistingcontroljointswhich
are requiredin
the
unreinforced concrete block masonry wall.

The wall section under consideration 'is located on Grid Line 3, between Grid Lines A and
C. This wall has two door openings separated by a 2 ft - 8 in. pier of masonry. The figure
below shows the configuration of this wall, the expansion joints and the openings.
Control Joints
82 '
and
13,300 lb
Calculations
Since the loads in this example are relatively small and the wall is unreinforced, it is again
appropriate to use a linear elastic, uncracked section analysis for
horizontal shear loads.
9-151

the distribution of the
A C 1 TITLE*flDG
93 9 Ob62949 0508848 8 2 b

and
CaIcuIations
Discussion
Reference
Code
As before, the largest shear load of 13,300 lb, applied near the top of the wall on grid line
3, is produced by the wind loading.
It is assumed that the entire wall acts to resist the lateral loads even though the load is
applied at the diaphragm location, 2 ft below the top. There are five sections ofwall
separated by control joints. It is usually a good idea to assume that the control joints will
not transfer in-plane shear so that each section of the wall acts as an independent pier,
joined by the diaphragm. As shown in MDG Example 9.3-11, the small pier between the
two doors will resist very little of the wall shear. Thus, the section with openings can be
ignored with little effect on the analysis. Therefore, four piers resist the in-plane load. The
loadcan
be distributed toeach
pier in proportionto itsrelative
stiffness. The total
cantilever deflection of the wall can be calculated using MDG Eq. 9.2-3
Since all walls have equal thickness and only relative stiffness is required, assume
pl - 1 in.
"-
Emt
10
The deflection at the top of the 14 ft-8 in.wide piers, Aclox

'c
18 x 14-8
[(
-1
10 i n . 4 -
l:fir
+ 3(%)]
9-152

is
= 1.11 in.
93 W 0 b b 2 9 4 9 0508849 7 6 2 W

and
Calculations
This produces a stiffness, ki

k18 x
1
A
0.90 in."
- 1.11 in.
Similarly the deflection of the two 17 ft-8 in. piers is

'c
18 x 17-8
I rif:yl
in. 4 (1
10
0.73 in.
Therefore
-
k18 x 17-8
- 0.73 in.
1.37 in.-'
The total stiffness of the wall system is
ktotol = 2 x 1.37 in." + 2 x 0.90 in."

The total load of 13,300 lb can be
4.55 in.-'
distributed to the piers by the ratio of pier stiffness to
total wall stiffness as summarized in the table below.
Piers
Pier Stiff., kPb
kpuAotai
1
2
5
0.90
0.90
1.37
1.37
0.20
0.20
0.30
O. 30
2,660
2,660
3,990
3,990
Total
4.5 5
1.00
13,300
9-153

Pier Shear (lb)
93
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0508850 484 D
10
MOVEMENTS
10.1 CAUSESANDCONSEQUENCES OF MOVEMENTS

Wallmovements are caused by volumetricchange and support deflection. All building
materials are subject to volumetric changeas a resultof internally generated strains, external
forces, and material
properties.
Different
materials
have
different volume
change
characteristics. Restraint of movements, either by adjacentdissimilarmaterials
or by
external supports, causes stress which can result in cracks.

Cracks can be prevented by reducing volume change, and by accommodating differential
movement between different materials and between different parts of the same material
(10.1.1). By estimating the magnitudes of the different movementswhichmayoccurin
masonry,itispossible
to rationallydesign
a system of movement joints and flexible
anchorage to eliminate or greatly reduce cracks and the problems they cause (10.1.2).
10.2DETERMINATION
OF STRUCTURAL MOVEMENTS
10.2.1ProbabilisticConcepts
Because volume changes
are highly variable, precise deterministic prediction
of building
movements is not possible. However, they can be described statistically in terms of mean
10-1

93
Obb2949 050885L 310
values and standard deviations, which are measures of variability. This permits rational
selection of designvalues
(characteristic values)with
a specifiedprobability
of being
exceeded or not(10.2.1). The Code commentary discussesmaterial properties andprovides

the source of the Code material property values and indicates whether they are mean or
maximum values.
10.2.2Short-TermMovementsDue
to External Forces
Short-term movements due toexternal forces depend on the masonrys elastic modulus. See
MDG 3.4.2 and 3.4.7. Determination of structural movements based on theCode would use
the assumed values of modulus in Code Table 5.5.1.2 and Code Table 5.5.1.3.
10.23 Long-TermMovement of Masonry

Under sustained load, some materials exhibit creep (time dependent strain under
load). The
magnitude of creep in masonry and concrete depends on stress level, material age and
strength when loaded, duration of stress, material quality, and exposure conditions. Creep
in structural concrete isdiscussedin
the section onframe movement. Creep is often
described in terms of specific creep, i.e., additional strain per unit stress.
10.23.1
Creep of Brick Masonry
- About 80% of creep in brick masonry occurs
in the
mortar joints. Code 5.5.5.1 gives a specific creep value of kc = 0.7 x l t 7inJin. per psi which
is reasonable for brick masonry walls. Generally, creep is not a major design concern with
clay masonry (10.22).
10.23.2 Creep of Concrete Masonry - About 80% of creep in concrete masonry occurs in
concrete masonryunits. Code 5.5.5.2 gives a specific creep value of kc = 2.5 x
per psi,whichis
reasonable for concrete masonrywalls
lightweight aggregate.
10-2

in./in.
of both normal weight and
A C 1 T I T L E * N D G 93 W Obb2949 0508852 257 W
10.2.4ThermalMovement
Unrestrained materials subjected to temperaturechanges undergo thermal strains which are
the product of thetemperature
a coefficient of thermal expansion.
changetimes
Computation of these thermal movements therefore requires estimates of the temperature

change and of the coefficient of thermal expansions.
10.2.4.1 Temperature Change

masonrysubjected
in Exterior Walls
- The maximum surface temperature of
to solar radiation iswellabove
theairtemperature.
The upper
characteristic value in mean wall temperature rise is about 100' F, a common design value
used in evaluating wall temperature movement. For more precise determination of such
movements, temperature based on specific localities shouldbe used (10.2.3).
10.2.4.2 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion - For masonry and other materials the mean
coefficient of thermal expansion, the standarddeviation, and the upper characteristic value
are given in" D G Table 10.2.1. The coefficient of thermal expansion for clay masonry given
in Code 5.5.2.1 is 4 x 10-6 inJin. deg F. There is about one chance in six that this value for
clay brick masonry will be exceeded. The coefficient of thermal expansion for concrete
masonry,givenin
Code 5.5.2.2 as 4.5 x N P inJin.deg F, may be compared with the
characteristicvalues for concrete masonry withdifferent types of aggregate asgiven inMDG

Table 10.2.1.
10.2.5 Moisture Movements

10.2.5.1 Brick - Unlike mostmaterials, ceramics exhibit irreversible
moisture expansion (net
long-term growth). As indicated in
0.051%, orabout 3/16in.in
MDG Table 10.2.2, the upper characteristic value is
30 ft. The BTA recommends the value of 0.05% when
calculating maximum differential movement in brick walls in structural frames. There is

about one chance in six that the value in Code 5.5.3, kc = 3 x 1 P in./in., will be exceeded.
10-3

AC1
TITLE*MDG 93 m Obb29Y9 0508853 193 m
A test method is in general use for measuring brick moisture expansion(10.2.4), but it has
not been adopted by ASTM.
10.2.5.2
Mortar - Cementitious materials undergo time-dependent shrinkage due to drying
and carbonation. Such shrinkage depends on cement fineness, aggregate type, water
content, mix proportions, presence of chemical admixture, member size and shape, and
curing conditions. Drying shrinkage is partially reversible.
Carbonation shrinkage, which
is the result of the reaction of portland cement paste with carbon dioxide and moisture in
the air, is irreversible. The ultimate (23-year) shrinkage of mortar in contact with masonry
units is estimated at 1260 x 106 inJin. with a standard deviation of 600 x 106in./in. The 28day shrinkage is about half that value. Mortar shrinkage is increased by increase in water
content, sand fineness, air-entrainment, and calcium chloride.
10.2.53
S,
Concrete Masonry
The total linear drying shrinkage of concrete masonry units,
(determined in accordance withASTM
C 426),varieswith
the units method of
manufacture and type of aggregate. The mean is about 330 x 1W in./in. with a standard
deviation of about 140 x 106 inJin. Values for unrestrained shrinkage of concrete masonry
are given in MDG Table 10.2.3.
Horizontal joint reinforcement and friction at the wall foundation reduce shrinkage of the
wall. Code 5.5.4 requires a design value for wall shrinkage of 0.15 S, for moisture controlled
CMU and 0.5 S, for non-moisture controlled CMU. Moisture controlled units must be kept
dry at the job site.
10.2.6
Freezing Expansion
The Code does not now address the freezing expansion of masonry. When water freezes,
its volume increases about 9%. Three investigators (10.2.6, 10.2.7, 10.2.8) have
measured
residual expansion insaturated clay brick after a few freeze-thaw cycles. Measurements on
71 specimens gave a mean expansion of about 0.012% with a standard deviation of 0.01%.
10-4

AC
T I1T L E * M D G
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0 5 0 8 8 5 4 02T
93
The characteristic valuewas 0.028% or about 3/32 in. in 30 ft. No published data are
available for the freezing expansion of mortar or of concrete masonry units.
10.2.7Restraint
of Masonry
Horizontal contraction or expansion of masonry walls isgreater at the top than at the base,
where it is restrained by bond or friction withsupports. Coefficients of friction betweenwall
and base as suggested by the author are given in MDG Table 10.2.4. Masonry is typically
anchored to a structuralframe
movement.However,
by connectors which offer little restraintto
vertical
horizontal differential movement between the wall and frame is
restrained, first by bond and then by friction with the supporting structure. Coefficient of
friction is influenced by support material, presence of mortar at interface, surface coatings
on supports, type and location
of flashing(10.2.9,10.2.10).
Horizontal differential strain
between brick masonry and a concrete frame is virtually always sufficient to rupture the
bond between masonry and concrete. Accordingly,frictionoffers
further strain. Restraint istypicallycaused
byrigid
the onlyresistance to
connectors, by improperlyplaced,
designed, or built expansion joints, or by the complete absence of such joints.
103 STRUCTURAL MOVEMENT

103.1 FrameMovement
10.3.1.1ConcreteColumnShortening
The shortening of normal weight reinforced
concrete columns due to elastic deformation, shrinkage, and creep is estimated to have a
mean of 0.1% with a standard deviation of 0.05%, i.e., about 1/8 in. in 10 ft.
103.1.2 Steel Column Shortening - The shortening of typical steel columns due to elastic
strain at service load is estimated to be 0.06%with a standard deviation of 0.006%.
103.13
Sidesway - The Code does not address relative lateral deflection. The literature
10-5

93
Obb2949 0508855 Tbb W
suggests limiting this movement to one 1/10oO(0.1%) of the wall height not to exceed 0.15
in. (10.3.1).
The National Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program has set limits of story
drift from 0.01h to 0.0%. Sidesway is not a problem in shear wall buildings. However, in
infilled frame structures, the frame movement must be examined.
103.2 Deflections of HorizontalMembers

103.2.1 Beam Deflection - When walls are built tightly under floors or beam soffits, vertical
deflection of those flexural members will place a vertical compressive load on the wall.
Underthe
rightcircumstances
that load may accumulate through successivefloors
to
produce very high compressive stress in walls not necessarily designed as bearing elements.
Obviously, expansion joints are required between nonbearing walls and overlying flexural
members. Code 5.6 limits deflectionof beams and lintels supporting non reinforced masonry
to 1/600 or 0.3 in. for dead loadplusliveload.This
Code provision does not apply to
supported reinforced masonry elements.
10.3.2.2 Shelf Angle Deflection
- The horizontal leg of a shelf angle supporting masonry on
a structural frame,will deflect due to bending overthe span between anchor bolts, torsional
rotation, and bending of the cantilevered horizontal leg (10.3.2). Inadequate shimming of
shelf angles permits additional deflection due to rotation of the angle. If these deflections
are not accommodated, the toeof the horizontal legwill place a concentrated line load near
the face of the underlying masonry below the angle, possibly causing spalling.
1 0 3 3 FoundationMovement
Soils, like all materials, deform under load. While uniform, limited
foundation settlement
is not objectionable, excessive differential foundation movements can cause problems.

Differential foundation movements are usually caused by volume changes inthe underlying
soils. Foundations can also be lifted due to frost heave in frozen soils and swelling of clay.
10-6

A C 1T I T L E * P l D G
93
0 6 6 2 9 Y 9 0508856 7 T 2
103.4 Slab Movement
If a concrete slab is cool and/or dry on top and warm and/or moist on the bottom, the top
contracts relative to the bottom, causing the slab to curl upward. Because
the diagonal
dimension in plan is longer than the sides, the comers tend to curl upward more than the
sides. If a 4-in. thick, 15-ft square concrete slab has a strain gradient of 0.03% through its
thickness, the unrestrained comers will rise about 5/8 in. If the slab is bolted tightly to a
masonry loadbearing wall, the uplift may cause the masonry comers to crack.
103.5 DifferentialStructuralMovement
103.5.1
NonloadbearingWalls
- For masonry
supported on a structural frame the net
masonry expansive strain is added to the net frame contraction to give the total differential
strain. The Code does not specifically address the net differential strain between masonry
walls and frame systems, althoughit does provide movement coefficientsfor design purposes.
MDG Table 10.3.1 tabulates estimated differential verticalstrain between masonry wallsand
steel or concrete structural frames (10.3.2).
103.5.2 Loadbearing Walls - When brick masonry and concrete masonry wythes are used
in a composite loadbearing wall with a filled collar joint, expansion of brick masonry and
contraction of concrete masonry shifts mostof the load to thebrick masonry (10.3.3,10.3.4).
Shear stress in the collar joint typically exceeds 80% of the ultimate shear strength, and
vertical steel reinforcement is required to control tensile stress (10.3.4,10.3.5, 10.3.6,10.3.7).
103.53 LoadbearingMonloadbearing Wall Intersection
- Masonry loadbearing walls are
subject to elastic deformation, temperature, shrinkage, and creep. Nonloadbearing walls of

concrete masonry are subject only to shrinkage and temperature deformation. The vertical
joint between a loadbearing and a nonloadbearing wall is, therefore, subject to considerable
shear which should be considered in light of Code 6.5.2.
10-7

Obb29Y9 0500057 839
If lateral support of a wall is not required at an intersection, a control joint may be located
at the intersection. Otherwise, the walls must be bonded in accordance with Code 5.13.4.2.
10.4ACCOMMODATION
10.4.1Design
OF MOVEMENTS
of MovementJoints
Three types of movement joints are used for crack control in masonry: 1) control joints
which open to accommodate shrinkage of concrete masonry; 2) expansionjoints which close
to accommodate expansion of brick or stone masonry; and 3) construction joints to seal the
crack between masonry and other materials, such as beams, columns, windows, and doors.
10.4.1.1
- Joint
Sealants UsedinMovementJoints
strain capacities ranging from 25% to 50%. Use
sealants typicallyhavecompressive
of sealants with greater strain capacity
permits the use of thinner joints for the same anticipated joint movement. Sealants are
available in several colors and finish to match the appearanceof mortar joints. Sealant joints
in walls designedfor fire resistance should be designed as fire stops. The water permeance
integrity of a facade often depends heavilyonsuch
sealant, whichhave
a mean life
expectancy of seven years.
10.4.1.2 Control
Joints - The maximum horizontal spacing between vertical control joints
in concrete masonry walls is determined by: 1) the local average annual relative humidity;
2) the type of CMU (ASTM C 90, moisture controlled or non-moisture controlled); 3) the
vertical spacing of bed joint reinforcement; and 4) exposure conditions. MDG Table 10.4.1
gives suggested spacingsfor control joints based on thosefour criteria (10.4.1). Additionally,
control joints in concrete masonry should be placed at the following positions:
l. At all abrupt changes in wall height

2. At all changes in wall thickness, such
as those at pipe and duct chases and those
adjacent to columns or pilasters
3. Above joints in foundations and floors

10-8

A C 1 TITLE*UDG
93
O662949 0508858 775
4. Below joints in roofs and floors that bear in the wall
5. At a distance not over one-halfthe allowable joint spacing frombonded intersections

or corners
6. At the end of a lintel on one side of wall openings six feet or less in width and at
both sides of wall openings more than six feet wide unless bond beams or equivalent
joint reinforcement is placed at top ofwindows and doors and at the bottom
of
windows. One lintel bearing should be built to slide on a slip plane.

Control joints for concrete masonry as shown in Fig. 10.4-1 are typically 3/8 in. wide, and
should be spaced at horizontal intervals as givenin MDG Table 10.4.1. Half-inch wide
control joints separate CMU walls and concrete columns to accommodate sidesway of the
frame (See Fig. 10.4-2).
Special Control Joint CMU7
Building
Paper
Backer
Rod And
Sealant
G r o u t or
Mortar
Fig. 10.4-1 Control Joints for Concrete Masonry
The bed joint reinforcement referredto in MDG Table 10.4.1 normally consists of two No.
9 colddrawn steel wires, one in each face shell bed. Bed
joint reinforcement may be
replaced by bond beams reinforced with two No. 4 continuous reinforcingrods in 8 in. wide
bond beams and two No. 5 bars in 10 in. or 12 in. wide bond beams. Bond beams, if used,
should be spaced at most four times the required vertical spacing of joint reinforcement.
10-9

A C 1 TITLErMDG 93
m Obb2949
Expansion
Joint
Wire Anchor
0508859 601
,-
p i r e Anchor
Masonry
2" Min.
MU Cell
routed
t Anchor
1/2" Control Joint
Dove Tail Slot
Fig. 10.4-2 Flexible Wall Anchorage to Concrete Columns

When bond beams are used, they should be placed at the top and the base of walls, and
below windows. Fig. 10.4-3 provides approximate average annual relative humidities in the
United States, but local weather records will provide better data.
AMRH > 75%

O 7558 > AMRH > 50%
II AMRH c 50%
Fig. 10.4-3 AnnualMeanRelativeHumidity
10-10

(AMRH), 96
A C 1T I T L E v M D G
9 3 W Obb291)9 05088b0 3 2 3 W
10.4.13 Expansion Joints - Vertical expansionjoints are not required in concrete masonry
walls, because initial drying shrinkage usually exceeds thermal expansion.

Clay brick masonry walls expand both horizontally and vertically. Allowable movement in
an expansion joint in clay brick isthe product of joint thickness and allowable sealant strain.
For a 3/4 to 1 in. wide expansion joint with a sealant extensibility of 50%, the allowable joint
movement is 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. Allowable joint movement divided by anticipated masonry
strain equals maximum joint spacing.
Vertical expansion joints should be placed in brick masonry at the following locations:
1. At approximately 25 ft intervals in enclosure walls

2. At approximately 12 ft intervals in parapet and fences
3. At offsets, junctions, and
corners such as those at pipe and duct chases and those
adjacent to columns or pilasters
4. Above joints in foundations and floors

5. Below joints in roofs and floors that bear in the wall
6. At a distance not over one-halfthe allowable joint spacing frombonded intersections

or corners.
In addition, a horizontal expansion (softjoint) joint should be placed at the top of masonry
walls infilled in a structural frame between the spandrel beam soffit and the wall. When
masonry walls are support on shelf angles, a horizontal expansion joint should be placed
immediately below the shelf angle. The thickness of horizontal expansion joints may be
determined by the anticipated deflection of the spandrel beam and
shelf angle and the
characteristic value for differential movement given in MDG Table 10.3.1. See Figs. 10.4-4
and 10.4-5.
10-11

A C 1 TITLErMDG 9 3
Ob62949 05OBBbL 2bT
Fig. 10.4-4 Horizontal ExpansionJoint
Concrete
Spandrel
Beam
Clip Angle
Movement Joint
Masonry Wall
Fig. 10.4-5 Expansion Joint Between Interior Partition and Beam Soffit
The required movement in an expansion joint under a shelfangleis
the s u m of the
differential movement between wall and frame, the long-term spandrel deflection, and the
shelf angle deflection. Design
of sealant joints under shelf angles is discussed in MDG
10.3.2.
10-12

AC1
TITLExMDG 9 3 M Obb2949 05088b2 1Tb
10.4.1.4ConstructionJoints
- Differentialmovement
between masonry and adjacent
materials is accommodatedby construction joints. Where masonry is anchored to structural

frames, flexible anchorage should be provided to accommodate wall expansion, beam
deflection, column sidesway, and column contraction.
10.4.1.4.1 WalVColumn Joints - Masonry walls infilledin structural frames may be designed
as shearwalls to provide lateral support forthe structure, eliminating the need for moment
resistant frame connections or frame bracing. To avoid loading masonry infillnot designed
for shear,construction joints provide clearance between wall and frame asillustrated in Figs.
10.4-2 and 10.4-6. Because 2 inches is the narrowest cavity width a mason can be expected
to keep clean of mortar droppings, masonry should haveat least a 2 in. clearance from the
column face.
Movement Joint
Steel Column
L #2 Bar Welded To Column
Fig. 10.4-6 Flexible Wall Anchorage
To Steel Column
10.4.1.4.2 Wall/Floor Joints - Roofs and walls expand and contract, frequently in opposite
directions. To avoidmasonrycracks,
break the bond between roofs and walls. If roof
anchorage is essential, provide flexible anchorage. The detail shown in Fig. 10.4-7 provides
such flexible anchorage.
10-13

Notched Slab
Roof Slab
Sealant Joint
Fig. 10.4-7 Wall/Roof Anchor
REF'ERENCES
10.1.1
Grimm, C. T., "Masonry Cracks:A Review of the Literature," Masonry: Materials,
%
STP 992, American Societyfor Testing and
Materials, Philadelphia, PA, 1988, pp. 257-280.
10.1.2
Grimm, C T., "Water Permeance of Masonry Walls: A Review of the Literature,"

Masonry: Materials. Properties. and Performance, STP 778, American Societyfor
Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA, 1982, pp. 178-199.
10.2.1
Grimm, C T., 'Statistical Primer for Brick Masonry," Masonrv. Materials. Desirm,
STP 992, AmericanSociety for Testing and

Materials, Philadelphia, PA, 1988, pp. 169-192.
10.2.2
Lenczner, D., "Design of Brick Masonry for Elastic and Creep Movements," 2nd
Canadian Masonry Symposium,Carlton University, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada, June
9, 1980.
10.2.3
Grimm, C. T., ''Thermal Strain in Brick Masonry," 2nd North American Masonry
Conference. University of Maryland, College Park, MD, August 1982, p. 34.

10-14

A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 93 D 0662747 O508864 T 7 9 W
10.2.4
Baker, L. R. and E. L Jessop,"MoistureMovements
in ClayBrickwork
Review," International Journal of Masonrv Construction, British Masonry Society,

Stoke-on-Trent, England, Vol. 2, No. 3, 1982.
10.2.5
Russell, WilliamA. Shrinkage Characteristicsof Concrete Masonry Walls, Housing

and Home Finance Agency, Housing Research Paper No. 34, Supt. of Doc., U.S.
Govt. Printing Office, Washington D.C., April 1954, p. 23.
10.26
"Bricks,"ReDortof
the Tests of Metals and Other Materials for Industrial
Purnoses, Watertown Arsenal, Watertown, MA, June 30, 1896, pp. 344-372.
10.2.7
Davidson, J. I., "LinearExpansion Due to Freezing and Other Properties of

Bricks,"2nd
Canadian MasonrvSymposium,
Carlton Univ., Ottawa, Ontario,
Canada, June, 1980, pp. 13 -24.
10.2.8
Palmer, L A., "Volume Changesin Brick Masonry Materials,"Journal of Research,

National Bureau of Standards, Washington, D. C., June 1931, pp. 1003 - 1026.
10.2.9
McGinley, W.M., and J. G. Borchelt, "Friction at Supports of Clay Brick Walls,"

Proceedings of 5th North American Masonrv Conference, University of Illinois,
Urbana-Champaign, June 3-6, 1990, pp. 1053-1066.
10.2.10 McGinley, W.M., and J. G. Borchelt, "Friction Between Brick and Its Supports,"
Proceedings of 5th Canadian Masonrv SvmDosium, University of British Columbia,
Vancouver, B.C., June 1989, pp. 713-722.
10.3.1
"Structural Serviceability: A Critical Appraisal and Research Needs," Journal of

Structural Engineering, American Societyof Civil Engineers, New York, NY, Vol.
112, No. 12, December 1986, p. 2649.

10.3.2
Grimm, C. T. and J. A. Yura, "ShelfAngles for Masonry Veneer," Journal of

Structural Engineering, American Societyof Civil Engineers, New York, NY, Vol.
115, No. 3, March 1989, pp. 509-525.

10.3.3
Yi, F. L. and R. L Carrisquillo: "A Studyof the ThermalBehavior of Brick Under

ServiceConditions,"Masonrv.Research.ADDlications.
and Problems, STP 871,
American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA, 1985, pp. 101-119.
10.3.4
Anand, S. C. and M. A. Rahman, "Temperature and CreepStresses in Composite

Masonry Walls," Advances in Analvsis of Structural Masonry, American Societyof
10-15

AC1
TITLE*HDG 93 m Ob629490508865905
Civil Engineers, New York, N Y , 1986, pp. 94.
10.3.5
McCarthy, J. A., R. H. Brown, and Cousins, T. E., "An Experimental Study of the
Shear Strength of Collar Joints in Grouted Slushed Composite Masonry Walls,"
Proceedings of the Third North American Masonry Conference, University of
Texas, Arlington, TX, June 1985, pp. 39-1 through 39-16.
10.3.6
Williams, R., and L Geschwinder, "ShearStress Across Collar Joints in Composite

Masonry," presented at Proceedings.Second
Canadian MasonrySymposium,
Carleton University, Ottawa, Canada, June 1980.
10.3.7
Colville, J., S. k Matty, and k M. Wolde-Tinsae, "Shear Capacity of Mortared

Collar Joints," Proceedings of the Fourth North American Masonry Conference,
University of California, Los Angeles, CA, Vol. 2, August 1987, pp. 60-1 through
60-15.
10.4.1
Masonry Structural Desipn for Buildings, Army TM 5-809-3, Departments of the

Army,Navy,
and Air Force, August, 1982, pages 3-1 ff, National Technical
Information Services 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield VA 22161.
10-16

Table 10.2.1
93
0662949 0508866 441 W
EstimatedCoefficients of ThermalExpansion
inJin./ x lod deg F
Mean
Standard Deviation
Characteristic Value (a)
1 Brick
3.2
0.8
4. S
Mortar
5.4
1.1
7.2
Brick Masonry
3.9
1.0
5.6
Material
Ja
Concrete
4
Quartz
6.6
O. 6
7.6
Sandstone
6.5
1.2
as
Gravel
6.O
0.6
7.0
Granite
5.3
1.4
7.6
Basalt
4.8
0.5
5.6
Limestone
3.8
1.5
6.3
Concrete Masonry
10
Dense Aggregate
5.2
O. 3
5.7
11
Cinders
3.1
O. 6
4.0
12
Expanded Shale
4.3
O. 6
5.2
13
Ewpanded Slag
4.6
1.1
6.3
14
Pumice
4.1
0.3
4.5
Stone
15
Sandstone
5.4
1.0
7.0
16
Marble
4.2
0.8
5.5
17
Granite
4.4
1.2
6.4
18
Basalt
3.1
O. 9
4.6
14
Limestone
4.2
1.5
6.7
u:
Slate
5.0
1.1
6.8
Steel
21
Mild
6.5
"_
2;
Stainless
9.9
"_
"_
"_
21
O. 3
26
Wood
Plaster
2r
Perlite
4.3 - 6.1
ND
ND
2!
Vermiculite
5.5
- 6.2
ND
ND
24
Gypsum
6.5
- 8.6
ND
ND
(a) 95% probability of not

being
exceeded
ND - No data
available
Source:
10-17

C T. Grimm
A C 1 TITLE+MDG 93 W 0662949 0508867 788 W
Table10.2.2EstimatedMoistureMovement,
Reversible Moisture Movement

Mean
Clay Brick
Characteristic
Standard
Deviation
Irreversible Moisture Movement

Standard
Characteristic
Mean
Deviation
Value
Value
0.0200
ND
ND
+ 0.020
0.W
+ 0.051
Concrete
2
Gravel
0.04oO
0.01u)
0.060
- 0.060
0.015
- 0.085
Stone
Crushed
0.0700
0.0210
0.105
- 0.060
0.015
- 0.085
Limestone
0.0250
0.0030
0.030
- 0.035
0.003
- 0.040
Light Weight
0.0450
O. o090
0.060
- 0.060
0.018
- 0.090
Concrete Masonry
6
Sand & Gravel
O.Oo80
0.0010
0.010
- 0.023
0.003
Expanded
Shale
0.0100
0.0030
0.015
- 0.031
0.009
- 0.028
- 0.046
O.Oo90
0.0010
0.011
- 0.027
0.004
- 0.034

8
Sand & Gravel
Light Weight
10
Sand Lime
Stone
13
Granite
14
Limestone
15
Marble
16
Sandstone
ND - No dataavailable
Source: C T. Grimm
Table 10.23 EstimatedUnrestrainedShrinkage of Low-PressureSteam-CuredConcrete

Masonry (10.2.5)
III
Cinders
425
Expanded Slag
340
I
hoanded Shale
I
10-18

310
Ob62949 0508868 b L 4
Table 10.2.4 Coefficient of Friction(Dimensionless)*
Source: C. T. Grimm
10-19

93
m 0662947
0508869 550
Table 103.1 Estimated Differential Vertical Strain Between Masonry Walls and
Structural
Frames, 10" i n . / h a
Upper
Standard
No.
Mean
Wall Material
Deviation
Characteristicb
Value
Concrete Frame
I'
Brick
1,150
1,750
Dense Aggregate
908
CMUc
Lt. Wt. Aggregate CMU
Granite, limestone, or marble

1,100
Sandstone
741
1,850
I
532
2,070
513
I
I
1,940
623
2,880
517
1,590
Steel Frame
Brick
Dense Aggregate CMU
Aggregate
Lt.Wt.
CMU
290 565
182
Granite, limestone, or marble
10
Sandstone
1,880
123
424
488
171
1,230
392
aExclusive of beam and shelf angle deflection

b5% probability of being exceeded
'Low pressure steam cured

Source: (10.3.2)
10-20

167
769
Masonry Walls, Ft
Average
Annual
Relative
Humidtity
Wall Location
Less Than
50%
Exterior
Vertical
Spacing of
Bed Joint
Reinforcement,
inches
Interior
Between 50
and 75%
Exterior
Interior
Greater Than
75 %
Exterior
II
Non-moisture Moisture
Controlled Controlled
12 6
18
24
None
16
8
16.5
24
31.6 19
9
14
18
24
30 20
12
16
*
None
16
22.5
30
37.6
24 18
30
36
28.5
36 26
43.6
Interior
Source: (10.4.1)
10-21

None
16
8
None
16
8
Type of CMU, ASTM C 90
10
14
15
20
25
22
26
21
31
93 W 0662949 0508873 307
Example 10.4-1 T M S Shopping Center Vertical Control Joint Location

Determine the control joint
locations in the TMS Shopping Center for theconcrete masonry
exterior and interior walls for Wall Construction Option A (unreinforced).
and
Calculations
Discussion
Reference
Code
This example illustrates the application of the recommended material properties found in
Code 5.5 in comparison to the author's recommendations found in MDG Table 10.4.1,
'Maximum Horizontal Spacing of Vertical Control Joints in Concrete Masonry Walls", for
determination of location of vertical control joints.
For the TMS Shopping Center the exterior and interior walls are constructed of concrete
masonry with assumedC 90 Type I units. The building is assumed to be in a region having,
an average annual relative humidity between 50% and 75%. Bed joint reinforcement is
assumed to be placed at 16 in. vertically.
Code Considerations
For Concrete Masonry
k, = 4.5 x 10" in./in. per deg F

Assume AT = 100 deg F for exterior wall
R,,,
= 0.15
sl
5.5.2.2
5.5.4.1
Assume total linear drying shrinkage of CMU is 0.00065 inJin.

Temperature strain deformation
100 x 4.5 x 10" = 0.00045 inJin.
Shrinkage strain deformation
0.15 x 0.00065 = 0.0000975 in./in.
The Code does not provide means for direct consideration of relative humidity and
reinforcement.
10-22

AC1
TITLExMDG 93
Obb29Y9 0508872 045
Code Reference
Total Strain = 0.000548 inJin.

Assume 3/8 in. joint & sealant extensibility of 50%
Joint spacing
3/16
= 342 in. = 28.5 ft
0.000548
Assuming AT = 40 deg F for interior wall, joint spacing
55 ft.
Authors Recommendation
MDG Table 10.4.1 indicates a maximum horizontal spacing between vertical control joints
of 24 ft for exterior walls and 30 ft for interior walls. The author considers a deviation of
10% as acceptable to meet practical project conditions.
The actual control joints for theexterior walls are indicated in the elevation drawings in Fig.
9.1-2. The control joint locations in the North, East and West exterior wall satisfy the
computed (28.5 ft) andsuggested (24ft) maximum spacing. For the Northexterior walls the
26 ft control joint spacing is within the authors acceptable 10% deviation range.
The interiorwall control joint locations are indicated in theT M S plan drawings in Fig. 9.1-1.
The actualcontrol joint spacing of 26 ft-8 in.and 27 ft-4 in.are less than the computed (55
ft) and suggested (30 ft) maximum spacing.
10-23

A C 1T I T L E s M D G
93
0bb2949 0508873 T 8 1
Example 10.4-2 RCJ Hotel Vertical Expansion Joint Size and Spacing Design
Determine theexpansion joint locations inthe RCJ Hotel forOption A (unreinforced) using
Building Construction Option II (short dimensions). The exterior wall is a brickblock
noncomposite (cavity) wall with the exterior brick wythe being non-loadbearing.
and
Calculations
The RCJ Hotel plan dimensions are shown in Figs. 9.1-6 and 9.1-7. The locations of the
brick exterior wythe expansion joints are determined as follows:
Clay brick masonry exterior wythe:
Thermal expansion:Assume
at 40 deg F and
wallbuilt
maximumservice
mean temperature of
140 deg F. Thus the temperature rise is

100 deg F. From the Code the coefficient
of thermal expansion, k,, is 4 x 10" inJin.deg F.
5.5.2.1
Therefore, thermal expansion
strain is:
4 x 106 x 100 =
0.0004in./in.
0.0003 inJin.
Moisture expansion (kc):
in./in.
Subtotalmasonry
clay
expansion:
0.0007
Sealant joint:
Assumed width, 3/8 in.
0.375 in.
Sealant compressibility
50%
Therefore, maximum joint

movement: 0.5 x 0.375
0.188 in.
10-24

5.5.3
AC1
TITLExMDG 93 m 0662949 0508874 918 m
and
Calculations
Maximum joint spacing:
It is reasonable to exclude characteristic freezing expansion because it is unlikely that all

three expansions will be simultaneously at their high characteristic values.
Examining the RCJ Hotel floor plans in Fig. 9.1-6, and the exterior wall elevations in Fig.
9.1-11, the exterior brick wythe expansionjoint spacing of 14 ft - 8 in. is lessthan the 22 ft-4
in. maximum spacing.
10-25
i
AC1
TITLEaMDG 93 m Obb2949 0508875 854 m
Example 10.4-3 RCJ Hotel Differential Movement in BriclJBlock Exterior Wall

The unreinforced exterior wall on Grid Line B between Grids 1 and 2 is composed of a
noncomposite exterior brick wythe and an interior block wythe
(cavity wall), for Wall
Construction Option I. The block wythe is loadbearing. The exteriorbrick wythe is subject
to thermal, moisture, and freezing expansions. The interiorblock wythe is subject to elastic
deformation, shrinkage, and creep. To accommodate these differential movements an
expansion joint should be provided at the top of the exterior brick wythe. This example
estimates the magnitude of those differential movements and designs the necessary
expansion joint.
and
Code Reference
Calculations
Clay Brick Masonry Exterior Wythe:

wall built at 40 deg F and
Thermal expansion:
Assume
maximum service mean temperature of 140 deg F.

The temperature rise is 100 deg F
5.5.2.1
The coefficient of thermal expansion, k,,is
4 x 10" in./in.-deg F. Therefore, thermal expansion strain is:

4.x10" x loo =
0.0004 inJin.
Moisture expansion (kc):
0.0003 inJin.
Subtotal clay
masonry
expansion:
0.0007 inJin.
Total clay
masonry
height
Total clay
masonry
expansion
5.5.3
484 in.
0.339 in.
Freezing expansion is excluded because it is not covered
by the Code and because it is
unlikely that all three types of expansion will be simultaneously at their high value
10-26

Obb2949 0508876790

and
Calculations
Discussion
Reference
Code
Concrete Masonry Interior Wythe:

CMU elastic deformation:
From MDG Example 15.4-9 the compressive strength of the CMU is 4,500 psi,and
the CMU wythe is 10 in. nominal, fully grouted.
Mortar is ASTM C 270 Type S.
Elastic modulus of the concrete masonryis 3.05 x lo6 psi
FromMDG
Appendix A:
Table 5.5.1.3
Area = 115.5
in.2
Story Height Elastic Deformation (ED):
Wall
Load
Dead
Story
MDG 9.13.1
Wt.
inJin.
75
PIA
Stress,
psi
story
EDlstory
25
130
0.0033
Unit ED,
in.
P/!,
lo6,
Height
in.
1st
340
8,376
2nd
6,060
200
54
180.0021
116
3rd
3,742
130
34
11
116
0.0013
4th
1,425
60
13
116
0.0005
0.0072
Total wall elastic deformation
CMU Shrinkage
CMU are assumed to be Type II
(Non-moisture controlled).
Totallinear
0.00065inJin.
dryingshrinkage
of CMU isassumed
to be
The coefficient of shrinkage of non-moisture
controlled concrete masonry is 0.5 S,, in./in.

Shrinkage strain deformation:
10-27

5.5.4.2
AC1 TITLE*MDG 93 W 0662949 0508877 627 W

Reference
0.5 x 0.00065 =
0.000325
Wall height =
468 in.
Total shrinkage
Code
inJin.
0.15 in.
CMU Creep:
Creep strain in concrete masonry is:
lo-' inJin. - psi
2.5 x
5.5.5.2
Creep deformation (CD):
story
Stress,
psi
CD/story
in.
inJin.
Story
Height
in.
Unit CD,
10'
1st
75
25
130
0.0033
2nd
54
18
116
0.0021
3rd
34
11
116
0.0013
4th
13
116
-.""""""0.0005
Subtotal Creep
0.0072
0.0072
Subtotal concrete masonrycontraction:

Total differential movement = 0.339
+ 0.16 =
+ 0.15 + 0.0072 = 0.16 in.
0.50 in.
50%
Expansion joint sealant elasticity =

Total expansion joint thickness:
0.50/0.5
1.00 in.
A top of wall detail that accommodates this calculated differential movement is shown on
the next page.
10-28

AC1 TITLEjNDG
93
0662949 0508878 563

and
Calculations
10-29

A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93
0662949 0508879 4 T T
11
FLEXURE
11.0 INTRODUCTION
11.0.1 Organization of Chapter 11
The subject of Chapter 11is flexure. The chapter is divided into sections basedon the type
of structural element to be designed and whether the element is unreinforced or reinforced.
Walls are treated first, followed by pilasters, lintels and beams. The introduction describes
the general basis for the analysis, and developsthe flexural working stress design equations.
11.0.2 Flexural MasonryDesign
Unreinforcedmasonrydesign
is based on allowingtensionin
masonry design is based on design neglecting tensile strength
the masonry.Reinforced
of masonry and relying on
reinforcement to resist tension. Assumptions common to both are as follows:

1.
Planesections before bendingremainplane
2.
Masonrycomponents(units,mortar,etc.)combine
member.
3.
Stress is proportional to strain.
11-1

after bending.
to formahomogeneous
AC1
TITLE*MDG 93 W Ob62949 0508880 111
11.03 Direction of Flexure

It is useful to classify flexure as either in-plane flexure (shear walls) or out-of-plane flexure
(flexure normal to the plane of the wall). In-plane flexure is a result of lateral forces on the
lateral load resisting system (shear walls). This flexure is often referred to as overturning
moment. Out-of-plane flexure is a result of forces applied perpendicular to the surface of
the wall, such as wind loading or seismic inertia loading.
In-Plane
Out-of -Plane
Fig. 11.0-1 WallLoading

For in-plane flexure, the width used in design is the thickness of the wall, and the depth is
approximately the length of the wall. For out-of-plane flexure, the design width is the length
of the wall, and the design depth is all or part of the wall thickness.
11-2

A C 1 TITLEaMDG 93
Ob62949 0508883 058
11.0.4 Effects of BondingPattern

For unreinforced masonry design (design allowing tension in
the masonry), the tension
allowable stresses per Code 6.3.1.1 vary with the direction of the tensile stress. Allowable
tensile stresses are higherwhentensionisnormal
masonry.Thisincreaseis
to the head joints inrunningbond
due to the interlocking of the masonryunits,whichprovides
tensile strength comparable to the unit tensile strength, rather than the lower tensile bond
strength of the mortarunit interface. For stack bonded masonry the Code allowable tension
across the head joints is zero.
Other than theseexceptions,masonryisassumedisotropic.
Thus the design and the
allowable stresses are assumed independent of the unit orientation and pattern.
11.0.5Flexure:WorkingStressDesign
Fig.11.0-2
presentscommonlyusedsymbols
for flexuralanalysis.Masonrywidthis
designated by the letter b. The depth to the centroid of the reinforcing steel is designated
by the letter d. Location of the neutral axis from the compression face is designated
kd,
where k is the ratio of the distance from the extreme compression fiber to the neutral axis
location divided by the depth d.
Fig. 11.0-2 Flexure-Tensile Reinforcement Only

11-3

Ob62949 O508882 T 9 4
The first assumption from MDG 11.0.2, results in the following equation:
-- Y
E,
Eq. 11.0-1
where G is the strain in the masonry at a distance y from the neutral axis and R is the
radius of curvature of the flexural element. The relationship between the curvature and the
applied moment can be expressed by the following:
"1 - M
R
Eq. 11.0-2
E,I
Where E,,, is the modulus of elasticity of the masonry and I is the second moment of the
bending area or moment of inertia. Substitution of Eq. 11.0-2 into Eq. 11.0-1 results in the
following:
Eq. 11.0-3
Using the assumption, that stress is proportional to strain, or:
The stress in the masonry may be determined as:

fb =
11.0.5.1
MY
7
UnreinforcedMasonry
Eq. 11.0-5
For unreinforcedmasonry,
W.11.0-5isused
to
determine the allowable moment as limited by the allowable tensile stress in the masonry.
Usually the allowable tensile stress controls. However, when axial load acts simultaneously
with flexure, the allowable compression stress may control as discussed in MDG 12.2.
11.0.5.2
ReinforcedMasonry
- The commonbasicassumptions
of the working stress
method for flexural designof unreinforced and reinforced masonry werepresented in MDG
11.0.2. Additional assumptions pertaining only to reinforced masonry include:
1.
Modulus of elasticity of the reinforcement remains constant throughout the

11-4

A C 1 TITLE*llDG
93
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0508883 920
working load range.

2.
Tensileforces
are resisted onlyby
the tensilereinforcement.
strength of the masonryunits,mortar,
The tensile
and grout isneglectedinflexure
analysis and design.
3.
Reinforcement is completely surrounded by and bonded to masonry material,

and full composite action between the two materials is assumed.
For reinforced masonry design tension is resisted by reinforcement. The tensile strength of
masonry is neglected. Thus, the masonry is assumed cracked from the tension edge of the
masonry to the neutral axis. The neutral axis is located a distance kd from the extreme
compression fiber.
The depth of the section "d" is now defined as the distance from the
extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the tensile force in the reinforcement. Using
assumption 1 in MDG 11.0.2 and thesimilartrianglesin
Fig.11.0-2, the strain in the
masonry and reinforcement are related as follows:

E s . 11.0-6
where
E,,,
is the maximummasonrycompressive
strain and
is the steel tensionstrain.
When the applied external loading is only bending, the compression force in the masonry
equals the tension force in the reinforcement. Summing forces on the section illustrated in
Fig. 11.0-2 results in the following equation:
Eq. 11.0-7
where
fs
is the stress in the reinforcement and A, is the reinforcement steel area.
Substitution of Eq. 11.0-4 into Eq.ll.O-7 results in:

Eq. 11.0-8
Defining two new terms(the first is the reinforcement ratio, P, and thesecond is the modular
ratio, n ) as follows:
11-5

A C 1 TITLE*flDG
93
Obb2949 0508884 8 6 7
Eq. 11.0-9
and substituting into Eq. 11.0-8, results in the following:
Eq. 11.0-10
and using Eq. 11.0-6 results in:
k - 2nP
"
(1-R)
k
Eq. 11.0-11
which can be rearranged to:
k2
+ 2npk
- 2np
Eq. 11.0-12
solving the quadratic equation results in the following expressionfor k.
m -np
Eq. 11.0-13
Summing moments about the centroid of the tensile force results in an expression of the
allowable applied moment as limited by the allowable bending compression stress,Fb, in the
masonry.
Eq. 11.0-14
9.
Wherej= 1--
Summing moments about the centroid of the compression force results in an expression for
the allowable applied moment as limited by the allowable tensilestress in the reinforcement,
F,.
Mt = ASjdFs
Equations 11.0-9,11.0-13,11.0-14,
Eq. 11.0-15
and 11.0-15 provide the basis for flexuraldesign of
11-6

A C 1 TITLE*MDG 9 3
rectangular sectionswithtension
0662949 0 5 0 8 8 8 57 T 3
reinforcement only. Additional equations for pilasters
where the section may not be rectangular are developed in MDG 11.2.
Flexural elements may contain both compression steel andtension steel (doubly reinforced).
See Fig. 11.0-3. For the compression steel tobe considered for load carjing purposes, the
compression reinforcement must meet all the applicable requirements of Code 5.9.1.6. The
appropriate equations for doubly reinforced flexural elements are developed as for singly
reinforced flexuralelements. Summing forces alongthe length of the beam as shown in Fig.
11.0-3, results in:
ES. 11.0-16
where A', and
$'f
are the area of compression reinforcement and the stress in the
compression reinforcement, and f; is the stress in the masonry at the location of the
compression reinforcement. Notice that the compression reinforcement has replaixd
masonry and a corresponding force has been subtracted. Substitution of the stress-strain
equations of Eq. 11.0-4 results in:
Eq. 11.0-17
The centroid of the compression reinforcement is located a distance d' from the extreme
compression fiber as shown in Fig. 11.0-3.
Fig. 11.0-3 Flexure - Compression And Tension Reinforcement
11-7

A C 1 TITLE*MDG 9 3 W O b b 2 9 4 9 0 5 0 8 8 8 b b 3 T
By similar triangles:
Eq. 11.0-18
Where
E'# = E',,,
is the strain atthe centroid of the compression reinforcement. Substituting
Eq. 11.0-18 into Eq. 11.0-17 results in the following:

Eq. 11.0-19
Substitution of Eq. 11.0-9 and defining the compression steel ratioas p' = AIs/bd results in:
E,
- 2np
2np'
""ES
k
( - d'/d)
(1
- k)
2p' ( - d'/d)
k (1 - k)
Eq. 11.0-20
This equation can be rearranged to the quadratic form:

* + [2np+2(n-l)p']
- [2np+2(n -
l)p'dy4 =
Eq. 11.0-21
From which the following expression for k is obtained:
/ [ n p +(n - 1)p'l2 +[2np+2(n - l)p'd'/d) - [np + ( n - l ) p q
Eq. 11.0-22
As with the case of tension reinforcement only, once the location of the neutral axis is
known, expressions for moment as a function of allowable stress can be determined. By
summing moments about the centroid of the tension force an expression for moment as a
function of masonry compression allowable can be found.By summing moments about the
centroid of the compression force an expression for moment as a function of tension
reinforcement allowable canbe found. Unfortunately, the centroid of the compression force
is not as obvious in a doubly reinforced beam as in the previous singly reinforced beam
derivation.
Selecting the extreme compression f i k r as a reference location, the following equations for
the force in the masonry and the force in the compression reinforcement and their first
11-8

0662949 0508887 576
moment about the reference location are obtained
(force) ( u m )
The compression force in the masonry and corresponding arm are:
Eq. 11.0-23
Eq. 11.0-24
The compression force in the reinforcement(subtracting the area of masonry displaced by
the reinforcement) and corresponding arm are:
(A'+?#, - A'#,E'J *(d')
11.0-25
Eq.
or
[A',@, - E,) (1 - m?" (
11.0-26
Eq.
The centroid of the compression forces, y, is then obtained by dividing the first moment by
the sum of the forces:
Y =
Wkd
2 3
5
bd (Es - Em)(l - d'/kd)E,d'/kd
kbd
Afs
E , , , E +~ ~ (Es- Em) (1
kbd
m.11.0-27
d'/khi) E,
Substitution of Eq. 11.0-9 results in:

-
r116
P'(n -
r112
(1 -
1)(1 - &/W]
Y=kd
+
&/mdf/m
'1
P'(n
Eq. 11.0-28
An expression for the moments can now be obtained. Summing
the moments about the
centroid of the compression force results in:
Eq. 11.0-29
11-9

AC1
TITLE*MDG 93 W 0662949 0508888 402 W
Summing the moments about the centroid of the tension force results in:
Mt = A,(d - RF,
Eq. 11.0-30
Equations 11.0-22 , 11.0-28,11.0-29, and 11.0-30 provide the basis for flexural design of
rectangularmasonry
elements with both tension and compressionreinforcement.
equations are not applicable to sectionssubjected
The
to flexure and axial load acting
simultaneously (see MDG Chapter 12).
11.1 WALLS
Most masonry elements are walls. A wall is defined per Code 2.2 as a "Vertical element
with a horizontal length greater than three times its thickness." Elements with a horizontal
lengthless than or equal to three times their thickness are usuallycolumns.They
are
columns if in addition to satisfying the length to thickness requirements, the height is also
at least three times the thickness.
The distinctionbetween
the definition ofwalls
and columnsis
important because of
restrictions placedon columns inthe Code. For example, columns are limited to a minimum
thickness of 8 in. by Code 5.9.1.1, an effective heightto thickness ratio of 25 by Code 5.9.1.2
and must be reinforced to comply with Code5.9.1.4,5.9.1.6and A.4.6. Walls are not limited
to aminimumthickness
or amaximumheight
to thicknessratio.Wallshave
different
reinforcement requirements which are generally less restrictive.
1.
Code 5.16 requireswalls of stackbondedmasonry
to be reinforcedwith a
minimum reinforcement of 0.0007 times the vertical cross section of the wall
spaced not further than 48 inches on center.
2.
Code A.3.8 and A.4.5 contain special provisions for masonry in Seismic Zones
2, 3 and 4.
11-10

93 W 0662949 0508889 349 W
A literal reading of the Code will reveal that some elements do not fit the definition of
either a wall or a column. Elements not meeting the definition of either a wall or a column
are typically designed as walls.
11.1.1 Flexural Design of Unreinforced Masonry Walls
Code Chapter 6 contains provisions for unreinforced masonry wall design. Reinforcement
may be present in the wall, but its effect is ignored for design purposes.
Code EQ. 6-1 is the unity equation for flexurewithaxialload.Whenaxialloadis
not
present the equation reduces to:
-f b < l
Eq. 11.1-1
'b
Small letters are used for computed stresses and capital letters are used for allowable
stresses. The computed bending stress is normally calculated by using MDG Eq. 11.0-5.
For out-of-plane bending of solid unit masonry or hollow unit masonry fully grouted, the
equation becomes:
Mc - M - 6M
f b = I " - -
Eq. 11.1-2
bt2
Where t is the specified thickness of the wall and b is the width of the wall taken as the
same width used to calculate the moment M.
For in-plane bending ofsolid
unitmasonry
or fully grouted hollowunitmasonry,
the
equation becomes:
fb
6M
Eq. 11.1-3
2;
11-11

A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93 D Ob62949 0508890 Ob0
Where ,Z is the length of the wall.

The allowable bending compression stress is given in Code Eq. 6-5. A one-third increase
for short duration loading (wind or seismic) applies to both the compression and tension
allowable stresses, Code 5.3.2.
Allowable flexural tension stresses due to out-of-plane bending are given in Code Table
6.3.1.1. The values depend on the type of mortar, type of masonry and the direction of the
tensionstress.
M a l tension (not tensionresulting
from bending) is not allowedin
unreinforced masonry (Code 6.4).

In running bond construction, values for tension parallel to the bed joint are higher than
values for tensionperpendicular to the bed joint because of the interlocking of the masonry
units.
Walls are often supported on more than two sides. Under load they often exhiiit plate
behavior (two-way bending) rather than beam
behavior (one-way bending). The actual load
distribution and resulting stresses can be very complex Such determination would require
values for stiffness of masonry both parallel and perpendicular to the bed joint. The Code
assumes a single value per Code 5.5.1.
Code 5.13.4 containsspecific requirements for including the effects of and designing
intersecting walls. Code 5.7.1.1 requires that intersecting walls be included in the stiffness
determination for lateral load distribution unless shear transfer is prevented. The Code
limits the effectiveflangewidth
to 6 timesthethickness
of the wall (Code 5.13.4.2).
Reference (11.1.1) discusses masonrylateral load resisting systemsand the structural model
for distributing the forces.
The hand calculation of lateral load distribution for the unreinforced masonrywall
construction in the RCJ Hotel, MDG Example 9.2.3, neglected intersecting wall stiffnessdue
11-12

A C 1 TITLESVDG 93
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0508891 T T 7
to the presence of control joints at the intersection of walls. The computer calculation of
the lateral load distribution using the ETABS program for the hotel example considering
reinforced masonry wall construction included the effects ofwall intersections since the
program considers all walls in its three dimensional analysis.
11.1.2
Flexural Design of Reinforced MasonryWalls
Chapter 7 of the Code contains provisions for reinforced masonry wall design.
Using MDG Eqs. 11.0-14 and 11.0-15, or 11.0-29 and 11.0-30, and substituting the allowable
stresses, the allowable applied moments can be obtained. The allowable tensile stresses in
the reinforcement are given
in
reinforcement.
Code 7.2.
The allowable
tension
Grade 60 is the mostcommonlyused
stress 24,000
is psi.
The allowable
flexural
compression stress in masonry isone third the specified compressivestrength of masonry per
Code 7.3.1.2.
A one-third increase for short duration loading (wind or seismic) in this allowable stress is
allowed for both the
reinforcement allowable stress and the masonryflexural or axial
compression allowable stress, Code 5.3.2.

For out-of-plane bending, the effective width to use in the flexural equations is limited by
Code 7.3.2 to the center-to-center spacing of the bars, six times the wall thickness or 72 in.,
whichever is least.
The following iterative procedure isnormallyusedby
the structural engineer to design
reinforced masonry for flexure:

1.
Determine
the
applied moment.
2.
Estimate the required reinforcement basedon an assumed j or k.
3.
Calculate k (neutral axis location).

11-13

AC1 TITLE*NDG 93 m Ob62949 0508892 9 3 3 m
11.1.2.1
4.
Calculate M, and M,.
5.
Compare M, and M, tothe applied moment.
Initial Depth and Steel Estimate
- The required depth of the masonry and the
amount of reinforcement can be estimated using the two flexure equations and assuming k
equals to 0.3.
Rearranging MDG Eq. 11.0-14 gives
Eq. 11.1-1
Rearranging MDG Eq. 11.0-15 gives

Eq. 11.1-2
11.1.2.2
Balanced Design - While many textbooks present the concept of balanced design,
this concept is of limited practical use. Balanced design is a condition where the allowable
tensile bending stress and the allowable masonry compressive stress occur in the bending
element at the same time, Some designers use the balanced condition as a starting point
indesignsincedesign
allowable stresses. This
parameters such as k, j, and p are known based on the known

results in easily generated design aids. Refer to MDG 11.3.3 for
balanced beam design. Other designers simply use balanced parameters, such as
Pb,
as a
check to indicate whether in their design the allowable moment is limited by tension or
compression. If this condition (an additional equation) is added to our previous derived
equations, all manner of design procedures result, none of which is of much value.
The problem with balanced design isthat it usually is not the minimum cost design,because
the cost per unit of masonry strength is not the same as the cost per unit of steel strength.
11-14

A C 1 T I T L E L M D G 93
Obb2949 0508893 8 7 T
Moreover, the factor of safety for masonry in flexural compressionis 3.0 while the factor of
safety for reinforcement varies between 2.0 and 2.5. Thus, the concept of balanced design
is dependent upon the somewhat arbitrary selections of factors of safety made by the
building codes. Thus balanced design using the UBC is not the same as balanced design
using the Code.
Other methods use various tables for easy reference; computer programs are also available
for the design of wall elements. When using computer programs, the designer is cautioned
to check the code provisions employed. In recent years, masonry codes havebeen changing
rapidly and many programs quickly become outdated.
11.2 PILASTERS
11.2.1
General Description
Pilasters consist of a column section built integrally with a wall. Because of the modular
nature of both clay and concrete masonry units, pilasters can be built within the coursing
pattern of a wall. Units in alternate courses of a pilaster may be arranged such that they
interlock in directions both normal and parallel to the plane of a wall.
Unlike an isolatedcolumnmember
reinforced per Code 5.10.
Theymay
(Code 5.9.1.4), pilasters are not required to be
even be ungrouted.However,
for hollowunit
construction pilasters typically should be grouted, since a beam or truss is often supported
in bearing at the top of a pilaster. Furthermore, grouting of at least the column section of
a pilaster will enhance itsflexural strength, not only because of the increased section
modulus, but more significantly because of the increased values of allowable tensile stress
normal to bed joints that arepermitted for a fully grouted section per Code 6.3.1.1. Pilasters
typically support wall panels, acting as flexural members spanning vertically while carrying
little verticalload.
Thus they are commonly grouted and reinforced regardless of unit
construction.
11-15

AC1
TITLESHDG 93 m 0662949 0508894 706
Reinforced and grouted pilasters should have a minimum of four vertical reinforcing bars
placed through the cores of hollow units, or placed within a cavity formed with solid units.
Vertical reinforcement greatly increases flexural strength of a pilaster. Flexure is generally
a controlling factor for pilasters; consequently reinforced pilasters can often be much smaller
than unreinforced pilasters.
11.2.2 Role
of Pilaster in Resisting Loads
A pilaster serves the two basic functions depicted in Fig. 11.2-1. The first is to provide
lateral support for walls subjected to wind or seismic forces normal to their plane (out-ofplane). The second is thesupport of gravity loads transferred from beams or trusses
supporting roofs, floors, or overhead cranes.
Gravity
Beam or
L '.
\ Midheight of Pilaster
Fig. 11.2-1 Forces on Pilaster-Wall System
11-16

Ob62949 0508895 b 4 2
Vertical reactions from beams or trusses are usually transferred to a piIaster through steeI
bearing plates placed at the top of a pilaster. The reaction often does not coincide with the
centroid of the pilaster. Since the pilaster spacing is usually greater than thebeam spacing,
beams or truss members are often supported on top of masonry walls between pilasters.
When allbeams or truss membersare detailed for identical spans, the reaction will be closer
to the centroid of the wall, rather than the centroid of the pilaster sections. The eccentricity
of the vertical force results in bending moment at the top of the pilaster.
Walls are commonlydesigned
to span horizontally toeach pilaster. This iscommonly
assumed when the spacing of pilasters is less than one half the unsupported vertical span of
an out-of-plane wall. The pilaster spans vertically and sometimestransfers half of its lateral
force to the roof or floor diaphragm above or below. For unreinforced walls, span length
is not the only criterion, since allowable stresses differ for vertical and horizontal spans. A
system of pilasters and walls resisting lateral load acts like a system of beams and slabs
resisting uniform floor loads.
The design of pilasters used in low-rise buildings will rarely be governed by gravity forces,
unless the centroid or resultant of the vertical force is outside the pilasters kern. The kern
is that portion of the cross-sectional area within which the resultant vertical load must act
to produce only compression throughout the cross section. For loads outside the kern, the
resulting tensilestress may govern overthe compressive stress, since the vertical compressive
stresses are usually low for this class of building (in the range of 20 to 50 psi). Furthermore,
pilasters may be located in walls that run parallel to roof trusses or floor beams, and thus
do not resist any gravity forces other than their own self weight. In
these cases, pilasters
may be thought of as simple flexural memberswith light amounts of axial compressive force
which may be conservatively neglected.
This MDG section presents pilaster design for the special case of flexure without axial
forces. Design is governed by flexure resulting fromlateral forces applied normal to a wall
containing a pilaster. Both unreinforced and reinforced pilasters are discussed. In MDG
11-17

A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 93
0662747 0508876 587
12.3, pilaster design is discussed with respect to combined axial force and flexure.
11.23 Coursing Layout

In hollow-unit masonry, pilasters may be built within the thickness of a wall by grouting and
reinforcing those cells assigned to a pilaster. However, the more common situation is when
a deeper and stronger pilaster is needed. The pilaster may be centered in or through the
wall,fully offset from the wall, or somewhere in between. The position of the pilaster
relative to the wall is often dictated by nonstructural considerations.
Sometimes a pilaster may be placed so that its centroid will coincide with a truss or beam
reaction. Unfortunately this isnot the common case, and flexural strength must be provided
to account for theeccentricity of the vertical reaction. See MDG 12.3 for design of pilasters
subjected to axial load and flexure.
To qualify as an integral system, at least 50% of the masonry units must interlock at the
interface between the pilaster and the wall per Code5.13.4.2(e)l.Wallsmayalso
be
effective as pilaster flanges if steel connectors or intersecting bondbeams are used per Code
5.13.4.2(e)2 and 5.13.4.2(e)3 in lieuofmasonry
unitinterlock.However,
the later two
methods are impractical and unnecessary for pilasters.

In hollow unit masonry, pilastersare commonly madeof units laidin a coursing pattern that
complies with the running bond pattern of a wall, and provides good keyingaction with the
pilaster. Sixteen-inch pilasters, shown in Fig. 11.2-2, are the most common for this reason.
However, similar layouts lend themselves
well to 24 in. and 32 in. sections. For larger
pilasters, it may not be necessary for units to be placed in the interior. The cavity that is
formed by the face units can be filled with grout and a reinforcing cage, if necessary. The
effective section of the pilaster varies with the mortar bed configuration and extent of the
grout-filled cores. See MDG 11.2.4.
11-18

~~
93
Obb2949 0508897 415
m.
8 CMU(Typica1)
Alternate Courses
16
Courses Alternate
x 16 Pilaster
Fig.11.2-2Coursing
16 x 24 Pilaster
Layout for CMU Pilasters
Unreinforced pilasters with solid units

are made up by laying units in a full pattern or about
a grouted and reinforced interior cavity. Since bed joints are fully mortared, the effective
section is the grosssection.Solidunitpilasterscanbereinforced
by placingvertical
reinforcement in grouted cavities.
11.2.4EffectiveSection
The cross section that may be assumed effective in resisting axial antrl flexural stresses is
often much different from what
the architect conceives or the mason builds. Movement
joints are typically located along both sides of pilasters, thus limitingthe effective section to
the area of the pilaster. If the pilaster is not isolated by joints and the requirements of Code
5.13.4.2(e) are met, then the effective width of flange on either side of the web shall equal
6 times the flange thickness per Code 5.13.4.2(c).

If the section is unreinforced, then both the tensile and compressive masonry
areas are
considered. If the section is grouted, then the full gross area is considered. If the section
is ungrouted, only the mortar bedded area is considered.Effectivesections

combinations of these classifications are shown in Figs. 11.2-3.
11-19

for three
A C 1 TITLElkMDG 9 3
III c-
0662949 0508898 351
6t
6t
(a) Pilaster
""'
'L
And Wall Fully Grouted
Compressive Zone
(b) Pilaster Grouted, Wall Ungrouted
Face Shell Bedding

Compressive Zone
6t
(c) Pilaster And Wall Ungrouted
Fig. 11.2-3 Effective Sections for Unreinforced Pilasters-NoExpansion/Control Joints

If the section is reinforced, the tensile
strength of masonry is neglected, and only the
transformed area of the tension steel is considered. It thenbecomes important to recognize
11-20

the direction of the moment, because the width of the compressionflange may vary
substantially for different directions of bending. The reinforcement in compression may be
considered effective(steel transformed to masonry by n) if lateral ties are provided meeting
Code 5.9.1.6. Effective sections for three vastly different cases are shown in Figs. 11.2-4.
(a) Pilaster Reinforced, Wall Unreinforced, FlangeIn Tension
6t
HAS
6t
(b) Pilaster Reinforced, Wall Grouted, Flange In Compression
lkd
$1 II
(c) Pilaster Reinforced, Wall Ungrouted, FlangeIn Compression
Fig. 11.2-4 EffectiveSectionsforReinforcedPilasters
11-21

A C 1 TITLEvMDG 93
0bb2949 0 5 0 8 9 0803 T
11.2.5 Flexural Design Considerations
As mentioned in the introduction to
this section, pilaster flexure is
a result of transverse
lateral loads such as wind or earthquake forces, and eccentricity of vertical gravity loads
applied to the top of a pilaster. Design considerations depend on the relative participation
of each of these effects.
The latter loading case involves flexure plus axial compression,
discussed in MDG 123. This section focuses on pilaster designs governed by the former
loading case, where flexural stresses only result
from lateral forces. For these cases, the
critical states that typically must be examined are flexural tension normal to bed joints for
an unreinforced pilaster, and tensile stress in vertical reinforcement and compression stress
in masonry for a reinforced pilaster. In this section, light amounts of axial compression will
only be considered if needed since they tend to reduce effects of flexural tension.
If walls span horizontally with respect to lateralforces, then the full tributary width of wind
or seismic forces must be applied to the pilaster. The triiutary width is simply half the
distance to the adjacent pilaster or other support element on both sides of the pilaster in
question. Portions of the wall wouldspan vertically if the height of a wall were less than the
spacing of pilasters, or if an end wall were omitted in an open frontbuilding. For the case
where the pilaster is loaded only witha portion of the lateral load, valuesof load distribution
on walls and pilasters have been calculated based on plate theory (11.21J1.2.2).
Pilasters are usuallyassumed
tospan vertically between storylevels.
For single-story
buildings, thismeans that half the lateral load is transferred to the foundation, and the other
half is transferred to the roof diaphragm. It is common to assume a simple support at the
top of a pilaster even though it translates with a flexiile diaphragm. Since the bottom of
a pilaster is also considered to be a simple support, the vertical element will be statically
determinate, and any translation at the top will be insignificant provided that the roof
diaphragm is designed for the shear. This is done for simplicity, although some restraint
against rotation may exist if the pilaster does not rock and the foundation is relatively stiff.
11-22

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
0662949 0508903 776
Though the examples presented herein all consider pilastersto have simple supports at top
and bottom, it should not be inferred that these boundary conditions will be universal. For
example, a pilaster can act as a cantilever, fixed at the bottom and free at the top.
Earthquakes produce inertial loads that must be assumed to act laterally in any direction.
Wind forces are normally applied as direct pressures on the windward sideof a building, but
should also be considered as applying a suction of equal value to the leeward side, unless
a comprehensive wind analysis is done.
Loading standards such as ASCE-7 describe the
wind analysis procedure for both the Main Lateral Force Resisting Systems (forshear wall
analysis),and
for Components andCladding
(for out-of-plane lateral loads on walls).
Because unreinforced pilasters are asymmetrical sections, flexural tensile stress should be
checked for bothdirections of lateral loading since the subtractive load combinationmay be
more critical than the additive combination depending on the section properties. Vertical
bars in reinforced pilasters must also be checked for the critical loading direction.
11.2.5.1
Unreinforced Pilasters - Flexural capacity is limited by flexural tensile stress. For
designallowingtensile
stress in masonry, the values of allowableflexuraltension
are
summarized in Code Table 6.3.1.1. Pilasters are vertical elements rather than horizontal
ones, and thus only the values for tension normal to bed joints are usually applicable.
The allowablemasonrytensile
stresses are givenin Code Table 6.3.1.1. For ungrouted
hollow-unit masonry, the allowable flexural tensile
stress is dependent upon the type of
masonry unit and type of mortar. In addition to increasing the section modulus, grouting
can more than triple the allowable flexural tensile stress, because tension across bed joints
does not need to be relied on exclusively.
For an unreinforced pilaster subjected to pure flexure, there is no need to check compressive
stress. The allowable flexural tensile stress will control the design.
It is common practice to grout the column portion of a pilaster and leave the wall portion
11-23

(the flange of the pilaster) ungrouted. For this situation, allowable tensile stresses may be
interpolated based on the relative proportions of grouted and ungrouted masonry areas.
Bending moments resulting from lateral forces are largest near the midheight. Thus, flexural
tensile stress should be checked at thislocation.
It isadmissible to subtract from the
computed flexural tensile stress, the compressive stress resulting

from the self-weight of one
half the pilaster height. It is conservative in this case to estimate the lower bound of the
wall weight. If the pilaster supports roof or floor loads, a minimum value of gravity dead
load may also be used to reduce the flexural tensile stress. However, this may not lead to
thinner pilasters, because the gravity load may be accompanied by an additional moment
resulting from the load through its eccentricity (see MDG 123).
11.2.5.2
Reinforced Pilasters
- Reinforced pilasters are much stronger in flexure than
unreinforced ones, particularly if axialcompressiveforces
are negligiile. For thiscase,
design is essentially the same as for reinforced beams, once an effective section has been
defined.
As noted inFig.
11.2-4, severaldifferenteffectivesectionscan
be defined
depending on the direction of the bending moment, and on whether the flange is grouted
and/or reinforced. Typically, movement joints will
be located adjacent to pilasters, thus
defining the cross section as rectangular.

Once determined, flexural stresses are compared with Code allowable values. In Code 7.2.1,
values of allowable reinforcement stress are 20 ksi for Grades 40 and 50 steel and24 ksi for
Grade 60 steel. In Code 7.3.1.2 the limiting masonry compressivestress, F*,is 0.33 times the
specified compressive strength. Allowablestress values for both steel and masonry may be
increased by one third for the case of the wind or earthquake per Code 5.3.2.
11.2.6
Shear Design Considerations
Shear design of pilasters is no different than for masonry walls or beams. Shear stress for
unreinforced pilasters is determined using Code Eq. 6-7. For simplicity, only the pilaster
without wall flange needs to be considered in resisting shear. For a solid rectangular web
11-24

A C 1T I T L E M M D G
9 3 W 0662749 0508903 549
Code Eq. 6-7 reduces to:
3 v
fy=zA,
Es. 11.2-1
Because pilasters are usually tall, slender elements, shear usually does not control, and this
simplification is warranted. Allowable in-plane shear stresses are given in Code 6.5.2 for
unreinforced members. For pilasters made with hollow units and face-shell mortar bedding,
the shear area should only be the net bedded area.
Shear design of reinforced pilasters follows Code 7.5. Shear stress is computed by dividing
the shear forceby the width, b, and the internal lever arm,jd, of the cross-section (Code Eq.
7-3). No distinction is madebetween
a rectangular section and a T-section. If one
interprets thederivation of the flexural shear stress equation literally, the width b should be
taken as thewidth of the compression zone, whether of the web or of the effective flange.
However, for very large flange widths, this wouldnot be reasonable because of large shear
lag effects. Therefore, it is recommended that the web width be used in all cases. Again,
shear should not control the design and such a simplification should be warranted.
113 BEAMS AND LINTELS
113.1 Introduction
The use of reinforcing steel in masonry constructionpermits the design of flexural members
such as beams, lintels and deep wall beams. Lintels are horizontal members used to span
openings in masonrywalls.Theymay
be reinforcedmasonry, precast or cast-in-place
concrete, or structural steel. Reinforced masonry lintels may be constructed of specially

formed lintel units, bondbeam units or standard units with cut-out webs. Special lintel units
arranged to form a channel for placement of reinforcement and grout are shown in Fig.
11.3-1. Typical reinforced brick masonry lintel sections anda temporary shoring detail are
shown in Figs.11.3-2 and 11.3-3 respectively. Steel lintels may consist ofone ormore angles,
11-25

A C 1 TITLEtMDG 93
Obb2949 0508904 485 W
or a C or T section. For wider spans and heavier loads, a.shape with a suspended soffit
plate may be used (Fig. 11.3-4). Analysis and design of lintels subjected to vertical and
lateral loads are discussed in this section.
A brief discussion of deep wall beams and an
example problem are also included. The Code gives general provisions for masonry beams
in Code 7.3.3, and specific deflection criteria for beam and lintels supporting unreinforced
masonry in Code 5.6. The deflection of steel or concrete beams that support unreinforced
masonry above openings is limited to 1/600 or 0.3 in. under dead and live load. Beams and
lintels supporting reinforced masonry are not required to meet these deflection limits.
Fig. 113-1 Lintel Blocks in Place (113.1)
11-26

Fig. 113-2 Reinforced Masonry Lintels (113.1)
Clvity Wall
Stop Brick
Fig. 113-3 Shoring for Reinforced Masonry Lintel (113.1)
11-27

93 M Obb2949 0 5 0 8 9 0 6 258 M
6 TTW Brick
Single Angle
Double Angle
(a>
(b)
Triple Angle
Rolled Shape And Suspended Plate
(c)
(a
Fig. 113-4 Steel Lintels
113.2 Assumptions
The working stress method is used to design beams and lintels in accordance with Code
Chapters 5 and 7. Structural elements aredesigned so that stresses from working or service
loads computed under the assumption of linear elastic behavior do not exceed specified
allowable stresses. The working or service loads represent the maximum expected loads
under service conditions,and may include dead, live, snow, wind,and earthquake loads. The
allowablestresses are givenintheCode
strength of masonry,
y,,,,and
as a percentage of the specifiedcompressive
a fraction ofyield
reinforcement (see Code 7.3.1.2,
strength based on the grade of the
7.2.1.and
1, 7.21.2). Fig. 11.3-5 shows that the stress-strain
11-28

A C 1 TITLEgMDG 93
Ob62949 0508907 L94
behavior of masonry in a standard compression test is approximatelylinear up to about 50

per cent of Pm,and that of reinforcing steel in tension or compression is linear up to yield.
In the working stress method, stresses under service loads are assumed to be within the
linear and elastic range, so that a straight-line relationship is assumed between stress and
strain. The basic assumptions of the working stress method were detailed in MDG 11.0.2
and MDG 11.0.5.2.
Strain
Elastic
1 Repon
Strain
Fig. 113-5 TypicalStress-StrainCurves

1133 Basic Equations
- Singly Reinforced Sections
The basic equations forgeneral reinforced masonry design concept are presented in MDG
11.0.5.2. This section examines these concepts specifically as related to singly reinforced
beams.
The transformed section for a reinforced beam with tension steel only is shown in Fig. 11.36. The neutral axis coincides with the centroidal axis of the cracked transformed section.
The neutral axis is generally located by setting the first moment of area about the neutral
axis equal to zero.
T)-
@)(M)(
nA,(d - M ) = O
11-29

A C 1T I T L E v H D G
93
0662949 O508908 020
.+!
11-30

A C 1 T I T L E t f l D G 73
Substituting p
"
m 0662747
0 5 0 8 9 0 7 Tb7
A,/bd, the steel ratio,
Dividing by bd2,
R* - pn(1 -k)
2
Solving,
Eq. 11.3-1
[ 2 p n + ( ~ n ) '-] pn
~
Equation 11.3-1 can be used to locate the neutral axis for a given beam cross-section.
For the triangular masonry stress block (Fig. 11.3-6), the resultant compressive force is,
bkdf,@
The tensile force is,
AJs
The
moment
M can be expressed as,

1
Cjd = -fbkjbd2 = M,,,
2
Tjd
A,& j d
pbdf, j d
M,
Solvingmasonry
the
for stress,
fb =
2M
Eq. 11.3-2
b
d
'jk
Solving for the steel stress,
&=-
Eq. 11.3-3
A,jd
11-31

AC
T I1T L E * H D G
93
0662947 0 5 0 8 9 3 0 7 8 9
The lever arm, jd, may be expressed as,
from which we obtain,

j = 1" k
3
Eq. 11.3-4
Balanced Beam Design

Balanced condition is a state where both the steel andmasonry reach their prescribed
allowablelimitssimultaneously.Thus,
fb
= F b = allowable masonry compressive stress in flexure per Code 7.3.1.2
fs = F,
= steel allowable tensile stress per Code 7.2.1
From similar triangles (see Fig. 11.3-6),

'bd
"
Fb
Fb + F J n
where kb is the k value at balanced condition.

Thus
Or
Or
11-32

Obb2949 Q50891L bL5
Eq. 11.3-5
To obtain the balanced steel ratio,
pbbdFs
Pb,
equate C and T,
= Fbkbdb/2
Substituting for kb and solving,

ES. 11.3-6
If p < p b the beam is said to be under-reinforced and the steelwill reach its allowable value
first.
If p >
Pb
the beam issaid
to be over-reinforced and the masonry will reach its
allowable value first.
113.4 Basic Equations Doubly Reinforced Sections
The basic equations for general reinforced masonry designconcept are presented in MDG
11.0.5.2. This section examines those concepts specifically as related to doubly reinforced
beams.
Compression reinforcement may be provided in a masonry beam to increase the compressive
resistance of the section and/or to minimize creep and reduce deflections.
The total resisting moment M for a doubly reinforced section may be expressed as,
Eq. 11.3-7
Mb+M2
where
M&,= moment capacity for the section at balanced condition without compression
reinforcement. The tensile reinforcement needed to develop M b is denoted
Ash*
11-33

A C 1 T I T L E l r M D G 93
0662949 0508932 553
M 2= additional moment capacity developed by A', and Asa where, AS2= A, -Asb.
The compressive steel stress can be derived from the stress diagram in Fig. 11.3-7,
Or
Eq.11.3-8
Or in terms of masonry stress,
Eq.11.3-9
Eq.11.3-10
where
Mb
Es. 11.3-11
= Fbjbkbbd2/2
In design the additional tensile steel required to resist M 2may be estimated using,
Eq.11.3-12
and the compressive reinforcement may be estimated using,
Eq.11.3-13
The location of the neutral axis for the doubly reinforced section is given by
11-34

93
Obb2949 0508913 498
v)
11-35

= [np + (n
- l)p]*
+ 2[np + (n- 1) pd/d]]m- [np + (n - 1)pI
Eq. 11.3-14
where
p/ = A,/bd
Check the adequacy of the section using k as per Eq. 11.3-14. Calculate
f#
and fs and
determine M (see MDG Example 11.3-2).

113.5 Load Distributions on Lintels
Lintel beams spanning openings in masonry wallsmay be subjected to two types of vertical
loading: (1) distributed loads from the dead weight of the lintel and the masonry above the
lintel, and floor and roof dead and live loads, where the floor and roof construction is
uniformly supported by the masonry; and (2) concentrated loads from floor girders, roof
trusses, etc. framing into the wall. Because masonry can arch across openings, lintel beams
usually do not need to be designed for the total tributary loading above the lintel. That is,
if a lintel fails or is removed, only a triangular portion of the wall immediately above
the opening would collapse, because the masonry will form an arch over the opening.
However, for arching action to take place, there must be sufficient masonry mass on each
side of the opening, or tension ties across the opening to resist the horizontal thrust resulting
from arch action. The lintel reinforcement can not be assumed to act asa tension tie unless
it is extended beyond the lintel bearing and sufficientlyanchored.Arching
action also
requires that the height or depth of the masonry above point C (see Fig. 11.3-8) must be
sufficient to provide resistance to arching thrusts. Assuming arching
action exists, design
loads for lintels may include:

Dead weight of the masonry wall above the opening within a triangular area
ABC as shown in Fig. 11.3-8.
O
Uniform live and dead loads of floors and roofs which bear on the wall above
the opening and below the apex of triangle ABC. Since the floor loads shown
11-36

A C 1 TITLE+MDG 93
m 0662949 0508915
2b0
in rig. 11.3-8 are above the apex, they can be neglected.

0
Concentrated loads from floorgirders,rooftrusses,etc.framing
into a wall
may be assumed to be distniuted at 45 degrees as shown in Fig. 11.3-8 (see

Code 5.12 and Code C 5.12).
Only the portion of the distributed
concentrated load that is directly over the lintel is assumed to act upon the
lintel.
!
Effective
Length
c BearingWidth + 4t
2 Spacing of Concentrate5Load
!
Ciacentrated
Load
Fig. 113-8 Load Distributions on Lintel
In Fig. 11.3-8, the portion of the concentrated load shown shaded above segment EF may
be considered as a uniform load partially distributed over the lintel. Code 5.12.1 requires
that for walls laid in running bond, the length of wall to be considered effective for each
concentrated load shouldnot exceed the widthof bearing plus four times the wall thickness,
nor the center-to-center distance between concentrated loads. The Commentary states that
11-37

A C 1 TITLEsflDG 93
M 0662947 0508916 1 T 7 M
when other than running bond is used, concentrated loads can only be spread across the
length of one unit unless a bond beam or other technique is used to distriiute the load.
113.6 Beam Depth Determination
Beams that are parts of a wall are normally designed to have the same width as the wall
thickness. The effective depth assumed for the beam design will depend on the height of
the wall above the opening. For walls with heightsup to 3 ft above the beam soffit, the full
height could be considered as the effective depth (11.3.8). For wall heights greater than 3
ft above the beam sofit, the effective beam depth is commonly taken equal to the beam
depth required for the masonry to resist all the shear. MDG Example 11.3-4 on wall beam
design illustrates these concepts.
113.7 Deflection
Realistic predictions of masonry beam and lintel deflections require the use of reasonable
estimates for moment of inertia, modulus of elasticity, modulusof rupture, creepfactors and,
in the case of concrete masonry, shrinkage factors. Also, the procedure used to calculate
deflections has to be based on a comprehensive understanding of the mechanics of shortterm and additional long-term deformation of masonry beams and lintels.
The Code provides tables and expressions for the material properties of masonry, but does
not provide guidelinesfor deflection calculations. An important consideration is the method
to account for the effect of tension stiffening. Tension stiffening is the flexural resistance
provided by undamaged tensile masonry
between flexural cracksand in regions of lowtensile
stress; i.e., between tips of tensile cracks and the neutral axis.
Tension stiffeninghas
been accounted for inreinforced
concrete design byusing
an
empirical equation to define the effectivemoment of inertia, I, (11.3.9). The effective

moment of inertia provides a transition between the well-defined upper bound of I' (moment
11-38

A CT1I T L E M M D G
93
Obb291)9 0508717 033
of inertia of gross section about centroidal axis, neglecting reinforcement), and the lower
bound of I, (moment of inertia of the cracked transformed section). I, is defined as a
function of the level of cracking, as represented by MJMa as follows:
Eq. 11.3-15
The cracking moment is defined as:

Eq. 11.3-16
Using these concepts, the designer would use I, along with standard elastic engineering
deflection equations to predict initial (short-term) deflections of reinforced concrete
members.Comparison
of suchcalculateddeflectionswith
experimental test results on
masonry members show that this method under-predicts masonry deflections (11.3.10).
The UBC (11.3.14) shows that the method provides fair estimates for short-term
deflection
of masonry members although the method tends to underestimate deflections in some cases
(11.3.10). This method will be used for calculating the short-termdeflections of b e a m s and
lintels in this section. The following formulasto predict mid-height out-of-plane deflections
of uniformly loaded simply supported beams provide a fair estimate for short-term
deflection
of masonry members (11.3.14).
Eq. 11.3-17
Eq. 11.3-18
In some cases, this mathematical model underestimates the deflection (11.3.10). Equation
11.3-17is based onflexural stiffnessof the uncracked sectionand should give good estimates
of deflections of uniformly loaded, simply supported flexural members up to first cracking.

11-39

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
Obb29Y9 0508938 T 7 T W
Equation 11.3-18 is based on a bilinear load-deflection relation.
It is assumed that the
member deflects as an uncracked section until the modulus of rupture is reached, and
whereupon thereafter the member cracks and the cracked moment of inertia is used in
calculating the additional deflection. Equation 11.3-18 alsoassumes a simple span and
uniform loading. These equations will be used for calculating the short-term deflections of
beams and lintels in the MDG example problems.
Expressions for I, for singly and doubly reinforced rectangular sections are given in Eqs.
11.3-19 and 11.3-20.

For the singly reinforced section,
I,, = bk3d3 + M,(d-M2

3
where kd =
(4-
Eq. 11.3-19
1)
For doubly reinforced section,

''r
--
bk3d3 + M,(d-kdy + (n- 1)A,'(kd-d')2

3
2dB
where kd
+ (1 +
r)2
- (1
Eq. 11.3-20
+ r)
Long-term deflection due to creep from sustainedloadsand,in
11-40

the case of concrete
A C 1T I T L E x f l D G
9 3 W Ob62949 05089L9 906
masonry, deflection due to shrinkage need to be considered to estimate total long-term

deflection of masonry beams and lintels. The Code does not give specific guidelines for
calculating long-term deflectionof masonry beams and lintels. One technique (11.3.9) used
to estimate long-term deflectionsof flexural members is to compute the additional long-term
deflection resultingfrom creep andshrinkage by multiplyingthe immediate deflection caused
by the sustained load considered, by a factor
A =
m.11.3-21
f
1 +50p
where
A,/bd at midspan for simple and continuousspans, and at supportfor

cantilevers
2.0 for sustained loading of 5 years or longer duration, 1.4 for 12

months, 1.2 for 6 months, and 1.0 for 3 months duration.
In the absence of other recommendations, and unlessvalues are obtained by a more

comprehensiveanalysis,
the multipliergivenabovemay
be considered satisfactory for
predicting long-term deflection of concrete masonry flexural members. Since Eq.

combines creep and shrinkage, it is not applicable to clay brickmasonry.
11.3-21
Thecreep
coefficient given in Code 5.5.5 may be used to estimate long-term creep deflection of claybrick flexural members.
113.8 Deep Beams
A deep beam may be defined as one whose depth is equal to or exceeds the span length.
Deep masonry beams are not addressed in the Code. However design considerations and
provisions for deepbeams have been developed by various groups (11.3.15,11.3.16,11.3.17,
11.3.18).
11-41

A C 1 TITLErMDG 93
Ob62949 O508920 628
REFERENCES
11.1.1
"Concrete Masonry Load Bearing Walls-Lateral Load Distribution," NCMATek

#61A, NCMA 1981.
11.2.1
"Engineered Concrete Masonry-Wind Loads," NCMA Tek #24, NCMA, 1970.
11.2.2
"Engineered Concrete Masonry Warehouse Walls," NCMA Tek #89, NCMA,

1977.
11.3.1
Smith, R.C., T.L Honkala, CK. Andres,

Masonrv:
Materials.
Desim,
Construction, Reston Publishing Company, A Prentice Hall Company, Reston,

Virginia, 1979.
11.3.2
Hendry, kW., R.E. Bradshaw, D.J. Rutherford, 'Tests on Cavity Walls and the
Effect of Concentrated Loads and Joint Thickness on the Strength
of Brickwork,"
Clay Products Technical Bureau (England), Vol. 1, No. 2, July 1968.
11.3.3
"Building Code Requirements for Concrete

Masonry Structures (AC1 531-79) and
Commentary (AC1 531R-79)," American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan,
1978.
11.3.4
"Structural Recommendations for Loadbearing Walls," British Standard Code of

Practice CPIII: 1964, The Council of Codes of Practice, British Standards
Institution, March 1964.
11.3.5
'Wall Masonry, design and Execution," German Standard DIN 1053, November
1962
11.3.6
"Standard for Calculation and Execution of Manufactured and Natural Bricks,"

Technical Standard 113, Swiss Engineers and Architects Society, 1965.
11.3.7
"Recommended Practice For Engineered BrickMasonry,"Brick
Institute of
America, McLean, Virginia, 1969.

11.3.8
Schneider, R.R., W.L Dickey, Reinforced Masonrv Desim, Prentice-Hall, Inc.,

Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1987.
11.3.9
Building Code Requirementsfor
Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318-89) and
Commentary - AC1 318R-89, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, 1989.

11.3.10
Horton, R.T.,M.K. Tadros, "Deflection of Reinforced Masonry Members," AC1

11-42

0662947 0508923 564
Structural Journal, V.87, No. 4, July-August 1990.

11.3.11
Wolde-Tinsae, AM., M.L. Porter, M. Ahmed, "Shear Strength of Composite

Brick-to-BlockPanels,"Proceedings
of the Third North AmericanMasonry
Conference, Arlington, Texas, June 1985.

11.3.12
Wolde-Tinsae, A.M., J. Colville, R.H. Najib, ltModulus of Elasticity of Clay Brick

Masonry," Ninth International BrickBlock Masonry Conference, Berlin, October
1991.
11.3.13
Hamid, A, G. Ziab, O. El-Nawawy, "Modulus of Elasticity of
Concrete Block
Masonry," Proceedingsof the Fourth North American MasonryConference, Los

Angeles, August 1987.
11.3.14
Commentary to Chapter24, Masonry ofthe Uniform Building Code 1988 Edition,

TMS Codes and StandardsCommittee, The Masonry Society, Boulder,Colorado,
1990.
11.3.15
Portland Cement Association, "Designof Deep Girders," IS079D, Skokie, Illinois,
11.3.16
10 PPPortland Cement Association,"Tilt-UpLoad-BearingWalls,
A DesignAid,"
EB074D, Skokie, Illinois, 1980, 28 pp.

11.3.17
International Conference of Building OfficialsResearch Committee, "Reinforced

Brick Wall Panels," Report No. 2727.
11.3.18
International Conference of Building Officials Research Committee, "Concrete

Masonry Wall Panels," Report No. 2868.
11.3.19
"Structural Steel Lintels," BrickInstitute of America, TechnicalNotes 31B revised,

McLean, Virginia, November/December 1981.
11.3.20
"Manual of Steel Construction," American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.,

Chicago, Illinois, 9th edition, 1989.
11.3.21
Blodgett, Orner W., Desien

- Of Welded Structures, The James F. Lincoln Arc
Welding Foundation, Cleveland, Ohio, 1976.
11-43

A C 1 T I T L E S f l D G 93
Example 11.1-1
0662949 0508922 4 T 0
TMS ShoppingCenter Design of UnreinforcedCMUNonloadbearing

Design the East Wall on Grid Line 3 of the T M S Shopping Center for out-of-plane flexure
using Wall Construction Option A (single-wythe unreinforced concrete masonry).
Loading:
Materials:
Wind: 20 psf
Unit Strength: 1,900 psi (net area)
Neglect Self Weight
Mortar: Type N (PCL)
Sm: 1,500 psi

E,,,: 1.8 x 106 psi
See MDG Example 14.3-15

For Wall Connection
To Roof Diaphragm
2O
Reference
Code
This Example Pertains To These Areas
Assume wall is pin
supported at the top of the foundation wall and at the joist bearing
elevation (+ 16 ft-O in.).
11-44

A C 1 TITLE*MDG 93
Obb2949 0508923 337

Code Reference
Part I - Calculate Imposed Bending Moment Per 1ft-O in. Tributary Width of Wall
)40 f t lblft
18'-O"
Moment
Part II - Determine Wall Section Properties

Alternate A 12 in. face shell bedded hollow CMU
Tributary Width
I = 929 i
n
!
See Table 7 in MDG Appendix.
Section Modulus
929 in?
= 160 h3
0.5 (11.63 in.)
11-45

25 "
A C 1 TITLErflDG 93
Ob62949 0508924 273

and
Calculations
Discussion
Code Reference
Alternate B: 10 in. hollow CMU, grouted solid (grout per ASTM C 476)
Part III - Compare Actual Stresses to Allowables

Alternate A 12 in. face shell bedded hollow CMU
M - 620 ft-Ib (12

f=s160
46.5 psi > F& = 19 psi(1.33) = 25 psi .-.N.G. 6.3.1.1
5.3.2
Alternate B: 10 in. hollow CMU, grouted solid
..
Tension stresses acceptable for 10 in.solid grouted construction alternate only.
In a nonloadbearing, unreinforced masonry wall, tension capacity will govern over flexural
compression capacity.
Therefore, a 12 in.singlewythe
face shell bedded hollow CMU (1,900 psi compressive
strength) wall,with Type N Portland Cement Lime mortar is not an acceptable design
solution. The 10 in. hollowsinglewythe
CMU, grouted solidis an acceptable solution.
Considering the compressive stress contribution of wall weight per MDG Chapter 12, the
alternate A might be acceptable. Note that thisdesign depends upon providing lateral
support for the wall at the joist bearing elevation. The connections must be capable of
resisting 203 plf.
11-46

A C 1 TITLE*lDG
93
Obb2949 0508925 L O T
T M S ShoppingCenter
Example 11.1-2
- Design of Reinforced CMU Nonloadbearing

Design the East Wall on Grid Line 3 of the TMS Shopping Center for out-of-plane flexure.
Use hollow concrete masonry, reinforced (Wall Construction Option B).
Loading:
Materials:
Unit Strength
Mortar
E m
1,500 psi
1.8 x 106 psi
16.1
Reinforcement
Grade 60
P m
Wind 20 psf
2,000 psi
Type N
Neglect Self-weight
~~
Code Reference
Roof 1
Part 2
Part 1
18 O
Design For These

Wall Elements
IlEllE
I I1 3 I I
EIIF
Assume pin support at the wall foundation.

Assume pin support at the 16 ft O-in. roof level.
11-47

Obb2949 0 5 0 8 9 2 b 04b
A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93

and
Discussion
Calculations
Reference
Code
Wall Element Part 1

Calculate Wall Reactions at Roof and Foundation:
m)=
20 psf x (18 f
i
)
'
%=
203 plf
16 ft
RF=20psfx(
16,fi
20 psf x 18 ft = 203 plf
157 plf
+ 157 plf
:. OK
Calculate Maximum Moment:

If
3
203 plf
16'"''
575 @O:Id[head
20 psf
620 ft-lb/ft
7'-10"
157 plf
157 plf
Momant
157 plf
7.9 ft -2
620 fi-lb
ft
11-48

ft-lblft
Ob62999 0508927
T82
A C 1 TITLExMDG 9 3

Code Reference
Estimate Reinforcement:
Try 6 in. CMU, assume steel at mid-depth
Assume j = 0.9 for initial estimate.

5.3.2
Use the 1/3 stress allowable increase for wind load

-
620 ft -lb X 12 h/ft

%,O00 psi x 1.33 x 0.9 x 2.8 in.
Try #4 @ 24in. o . ~ (. A
0.20
%mdfkd
0.093
IL
x - = 0.10
24
Check Strength:
Use 2 ft-O in. wide strip
Design Moment = 620 ft-lb/ft x 2 = 1240 ft-lb/ft
0.20
24
0.265,
in. x 2.8 in.
0.003
k2 + 2pnR - 2pn=0
0.048
np
i
n
:
0.911
11-49

i
n
.
'
/
f
t
id/fi.)
7.2.1.1
93
A C 1T I T L E S H D G
Obb2949 0508928 919

Code Reference
Allowable Tension Flexural Capacity
Mt = A, jdFs
Mt = (0.20 i a 2 )
0.911 x 2.8 h. X 24,OOO psi x
1.33
12 in./ft
:. OK
Mt = 1,360 ft-lb/ft > 1,240 ft-lb/ft

Allowable Compression Flexural Capacity
Fb =
M m = 24
1
3
x 1.33 = -(1,500
x (2*8
in'
psi) 1.33 = 665 psi
x 0.265 x
0.911 x 665 psi

12 in/ft
2
M,,,= 1,260 ft -lb/ft > 1,240 ft -lb/ft
Use #4 @ 24 in.
.+.OK
O.C.
Wall Element Part 2

Calculate Bending Moment:
Assume door wind load is transferred to door head as a concentrated reaction.
11-50

7.3.1.2
93
0662949 0508929 855
Examde 11.1-2 Cont'd.

and
Code Reference
Calculations
Reactions at roof and foundation due to door load
:. OK
Calculate Maximum Moment

Maximum moment is located
at the concentrated load location (by inspection
at head
location)
= 187 lb X 10 ft = 1,870 ft-lb
Assume wall area above door opening spans horizontally to jamb masonry strip.
Reactions Due to Loading From Wall Area Above Door Opening
RF
= 100
plf
2
16 ft
Total
800 lb
11-51

.: OK
A C 1 TITLESRDG 93
0662949 0508930 577

Code Reference
Moment at head location due to masonry loading above lintel.
M = 100 lb X 10 ft
= 1,000 Et-lb
Moment at head location due to uniform wind load on Wall Element Part 2
= 157
plf
10 fi - 20 psf
(lo *I2
2
575 ft-lb/ft
Assume 2 ft-8 in. effective strip (size of strip on opposite jamb).

Moment:
= 575
ft-lb/&
2.67 ft
+ 1
O
,O
O
ft-lb + 1,870 fi-lb
4,410 fi-lb
Estimate Reinforcement
Try 6 in. CMU
(Assume j = 0.9 for estimate)
As =
4,410 ft-lb X 12 h/ft

24,OOO psi x 1.33 x 0.9 x 2.8 in.
= 0.658
Try (2) #6, A, = 0.88 in2

11-52

h2
A C 1 TITLEStMDG 9 3 W Ob62949 0508933 403 W
and
Calculations
1-
2 8
I
Effective Width Of Assumed Strip
(Same Width As Isolated Pier)
Check Effective Width of Compression Area shall not exceed the least of:
W = 1/2 center to center bar spacing each side of bar

W = 36 in. each side of bar
side
W = 3t each
of bar
W = 3 x 5.63 = 16.9 in.
c 1 ft-8 in. assumed in design
Move #6 Bar to next cell
I #6
I#6
Check Strength
Design Moment 4,410 ft-lb
0.88
=
in?
32 in. x 2.8 in.
0.010
11-53

7.3.2.1
A C 1 TITLESMDG 9 3
Obb2949 0508932 3 4 T

and
Code Reference
Calculations
np = 0.158
j = 0.85
= 0.42
Appears compression limited because of low j value.
Mt = A, jdF,
Mt = 0.88 in? X 0.85
2.8 in. x 24,OOO psi x
Mt = 5,570 ft-lb > 4,410 ft-lb
1.33
12 in./ft
.: OK
hd2
Mm = kjFb
Mm=
32
in*
x (2.8 h)2
0.42 x 0.85 x
Mm= 2,480 fi-lb < 4,410 fi-lb
1,500 psi
3
1.33
12 in./fi
Does not work
Options:
1.
Increase wallthickness to 8 in. CMU
Add
pilaster
3.
Increase
masonry
strength
4.
Placedoublebars
to increase d
Since this is a local condition, Option 2 is probably the most cost effective. Option 4 may
bedifficult to achieve in some areas where the ability
Option 1 is probably the most expensive solution.
As an illustration, Options 3 and 4 will be investigated

11-54

of mason contractors islimited.
Ob62949 0508933 2 8 b

Reference
Code
Option 3: Assume newf,

49410*-lb
2,480 fi-lb
Estimate:
1,500 psi
2,670 psi
Tryfm = 3,000 psi

Use Type S Mortar
Unit Strength for 3,000 psi f, needs to be determined.
By Specs. prism test assume 4,800 psi unit strength required.
Specs. 1.6.3
New Modulus:
O
'0
psi (3.2 - 2.9) 106 psi

1
O
,O
O psi
n = - 29
3.14 x lo6 psi
9.17
3.14
np = 9.17 x 0.0098 = 0.090
0.34
0.88
Mt = A,FJd
Mt
0.88
h.*
x 0.88
Mt = 5,770 ft -lb
2.8 h. X 24
O
, OO psi
.: OK
11-55

1.33
12 k/ft
Table 5.5.1.3
A C 1 TITLE*NDG
93
Obb2949 0508934 L12
Code Reference
bd2
M m = -kjFb
M,,,
= 4,160 ft-lb
4,410 ft-lb
Margin of Safety = -6%

This does not satisfy the Code; however this mayor may not be acceptable depending
on local structural design practice.
One method to further increase compression capacity isto reduce the modulus of elasticity.
Thus, by using Type N mortar instead of switching to Type S may make it work: assuming
Pmdoes not change.

Em
2.6 +
psi (2.8 - 2.6) 106 psi
1,OOO psi
0.36 j
2.76 x lo6 psi, n
10.5, np
0.10
0.88
Mt 5,770 ft-lb
:. OK
M,,,
= 4,400 ft -lb
.: OK
Another method to increase the compression capacity is to add more steel. This
is not
usually efficient, but to correct for the 6% deficiency may be the best approach. Note, the
estimate did not work because of the change in the value of n. Try (4) #6.
11-56

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
Obb29Y9 0508935 059

Code Reference
L Neglect
Increase In
Effective Width
np
1.76 i a 2
32 in. x 2.8 in.
0.180
0.44
Mt = 1.76 in? X 0.85
Mm=
32
in*
0.85
2.8 in. x 2
4
O
, OO psi x
1.33
12 h/f3
.-. OK
Mt = 11,100 fi-lb
Mm =
0.020
x (2.8 h>2
0.44 x 0.85
x 3,000 psi
1.33
12 h/ft
:. OK
fi-lb
Note: This will probably work on the other side of the door as well.
1 13/16
2
1 13116
2' 8"
Minimum bar spacing is 1 in. or the nominal bar diameter
11-57

8.3.1
A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 93
Ob62949 0508936 T95 D
Example 11.1-2 Confd.
Code Reference
1 1/2 in.
Minimum
is bar cover
8.4.l(a)
1 Min. use (2) t5
1 112 Min.cover o c .
1 13/16
Minimum thicknessof grout between the masonry and thebar for coarse grout is 1/2
in.
1 13116
8.3.5
112
Select (4) #5 spaced as above. Neglect bar closest to compression face
As = (2) x 0.31 h2= 0.62 h2 d
P =
0.62 h2
32 in. x 3.81 in.
np = 0.082,
0.33,
0.005,
= 3.81
in.
It = 16.1
j = 0.89
Mt = As jdFs
Mt = 0.62
in2
x 0.89 x 3.81 in. x %,O00 psi x
Mt = 5,580 ft-lb > 4,410 ft-lb
.: OK
11-58

1.33
12 in./fi
93
Obb2949 0508937 921
and
Code Reference
Calculations
bd2
M m = -kjFb
2
:.
M m = 3,780
ft-lb
4,410
ft-lb
Does not work
This approach was not successful. By increasing f, to 2,000 psi, it should work. Stay with
Type N mortar. This keeps the modulus lower and favors compression stress.
Table 1.6.2.2
Unit Strength 3,050 psi
50
np
(2.6 - 2.3) lo6 in./in.
2.3 x lo6 h/h.
12.6
=
0.064,
0.30,
j = 0.90
Mt = A, jdF,
Mt = 0.62 in? X 0.90 X 3.81 in. X %,O00 psi
Mt
5,660 ft-lb
4,410
ft-lb
:.
OK
11-59

1.33
12 in./ft
Table 5.5.1.3
A C 1 TITLE+MDG 93
Ob62949 0508938 8b8

Code Reference
bd2
M m = -kjFb
2
M,,,= 4,630 ft-lb > 4,410 ft-lb
:. OK
For shear considerations see MDG Example 13.1-9
11-60

73
Obb27470508937
7TY
For the interior wallon Grid Line 2 of the TMS Shopping Center (Wall Construction
Option A) design a hollow unreinforced 8 in. concrete masonry wallfor out-of-plane flexure.
fn=
r 1,500 psi
Unit Weight = 46.5 psf (see MDG Appendix A)
Type N Mortar (PCL)
and
Calculations
Since a bar joist is placed alongeach side of this wall,no roof load istransmitted to the wall.
The wall span for bending due to seismic effect is 16 ft. Although the wall extends two ft
above the joist bearing elevation, this portion is not being included in calculations to be
conservative.
The axial force at midpoint between lateral supports is:
= (8 ft)(46.5 psf) = 372 plf
The seismic loading from ASCE 7-88 is:
Fp = ZICpWp
= 3/16 for Seismic Zone 1
I = 1.0
See MDG 9.1.1.2
Cp = 0.3
(interior partition normal to flat surface)
Wp = 46.5psf
Fp = (3/16)(1)(0.3)(46.5 psf) = 2.62psf
11-61

0662949 0508940 4Lb

Code Reference
The associated bending moment and shear force are:
M,, = 1/8 Fp H1 = l/8 (2.62 p~f)(l6ft)2 = 83.8 ft-lb/ft

V,, = 1/2 Fp H = 1/2 (2.62 psf)(16 ft) = 21.0 plf
Assuming face shell bedding and using MDG Appendix A, the calculated stresses are:
M
f"'s-
- (83.8 ft-lb/ft)(l2 h./ft)
81
12.4 psi
The allowable stresses assumingf', = 1,500 psi are:
Fb = 1/3f',
= 1/3 (1,500 psi) = 500 psi
6.3.l(c)
The h/r ratio is:

5.1.3.3
Note that A is the average area of unit - not face shell area
h/r = (16 ft)(12 in./ft)/2.73 in. = 70.3 < 99

Hence,
11-62

m 0662947 0508943 352 m
Fa
Reference
'f:( 3 7
4
[l - 14Or
Code
Eq. (6.3)
Fb, = 19 psi for Type N mortar
6.3.1.1
For axial comparison for flexure,

6.3.1
:. OK
Hence, thisrequirementissatisfied.Notethattherightside
of the
interaction equation could be increased

to 1.33 since seismic loading is
included in the load combination.
5.3.2
An additional requirement is
P+", 1
where P,
7t2
EJ
h2
e = O;
11-63

93
m 0662949 0508942
299 W

and
Calculations
Assuming 2,000 psi net compressive strength of units
E, = 1.8 x 106 psi
5.5.1.3
Then,
372 plf <
f (148,900 plf)
4
:. OK
37,230 plf
Although the above is technicallycorrect, a minimum elr is advisable in lightof construction

imperfections not otherwise anticipated by analysis.
Suggest
e = 0.U = 0.763 in.
I = 309 in4
.: OK
:. P, = 87,800 plf > 372 plf

Hence, this requirement is also satisfied:
The net tensile stress at mid-height is
f,,/net = 12.4 psi
- 12.4 psi
= 0.0 psi
11-64

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
Obb2949 0508943 L25

and
Calculations
Fb, = (19 psi)l.33 = 24 psi
6.3.1.1
Hence
fbbet
Fbt
Hence, this requirement is satisfied.

For shear considerations see MDG Example 13.1-6
Therefore, theinterior nonloadbearingwall issatisfactorywith respect to out-of-plane flexure
if constructed of 8 in. concrete block units with Type N or S mortar.
11-65

Example 11.1-4
DPC Gymnasium Design of an Unreinforced Multiwythe Brick-Block
Noncomposite (Cavity) Wall for Flexure Only
For thematerial properties assumed below, designthe west wall on Grid Line 1of the DPC
Gymnasium as an unreinforced multiwythe brick-block noncomposite (cavity) wall, Wall
Construction Option A, for flexure only.
Concrete BlockMasonryClayBrickMasonry
2,ooo
6,OOo
Mortar (PCL)
Type S
Type S
2,500
1,500
Unit Strength (psi)
2.2 x 106
1.9 x 106
(Code Table 5.5.1.3)
(Code Table 5.5.1.2)
Design Wind Pressure = 20 psf
~~
Code Reference
The multiwythe wall will be constructed with a concrete block wythe of 8 in. nominal width,
a clay brick of 4 in. nominal width, and a 3 in. cavity. In addition, only face shell bedding
will be assumed for the block wythe.
The roof truss and wall arrangement are shown in MDG Fig. 9.1-4. As there is a roof truss
located adjacent to the wall under consideration, it is treated as a nonloadbearing wall
subjected to wind loads only.
The dimensions of the wall along with the locations of the movement joints andpilasters are
shown in MDG Fig. 9.1-5 as West Elevation. The expansion joints in the clay brick masonry
11-66

~~
A C 1 TITLEsMDG 9 3
Obb2949 0508945 T T 8 D

and
Code Reference
Calculations
and the control joints in the concrete block masonry are assumed to be located at the same
points. The two wythes are assumed to be sufficiently well connected with wall ties so that
the wind load is transferred directly from the brick wythe to the block wythe through the
wall ties.
The expansion joints in the brick wythe are unable to transfer any shear force. Therefore
the total wind load is assumed to be resisted by the concrete block wythe, since the control
joints have the capability to transfer shear. Considering pilasters to act as supports, a one
foot strip of the wall just above the door spanning horizontally will be designed.
A'
c C'
"
D' D
11-67

A C 1 TITLE*MDG 93
0662949 0508946 9 3 4

and
Calculations
Discussion
Reference
Code
Structurally, this horizontal strip of the wall can be treated as a continuous beam (with
hinges) resting against pilasters. The actual beam structural system along with its division
into subcomponents for analysis purposes are shown in the above sketches.
The moments in the statically determinate Sections ACC and CD,
shown above, can be easilycalculatedfromsimplestatics.
The
moments in the statically indeterminate Section DDEB have been

computed by moment distribution. The maximum moment values in
these sections are 4,610 in.-lb, 5,330 in.-lb,and 4,570 in.-lb, respectively.
Thus, M = 5,330 in.-lb is utilized for the wall design.
Allowable Tension Stress:
As the tension is parallel to the bed joints in hollow block masonry,the
6.3.1.1
maximum allowable tension from Code Table 6.3.1.1 is = 50 psi. This
5.3.2
value is increased by 33% due to wind moments to yield
Fa = 1.33(50pi)
66.5psi
Actual Maximum Tension:

From MDG Appendix A, the value of I for a 8 x 8 x 16 concrete hollow block with only face
shell mortar bedding = 309
11-68

Code Reference
fa
65.8psi < Fa
66.5psi
:. O.K.
The above computations assumed the total wind load carried by the block wythe. If found
to be deficient one might then examine the wall to span vertically and distribute the wind
load to each wythe based upon their respective flexural stiffness.
11-69

93
Example 11.1-5
DPCGymnasium
0662949 0508948 707
- Designof an UnreinforcedMultiwytheComposite

Given the following material properties,design an unreinforced multiwythe composite brick
block wall (Wall Construction Option B) for Grid Line 1 of the DPC Gymnasium as given
in MDG 9.1.2 The design isto consider flexureonly and is to consist of a 4 in. nominal face
brick wythe, a 3 in. grouted collar joint and a CMU wythe. Material properties areassumed
as follows:
Unit Strength (psi)

Mortar (PCL)
Concrete Block
Clay Brick
Masonry (Hollow)
Masonry
Grout
2,000
Type S
6,000
N.A.
Type S
N.A.
2,000 cf2
L O X 106(Code
S m
(psi)
1,500
23O0
E m
(psi)
2.2 x 106 (Code
1.9 x 106(Code
Table 5.5.1.3)
Table
5.5.1.4)
5.5.1.2)
Calculations And Discussion
Reference
Code
In this design the wall contains no pilasters and is considered to span vertically. Although
expansion/control joints are present in this design, they do not affect the wall flexurally.
According to MDG 9.1.2, a uniformly distributed wind load of 20 psf is thegoverning lateral
load in this design. The critical one ft section is taken at the center of the wall (see MDG
Fig. 9.1-5) and is considered to be pinned at the top and bottom. The maximum moment
at the midspan is given by
M = -wz2
- - (20Psf)(12~/ft)(29*33~)2
= 25.8 h-kipslft&
8
11-70

length

and
Calculations
and the maximum shear, V,near supports equals
The west wall is parallel to the roof trusses and does not resist any
gravity loads other than its own weight. In thisdesign, the wallis
considered as a simple flexural element and the minimal amount of
axial compression is neglected.
The allowable compressive stress
in unreinforced masonryismuch
greater than the allowable tensile
stress; thus, for wall systems in simple flexure,

tensile stress is the critical
design
composite walldesigns
theshear
the allowable flexural
parameter.
In addition, for
stress at the wythe-collar joint
5.8.1.2
interface must be checked to insure that its value does not exceed 10
psi for grouted collar joints.
In walls designedfor composite action,the stresses are tobe computed
using section properties based on the minimum transformed net crosssectional area of the compositemember.
The generally accepted
transformed area concept for elastic analysis, in which area of

dissimilar materials are transformed in accordance with their relative
elastic moduli ratios, shall apply.
For the design example, trya multiwythe composite wall composedof
a 4 in. facebrickwythe,
a 3 in. grouted collar joint, and a 12 in.
concrete block wythe (50% grouted). The position of the neutral axis
from an axis through the center of block is found by equating the first
11-71

5.13.1.2
A C 1 TITLESMDG 73
Obb27470508750
365 W

Reference
Code
moment of the transformed areas about this axis as follows:
CMU
12"
1S
'
'
8.63"
I
1.5"
-R
"
3.63"
Grouted Collar Joint
Clay Brick
Transformed Area for Composite Wall

From MDG Appendix A, for hollow block withfull mortar bedding, the area and'I for one
ft length are equal to 57.8 in2 and 1070in.4,respectively.Using
these values and the
dimensions of the transformed section shown above, the centroid distance
11-72

2 is given by
A CT1I T L E r M D G
0662949 0508953 2 T L
93

and
Calculations
5.45in. x 3 h x( 14*63h.) + 10.4h x3.63hx( 11.63h +3.63h+3h

2
2
r =
x =
or
519h3 120h3+399h3
=-
57.8in.2+ 18.6in.2+ 16.3id +37.6in?
180m.2
3.98in. belowC.G.ofblockwythe
X =
.;
Reference
I,
= 107Oin.'+57.8in?x(3.98h.)2
+2.16h. ~(8.63in.)'/12 +2.16in.~ 8 . 6 3 h ~ ( 3 . 9 8 h - y
+ 5.45 in.x (3 h.)3/12+ 5.45 m. x 3in.x 14'6;3h. -3.98h
+ 10.36in. x(3.63hJ3/12
+ 10.36in. x3.63h. ~ ( 1 0 . 6 3 h
-3.98in.y
I,
or
I~
1O7Oin~+916in!+115h4+295in!+l2h4+182h.4+41in!+166oin!
4,280
in."
The distances of the extreme fibers from the neutral axis of concrete block and clay brick
can be calculated as 9.79 and 8.46 in., respectively. The maximum tensile stresses normal
to bed joints in concrete block and clay brick masonry, assuming
compression and suction, can be computed as follows.
For Concrete Block
For Clay Brick

equal values for wind
A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
Ob62949 0508952 L38

and
Discussion
Calculations
Reference
Code
The maximum allowable flexural tension for solid clay brick masonry
and 50% grouted concrete block
masonry
(by
interpolation) are
taken
6.3.1.1
from Code Table 6.3.1.1 for tension normal to the bed joints. These
values are increased by 33% for
wind
to yield the following

allowable
5.3.2
tension stresses:
For Concrete Block
For Clay Brick
F&
1.33(40pi) = 53.2psi > 44.Opsi
As these maximum allowable tension magnitudes are larger than actual tension, design is
safe for flexure.
Shear Stress at Collar Joint Interface
For the composite action to be considered, the Code limits the shear
stress at the wythe - collar joint interfaces to 10 psi for grouted collar
joints. The shear stress is computed by the formula, Code Eq. 6-7,
fv
VQ
where the standard meanings apply to the symbols used. The critical
section is at the block - collar joint interface. Using the figure shown
earlier in this example,
11-74

6.5.1
A C 1 TITLE*NDG
93
Ob62949 0508953 074

and
Calculations
Code Reference
Q = 10.4in. x3.63in.X
.:
fv
11.63ia +3.63h +3h. -3.98h
25Oh3+54.5h3 = 304h'
2931bx304h3 = 3.82psi
4,280in.4 x 5.45 in.
lopsi, F,, :. OK for shear
Since the brick and block wythes are not bonded by headers, minimum
5.8.1.5
wall ties must be provided per Code.
11-75

Example 11.1-6
DPC Gymnasium Design of a Reinforced Multiwythe Composite Wall

for Flexure Only
Design a reinforced composite brick-block wall (Wall Construction Option C) for thewall
on Grid Line 1 of the DPC Gymnasium. Since this is
a nonloadbearing wall, the design
considers flexure only. The wall is composed of a nominal 4 in. clay brick wythe,
a 2 in.
grouted collar joint, and a nominal 8 in. concrete masonry wythe, to create anoverall 13.25
in. thick wall. The reinforcement is located in the collar joint. The material properties are
assumed as follows:
Concrete Block
Clay Brick
Masonry (Hollow)
Masonry
Grout
2,OOo
8,OOo
N.A.
Type N
Type N
N.A.
1,500
1.8 x 106 (Code
2,m
2,000 v g psi)
2.0 x 106 (Code
1.0 x 106 (Egpsi)
Table 5.5.1.3)
Table 5.5.1.2)
Unit Strength (psi)

Mortar
P m
(psi)
E m (psi)
16.1
It
14.5
Reinforcement - Grade 60, E = 29 x 106 psi
Reference
Code
The wall on Grid Line 1 of the DPC Gymnasium spans vertically between pin supports at
the top of the foundation wall and at the roof diaphragm. A one footwide section located
at the center
of the wallgoverns the design. The moment at midspanis25.8in.-kips,
considering a lateral wind pressure of 20 psf (see MDG Example 11.1-5). Initially, wind
pressure is considered to act in a direction that causes compressionin the brick wythe. The
wallwill also be checked for the wind suction case, where
11-76

the inside face shell of the
AC1
TITLExMDG 93 m 0 b b 2 9 4 9 0508955 947 m

and
Calculations
concrete block is in compression.Determination of wind pressure and suction in accordance

with ASCE 7-88 islikely to result in design suction forces
greater than design pressure
forces. However, for simplification of calculations in this Guide, the design pressure and
suction are considered to have the same value. The required steel area can be calculated
from the internal couple shown below:
1.25
7.63
13.3
3.63
Wind Pressure Case

Estimating the initial value o f j as 0.9, and taking the allowable tensile
stress, F,, in steel (increased by 33% from 24,000 psi due to wind) as
11-77

5.3.2
..
AC1
TITLExMDG 93 9 Obb2949 0508956 883
and
Code Reference
Calculations
gives psi,32,000
the required steel area as
A,
7.2.1.1
25,800 h-lb
= 0.194
(32,000 psi)(0.9)(4.63in.)
h2/ft
of wall
Check if maximum allowable masonry compression stress, Fb, controls:
Also, from the internal couple
for j = 0.9, k = 0.3
fb =
2(25,800 h -lb)
12 in.(0.3)(4.63 in.)(0.9)(4.63 in.)
Therefore steel stress governs.

For A, req'd = 0.194
11-78

745 psi
Fb = 889 psi
7.3.1.2
A C 1 T I T L E r M D G 9 3 W 0662949 0508957 7 1 T
and
Calculations
Code Reference
25,800 ia-lb
(0.207 in?)(32,000
psi)(4.63
j = - -
A,F,d
3 - 3j
3(0.842)
= 0.842
in.)
0.479
2(25,800 h-lb)
= 504 psi
- (12 in.)(0.479)
(4.63 in.)(0.842)(4.63 in.)
2M
fb =
f b = 504 psi < Fb
:.
889 psi
OK
Verify:
T = C
or (0.207 in?)(32,000 psi)

6,625
lb
Mt = Tjd
504 psi (12 in.)(0.479) (4.63 in.) -
(J
:. OK
= 6,630 lb
6,625Ibs(0.842)(4.63
in.)
11-79

25,800 in.-lb
.:
OK
93
Obb2949 0508958 b5b
Code Reference
Wind Suction Case
fbl
t = 1.25"
b = 12"
-A
d = 8.63"
7.38"
n .As
= .207(16.1)
= 3.33 in2
The transformed sectionis considered with face shellmortar bedding only inCMU masonry.
For values o f j and k
n AJd - kd) = bt(kd ot
(16.1)(0.207)(8.63
- 8.63k) = 12(1.25)(8.63k
or 28.70 - 28.70R
from which, k
0.241 and j
i)
= 1 -
-A
3
129.0k - 9.38
0.241 = 0.920
1 -3
Assuming that CMU reaches the maximum allowable stress, Pb, first
11-80

7.3.1.2
Cade Reference
5.3.2
From the sketch on the previous page,
1.25
or
fb2 =
(' - cd)
fbl =
- 0.601)fbl
fb2 = ( 1
.: c
:.
226 psi
1.25 in.
- (0.241) (8.63 h) f b l
0.399fbl = (0.399)(667 psi) = 266 psi
['
+(1.25 in.)(12 in.) = 7,000 lb
Steel governs, and the assumption thatthe CMU reaches its maximumallowable
stress first is incorrect.
Try letting the steel reach its allowable stress first:
Since the position of the neutral axisis unchanged, the masonry stresses can simply be
determined by proportion:
f, = F, = 32,000 psi
11-81

33,800 psi
Reference
631 psi
fbz = 266 psi (33,800

32000 psi) = 252 psi
667 psi
:.
OK
667 psi
:,
OK
T = A,
(32,000psi)(0.207 h.?= 6,630 lb
Mt = Tjd
6,630 lb(0.92)(8.63 h.)
Mt = 52,600 in.-lb > Me
..
<
25,800 in.-lb
:.
Code
OK
Provide #S @ 18 in.
O.C.
NOTE:
As discussed in MDG Chapter 9, it is possible that composite brick-block walls

may experience delamination at the collar joint, due
to shear from differential
movement, in-plane loads, and out-of-plane loads.
The calculationsofthis
example are valid only if such delamination does not occur.
11-82

A C 1 TITLE8KMDG 93
Example 11.1-7
0662949 0508961 L40
DPC
Gymnasium
Design of a Single Wythe

Reinforced
Nonloadbearing Hollow Clay Masonry Wall for Flexure

Given the following material, design a single-wythe reinforced hollow clay masonry wall for
the wall on Grid Line 1of the DPCGymnasium (Wall Construction Option D). The design
is to consider flexure only. Reinforcement is placed in the cells of the hollow units.
MasonryBrick
Clay
Grout
Unit Strength (psi)
6,000
NA
Mortar
Type S
2,500
NA
P m
(psi)
39800 G)
x 106
1.9 x 106 (Code Table 5.5.1.2)

1.9
E (Psi)
n
15.3
Steel Reinforcement Grade 60, E = 29 x 106 psi
and
Calculations
The wall spans vertically. A one-foot section located at the center
of the wall w
ill be
designed. The wall is assumed to be pinned at the top and bottom. For a vertical span of
29 ft
4 in., the midspanbendingmoment
is25.8in.-kips/ft.,
considering a lateral
compressive wind load of 20 psf (see MDG Example 11.1-5). For simplicity, it is assumed
that the grout has the same stiffness as the clay masonry, Sm.A 6 in. thick x 4 in. high 8
in. long nominal hollow clay unit will be used with Grade 60 reinforcement.
From
the
geometry
d = 5*50 in. = 2.75

2
of
the
units,
shown
below,
the
effective
depth
is
in. The first step is to estimate the required steel area for design.
11-83

A C 1 TITLElKMDG 9 3 M 0662749 05089b2 O87

~
CalcuIations and Discussion
~~
Code Reference
From the preceding sketch of the internal couple,
Assuming an initial value for j = 0.9, and increasing the allowable
7.2. l. 1
tensile stress in steel (24,000 psi) by 33% for wind, the required A, can
5.3.2
be computed as:
A,
25,800 h - l b
(24,OOO psi x 4/3)(0.9)(2.75 in.)
0.33
in2/ft
of wall
Check if allowable masonry stress controls:

Because of the 33% increase due to wind, the allowable stress in brick,
Fb, is given as
7.3.1.2
(2,500 psi)
or
5.3.2
Fb = 1,110 psi
11-84

TITLE*NDG
AC1
93
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0 5 0 8 9 b 3 T13

and
Calculations
For the assumed value of j = 0.9, the corresponding value of k is 3 - 3j = 3 - 3(0.9) = 3 -
2.7 = 0.3. For this value of k, the compressive stress in masonry is

fb=
2 (25,8OO in -lb)
in.(0.9)(0.3) (2.75
2M bjkd212
2,110 psi
>
Fb =
1,110 psi
in.)2
Therefore, for the previously assumed values

ofj and k, masonry compressive stress controls.
Continue the problem assuming that
fb
= Fb = 1,100 psi.
Let
2M
- Fb
1,100 psi
bjkd
1,100
k(1 -
2(25,800 in.-lb)
$)
k
= 0.51
0.66
j = 1 - -
0.78
Bystraincompatibility,
f, =
(y)..
11-85

A C 1 T I T L E r f l D G 93 D 0662949 0508964 95T

0.66
= (
Code Reference
(15.3)(1,110 psi)
8,750 psi
Fs = %,O00 psi
Therefore, the assumption that compression controls is correct.

25,800 h.-lb
= 1.37 h2/ft
- "
fJd
(8,750 psi)(O.78)(2.75 h)
-
"
Use 1 #6 bar in each cell of the hollow clay units.
A,
3 x 0.44
in? =
1.32 in."/ft
1.37 h2/ft
Note that this is a heavily reinforced wall. An alternative design would involve a thicker
masonry unit and less reinforcement.
11-86

A C 1 TITLEsMDG 73
Obb2947 05089b5 89b
RCJ Hotel - Design of aReinforcedClay Brick Lintel
Example 11.1-8
For thematerial properties given below, designa single-wythe reinforced clay brick lintelfor
the service entrance on Grid Line B of RCJ Hotel (Wall Construction Option B, Building
Construction Option II; see MDG Fig. 9.1-11). The design is to consider flexure only.
Masonry
Brick
Clay
Grout
Unit Strength (psi)
~,ooo
N.A.
Mortar
Type S
N.A.
T m (Psi)
2,500
3,800 cfg)
1.9 x 106
x 106 (Code Table 5.5.1.2)
E 1.9
(Psi)
n
15.3
and
Calculations
Discussion
Reference
Code
The lintel will be built with clay bricks of dimensions 7 1/2 in. thick x 3 1/2 in. high x 11 1/2
in. long. The floor height in the Building Construction Option II is 8 ft - 10 in. Reduction
of 7 ft - O in. for the height of the service entrance gives total lintel height of 1 ft
- 10 in.
The entrance is 6 ft - 8 in. wide. Allowing for 8 in. bearing at each end (theCode requires
a minimal of 4 in., see Code 7.3.3.3), the center line span, I, to be used for calculation is
The dead load and live load for RCJ Hotel are given in MDG 9.1.3.1 as 110 psf and 40 psf,
respectively. The corresponding self weight of the wall from the same MDG section is 70
psf. It is conservatively assumed that the floor above the kitchen (See MDG Fig. 9.1-6) is
supported along Grid Lines B and C. In addition, the lintel only supports the wall load
defined by 45" angles from its supports due to the arching action. This wall load will be
11-87

AC1
TITLE*IDG 93 m 0662949 0508966 7 2 2 m
and
Code Reference
Calculations
assumed to act at the midspan of the lintel.
:.
Floor &
a
d + live Load
(1 10 psf
40
psf)(y)
1
Self weight of 7- in. x 22 h lintel =
(140 Pd)
W =
-I
7.33'
Lintel Span = 1
M - - -- +w12
8
Pl
4
- 2,410 plf(7.33 hJ2(12 hm)
940 Ib(7.33 in.)(12

4(1ow
194.0 &
k
i
p
s+ 20.7 h-kip = 215.0 h-kips
+
wow
M-
V-(nsid supprts)
V-
6.67 ft
2,410
8,040lb + 470 lb
940 lb
-
8,510 lb
11-88

2,410plf
Self Weight of wall above lintel (see sketch)
P = i(7.33 f
i
)
(7.33 ft)(70 prf)
2
P = 940 lb
2,250 plf
hm)
0662949 0508967 669 W

~~
Reference
For Grade 60 steel, allowable stress F# = 24,000psi.

depth, d , can be conservatively
assumed
The effective
as (22 in. - 2 in.) = 20

in.
7.2.1.1
Using the sketch of moment resisting couple shown in MDG Example
11.1-7, the required steel areasis given by
in which j will be initially

estimated as 0.9
.: A,
215 h.-kips(loOO lb/ldp)

(24,000 psi) (0.9)(20 in.)
h2
Recompute k for steel provided:

First moments of area about NA are equal
11-89

Code
AC1
TITLESMDG 93 W 0662949 0508968 5T5 W

Code Reference
..
or (7,5)(2Ok)(lOk) = (15.3)(0.613)(20)(1 - k)
or 1500k2 = 188 - 187k
or k2 + 0.125k - 0.125 = O
Solving the quadratic equation yields
k = 0.296
.: j = 1 - - =k1 - - = 1 -0.2%
0.099=0.901
3
CheckingSteelStress:vs.
F,)
Check Stresses in Masonry:
&, vs. F b )
fb="
2M 2(215 h.-kip~)(lOOO)
bkjd'
(7.5 in.)(0.296)(0.901)(20 in.)2
CheckforShearStress:
vs. F")
From Code Es. 7.3, shear stressf v is given by
11-90

7.5.2.1
AC1
TITLExMDG 93 m Ob62949 0 5 0 8 9 b 9 431 m

Code Reference
fv =
which
in
bjd
for computing
maximum
shear stress, V is computed at d/2
from the face of the support. The

shear
d from face
V8 2
..
*
fv
stress
shall
8330 lb - 2,410 plf
Check for Bearing Stress:
('fb
not exceed
( ly:m)i
6,320 lb
= 46.8 psi
(7.5 in.)(0.901)(20 in.)
7.5.5
50 psi
7.5.2.2(a)
6,320 lb
:.
OK
vs. Fb)
5.12.3
The maximum allowable bearing stress is given as
0.25(f',)
= 0.25(2,500 psi) = 625 psi
End reaction
2,410 plf
"1 y
-+-
r3:
R = 8,830 lb + 470lb
lb
9,303 lb
For the bearing length on each end of 8 in. assumed earlier,
Bearing Stress
9,303 lb
(7.5 in.)@ in.)
155 psi < 625 psi
11-91

:.
OK
AC1
Example 11.1-9
TITLEIMDG 93 m 0662949 0508970 L53 m
- UnreinforcedRetainingWallDesign
RCJHotel
for Outsf-Plane
Flexure
For theretaining wall shown on Grid Line A of the RCJ Hotelin MDG Fig 9.1-6determine
if an unreinforced concrete masonry wall is sufficient.
S,,, = 1,500 psi
Weight of masonry (12-in. thick
- solid grouted) = 100 psf
Type N mortar (PCL)
Running bond
Active earth pressure coefficient K =
Weight of soil y = 100 pcf
and
IS
Calculations
113
Elevation 104-O
Unmeinforced
Sidewalk
Elevation
Reinforced Concrete
1.
Footing
Stem Height
For purposes of setting the stem height, assume that the footing will be 12 in. thick. The
bottom of the footing should be below the frost line. In this example, it is assumed that 30
in. of cover above the bottom of the footing is sufficient to place it below the frost line.
Height of stem
= 104.0
ft - 99.5 ft + 30h - 1 f t = 6 f i
12 in./ft
11-92

A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93
0662949 0508973 09T

and
Calculations
2.
StemDesign
- for a 1ft - O in.long
strip ofwall
The allowable flexural tensile stress normal

to the bed jointswith Type
N mortar is 58 psi.
At
the
base
of the wall, where

the
interface
6.3.1.1
is
masonry to concrete, this allowable value may not be applicable. However, no Code values
are given for this condition and the Code allowable value for masonry
to masonry interface
will be used.
Section modulus of 1 ft long strip of wall =
(12in.)(11.63 in.)*
6
270
ia3
Pressure at base of stem = 200 psf

=
600 lb
Moment at base of stem =
Check shear stress in stem
f vQ=-x3 -forz
rectangular
a
section
11-93

6.5.1
A CT 1I T L E l r M D G
0662949 0508972 T26 W
93
and
Calculations
Discussion
600 lb
fv
3.
4.3 psi < 1.5
58.1 psi :. OK
(11.63 in.)(12 in.)
1.5 d
m
Code Reference
6.5.2
Joint Reinforcement
Use joint reinforcement consisting of No. 9 longitudinal wires and No. 9 cross rods in each
mortar bed for crack control.
4.
Stability and Soil Pressure Check
The dimensions of the reinforced concrete footing should be set to prevent overturning
and/or sliding of the wall. In addition, the pressure under the toe of the footing must be
smaller thanthe
allowable pressure for the type of soilinvolved.
Referto
textson
geotechnical engineering or concrete design for examples of these calculations.

5.
Footing Design
The reinforced concrete footing shouldbe designed in accordance with the provisions of the
latest edition of ACI-318.
11-94

A C 1 T I T L E S M D G 9 3 9 Obb2949 0508773 7b2
Example 11.1-10
RCJHotel
- ReinforcedRetainingWallDesign
for Out-of-Plane
Flexure
For the retaining wall shown on Grid Line A of the RCJ Hotel in MDG Fig 9.1-6, design
the necessary wall size and reinforcement.
Sm = 2,500 psi
8 in. hollow clay brick (7.5 in. x 3.5 in. x 11.5 in.)
Type S mortar
Running bond
Active earth pressure coefficient K = 0.45
Weight of soil y = 100 pcf
n = 15.3
Grade 60 steel (Fs= 24,000 psi)
Reference
A7*"&Elevation
Code
104'-O"
yK,h = (100)(0.45)(6.0) = 270 PSf
Reinforced Brick
Reinforced Concrete Footing
1.
Stem Height
The stem height for this problem will be the same as for MDG Example 11.1-9.
2.
StemDesign
- For a 1 ft-O in. long strip ofwall
Lateral pressure at base of stem = 270 psf
11-95

A C 1 TITLErMDG 93
Obb29Y9 050897Y & T 9
and
Code Reference
Calculations
Momentatbaseofstem
= (810
d =Assume
3.75
in.
)'
P =
np
19,400 h-lb/ft
j = 0.875
A , % -"
19,400 h -lb/ft
Fsj d (%,O00 psi) (0.875) (3.75 in.)
Try No. bars

5
1,620 ft-lb/ft
@ 12
in.
0.31 in?
(3.75 in.)(12 in.)
0.247 in?/ft
1
11.5"
A, = 0.31
in.2/ft
O.C.
0.007
(15.3)(0.007) = 0.105
-4
=
- It p
40.1052 + (2)(0.105)
- 0.105 = 0.365
Check steel stress
Provide matching dowels from wall to footing.

Check masonry stress
7.3.1.2
11-96

AC1 TITLEtHDG 9 3 9 0662949 0508975 735 m
and
Calculations
Reference
"=bf
jkbd2
:. OK
(2)( 19,400 in.-lb)

= 720 psi < 833 psi
(0.878) (0.365)(12 in.)(3.75 i
n
.
)
'
Check shear stress

Allowable shear stress Fv
fv =
v -
bjd -
810 lb
(12 in.)(0.878) (3.75 in.)
7.5.2.2
50 psi
20.5 psi
50 psi
.: OK
7.5.2.1
Shear steel is not needed.
3.
Horizontal Steel
Although not required by the Code, it is advisable to provide somehorizontal steel. Provide
a bond beam at the top of the wall,reinforcedwith
1 No. 5. Provide standard joint
reinforcement every 16 in. for crack control.

4.
Stability and Soil Pressure Check
The dimensions of the reinforced concrete footing should be set to prevent overturning
and/or sliding of the wall. In addition, the pressure under the toe of the footing must be
smaller than the allowable pressure for the type ofsoilinvolved.
Refer to textson
geotechnical engineering or concrete design for examples of these calculations.
5.
Footing Design
The reinforced concrete footing should be designed

in accordance with the provisions of the
latest edition of ACI-318.
11-97

A C 1 TITLE*MDG 93
- Designof
Example11.1-11RCJHotel
0662747 050897b
b7L
an UnreinforcedMultiwytheNoncomposite
(Cavity) Brick-Block Masonry Nonloadbearing Wall for Flexure! Only

For the material properties given below, designthe wall on Grid Line 3 between Grid Lines
F and G from MDG Fig.9.1-7
for RCJ Hotel. The wall is unreinforced multiwythe
noncomposite (cavity) brick-blockwall of Building Option II and Wall Construction Option
A, and is to be designed for wind loads only.

Concrete Block
Masonry
Clay
Brick
Masonry
Unit Strength (psi)6,000
2,000
Mortar
Type S (PCL)
S m
Type S (PCL)
2,5 O0
(Psi)
(psi)
2.2 x 106 (Code Table 5.5.1.3)
Design Wind Pressure = 25 psf
1.9 x 106 (Code

Table
Em
Reference
Code
The multiwythe wall willbe constructed of
8 in.wide nominal concrete block, 4 in.

thick nominal clay brick with a 3 in. cavity
separatingthe twowythes.
In addition,
f.
only face shell bedding will be considered
8"8"
Stair
I < ,
for the block wythe.

I
It is assumed that thewall rests against the

stair and landings and accordingly spans in
the vertical direction, with a span
11-98

5.5.1.2)
A C 1 TITLE+MDG 93 W Obb27g7 0508777 508 W

and
Calculations
length of 8 ft - 8 in. as shown in the figure. One foot strip of wall spanning in the vertical
direction will be designed. For the design wind load of 25 psf, the maximum moment is
5.7.1
The totalmoment isdistributed to individual blockand brick wythes in

proportion to their bending rigidities as shown in MDG Example 9.3-6.
The moment of inertias of the block and brick wythes, respectively,can
be taken from MDG Example 9.3-6 as
309 i
n
! and Ibr = 47.6 in?
The individual wvthe moments are
IM
MM = (2,820 in.-lb)
(1.9
106 in?-lb)
106 in?-lb)
M M = (2,820 h-lb) (679

(770
3
(2.2 x 106 psi)(309 h
lo6 psi) (47.6 i a 4 ) + (2.2 x lob psi)(309 i
n
!
)
or Mbl
2,490 in.-lb
Ma
(2,820 h.-lb)
M&
(2,820 ia -1b)(9O.4 X 106 h2-1b)

(770 X lob in?-lb)
or M ,
331
(1.9 x 106 psi)(47.6 i a 4 )

(770 X lob h?-lb)
in.-lb
11-99

A C 1 TITLESNDG 93
Obb2949 0508978 444
and
Code Reference
Calculations
Bending Stresses:
The bending in the vertical direction produces tension perpendicular
to the bed joints. In order to be conservative, the normal compressive
6.3.1.1
stresses due to the weight of the wall have been neglected. However,
5.3.2
a 33% increase due to wind loads yields an allowable flexural tension

stress as:
Fa
(1.33)(25 psi)
33.3 psi for Concrete Masonry
Fa
(1.33)(40 psi)
53.3 psi for Clay Masonry
In Concrete Block
f h MmC
= -
o
(2,490 h-lb)
7.63 in.
30.7 psi
33.3 psi Fa .: OK
309 h4
In Clay Brick:
f a Mbrc
= --
(331 h-lb)( 3.63 in.
12.6 psi < 53.3 psi
Fa .: OK
47.6 h4
=.
h unreinforced multiwythenoncompositebrick-blockmasonrywall
made of 8 in.
wide concrete blocks, 4 in. wide clay bricks with a 3 in. cavity is satisfactory for this
design.
11-100

A C 1 TITLExMDG 9 3
Example 11.1-12
RCJ
Hotel
Obb2949 0508979 380
- Design Reinforced
of
a
Clay
Brick
Nonloadbearing
Wall
I
~
for Flexure Only
For the material properties
Il
given below, design
the wallof MDG Example 11.1-11 for
Building Option I, Wall Construction Option B, as a hollow reinforced claybrick

nonloadbearing wall for out-of-plane flexure only.
Masonry
Brick
Clay
Unit Strength (psi)
Grout
6,OOo
NA
Type S
NA
2,5O0
3,800 6 )
1.9 x 106 (Code Table 5.5.1.2)1.9
x 106
15.3
and
Calculations
The stair and landing arrangements forthis wall are similar to those shown in the figure of
MDG Example 11.1-11. except that the floor height in this building option = 9 ft - 8 in. The
design wind load in this example is equal to 25 psf.
The following assumptions are made in this reinforced wall example,
1.
The landings are connected tothe walls.
2.
The stairs are not connected to the wall.
3.
The wall above and belowlandings behaves as a strip and spans in the vertical
direction between landings.
11-101


4.
Code Reference
The 7 ft wide horizontal portion of the wall spans horizontally between the vertical
strips.
5.
The wallwill be designedfor flexure only.
Horizontal Steel
Center to center of landing is considered as the span
Considering a one foot wide strip, the maximum moment is given as
M="
wz2
- 25
Theallowable
ft12(12 h*/fi)= 4,540 h-lb/ft

8
stress in Grade 60 steel is 24,000

which
canpsi
increased by 33% for wind load, thus
'F
1.33(24,000 psi) = 32,000 psi
3.75"
brick wall, the effective depth, d as shown,

is equal to 3.75 in. Assuming j = 0.9, the
required steel area in the
horizontal
direction is calculated as
-" "
4,540 h.-lb/fi
- 'F j d (32,000 psi)(0.9)(3.75 in.)
Use 1 - #4 @ 40 in., A, = 0.06 in.2/ft

or
7.2.1.1
5.3.2
Considering a 71/2 in. thick hollow clay
As
be
2 - #3 @ 40 in., A, = 0.066 in.2/ft
11-102

0.042 in?/ft
AC1 TITLE*MDG 93 M Obb2949 0508981 T39 D

and
Calculations
or
Discussion
Code Reference
joint reinforcement
Typically for seismic areas whole bars would be used with notched masonry units.
In non-seismic areas joint reinforcement would be common.
Check k
or
(12)(3.75k)(
or
84.4k2 = 3.38 - 3.38k
or
k2 + 0.04k - 0.04 = O
k) = (15.3) (0.06)(3.75
- 3.75k)
from which
= 0.18
.. j = l - L = 1 - o*18
--- 1
3
:.
0.06 = 0.94
"
4,540 h.-lb
Steel Stress, f, = A, j d
(0.06i1~)~(0.94)(3.75 in.)
fs
PS = 32,000 psi
21,500 psi
Masonry Stress:
With a 33% increase due to wind
Fa
(i)
(1.33) - (2,500 psi)
1,110 psi
11-103

.-. OK
A C 1 TITLElrMDG 93
Ob62949 0508982 975

and
Code Reference
Calculations
fbh-"
2
"
bkjd2
(4,540 in.-lb)(2)
(12 in.)(O.18) (O"(3.75
in.>"
Vertical Steel:
Distance between landings = 9 ft - 8 in.
It will be conservatively assumedthat thewind on half of 15 ft wall widthbetween Grid Line
F and G acts as a load on 4 ft wide wall strip spanning vertically between the landings. The
strip will be assumed to be simply supported at its ends. Based on this assumption,
Wind load on 4 ft wide strip = l5 *(Spsf) = 188 plf
2
Assuming j = 0.9,
AJreq'a
"
6,580 h.-lb
Fsj d (32,000 psi) (0.9)(3.75 in.)
Use #4 @ 36 in., A, = 0.066 in.2/ft
11-104

0.061 h2/*
A C 1 TITLExMDG 9 3
0bb2949 0 5 0 8 9 8 3 B O L

Code Reference
Check k
k)
(15.3)(0.066)(3.75 - 3.75k)
or
(12) (3.75k)(
or
84.4k2 = 3.79 - 3.79k
01
k2
0.045k - 0.045
From which
= 0.19
j = 1 - -R= 1 - 3
1 - 0.063
0.937
Steel Stress:
<
28,400 psi
Fs = 32,000 psi
:. OK
Masonry Stress:
"=bf
(2)
(6,580 in.-lb)
bkjd'
(12
in.)(0.19)(0.937)(3.75
=
438 psi
in.>"
Fb = 1,110 psi
Provide steel as shown.
11-105

:.
OK
0662949 0508984 748

and
Calculations
Steel Areas
Horizontal
Vertical
0.20
in2
(40in.)(7.5 in.)
0.00067
o20 i n 2
= 0.00074
(36 in.)(7.5
_ . in.)
To& = 0.00141
k4.5
For Seismic Zone 3 or 4 the total minimumempiricalseismic

reinforcement required by Appendix is 0.002. A minimum of 0.0007
reinforcement is required in each direction.
Increase steel amount to that shown in sketch to meet seismic criteria.
Horizontal Steel 94
One At Level Of
In Between
Landings.
Horizontal
Vertical
W."-"
29 in.(7.5 in.)
0.20
in?
24 in47.5 in.)
' Vertical Steel t4 @ 24" O C .
- 0.00111
0.0020
11-106

____
A C 1 TITLE*MDG 9 3
Example 11.2-1
DPCGymnasium
Obb2949 0508985 bB4
- Design of Unreinforced Pilaster for Flexure
The DPC Gymnasium walls (see MDG 9.1.2, Fig. 9.1-4) on Grid Lines 1 and 2 are to be
braced against lateral loads with pilasters at 16 ft centers for Wall Construction Option A.
Determine the size of an unreinforced concrete masonry pilaster that is needed to resist
bending resulting from lateral forces acting on the east or west wall.
Since the roof trusses run in the north-south direction, the east and west walls are not
loadbearing walls. Pilasters are needed only to resist flexure resulting from lateral wind or
earthquake forces applied to the wall in theeastor
westdirection.
The pilaster is
considered to be fully grouted to achieve the needed flexural capacity. The 8 in. CMU wall
is considered to be ungrouted with face shell bedding. Since a control joint is to be placed
immediately north of the column portion, the resulting sectioncontains a flange ononly one
side as shown below. The block wythe is assumed
to carry all wind loading. Preliminary
estimates have indicated that a 32 in. square pilaster is needed to resist flexure under wind
loadings. Alternate coursing is shown below.
.63"
OR
Coursing for 32 in. Square Pilaster

The earthquake loading is equal to 0.0875 times the weight of the wall per MDG 9.1.2.2.
Considering the weight of the exterior brick wythe with the weight of the 8 in. CMU wythe
gives a total weight equal to 140 psf, or an equivalent static lateral seismic force equal to
11-107

A C 1 TITLEStMDG 9 3
Obb29Y9 0508986 510

Reference
Code
12.3 psf. Thus, the 20 psf wind loading governs.

Each pilaster is assumed to resist a 16 ft tributary width of wind pressure, or 320 plf along
its height. Assuming pin supports at the top andat the bottom of the pilaster, the maximum
moment at midheight is:
Because flexural stresses may be high for the 30 ft tall unreinforced

pilaster, the controlling parameter islikely
to be flexuraltension
normal to bed joints. Allowable code values for Fbcare 58 psi and 19
psi for fully grouted and ungrouted constructionrespectively
6.3.l.1
for
Portland Cement Type N mortar. Interpolating between these values

based on percentages of grouted (74%) or ungrouted areas (26%)
gives a value of 48 psi. For this interpolation, the grouted area was
taken as 31.63 in. x 31.63 in. or 1,OOO in.2, and the ungrouted area was
5.3.2
taken as 45.78 in. x 7.63 in. or 349 in.2. Thus, 74% of the section may
be considered as grouted. This allowable may be increased by a third,
for comparison to wind induced stresses, giving a value equal to64 psi.
The effective section of the pilaster isshownbelow.
Because the
column portion is fully grouted, all of its area isconsidered.

overhanging
flange
wall, or 45.78 in.
portion is taken
to
Only thearea
The
be six times the width of the
5.10.1
of the mortared bed joints is
considered in the flange, because theiswall
ungrouted.
11-108

5.13.4.2
AC1
TITLESMDG 93 m 0662949 0508987 457 m
~~

and
Calculations
The location of the centroid of the sectionfrom the interior face,
7, is determined by
summing the first moments of the areas of each segment and dividing by the total area as
4
below.
shown
Exterior
15.41
1.25
j
!
3 1.63
7=16.22
Interior
Item
Area
Arm
Moment
15,800
31.63 in. x 31.63 in. = 1,000 x
15.81 in.
1.25 in. x 45.78 in. = 57.2
23.00 in.
1,315
1.25 in. x 45.78 in. = 57.2
16.63 in.
95 1
1,114 in.2
Total
18,070 in.3
= 18,070/1,114 = 16.22 in.
Effective Section of Pilaster

The moment of inertia is taken about the centroid as follows:
I = (31.63 h)4 + 1,OOO in?(0.39

12
I = 86,220 h4
in.)2 +
57.2 h~~(6.80
in.)2 + 57.2 in?(0.43
11-109

ia)2
AC1
TITLESMDG 9 3
0662949 O508988 3 9 3

Flexural tension stress,
h,, is computed
Reference
Code
for the case of a wind pressure acting on the
windward face, or when tension is developed on the interior side of the pilaster.
Mwrnd Y -- (34.4k-fi X 12) (16.22 h)

x 1,OOO = 77.6 psi
f&= I
86,220 in?
If
Fat = 64 psi
:. N.G.
were less than halfof the pilaster depth, then wind should be assumed as a suction
acting on the leeward face, and tension on the exterior side checked.
The self weight of the pilaster at midheight creates an axial compressivestress that may be
deducted from the flexural tension stress to determine the nettensile stress. Assuming fully
grouted concrete masonry to weigh140pcf,
a height of 29.3 ft/2 would result in a
compressive stress equal to 14.2 psi. Thus the net tension on the unreinforced pilaster is
77.6 - 14.2 = 63.4 psi. This isjust less than the allowable value of 64.0 psi so the section has
adequate flexural strength to resist the wind loading.
For this problem, the effectiveness of the flange portion is very small since it is ungrouted.
If only the 32 in. square, grouted section is considered, the net flexural tensile stress is 64.1
psi which is very closeto the 63.4 psi calculated abovefor the"L" shaped pilaster. However,
since 100% of the square section is grouted, the allowable flexural tension stress is 58 psi x
1.33 or 77.1 psi which is considerably larger than the value of 64.0 psi assumed for the "L"
shaped section. Thus,
through this code interpretation, the smaller section has a higher
allowable flexural strength.

Shear stress must also be checked using Code Eq. 6-7. Because the pilaster is fairlyslender,
it is assumed that shear will not control. All of the shear is conservatively assumed to be
11-110

A C 1 TITLE*HDG 93 W Obb2949 0508989 2 2 T W
and
Calculations
resisted by the column portion. Thus, the maximum shear stress is equal to 1.5 times the
average shear stress across the 32 in. square area. Themaximum shear due towind occurs
at the top and thebottom of the pilaster, and is equal to 320 plf times halfthe height of 29
ft-4 in. or 4,693 lb.
The applied shear stress per MDG Eq. 11.2-1 is then:

6.5.1
Allowable shear stresses are given in the code to be equal to the lesser of:
(a) Fv = 1 . 5 6
psi
(b) F, = 120
(c) Fv
N
Y
v + 0.45 ;where v = 60 psi for solid grouted masonry in running bond
No matter what the specified compressive strength is (i.e., 1,000 psi, 1,500 psi, etc.),
the
applied shear stress is much less than these values, and does not control, as was surmised.
11-111

A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 93 M Obb2949 0508990 T 4 1
Example.11.2-2
DPCGymnasium
- DesignofReinforcedPilasterforFlexure
The unreinforced pilasters for the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 2 of the DPC Gymnasium were
felt to be too expensive because of their 32 in. width and depth. Thus, a reinforced concrete
masonry pilaster is designed for Wall Construction Option A to resist the same wind loading
as prescribed for the previous example, and costs are compared. A minimum compressive
strength will be specified as a result of these calculations.
As noted for MDG Example 11.2-1, the walls on Grid Lines 1 and 2 are not loadbearing
walls. Pilasters are needed only to resist bending resulting from lateral loads. A wind load
of 20 psf governs over the seismic load, and the design moment at midheight of a pilaster
is equal to 34.4 ft-kips. As in MDG Example 11.2-1 the block wythe is assumedto carry all
the wind loading.
Preliminary estimates have suggested the use of a 16-in. square pilaster with four vertical
reinforcing bars, as shown below. Only the cells containingreinforcement are grouted. The
48-in. CMU wall is ungrouted with face shell mortar bedding.
Joint Reinforcement
i
i
d = 11.63"
Detail for 16 in. Square Reinforced CMU Pilaster
11-112

7.63"
93
Obb2949 0508973 988
and
Calculations
The controlling parameters

are
compressionin
tension of reinforcement, and
the masonry due to bending.Since
wind can be
applied either asa direct pressure or as a suction, flexuralstrength will

be provided for bending in either direction.
5.13.4.2(c)
As in MDG Example 11.2-1, an effective flange width
equal to six
times the wall thickness can be considered. However, since bending is

considered in either direction, the governing case is when the interior
face is in compression.
For this case, the width of the compression
zone is the width of the column section (15.63 in.), as shown below.
Thus, for this example it makesno difference what the effective flange
width is assumed to be, or whether the wall is grouted or not.
Exterior Face
In
Effective Section
Reinforcement in the compression zone could be relied on to enhance the
11-113

compressive
A C 1 TITLE*NDG 93 D Obb2949 0508992 814 D

Code Reference
resistance of the masonry provided it is properly tied. However,
the contribution of the
compression reinforcement is neglected here since the tensile reinforcement is expected to

be light, and large compressive resistance should not be needed. Furthermore, it isexpected
that the compressive reinforcement will be close to the neutral axis and thus ineffective.
Based on the tension steel controlling, the area of reinforcement required is determined
using EQ. 11.0-15:
A s = -Mwind
Fsjd
(34.4 fi-kips x 12)

= 1.24
(24 ksi x 1.33)(0.9 x 11.63 in-)
h 2
7.2.1(b)
The value of j is assumed as 0.9, and the allowable tensile stress is

increased by a factor of 1.33 since wind isthe source of the stress. The
steel requirement canbe satisfied withtwo No. 8 bars (As = 1.58 in.".
The gravity stress due to the self-weight of the wall at midheight (12
5.3.2
psi) would slightly reduce the required area of tensile reinforcement,

and can conservativelybe neglected. If considered one would probably
use two No. 7 bars (A, = 1.20 in.2).
For A, equal to 1.58 in.2, p becomes 0.00869using
the section
dimensions for b and d as shown in the figure. The modular ratio, n,

is 10.5 if E, is assumed to be 2,760 psi (considering an approximate
unit strength equal to 4,800 psi based on net area). The depth to the
neutral axis, k, can then be found using MDG Eq. 11.0-13 to be equal
to 0.346. Theterm j is thenequal to 0.88 per MDG Eq. 11.3-4.
Therefore, the assumption o f j = 0.9 was valid. Compressive stress on
11-114

5.5.1.3
A C 1 TITLElrMDG 93
Ob62949 0508993 750
Code Reference
the interior face, fb, is then determined using MDG

fb="
mwn
fd
jkbd2
Eq. 11.0-14.
2(34.4 ft-kips X 12,O)

(0.88)(0.346)(15.63
inJ(11.63 in.)2
1,280 psi
Equating this compressive stress with the allowable value of 0.33 P,,,
x 1.33 results in a required prism compressive strength equal to 2,923
7.3.1.2
psi. A contractor can comply with this requirement by using the unit
strength method (Specs. 1.6.2.2) or the prism test method (Specs.
1.6.3). In either case, the block strength will need to considerably

exceed the minimum ASTM C 90 strength of 1,900 psi (based on net
area). In projects where high CMU strength is required, it must be so
specified on project drawings and specifications.
Also; tensilestressin
the reinforcementcan be checkedwith the
allowable value:
Since more steel was provided than required (1.58 in.2 vs. 1.24 in.2) it
is no surprise that the stress,f,, is less than the allowable. Shear stress
is determined using Code Eq.(7-3) of the Code. From MDG Example
7.5.2.1
11.2-1, the shearforce of 4,690 lb withb, j , and d as defined previously

gives a shear stress equal to 29 psi, less than the allowable valueof 50
psi according to Code Eq.(7-4).
11-115

7.5.2.2
A CT 1I T L E r M D G
93
O b 6 2 9 40 95 0 8 9 96 49 7
Ehmple 11.2-2 Cont'd.

and
Code Reference
Calculations
In summary, the size of the pilaster can be reduced by half if four No.
8 bars are run vertically downthe cells of the units. It is likely that the
costs of the four reinforcing bars will be less than the added cost of
construction of a 32 in. pilaster. Since the vertical reinforcingbars are
not relied upon
to resist compression, lateral ties are not required.
However, a nominal amount of ties will be specified to enhanceoverall

integrity.
Pilaster Cross Section
11-116

5.10.2
A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93 D Ob62949 0508995 523
Example 11.3-1
RCJ Hotel - Design of aSinglyReinforcedMasonryBeam
Consider the canopy beam that is part of a masonry frame in the RCJ Hotel. The canopy
beam spans 31 ft center to centerin the east-west direction(see MDG Fig. 9.1-6). Assuming
a tributary width of 10 ft and 50 psf dead load and 20 psf live load, the loads on the canopy
beam are determined to be: dead load = 500 plf and live load = 200 plf. A canopy section
is shown below.
Given:ClayBrick
Unit Strength = 6,000 psi (from manufacturer)
Type S Mortar
f
'
,= 2,500 psi
fB
= 3,800psi
Grade 60 steel
E, = 1.9 x 106 psi (Code Table 5.5.1.3)

4"
Hollowcore Planks(Span NorthSouth). Grout Cores Solid At

Bearing Ends.
Reinforced Masonry Beam
Bottom Of Masonry Beam

Elevation = 12 '-0' '
- Reinforced Masonry Column Beyond

h
Beam Width Equal to Column Width
Canopy Section N6
1.
Reference
Determine effective depth, modular ratio, andallowablestresses:

11-117

Code
A C 1 TITLExMDG 9 3
Obb2949 050899b YbT

Code Reference
Assume the total depth that is to be solid grouted is h = 24 in.
A structural analysis of the reinforced brick beam-column frame for Seismic Zone 4 yields
a controlling load combination of D
+ L + E. The maximum positive moment = 49 ft-kips.
The maximum negative moment at the centerline of the beam-column frame intersection is
55.2 ft-kips.
Assume cover to centroid of tension steel = 3.5 in.

then, d = 24 in. - 3.5 in. = 20.5 in.
Assume beam width equal to column width (11.5 in.)
b = 11.5 in.
E, = 29 x 106 psi
5.5.1.1
The modular ratio, n = EJE,,,
n = 15.3
The allowable compressive masonry stress,
Fb
7.3.1.2
= (1/3)$m
Fb = 1/3 (2,500 psi) = 833 psi

The allowable tensile steel stress,
F, = 24,000 psi
7.2.1.1
Since the load combination used allows for one-third increase in allowable stresses
11-118

A C 1 TITLEtMDG 93
0662949 0508997 3Tb H

~~
Code Reference
.:
Fb = (833 psi) 1.33 = 1,110 psi
5.3.2
and F = (24,000 psi) 1.33 = 32,000 psi
2.
Determine steel area required for negativemoment
= Mncg= 55.2 ft-kips
Assume j = 0.9
M
As = V
A,
- 55.2 fi-kip(12 in./ft)

d - (32 ksi)(0.9)(20.5 in.)
1.12 in?
Use 2 #7 bars, A, = 1.20 i a 2
If the steelbecomes excessive the designer could correct the design moment to the moment
at the column face (a reduction) resulting in smaller quantity of steel required.
Check stresses:
1.20
=
in.2
(1 1.5 in.)(20.5 in.)
= 0.005
pn = 0.078
R
R
[2pn + ( p r ~ ) ] ~- pn
0.324
11-119

Obb29Y9 0508998 232

ReferenceCaIcuIations
Code and Discussion
0.89
55.2 ft-kips (12,000)

(1.2 i
n
.
'
) (0.89)(20.5 in.)
fs
.-. OK
30,300 psi e Fs = 32,000 psi
fb="
bd2jk
2 (55.2 ft-kips) (12,000)

(11.5 in.)(20.5 in.)2(0.89)(0.324)
Use 2 #7 bars for negative moment

For possible cut off locationsof reinforcement, see MDG 14.2.2, Design of Reinforcement.
3.
Determinesteelarearequired
for positivemoment
= Mp = 49 ft-kips
Assume J' = 0.9

A , = - -"49 ft-kip (12 in./ft)
F, j d (32 ksi)(O.9)(20.5 in.)
1.00 h2
Use 2 - #7 bars, A, = 1.20 i n 2

11-120

A C 1 T I T L E S M D G 93 m Obb2949 0508999 179 W

and
Calculations
Discussion
Reference
Code
No need to check stresses (see Section 2 above)

4.
Check Shear Stresses (see MDG Example 13.1-2 shear design)
A figure of the canopy beam construction detail is shown below.

Cut In Grout
tcher
-Alg/
11-121

AC1
Example 113-2
TITLE*NDG 93 W Obb2949 0509000 5 9 9 W
- DoublyReinforced
Masonry LintelDesign
Consider the concrete masonry lintel above the10 ft x 10 ft opening in the east wall on Grid
Line 3 of the TMS Shopping Center for Wall Construction Type A. The loading for the
lintel from MDG Example 9.3-10, is shown below. The figure showsa uniformly distributed
load,
W,
= 792 plf, and a uniform load at the center distributed over a span of 40.5 in.,
= 4,670 plf. Load
W,
W,
includes the weight of the lintel and the weight of the wall above the
lintel. Load W, is the effect of the concentrated load from a girder. No arching action is
assumed. The concrete masonry lintel is to be designed assuming:
Type N mortar
Reinforcement = Grade 60
r,,,= 1,500 psi
E,,, = 1.8 x lo6 psi (Code Table 5.5.1.3)
Concrete masonry unit strength = 2,000 psi
10" Length Of
,", Bearing Plate
, .
, ,
I(40.5 I 12 ) = 4,670 plf
&"$5,770
h
10"
;j
"
1
"
+4x
7.63" = 40.5"
- 88 psf
(9') = 792 plf
Lintel
10.3'
Code Reference
1. Determine effective depth, modular ratio, and allowable stresses:

Assume the total depth that is to be solidly grouted and considered for lintel depth
is limited to h = 24 in.
11-122

93
m 0662949 050900L 4 2 5 1
"
and
Calculations
Assume cover to centroid of tension steel = 3.0 in.

then, d = 32 in. - 3.0in. = 29 in.
Assume b = 7.63 in.
E, = 29 x 106 psi
The modular ratio, n
5.5.1.1
29 x lob
Es = -
16.1
1.8 x lo6 psi
E,,,

7.3.1.2
7.2.1.1
F, = 24,000 psi
2. Determine span length and maximum moment:
Assume minimum end bearing length of 4 in.
7.3.3.3
Then span length,
7.3.3.1
I=lOfi+
M
in.
12 in./ft
10.3 fi
1
(792 PU')(10.3
8
= -
[4,670 plf
10,560 fi-lb + 40,700 fi-lb - 6,650 fi-lb = 44,640 fi-lb
(40.5 in. )/2](10:

12 in./fi
fi)
4,670 plf
"
11-123

44.6 fi-kips
A C 1 TITLE*flDG
93
0662949 0509002 361
and
Calculations
3. Determine moment capacity of section for balanced condition:
Using MDG Eq. 11.3-5,

jb
1 -
'b
= 0.916
Mb =
Fb 'b j b
M2
Mb =
Additional moment capacity needed,
M2 = M - Mb = 44.6 ft-kips - 30.7 ft-kips = 13.9 ft-kips

Design as a doubly reinforced section
Assume d ' = 2.0 in.
4. Determine tension steel area:
11-124

A C 1 T I T L E I M D G 93
0662949 0509003 2T8 D
Example 113-2Contd.
and
Calculations
Code Reference
Discussion
Then, A, = Asb + An = 0.83 in.2

Use 2 #6 bars (A, = 0.88 in.2)
5. Determine compression steel area:
Assume k = 0.251 for the doubly reinforced section

Using MDG Eqs. 11.3-9 and 11.3-8
fis
= (16.1)(500
fl,
fts
= Fs
f,
= (~,OOopsi)
fis
psi)
5,838 psi
(0.251) (29 h.) - 2 h.

(0.251)(29 in.)
7.2.1.2
Fs = 24,000 psi
Or
k-d Vd
(
n)
5,833psi
0.25 1 - 2 h./29 in.

1 - 0.251
Fs
24,000 psi
11-125

7.2.1.2
A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93
0bb2949 0509004 L34 W
Example 113-2Contd.
and
Calculations
Use smaller fJ to determine A,
Using MDG Eq. 11.3-13
Als
(13.9ft-kips)(12,OOO)
16.1 (5,833 psi) (29 in. - 2 h)(
16.1
1.12 i n 2
Use 2 #7 bars
A, provided = 1.20 i n 2
6. Revise k and check adequacy of Section
[(np + ( n - l ) ~ ) +~ 2(np
As
P = - -
bd
0.88
bd
(n-l)pd/d)]lP
0.00398
ia2
(7.63 in)(29 in.)
np = (16.1)(0.00398)
p/=>=
0.064
1.20 h*
= 0.0054
(7.63 in.)(29 in.)
(n - 1) p/ = (16.1 - 1) (0.0054)
0.082
11-126

- [np
(n-1)pl
93
Ob62949 0509005 070

Code and Discussion
np + (n- 1) pl = 0.686
:. R
E0.0212 + 0.1392]" - 0.1455
0.255
Rd
7.39 in.
2
5.4"
Assumed 0.251
21.6"
Assuming masonry compression stress = 500 psi and neglecting hole effect
fis
fs
M =
(500 psi)( 5.4'")(16.1)

7.4 in.
5,874 psi
(16.1)(500 psi) 21*6in. = 23,500 psi < Fs

7.4 h.)
'O
0
psi (7.63 in.)(7.4 in.)
2
7.4 in.
3
+ (5,874 psi) (1.2 in?)(29 in. - 2 h.)
M = 31.2 ft-kips + 15.9 ft-kip
47.1 ft -kips > 44.6 ft -kips
.-. OK
.-. Section isadequate
11-127

:.
Masonry controls
AC1
TITLE*HDG 93 m Obb29Y9 0509006 T07 m
Example 113-2Contd.
Code Reference
Check placement limits for 2 #6 bars for A, ; and 2 #7 bars for A,
8. Check Placement of Reinforcement

Clear distance between parallel bars shall not be less than
8.3.1
the nominal diameter of the bars, nor less than 1 in.

Thickness of grout between the reinforcement and masonry
8.3.5
units shall not be less than 1/4 in. for fine grout and 1/2 in. for
coarse grout.
0
Minimum masonry cover required for reinforcement:
8.4.1
If exposed to earth or weather, 2 in. for bars larger
than #5; 1 1/2 in. for # bars or smaller
If not exposed to earth or weather, 1 1/2 in.
(a) Check if 2 #6 bars for A, will fit

Assume 1 row of 2 #6 bars
grout and
From MDG Appendix Table 4 face shell thicknessof 1-1/4 in., assume fine
#3 stirrups
Minimum beam width required =
+ 2 (minimumcover
required; or thickness of grout required plus face shell thickness) + 2 (diameter of
2 (diameter of #6 bar, 0.75 in.)
+ (1 in.
clear distance)
stirrup)
= 2 (0.75 in.)
= 6.25 in.
+ (1 in.) + 2 (1.5 in.) + 2 (0.375 in.)

:. OK
7.63 in.
(b) Check if 2 #7 bars for A
will fit
11-128

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
m Obb2949 0509007 943 m
Example 113-2Contd.
and
Calculations
+ 1 in. + 2(1.5in.) + 2(0.375in.)
2 (0.875in.)
6.5
in.
< 7.63
in.
The final cross section and steel placement are as shown:
2 - i7
32
#6
9. CheckDeflection:
Using MDG Eq. 11.3-20
I,,
bk
nA,(d -
(n - l)A,(kd -
11-129

::
OK
A C 1 TITLE*NDG
93
Obb2949 0509008 8 8 T

and
Calculations
Code Reference
0.255
I,, = 1,029 in4

I,,
6,610
in4 +
528
in?
8,167 i
n
!
Use MDG Eq. 11.3-18 to calculate short-term deflection

f , = 2.5
Ma
2.5 (2,500 psi)'fl
125 psi
535 h.-kips
Then short-term deflection,
A =
5M,L2
5(Ma",>L2
+
48 E,,,Ig
48EmI,
A = 5(163 h.-kip~)(10.3 fix12in./ft)2

48 (2.6 x I d ksi) (20,835 in.4)
+ 5 (535 in.-kips - 163 in -kips) (10.3 ft X 12

48 ( 2 . 6 lo3
~ ksi) (8,167 in.3
A = 0.0048 in. + 0.028 in.
0.033 in.
Determine additional long-term deflection for creep and shrinkage for total load.
11-130

AC1
TITLEsMDG 93 m 0bb2949 0509009 7Lb m
Example 113-2Contd.
and
Calculations
x =
pf =
I
1+ m p f
1.20 i n 2
7.63 in.(29 in.)
Use E = 2
I =
0.0054
then,
2
= 1.57
1 + 50(0.0054)
:. Total deflection = 0.033 in.
+ 1.57(0.033in.)
= 0.085 in.
Allowable deflection,
5.6
- (10.33 ft)(12 in./ft)
Aauonub& -
~auonwb& =
600
0.207 in. > 0.085 in.
:. OK
11-131

AC1
Example 113-3
TITLE*HDG 93 H Obb2949 0507010 438
DPCGymnasium
- DesignofaSteelLintel
Consider the 8 ft wide masonry opening on

Gymnasium. Design a
the south wall on Grid Line B of the DPC
steel lintel to support the masonry in Wall Construction Option A,
unreinforced brick and block cavity wall.
Sm (brick)
and
= 2,500 psi;
(block) = 1,500 psi; A-36 structural steel
Calculations
Partial Elevation
1.
Loading Conditions and Geometry

Per MDG Example 9.3-2, the truss bearing length at the bottom of the bond beam
is 16.2 in., and the maximum width of the load distribution is 46.7 in., or 3.89 ft. For
a 30" spread of load, the truss reaction becomes a distributed load well above the
apex of apotentialtriangulararchabovethelintel,
as showninabovesketch.
However, the location of control and expansion joints at both ends of the lintel, as
shown aboveand in Fig. 9.1-5, prevents any possible arching action, since vertical
and
in-plane horizontal forces cannot be transferred across those joints. The lintel must
11-132

A C 1T I T L E * R D G
93
0 b b 2 9 4 9 05090LL 374
Code Reference
therefore be designed to support theweight of all the masonry above, as well as the
truss gravity load reaction.
For lateral loads, the masonry will span horizontally to the pilasters, since out-ofplane shear can be transferred across properlydetailed control joints. (For instance,
see the first detail in MDG Fig. 10.4-1). Brick expansion joints do not transfer shear
forces acrossthe joint. However, the horizontal joint reinforcement continuously ties
the brick to the CMU and therefore transfers the lateral loads to the CMU wythe.
The only lateral load acting onthe lintel, therefore, is the wind pressure on thedoors.
Loads - From figure
below:
2.
Brick weight:
P, = 4.0 psf (16.7 fi) = 667 plf
p3
CMU weight:
P, = Brick Weight
Pz = CMU Weight
Pz
60 psf (16.7 fi) = 1O

, OO plf
Lintelself-weight:Assume
P = Truss Reaction
40 plf
Trussreaction: (MDG 9.1.2.1)
Assume 6 in. bearing length each end.
11-133

A C 1 TITLEUMDG 93
m Ob62949
0509032 200
and
Code Reference
Calculations
Vertical Loading
= 3,825 plf
Self weight = 40 plf
pi
= 667 plf
Ej = 1,000 plf
14,700 lb
14,700 lb
0 -
Center To Center Of Bearing
M = 39.8 ft-kips
Lateral Loading
NOTE:
120 psf (8 ft)(
M =
i)](
8.5
8 (1,OOo lb/kiP)
0.72 ft -kips
The horizontalloading may be neglected,since it is so small and a 1/3 stress

increase is permitted when it is included.
3.
Selectlintelbased
on flexuralstresses.
A structural steel shape is required, due to themagnitude
of the verticalload
moment. It is desirable to select a steel section depth that will match the masonry
coursing, so that masonry units need not be cut to fit around the lintel. A bottom
plate is also required,both structurally to support the two wythes whichare separated
by the nominal 3 in. (actual 3.75 in.) cavity, and architecturally to provide a seamless
surface against which to install the door frame.
Select a W8 x 24 with bottom plate 5/16 in. x 14 in.
11-134

AC1
TITLE*MDG 9 3 m 0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0509033 347 m

and
Code Reference
Calculations
Determine the composite section properties:

Using the AISC Construction Manual (11.3.20)
For the W8 x 24, area = 7.08 in2, depth = 7.93 in., 'I = 82.8 in.4
For the plate, area = 4.375 in.2, depth = 0.3125 in., I, = negligible
Composite neutral axis: Using reference line at top of W shape
7.08in?(7.93 in.)(0.5) +4.375 in.217.93 in.+0.5(0.3125 in.)] -- 63.4 in?

11.455 i n 2
7.08 h2+4.375 in?
=
5.54 in. h m the top of W8x24
Composite moment of inertia:
82.8 h4+ 7.08
in?[5.54 in. - 0.5(7.93 in.)I2
+ 4.375 h2[7.93
in? +
82.8
129 in."
17.6 in." + 28.4
in. + 0.5(0.3125 in.) - 5.54
in?
Composite section moduli:
Since the lintel is supporting all of the masonry above, and the masonry has joints at each
end of the lintel, the lintel is not laterally supported by the masonry. Steel lintel allowable
11-135

93
Obb2949 0509014 083
Example 11.33 Contd.

and
Code Reference
Calculations
stresses are therefore based on an unsupported length of 8.5 ft. Following the procedures
of Chapter F of the Manual of Steel Construction (11.3.20), the allowable flexural stress for
this composite section is 21.2 ksi.
4.
Check
Deflection
For a total moment = 39.8 ft-kips, the equivalent uniform load
is
For uniform loading, deflection is

A = - -5w14 - S(4.41 klf)(8.5 ft14(l,728h3/ft3)
= 0.138
384 E I
384 (29,000 ksi)(129 i
n
!
)
The maximum allowable deflection in unreinforced masonry is
5.6
~aenccJ=
0.138 h. < A&,,,
0.17 in.
11-136

:. OK
93
Obb2949 0509035 T L T H

and
Calculations
5.
Check shear and torsion - referto figure on page11-133
Under full dead and live load, the torsional loading at the center of the lintel is
3,825 plf(2.2 in) + 1,ooO plf (2.2 in.) - 667 plf(7.2 in.)
in.-lb/ft
= 5,813 in.-lb/ft
=
8,415
+ 2,200 h-lb/ft - 4,802 in.-lb/ft
Under dead load only, the torsional loading at the center of the lintel is
[
=
1/3(14880 lb)](2.2 in.) + 1O

, OO plf(2.2 in.) - 667 plf(7.2 in.)
3.89 ft
2,805 in.-lb/ft + 2,200 h.-lb/ft
- 4,802 in. -lb/ft
203 h.-lb/ft
The torsional loading near the ends of the lintel is

1,OOO plf(2.2 in.)
- 667 plf(7.2 h.) = -2,602 h.-lb/ft
Under full dead and live load, the torsional reaction at each end support is
5,813 h.-lb/ft(3.89 fi)(0.5)
- 2,602 h.-lb/ft(2.305
ft) = 5,309 in.-lb
and under dead load only it is

203 in. -lb/ft( 3.89 ft)(O.5)
- 2,602in.-lb/ft(2.305
ft) = -5,603in.-lb
governs
The lintels torsional resistanceis based on the aspect ratio of its component parts (11.3.21)
11-137

A C 1 T I T L E S M D G 9 3 W Obb2949 050901b 9 5 b W
Reference
Code
A W8 x 24 flange has 0.4 in. thickness

and is 6.495 in. long. The portionof the web between
flanges has 0.245 in. thickness and is 7.13 in. long. The torsional resistance
of the composite
section is
1/3[2(6.495 in.)(0.4 in.)3 + 7.13 h(0.245
0.455 h
!
The maximum torsional shear stress
Web torsional shear stress

r =
5.603 h.-kips(0.245 in.)

0.455
3.02 ksi
i
n
:
Direct shear stress of W beam is

fw="
v dt,
14.7 kip
7.93 h(O.245 in.)
7.57 ksi
Combined shear stress

f,, +
t =
7.57 ksi + 3.02 ksi
10.6 ksi
11-138

+ 14
in(0.3125
93
Obb2949 0509037 892

~~~~~
Code Reference
Allowable shear stress
Fv = 0.4FY = 0.4(36 ksi) (

P
r
o
m11.3.20)
= 14.4
6.
ksi > f,, = 10.6 ksi .-. OK
Check bearing
Check web crippling per Chapter K1.3 of reference (11.3.20).
R
t,(N + 2.5k)
0.66Fy
For k, use the k value for W8 x 24 plus the bottom plate thickness
14.7 kips
- 14'7 kips
(0.245 in.)[ 6 in. + 2.5(0.875 ia + 0.313 in.)] 2.20 h 2
0.66(36 ksi)
24 ksi
6-69ksi
:. OK
Therefore, no bearing stiffeners are required.

Check masonry bearing stresses. Per MDG Example 11.1-4, the brickf, = 2,500 psi; and
the CMUf,
= 1,500 psi.
The allowable bearing stress Fb = 0.25 f m
5.12.3
Therefore, the allowable brick bearing is
0.25
(2,500
psi)
625 psi
11-139

A C 1 T I T L E r M D G 9 3 W 0662747 05090LB 727
and
Calculations
Code Reference
and the allowable CMU bearing is
0.25( 1,50psi)
0
375 psi
Under full dead and live load, the centroid of the end reaction is located at
8.5ft[(667plf)(1.8h.) + l,OOOplf( 11.2h.) +4Oplf(9

h.)] +3.89ft(3,825~lf)(11.2ia)
2( 14,7001b)
- 2759113in"1b
29,400 lb
9.36 in. from brick outside face
3.63"
d
"
"
138 psi
3.75"
"
7.63"
14,700 lb
313 psi
9.36"
5.64 "
"
"
The centroid of the masonry bearing area is
(0.5)(3.63
in.)2
7.63 hi3.63
in. + 3.75 in. + 0.5(7.63 in.)]
3.63 in. + 7.63 in.
in. = 8.17 in. from brick outside face
11.3 in.
11-140

A C 1 TITLE*HDG
93
Obb2947 0509039 bb5

and
Calculations
The moment of inertia of the bearing area is
IE =
6 in.( 15
12
in.)3
6 in.(3.75
12
in.)3
- 6 h(3.75 h)[8.17 h - 3.63 in. - 0.5(3.75
IE
1,687.5
i
n
!- 26.4
in4
in.)I2
- 160.4 h' = 1,500 h'
The bearing area section moduli are

S
1,500 h4
(15 in. - 8.17 in.)
220
ia3
The maximum CMU bearing pressure is
assuming grouted solid CMU at the lintel bearing

fbr= 313 psi < Fb
375 psi .-. OK
However, the CMU must be grouted solid at the lintel bearing.
NOTE
By inspection,bearing stresses for the dead load onlycasewill
not govern
since the overall reaction is lower. Also, the eccentricity of the reaction will
result in higher compression in the higher strength material, the brick, rather
than the CMU.

93
m Ob62949
0509020 387

and
Calculations
7.
Weld of the plate to the W beam
Since this section was designed assuming composite action of the plate and W beam, they
must be welded together to resist the shear flow between them.
q =
~t q =
14.7 kips(ll.14
129 in."
in3)
kip/in.
12 inJft(1.27 kip/ in.) = 15.2 kp/ft
(14 h.)(0.313 in.)[(7.93 in. + 0.313 h.) - 5.54 in. - O.S(O.313 in.)
Q = 11.14
For welding each side of the W beam flange, capacity required is
The capacity of 2-1/2 in. long, 1/4 in. fillet weld is
14.84 h(0.25h.)(2.5 in.) = 9.28 kips > 7.6 kips
:.
OK
OK to use 1/4 in. fillet weld, 2-1/2 in. long at 12 in. on center each side.
11-142

93
0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0509021 213
Example 113-3Contd.
and
Calculations
8.
Check
Shoring
Since the lintel is designed to support all loads above it,
no shoring of the lintel during
masonry construction is required per (11.3.19).

Other Considerations
An open cavity, properly detailed flashings,and adequate weepholes are essential for
the weather (water) resistance of cavitywalls.
See the MDG 6.2.1 and 6.2.6 for
further discussion.
The designer may consider placing insulation in the cavity or in the CMU cells for
thermal control of the building interior.
Moisture and thermal
movement
of the exterior
masonry
walls has been
accommodated by the locations of expansion and control joints, illustrated in MDG

Fig. 9.1-5. See MDG Chapter 10 for discussion.
The severity of the climate is the basisfordetermining
the level of corrosion
protection that should be provided for the steel lintel. In an area of 40 psf design
snow load, galvanizing is recommended.
See MDG 3.5.6 for further discussion.
Masonry anchors are required to tie the CMU to the steel lintel. Select triangular
wire ties and weld on rods at 24 in. on center, placed into fully mortared head joints.
The brick is tied to the CMU by the joint reinforcement.
11-143

A TC I1T L E * f l D G
93
Obb2949 0509022 &!T
and
Calculations
Code Reference
The final lintel design is given below:
Horizontal Joint Reinforcement
Located In CMU
SteelLintel: W8x24 Plus

Plate 5/16" x 1-1/2"
_I- 5.5"
8.5"
"
15 "
Final Lintel Design
11-144

"
NOTE: Items Such As
Flashing, Weeps, And

Insulation Are Not Shown
For Clarity
A C 1 TITLE*HDG
Example 113-4
~~~~
93
m Ob62949 0509023
096
RCJ Hotel - WallBeamDesign
~~
Design the wall beam on Grid Line E, between Grid Lines 3 and 4, for Wall Construction
Option B, Building Construction Option I. The design is for in-plane bending. The wall is
a loadbearing wall. The most desirable material is 8 in. hollow brick to match the other
walls in the hotel.
Code Reference
Geometry & Loads: (See MDG 9.1.3.1)
p,fR:
Cumulative
i k f
T
2nd
'O'
Roof
3rd
lO"10'
41h
2,s o
600
3d
6,830
1,320
2"
10,800
1,820
1st
1"
Load at top of the floor

Lintel load includes the
Total
P d
floor D.L. and LL plus the lintel D.L.
D.L.
11,000 plf
L.L.
1,820 plf
By inspection, the 34 in. deep lintel (24 in.
+ 10 in.) cannot resist the totalloads.
By shoring
the wall during construction, part or all of the wall above will participate in resisting the
11-145

A C 1 T I T L E + M D G 9 3 W Ob62949 0507024 T 2 2 W
Code Reference
loads. However, the wall is a deep beam and the Code is silent about this type of element.
A generally accepted procedure is to divide the wall into strips with depth to span
ratio's less
than 215.
The first strip assumed is the 34 in. deep lintel. Span = 24 ft-8 in.
1 in.
7.3.3.1
+ 1 in.
D.L. ofwall
Assume2ndfloorloadingplus
above. Neglect any Live
10"
D.L
'i
LL
Load reduction.
110 psf x 30 ft
psf
70
x 9.67 ft
3,300
plf
70 psf x 2 ft
680
plf
140 plf
40
psf
1.200 Dlf
x 30 ft
Total
plf
M = 5,320 plf (26*67 fil2

8
Estimate Reinforcement (Assume Grade 60 reinforcement)
5,320
=
473,000 fi-lb
7.2.1.1
Use 3 ft additional wall above. Shore until strength is reached. Vertical steel should not
be spliced in this area.
Total Loading 5,320 plf
+ 210plf
= 5,530 plf
= 491,000 ft-lb
11-146

TITLE*MDG 9 3
AC1
Obb2949 0509025 9b9
Examde 113-4Cont'd.
Reference
Code
Estimate Reinforcement:
A,
4.80 in?
Specify masonqf,
= 4,000 psi, Type S mortar with a brick net area compressive strength
Use Type S mortar.
of 10,000 psi.
Table 5.5.1.2
E, = 2.9 x 106 psi

29 x lo6 psi
4.80 i a 2
7.5 in. x 50 in.
k = 0.38
0.128
j = 0.87
M, = 518,000 ft-lb > 491,000 ft-lb :. OK

M,,, = 530,000 ft-lb > 491,000 ft-lb
OK
Check Shear:
7.5.5
v=- V
7.5.2.1
bjd
59,400 lb
v =
A,,
7.5 in. x 0.87 x 62 in.

=
146 psi
- useeverycells=6in.
Fs d
11-147

150 psi
7.5.2.3(a)
7.5.3
A C 1 TITLE*VDG
0 6 6 2 7 4 7 0507026 8 T 5 D
73

A,, =
Reference
lb x
24,000 psi x 62 in.
in*
0.23 in?
#5 Q 6 in. 0.C.
Code
d
-
7.5.3.1
Code requires reinforcement of AJ3 perpendicularshear

to
7.5.3.2
reinforcement. The designed flexural steel satisfies this requirement.

The next strip begins 3 ft above the 2nd floor. Assume the strip is 80 in. deep (to the top
of the 3d floor). Include the weight of the wall and contribution weight and load from the
3d floor. Shoring on the first strip to remain until strength of this strip is achieved.
D.L. 30 x 110
3,300
plf
70 x 6.67
plf
470
1.200
plf
L.L. 30 x 40
4,970 plf
M = 441,000 ft-lb
n p = 0.058 k = 0.28
M,,, = 524,000
ft-lb
.: OK
M, = 679,000 ft-lb
.: OK
Shear
4,970 lb
11-148

j = a91
TITLE*MDG 93
AC1
0662949 0509027 731

and
Calculations
Reference
Code
try S = 12 in.
v = 91 psi
7.5.3
The Code requirement for steel in the amount of AJ3 to be provided

is
perpendicular to the shear reinforcementsatisfied
by the designed
7.5.3.1
flexural reinforcement.
The floors above are basically the same.
Note: Using the 3 ft of wall above the 2ndfloor requires a check to assure the 2nd floor is
adequately attached to the beam. Bearing is not sufficient since the majority of the
beam is above the floor.
Assume all of the floor load must be transformed.
W = (110 + 40) x 30 = 4,500 plf

(2) #5
fs = 7,300
psi
Add standard hooks to #5 in bottom bond beam
Check anchorage of flexural steel
Id
= 0.0015 db
Id =
0.0015
8.5.3.1(f)
Fs
7
8
8.5.2
X
24,000
ld = 31.5 in.
11-149

0662747 0509028 b 7 8
A C 1 TITLESMDG 93
Reference
Code
Embed Flexural bars into support column
n
t
L
3rd
0 0 0 0 0 0
#5 x 12 "2" @, 12" O.C.
LAP
2 '-6"
(6) #7 x 3 2 '
#5 @ 6" O.C.
""".
+
"O"
""_.
2 "10"
""_.
"
"
"
"
"
Stnd Hook
LShore Lintel For Entire Length Until

T h e Full Height Of T h e Wall Is
Complete.
Reinforcement Arrangement
Note: Additional horizontal reinforcement is required for seismicdesign and minimum
reinforcement (Code A.4.7)
The design approach used in this example israther novel but might be considered by some
to be rather conservative. For heights greater than 12 ft-4 in.above the opening the
designer might consider arching of the masonry with the floors acting as tension ties.
11-150

Example 113-5
RCJ Hotel Coupling Beam for Flexure Only
Given the following material properties, design a single-wythe reinforced brick lintel for the
RCJ Hotel, Wall Construction Option B. The design is for the door openings along wall
Grid Lide 2 (see MDG Fig. 9.1-6) and is to consider-in-plane flexure only.
MasonryBrick
Clay
Grout
Unit Strength (psi)
6,000
Mortar
Type S
(Psi)
2,500
E m (psi)
1.9 x
15.3
S m
lo6
Steel Reinforcement - Grade 60
1"lO"
11-151

AC
T I1T L E x M D G
Obb2949 0 5 0 9 0 3 0 226
93
and
Calculations
Code Reference
The lintels of wall Grid Line 2 of the RCJ Hotel have a clear span of
3 ft-4 in. They are considered fixed on both ends and resist
flexure
7.3.3.3
due primarily to seismic loads. From MDG Example 9.2-4 Table 3, the
in beam B5 at the 3rd

floor.
7.3.3.1
maximum
coupling
moments
occur
Higher moments exist on the second floor but this beam is deeper.
Additional moments exist due to the dead load of the lintel, but these are small relative to
the coupling moments and are neglected.
The maximum moment is taken as 759 in.-kips.
Using working stress design, the value o f j is initially assumed as 0.9, and the area of steel
required to resist the maximum moment is estimated using the expression:
where M = 759,000in.-lb,
5.3.2
F, = 24,000 psi x 1.33 = 32,000 psi
7.2.1.1
j = 0.9 (assumed), and

d = 29in.
Substitution yields
A,
759,000 in.-lb
(32,000 psi) (0.9)(29 in.)
:. use 2 - #6
P = -As- bd
0.91
in?
bars (A, = 0.88 in.2)

0.88
(7.5 in.)(29 in.)
0.00405
11-152

A C 1 TITLE*flDG
93
0662949 050903L L b 2

and
Calculations
np = 0.0619
k = 0.29
Mt = A, jdF,
j = 0.90
= (0.88
in?)(0.9)(29 in.)(32,000 psi)
735,000 h - l b
Margin of Safety = 4%, may be ok in some local jurisdictions.

Net Moment capacity is higher because beam has been doubly reinforced.
bd2
M,,, = -kjFb
2
in.)' (0.29)(0.9)(25':
M,,, = (7.5 in.)(29
2
p6i)(1.33)
912,000 h - l b
..
OK
Use (2) #6 top and bottom

Shear Stress:
See MDG Example 13.1-1
All requirements of Code 8.5.3 should be met concerning the flexural reinforcement and
development lengths.
11-153

A C 1 T I T L E z f l D G 93
Example 113-6
RCJHotel
Obb2949 0509032 O T 9
- Design of a Continuous Masonry Beam
Design a continuous masonry beam on Grid Line E spanning from column E-3 to E-3.5 to
E-4 above the opening on the first floorof the RCJ Hotel (Wall Construction Option A with
Building Construction Option I). The continuous beam spans over two openings each 11
ft wide and is supported by three columnsover a length of 2.67 ft each.Assuming
tributary widthof 30 ft, dead load of 110 psf and live load of 40 psf, the loads on the
continuous beam are determined to be: dead load = 14,750plf and total beam load =
17,020 plf (includes live load reductions). Design
a continuous concrete masonry beam
assuming:
Concrete Masonry - 12 in. CMU
Concrete masonry unit strength = 2,000 psi (from manufacturer)
Type N mortar
fm
fg
= 1,800 psi
= 3,600 psi
Grade 60 steel
E,,, = 1.8 x lo6 psi (from tests)

Note: This problem is worked as an illustrative alternative to the steel beam at this
location.
and
Calculations
1.
Determine effective depth, modular ratio andallowablestresses:

Assume the total depth that is to be solid grouted is h = 72 in.
Assume cover to centroid of tension steel = 6 in.
then, d = 72 in. - 5 in. = 67 in.
11-154

AC1
TITLE*HDG 73 M 0662747 0509033 T35 m

and
Calculations
Assume b = 11.63in.
E, = 29 x 106 psi
5.5.1.1
The modular ratio, n = E,/E,,, = 29D.8 = 16.1

7.3.1.2
Fb
- (1,800psi)
3
600 psi

7.2.1.1
F, = 24,000 psi
2.
Determine span length and maximumpositive and nega1tive moments:

Assume end bearing length = 8 in.
7.3.3.3
Assume pin support at center of middle column

Then span length for each span,
I = - 4 f t + l l f t + - 2.67 ft
12
2
7.3.3.1
12.7 ft
11-155

Obb2949 0509034 771 W
93
A CT 1I T L E * f l D G

Code and Discussion
Check the depth to span ratio:

depth 67 in.
span
(12.7
ft)(12 in./ft)
"
0.44
Per MDG Example 11.3-4, it is desirable to limit the depth to span ratio 2/5,
to since
the Code is silent on the subject of deep beams. Although the actual ratio is slightly
greater than 2/5, it is acceptable for this example.
MF - -W12
9
- 17*020 plf
128
128
- wZ2 -
17,020
plf
(12.7
3.
8- (
1,OOO
Determinesteelarearequiredfor
MF
1,OOO
(12.7
fi)2
192 ft-kips
fi-kips
positive moment
192 ft-kip
Assumej = 0.9
M - 192 fi-kips (12 ialft)

A, = F,jd - (24 ksi)(O.9)(67 in.)
A, = 1.59 in?
11-156

m 0662947
0509035 B O B
and
Calculations
Code Reference
Try 4 #6 bars, A,
1.76 in.2
Check stresses:
=
1.76 i
n
.
' = 0.00226
(1 1.63 in.)(67 in.)
pn = 0.0364
[2pn + (pn)'Iw - pn
[2(0.0364) + (O.O364)']''
0.236
- 192 ft-kips (12 in./ft)(1,OOO lb/kips)
h=-@f,
M'jk
fa
(1.76 i
n
.
'
) (0.921)
(67
in.)
.: OK
21,200 psi < Fs = 24,000 psi
2M
fb="
- 0.0364
2 (192 ft -kips) (12,000)

(11.63
in.)(67 in.)'(O.921)(0.236)
406 psi < Fb = 600 psi
:. OK
Use 4 #6 bars for positive moment

For possible cut off locations of reinforcement,
see MDG Example Problem 14.3-16
11-157

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
m O662949 0509036 744 m

and
Calculations
4.
Determine steel arearequired for negativemoment
M,
341 ft-kips
Assume j' = 0.9
Use 5 #7 bars, A,
= 3.00 in.2
Check stresses:
3.00
(11.63 in.)(67 in.)
0.00385
pn
k
k
[2pn + ( ~ n )- ~pn] ~
0.296
=
=
0.0620
&"
=a-
341
fi-kip~(12,OoO)
(3.00 in?)(O.902) (67 in.)
fs
fb="
b d 2 jk
fb =
:. OK
22,570 psi < Fs = 24,000 psi
2 (341 ft -kips)(12,000)
(1 1.63 in.)(67 in.)2 (0.902)(0.296)
587 psi < Fb
600 psi
:. OK
11-158

A C 1 T I T L E + M D G 93
Ob62949 0509037 b B 0
Example 113-6Contd.
and
Calculations
Use 5 #7 bars for negative moment

For possible cut off locations of reinforcement, see MDG Example 14.3-16.
5.
Checkplacement requirements for flexuralreinforcement.

Assume #4 stirrups and coarse grout.
Minimum
clear
distance
between
bars is the bar diameter or 1in.

8.3.1
Minimum grout thickness between rebarand masonryunitin1/2in.

is
8.3.5
cover
masonry
Minimum
A 12 in. CMU face shall is 1-1/2 in. thick; assume the bottom of the lintel block is
2 in. thick.
Check width required for negative moment reinforcement (governs over positive moment
reinforcement).
2(1.5 in.)shell + 2(0.5 in.)grout + 2(0.5 h.)stirrup + 3(0.87 in.)rebar
+ 2 (1 in.)clear = 9.62
11.62 in. provided .:
in. required
OK
Check depth of cover to negative moment reinforcernent (from the top)

1.5 in. grout + 0.5 in. stirrup
1
2
+ -( 1
0.87 in. rebar
5 in. assumed .:
in.)clear = 3.37 in. actual
OK
Check depth of cover to positive moment reinforcernent centroid (from bottom)

2 in. + 0.5
1
2
+ -( 1
in. grout
in.)clear
+ 0.5
= 4.25
in. stirrup
0.75
in. rebar
in. actual < 5 in. assumed
11-159

:. OK
0662949 0509038 517
and
Calculations
~
~~
The final beam cross section and steel arrangements is shown below.
72 "
at 8"
O.C.
4 #6 Bottom
6.
11.63"
Check shear stress (See MDG Example 13.1-3)
11-160

A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93
0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0509039 453
RCJ Hotel Designofa Masonry Coupling Beam
Example 113-7
Design the masonrycoupling
beam onLine
Construction Option B,Building
B, fourth floor of theRCJHotel
Construction Option I).
(Wall
The left end and right end
moments on the coupling beam are both clockwise with the magnitude of 450 k-in. and 409
k-in., respectively. The end moments wereobtained from an envelope considering four load
cases. Assume the opening below the beam to be 3 ft - 4 in. wide and the totalbeam depth
(top of opening to floor slab) to be 2 ft
8 in. Determine the flexural reinforcement
required assuming:
fg
Clay Brick Unit Strength = 6,000 psi

Type S Mortar
Reinforcement Grade 60
Sm= 2,500 psi
Em = 1.6 x 106 psi (from tests)
Code Reference

1.
= 3,200psi
Determine effective depth, modular ratio andallowable

stresses.
Assume cover to centroid of tension steel = 4 in.
then, d = 32 in. - 4 in. = 28 in.
5.5.1.1
E, = 29 x 106 psi
The modular ratio, n = EJErn= 18.1
(113) S m
Fb = 1/3 (2,500 psi) = 833 psi
Fb
11-161

7.3.1.2
93
0662949 0509040 175

and
Calculations'
Reference
Code
Allowable stresses are permitted to be increased by one-third whenconsideringload

combination 3, 4, or 5 of Code 5.3.1.
.: Fb = psi)
1.33 (833
5.3.2 psi= 1,110
F,psi)1.33
= (24,000
7.2.1.1
2.
psi = 32,000
Determinesteelarea
required atthe leftend:
M = 450 in.-kips
Assume
b = 7.50
in.
Assume
j = 0.9
Use2 #5 bars, A, =: 0.62 in.2

Check stresses:
P = -
0.62 h?
(7.50 in.)(28 in.)
0.00295
pn = 0.053
= [2pn +
=
( ~ n ) * ] -' ~pn
[2(0.053)
(0.053)2]'/r - 0.053
= 0.25'7
j = 1 - k;/3 = 0.91
11-162

A CT 1I T L E w M D G
93
Ob62949 0509043 001
and
Calculations
- (450 h.-kip)(1,OOO lb/kip)

&M =
q -(0.91) (28 ia)
(0.62
ia2)
&
24,500 psi < Fs = 32,000 psi
.: OK
- 2 (450 h.-kip)(1,OOO lb/kip)

bd2j
(7.5 in.)(28 i1~)~(0.91)
(0.277)
607 psi Fa = 1,110 psi :. OK
2M
fb="
fb =
"q
7.5'
t."
Use 2 #5 bars at the left end (check placement tolerances)

3.
Check placement limits for reinforcement

..
Assume #4 stirrup, and fine grout
15'
Assume face shell thickness = 1 1/4 in.

2(diam.
required;
+ 1 ('1 in. cleardistance) + 2 (minimumcover

or thickness of grout required plus face shell thickness) + 2 (diam. of #4
of #5 bar, 0.625 in.)
stirrup)
=
2 (0.625in.)
1 in. 2 (1.5 in.)
6.25
in.
< 7.5 in.
:. OK
+ 2 (0.5 in.)
BY inspection the 4 in. distance assumed to centroid of tension steel is adequate.

For possible reinforcement cut off locations see MDG 14.2.2
11-163

A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 93 W O662949 0509042 T 4 8 W

4.
Determinesteelarea
Reference
required at the rightend:
M = 409 in.-kips
Assume j = 0.9
As
- "
409 in.-kips
- F'#
(32 ksi)(0.9)(28 in.)
A,
"
0.51
in?
Use 2 #5 bars, A, = 0.62 in.2

For possible reinforcement cut off locations see MDG 14.2.2
11-164

Code
A C 1 TITLESNDG 93
Example 113-8
DPCGymnasium
Obb2949 0509043 984
- Design of a SteelLintel
Consider the 8 ft wide masonry opening on the south wall of Grid Line B of the DPC
Gymnasium (MDG Figs. 9.1-4 and 9.1-5). Design a steel lintel to support the masonry in
Wall Construction Option C, reinforced composite brick and block wall.
Code Reference
Truss Reaction
Truss Bearing Elevation,
24" 8"
4" 2"
8'- O" OPG
Partial Elmtion
1.
Loading
Conditions
and Geometry
Per MDG Example 9.3-2, the truss bearing length at the bottom of the bond beam
is 16.2 in., and the maximum width of the load distribution is 46.7 in., or 3.89 ft. For
a 30" spread of load, the truss reaction becomes a distributed load 3 ft - 4 1/2 in.
downfromthepoint
of application,and 8 ft
5 1/2 in.above the apex of the
triangular arch above the lintel as shown in figure above. Since
there is adequate
masonry mass on each side of the lintel to resist the arch's horizontal thrust, arching
action will occur. Therefore the only vertical loads on the lintel will be from self11-165

A C 1 TITLE*flDG 9 3
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0509044 810
Example 113-8 Cont'ld.

and
Calculations
weight and weight of the masonry within the triangular arch area.
The lintel is laterally braced by the masonry mass. The angles are not free to twist,
and the compression "flange"cannot buckle laterallydue to the restraintof the grout
and the bottom plate. Refer to Lintel Section figure. Lateral loads acting on the
lintel derive from wind pressure within the triangular arch area and acting on the
doors.
2.
Loads - Refer to LintelSectionfigure and MDG Example 11.1-6.

Vertical Loading:
Masonry weight = 4 in. brick

=
40 psf
125 psf
2 in. grout
2
12
+ "(150
8 in. CMU
psf) + 60 pSf
125 psf (0.5)(8.33 f t ) = 521 plf
&
Self Weight = 25 plf
1,190 l b
M = -w12 + --W1
8
8.33' C-C Of Bearing
6'
M = 25 plf(8.33
8
+ - [521 plf (8.33 fi)(0.91 (8.33 fi)
1,190 lb
217 ft-lb + 3,013 ft-lb = 3,230 ft-lb
11-166

0 6 6 2 7 4 7 0507045 757
and
Calculations
Code Reference
Discussion
Lateral Loading:
20 psf (0.5) (8.33 f t ) = 83.3 plf
M = 80 plf(8.33
8
507 lb
+ [83.3 plf( 8.33 ft)(0.91 (8.33 ft)
20 psf (0.5) (8 f t ) = 80 plf

507 lb
8.33' C-COf Bearing
3.
694 ft-lb + 482 fi-lb
Selectlintelsize
1,176 ft-lb
based onflexuralstresses.
Try three angles 3-1/2 in. x 3-112 in. x 5/16 in. To provide a finished surface against
which to erect the door frame, and to contain the grout in the collar joint, add a
bottom plate. The plate is not designed compositely with the angles, the required
welding to the angles is minimal, and the bottom plate need not be continuous. The
plate thickness of 5/16 in. is selected for durability in exposed usage, and a 13 in.
length is selected to support the 13-1/4 in. overall thick wall.
For each angle, Area = 2.09 in.2, I, = 2.45 in.", S, = 0.976 in.3
For vertical loading, S = 3(0.976 in.3) = 2.93 in.3
11-167

A C 1 IITLE*HDG
93
0662949 0509046 693

Code Reference
For horizontal loading, the section modulus of the angles is greater than 2.93 in.3,
since they are spaced apart. Since the lateral load moment is less than the vertical
load moment, the horizontal section properties are greater, and theallowable stress
is 1/3 greater when the wind load is considered, flexuralstresses are within allowable
by inspection.
4.
Check
Deflection
A = - + -w14
384EI
w13
60EI
A = 0.025 khF( 8.33
fi)4(
1,728
h3/ft3)
384 (29,000 ksi) [3 (2.45in?)]
+ [0.0833 klf (8.33 ft)(0.91(8.33

60(29,000 ksi) [3 (2.45
0.0025 h. + 0.0271 in = 0.0296 in.
( 1,728 h3/f
)t
ia4)]
The Code onhy limitsdeflection in beams supporting unreinforced masonry.

However, A =: 0.0296 in. = 1/3,370 is very small deflection and OK
5.
Check shear and torsion
By inspection, shear is not a problem.

Torsion is no problem since the angles are not free to rotate.
11-168

5.6
A C 1T I T L E I M D G
93
m 0662949
0509047 5 2 T
Example 113-8Contd.
Reference Calculations
Code and Discussion
6.
Check bearing
Because the wall is composite, the load will be fairly uniform across the wall cross
section.
For 4 in. long bearing each end, and assuming solid brick and 50% solid CMU, the
bearing area is
3.63 in.(4 in.) + 7.63 in.(4 &)(OS)
29.8
in?
The bearing pressure is
The allowable bearing is Fbr = 0.25$,

Per MDG Example 11.1-6, f m = 1,500 psi in the CMU, and$,
5.12.3
= 2,500 psi in the
brick. Therefore the minimum Fbr = 0.25(1,500 psi) = 375 psi. Sincefb, = 40 psi <
Fbr = 375 psi, bearing stress is OK, and the CMU need not be grouted at the lintel
bearing.
7.
Weldof
the plate to the angles
Since the plate is not part of the structural member, the weld is only required to hold
the pieces together.
The minimum weld size for 5/16 in. thick members is 3/16 in. (11.3.20).Use 3/16 in.
11-169

A C 1 TITLE+MDG 93 M O662949 0509048 466 W
Example 113-8ConVd.
Code Reference
welds 2 in. long at 12 in. on center at the toe of each angle.
8.
Check
Shoring
When arching action has been assumed to reduce the loads on the lintel, temporary
shoring of the lintelmust be provideduntil the masonry has attained sufficient
strength to accommodate arching action. Shoring must be provided for a minimum
of 24 hours (11.3.19). The shoring period should be increased to three days when
imposed loads are tobe supported, and should be even longer when masonry is built
under cold weiather conditions (11.3.19). For this lintel design, require shoring for a
minimum of three days.
9.
Other Considerations
Although not required in a solid (barrier) wall, the designer may choose to
place a flashing at the lintel location.
While sizing the wall reinforcement, the designer must consider stresses due
to moisture and thermal movement, in addition to thegravity and lateralload
stresses, since no expansion or control joints are provided in the reinforced
composite masonry wall.
The severity of the climate and the level of maintenance that will be provided
determine thequality of corrosion protection that the steellintel should have.
For this lintel, require galvanizing of the steel. See MDG 3.5.6 for further
11-170

AC1
TITLE*HDG 9 3 m Ob62947 0507047 3 T 2 m
and
Code Reference
Calculations
discussion.
d)
Masonry anchors to the lintel are not required for this lintel configuration.
The final lintel design is shown below:

y Rebar In Grouted Collar Joint
CMU-Notch Webs
Around Vertical Legs
Of Angles
Steel Lintel:
3 - L 3-112" X 3-112" X 5/16''
Plus Plate 5/16' x 13'
13.75"
5.5"
"
3.75"
I-
13"
Lintel Section
11-171

-1
93
Obb2949 0509050 014 H
12
FLEXURE AND AXIAL LOAD
12.0 INTRODUCTION
Most masonry elements support axial load, even if the axial load is onlythe dead weight of
the element itself. When lateral loads such as wind or seismic are added, the element is
designed for both flexure and axial load.
For elements that primarily resist lateral forces (such as walls on a one-story building), the
addition of axial load usually improves an elements ability to resist flexure. This is true in
both unreinforced and reinforced masonry wherethe allowable load is controlledby tension.
In these situationsit is often acceptable to neglect the axial load effect since this assumption
is conservative.
For elements that primarily resist axial forces, such as columns, the addition
of lateral forces
usually reduces an elements ability to resist axial load.
In these cases, it is generally not
acceptable to neglect the effects of lateral force.

This chapter presents methodsfordesign
of masonrycolumns,walls
and pilastersfor
combined bending and axial loading. The methods presented are a sampling of the many
approaches available. Many approaches exist because solutions to the combined loading
case are more easily solved with the use of iterative or graphic methods.
12-1

A C 1 TITLE*:MDG 93
Obb2949 0509051 T50
12.1 COLUMNS
12.1.1
General
The Code 2.2 defines a column as an isolated vertical member whose horizontal dimension
measured at right angles to the thickness does not exceed 3 times its thickness and whose
height is at least 3 times its thickness.
Most of the Code provisions are based on rational engineering, not rules of thumb. Because
of the structural importance of columns, special provisions have been imposed. These are
listed in Code 5.9 and are summarized as follows:
1.
Least lateral dimension of 8 in. (nominal);
2.
Maximum height to thickness ratio of 2 5 ;
3.
Minimum
eccentricity
of 0.1 x each side

dimension
about
each
axis
independently, for design;

4.
VerticaJ reinforcement with at least 4 bars having an area between O.OOZA,

and O . O U , ;
5.
Lateral ties at least 1/4 in. in diameter, whichmay be placed either in mortar
or grout.
Other special requirements which relate to columns are as follows:

1.
Code 5.11.2 requires that devicesusedfor
transferring lateralsupport from
longitudinal members to columnsmusthave
a capacity of at least 1,000
pounds.
2.
For ap~plicationsin Seismic Zone 2, Code A.3.7 requires structural members

framing into or supportedby masonry columnsbe anchored to those columns.
Anchor bolts located in the tops of columns are required to be set entirely
12-2

A C 1T I T L E * l D G
93
Obb29Y7 0509052 9 9 7
within the reinforcingcagecomposed
of column bars and lateral ties. A
minimum of two #4 lateral ties must be provided in the top 5
in. of
the
column. Welded or mechanical connections for reinforcing bars in tension are

required to develop 125%of the yield strength of the bars in tension.
In Seismic Zones 3 and 4, Code k4.6 requires #3 lateral ties embedded in
3.
grout at closer spacings. A least lateral dimension of 12 in. is also required

per Code k4.8.
Sincecolumnsmust
be reinforced, the applicabledesign
procedure of Chapter 7
Reinforced Masonry, which uses linear stress-strain assumptionsand linear bending theory,
applies. Allowable tension
and compression stresses in
steel are given in Code 7.2, and
allowable compressive stresses in masonry are provided in Code 7.3.1.2. Tensile stresses in
masonry are neglected. In addition
to the limit on the ratio of effective height to least
nominal dimension < 25 and the allowable compressive stress due to combined flexure and
axial load
S S
/
fm,
the overall axial stress per Code 7.3.1.1 must not exceed the following:
Code Eq. 7-1
for h/r c 99 and
Fa =
for hlr
($r
(i)
f,
Code Eq. 7-2
99
Per Code 5.13.1.2 the cross-section to which F, isapplicablecouldcertainlyinclude

transformed longitudinal column steel. Obviously neglecting
the longitudinal steel for the
axial load conditionas illustrated in the MDG Example problemsis conservative. The Code
committee is currently addressing this issue.
12-3

A C 1 TIILExMDG 93
m 0662947 0509053
823
The necessary equatiolnsfor allowable stress design of masonry columns are very difficultto
apply manually.
12.1.2 Development of InteractionDiagram
The axial load-bending moment interaction diagram is developed using equations and
assumptions very similarto those used in analysisand design of reinforced masonry flexural
members. The only difference lies in the fact that the compression force is not equal to the
tension force, due to the additional net axial force on the structural element. This minor
difference, however, results in much greater complexity in solving the equations directly.
Interaction diagrams can be produced which permit a rapid graphical solution to the
problem.
To illustrate the process of interaction diagram development, a rectangular column withtwo

layers of steel will firsit be examined. This choice is based on the code requirement that a
minimum of 4 bars must be placed in any column;hence, at least two layers are most likely.
As illustrated in Fig. 1:2.1-1,several states of stress (strain gradients) can occur in a column
cross-section.
These stress statesare
shown as Cases 1-5. Case 1 illustrates pure
compression applied concentrically. Case 2 is the result of a load applied eccentrically to

produce maximum stress at the top fiber and zero stress at the bottom fiber. In Case 3,
there is compressive mess in the top fiber and zero stress in the bottom bars. Tension
stress in the bottom fibers is neglected. Case 4 is the balanced condition, with allowable
compression stress on thetop fiber, and allowable tension stress in the bottomlayer of steel.
Case 5 is the pure bending case, with no axial load present. Finally, Case 6 (not shown on
Fig. 12.1-1) is a required Code check for axial compressive stress.
these cases will be derived below.
12-4

Equations for each of
A C 1 TITLE+MDG 93
Ob62949 0507054 7bT
Fb
(b) Tension
Controls
(a) Compression
Controls
Fig. 12.1-1 Column States of Stress
Case
(correspondstostraingradient1inFig.12.1-1)
Neglectinggroutdisplaced
e =O
by steel andtransformingcompressionstee i1 to
masonry using a transformation factor of n:
1
d'
-4
"-
e As e
12-5

C', = nF, A',
F, A',
A C 1 TITLEaMDG 93 W 0662949 0509055 bTb W
In this case and subsequent cases, steel in compression is assumed to have adequate lateral
reinforcement to satisfy Code5.9.1.6. If lateral reinforcement is inadequate, the compression
steel stress is zero.
Summing internal for,ces axially
cm,+ cl,
+ Cs
Summing internal moments about the centroid
Case 2 (zero strain ai. bottom fiber)
/-
Cm =
Summing forces axia1:ly
cm+ cfs+ Cs
Summing moments about the centroid
($)
CER
C',
(f)- Cs (f)
12-6

1/2F, bt
A C 1 TITLErMDG 93
0662949 O509056 532
Case 3 (zero strain in bottom steel)
Fb
Cs = o
Summing forces axially
cm+ c',
Case 4 (Balanced Conditions)
l"-4
b
12-7

A,F,
A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93
m 0662949 0509057 479 m
The neutral axis can be defiied in terms of allowable stresses using similar triangles
'bd
"
4
Fs
Fb + -
from which
1
kb =
1 + - Fs
nFb
*)
Pb =
CD,+ Cis - T
[i
M b = C,,, .- Rd
+ Cls($)
T(:)
Case 5 (Pure Bending)
1r
fb
_r
b
11
12-8

AC1
TITLErMDG 73 m Ob62747 0507058
305 H
o,
T=
c,
From similar
triangles,
+ C',
(Fjf,n
-)
nAs( d-kd
kd
fb =
fbbkd
nfb
[
kd-d'y
A's ]
Define A , = pbd, A', = p'bd, multiply by k d , and divide byfb

1
npbd(d - k d ) = - b ( W 2
2
k2 + ( n p l
2
n(kd - d')p'bd
np) k -
Check k against kb,

If k
kb Use F b in above equations
If k
kb Use F, in above equations
;( - y)
cm
cfs(f)+ Ts(f)
Case 6 (Axial Load Only)

Check P / !S F,
12-9

A C 1T I T L E : * H D G
93
Obb2949 0509059 241
To illustrate these equations, a specific example will be worked as follows:
A,, = 4 #7 bars
g = 0.6
symmetrically placed
A, = A', = 1.20 in.2
EL
Adequate
lateral
reinforcement
is
provided to satisfy Code 5.9.1.6.
f',= 1,500 psi
15.63"
9.38
"
CMU Strength = 1,900 psi
Type S mortar
Grouted Solid, fg = 4,160 psi
F, = 24000 psi (tension and compression

for grade 60 reinforcing)
Fb = 1/3 f',= 500 psi

E, = 2.08 x 106 psi (Code Table 5.5.1.3)
Eg = SOO& = 2.08 x lo6 psi
n = - -29 - 13.9, use n

2.08
Using the equations previously developed for Cases 1 through 5

Case 1 (Uniform strain over section)
cm=
O
'0
psi
1
O
,OO lb/kip
(15.63 in.)2
122 kips
122 kips + 8.4 kips + 8.4 kips
139 kips (Plot on Fig. 12.1-2)

12-10

= 14
A CT 1I T L E * N D G
Obb2949 05090bO Tb3
93
Case 2 (Zero strain at bottom fiber)

1
Cm = -( 122 kips)
2
61 kips
8.4kips
in - 3.13 in
( 15.63 15.63
in.
Cs = 8.4 kips
15.63 h. - 12.5 h.
15.63 in.
C',
61 kips + 6.72 kips + 1.68 kips
) + 6.72 kips (9.38 )
M = 6 l k i p s ( 15'63
in'
(Plot on Fig.12.1-2)
183 in.-kips
69.4 kips (Plot on Fig. 12.1-2)

in. - 1.68kips
Case 3 (Zero strain in bottom steel)
cm=
500 pi (15.63in.)(12.5
v2 (lo00 1bPa.p)
Cls = 8.4
kips(:)
=
207 in.-kips
Cs =
6.3 kips
48.8 kips + 6.3 kip
in.) = 48.8 kips
55.1 kips
Plot
Fjg.
12.1
-2
Case 4 (Balanced Case)
kb =
I +
1
24 ksi
14(.5 ksi)
0.226
kbd
2.82 in.
12-11

(9.38 in.)
A C 1 TITLErMDG 93
dl
Ob62949 0509063 9 T T
3.13 in.
Cm = 1/2(500psi)(15.63inJ(2.82 in.) = 11.0 kips
T = 1.2 h2(24 ksi)
28.8 kips
P = 11.0kips - 0.9 kips - 28.8 kips
M = 11.0 kips 15.63 in. 3
2.82 h.)
-18.7kips (tension)
o.9 kip
(9.382 h.)
28.8 kips 9.38
in.
M = 207 in.-kips (Plot on Fig 12.1 -2)

Case 5 (Pure Bending)
I+
1.20 in?
1.20 in?
+ 14
15.63 in.(12.5 in.)
(15.63
in.:)(12.5 in.)
[0.172a +
2(14)(1.2
in?)(3.13 in.)
15.63 h(12.5 in.) (12.5 in.)
2 (14)
(1.2 in?)
15.63 in. (12.5 in.)
0.323
Since k > kb, the compressive allowable stress in the masonry is reached before the tensile
allowable in the steel. Hence the steel stress is
d-M
M
fs
n (113 f',)
1.2 h2(14.7 ksi)
cm=
14.7 ksi e Fs
17.6kips
O
'0
psi (15.63 in.)(0.323)(12.5 in.) = 15.8 kips

1,Ooo Ib/ki*)
C/,= 8.4 kips 4.04 h. - 3.13 in.

4.04 in.
= 15.8
kips
15*63 h: + 1.90 kip 9.38

2
4.043 "')
12-12

in.
)+
9.38 in.
17.6 kips
M = 194 in.-kips
m 0662747 0507062 836 m
Plot on Fig. 12.1-2
Case 6 (Axial Compressive Stress)
(0.37 k~i)(15.63h.)2
= 90 kips
The allowable axial capacitycomputations have neglected the axial capacity contribution of
the column steel.
See MDG 8.6.2 and 12.1.1.
compression stress due to axial
Note that in the development the
+ bending was limited to 1/3 Fm,satisfymg the Code.
One
would still have to check to ensure that theaxial stress satisfied Code 7.3.1.1, Case 6. These
6 cases are plotted on Fig. 12.1-2 to form the interaction diagram for this column only.
150
100
P
KIPS
90
50
Fig. 12.1-2 Column Interaction Diagram

It is possible to construct such diagrams ina non-dimensional formfor a family of columns.
This will be illustrated by reworking the previous example using different values of b and t,
12-13

A C 1 T I T L E S U D G 93
0662743 0509063 772
while maintaining the same steel ratio pl, the same allowable compressive stress Fb, and
same spacing ratio belween steel layers, g. This second example is summarized along with
the previous example in the table below.
Now, if the values of ,P and M are non-dimensionalized by dividing P by (F&) and M by
(Fat2),each value of Examples 1 and 2 results in the same non-dimensionalized values for
load and moment for all 5 cases. These non-dimensionalized values are summarized in the
table below as Example 3.
Table 12.1.1 Load Moment Interaction Diagram Data

Case Number
Example
in. No.
b
in.
A Pt
P 69 139
1
15.6
16
15.6
55
-19
2.4
194207
O 207183
-107329 36
1.26
49
56
55
52
1.14
0.57
0.45
-0.15
P
Fbbt
non-dimensionalized
M
Fbbt2 0.0
0.096 0.109
0.108
0.101
12.1.2.1 Compression Controls- If these non-dimensionalized values are plotted, they form
an interaction diagramwhich has muchbroader application than those previously developed.
12-14

A C 1 T I T L E r H D G 93 D 0662949 0509064 609
Such a plot is illustrated in Fig. 12.1-4. If another set of examples were calculated using a
if steel spacing ratio (g) is
larger steel percentage, another curve would result. Likewise,
changed, stillanother non-dimensionalized curve results. Two such

sets of curves are shown
in Figs. 12.1-3 and 12.1-5, g = 0.4 and g = 0.8. These curves are valid only for rectangular
columns with two equal areasof top and bottom steel (As = AJ, symmetrically placed and
c,
I
O
\9
d
o:
.A
o?
9
d
09
oO:
Fig. 12.1-3 Non-Dimensional Column Interaction Diagram

12-15

o?
O
9
O
- Compression Controls
9 3 W Obb2949 05090b5 5 4 5 D
Fig. 12.1-4 Non-Dimensional Column Interaction Diagram Compression Controls
12-16

A C 1 TITLE*IDG
9 3 M 0662949 0509066 481 M
r"'
09
O
Il
bc
Fig. 12.1-5 Non-Dimensional Column Interaction Diagram - Compression Controls
12-17

A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 93
Obb2747 0507067 318 W
adequately laterally tied. The total steel area is A, (A,+ A, = A,), and pr is the ratio of
/
total steel area to gross column area (P, = AJbt). The curves in Fig. 12.1-3 through 12.1-5
are based on the assumption that allowable masonry compressivestress controls the limiting
capacity.
12.1.2.2
Tension Controls
If the eccentricity of load is large enough, capacity will be
controlled by allowable steel tensile stressrather than allowable masonry compressive stress.
Strain gradients for this case are shown in Fig. 12.1-1(b). Using basic mechanics as before,
design aids can be developed for this case as well as for the cases illustrated previously.
Three such aids are shown in Figs. 12.1-6, 12.1-7 and 12.1-8. These curves control when e
> eb or k < kb. Often the designer cannot readily tell which conditions control.In this case,
calculate the required value of pI from both the compression and tension controls curvesand
use the larger steel requirement.
12.2 WALLS
12.2.1 Unreinforced Masonry Walls
Design of unreinforced masonry walls mustmeet several criteria required in Code Chapter
6 as follows:
1.
The unityinequality (Code Eq. 6-l),

which hasbeen in masonry codesfor
years, must be satisfied.
This
fa
inequality
assumes
straight
line
a
Fa
interaction
between
axial
and
flexural compressive stresses.
12-18

93
Obb2949 0509068 254
IC
\9
O
J:
r?
O
Fig. 12.1-6 Column Design Aid Tension Controls - g = 0.4

12-19

A C 1 TITLExMDG 9 3 D 0662949 0509069 L90
09
\9
Wqd/d
Fig. 12.1-7 Column Design Aid Tension Controls g = 0.6

12-20

A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93
Ob62949 0509070 902
Fig. 12.1-S Column Design Aid Tension Controls g = 0.8

12-21

2.
93
0662949 0509073 849
In lieu of limits on hlt, the Code uses limits on buckling load (Code Eq. 6-2) to more
rationally restrict the slendernessratio.
This requirement does not apply to
reinforced masonry walls.
3.
Flexural tensile stresses caused by eccentricity ofaxial load or lateral load must be
limited to allowable stresses from Code Table 6.3.1.1. h i a l tension forces are not
permitted in unreinforced masonry walls in Code 6.4.
Unity Inequality The unity inequality for checking compression stress
12.2.1.1
f,
Fa
fb
- S 1
Fb
can be restated in terms of P (allowable), by substituting

for
fa
and fb =
Pe
S
By definingthe kern eccentricity
e, astheeccentricity
at which extreme fiberstress
undergoes a transition from compression to tension, another substitution is for

F
e, =
3
-
Replacing these terms in Code Eq. 6-1, results in

Eq. 12.2-1
Code Eqs. 6-3 and 6-4 may be rewritten in the form
where R is a slenderness reduction factor given by
12-22

AC1 TITLE*HDG 93
Ob62949 0507072 785
Eq. 12.2-2
Eq. 12.2-3
Fig. 12.2-1 illustrates the variation of R over a wide range of hlr values.
1.0
O .8
O .6
R
O .4
0.2
20
40
60 14080120 100
160
hlr
Fig. 12.2-1 Slenderness Reduction Factor

Code Eq. 6-1 can now be written as
Eq. 12.2-4
This equation can be non-dimensionalized as follows:
f/,A
Eq. 12.2-5
+ 3Rp
ek
Note: For seismic or wind conditions the right side of Eq. 12.2-5 would be increased by h.
12-23

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
Obb2949 0509073 b l l
This equation in its non-dimensionalized form is plotted in Fig. 12.2-2 for values of R = 1,
R = 0.5, and R = 0.25. Fig. 12.2-2 is a general curve for any masonry strength and wall
thickness, except that the ordinate can be increased by a factor of 4/3 when a 1/3 increase
in allowable stress is permitted in accordance with Code 5.3.2. This curve may be used to
determine the maximum value of P for a given e or the maximum value of e for a given P
as limited by Eq. 6-1, i.e., compression allowable controlling.
Note: C = 314 If The 1/3
Increase In Allowable Stress
In Code 5.3.2 Is Audicable.
Otherwise, C = 1.dS - Section Modulus
el,=
Area
=For Solid Sections
03
o -20
P
fhAC
O . 15
0.10
O .O5
0.25
O -75
0.50
1.o
1,25
ele,
Fig. 12.2-2 General Wall Design Aid For Allowable Compression

More specific design aids can easilybe developed for specific wall thicknessesand masonry
compressive strength. Fig. 12.2-3 illustrates Eq. 12.2-5 applied to an8 in. concrete masonry
wall having a specified compressive strength of masonry of 1,500 psi. Four curves are given
in Fig. 12.2-3. Load capacities for fully grouted, full mortar bedding and face shell bedding,
12-24

0662949 0509074 5 5 8
assuming ASTM C 90 (hollow) block, are given for R = 1. The curve for AST" C 90
(solid) CMU is not plotted. The face shell bedding case is also plotted for R = 1/2 For
other values of R and hollow CMU face shell bedding,linear interpolationmay be used as
an approximation. If more accuracy is needed, the value for load capacity obtained from
Figs. 12.2-2or 12.2-3 usingR = 1can be multiplied by a slenderness correction factor (SCF),
4+3-
SCF=R
ek
Eq. 12.2-6
3Re
4+-
35
30
25
20
15
10
1
J
o .S
1 .o
1.S
2.o
3.0
2.S
Eccentricity e,in
'ASTM C 90 (Hollow) CMU
Fig. 12.2-3 Wall Design Curves 8 in. Concrete Masonry
12-25

Obb2949 0509075 494
The slenderness correction factor (SCF) is equal to R for zero eccentricity and gets larger
as eccentricity increases. For example, for e/ek = 1and R = 0.5, SCF = 0.64. Figs. 12.2-4
and 12.2-5 show the variation of SCF with elek and R, respectively.
R= 1
ele k
Fig. 12.2-4 Slendernesss Correction Factors vs. elek
1.0
O .8
O .6
O .4
o .2
O
Slenderness Reduction Factor, R
Fig. 12.2-5 Slenderness Correction Factors vs. Slenderness Reduction Factor

12-26

A C 1 TITLErMDG 93
12.2.1.2 Euler Buckling
0662747 0509076 320
- Limitations on Euler buckling as required by Code Eq. 6-2 using
Eq. 6-6 effectively limitsh/? for unreinforced walls. Code Eq. 6-6 divided by Af', to be nonon the approximation that E,,, = 1000 Sm.
dimensionalized is plotted in Fig. 12.2-6 based
Fig. 12.2-6 can be used in conjunction with Fig. 12.2-2, selecting the lower value of PTA.
If a curve such as Fig. 12.2-6 is used, then axial load must be calculated from the value of
Perdand compared to the P from Fig. 12.2-3. The smaller value governs.
1.o
O .6
P,
Af 'm
O .4
O.,t
1
O
50
75
100
125
150
hlr
Fig. 12.2-6 Non-Dimensionalized Euler Effect vs. hlr

CodeEq.(6-2)requires
that P be limited to amaximumvalueof
PJ4. This criteria
indirectly places a limit on the maximum slenderness that is acceptable. In the application
of Code Eq. 6-6, the eccentricity shouldbe based only on the actual or estimated eccentricity
of the gravity load P. In fact, e is defined in the Code as the eccentricity of axial load. It
is not necessary to include virtual eccentricity which results fromlateral load due to wind or
seismic effects.
12.2.13 Flexural Tensile Stress

allowablevaluesgiveninCodeTable
- Calculated flexural tensile

6.3.1.1.
stresses must not exceed the
Thistableapplies
to claymasonry and
concrete masonry and both portland cement lime and masonry cement mortars, Type M, S ,

AC1
TITLEwMDG 93 W Ob62747 0507077 2b7 m
or N. Values are also given for stress parallel to the bed joints (horizontal span) and
perpendicular to bed joints (vertical span). For concrete masonry, allowable flexural tensile
stresses are given for fully grouted construction. Forpartial grouting, interpolation is
permitted.
Applied flexural tensile stresses resulting from combined axial load and bending moments
are calculated from the equation
-P + -Pe
<F&
A
Eq. 12.2-7
Using terms defined previously, this equation can be rewritten
Eq. 12.2-8
This expression for checking tension is valid only for e > ek and the equation is plotted in
Fig. 12.2-7. The value of P obtained from this equation or Fig. 12.2-7 is then compared to
the other values of P as controlled by the unity inequality where compression controlsand
by Euler buckling. The smallest value of the three will control. Obviously, flexural tension
will not control unless eccentricities, e, become somewhat large, at least > ek.
Note: This curve ensures compliance with Code 6.3.1.1 allowable flexural tension provisions.
To use this curve, determine the allowable Fb, from Code Table 6.3.1.1 (applying the 1/3
increase from Code 5.3.2 where applicable). Calculate the kern eccentricity of the wall, ek,
from the expression
e,
- S
--
Eq. 12.2-9
where: S = section modulus

A = area
12-28

A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93
m 0662949
0509078 I T 3
0.8
0.7
O .6
O5
O .4
O .3
f ; : :
O
ele
Fig. 12.2-7 Wall Design Aid for Allowable Flexural Tension

Design aids can easilybe constructed from Eq.12.2-8. Fig. 12.2-8 illustrates a typical design
curve for 8 in. concrete masonry walls. Curves are shown for solid walls, walls with hollow
units with fullmortar bedding, and walls with hollow units with
face shell bedding. Different
allowable stresses are shown to illustrate the effect. The allowable load is read directly from
the ordinate. In cases where allowable stresses are increased by one-third, the designer can
either increase Fb, or simply increase the calculated load, P,by one-third.
12.2.2 Reinforced Masonry Walls

Design of Reinforced Masonry Walls for combined axial load and bending requires that
several conditions be met:
1)
The average axial compressive stress cannot exceed the allowable values given
by Code Eqs. 7-1 and 7-2,
12-29

A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93
0662949 0509079 0 3 T
P , kips
e . in.
'ASTM C 90 (hollow) CMU
Fig. 12.2-8 Wall Design Aid - 8 in. Concrete Masonry

2)
The extreme fiber compressive stress due to combined axial load and bending
and
cannot exceed the allowable value of 1/3Sm,
3)Thesteel
tensile stress cannot exceeditsallowablevaluegiveninCode
7.2.1.1.
An important code provision affecting the design of reinforced masonry walls is contained
in Code 7.2.1.2(a).
This requirement permitscompression
forces tobe
resisted by
compression reinforcement only if the lateral supportrequirements of Code 5.9.1.6 are met.
Sinceitisvirtuallyimpossible
to meet these provisions in walls, the contribution of
reinforcing steel to compressive forces must be neglected for walls. This very conservative
12-30

A C 1T I T L E b f l D G
93
0662949 0509080 851
requirement does, however, result in greatly simplified design procedures for eccentricities
of e < t/3. Assuming the wall to be fully grouted with steel at the wall centerline for this
region, the capacity of a wall is independent of the amount of reinforcement. Only when
e
> t/3 is it necessary to account for reinforcement in the design. This concept will be
clearly illustrated with the development of the interaction diagram.
12.2.2.1 Interaction Diagram for Reinforced Walls

- The interaction diagram for reinforced
masonry walls withreinforcement located at the center of the wall can be divided into three
distinctregions: e c t/6;t/6
t/3; and e > t/3. Each of these will be developed
separately, and a final diagram developed. The masonry is assumed to have zero tensile
capacity. The developed equations are valid for a solidly grouted wall or for a section in
which kd
e
t/6
face shell thickness.
This region of the diagram corresponds to a strain gradient ranging between Case
1 and Case 2 as shown in Fig. 12.2-9. Since Case 2 coincides with the kern eccentricity, this
case corresponds to e = t/6 for fully grouted sectionsor S/A for partially ungoruted sections.
Tension
Reinforced Wall
Compression
Strain Gradient
Fig. 12.2-9 Variable Compression Throughout Cross Section

The resulting interaction diagram for any pointin this region is shown in the top portion of
Fig.12.2-10.Since
the reinforcement is in compression and cannot be laterally tied, its
12-31

A CT1I T L E v M D G
Obb2949 0509083 7 9 8 M
93
effect is neglected in thisregion.
The shape of the curveconnecting
the points
corresponding to Case 1 and Case 2 is, very conveniently, a straight line.

O <e
-1"
"
Fbbt
t/6
Eq. 12.2-10
Fbbt2'
Note: One would still have to check PIA versus Code Eq. 7-1 or 7-2.
O .E
P=Fbbt - 6P e/t
O.
O .6
Fbbt
0.5
O .4
t16
t/3
0.3
o .2
0.1
0.02 0.04 0.06
0.08 0.10
Pe
"7
F,bt
Fig. 12.2-10 Interaction Diagram Reinforced Wall

t/6
ic
ic
t/3
This region of the diagram corresponds to strain gradients between Case 2
and Case 3 on Fig.12.2-9.
Thisregionis
a curvedlinewhen
plotted using the normal
interaction diagram parameters as shown in the middle section of Fig. 12.2-10. It is linear,
however, if expressed in terms of P/F& and e/t and can be expressed as
Eq. 12.2-11
e > t/3
In this region the steel is in tension and resists all tensile stresses.
Points on the
interaction diagram in this region correspond to strain gradients between Case 3 and Case
12-32

93
m 0662949 0509082 624 m
4 in Fig. 12.2-9. Case 4 can represent any magnitude of tensile strain in steel. All values
obtained on the interaction diagram for this region assume that the allowable compressive
stress in masonry, Fb,controls the capacity. This
further implies that k
kb, where kb is
defined such that

c
Eq. 12.2-12
Points on the interaction diagram for various selections

of the location of Case 4 are shown
in the lower portion of Fig. 12.2-10 for a broad selection of values of n p , where n is the
modular ratio EsErnand pI is the ratio of total steel area togross area of masonry. In order
to facilitate more accurate use of this figure as a design aid, Fig. 12.2-11 is provided as an
enlargement of the lower part of Fig. 12.2-10. Values of k are also shown in Fig. 12.2-11 in
order to ensure that k > kb.
e > e,
For large eccentricities, steel allowable stress will control. Values of n p obtained
from Fig. 12.2-11 would not be correct for such cases.
Another interaction diagram must
be developed by limiting the steel tensile stressto the allowable value and varying the strain
gradient in the cross section to obtain curves which correspond to different values of np.
Such a diagram is illustrated in Fig. 12.2-12.
This diagram also indicates valuesof k which can be used to verify that k C kb is a necessary
condition for using Fig. 12.2-12.
For partially grouted reinforced walls the following procedure should be used.If the neutral
axis depth, k d , is less than the face shell thickness,
ffi
of partially grouted units, the values
obtained from the interaction curve need not be changed. Only the value in Code Eq. 7-1
or Code Eq. 7-2 would have to be adjusted to account for the change in area and radius of
gyration. Since the interaction diagrams also include values
confirm whether or not M
tf
of k, the designer can easily
If kd > tr, a basic mechanics approach should be employed.
12-33

93
Obb2949 0509083 560
"i9
O
""-3
8'0 = Y
"
"
L'O =
9
O
m
9
O
o?
O
2
o

12-34

AC1
TITLE*MDG 93 m 0662949 0509084 4T7 m
12-35

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
12.2.2.2 Typical Iterative Method
Ob62949 0509085 3 3 3
- In the United States most masonry elements are walls.
Walls commonly have to resist the effects of combined axial and bending loads. Bending
loads can be either in-plane or out-of-plane as shown in Fig. 12.2-13.
In-Plane
Out-of-Plane
Fig. 12.2-13 Wall Loading

There are no easyclosed form solutions to the stress equations for walls subjected to
bending combined with axial compression.
Structural engineers typically rely on iterative
methods or design charts. Designcharts for most masonry systemsare not readily available.
See MDG 12.2.2.1for discussion concerning developmentof wall interaction diagrams. Thus
iterative methods are most common. The following procedure is one example of an iterative
method (12.2.1, 12.2.2).
Fig. 12.2-14 shows a diagram of a wall. The axial load is applied to the centroid of the
12-36

A CT 1I T L E x M D G
73
Obb2749 0509086 27T
masonry area with the applied moment adjusted as necessary. This diagram,although
depicting in-plane bending, is applicable to both in-plane and out-of-plane bending of walls.
There are three possible conditions for
the wall. It is either uncracked, cracked
with the steel in compression(the extent
of the crack has not reached the steel),
or cracked with the steelin tension. The
first step in the analysis is to determine
which condition applies to the wall. It
will depend on both geometry and
Fig. 12.2-14 Flexure and Axial Wall Loading
loading.
Fig. 12.2-15 shows the typical bending and axial load diagram. Loading conditions beyond
the limits of the diagram are beyond the allowable stresses. Loading conditions inside the
limits od the diagram are within the allowable stresses.
The condition of the wall canbe quickly established by using the non-dimensional parameter
MIPd. This parameter represents a straight line radiating from the diagramsorigin as
shown. By summing moments, it can be shown that certain values of the MIPd divide the
diagram into the wall conditions. These values are given in MDG Table 12.2.1.
The determination of the allowable moments of Regions 1 and 2 can be obtained in closed
form with a simple equation. In Region 3 it is more complicated.
Normally the process of evaluating a wall consists of guessing the thickness, length, etc.(or
as given by the architect) and then determining the required area of steel. This is the basis
for the following iterative solution for Region 3.
12-37

AC
T I1T L E * H D G
93
Obb2949 0509087 LOb
P4
O
H
12-38

93
0662749 0509088 042
In Region 3, the wall is either limited by the compression of the masonry or the tension in
the reinforcement. Begin by assuming the tension in the steel controls. By making an initial
guess about the location of the neutral axis, the MDG Eqs. 12.2-15 and 12.2-18 provide an
iterative process that quickly converges. The equations are derived from the summation of
forces and moments and using linear stresshtrain relationships.Typically,
converges, but sometimes results in negative
the system
areas of reinforcement. Do not allow this
negative solution to discourage continuing with the process.

Following convergence, a check is made of the initial assumption that tension in the steel
controls. If valid, the analysis is complete. If not valid, then the compression controls and
a new set of equations that do not require iteration result. MDG Eqs. 12.2-20 and 12.2-21.
The following is a detailed step-by-step procedure of the analysis described above.
Step 1
Determine the wall

condition
1. Calculate A as the distance from the axial load to the centroid of the
tension steel divided by d.
2. Calculate the quantity MIPd.
3. Use Table 12.2.1 to determine the region for analysis (See Fig. 12.2-15).
Table 12.2.1 Flexure and Axial Loading
Region
- Wall Analysis
Condition of Wall
Test
Wall is in compression
and not cracked
Pd
Wall is cracked but steel

is in compression.
Pd
(5
Wall is cracked but steel

is in tension.
MPd
>
(-A)
;
12-39

-A)
A C 1 T I T L E x U D G 93 W 0662949 0509089 T89
Step 2
Calculate
the
allowable
moment.
REGION 1: The moment is limited by flexural compression in the masonry.
Eq. 12.2-13
If M, is greater than M applied, the section is satisfactory.

REGION 2 The moment is also limited by flexural compression in the masonry.
Eq. 12.2-14
If M, is greater than M applied, the section is satisfactory.

REGION 3: The moment may be limited by either the compression in the masonry
or tension in the steel.
An iterative approach is required.
1. Assume a compression centroid location, a.

2. Perform the followingiteration that assumes the tension inthe steel
controls:
Mp = P[+
-u]
Eq. 122-15
Eq. 122-16
c=
(P+AsFan
Eq. 12-2-17
Fsb
Eq. 12.2-18
Where :
a = Estimate of internal compression load centroiddistancefromthe

extreme compression fiber
= Applied axial load at the center of the wall
M = Appliedmoment
12-40

m 0662949
93
O509090 7 T 0
A, = Area of trim steel

Mp = Moment of applied axial load with respect to the centroid of internal
compression force
1, = Length of the wall for in-plane bending
1, = Thickness of the wall for out-of-plane bending
= Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the steel centroid
F, = Allowable steel tension stress

b
= Width of the wall for out-of-plane bending
b = Thickness of the wall for in-plane bending

Use a, for a, and repeat until the value of a converges.
3. If the iteration converges and the resulting a is less than the

following value, the wall is limited by the tension reinforcement and
the analysis is complete. Otherwise continue:
d
31+-
Eq. 12.2-19
4. If the value of u is larger than the above value, determine the

required steel area using the following:
a =
_2
d2
2(PAd + M )
3Fbb
Eq. 12.2-20
If 3a is larger than d , then the masonry wall needs to be longer

and/or thicker. If 3a is smaller than d, then the steel area is
Eq. 12.2-21
Often this area is smaller than minimum steel requirements oris a

negative value. Minimum steel should then be used. It is normal
12-41

Obb29Y9 0509093 b37
practice in loadbearing masonry buildings to use at least (2) #5

minimumum bars for trim reinforcement.
12.3 PILASTERS
The description of pilasters given in MDG 11.2.1 through 11.2.4 is sufficiently general to
apply to nearly allpilasters whether they are subjected to flexure onlyor toflexure and axial
load as described in this section.
It is recommended that MDG 11.2.1
11.2.4 be read
before proceeding with this section,so that the reader may become acquainted with loading
conditions, coursing layouts, and effective sections.
123.1
CriticalLoadingCases
As noted in Fig. 11.2-1, pilasters may be subjected to vertical loads at roof or floor levels,
and lateral loads along their height. If simple supports are assumed at the top and bottom
(refer to MDG 11.2.5 for discussion of boundary conditions), moments from each load will
be as shown in Fig. 12.3-1 for a single story pilaster. While
the sense of the gravity load
moment will be defined by the orientation of the eccentricity,wind load moment may
reverseitself
if a suction is applied rather than direct pressure. If a seismicloadis
considered, both senses of sway should be considered as well. Thus, moments resulting from
gravity and lateral force must be added as noted in Eq. 12.3-1. If the lateral force can act
in either direction, then the effects of gravity and lateral loads should be summed
algebraically, and the two cases (sum and differences of effects) should be checked.
M = -W h 2 * -Pe
Eq. 12.3-1
8
2
If the lateral moment is small relative to the gravity moment, then the critical case may be
at the top of the pilaster with gravity loads alone, in which case, Eq. 12.3-2 would apply.
Pe
Eq. 12.3-2
A case involving zero moment may govern if the gravity load is relatively large and the
12-42

A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93
Obb2949 0509092 573 M
eccentricity small. In this case, the critical location for design would be at the base where
the vertical compressive stress is maximum.
Fig. 123-1 MomentDiagrams for Pilaster

123.2 DesignConsiderations for UnreinforcedPilasters
Flexural
tensile
stress usually
governs
compressive stresses areanorder
for unreinforced
pilasters.
Since
allowable
of magnitude more than allowabletensilestresses,
compression typically does not control except for the case of small eccentricity. However,
both cases should be checked. For nearly all practical cases, design is controlled by flexure
rather than axial force. It is likely that wind or seismic cases with a minimum
amount of
vertical compressive force will govern. However, if vertical load is applied at a relatively
large eccentricity,then it may be conservative to consider the largest gravity forcestogether
with the lateral forces, since the gravity moments will increase flexural tension stress. With
large eccentricities and small lateral forces, gravity effects alone may govern, since the onethird increase in allowable stressesdoes not apply. In summary, the following loading cases
should be considered when flexural tensile stress governs.
12-43

A C 1 T I T L ExM DG 93 W Ob62949 0509093 q O T W
1. full lateral
+ minimum gravity (for small eccentricities)
2. full lateral
+ maximum gravity (for large eccentricities)
3. maximum gravity (for large eccentricities, small lateral)

According to Code 5.3.1, when earthquake forces are considered, deadload shall be
multiplied by 0.9 for loading case (1). When effects of wind are considered, minimum dead
loads shall be taken attheir full value. No load factor is applied to the wind or earthquake
loads.
Although compressive stress will probably not control for an unreinforced pilaster, it still
should be checked (it could control for cases of high gravity force and small eccentricity as
noted above).Compressive
stresses resulting from both axial and flexureshould
be
considered using Code Eq. 6-1:

c
-+J~
J' S
1 for gravity loads only
Eq. 12.3-3
Fa
Fa
Fb
Ja
Jb
+ <
1.33 for combined gravity and wind or earthquake
Axial compressive stress, fa, should be computed over the minimum net area of masonry.
Flexural compressive stress,
fb, should be calculated based on the section modulus for the
minimum net section. The minimum net section shallbe based on the mortar bedded area
for ungrouted construction. The allowable axial compressivestress is given by Code Eq. 6-3
and Eq. 6-4.
c
Eq. 12.3-4
or
Eq. 12.3-5
12-44

A C 1 TITLE*:MDG 93
Obb2949 0509094 3Yb
The allowable flexural compressive stress is given by Code Eq. 6-5.
Fb
(U31 f',
Es. 12.3-6
If wind or seismic is considered, then the "1"in Eq. 12.3-3 may,be replaced by a "1.33" per
Code 5.3.2. Even though compressive stress may not govern the size of an unreinforced
section, it will dictate what the required prism compressive strength should be.
Shear strength of an unreinforced pilaster subject
to both axial loads and flexure is no
different than for the case of pure flexure (see MDG 11.2.5).
1233 DesignConsiderations for ReinforcedPilasters
All masonry subjected to tension is neglected in a reinforced pilaster. The unity equation
(Eq. 12.3-3) does not apply for checking the compressive stress
under combined flexure and
axial stress since the section is considered to be cracked, and the axial force will not be
distributed across the entire net area. Instead, the Code 7.3.1.2 states that the compressive
stress due to flexure in combination with axial load shallnot exceedfJ3, provided that the
axial stress alone is less than the allowable F, given by Eq. 12.3-4 or Eq. 12.3-5. When the
compressive stress is due to combined lateral and gravity forces, the allowable stresses may
be increased by 'h. As noted in MDG 12.1.2, an axial load-moment interaction diagram can
bedeveloped
byassigningthislimitingcompressivestress
determining different combinations

differentassumed
ofaxial
to theextremefiber,
and
load and bending moment that result from
depths to the neutral axis.Similarinteractioncurves
can also be
developed based on limiting the reinforcement to its allowable tensile stress as prescribed
in Code 7.2. These tension-controlledcurves will govern the reinforcementdesignfor
pilasters with relatively small axial force.
The effectivesection will depend on whethertheweb
or flange isin
compression,as
discussed in MDG 11.2.4. If the bending moment.is primarily a result of lateral force rather
12-45

A C 1 TITLEsMDG 93
0662949 0509095 2 8 2
than eccentric vertical force, then moment reversal needs to be considered, and the critical
direction of bending mustbe identified. If compression controlsthe design, then thebending
that produces compression onthe web will control (Fig. 11.2-4 (a)), because the compressed
area is much smaller than if the flange were in compression (Fig. 11.2-4 (b)).
If the pilaster is reinforced symmetrically, and the effective flange width isunreinforced, the
critical sense of moment will be when the webis in compression. This assumption
will
reduce the problem to one of a cracked rectangular beam for which standard load-moment
interaction diagrams are available. Design may then be as simple as plotting the normalized
load and moments on the standardcharts to check that the assumed section size is adequate
and to estimate the needed reinforcement. An equivalent rectangular section can also be
used for the case of the flange in compression, provided that the neutral axis is within the
wall thickness for a fully grouted wall, and within the exterior face shell for an ungrouted
wall.
If reinforcement is not placed symmetrically across the pilaster section, then both senses of
bending need to be considered. It may not be obvious which sense will control the design.
For example, if the effective flange width contains reinforcement as shown in Fig. 12.3-2,
then compression stresses will be highest when the flange is in tension. However,the critical
case for tension will be when the web is in tension becausethe amount of reinforcement will
be limited. For eitherof these two cases, an analysis based on a cracked rectangular section
would suffice provided that the compressed zone remains a rectangle.
In the rare case that the compressed area is not rectangular, an interaction diagram needs
to be generated for theparticular T-shaped pilaster. No standard load-moment interaction
diagramsexist
for suchsections,becausethey
cannot be generalized in terms of
non-dimensionalized parameters. To generate such a diagram, maximum compressive stress

is set equal to a constant Fb (Fig. 12.3-3a), and the depth to the neutral axis, M ,is varied
arbitrarily to result in different combinations of axial force and moment. This will define
points on thel'compression-controls" interaction curve. Correspondingly, tensilestress in the
12-46

AC1
TITLE*NDG 93 M Obb29L19 0 5 0 9 0 9 b L19
reinforcement at the extreme layer is set equal to the allowable tensile stress (Fig. 12.3-3b),
and the resulting combinations
of axialforce and moment define the tensioned-control
interaction curve.
(a) Wall Reinforced With Flange In Tension
6t
6t
(b) Wall Reinforced With Web In Tension
Fig. 123-2 Effective Sections for Pilaster with Reinforced Wall

For sections with unsymmetrical reinforcementor geometry, axial loads mustbe referenced
to theplastic centroid (uncracked transformed section)
rather than to the geometric centroid
(cracked transfromed section). The plastic centroid is located at the centroid of all internal
forces when a uniform stress distribution,
with an amplitudeequal to Fb is applied acrossthe
transformed section. For this stress distributionthe plastic centroid is defined as the line of
action ofthe resultant of all internal forces. This definitionis consistent with zero curvature
of the section under pure axial load.
12-47

A C 1 TITLElltNDG 93 W Obb2949 0509077 055 W
L",
-
Plastic Centroid
1"'
Fig. 12.33 Stress Distributions for Development of Load-Moment Interaction

Diagrams for Non-rectangular Sections
REFERENCES
12.2.1 Tawresey, J. G., "Applied Stress Equations-Walls With Axial Load Combined With
Bending Moment," TMS Journal, Vol. 5, No. 2, July-December 1986, pp.T16-T20.
12.2.2 Tawresey, J.G., "Masonry P-M Diagrams
July-December 1989, T31-T35.
12-48

Made Easy," TMS Journal, Vol. 8, No. 2,
Example 12.1-1 RCJHotel
Obb27Lt7 0509078 T 7 1
- Lobby ColumnDesign
Design the column at Grid Line E and Grid Line 3on the first floor of the RCJ Hotel, Wall
Construction Option A. See MDG Fig. 9.1-6. The column is rectangular in plan, having a
2 ft
- 8 in. dimension along
Grid Line E. The width b will be established by structural
requirements. From gravity load analysis in MDG 9.1.3.1, the loads are D = 181 kips, L
= 143 kips. Lateral load analysis (Seismic Zone 4) results in a shear force of 31 kips and
strong axis moment of 137 ft-kips and axial compression of 50 kips.

Clay Brick Construction
11
f L = 2,400 psi
E,,, = 2.4 x lo6 psi
(from test)
32"
and
It
= 12
Calculations
Try b = 16 in.
5.3.1
Loading Combinations
D + L
181 + 143 = 324 kips
Minimum eccentricity
e,,, = O.lt = 3.2in.

D + L + E
181 + 143 + 50 = 374

kips
M = 137 ft-kips
12-49

5.9.1.3
A C 1 TITLEtMDG 93
0662949 0509099 928

and
Calculations
0.9D
+E
Fa = 0.33 f111
= 163
+ 50 = 213kips
0.33(2,400 psi)
800 psi
0.8 ksi
7.3.1.2
Using the interaction diagram (MDG Fig. 12.1-5) for g = 0.8
P -
324 kips
0.8ksi (16in.)(32 in.)
"
Fbbt
0.79
np, = 0.21
D+L
=
Fbbt2
3.2 in.
0.79 -= 0.079
32 m.
For the other two loading cases a 1/3 increase in allowablestress F b is

permitted.
12-5O

5.3.2
TITLE*RDG 93 m 0662947 0507100 4 7 T m
AC1

D+L+E
Code Reference
374kips
= 0.69
1.33(0.8 ksi)(16in.)(32 in.)
$
t
np, = 0.20
374kips (4.4 in.)

1.33(0.8 hi)(l6 in.)(32
Fbbt2
P -
0.094
in.)2
213 kips
= 0.39
1.33(0.8 ksi)(l6 in.)(32 in.)
F,bt
0.9D + E
<
Fbbt2
0.39
7-72
32 in.
i n *
np, = 0.02
0.094
The larger amount of steel area results from loading case D
+L
np, = 0.21
0.21
pt = - = 0.0175
12
A , = p,bt = 8.96 in.2
Select 8 -#lo bars, 4 in each face

A, = 10.16 i n 2
p, = 0.020 C 0.04
.-.OK
5.9.1.4
12-51

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
Obb2949 0509LOL 30b

and
Calculations
Reference
Code
The Code imposes an upper bound on axial compressive stress
Fa=
(- 3A [
1-
EQ. 7-1
Using the trial size of 32 in. x 16 in. and an effective height, h, of 10 ft
- 10 in. minus
the
depth of the second floor slab (8 in.), and a radius of gyration of 0.289 x 16 in. about the
weak axis, the allowable stress becomes
Therefore the maximum allowable load is
Pa = Fabt = 0.579 x 32 in. x 16 in. = 2% kips
324 kips
Note that the allowable axial load computations have neglected any contribution
of the
longitudinal column steel which is conservative. See MDG 8.6.2 and 12.1.1. Hence a 32 in.
x 16 in. column is too small to meet this requirement in spite of otherwise being capable of
carrying the imposed loads. Actually, this calculation should
be carried out immediately
upon selecting a trial size, not at the time shown here. This sequence was used in order to
illustrate the use of thedesignchartsforacolumnwithsignificantloadsrequiring
appreciable amounts of reinforcing. If the column is laterally supported to resist bending
about theweak axis, then the 32 in. x 16 in. columncan be retained. One couldalso
consider increasing the design value off:.
I)
Try a larger colu n size, 32 in. x 24 in.

Fa = 2,400 psiT1 122 h
140(0.289) (24 in.)
4
591 psi
12-52

0662949 0509102 242

and
Calculations
Pa
0.591 ksi(32 in.)(24 in.) = 453 kips > 324 kips
.-.OK
Now the procedure used previously to determine steel reinforcing requirements for the 32
in. x 16 in. column will be repeated for the 32 in. x 24 in. column.
Using the interaction diagram (Fig. 12.1-5) for g = 0.8
P -
324 kips
0.53
0.8 ksi ( 2 4 in.)(32 in.)
F,bt
np, = O
D + L
=
0.53(0.1) = 0.053
Fbbt2
For the other two loading cases a 1/3 increase in allowable stress Fb is permitted.
$
t
374 kips
= 0.46
= 1,33(0.8 ksi)(24 in.)(32 in.)
D + L + E
374 kips (4.4 in.)
1.33(0.8 ksi)(24 in.)(32
F,&*
12-5 3

in.)2
0.063
np, = O
73
Obb2747 0507L03 L87
and
Calculations
Code Reference
I1
$
t
0.9D
+E
213 kips
= 0.26
= 1.33(0.8lcsi) (24 in.)(32 i
n.)
npt = O
Since allthree loading cases resultin a zero calculated steel area, use minimum columnsteel
area (Code 5.9.1.4), p, = 0.0025
A , = O.0O25An= 0.0025(24 in.)(32 in.) = 1.92 i n 2
Select 4 - #7 bars, 2 in each face, A , = 2.4 in.2
12-54

5.9.1.4
A C 1 TITLEvHDG 93
0662949 0509304 015
Example 12.1-1 Coned.

and
Calculations
Repeat the design of the same column using CMU construction having
pt
r,,,= 1,500 psi,
= 14.3.
Pa =
[ (
1-
19500PSi
)'I
24 in. x 32 in. = 283 kips
122 in.
140(6.94 in.)
324 kips
The reduction in allowable stress results in having to increase the column width. Try a 32
in. square column.
[ (
Pa = 19500 psi 1
4
122
in*
r]
140(9.25 in.)
32 in. x 32 in. = 371 kips > 324 kips .: OK
5.3.1
D+L
- P-
Fa&
324 kips
(0.5) (32in.)(32 in.)
0.633
e/t =
0.1, np,
0.02
p, = 0.0014
The other loading cases (D
+ L + E and 0.9D + E ) result in zero calculated steel area.
Minimum steel for columns is p, = 0.0025 (Code 5.9.1.4), hence

A, = 0.0025 (32 in.) (32 in.) = 2.56 in.2
Use 4 - #8 bars
Provide lateral ties in accordance with Code 5.9.1.6. Ties shall be 1/4 in. diameter spaced
at 12 in., with the first tie located not less
than 6 in. from the bottom or the top of the
column. Since Code 8.2.3 limits joint reinforcement to one-half joint thickness. Thus ?
in.'i
12-55

AC
T I1T L E a N D G
Obb2'74'7 050'7305
T53
'73

~~~~~~~
Code Reference
ties cannot be placed in a 3/8 in. mortar joint. The CMU must be notched out to provide
sufficient clearance ties as shown in the figure.
32"
As an alternate the design might consider placing reinforcement inthe center solid grouted
area since this would eliminate notchingthe masonry units. Designer would need to verify
steel required based on new location of steel.
32"
12-56

93
m 0662747 0507306
998
and
Calculations
Code Reference
For Seismic Zones 3 or 4, use 3/8 in. ties spaced at 16 in. centers with the first tie located
no more than 8 in. from the top or the bottom. In Zones 3 or 4 the tie must be embedded
in grout, not in the mortar joint (Code Appendix k 4 . 6 ) .
Check shear requirements for CMU column. From Code Eq. 7-3, and a design shear force
due to D
+ L + E of 31 kips,
Fv
1.33@
1.33Jm
38.7 psi x 1.33 > 38.4 psi
Hence no shear reinforcing is required.

Check shear requirements for the brick masonry column.
F"
Since fv<
1.334m
65 psi > f v
F,,,
shear reinforcement need not be provided. Actually, the assumed value
= 0.9 is conservative since for the loading case
of j
that produces the design shear load of 31
kips the entire column cross-section is in compression. Although not required, calculations
for shear reinforcement are shown to illustrate to the reader the procedure for shear
consideration for columns.
12-57

Obb2949 0509307 8 2 4 U
A C 1 TITLExMDG 93

~~
Code Reference
Shear reinforcement is determined by Code Eq. 7-10, solved for S using #3 ties, Grade 60
steel.
S="
A,F#
- (0.22 i~)~(24,000
psi)(28 in.) = 4.77
in.
31,000 lb
Using larger diameter ties or a double tie configuration can increase the spacing. Use a #4
tie, hence
= 8.67 in. Use #4 ties at 8 in. centers to meet shear requirements. This size
and spacing will also satisfy Code 5.9.1.6.
12-58

H Obb29Y9 0509308 7 6 0
93
Example 12.2-1 T M S Shopping Center Design of Reinforced Loadbearing Wall

For the North Wall on Grid Line A of the TMS Shopping Center determine the size of wall
needed for Wall Construction Option B (Reinforced Concrete Masonry).
f',
= 1,500 psi
Unit Compressive Strength = 1,900 psi
Type S Mortar
Grade 60 Reinforcing Steel.
and
Calculations
Reference
Code
Fb = 1/3f',
= 500 psi
7.3.1.2
F, = 24,000 psi
7.2.1.1
Table 5.5.1.3
E, = 2.08 x 106 psi

From analysis MDG 9.1.1, PD = 315plf,
PL =
12-59

630 plf,
A C 1 TITLEvMDG 93
Obb2949 0509309 bT7

and
Calculations
Eccentricity of dead and live load, e, = e,
Wind
load
Note:
wZ2 -- 2Op~f(16ft)~
in
20 psf, MW= x 12 8
8
A
Parapet loading is neglected for simplicity.Moment
7,680 in.-lb at midheight
of7,680in.-lbisslightly
conservative.
For purposes of analysis, the base of the wall is considered pinned.
Try 8 in. wall, solid grouted

t = 7 5/8 in., wall weight = 78 psf,
e,
-- eL -- 7.63 in.
2
1 in. - 4
- -
in.
1.98 in.
Wall weight= 156 plf (at joist bearing), 1,404 plf (at base) and 780 plf (at midheight)
D + L
= 315plf
M = (315
The eccentricity of D
D+L+W
+ 630plf + 156 plf
= 1,100 plf at joist bearing
+ 630) 1.98 = 1,870 in.-lb/ft at joist bearing plate
+ L including wall weight is maximum at the joist bearing elevation,
P = 1,730 plf @ 8 ft abovebase
The maximum moment at midheight results from eccentricity of D
12-60

+ L plus wind load,
93
Ob62949 0509LLO 3L9
ExamDIe 12.2-1 Cont'd.

and
Calculations
M = 1'871 in"1b + 7,680 in.-lb

2
8,610 in.-lb/ft
Using the interaction diagram (MDG Fig. 12.2-11)
P -
Pe
1,looplf
= 0.0241
5OOpsi (12 in.)(7.63h)
"
Fbbf
npt = O
D+L
pe 1,870h.-lb
F,bf
500psi (12in.)(7.63in.)2
"
P -
0.0054
l ,730plf
4/3 (500psi)(12in.) (7.63i.n.)
"
Fbbf
= 0.028
np, = O
D+L+W
pe 8,620h. -lb
F,bf
4/3 (5OOpsi)(12in.)(7.63in.)2
"
12-61

0.0185
J
0.15
A C 1 TITLEnMDG 93
Obb29Y9 0509LLL 255

and
Calculations
Code Reference
kb
Fb
500 psi
24
O
, oo psi
n
0.225 > 0.15
14
,
MDG Fig. 12.2-11 is not applicable (i.e., compressive allowable stress is not the controlling
factor) since k < kb. Use MDG Fig. 12.2-12 (steel controls), with the same ordinate and
abcissa and read
pt
Fs
-
0.012, k
0.16
kb :.
OK
to use Fig 12.2-12
'b
D+W
+ 780 = 1,100 plf @ 8 ft above base
= 315
e = -M- - 7,990 in.-lb/& = 7.3
plf
1,100
P -
1,100
plf
= 0.018
4/3(500 psi)(l2 in.)(7.63 in.)
"
F,bt
in.
= 0.0180
12-62


Code Reference
From MDG Fig. 12.2-11, np, = 0.0024, k = 0.13 < kb .: compression does not control and
MDG Fig. 12.2-12 must be used.
A,
p,bt
p,[$]?bt
in.)(7.63 in.) = 0.034 h2/ft
(0.0180)
(12
Spacing of various bar sizes
Bar
Area
#3
0.11 i n 2
38in.use
0.20
69
0.3 1
&e*.
#3 @ 32 in.
108
The average axial compressive stress cannot exceed Code
Eq. 7-1, or 7-2 depending upon
hlr.
h = 16 x 12 = 192 in.;
r = -
= 0.29t =
12-63

2.12 in.
Code C.6.3.1
A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
m Obb2949 0509LL3 O28 m

hlr = 19212.21 = 86.9 c 99
Fa =
:A
(Lr]
[l - 140r
Max applied stress is
Reference
2.
Code
Code Eq. 7-1

controls.
i(1,500
4
psi)[ 1 -
2,350 plf
(12 in. x 7.63 in.)
r]
( 140lg2 2.ia21 in.
26 psi,
231 psi
OK
Use 8 in. concrete masonry wall with #3 vertical bars spaced at 32 in. centers, fully grouted
with$,
= 1,500 psi.
12-64

Ob62949 0509LL4 Tb4
Example 12.2-2 T M S Shopping Center - Design of Unreinforced Loadbearing Wall

For theNorth Wall on Grid Line A of the TMS ShoppingCenter, determine the size of wall
needed for Wall Construction Option A (Unreinforced Concrete Masonry).
and
Calculations
The obvious difficulty in designing this wall without reinforcing willbe accommodating the
very large eccentricity for the D
+ W combination of 7.3 in. calculated in
MDG Example
12.2-1 without exceedingthe allowable flexural tensile stresses inCode Table 6.3.1.1. Using
MDG Eq. 12.2-8 with section properties from MDG Appendix A for a fully grouted 8 in.
wall,
Note that a similar calculation using a trial8 in. ungrouted section results in failure to satisfy
12-65

0662949 0509LL5 9 T O W

Code Reference
MDG Eq. 12.2-8 using either full mortar bedding or faceshell mortar bedding.
A similar check of other load cases using the fully grouted 8 in. trial section indicates
(1.27 in.)
The trial 8 in. solid grouted section satisfies

MDG Eq. 12.2-8 for all three loading conditions.
Now check the unity equation for the same loadings, by MDG Eq. 12.2-4.
D + L,
* .
(1.27 h)(4)
(1.27 in.)(4)
D + W,
P S (915 h2)(229
Psi)(1*33)
(7.3 in.)(3)(0.611)
1+
(1.27 jn.)(4)
12-66

7,670 lb > 1,100

lb
.. OK
A CT1I T L E * I D G
Obb2949 0507LLb 837
93
and
Calculations
All three loadings meet the requirements of Code Eq.6-1 using the trial section.
Finally, check Euler Buckling (Code Eq. 6-2) for each loading case.
D + L, e
1.98 in.,
PC =
~ ~ ( 2 . 0 8 ~@(M3
1 0 ~ h4)
1-0.577(1.98 h )
(192
= 1,100
lb
- = 27400
4
4
Euler buckling loads
lb
for load cases
lb
27,400 lb
(2.20 in.)
in.)2
= 6,850
.: OK
D +L + W and D+ W are calculated using actual
eccentricities from gravity loads without including effects

of lateral loads. Hence, the largest
value of e will be 1.98 in. from the previously considered load case. Since the allowable load
from this case exceeds the design loads of cases D + L + W and D+ W, no furthur check is
necessary.
In summary, use an 8 in. solid grouted unreinforced concrete masonry wall.
12-67

A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93
Example 12.2-3
M 0662949 0509LL7 773 M
DPC Gymnasium Design of UnreinforcedMultiwytheNoncomposite

Masonry Wall
Design the North Wall (Grid Line A) of the DPC Gymnasium using Wall Construction
Option A. Assume a horizontal span of 16 ft to carry wind load to pilasters. The wall must
still span vertically to resist eccentric bearing load from roof trusses. Wall
Construction
Option A consists of a 4 in. nominal brick wythe, 8 in. block, 3 in. cavity.
Roof Truss
Type S, PCL Mortar

Concrete Masonry
fYm
Brickl
= 1,500 psi
E, = 2.08 x lo6 psi

Clay Masonry
L
3.63"13"1
Unit Strength = 8 ksi
7.63"
E, = 2.4 x lo6 psi

Wind Load = 20 psf
and
Calculations
Discussion
Reference
Code
Since the roof truss acts only onthe block wythe, the block wythe must
resist
all
of its effect.
However
both wythes
may
resist
weak
axis
5.8.2.1(b)
bending from gravity load.

The load from a typical roof truss bearing on the wall between pilasters is shown below:
12-68

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0509LLB bOT

and
Calculations
8'
Wall Support
12" Long Bearing Plate
3
= 12" + 4(7.63)" = 42.5"
The angle of load distribution and resulting width of bearing would be modified if the
masonry course immediatelyunder the bearing plate weremade of a continuous bond beam.
See MDG Ex. 9.3-2. Although the trusses are 8 ft apart, only 42.5 in. of the wall is effective
in carrying the gravity load from the trusses between the pilasters. From structural analysis
in MDG 9.1.2 within the 42.5 in. or 3.54 ft length of wall resisting these loads:
PD =
PD
4,960 lb,
PD + L
= 1,400 plf,
= 14,900 lb
4,180 plf
= 5,490 in.-lb/ft
PD + L =
MD = 1,840 in.-lb/ft,
MD + L
5.8.2.1
If the bearing plate is 1/2 in. from the interior face, and assuming the
inner wythe only resists the eccentric gravity load
-
eD-eL-
1 in.
2 -2 - -
- -3in.
- 1.31 in.
I
I
i"
MD
PDeD = (1,400 lb)(1.31 in.) = 1,840in-lb/ft, MD
12-69

L =
5,490in.-lb/ft
A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93
Obb2949 0509119 5Yb

and
Code Reference
Calculations
Check Euler Buckling (Code Eqs. 6-2 and 6-6)

Use section properties in MDG Appendix A.
Pa
*I
[l
h'
Eq. 6-6
- 0.577fr
lo6 psi)(309
(24 ft x 12 in./ft)2
PC = rr'(2.08
1.31 in.
3.21 in.
0.577
ia4)
PC = 34,100 plf
= 4,180 plf < 1/4 P, = 8,530 plf
.-. OK
Eq. 6-2
Check Code Unity Equation (6-1)

Eq. 6-3
Ad
4 +
MDG
e
3R -
W.12.2-5.
ek
Ad
0.59
= 0.121
3
(
0
.
5
9
)
(1.3
1i
n
.
)
4 +
P = 4,180plf
2.70 in.
0.12 (30 in.2)(1,500psi) = 5,450 plf
12-70

.-.
OK
A C 1 T I T L E * N D G 73
m 0662747 0507320
268

and
Calculations
Note: The above calculations didnot rely onthe exterior wythe of brick to share in resisting
the out-of-planebendingresultingfrom
the eccentricity ofgravityloads.If
the
interior CMU wythe had not had adequate capacity, the moment could have been
resisted by both wythesinproportion
to theirrelativestiffnesses.
5.8.2.1(b)
WIND CONDITION
Withpilasters
at16 ftcenters,
the windcan
be resisted by the cavitywallspanning
horizontally between pilasters. Per Code 5.8.2.1(d) the load is distributed between wythes
according to their relative stiffness.
For the brick wythe, EI = (2.4 x 103 ksi)(l2 in.)(3.63 in.)3/12 = 114,000 in.2-kips
in.4)
block wythe, EI = (2.08 x 106 ksi)(309
= 643,000
in.2-kips
1 14,000kip -in?
Brick carries
0.151 or 15% of the wind
114,000 kip-h2 + 643,000 kip-h2
Block carries wind

85% of
Calculate stresses using moment coefficient,
W4leU
~
11
This value is used for those
horizontal span areas between pilasters without control joints.For spans containing control
joints the designer would need to modify the moment value.
For Block Wythe,
12-71

A C 1 T I T L E + f l D G 93
Example 12.23
and
Obb2949 0509323 3 T 4
Cont'd.
Calculations
M - 348 ft -lb
fk's81
12 h/ft
in.3
52 psi
Allowable stress for ungrouted CMU parallel to bed joint
Table 6.3.l. 1
:. OK
Fbc = 50 psi x 1.33 = 66 psi > 52 psi,
5.3.2
For Brick Wythe,
M = (0.15/0.85)348 ft-lb
= 61 ft-lb
12 h./ft
f k M=-s6112-fi-lb
h(3.63 in.)'/6
X
Allowable
stress
Fb, = 80 psi x 1.33 >psi

28
27.9 psi
:. OK
Note: These walls must be tied in accordance with Code

transfer across the cavity.
5.8.2.2 in order to ensure load
See MDG Example 14.3-2.
12-72

Table
6.3.1.1
Example 12.2-4
DPCGymnasium
- Design of UnreinforcedComposite
Masonry Wall
Redesign the DPC Gymnasium north wall on Grid Line A as anunreinforced composite wall
(Wall Construction Option B) using 4 in. nominal face brick and concrete masonry units.
Try 12 in. CMU wall
2 in. grout, fg = 5,100 psi

Other propertiessame as Option
A. (MDG Example 12.2-3)
2"
11.63"*
Wall Section
Code Reference
Ir
Transforming grout to block
14.7"13.9"
12
"
Transforming the brick to block

kY-4
Transformed Section
y = distance from block centroid to composite section centroid
The block wall is ungrouted.
12-73

A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 9 3 W 0662949 0509323 T 7 7 W
Example 12.2-4
and
Cont'd.
Code Reference
Calculations
CAY CA
y = - -
6.81 in. (2 in.) (14.7 in.) + 9.62 in. (13.9 in.)(3.63 in.) = 5.9
36 h2+ 14.7 in. x 2 in. + 13.9 in. x 3.63 in.
i
n
!+
I = 929
36
in? (5.89
in.)2
+ 14" in*(2 in.)3
12
+ 29.4 in?(0.91 in.)2
+
S&
2,960 h4
= 253
5.89 in. + 5.81 h.
"
Y+z
Check D
in.3
+ L + W condition first
-
e, = e L = y -
+ 4 h =5.9oin. - 11.63
2
i n *
4 in,
4.09 in.
PD+ L is spread over 12 + 4t = 81 in., PD+L= 14,900 lb= 2,200 plf

81 in.
"
12-74

"
in.
A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 93 m Obb2949 0509324 903 m

and
Calculations
Reference
Self weight of wall at midheight based on wall weight of 178.5 psf = 1,785 lb
e = -"
-
21,800 in.-lb
2,200 lb + 1,790 lb
5.46 in.
Unity Equation
ALI
116
in2
(1,500psi)
4+3R-
Maximum applied load at midheight is 2,204 plf
0.83 x 1.33
5.46 in.
4 + 3 (0.83)
2.18 in.
18,800 plf
+ 1,785 plf = 3,989 plf < 18,764 plf :. OK
Euler Buckling
PC =
*
h'
PC =
PC =
[l
- 0.577
51
lo6 psi)(2,963 in?)

(24 ft x 12 b~./ft)~
111 kips
x' (2.08 x
4.09 in.
5.05 in.
(Using gravity load eccentricity only as explained in MDG 12.2.1.2)
4 kips
:. OK
'/4 P, = 27.8 kips,
Note that this value of %Pe exceedsallaxial
load combinations. HenceEuler
conditions are satisfied with this trial section for all loadings.
12-75

A C 1T I T L E l k M D G
93
Obb2947 0507325 B Y T

and
Calculations
Check D
PD = 49960 lb = 735plfplus1,785plfself
81 in.
12 in./ft
+ W,
e =
15,777 in.-lb
735lb + 1,785lb
weight at midheight
6.26
Unity Equation
P
2,520 lb
116 in?(1,500 psi)

4
P, = 111 kipssinceeccentricity
Euler
0.83 (1.33)
6.26 in.
3(0.83)
2.18 in.
15,400 lb
:.
OK
is thesame as loading case D+L.
Check Flexural Tension (use Type S PCL Mortar)

Thiscondition
e, =
need be checkedonlyif
e > e,.
In
this
case, e = 6.26 in.

and
2.18 in. The allowable flexural stress is Fb, = 25 psi using the lower value for
hollow units (Table 6.3.1.1). From MDG Eq. 12.2-8 or MDG Fig. 12.2-7,
ek
2.18 in.
12-76

A C 1 TITLExMDG 73
m 0662947
0509326 786
Code Reference
Since the applied axial load (2,520lb) is greater than 2,061 lb, flexural tension requirements
are not satisfied.
If the concrete masonry is solidly grouted,
the allowable flexural tensile stress increases from
25 psi to 68 psi. The section properties of the wall change as a result,

but all of the previous
calculations for the ungrouted wall are found tobe within code allowables whenthe wall is
solidly grouted. Use a solidly grouted wall.
Note: As discussed in MDG Chapter 9, it is possible that a composite brick-block wallmay
experience delamination at the collar joint, due to shear from differential movement, inplane loads, and out-of-plane loads. The calculations of this example are valid only if such
delamination does not occur.
12-77

AC
T I1T L E r M D G
0662949 0 5 0 9 3 2 7 632
93
Example 12.2-5 DPC Gymnasium Design of Reinforced Hollow Clay Masonry Wall
Design the wall on Grid Line Aof the DPC Gymnasium using Wall ConstructionOption D
(Single Wythe, Reinforced Hollow Clay Masonry).
Roof Truss
Type S, PCL Mortar
Hollow Clay Brick
Pm = 1,500 psi
Wind Load = 20 psf
n = 14
Reference
Code
Try nominal 8 in. Hollow Clay Brick Unit (Actual Width = 7 1/2 in.)
The
load
width
is spread over 42.0 in.
(12 in. brg.
+ 4 x 7.5 in.)
per MDG Example 12.2-3.
PD + L
= 4,180 plf,
PD = 1,400 plf,
e = 1.25 in. (From MDG Example 12.2-3)
For the wall spanning vertically

MW= *O
*I2
(12 in./ft)
17,300 in.-lb/*
Use MDG Fig. 12.2-11
12-78

5.12.1
73
Ob62949 0509128 559
Cont'd.
Example 12.2-5
Discussion
Calculations and
Code Reference
The midheight moment is approximately the maximum.

F* = 0.33 P,,,
"
Fbbt
7.3.2.1
4,180 lb
4
(500 psi) (12 ia) (7.5 in.)
= 0.071
"_.
pe
19,900 h.-lb
0.044
23 (500 psi) (12 in.) (7.5 in.)2
t2
'b
From MDG Fig. 12.2-11
np, = 0.02
k = 0.40 > kb .-. Compression controls and MDG Fig.12.2-11isvalid
D + L
P
4,180 lb
= 0.095
(500 psi) (12 h.)(7.5 h.)
"
Fb b
0.093
Fb b t 2
( i")n
0.0155
7.5
From Fig. 12.2-11,
k = 0.12
P,-
kb
:. use MDG Fig.12.2-12 andread
Fs = o
Fb
12-79

A C 1 TITLExMDG 9 3
Example 12.2-5
Obb23Ll9 0509329 4 9 5
Contd.
Code and Discussion
D+W
From MDG Fig. 12.2-11
np, = 0.035
k = 0.35 > kb
The largest requirement is np, = 0.035 from D
A, =
0.11
pbt
-(12 in.) (7.5
in.) = 0.229 in?/ft
Area
14
in.2
#3
10.6
#4
+ W.
in.2
in.
5.8
0.20
#5
0.31 in.2
#6
0.44 in.2
#7
0.60 in.2
in.
in. 16.2
Use #7 @ 32 in.
23.0 in.
in.
31.4
J
7
32
12-80

AC1
Example 12.3-1
TITLE8NDG 93 m Obb2949 0509330 L07 m
DPCGymnasium
- UnreinforcedPilaster
Subjected to Flexureand
Axial Load
Design the pilasters on the north and south walls on Grid Lines A and B, respectively, of
the DPC Gymnasium for Wall Construction Option k
The brick veneerlateral load
resistance is assumed negligible. Determine the minimum size of an unreinforced pilaster,

and the minimum specified compressive strength. Assume Type N PCL Mortar.
and
Code Reference
Calculations
Alternate roof trusses are supported by each pilaster. Vertical reactions are applied to the
pilasters through 6 in. x 12 in. bearing plates that are located 112in. from inside edge of
pilaster. From MDG 9.1.2 truss reactions are 4,960 lb for roof dead load and 9,920 lb for
roof snow load. The governing lateral load is wind (20 psf) which produces a moment at
midheight equal to 23 kip-ft for a 24 ft-O in. high pilaster.
A 32 in. square pilaster will be checked which was the size determined for pilasters on the
eastand westwalls.
The 8 in. CMU walls are
The proposed section isshownbelow.
ungrouted with face shell bedding of mortar, and the 32 in. pilaster is fully grouted.
Exterior Face
Plastic Centroid
Of Section
Centroid Of
Vertical Load
48.00
31.63"
14.07'
3 1.63"
6t
6t = 45.78"
4
45.78"
Proposed Pilas ter

12-81

f
Interi.or Face
AC1
TITLExMDG 9 3 m 0662949 0509L3L 043 m

and
Calculations
Section properties for the proposed sectionare as determined in MDG Example 11.2-1 with
the exception that flanges will be on both sides of the web since there are no control joints.
The centroid of the section is 15.06 in. from the exterior face and 16.57in. from the interior
face. The area of the section is 1,230 in.2 and the moment of inertia is 88,700 in4.
The centroid of the truss reaction is assumed to occur at one-third of the 6 in. plate width,
or 2 1/2 in. from the interior face of the pilaster. This results in
vertical load equal to 14.07 in. Because the location is outside of
will resultfromtheeccentricverticalforceand
an eccentricity of the
the kern, tensile stresses
the governingloadcombinationisnot
obvious.
Allowable flexural tensile stress must be interpolated between values
6.3.1.1
of 58 psi for fully grouted sections and 19 psi for ungrouted sections
(Table 6.3.1.1). The square columnportionconsists of 59% of the
total gross area of the effective section which gives a flexural tensile
stress equal to 42 psi.
Combined axial and flexural compressive stresses
are checked usingthe
unity equation (MDG Eq. 12.3-3). The allowableaxialcompressive
6.3.1
stress is obtained using MDG Eq. 12.3-4 noting that
Fa =
(1/4)
f, [I
(Er]f,
=
0.235
12-82

6.3.l(a)
93
Ob62949 0 5 0 9 3 3 2
TBT m

and
Code Reference
Calculations
The value of 'Y, 8.50 in. used in MDG Eq. 12.3-3 isthe square root of
the ratio of I (88,700 in4) over A (1,230 in.2)for the proposed pilaster
is 0.33 Pm.
bending
stress
section shown previously. The allowable
6.3.l(c)
Three loading cases are considered: (a) roof dead plus roof snow, (b) roof dead plus wind,
and (c) roof dead plus roof snow plus wind.
Case "all Roof Dead Load Plus Roof Snow Load
Net Flexural Tension Stress at Top - Exterior Face
M = P e = (14,900 lb) (14.07 in.)
1,o00
fa =
PD
PS
Anet
fb* - fe
14,900 lb
209
in"kipS
14.9 psi
31.6 in. x 31.6 in.
35.5 psi - 14.9 psi
20.6 psi
Fb*= 42.0 psi OK
Compressive Stress at Top - Interior Face

fb =
M (16.57 in.) -- (209 ia-kip~) (16.57 in.) (1O

, OO lb/kip) - 39.0 psi
Inet
88,700
12-83

i
n
!
9 3 M 0 6 6 2 9 4 90 5 0 9 3 3 39 3 b

and
Calculations
Code Reference
Discussion
14.9
0.235 f m
3900 = 1.0
0.333 fRI
fln required
180 psi
Case "b" Roof Dead Load Plus Wind Load

Net Flexural Tension Stress at Midheight - Exterior Face
Consider wind pressure to be a suction so that lateral moment will add with eccentric load
moment.
MW
PD e/2
23.0 ft.-kips
(4,960 lb)
Total Moment
f&
276 in.-kips
( 14*02 ")
1
1,OOO lb/kip
34.9 in.-kips
31 1 in.-kips
M (15.06 in.) -- (311 h - k i p ~ )(15.06 in.) (1,OOO lb/kip) -Iner

88,700 in."
f = -P +
D f
=
. JDL
4,960 lb
1,Ooo
(140 pcf)
(y)
in.2
144 in.2/ftz
12-84

psi
ACL- T I T L E * M D G 9 3
Obb2949 0509334 852
Exarnule 123-1 Cont'd.

and
Calculations
fa
5.0 psi + 11.7 psi = 16.7 psi
f a -fa = 52.9 psi - 16.7 psi = 36.2 psi < Fbt=42.0 psi x 1.33 =55.9 psi
.-.OK
Compressive Stress at Midheight - Interior Face

fb =
M (16.6 in.)
- (311 in.-kips) (16.6 h)X 1,OOO lb/kip - 58.1 psi
88,700 in?
Inet
16.7
0.235 f
)II
58.1
= 1-33
0.333 f ,
f m rcqrrited =
185 psi
Case "ctt - Roof Dead Load Plus Roof Snow Load Plus Wind
Net Flexural Tension Stress at Midheight - Exterior Face
Mm&
Mwind + (PD +Ps)e/2
Mrotor= 276 h-kips + 105 i n . - k i p ~ = 381 h - k i p ~
12-85

A C 1 TITLESMDG 93 W Obb2949 0509335 799 W

fk =
fa =
M (15.06
Inet
PD
PS
Anet
h.) - (381 h-kip)(15.06 h.) X 1,OOO lb/kip =
88,700
in4
+ fDL = 14.9 psi + 11.7 psi = 26.6 psi
f k -fa = 64.7 psi -26.6 psi =38.1 psi
Fa =42.0 psi x 1.33 =55.9 psi
Compressive Stress at Midheight - Interior Face
fb =
M (16.6 in.) - (381 h-kips) (16.6

Inet
88,700 i n 4
26.6
0.235 f ',,,
psi
71*2 = 1.33 ;
0.333 f',,,
psi
f',REQolRED -- 246 psi
12-86

h.) = 71.2
:. OK
AC
T I1T L E r M D G
0bb2749 0509136 b25
93
and
Code Reference
Calculations
SUMMARY
fa
Case
Condition
Net
-fa =
Flexural
Tensile Stress
Fa
(Psi)
(Psi)
fa -fa
Fa
fm
REQulRED
(Psi)
D+S
20.6
42.0
0.49
180
D + W
36.2
55.9
0.65
185
D+S+W
38.1
55.9
0.68
246
Thus, the critical loading case for both flexural tension and flexural compression is the
combined effects of roof dead and snow load with the wind loading.
Case l'a'' does not
control becausethe truss reaction results in an eccentric-load moment that is relatively small
when compared to the wind load moment of the other two cases. Flexural tensile stresses
are quite close for Cases "b" and "c", and it is not obvious which case should control.
Thus, a 32 in. pilaster is needed to resist flexural tension stress, and a minimum prism
strength equal to 246psiis
necessary to resist combined axial and flexural compressive
stresses. Note that compression capacity does notgovern the design of the pilaster sincep,
for minimum strength ASTM C 90 block and Type N mortar is approximately 1,300 psi.
Because compressive stresses are so light, and flexural tensile stresses are well below
allowable values, it may be possible to reduce the section size. However, for concrete block
masonry, this must be done in increments of 8 in. A quick check using a 24 in. square
section shows a net flexural tensile stress equal to 114 psi for Case "c". Therefore, the 32
12-87

A C 1 T I T L E a N D G 73
Obb2749 0509137 561

Code Reference
in. pilaster as designed will be used.

Shear is checked by adding the wind shear force (3,840 lb) with a shear
due to the eccentric load. The eccentric gravity moment is equal to
14,880 lb times 14.07 in. When divided by the pilaster height of 24.0
ft, the shear force dueto the eccentric gravity load is 727 lb. Thus the
total design shear is4,567lb.
Shear stress is checked in the same
manner as in MDG Example 11.2-1. The applied shear stress is 6.8 psi
which is much
smaller than the allowable value of 62 psi per Code
6.5.2(c).
12-88

6.5.1
A C 1 T I T L E * N D G 93
06629470507338
4T8
Example 123-2 DPC Gymnasium Reinforced Pilaster Subjectto Flexure and Axial Load
The 32 in. width ofthe unreinforced concrete masonry pilasters

for the north and south walls
(Grid Lines A and B) of the DPC Gymnasium (with Wall ConstructionOption A) was felt
to be excessive. It is of interest to examine the feasibility of reinforcing the pilaster. The
adequacy of an assumed 16-in. pilaster is checked, and
the necessary amount of vertical
steel, and the required prism strength are determined.

Exterior Face
7.63"
Centroid Of
Vertical Load
Interior FaceA- 15.63"
6 t = 45.8"
c
~
8 .OO"
c
1 6t = 45.8"
Assumed Configuration for 16 in. Square Reinforced Pilaster
f',= 1,500 psi
F,, = 500 psi
Concrete Block ASTM C 90
E, = 1.8 x 106 psi
n = 16.1
Type N Mortar
and
Calculations
Discussion
Reference
Code
As noted in MDG Example 12.3-1, truss reactions are 4,960 lb for roof dead load and 9,920
lb for roof snow load.The governing lateral load is wind (20 psf) which produces a moment
at midheight of a pilaster equal to 23.0 kip-ft (276 kip-in.) as given inMDG Example 12.3-1.
The 16-in. section usedfor the pilasters in nonloadbearingwalls on Grid Lines 1and 2 (see
MDG Example 11.2-2) will be checked for combined effects of axial load and moment for
the loadbearingwalls on Grid Lines A and B. As for the east and west pilasters, only those
cells containing reinforcementare grouted. Control jointsare assumed absent at the design
12-89

A C 1 TITLESNDG 93
0662949 0509139 3 3 4 D

and
Calculations
section. The 8-in. CMU wall is considered to be ungrouted with face shell mortar bedding.
The 6 in. x 12 in. bearing plate for the roof truss is assumed to be located 0.5 in. from the
interior face of the pilaster. If a triangular distribution of bearing pressure is assumed, the
centroid of the vertical truss reactions is 2.5 in. from the interior face.
Because the web portion is narrower than the effective flange width,
the critical case for
compression stress underwind loading is when wind acts as a suction, resulting in compression on the interior face. This condition is true even when the depth of the effective flange
is limited to the thickness of the face shell as is for this case of an ungrouted wall. This
sense of wind moment is the same as the sense of the eccentric load moment, and should
therefore control for all cases of web compressive stress. Since vertical
reinforcement is
assumed to be symmetrical about the column portion, the case of wind suction should also
govern for design of reinforcement.
The same three loading cases are considered as for MDG Example 12.3-1: (a) roof dead
load plus roof snow load;
(b) roof dead load plus wind; and (c) roof
dead load plus roof
at the top of the pilaster if the eccentric
snowloadpluswind.Case"a"shouldgovern
vertical load ismuch larger than the wind load moment for cases "b"
and tictt. Case "b"
should result in the minimum axial force, and thus the lowest flexural strength, but the
applied moment will not be a minimum. Case l'cl' should result in the largest moment, but
the axial force (and thus the flexural strength) will not be a minimum.
Theassumed16-in.section
ischeckedusing
rectangular section with twolayersof
load-momentinteractiondiagrams
for a
reinforcement (see MDG 12.1.2). Because only a
portion of the web is considered to be in compression, the rest of the T-section is assumed
to be cracked, and thus ineffective. Flexural tension
12-90

is assumed only for the two vertical
A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
Ob62949 0509340 056

and
Calculations
~~
reinforcing bars. The overhanging flanges are neglected entirely. The first step is to select
an interaction diagram based on the ratio of the distance between rebars to the overall
thickness, g. If it is assumed that the bar will have 3 in. of cover (distance from edge to
centroid of bar), the g value is (15.63 in. - 2 x 3.00 in.)/15.63 in. = 0.62. Interaction diagrams
for a g value of 0.6 will be used (Fig. 12.1-4).
Any number of design solutions are possible because there are three variables: the section
size, the masonry strength and the amount of vertical reinforcement. Because the section
size must be in increments of the block size, it will be fixed first at 16 in. Prism strength also
is restricted within a narrow range if standard strength units are to be used. Therefore, the
amount of reinforcement will be used as the primary variable for each of the three loading
cases. The case resulting in the most required reinforcement will be the one that governs.
Reinforcement requirements are determined as indicated in the following table for each of
the three loading cases. The total axial compressive load is listed as well as the maximum
bending moment foreach
case. The effective eccentricity issimply
the total bending
moment divided by the total axial load. By dividingit by the thickness (15.63in.),
the
eccentricity can be used with the normalized axial load P/Fb bt, as an alternative to moment
for locating points on the interaction diagram. Combinations of axial load and eccentricity
are plotted on theinteraction diagram to identify the required percentage of reinforcement,
p. For cases of light axial loads, required amounts of reinforcement must be checked with
respect to curves based on allowable compressive stress (expressed in terms of pn) as well
as with respect to curves based on allowable reinforcement tensile stress (expressedin terms
of
PWFb).
12-91

AC1
TITLE*HDG 93
0662949 0509141 T92

and
Calculations
%
l
Q
fl
d
a
Y
d
O
tF;1
3
h
(v
8V
.8
2
S
v)
12-92

A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 9 3 W Obb2947 0507142 7 2 9 W

and
Code Reference
Calculations
Based on compression controlling, the maximum value of pn is 0.26,

which results in a p value equal to 0.0161 (Case c). Based on tension
controlling, the maximumvalue of pF,./Fb is equal to 0.24 (Case b)
which results in a p value equal to 0.0050 for F, = 24 ksi x 1.33 =
32ksi.
Compression governs, andthe
required totalamount
of
7.2.1.1
reinforcement is equal to 0.0161 times b and t, or 3.95 in2. This can be
5.3.2
satisfied with four No. 9 bars (As = 4.00 in2).

Because the anchorage of a No. 9 bar in an 8 in. CMU may be
difficult,it
isof
interest to see what reductions in steel areaare
possible if the masonrycompressive strength is increased. A prism

strength of 2,500 psi will be tried. Since thiswill require a unit strength
in excess of the minimum set forth by ASTM C 90, the higher prism
strength must be specified on project drawings and in job specifications.
A contractor may be able to attain such a strength according to the
and Type N mortar (see
Specs. 1.6.2
Table 1.6.2.2). He may also verifysuch a strength using the prism test
Specs. 1.6.3
unit strength method using

4,000
psi
units
method.
The assumed modulus of elasticity, E, is2.6
x 106 psi
according to Table 5.5.1.3 for units with a strength of 4,000 psi

Type N mortar. This gives a modular ratio, n, equal
to
10.8.
and
5.5.1.3
With the masonry strength increased to 2,500 psi, the required amount of reinforcement is
controlled by tension. For compression controlling, the maximum value of pn is 0.053 which
results in a p value equal to 0.0049 (Case b). For tension controlling, the maximum value
of pFs/Fbis equal to 0.15 (Case b) which results in a p value equal to 0.0069. The required
total amount of reinforcement is equal to 0.0069 times b and t, or 1.70 in2. This can be
12-93

A C 1 TITLElwMDG 93
Obb2949 0509343 Ab5

and
Calculations
satisfied with four No. 6 bars (As = 1.76 in.2).

In summary, the required area of reinforcement is 3.95 in.2 with$, equal to 1,500 psi, and
1.70 in.2 withf',
equal to 2,500 psi. With the stronger masonry, the controlling concern is
allowable reinforcement tensile stress
rather than allowable masonry compressive stress.
Roof dead load plus wind required slightly more reinforcement than roof dead plus roof
snow plus wind. This was because the eccentricity the
of vertical truss reaction was relatively
small. Added vertical forces tended to increase the flexural strength more than the applied
bending moment.
The final design is then:
Exterior Face>
",,"R,.
7.63"
8,OO"
Interior Face
3 a t 24"
Type N mortar
The No. 3 ties at 24 in. spacing are nominal transverse reinforcement. The ties are needed
to support the vertical reinforcement. Although ties are not essential since reinforcement
was not considered to resist compressive stress, it is prescribed
here simply as an added
measure. Note that the ties should bend around the vertical reinforcement
rather than being
sized to fit within the face shell. This is
preferred for lateral support of the vertical bars.

12-94

93
Obb2949 0509344 7 T L
and
Code Reference
Calculations
This design is similar to that for the east and west walls (Grid Lines 1 and 2) of the DPC
Gymnasiumwhich were the same size but reinforced with four No. 8 bars. The design
requirements are less for the north and south pilasters because of their shorter height (24
ft-O in. rather than29 ft-4 in.), and the axial compressiveforce which increased their flexural
capacity. The fact that a control joint cut off one flange of the east and west pilasters was
of little concern since the tensile area of the flange wasneglected for thereinforced sections.
As was seen with the east and west pilasters, the addition of four reinforcing bars to the
already grouted section can result in a required reduction of 50% in the required dimensions
of the pilaster.
12-95

93
Obb2949 0509345 b 3 8
13
SHEAR
13.0 INTRODUCTION
Different methods of analysis for shear design are employed for unreinforced and reinforced
masonry. The computed shear stress for unreinforced masonry is obtained by the VQ/fi
equation. For reinforced masonry the shear stress is obtained by using the V/bjd equation.
The allowable stresses are also different for unreinforced and reinforced masonry. The
designer should not combine the two types of masonrydesign techniques. One should
consider them distinct and separate; use only one or the other.
In unreinforced masonry, the allowable stresses depend on the type of masonry element
I
(wall, beam, etc.), the bonding pattern, and the amount of axialload.
In reinforced masonry, the allowable stresses depend onthe type of masonry element (shear
wall, beam, etc.), the magnitude of MWd, and the amount of reinforcement.
Chapter 13 first addresses the design of unreinforced and reinforced non-shear wall
elements. Design for shear wall elements is then presented.
13-1

A C 1 T I T L E g N D G 73 W 0662949 0509346 574
13.1 DESIGN FOR SHEAR IN MASONRYCOMPONENTS
13.1.1 OverallPhilosophyforShearDesign
Shear and flexure occurtogether in masonry components such as
beams and beam-columns
(when axial loadis present) (Fig. 13.1-1 [a]), in walls spanning vertically
to resist out-of-plane
loads (Fig. 13.1-1 [b]), in walls spanning horizontally
to resist out-of-plane loads(Fig. 13.1-1
[c]), and in shear walls that resist in-plane forces (Fig. 13.1-1 [dl). Shear design of beams,
beam columns, and walls subjected to out-of-plane loading are addressed in MDG 13.1.
Shear design of walls subject to in-plane loading is addressed in MDG 13.2.
Shear designin the Code is considered in two casesformemberssubjected
to flexure.
These two design cases are:

1) Code 6.5
- Unreinforced Masonry -
Members where flexural tension is allowed

to be carried by the masonry, and
2) Code 7.5 - ReinforcedMasonry
Memberswhereflexuraltension
is not
allowed to be carried by the masonry.

The first case (Code 6.5) is often referred to as "unreinforced masonry," even though some
nominal reinforcementmay be present for reasonsother than load carrying purposes.Shear
computations are then based upon "uncracked section" concepts.
The secondcase
(Code 7.5) is further divided into the categories of membersbeing
subjected to flexural tension, and members not subjected to flexural tension. For members
withflexuraltension,
the shear computationmustbebasedupon"crackedsection"
properties. As innormalreinforcedmasonryconcepts,
the masonry area subjected to
tension is neglected and the reinforcement carries all the tension forces.
For members
without flexural tension the shear computations may be considered in light of either Code
6.5 or 7.5.
13-2

AC1
TITLE*MDG 93 H 0662749 0509347 400 W
(b) Vertically Spanning Wall Out-of-Plane
(a) Masonry Beam Subjected to
Shear and Flexure
Shear and Flexure
Lateral Loads
(d) In-Plane Shear and Flexure
(c) Horizontally Spanning Wall

Out-of-Plane Shear and Flexure
Fig. 13.1-1 Masonry Elements Subjected to Shear and Flexure

Fig. 8.4-47 provides an overall flow diagram for the shear design of masonry. This chapter
discusses the Code shear provisions, followed by examples for these various subdivisions of
each case.
13-3

A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93
Obb2949 0509L48 347
13.1.2 Unreinforced Masonry Shear Design

Shear design allowing tensile stresses in masonryis used when the flexural masonry tensile
stresses do not exceed the maximumallowablevaluesinCode
Table 6.3.1.1. For cases
involving axialloads and flexure, the combined stress

is compared to the maximum allowable
tension in Code Table 6.3.1.1.
Fig. 13.1-2 depicts these combined stresses. Note that this case is based upon "uncracked
section" concepts. Thus, the flexural stress in Fig. 13.1-2 is found from
the simple flexure
equation
fb =
MC
Forces
Eq. 13.1-1
Axial
Flexural
Combined Axial
Shear Stresses
Flexural
and
Stresses
(Include Others if Present)
Stresses
Stresses
Fig. 13.1-2 Combined Flexural Stress and Shear Stress Distribution in Uncracked
Section, Unreinforced Masonry
where the moment of inertia, I, is based upon the net uncracked section area. The axial
stress in Fig. 13.1-2 is found from the simple axial equation
P
fa = -
Eq.13.1-2
A"
where the A, is the net uncracked cross-sectionalarea. Any other axial and flexural stresses,
13-4

A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 93 W Obb2949 0509349 283 W
for,
due to factors such as restrained differential movement, temperature change, moisture
expansion, or shrinkagemust
be combinedwith
dead and live loadstresses.
The
combination must satisfythe provisions of Code Chapter 6; thus, the algebraic sumof fd
fb
+ fo,
cannot exceed the values in Code Table 6.3.1.1. Stresses resulting from restraint
should be controlled by movement joints (see MDG
Chapter 10) or other construction
techniques to ensure that the combined stress does not exceed the allowable values.
I
The
allowable stresses in Code Table 6.3.1.1 govern for out-of-plane bending.
If Code Table 6.3.1.1 is satisfied, then the shear calculation is based upon the uncracked
section and the parabolic shear distribution found from (13.1.1):
fv =
V0
Code Eq. (6-7)
Any reinforcement in the cross sectionis simply neglected. For a rectangular cross-section,
Code Eq. (6-7) gives

fv =
3 v
A,
Eq. 13.1-3
at midheight, the point ofmaximum
shear stress.SinceCodeEq.
(6-7) isused
for
calculations of both in-plane and out-of-plane shear in walls, the reader is also referred to
MDG 13.2.
Eq. 13.1-3 is sometimes used as a conservative approximation
of the composite interlaminar
shear which occurs at the wythe-to-collar joint interface under out-of-plane bending.
The
collar joint is usually only a short distance from the point of maximum shear stress which
occurs at the cross sectionmid-depth.See
MDG 9.3.5 for further discussionofthis
composite section shear computation.

Even though Code 6.5.2 specifies allowable stresses for "in-plane shear,"
these allowable
values are considered applicable to out-of-plane bending for Case (1) masonry elements
utilizing Chapter 6 - Unreinforced Masonry. Thus, the maximum allowable shear stress is
13-5

A C 1 TITLEtMDG 93
0662949 0509350 TT5
the least of the following: 1

S
K
;120 psi; u
+ 0.45 N, / A , inwhich
u = 37 psi for
masonry in running bondand not solid grouted, and for stack bond masonry withopen end
units and grouted solid or 60 psi for masonry in running bond and solid grouted; 15 psi for
masonry in other than running bond with other than open end units grouted solid. See Fig.
13.2-7 for a graphical depiction of these allowable values.
13.13 Reinforced Masonry ShearDesign
Although it is rare, if masonry is subjectedto axial tension, it must be reinforced. The bond
between masonry units and mortar cannot be counted onto resist this type of loading. See
Code 6.4. When net axial tension exists, or when the flexural tensile stress or shear stress
values exceed the allowable stresses of Code Chapter 6, then Case (2) in MDG 13.1.1
applies, and the member is designed as reinforced by Code Chapter 7. Any tensile stress
contribution of the masonry is neglected. Thus, when the combined tension stress exceeds
Code Table 6.3.1.1 allowables, the stress distributions in Fig. 13.1-2 change to those shown
in Fig. 13.1-3. Note that in Fig. 13.1-3, regions of tensile stresses in
the masonry are ignored,
and all of the tension force is carried by the reinforcement.
For the reinforced masonry Case (2), the shear stress is found from
fv =
Code Eq.(7-3)
bjd
where cracked sectionproperties are (MDG 11.1) used to determine theid distance between
the internal C and T forces for compression and tension, respectively.Fig. 13.1-3 shows this
jd distance and a derivation for Code Eq. (7-3).

Generally, masonry members without net axial tension can be designed
to resist shear by
either Code 6.5 or Code 7.5, provided that the member (unreinforced or reinforced) is not
subjected to flexuraltension.
For memberssubject to flexuraltension shear must be
considered according to Code7.5. The philosophy of Code 7.5 is to allow shear stress to a
13-6

m 0662949 0509151 931 m
limited maximum value. If shearing stresses exceed the maximum allowable value for
masonry, theentireshearstress
must be resisted by horizontal and vertical shear
reinforcement. No credit is givenfor shear carriedby the masonry once shear reinforcement
is required. The required amount of shear reinforcement, A,, is:
A,
vs
-
Code Eq. (7-10)
Fsd
The derivation of Code Eq. (7-10) is shown in Fig. 13.1-3.
fb
Forces on
Section A-A
F
N.A.
+T
Axial
Flexural
Stresses
Stresses
= Asfs
Combined Flexural
and Axial Cases
a) Longitudinal Stress Distribution

For a unit length or dx
T MqJ[
Lpi::M
ldxl
Zforces = O (on top segment)

f,(b)(dx) = C + dC - C
f,(b)(dx) = dC = @ (assuming jd = moment arm)

~d
jd
T - " T
' fv(b)(dx) v + d v
-"
f,(b)(jd) =
+ dT
2= V
Y*
L
"-W 1
pdadx = Bond Force
b) Shear Stress Derivation (for Flexure and Shear in Combination)
c) Shear Reinforcement Derivation
Fig. 13.1-3 Combined Longitudinal Stress and Shear
Stress Derivations for Cracked
Concepts, Neglecting Tension in Masonry

13-7

9 3 M 0 b b 2 9 4 9 0509352 8 7 8 M
13.13.1
Shear Reinforcement Not Required - Where shear reinforcement is not required,
the calculated shear stress,f,,per Code 7.5.2 shall not exceedthe allowable shear stress, F,,
determined as:
a) Flexural members:
F,,=
fi
Code Eq. (7-4)
50 psi
b) Shear walls:
1) Where M/Vd c 1.0:
Code Eq. (7-5)
with (M/Vd) taken always as a positive numtber

2) Where M/Vd r 1.0:
F,,=
13.13.2
Code Eq. (7-6)
35 psi
ShearReinforcementRequired
- Where shear reinforcement is required,the
calculated shear, fv, is limited by the allowable shear stress F,, which is determined as:
a) Flexural members:
F,,= 3.0
fi
150 psi
Eq.Code
(7-7)
b) Shear walls:
1) Where M/Vd c 1.0
Code Eq. (7-8)
13-8

A C 1 TITLExMDG 9 3
m 0662949
O509353 7 O Y
2) Where M/Vd r 1.0
1.5
Code Eq. (7-9)
75 psi
with (M/Vd) taken always as a positive number

Per Code 7.5.3.1, the shear reinforcement is to be provided parallel to the direction of the
applied shear force, and the spacing, S, shall not exceed d/2 or 48 in. The amount of required
shear reinforcement, A,, is:
A,,
vs
Fs
Code Eq. (7-10)
The derivation of Code Eq. (7-10) is shown in Fig. 13.1-3. Code 7.5.3.2 requires additional
reinforcement of at least (AJ3) whichmust
be placed perpendicular totheshear
reinforcement at a uniform spacing not to exceed S ft.

Thus, in Code Chapter 7, the masonry elements must be reinforced for the primary tension
force in the member, but could be either reinforced or unreinforced for shear force. The
details for Code Eqs. 7-5,7-6,7-7, and 7-S addressing shear walls are included in MDG 13.2.
13.1.4
Special Provisions for Diaphragms
MDG 13.1.1 - 13.1.3 discuss combined shear and flexure for masonry members subjected to
beam bending, out-of-plane wall bending (vertically or horizontally) due to out-of-plane
forces or due to in-plane forces (see MDG 13.2). However, some structural components
such as floor or roof diaphragms serve as primary shear elements. These diaphragm
elements are very important to the overall lateral stability of buildings subjected to wind or
earthquake loads. The forcedistribution in these diaphragms is illustrated in MDG 9.2.1 for
flexible diaphragms and MDG9.2.2. for rigid diaphragms. Actual as-built diaphragm stiffness
varies between these two theoretical ideal cases.
13-9

A C 1 TITLE*flDG
0662949 0509354 b 4 0
93
Criteria for analyzing diaphragms in masonry buildings have been developed based on the
diaphragmmaterial
type, thickness, configuration, number of sides connected, and the
number of fasteners (13.1.2, 13.1.3). The designer must assure that the connection between
the horizontal diaphragm (floor or roof) and the vertical lateral load-resisting elements is
capable of transferring the shear. The design of connectors is covered in MDG Chapter 14.
As shown by test results, the number of sides of a diaphragm that are connected to vertical
lateral load-resisting elements significantly affects the load capacity of the diaphragm
(13.1.2).
13.2 SHEAR WALLS
The design of shear walls is covered in Code 6.3 and 6.5 for unreinforced shear walls and
Code 7.3 and 7.5 for reinforced shear walls.
13.2.1 Definition
of aShearWall
Code 2.1 defines a column as a member whose width to thickness ratio does not exceed 3.
It is, therefore, assumed that a member with a ratio greater than 3 is a wall. A shear wall
is a vertical member which resists lateral in-plane shear forces from wind or earthquakes
(Fig. 13.2-1).
Vertrcal Load If
Lateral
Y
/
&
Shear
t ->3.0
Fig. 13.2-1 Illustration
13-10

of aShearWall
93
0662949 0509355 587
13.2.2 Function of ShearWalls
Shear wallsresist lateral shear forces due to wind or earthquake, and can also act as
loadbearing elements to supportvertical loads from the floors and/or the roof. The stability
of the masonry building depends predominantly on the in-plane capacity of the shear walls.
The buildings lateral drift under wind or earthquake loads is a function of the in-plane
stiffness of the shear walls. A shear wallsystemutilizesfloor
and roof diaphragms to
distribute lateral forces to the shear walls. Load distribution is based upon the relative
lateral stiffnesses of the shear walls if the floor diaphragms are rigid, or upon the tributary
floor widths if the floor diaphragms are flexible.
Shear walls also serve as fire walls and as building enclosures; in such cases their thermal,
moisture permeance and acousticalcharacteristics
are important, in addition to their
appearance and structural characteristics.

13.26 Layout of ShearWalls
Loadbearing building construction is used predominantly in layouts where the floor area is
divided into arelatively large number of compartments and inwhich the floor plan is
repeated at each level for the full height of the building. Stability in such
construction is
usuallyderived from gravityloads, and from a careful planning of the layoutwithfull

utilization of elevator shafts and stairwells to provide lateral stiffness. The layout is mainly
determined based on the type and function of the building. A large variety of wall
arrangements is possible.
1)
Cellular wallsystemwithtwo-way
2) Single
slabaction(Fig.13.2-2a),
or double cross wall system with one-way
slab action (Fig. 13.2-2b and
Fig. 13.2-2c),
3) Longitudinal
4)
or spine wall system with one-way
slab action (Fig. 13.2-2d), and
Complexsystem combination of the abovesystems.

13-11

A C 1 T I T L E * U D G 93 D Ob62949 O509356 413 M
In single-story masonry buildings, shear walls

are concentratedat the perimeter where they
serve as enclosures; some also carry vertical and lateral loads. Intermediate shear walls can
be added to provide stability and support of the roof system, or to reduce the diaphragm
stresses.
4"
FF
""- F F
"_ l"_-
4"
"
"
"
"
a) Cellular Wall Arrangement
b) SimpleCross-WallStructure
c) Double Cross-Weight Structure
d) Spine Wall Structure
Fig. 13.2-2 Arrangement of Shear Walls in Multistory Building
13.2.4 Analysis of ShearWalls
The global analysis of buildings is covered in Code 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, and 5.7. Determination of
wall stiffness is required for lateral load distribution and for calculation of building drift.
13-12

A C 1 T I T L E g N D G 93 W Obb27470507357
35T
MDG 9.2.1 and 9.2.2 discusses global lateral load distribution on shear walls.
Wall stiffness is primarily a function of:
1)
Wallgeometry - wall aspect ratio h/l, affects the contribution of shear and
bending deformation to the wall rigidity.
2)Boundarycondition
- restraint at the top of the wallaffectswallstiffness.
Two conditions are commonly considered; cantilever and fixed-fixed wall.

3) Openings
- the
size, location and arrangement of openings dramatically affect
wall stiffness.
The lateral stiffness of a solid cantilever shear wall is:
The lateral stiffness of a solid fixed-fixed shear wall is:
The effect of openings on wall stiffness depends on

the size, shape, and distributionof those
openings. Finite element methods can be used to accurately determine wall stiffness and
a wall's response to lateral loading.However,approximatemethods
estimate wallrigidity.
For acombination ofwalls
stiffness is expressed as:
k=k,+k,+k,
13-13

may beused
in parallel(Fig.13.2-3a)
to
the system
A C 1 TITLEsMDG 93
For a combinationofwallsin
Ob62949 0509358 29b
series (Fig. 13.2-3b) the system stiffness is approximately
expressed as:
k=(
A,
A2
A,
- 1+ - +1-
a) Walls in Parallel
b) Walls in Series
Fig. 13.2-3 Stiffness of Combinations of Walls
For single story buildings whose wall height

to width ratio is less than1, three approximate
methods based on the parallel and series models can be used per reference (13.2.1). The
MDG will present only methods I and III.

Method I - In this method the wall deflection is first calculated assuming
a solid cantilever
wall, andthen modified to account for openings by subtracting deflection of cantilever strips
containing openings, and then adding deflection due to deformation of piers (considered
fixed top and bottom) within each strip. Using this method the rigidity of the wall shown
in Fig. 13.2-4 can be calculated with the following formula:
k = -1
A
A
A solid - A &ipA
+ AuA5
13-14

kz
kzSA1 =
%41
k3,4*5 =
A3.41
A3,41
A3,4
~ 0 x 4-, A~ stripB
~
+ A3,4
R4
This method has the advantage that it does not give results thatareerroneous
when
compared to solid- walls.

Method III - In this method the wall is divided into wall elements stacked on top of each
other in series; the lateral deflection of each element is added to obtain the total wall
deflection. For each part, which is a horizontal strip, the deflection of piers connected in
parallel is the reciprocal of the sum of rigidities. For the wall shown in Fig.
13.2-4, the
rigidity is expressed as:
k=
1
1
In-series model
In-parallel model
In-series model
R3,4 = k3
In-parallel model
k4
Wall deflection is calculated based on fixed boundary at top and bottom. Therefore, the
method ignores the rotation at the top of each strip which is more applicable for squat walls
where shear deformation is the predominant mode compared to flexural deformation. This
13-15

AC1
TITLExMDG 93
0662949 0509360 944
method can alsogive erroneous results. In certain configurations a wall with

an opening can
appear to be stiffer than a wall without an opening. This can affect not only
the wall in
question but the distribution of shears to adjacent walls if the floor and roof diaphragmsare
rigid or if the walls are in line with each other.
The percent reduction of wall stiffness due to openings shown in Fig. 13.2-4 is calculated
using the above two methods and the results are presented in Table 13.2.1 for the given
geometry. As can be seen, Method III results
in a higherwallstiffness
than Method I.
Obviously engineering judgement must be used

to select the mostappropriate method. For
a further discussion of this method, see MDG 9.2.2.
. ......
-k
Fig. 13.2-4SingleStoryWallwithOpenings
Table 13.2.1 Reduction
of Wall Stiffness Due to Openings

Stiffness of Wall with Openings
Method
Wall
Stiffness
Solid of
MethodI
Stiffness
0.143 E,t
0.073 Emt
III
% Reduction
Stiffness
48.9%
13-16

% Reduction
0.097 Emt
32.3 %
93
Obb29Ll9 0509363 AA0
In multistory construction where corridor openings are common, coupling between adjacent
piers may be ignored in preliminary design, and thepiers assumed to act ascantilevers. This
would provide a lower bound value for wall stiffness. The continuum approach for coupled
shear walls or the finite element method would provide a more accurate prediction of wall
stiffness and stresses, as long as the coupling beams are stiff enough and are appropriately
detailed to transfer the loads between wall elements.
Lateral load distribution among walls depends on relative wall-diaphragm rigidities. When
diaphragms are stiffer than shear walls,(e.g.,rigid
concrete floor slabs) lateral load is
distributed among walls in proportion to their relative lateral stiffness. In that case, the
center of wall rigidities does not coincide with the line of action of the lateral load torsion
results, and the additional wall shears from this torsional effect should be considered in the
wall design. Most building codes also require the addition of an "accidental" torsion force
when earthquake loads are considered. See MDG 9.2.2 and MDG Example 9.2-3.
Cracking reduces thestiffness of reinforced masonry shear walls, and thereforeaffects lateral
force distribution (in the case of rigid floor diaphragms), and also affects lateral force
distribution among wall piers in all cases.
13.2.5 FlexuralDesign
13.2.5.1 Unreinforced Shear Walls - Shear walls are commonly exposed to combined axial
force and in-plane bending moment resulting from lateralshear forces. The resulting
normal stresses, fob, can be calculated, assuming plane sections remain plane, as:
f& = fa * f b
P
Mc
fob=-*A
Z
The resulting stress distribution is shown in Fig. 13.2-5. The maximum extreme fiber stress
13-17

A C 1 TITLESHDG 73
0 6 6 2 7 4 7 O507362 7 3 7
has two components; one fromaxial load(PIA) and the other from bending(McII). Because
the Code provides different compression allowable stresses
under axial load and under
flexure, the following unity equation is used to provide a more accurate margin of safety for
compression:
t
Fig. 13.2-5 Stress Distribution under Combined Axial and Flexure for Unreinforced
ShearWalls
Code 6.3.1.1allows
in the transversedirection for unreinforced
flexuraltensiononly
masonry. It is therefore assumed that flexuraltensionisnotallowedin

direction(i.e.,for
shear walls),and
the in-plane
that an unreinforced shear wallmusthave
net
compression in the extreme fiber. This condition will control the design in the case of low
gravity loads and high lateral wind or earthquake loads. In this situation, walls should be
carefully arranged so that enough gravity compression load exists
to fully negate flexural
tension from lateral loads.

Flanges may be considered effective in resisting normal stresses from axial load and bending
moment. Code 5.13.4 specifies the effective flange width.
wallsmustconform
The connection of intersecting
to the requirements of Code5.13.4.2(e) to achieve adequate shear
transfer at the interface. Code C. Figs. 5.13.1 through 5.13.4 show recommended detailsof
wall intersections.
13-18

A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93
0662949 0509163
653
13.2.5.2 Reinforced ShearWalls - If flexural tension develops inan extreme fiberof a shear
wall, the wall must have flexural reinforcement

by Code 7.5.2 so that vertical steel will carry
all tension. In this case, Code 7.3.1.2 limits the masonry compressive stress to 1/3f m and
Code 7.2 limits the steel stress to 20 ksi for Grade 40 or 24 ksi for Grade 60 steel. In areas
of high seismicity, reinforcement of masonry shear walls is required by local building codes.
Referring to Fig. 13.2-6, the following compatibility and equilibrium equations can
be utilized
to solve for the location of the neutral axis and the required amount of steel. See MDG
12.3.3.
Compatibility Equation:
Equilibrium Equation:
P = C - T
P = - 1f a b t M - C & A s i
2
fsi
I-
Fig. 13.2-6 Stress Distribution Under Axial Load and Bending

for Reinforced Masonry Shear Walls
13-19

A C 1 TITLEtMDG 93
Ob62949 0509364 59T
This is a balanced design if the masonry and steel at extreme location reach theirmaximum
stress allowable simultaneously. For less reinforcement than thebalanced amount,allowable
tension reinforcement will control the design. This would be the most common case for
reinforced masonry walls.
13.2.6Shear
Design
- For unreinforced
shear walls, the maximum shear,f,,
is determined per Code 6.5:
where Q, I and b are calculated based on the uncracked net cross section of the wall. See
Flowchart Shear Design, Fig. 8.4-47, and MDG 8.4.3.9.
The calculated maximum shear stress is not allowed to exceed the least of four values given
in Code 6.5.2. Graphical presentation of the code allowables for shear are shown in Fig.
13.2-7. The Code allows an increase in shear due tofriction from gravity load compression
with an upper bound value as shown in the figure. The friction contribution shall be due
to the assumed force (Nv)acting normal to shear surface. N,, is typically assumed to come
from dead load only.
50
100
200
,(PS11
Fig. 13.2-7 Unreinforced Walls

13-20

150
- Code Allowables
93
Obb2949 0509365 426
Effective flange width should

be determined asshown in Code C. Fig. 5.13-5 for calculating
section properties of T, I, or C Sections. Proper connection details should be provided at
the flange-web interface to assure adequate shear transfercapabilityrequired
for full
interaction betweenthe flange and the web. It is common to grout adjacent cells
and place
horizontal reinforcement in hollow unit construction for this purpose.
See details in Code
C. Figs 5.13-2, 5.13-3, 5.13-4.

- Shear resistance of a wall is providedeither by masonry
or by reinforcement. According to the Code these two contributions are not additive. See
MDG 8.4.3.9. If the calculated shear stress exceedsthe allowable shear for the masonry, all
shear must be resisted by reinforcement placed parallelto the applied shear direction per
Code 7.5.3.1. In addition Code 7.5.3.2 requires an accompanying portion of perpendicular
either case is given as a function of Mwd ratio and the
reinforcement. The allowable in

square root off,.
Shear walls with loweraspect ratios (expressedby M/Vd) have higher allowableshear stress
(Fig. 13.2-8).
Reinforcement Resists Entire Shea

Masonry Shear Wall
Fixed at Bottom Only
Masonry Resists Entire

Shear
4
0.5
I
I
l
l
o!s
o:
l!S
210
MlVd
ratio
-w=k
Masonry Shear Wall
2d Fixed Top and Bottom
"
VdVd
Fig. 13.2-8 Reinforced Shear Walls
13-21

- CodeAllowables
93 W 0662747 0509366 362
REFERENCES
13.l.1
Higdon, Ohlsen & Stiles, "Mechanics of Materials",John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New
York, 1960.
13.1.2
Porter M. L, Sabri, AA., "PlankDiaphragmCharacteristics.Task

Report, Task 5.1, TechnicalCoordinatingCommittee
5.1", Final
for MasonryResearch,
Submitted to National Science Foundation, Engineering Research Institute, Iowa

State University, Ames, IA; July 1990.
13.1.3
Porter, M.L, Yeomans, F.S., Johnson, A. W., "Assemblv of Existing
Diaphragm
Datal' Final Report, Task 5.2, Technical Coordinating Committee for Masonry
Research,Submitted
to NationalScienceFoundation,EngineeringResearch
Institute, Iowa State University, Ames, IA, July, 1990.

13.2.1
Schneider, R., and W. Dickey, "Reinforced Masonry Design", 2ndedition, Prentice

Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1987.
13-22

Example 13.1-1 RCJ Hotel
93 H Obb2949 0509167 2 T 9
- Shear Design of a Reinforced Brick Coupling Beam
Given the material properties shown below (whichare repeated from MDG Example 11.35 ) , perform the shear design for the corresponding lintel using Code Chapter 7. The lintel
is for a door opening along Grid Line 2 (see MDG Fig. 9.1-6). The lintel is a single wythe
reinforced clay brick lintel beam assembly with cross section and properties shown below.
Unit strength of clay masonry = 6,000 psi
Mortar
Type S
Sm= 2,500 psi

fg = 3,800 psi
E,,, of clay masonry = 1.9 x 106 psi
n = 15.3
Steel reinforcement = Grade 60
d = 32 - 3 = 29 in.
j = 0.9 (from MDG Example 11.3-5)
b = 7.5 in. (from MDG Example 11.3-5)
and
Calculations
The clear span of lintels on Grid Line 2 of the RCJ Hotel is 3 ft. 4 in. and subjected to a
uniform load of 264 plf (from MDG Example 9.2-4 - Seismic Controls). Assumean effective
bearing 4 in. on each end. Thus, the shear forces V, and V, are calculated from
VI = 759 i n . - k i p ~ + 621 in.-kips - 0.264 klf(3.33 ft)(1.67ft) (12 in./ft)

40 in.
VI = 34.1 kips
13-23

93
Obb2949 0509168 L35
and
Calculations
v. =
Reference
759 in.-kip~ + 621 h-kips + 17.6 h-kips
40 in.
Code
34.9 kips
According to Code 7.5.5, the calculated maximum shear for noncantilever beams can be
taken at d/2 from the face of support. Thus design V
34.9 kips - 0.3 kips = 34.6 kips
Shear design of beams is governed by Code Chapter 7. Therefore, the shear stress is found
from Code Eq. 7-3:
V
Using j
7.5.2.1
fv
0.9 from MDG Example 11.3-5 gives:
34.6 kips
fv
= (7.5
in.)(O.9) (29 in.)
177 psi
The maximum shear stress allowed, F, , if shear reinforcement is not provided is
F,,=
66.5
< 50 psi x 1.33
66.5 psi
7.5.2.2
177 psi
Shear 1reinforcement is required.
F,,= 3.0
fi
1.33
200 psi > 177 psi
A,="
vs Fvd
200 psi
.+.OK
34,600 lb x 6 in.
24,OOO psi x 1.33 x 29 in.
Use DBL #3 @ 6 in. O.C.

13-24

0.22 in?
A C 1T I T L E l K M D G
93
Q b b 2 9 Y 9 0509369 071 W

~~
Code Reference
Check steel placement

b = 7.5in.
Face shell thickness = 1 1/4 in.

Shear Reinforcing = #3 = 0.375in.
Flexural Reinforcing = #6 = 0.75in.
7 .S "
Code requires 1/2in. thickness of grout between masonry unit and bar
8.3.1
and 1 in. minimum between bars.
8.3.5
Minimum beam width = 2 (0.375 in.)

2 (0.5 in.)
+ 1 in. =
6.75in. < 7.5in.
+ 2 (1.25 in.) + 2 (0.75 in.) +

.: OK
Reinforcement is required perpendicular to shearreinforcement by the

amount of 1/3A,. The longitudinal flexural steel may be used to satisfy
this requirement.
13-25

7.5.3.2
Example 13.1-2
73
RCJHotel
0 b b 2 7 4 9 0509370 8 9 3
- Shear DesignforCanopyBeam
MDG Example 11.3-1 considered the flexural designof the canopy frame beam forthe RCJ
Hotel. This beam spans 31 ft center to center in the east-west direction. The data used in
MDG Example 11.3-1 are:
f',= 2,500 psi (from

prism
tests)
Dead Load = 500 plf

LoadLive
Brick
Clay
fg = 3,800 psi (specified)
= 200 plf
Strength
Unit
= 6,000 psi
Grade 60 steel
Type S Mortar
E, = 1.9 x 106 psi (Code Table 5.5.1.2)
h = 24 in., d = 20.5 in., b = 11.5 in., j = 0.89

Evaluate the canopy beam for shear considerations.
and
Calculations
1.
The structural analysisof the reinforced brick beam-column frame for Seismic Zone
4 yields a controlling load combination
of D
+ L + E; therefore, the allowable
stresses can be multiplied by 1.33 according to Code 5.3.2. The maximum negative
moment at the beam end is 55.2 ft-kips, the maximum positive moment is 49 ft-kips,
the axial load is 4.4 kips. The j from MDG Example 11.3-1 is 0.89 associated with
the negative moment where the shear is maximum.
2.
The resulting shear diagram is:

9.6kips
Shear Section
13-26

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
Obb2949 0 5 0 9 3 7 37 2 T
and
Code Reference
Calculations
3.
Find design shear V at d/2 from face of column:
distance
1
2
-(coIumn width)
7.5.5
+ -
11.: h) (20.; h)
+
distance = 16.0 in.
V
4.
11,200 lb
Find shear stress f.:
Eq. (7-3)
fv
5.
11,200 lb
= (11.5 h.)(0.89) (20.5 in.)
53.4 psi
Check Code maximum shear stress, if no shear reinforcing:

Neglect the benefit of the 4.4 kips axial compressive load in the canopy beam since
Code does not provide for increased shear strength in compression.
F,,=
&
SI =
50 psi
50 psi
Thus F, (1.33) = 66.5 psi (for load combination) > 53.4 psi.
Therefore, no shear reinforcing is needed.
13-27

7.5.2.2
5.3.2
93
Example 13.13 RCJ Hotel
Obb2949 0509372 bbb
- Shear Design of Continuous
Masonry Beam
Perform the shear design for a continuous masonry beam on Grid Line E spanning from
column E-3 to E-3.5 to E-4 above the opening on the first floor of the RCJ Hotel (Wall
Construction A withBuildingConstruction
I).
The continuousbeamspansover
two
openings each 11ft wide. The length overeach of the three support columns is 2.67ft. The
total beam load is 17,020 plf with the following assumed data (see MDG Example 11.3-6):
Concrete Masonry Unit Strength = 2,000 psi
b = 11.63in.
Type N Mortar
d = 67 in.
f',
= 1,800 psi
fg
j = 0.912 for
= 3,600 psi
+A4
j = 0.902 for -A4
Grade 60 steel
F, = 24 ksi
E,,, = 1.8 x lo6 psi

and
Calculations
From MDG Example 11.3-6, the moment diagram gives a moment of 341.4 ft-kips at the
center support using a span of 12.7 ft for flexure.
17,020 plf
Bekring 8''
i
I
l
I
11'-O'' Clear
11'-O'' Clear
Column
2'4" Column
Loadlna
341.4 ft-kips
MomentDlaaram
13-28

2/43" Column
192 ft-kips
192 ft-kips
_____
93 D 0662749 0 5 0 9 3 7 3 5 T 2 D

and
Code Reference
Calculations
From statics:
VR = 17,020 plf(12.67 ft) - 80,900 lb
'
134,700 lb
17,020plf
80,900lb
12'43''
($,J$,
Of Bearing
''
c 4
269,500 lb
12'4''
80,900 lb
Q-q Of Bearing
CT
b4
Reactions
12'"'
Shear Reinforcement
Reinforcement
Not Required
c
= 2 #4 @ 8" oc
6'4''
Reinforcement
Not Required
?c?19
m o
m - T
Kr
u3
/ /
/
2a
-
r n
,3
! 2 ?
d
e
'.2
* "
I-
Face Of
l"5"
d/2 From Face Of Support'
Face Of Support
7"11"
d12 From Face Of Support
1"4"
Shear Diagram
13-29

4"9"
AC1
TITLEaMDG 9 3 D 0662949 0509374 Y39 m

Code Reference
From MDG Example 11.3-6, the length of the center column is 2 ft - 8 in. Thus, the shear,
V, at the face of the center support is:
112,100 lb
At d/2 from the face, the shear, V, is:
112,100 lb -
64,600 lb
(17,020pH)
Neglecting flexural tension (consistent with
7.5.5
MDG Example 11.3-6), the shear stress from
Code Eq. 7-3 is as follows:
V
fv
7.5.2.1
using j = 0.902 (from MDG Example 11.3-6):

64,600 lb
=
(1 1.63 in.)(0.902)(67 in.)
91.9 psi
The maximum allowed shear stress, F, , is given by:

50 psi
Fv =
Fv =
c
/
-
7.5.2.2
42.4 psi
50 psi
For this beam, f, = 91.9 psi > 42.4 psi; therefore, shear reinforcement is required. Code
,
7.5.2.3 says that the maximum F, when shear reinforcement exists is:
13-30

TITLE*NDG 93
AC1
Obb29Y9 0509375 375 H
and
Code Reference
Calculations
Fv = 3.0
fi
150 psi
.: F,,= 3.0 4-
7.5.2.3
127 psi
150 psi
:.
OK
For this example:

=
fv
91.9 psi < 127 psi
Thus, shearreinforcement
is acceptable.
NotethatCode
7.5.3says
thattheshear
reinforcement shall resist all of the calculated shear (i.e.? no contribution is counted by the
masonry). Code Eq.(7-10) is used:
rd
vs
7.5.3
Options:
A"
8 in.
0.32 in.2
12 in.
0.48 in.2 (n.g. - need 8 in. multiples)
16 in.
0.64 in.2
Select 2 - #4 Bars @ 8 in.
O.C.
(vertically). A , = 2(0.20 in.2) = 0.40 in.2/8 in.
Check spacing:
7.5.3.1
Maximum S < d/2 < 48 in.

13-31

A C 1 TITLEvMDG 93
Obb2949 0509376 201

Reference
Code
"- 67 in. = 33.5 in. > 8 in. :. OK

2
Check shear reinforcement requirement throughout span.

a)
Whereisshearreinforcementnotrequired?
where
fv
42.4 psi
V
f'=bjd
V
= 29.8
=
b)
kips occuts at
42.4 psi( 11.63 in.)(0.902)(67 in.) = 29,800 lb
29.8 kips
(12.67 f
t) + 4.75 ft
80.9 kips + 134.7 kips
6.5 ft fiom center of end bearing
Wherecanshearreinforcement
vs
Fsd
be decreasedto2 #4 at 16 in.
O.C.
=-
V = 0.40 h2(24 ksi) (67 h) = 40.2 kips

16 in.
= 40.2
=
kips occurs at
40.2 kips
80.9 kips + 134.7 kips
7.11 ft from center of end beating
13-32

(12.67 f
t
) + 4.75 ft
93
Obb2949 0509377 L48

and
Calculations
Discussion
Reference
Code
Since the point at which shear reinforcement spacing can be doubled

is so close to the point at which shear reinforcement is not required,
provide the maximum shear reinforcement everywhere thatshear
reinforcement is required. See the shear diagram for layout.
Where shear reinforcement is not required, the designer may choose
to use #3 stirrups at 24 in. on center, as a means of supporting the
flexural reinforcement.
Reinforcement is required perpendicular to the shear reinforcement,
i.e., horizontal, in this case, by the amount of (1/3) A , = 0.032 in.2/3 =
0.11 in.2. Although not specifically stated in the Code or Commentary,
itis the authors understanding that for the bearing element under
consideration the flexural steel can be used to satisfythis
Code
provision. From MDG Example 11.3-6, A, = 3.0 in.2 > 0.11 in.2
:. OK
If the designer decides to satisfythis
Code provision by adding
additional reinforcement, then an acceptable solution is as follows: this

reinforcement must be uniformly distributed, and the spacing must be
less than 8 ft-Oin.
Prefabricated joint reinforcement with two W1.7
side rods and cross rods, with an effective area of2(0.0173in.2)

0.0345 in.2 can be placed 1 ft-6 in.
O.C.
horizontally. For four layers of
reinforcement, the horizontal reinforcing area is 4(0.0345 in.2) = 0.138

in.2 > 0.11 in.2 required. OK
13-33

7.5.3.2
A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93 D Obb29Y9 0509178 084
Example13.1-3Contd.
Code Reference
Laddertype
joint reinforcement is preferable to trusstype
joint
reinforcement when vertical bars are also used. In the truss type, the
diagonal cross wires interfere with the bar placement.
Provide
U-shaped
The shear reinforcement
must be anchored.
stirrups
8.5.6.1(e)
with lap slice length = 1.7Zd

1.7 Id
1.7 Id
1.7(0.0015 d,F,)
1.7(0.0015) (0.5 in.)(24,000 psi)
30.6 in.
8.5.2
use 31 in. lap length
See MDG Example 11.3-6 for cover requirements. The horizontal joint reinforcement can
be developed or anchored by extending into the neighboring masonry elements.
For a check on steel placement within the beam, see MDG Example 11.3-6.
The required out-to-out dimension of the stirrup is
11.62 in.
- 2(1.5
in.) face shell
- 2(0.5 in.)
grout = 7.62 in.
The minimum bend radius is 6 bar diameters or 6(0.5 in.) = 3 in.

Therefore the minimum out-to-out dimension of the stirrup is
3 in.
+ 3 in. + 0.5 in. + 0.5 in. = 7 in. < 7.62in. :.
13-34

OK
8.5.5.1
A C 1 TITLE*MDG
73
0662747 0507177 T10

and
Calculations
Code Reference
Discussion
The final beam cross section and steel arrangement are shown below.
.C. Where Indicated
On Shear Diagram; 2
1.7b = 31"
H
1163''
13-35

- #3 At
24" O.C. Elsewhere
A C 1 TITLE*UDG 93
Example 13.1-4
Obb2949 0509380 732
RCJ Hotel Shear Design of aReinforcedClayBrickNonloadbearing

Wall
Consider the shear design of a reinforced hollow clay brickstair wall located between Grid
Lines F and G along Grid Line 3 (See also MDG 9.1.3). This wall is designed for out-ofplane bending only (See MDG Example 11.1-12). The wall is an exterior stair wall in the
RCJ Hotel with Building Option I and Wall Construction Option B. The wall cross section
and properties are shown below:
Unit Strength of Clay Brick = 6,000 psi
Mortar = Type S
I
y,,,= 2,500 psi
1 /d = 3.75
fg
= 3,800 psi
E,,, = 1.9 x 106 psi
Eg = 1.9 x 106 psi
n = 15.3
Steel = Grade 60
j = 0.94 (MDG Example 11.1-12)
The cross section and materials are the same as those usedin MDG Example 11.1-12. The
wall height, momentand forces are the same as those in MDG Examples 11.1-11and 11.112. The wall is subjected to a wind load of 25 psf. The resulting moment for the 11ft span
was 4,540 in.-lb/ft (MDG Example 11.1-12). Thus,
v = (W)- (0
2
13-36

the shear, V , is
A C 1 TITLE*NDG 93
Obb2949 0509LBL b 7 9

and
Calculations
This wall is a single-wythe wall composed of 8 in. nominal clay units with No. 4 reinforcing
steel bars placed in the center of a grouted cell at 40 in.
O.C.
From MDG Example 11.1-12:
d = 3.75 in.
j = 0.94
According to Code 7.55, the calculated maximum shear for"non-cantilever beams" is taken
at d/2 from the face. The commentary says "Beam or WallLoading".
Even though the
shear at d/2 or 2 in., in this case, could be used, most designers simply use the end span
reaction for walls for use in finding the shear stress in Code Eq. (7-3) as shown below:
fv =
bjd
fv =
138 lbs
(12 in.)(0.94) (3.75 in.)
Eq. (7-3)
7.5.2.1
=
3.3 psi
The maximum allowed shear stress, F,,, is given by:
Fv
:. Fv
@<
50 psi
50 psi x 1.33
7.5.2.2
5.3.2
66.5 psi
For this wallf, = 3.3 psi C 66.5 psi; therefore, no shear reinforcing is needed.
13-37

A C 1 TITLESUDG 93
Example 13.1-5
DPCGymnasium
Perform the shear design for the wall
Obb29q7 0 5 0 9 3 8 2 505
- Shear Design for a Composite Masonry Wall

on Grid Line A of the DPC Gymnasium assuming
Wall Construction Option B. The flexural design was given in MDG Example 12.2-4.
Grout
fg
5,100 psi
Eg = 2.55 x lo6 psi

/+3642$
EBIoat= 2.08 x lo6 psi
11.63'
Em = 2.40 x 106 psi
Wall Section
Transformed grout to block
bg = 14.7 in.
13.9'
Transformed brick to block
H 2 - k 11.63'
bb = 13.05 in.
Transformed Section
Note: The listed values of
Calculations
1.
Reference
Out-of-planeshear due to induced 20 psfwindload:
13-38

5.89 in.
i are based on
the CMU wall not being grouted.
and
3.74 in.
Code
93
Obb2949 0509383 4 4 3

and
Calculations
The calculated shear stress is:
2.
fv
VQ
6.5.1
distance from unit centroid to composite section centroid
I = 2,960 in.4 (from MDG Example 12.2-4)
ybl = 5.89 in.,
5,
3.74 in. based on CMU wall not being grouted.
Q = statical moment of area outside interface in question

In this problem two interfaces exist -- (1) between CMU and grout and (2) between brick
and grout. Both calculations will be shown (For QIand Q2,respectively).
QI = 36 in? (5.89 in.) = 211

Q2
13.9 h ( 3 . 6 3 in.)(3.74 in.) = 188
in.3
f., controls
3.
Check the allowable interface shear
F,,= 10 psi
I
Thusf,, < F,
1.33
5.3.2
13.3psi
.-. OK
13-39

5.8.1.2(b)
A C 1 TITLExMDG 9 3
Example 13.1-6
0bb2949 0509384 3 8 8
T M S Shopping Center Shear Design of an Unreinforced Wall Due to

Out-of-Plane Bending
Consider the shear design of an unreinforced wall (Wall Construction Option A) subjected
to out-of-plane bendingfor the interior wall on Grid Line 2 of the TMS Shopping Center.
Initial data is:
Use 8 in. CMU
with
face-shell
bedding
of
A)
Appendix
MDG(See
Wall span
and
S,,, = 1,500
psi
mortar
weight
Wall
psf = 46.5
16 ft (See MDG Example 11.1-3)
Calculations
From MDG Example 11.1-3:

1
V-
= - ( F p
Seismic Controls
= -(2.6
V', =
p~Q(l6f
t
)
2
20.8 plf
The axial force at midheight due to wall weight is
(8 ft)(46.5 psf)
372 PE
6.5.1
The shear stress is:

fv =
VQ
Eq. (6-7)
For a 1 ft width of wall, the shear stress is
13-40

1
i

and
Calculations
Reference
Discussion
Code
Note that the shearis assumed to beresisted by two face shells sincethe wall is unreinforced
and uncracked.
Some engineers conservatively use only a single
face shell in their calculations to cover both
the uncracked and cracked conditions. For this case f, = 2.0 psi.
Code 6.5.2 provides allowable stresses for in-plane shear stresses in combination with axial
load. Separate shear stresses for out-of-plane bending shear are not stated. However the
Code C. suggests using Code 6.5.2 values for out-of-plane loading. For this example, Code
6.5.2 allowables will be used.
Using Code 6.5.2 for combined axial load and shear provides the following allowable shear
stress, F,, values:
(u)
Fv
1.5&
= 1.54-
= 58.1
psi
(b) Fv = 120 psi

(c)
Fv
6.5.2
Nv
v + 0.45 An
37 psi + 0.45(372 lb)

30 i n 2
42.6 psi
Where v = 37 psi for running bond not solidly grouted
F, = 42.6 psi controls

5.3.2
For seismic, F, = 1.33(42.6 psi) = 56.6 psi

For this example, f v = 2.0 psi c 56.6 psi, :. OK
13-41

A C 1 TITLE*flDG 93
Example 13.1-7
DPCGymnasium
0662949 0507186 150
- ShearDesignofaReinforcedCompositeWall
Consider the shear design of a reinforced composite brick-block wall (Wall Construction
Option C) on Grid Line 1of the DPC Gymnasium. This composite wall is the same as that
in MDG Example 11.1-6 and is composed of a 4 in. clay brick wythe, a 2 in. grouted collar
joint,and an 8 in. concretemasonrywythe.
The material properties are (From MDG
Example 11.1-6):
Concrete Block
Clay
Brick
Unit Strength (psi)

Mortar
P m
(Psi)
E m
(psi)
Masonry(Hollow)Masonry
Grout
2,000
Type N
8,000
N.A.
Type N
N.A.
1,500
1.8 x 106 (Code
2,500
2.0 x 106
2,000 (fg psi)

1.0 x 106 (Eg psi)
Table 5.5.1.3)
14.5
16.1
It
Reinforcement - Grade 60, E = 29 x lo6 psi

Code Reference
The cross-section (from MDG Example 11.1-6) is:
T
I
7.63"
8.63' '
13.3"
13-42

Ob62949 0509187 097

and
Code Reference
Calculations
This wall isconsidered to span vertically on a 30ft span andis subjected to lateralwind load
of 20 psf. Initially the wall is bent under wind pressure producing compression in the brick
wythe; however, the wall must also be checked for suction where the inside face shell of the
CMU is in compression (see also MDG Example 11.1-6).
For Commession in Brick Wythe:
From
MDG
d = 4.63 in.
Example 11.1-6
j = 0.932
From Code Chapter 7, the shear stress, fv, is:
Eq. (7-3)
fv =
bjd
7.5.2.1
The shear force, V , is:

W1
v =-
According to Code 7.5.5, the shear at d/2 from the face can be used for design; however,
as discussed in MDG Example 13.1-4, the span of I will be used, thus
..
*
=
fv =
300 lb
(12 in.)(0.932)(4.63 in.)
5.8 psi
The maximum allowable shear stress, F", is given by:

13-43

7.5.2.2
A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 9 3 W Obb29Y9 0509LBB T23 D

and
Code Reference
Calculations
Fv =
Fv =
F,, =
d
m = 50 psi
d
m = 38.7 psi
< 50 psi
Eq. (7-4)
For wind, F, = 1.33(50 psi) = 66.5 psi

For this case, fy = 5.8 psi
66.5 psi,
5.3.2
.-. OK
For CornDression in the Concrete Block Wvthe:

From MDG Example 11.1-6 (with the same wind pressure assumed in both directions)
d = 8.63 in.
jd = 7.94 in.
7.5.2.1
fv =
=
fv
bid
300 lb
(12 in.)(0.92)(8.63 in.)
3.2 psi
The maximumF,
dm
For wind,Fv = 1.33(38.7 psi)
38.7 psi
=
7.5.2.2
5.3.2
51.5 psi
This design is okay for shear.
13-44

A C 1 TITLEtMDG 73 D O662949 0 5 0 7 3 8 7 7bT

Code Reference
See Note in MDG Example 11.1-6 regarding delamination.

Check for potential delamination
5.8.1.2
Maximum allowable collar joint shear = 10 psi
5.3.2
Increase 1/3 for wind = 13.3 psi

Delamination computations are generallybased
on the resistance
provided by the contact area. However, since this exampleis based on

a cracked section the transverse shear computed above will be
conservatively used for this in plane shear check.
f v = 5.8 psi c 13.3

psi
fy
= 3.2 psi
psi
13.3
.: OK
.s.
OK
13-45

A C 1 TITLE*rMDG 9 3
Example 13.1-8
On GridLineB,
RCJHotel
0662949 0509390 b 8 L
- ShearDesign
of a CouplingBeam
fourth floor of the RCJ Hotel (Wall Construction Option B,Building
Option 1) perform a shear investigation of the coupling beams. From MDG Example 11.3-
7, the clockwise end moments are 450 and 409 in.-kips, respectively, the opening is 3 ft 4 in.
wide, and the total beam depth is 2 ft 8 in. The properties are:
fg
Clay Brick Unit Strength = 6,000 psi
3,200 psi (from prism tests)
Type S Mortar
Reinforcement Grade 60
E, = 1.6 x 106 psi (from tests)
= 2,500 psi
Eg = 1.6 x 106 psi
18.1
d = 28 in.,
j = 0.914,
b = 7.5 in.
Reference
First find the end shears from the free-body diagram
of beam forces:
Code
for dead weight,
assume solidly grouted. Thus, weight, W = (88 psQ(2.67 ft) = 235 plf
450 in.-kips
fi
450 h-kips + 409 h-kips -
VL =
VL = 21,100lb;
= 235 plf
235
plf
(3.33
3.33 ft(12 in./ft)
Vk = 21,900 lb
13-46

12 in./ft)
l,O00 lb/kip
A C 1 TITLE+flDG 93
0662949 0509191 518

and
Calculations
7.5.5
Find the shear force, V,at d/2 from face
21,600 lb
7.5.2.1
Find the shear stress, f,,from
Eq. (7-3)
bjd
fv
21,600 lb
= (7.50 in.)
(0.914) (28 in.)
&,
113 psi
The maximum allowable stress, F,, is
Fy =
@ S 50 psi
F,,=
Jm 50 psi
7.5.2.2
Eq. (7-4)
F, is permitted to be increased by 1/3
..
5.3.2
F, = (50 psi)(l.33) = 66.5 psi
For this example, f v = 113 psi > 66.5 psi

Therefore, special shear reinforcement is needed.
Check maximum shear stress (When shear reinforcement exists).
Thus, maximum
13-47

7.5.2.3
A C 1 TITLEsMDG 93
0662747O509392454
Elxample 13.1-8 Contd.

F,
= (1.33)3.0c
F,
Reference
Code
(150psi)(1.33) = 200 psi
Eq. (7-7)
( 1 . 3 3 ) 3 . 0 @ = 200 psi
For this example, 113 psi < 200 psi, so shear reinforcement is possible.
All of shear must be carried by reinforcement
7.5.3
Maximum F, = (24,000 psi) 1.33 = 32,000 psi
7.2.1.1
5.3.2
Thus,
A,,
A,
if
(21,600 1b)s
32,000 lb(32 in.)

0.0211s
S =
16 in.,
A , = 0.338in.2
S =
12 in.,
A , = 0.25 in.2
..
A , = 0.51 in.2
S =in.,
24
= 8 in.,
Use 1 - #4 bar at 8 in.
A , = 0.169 in.2
O.C.
1 - #4 each cell
for vertical shear reinforcing.
Check maximum spacing of d/2 < 48 in.
7.5.3.1
13-48

93
Ob62947 0507173 390

and
Calculations
Discussion
- 16 in. > 8 in. :.
"
Reference
Code
OK
7.5.3.2
must be provided perpendicular to shear reinforcement.
0.17 h*= 0.057
h 2
3
This can be provided by the flexural tension steel.
7.5in.
Face shell thickness = 1.25 in.

Shear reinforcing = #4 = 0.5in.
Flexural reinforcing = #5 = 0.625 in.
t"---+
7S
'
'
MDG Example 11.3.7 chose 2-#5 for flexural steel. A single #7 would also satisfy flexural
requirements and actually be a better selection with regard to shear tie support. Use 1-#7
Code requires in.
0.5
and
bars
minimum1 in.
thickness of grout between masonry

units
and
between bars.
Minimum beam width = 2 (1.25 in.)

=
8.3.1
+ 2 (0.5in.) + 0.875in. + 2 (0.5in.)

:. OK
5.4 in. cin.7.5

13-49

8.3.5
A C 1 TITLExMDG 93 D 0662949 0509194 227
Example 13.1-9
TMS Shopping
Center
Shear
Design
of
a Reinforced CMU
Nonloadbearing Wall
Design the East Wall (Grid Line 3) of the TMS Shopping Center for shear from out-ofplane bending assuming Wall Construction OptionB. The wall was designed for flexure in
MDG Example 11.1-2.
The material and other load properties (see MDG Example 11.1-2) are:
CMU Strength
psi= 3,050
Also, j = 0.9
Mortar = Type N
in.
psi f, = 2,000
3.81
b = 32 in.
E, = 2.3 x 106 psi
n = 12.6
psf
Wind = 20
Assumed pinned at foundation and at 16 ft level (See Sketch)

and
Calculations
MDG Example 11.1-2 has established the load distributions
for wall elements Part 1 and
Part 2.
Part 2
Part 1
16' O"
Design For These

Wall Elements
13-50

A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93 W Obb2949 0509395 L b 3
and
Code Reference
Calculations
Shear and Moment Diapams

Part 1 & Part 2
Part 2
Wind on Wall
Wind on Door
Wind on Wall
above Door Lintel
(Width = 2.67)
i-
Wall Element Part 2 will be examined for shear first.

Maximum shear from above diagrams occurs just below the roof support reaction
i.e.
V = (163 plf)(2.67 ft)
+ (312.5 lb) + (500 lb) = 1,250 lb
13-51

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0509196 O T T D

and
Calculations
According to Code 7.5.5, the shear at d/2 from face of support could be used provided
support reaction is in compression; however, the amount of change is small and therefore
neglected.
The shear stress is found from Code Eq. (7-3):
fv =
7.5.2.1
bjd
From MDG Example 11.1-2

fv
b = 32in.,
j = 0.90,
d = 3.81 in.
1,250 lb
= 11.4 psi
(32 in.)(0.9)(3.81 in.)
The allowable shear, F,, is:
1.33E
1.334m
7.5.2.2
1.33(50 psi)
=
59.5 psi < 1.33(50.0 psi)
66.5 psi
For this problem 11.4 psi < 59.5 psi, thus shear is okay and no special shear reinforcing is
needed. Typically out-of-plane shear for walls is small enough that no shear reinforcing is
required. Since the actual shear stress is less than the Code allowable shear stress for Wall
Element Part 2 (the critical element), Wall Element Part 1 need not be checked.
A sliding shear failure at the base of the wall may occur if there is insufficient bond between
the floor slab and the wall. See MDG Chapter 14 for connections of walls to foundations
design.
13-52

A C 1 TITLEtMDG 93
Example 13.1-10
Obb2949 0509197 T3b
ShearDesignfora
Doubly Reinforced
Masonry Lintel
The shear design is to be performed on the doubly reinforced masonry lintel beam in MDG
Example 11.3-2. The lintel dimensions and properties are:
Type N Mortar
= 1,500 psi
E,,, = 1.8 x 106 psi
fm
CMU Strength = 2,000 psi
fg
Eg = 1.8 x 106 psi
d = 29 in., b = 7.63 in.

wI = 792 plf
= 3,600 psi
+ W, = 4,670 plf
(Distributed over central 40.4 in.)
j = 0.915
,A,
J'llo:rngth
Bearing
,,
Of
Plate
\\
lb I(40.5 in. I 12 in.lft 1 = 4.670 plf
7&
$-01
'5,
""""".""""
10"
+4X
7.63" = 40.5"
88 psf (9') = 792 plf
Lintel
-
10.33'
and
Calculations
1.
Discussion
Reference
The shear force at theface of reaction is:
where a
length of load w2
13-53

Code
A C 1 T I T L E * N D G 93
0662949 0509398 972
Code Reference
V = 792 plf(10.33 fi)
4,670 plf(
+
12,000 lb
According to Code 7.5.5, find shear @ d/2 fromface:
V
3.
l2 hlfi
2.
40.5 in.
"P)
12,000 lb - 792 plf :2)( -
11,043 lb
FromCode Q. (7-3), findthe shear stress:
fv
fv
fv
4.
bjd
7.5.2.1
11,043 lb
(7.63 in.)(O.915) (29 h)
= 54.5 psi
The maximum shear stress for no shear reinforcement is:
F,, = 1 . O E
50 psi
7.5.2.2
.: F,,= l.O\/m
= 38.7 psi
54.5 psi > 38.7 psi :. N.G.
5.
Check to see if F, is exceededwhen shear reinforcement isused:

150 psi
F,,= 3.0@',,,
F,,= 3 . 0 4 m
7.5.2.3
116 psi > 54.5 psi
13-54

:. OK
93
0662949 0509399 8 0 9 H
Reference
Code
Thus, shear reinforcement is permissible.

6.
Design shear reinforcement:

Code 7.5.3 requires that all of shear be carried by reinforcement, according to:
A,
vs
-
(7-10)
EQ.
Fs (i
7.2.1.1
The maximum F, = 24,000 psi

thus,
if S = 16 in. A, = 0.25 in2

if S = 24 in. A, = 0.38 in.2
if S = 8 in.
Use 1 - #4 bar @ 8 in.
O.C.
A , = 0.13 i n 2
Use 1 - #4 each cell
for vertical shear reinforcing. Check maximum spacing of d/2
< 48 in.
7.5.3.1
7.
Av
Code 7.5.3.2 requires be provided perpendicular to shear reinforcement.
3
13-55

93 D Ob62949 0509200 350

Code Reference
If this Code criteriais assumed to apply to designed flexural steel,then 2 - #6 are sufficient.
If this Code criteria is assumedto be additional steel (above and beyondthe design flexural
steel) then one way to satisfy this situation is to use joint reinforcement in mortar joints.
If place in both joints
i&*
2
0.m h
per joint
Place one standard truss joint reinforcement in mortar joint near beam midheight.
Each joint effective A, = 0.048 in.2 per joint
b = 7.63 in.
Face shell thickness = 1.25 in.
29 "
Shear reinforcing = #4 = 0.5 in.

Flexural reinforcing
A, = 2 #6
I'
A,' = 2 #7
"
Minimum beam width required

= 2 (minimumcoverrequired;orthickness
thickness)
2 (diameter of #7 bar, 0.875)
of groutrequiredplus
face shell
1 (1 in. cleardistancebetween
+ 1 (diameter of #4 stirrup)
+ 2 (0.875in.) + 1 (1 in.) + (0.5 in.) = 6.75in.
longitudinal bar)
= 2 (1.75in.)
13-56

< 7.63in.
.-. OK
A TCI1T L E l k f l D G
93
0662749 0 5 0 9 2 0 1 2 7 7

Reference
Check development of shear reinforcement

1, = 0.0015 dd;, = 0.0015 (0.5) (24,000) = 18 in.
Code
8.5.6
8.5.2
For standard hook in tension an equivalent embedment length

8.5.5.2
= 11.25db = 5.6 in.
A singleleg stirrup canbeanchored

i
by providingastandardhookplus
an effective embedment of 0.51,

0.51, = 9 in. < 14.5 in. - 3 in. = 11.5 in. :. OK
13-57

8.5.6.1
A C 1 TITLE*NDG
Example 13.2-1
93
Obb2949 0509202 L23
TMS ShoppingCenter
- UnreinforcedShearWallDesign
Design one of the piers in the perforated shear wall elements of the TMS Shopping Center,
located on Grid Line 3. between Grid Lines A and C. Assume Wall Construction Option
A (unreinforced concrete masonry). The analysis shown inMDG Example 9.3-12 indicates
that pier 1is subjected to a shear load fromthe diaphragm of 2.66 kips, applied at the mean
roof height of 16 ft.
Control Joints
\
I
17'"''
13,300 l b
17'""
36'
16/rl/83
14.7'
Code Reference
The loading of pier 1 isshownbelow.
It is
2.66 kips
assumed that there is no gravity roof load applied
to this wall pier.
TV
M
Assume that 12in.,hollow,faceshell
CMU's are used with a weight of 46.5 psf. See
MDG Appendix A for unit and wall properties

tables.
13-58

bedded
93
0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0509203 ObT

(2.66 kip~)(l6fi)
Reference
Code
42.6 &-kips
Check Normal Stresses:

Assuming face shell bedding (t = 1.5 in. from MDG Appendix A)
:. A,
2 x (14.7 ft x 12 h./ft) x 1.5 in. = 529 h?
Max. tensile stress
P +M
-S
An
= -
( 12.3 x lo3) lb
529
=
in?
-23.3 psi + 32.9psi
(42.6 x lo3 x 12)in.-lb

in?15,600
=
9.6psi
Tension stresses arenot allowed for unreinforced wallelements subjected to in-plane forces
since
values
in
to out-of-plane
loading.
Code Table 6.3.1.1 apply

only
Try 12 in. solid grouted CMUs (Assume 100 pcf)
A,
S =
(11.63 in.)(14.7 ft x 12 in./ft) = 2,050

(11.63 h.) X (14.7 ft
6
12 h./fQ2
13-59

60y300
in.2
in:
6.3.1.1
A C 1 TITLE*:MDG 73 W Obb2747 0507204 TTb

and
Calculations
Max. tensile stress
=
=
:.
25,600 lb
+ (42.6 x lo3 x 12) in.-lb
2,050 in?
60,300 h3
- 12.5psi + 8.49psi = - 4.0 psi
No net tensile stresses.
Since the compressive stresses are so low the unity equation:

c
6.3.1
is OK by inspection.
Shear Stress
VQ
-
6.5.1
Ibw
for rectangular sections f v
3 v
= --
An
.:
fv
-[
3 2.66 x lo3 lb
2,050 in?
psi
The allowable shear stress (Fv) is the least of:
b)
120 psi
C)
N V
0.45 -
An
Assume fm = 1,000 psi from prism testing of 1,300 psi units and Type N mortar.
Use f, = 1,000 psi
13-60

6.5.2
A C 1T I T L E + f l D G
93
0662949 0509205 932

Code Reference
c)
..
F, = 60 psi(solid
..
F, = 47.4 psi governs and ismuch greaterthan f v = 1.95 psi
F, = 60 psi
grouted units)
+ 0.45(12.5
psi) = 65.6 psi
.: OK
Use grouted 12 in. CMU's with a minimum compressive strength of 1,300 psi and Type N
Mortar.
13-61

A C 1 TITLE*UDG 93
Example 13.2-2
Obb2949 0509206 8 7 9
TMS ShoppingCenter
- ReinforcedShearWallDesign
For the TMS Shopping Center, design the shear wall on Grid Line C for Seismic Zone 1.
Use Wall Construction A or B as required.
8 in. Hollow CMU - 2,000 psi

fm
Type S Mortar
= 1,800 psi
Grade 60 Steel
From MDG Example 9.2-1 the seismic analysis gives V, = 11,500lb at roof diaphragm
location. The moment at wall base is V& = 11,500 lb (16 ft) = 184,000 ft-lb.
Check Wall Construction Option A - Unreinforced Concrete Block
From MDG 9.1.1.1, the joist reactions on the wall are 2,000 lb dead load and 3,830 lb live
load, except for the joist next to Grid 2 where half these values apply.
The left beam reaction (look fromthe outside) is 4,690 lb dead load and 8,980 lb live load.
The right beam reaction is 4,260 lb dead load and 8,150 lb live load. Using the self weight
of the wall at 46.3 psf and uniformally distributing the loads (by inspection a reasonable
assumption) the dead load is:
D.L. = 4,690 lb + 3
D.L = 31.7 kips
x 2,000
lb + 1,OOO lb
4,260 lb + 46.3 psf x 16 ft x 21.3 ft
And the live load is:
L.L.
L.L.
8,890 lb + 3 x 3,830 lb + 1,915 lb + 8,150 lb
= 30.5
kips
13-62

A C 1 TITLE*:MDG 93
Ob62949 0509207 705

~~
Code Reference
At base of wall
Mc
f=-f-I
5.3.1
The Code requires 90% of dead load, thus:
0.9 x 31.7 kip = 28.5 kip
The net bedded area and moment of intertia are:

Net &&d
areu = (2 x 1.25 in.)(21.3 ft)(l2 in./ft)
Moment of Inertia
f = -28,500
640
ft
lb
ia2
-44.5 psi
+ 36.4 psi
bd3 -
640 i a 2
2.5 h(256 h)3= 3,500,000
12
h4
12
( ")
184,OOO fi-lb (12 h./ft)256
3,500,000 h4
80.9 psi
fc = -125.4 psi
- 125-4
No tension for in plane loadingis allowed for unreinforced shear walls in Code.
Thus design for Wall Construction Option B - Reinforced Concrete Masonry.
=
psi)
1.33(600
= 798 psi
13-63

7.3.1.2
A C 1 TITLExMDG 93 M 0bb2949 0509208 b4L

Code Reference
1.25"
Assume
steel
is
I
.-
I , = 21.3' = 256"
P
located in the
last
cellofthewall
I '
on
bothends.Consider
only
tension
steel.
d = 252"
I-
-I
Apply
iterative
method
given
in
MDG 122.2.2
IC
#1
Load
Case
.9D
+E
5.3.1
M = 184 ft-kips
-2 - A
= 28.5 kips
= 0.17
d = 252 in.
M = 0.31
-
->"
Pd
Pd
Assume a = 75 in.
13-64

Thus Region 3 applies
93
0bb2949 0509209 5BB
Discussion
Calculations and
M,,= P(
Code Reference
MDG
a)
m.12.2-15
/12 in./ft
Mp = 28.5 kips
As =
M - Mp
F,(d - a)
As
(184 fi-kips - 126 ft-kips)( 12 in./ft)

24 ksi x 1.33 x (252 in. - 75 in.)
MDG
A, = 0.12 in?
(small
126 ft-kips
W.12.2-16
as expected)
MDG Eq. 12.2-17
c=
(28.5 kips
0.12 in? x 24 ksi x 1.33) x 16.1

24 ksi x 1.33 x 2.5 in.
6.52 in.
MDG Eq. 12.2-18

System obviously will not converge (too close to Region 2)
a r
311 +
L
n >
Tl
MDG
m.12.2-19
4
.
252 in.
2S.9 in.
13-65

A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 93
O b b 2 9 Y 9 0509210 2 T T

Code Reference
CaIcuIations and Discussion
MDG
(252 in.)'
a = x0.666 3
- 2(28.5
W.12.2-20
Itips ~0.492x252 in. + 184 ft-kips X 12 h./ft)

x2.5
ksi x4/3
in.
a = 47.3 in.
Since 3a = 3(47.3 in.) = 141.9 in. < d , then steel area is:
MDG Eq. 12.2-21
A, =
F,
3 x 0.666 ksi x 4/3 x 47.3 in. x 2.5 in.
2
A, = *
24 ksi x 4/3
A,
= 4.03
- 28.5 kips-
in?
This is more steel area than required without axial load. Thus, neglect axial load.
Assume (1) #5
P =
A, = 0.31 in.2
0.31 h*
= o.Ooo49
2.5 in. x 252 in.
np
0.0079
i(0.0(n9)2 + 2(0.0079) - 0.0079 = 0.12
13-66

A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 93 W 0662947 05092LL L 3 b W
and
Code Reference
Calculations
i = (1 -
y)
= 0.96
Mt = A,FJd
Mt = 0.31 i a 2
24 ksi
Mt = 199 ft-kip
252 in.
12 in./ft
x 4/3 x 0.96 x
184 ft-kips
2.
OK
bd2
M,,,
= -kjFb
2
M,,,= 2.5 in.
x 252
x o.12 x o,96 x 0.666 ksi x 4/3
M,,,
= 677 ft-kips > 184 ft-kips
12 h./&
:. OK
Use (1) #5 at the end of each wall

Note: Since this wall is key to the stability of the entire structure for lateral loads, a good
design would be (2) #5 at each end, and grout the wall solid, the cost increase will
be justified by performance.
SHEAR
For the shear wall the bedded thickness
is
the face
shell
thickness
2(1.25 in.) = 2.5 in.
13-67

A.4.9.1
A C 1 TITLE+MDG 93
Obb29Y9 0509232 072 W
Example 13.2-2Cont'd.
and
Calculations
Computing the actual shear stress:
Eq. (7.3)
fv
fv
bid
11,500 lb
2.5 in. x 0.97 x 252 in.
18.8 psi
Compare actual shear to Code allowable shear
- 184 ft-kips
"
Vd
12 h./ft
11.5 kips x 252 in.
Fv = '[4
3
Fv =
S
13 [4
o.76
(31E
Eq. (7.5)
- (0.76)]-4
4
[80 - 45 x 0.761 x 3
F,, f y
x
=
4
-
= 64
psi
61 psi
No shear reinforcement
required
Load Case #2
D + L + E
5.3.1
M = 184 ft-kips
P = 62.2 kips
- - A
3
d = 252 in.
13-68

0.17
AC1
TITLExIDG 93 m Obb2949 0509233 T09 m

and
Calculations
Reference
M = 0.14 2 - A
Pd
:.
<(L
- I,
<(l
3d
-.)
0.17
256 in.
- 0.492 = 0.169
3 x 252 in.
Region #1 Applies
Use face shells only (canservative)

2.5 h. X (256 h)2
M,,,
= ...
x 0.888 h i
62.2 kips x 256 in.

6
12 in./ft
Mm= 1,800 fi-kips > 184 fi-kip
:. OK
13-69

Code
Example 13.2-3 DPC Gymnasium
0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0509214 945
- ShearWallDesign
Design the East Wall of the DPC Gymnasium on Grid Line 2 for Seismic
Zone 2. The East
Wall is subject to a seismic in-plane shear load of 28,400 lb from MDG Example9.2-2. Use
Wall Construction Option B, unreinforced composite wall.
fg
= 5,100 psi
Eg = 2.55 x 106 psi

EBIoac
= 2.08 x 106 psi
EM = 2.40 x 106 psi
= 1,500 psi
rm)b,.j&
= 2,400 psi
The concrete block wythe is ungrouted.
and
Calculations
Average Wall Height
24.67 ft + 30 ft
2
Wall Weight = Concrete Masonry
Wall Weight
= 40
27.3 ft
+ Clay Masonry + Grout
psf + 36.25 psf + 23.33 psf = 99.6 psf
Check to see if wall is subject to in-plane flexural tension:

Overturning Moment = 28.4 kips (27.3 ft) = 776 ft-kips = 9,320 in.-kips
For nonloadbearing wall, P is due only to the dead weight
P = (99.6 psg(24.67 ft)
2,460 plf (using conservative minimum height)
The contribution of the wall flanges willbe neglected in this

problem.
Transform
12
a
in. wall
length
equivalent
to
concrete
5.13.1.2
block
13-70

A C 1 TITLElrMDG 93
Ob62949 0509235 881

Reference
Actual :
Code
Transformed:
3.63'
Mal Stress, fa = P --
2,460 lb
= 22.3 p i
(4.18 in. + 2.5 in. + 2.5 in.)
(12 in.)
Bending Stress due to overturning in-plane moments:
fb =
(9,320 in.-kip)(6) (1,o00 lb/kip)

(4.18 in. + 2.5 in. + 2.5 in.)
(64
(144 in./ft)
f b = 10.3 psi
Walls subjected to flexural tension mustbe reinforced and designed for shear according to
Code 7.5.2
:.
Wall is not subject to flexuraltension;
22.3 psi - 10.3 psi = 12.0 psi compression
unreinforced shear wall, Code Chapter 6.
13-71

thus, check the walldesign
as an
A C 1 TITLE*NDG
93
Obb29Y9 0 5 0 9 2 1 b 718

and
Code Reference
Calculations
Consider shear stresses:

Note that a combined shear due to direct in-plane shear plus shear due to twisting
exists as illustrated by the eccentricity distance, e, at the beginning of the problem.
Therefore, a torsion stress, T, exists and can be computed from:
where c is the distance from the centerof gravity to location of torsion stress, T is the
torsional moment, and J is the polar moment of inertia of the cross section. This
torsion stress r can be computed and added to the direct shear stress. However, this
torsional shear stress is usually small. For this problem, if the direct shear stress is
close to the allowable, then the torsional shear stress would need to be computed,
otherwise it can be neglected.
Calculate direct shear stress:
VQ
Ib
- 3V -
6.5
3V
2Lb
3 (28,400lb)
"
"
"
fv-
fv
&,
2A
2 (64 ft)(12 in./ft) (4.18 in. + 2.5 in. + 2.5 in.)

6.0 psi in the CMU
& , = 6 p s i 2*4 x 'O6 Psi

2.08 x 106 psi
fv
= 6
x 'O6
2.08
"1
lo6 psi
6.9 psi
7.4 psi in grout
13-72

Eq. (6.7)
A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 93 W Ob62949 0509217 b5Y

~~
Code Reference
Checking the CMU the allowable shear stress, F,, is the least of
(a)
Fv
1.56
1.54-
6.5.2
58 psi
(Note: could split shear by the proportional amount carried by each wythe
and useallowable
for each. Since stresses are small, the lower
fm
will
conservatively be used.)
(b)
F, = 120 psi
(c)
F"
2)
v + 0.45(
Use running bond and not solidly grouted, so v = 37 psi

thus,
0.45(:)
Fv =
V +
Fv
47.0 psi
(d) does
37 psi
not apply sinceunitslaidin
0.45(
2,460
(4.18 in. + 2.5
running bond
The allowable shear stress, F, = 1.33(47.0 psi) = 62.6 psi
f, < F, i.e.6.0psi
62.6psi
lb
in. + 2.5 in.)(12 in.)
5.3.2
.: OK
It is obvious that the shear in the brick and grout are OK

3.
Interface stresses dueto differential volumechanges:

Note that claybrick expansion coupled with concrete shrinkage may induce an
interface shear stress that should be checked. These differential displacements are
not part of this problem and are discuss elsewhere in this MDG (See Chapter 10).
13-73

93 M 0662949 0509218 590 M

4.
Code Reference
Interface shear stresses for multiwythewalls:

The ties across the interface between wythes must be capable
of taking the interface
shear stress, if this stress is deemed to be beyond the usual small amount. Code
5.8.1.2 provides for an allowable of 10 psi. In this case
the proportional amount of
shear carried across the interfaces does not need to be computed since the f v = 4.0
psi < 10 psi
5.
Ties
across
=$
already OK
the interface:
Code 5.8.1.1 requires wall ties across the grouted collar joint. Code 5.8.1.5 requires
at least one #9 gage wall ties per 2.67 ft2 of wall with a horizontal spacing S 36 in.
and vertical spacing S 24 in.
#9 gagewalltie(styles
Placea
manufacturer'scatalogs)
other than "2"wallties
can be selectedfrom
at 16 in. on center verticallyand
24 in. on center
horizontally. 2 wall ties are not acceptable for this wall as per Code 5.8.1.5.
6.
Check the unity equationfor the compressionside of the in-planeflexure:

Thischeckwill
beillustrated(eventhough
the stresses are smallandcould
be
ignored.)
From Code 6.3.1:
Eq. (6-1)
fa
= 22.3 psi (see above)
13-74

93
m 0662949 0509239 427 m
1
and
Calculations
Code Reference
140r
Eq. (6-4)
h.
Based on -.
r
r = 0.287t
r = 0.287(4.18 in.
+ 2.5in. + 2.5 in.)
= 2.63 in.
Use peak height as conservative slenderness:

h - (3O fi)(12 in*/ft)
2.63 r
in.
"
usingf,
136.9 > 99
= 1,500 psi
Thus,
Fa = 1 ( 1,5OO p i ) (
6.3.1
30 ft( 12 in./ft)
1.33(98 psi) = 130 psi
4
Fa =
5.3.2
Eq. (6-5)
(with the 1.33 factor from Code 5.3.2 since in-plane bending is due to seismic load)
Fb = 1.33( $)(1,500 psi)
Fb
665 psi
13-75

A C 1 T I T L E S H D G 9 3 D Obb2949 0509220 149

Code Reference
Unity Eq. :
Eq. (6-1)
thus, as stated previously, this check was not expected to be a problem, but is included for
illustrative purposes.
Since the shear wall is in Seismic Zone 2 both vertical and horizontal
steel must be provided. Provide vertical reinforcement of 0.2 in.2 (#4
reinforcing bar) at the two wall ends. Provide horizontal reinforcement
of 0.2 in.2 (#4 reinforcing bar)attop
and bottom of wall and
intermediate locations with maximum vertical spacing of 10 ft. Place

both vertical and horizontal reinforcement in grouted collar joint.
13-76

k3.8
A C 1 TITLE+flDG 93 W Obb2949 0509223 085
Example 13.2-4
RCJ Hotel Design of Unreinforced Masonry Shear Wall for In-Plane
Lateral Loads
Design the shear wall on Grid Line C between Grid Lines 1 and 2 using Wall Construction
Option A (Unreinforced)and
Use hollow concrete
Building Construction Option II.
masonry units. Seismic Zone 2.
Reference
Code
Consider 8 in. wall and design 1 floor wall section for different load combinations. For
unreinforced wall two critical parameters need to be checked:
1)
No tension is developed under minimum dead load and

maximum lateral load, i.e., load case of 0.9 D
2)
Compression stress attheotherend
+ E.
of the wall complies with theCode
allowables using the unity equation, i.e., load case D
+ L + ( E + W>.
The above two cases are considered below. Other cases may be checked.
Loads
Lateral loads are calculated using hand
33 kip-
calculations in MDG Example 9.2-3.

Gravity loads are given
in
Maximum shear
and
moment
MDG 9.1.3.
42 kip-
develop at
54 kips
__t
the base section since wall acts as a freestanding cantilever.
13-77

5.3.1
93 W 0662949 0509222 TIIL W
and
Calculations
Code Reference
For the lSt

floor wall section - assume ungrouted
D = 14,781 plf x 29.34 ft
+ 46.5 psf(8.83
ft x 29.34 ft) = 442,000 lb
L = 2,239 plf x 29.34 ft = 65,700 lb

Y = 146 kips
M = 17.2 kips (34.8 ft) + 33 kips (26.2 ft) + 42 kips (17.5 ft) + 54 kips (8.83 ft)
M = 599 ft-kips + 863.6 ft-kips + 735 ft-kips + 477 ft-kips = 2,680 ft-kips
Section Properties - Consider face shell bedding, face shell thickness = 1.25 in.
Net area, A,, = (1.25 in. x 2) (29.34 ft x 12 in./ft) = 880 in.2
Section modulus, S = (1.25 in. x 2) (29.34 ft x 12 in./ft)2/6 = 52,000 in.3

Normal Stresses
+E
Load Case 0.9 D
P = 0.9 x 442,000 lb
M = 2,675 ft-kips
f = - -
= -
398,000 lb
880
f -
An
f = -
= 398,000 lb
2,680 ft-kip
12,000 h-lb/ft-kip
52,000
ia2
452 psi
ia3
618 psi
- 1,070 psi and
166 psi
Tension develops- thus this 8 in. hollow concrete block wall mustbe reinforcedor modified.
13-78

A C 1 TITLE*PlDG
93
0662949 0509223 9 5 8

and
Calculations
Assume that 2.67 ft (2 block units) on each end of wall will be grouted.
2.67
2,67
I -
I ,= 29.34 = 352
Area
7.63 in.(32 in.)(2 in.) + 24 ft(l2 inJfQ(1.25 in. x 2)
1
(7.63 in.)(352
12
I = 17,500,000
S =
f =
1
-(5.125 in.)(24 ft
in4
398,000 lb
1310 in?
2,680 ft-kips
- 329.6 psi * 322 psi

- 652 psi and - 8 psi
Load Case D
12,000 in.-lb/ft-kiP
99,500 in.3
X
.: No Tension
+L +E
D = 442,000 lb
+ 65,700 lb = 508,000 lb
M = 2,680 ft-kips
13-79

1,210 in?
12 h ~ / f t ) ~
1C = 99,500 in?
f = -
in.)3
A C 1 T I T L E I M D G 93
m ObbZ949 0509224
894
and
Code Reference
Calculations
Use unity equation to determine required compressive strength of masonry

Eq. (6-1)
5.3.2
Fa = 0.25 f i m 1
-(&r]
Eq. (6-3)
For axial capacity buckling inthe out-of-plane direction controls - Ignore grouted ends for
F*
-F
Consider a 12 in. strip
Ix = 2[ l2
I*
A,
=
=
309
12
29.34
h) + 12 h(1.25 in.)(3.19 h)2
ia4
2(1.25 in.)(12 h) = 30 h
E -4
3-21
30 in?
[-
(8.83
140ftx x3.21
12 in.
F,, = 0.25 f i , 1
in,/ftr]
0.236 fi,,,
13-80

_____c(
A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
0bb2949 0509225 720

and
Calculations
M - 2,675ft-kips(12 in&) = 322 psi

99,500 in.3
fb'y-
Fb
:.
f',
6.3.1
0.33 f',
2,080psi
required
Shear Stress
V = 146 kips
fv =
VQ
fv =
146 kips[7.63 in. x 32 in. x 160 in. + 144 in. x 2 x 1.25 in. x 72 in.]
17,500,000 in?(2 x 1.25 in.)
fv =
146 kips(64,960 in.3)

(17,5OO,OOO in?)(2.5 in.)
fv
21.7 psi
Fv
(1.33)lSK
(1.33) 1.54-
(1.33)68.3 psi = 90.8 psi
or
5.3.2
F, = (1.33)120 psi = 160 psi

or
13-81

6.5.2
0662749 0509226 667

and
Calculations
F,,= 1.33(v
+ 0.45 -)
1.33[37 psi + 0.45 (339 psi)] = 1.33(185 psi) = 246 psi
Thus F, = 90.8psi > 21.7psi
:. OK
No shear reinforcement is required.

Provide vertical reinforcement of 0.2 in.2 (#4 reinforcing bar) at the
two ends of the wall. Provide horizontal reinforcement of 0.2 in.2 (#4
reinforcing bar) at top
andbottom ofwall.
Steel to beplacedin
concrete block wythe.
13-82

k3.8
93
Example 13.2-5
Obb2949 0 5 0 9 2 2 7 5 T 3
Shear Wall for In-Plane
1 and 2 for Seismic Zone 4 using
RCJ Hotel DesignofReinforcedMasonry

Lateral Loads
Design the shear wall on GridLine C betweenGridLines
Wall Construction Option B and Building Construction

Option I. Use Hollow Clay Masonry
Units.
Reference
Code
Loads, from MDG Table 9.1.3 to 9.1.5 and MDG Example 9.2-3
Shear
LL
D.L
Level Floor Height
Moment
(Table 2)
(Top of Wall)
(plf)
(Pif)
2,850
600
32
6,830
1,330
64
(kips)
(ft)
(Bottom of Wall)
(ft-kips)
9.67
309
928 9.67
1,800 10,80083
9.67
1,731
2,240 14,800
10.83 108
2,900
Geometry: Assume 6 in. brick wall; Type S mortar, grouted solid

1, = 29 ft - 8 in.
b = 7.5 in.
r,,,= 2,500 psi
344 in. (
assumed)
A = 0.17
"
n = 15.3
13-83

= 0.483 in.
93
0662949 0509228 4 3 T

~~
Code Reference
MIPd
Level
(0.9 D.L.
MIPd
+ E)
(D
+ L + E)
O. 14
o. 10
O. 18
O. 13
0.21
O. 16
0.26
o.20
(Approximate, neglectsweight ofwall
forone level)
Check shear for wall thickness assumption.
M values.
Assume j = 0.9, conservative for low Pd
The seismic shear is multiplied by 1.5
A.4.9.1
Eq. (7-3)
fv
bjd
M in allowable equations,
V is not multiplied by 1.5 for Vd
13-84

AC1
TITLE*NDG 9 3 m Obb27Y7 O509229 3 7 6 m

M -
Reference
Code
2,900 ft-kips X 1,200 h-lb/ft-kip = o.93

108,000 lb x 344 in.
Vd
F,,= 314
$1
E x 43
-4
1 [ 4 - (0.93)]
4
= [80 - 45 (0.93)] x 3
x
=
-4
3
= 73.3 psi
Eq. (7-5)
50.7 psi < 95.0 psi
Shear steel required, assume 24 in. O.C.horizontally.
Fv = 1 [ 4 - 0.931-4
X
:
Fv
[ 120
A,,
vs
F#
- 45
0.931
3
X
4
-
Eq. (7-8)
110 psi
104 psi
.+. OK
Eq. (7-10)
1.5 x 108,000 lb x 24 in.

Av = 24,000 psi x 1.33 x 344 in.
A,
0.35 h2
Use (2) #4 @ 24 in. O.C.
TheCoderequiresthatreinforcementin
the amountof
provided perpendicular to the shear reinforcement
13-85

A V
be
7.5.3.2
A C 1 TITLErMDG 93
Obb29Ll9 0509230 098

Code Reference
53 = 0.117 i a 2
This will be satisfied by the flexural reinforcement requirements and
A45
the minimum steel requirements for Seismic Zone 4.

Trim or tension reinforcement:
First floor
M = 0.26
-
Pd
= 395 kips
Try a = 103 in.
Mp = P(
i-
a)
kips(
'Wp =
395
As =
M - Mp
F,(d - a)
MDG Eq. 12.2-15
356 in. - 103 in. 112

2
MDG
in.m = 2,470 ft-kips
m.12.2-16
As = (2,900 fi-kips - 2,470 ft-kip~)(12 ialft)

24 ksi X 1.33 X (344h. - 103 h)
A, = 0.67
in?
MDG
m.12.2-17
13-86

M = 2,900 ft -kips
A C 1 TITLE*MDG
93
Obb2949 0509231 T 2 4

and
Calculations
MDG
a = (d(36.2
in.)2
m.12.2-18
2 x36.2 in. x344 in. - 36.2 in.) = 41.9 in.

3
2nditeration
395 kips(
M =
356
in*
- 41.9 in.)
12 in./%
4,480 fi-kips > M applied
System will not converge (too close to Region 2)
MDG
m.12.2-19
1
344 in.
a r
(3
[l
24 ksi/0.833
15.3
ksi]]
39.7 in.
MDG
a = 344
in. -
4[
Eq. 12.2-20
- 2(395 kips x0.483 x 344 in. +2,900 fi-kips x 12 in./ft)

3 x0.833 ksi x4/3 x5.5 in.
W2in2)
a = 35.5 in.-kips
13-87

Obb2947 0509232 960

and
Calculations
A,
Code Reference
Discussion
MDG Q. 12.2-21
- l]
A,
13
0.833 ksi x 4/3L

n x 35.5 i
n. x 5.5 in. - 395
15.3 x 0.833 ksii x 4/;1x

A,
-1.84
(3 344 iain.)
x 35.5
kips]
1
-11
h 2
This is negative steel area. Thus use minimum steel.
Thus use (2) #5 at each wall end. Similar calculations for the remainder of the wall.
Since the wallis
in Seismic Zone 4, provide total verticalplus
horizontalreinforcement
of at least 0.002 times the gross cross-
sectional area of wall. The minimum ineach direction shallnot be less

than 0.0007 times the gross cross-sectional area.
Vertical
+ horizontal steel = 0.002t(Zw)= 0.002(5.5 in.)(356 in.) = 3.92 in.2
Minimum Steel in either direction = 0.00O7t(Zw)= 1.37 in.2

Provide 5-#5 horizontally at 2 ft centers.
Provide 8-#5 vertically at 4 ft centers.
13-88

A.4.5
AC
T I1T L E * M D G
Example 13.2-6
Obb2949 0509233 8 T 7
93
RCJ Hotel Reinforced Masonry ShearWallDesign
Design the shear wall on Grid Line 2 between Grid Lines E and F using reinforced hollow
clay masonry (Wall Construction Option B) and Building Construction Option I. Seismic
Zone 4.
and
Calculations
Code Reference
Discussion
The critical lateral load case on this wall is seismic load.The wall geometry and loading are
obtained from MDG Fig. 9.1-10 and Table 2, MDG Example 9.2-4.
22'"'
61 kip?
(Cumulative)
125 k i E
(Cumulative)
136 k i E
(Cumulative)
Shear Wall
13-89

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
m 0662749 0509234 733
Reference Calculations
Code and Discussion
LOADS
Moment
Shear
61 kips
- 100 kips
- 125 kips
-
590 ft-kips
136 kips
I
4,240 ft-kips
Lateral:
Axial: Loads for this wall were not previously calculated in MDG 9.1.3.1.
Dead Load:
Roof
95 psf x 4 ft =
380 plf
Corridor
110 psf x 4 ft
440 plf
Wall:
70 psf x 9.67 ft = 677 plf

70 psf x 10.8 ft = 758 plf
Length for Corridors and Roof = 22 ft

Length for Wall
22 ft
Neglect Coupling Beams

13-90

+ 3 ft - 4 in. = 25.3 ft
93
Ob62949 0509235 b 7 T
and
Calculations
Live Load:
Roof
20
psf
x 4ft
80 plf
Floors 100 psf x 4 ft =
400plf
Roof
Live Load
(kips)
2.o
Cumulative Live Load

(kips)
2.0
4Ih
10.1
12.1
3'(1
10.1
2"d
10.1
Element
22.1
32.1
TRIM STEEL DESIGN

.9DL
+ E controls by inspection
5.3.1
1" Floor .9DL = .9 x 104.3kips = 93.9 kips
M = 4,240 ft-kips
13-91

A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 73
Obb2749 0509236 506

and
Calculations
(See MDG 12.2.2.2)
FirstEstimate:
P
Assume 6 Bars
Assume 8 in. Wall b = 7.5 in.
d = 264 in. - 18 in. = 246 in.
[('Th)
- 18 in.]
A =
246 in.
M - 4,240 &-kips X 12 h/ft
Pd
93.9 kips x 246 in.
"
2.2
0.463
2
3
--A
> 1"
:. Region 3 Applies
Step 1
Assume a = 20 in.
MF = P[+ -
.)
MDG
m.12.2-15
13-92

:-A)
93
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0509237 442

As =
A,
Mp
F,(d - a)
-
MDG
MDG
(93,900lb
h2
m.12.2-17
5.58 in? x 24O

, OO psi x 1.33) x 15.3 = 17.4 ia
24,000 psi x 1.33 x 7.5 in.
MDG
a =
a = 25.6
Code
m.12.2-16
(4,240 ft-kip - 876 ft-kip)X 12 h/ft =

24 ksi X 1.33 (246 ia - 20 h.)
t.=
c=
Reference
R. 12.2-18
in.
PdIteration
A, =
t.
U =
832 ft-kips
6.8 in?
17.8 in.
25.8 in.
:. OK
Check For Compression

d
246 in.
MDG Eq. 12.2-19
15.3
1
28.4 in. > a .-.Tension Controls
13-93
93

0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0509239 215
~ ~ _ _ _
A C 1 T I T L E * U D G 93 W Obb29Y9 0509238 389

and
Calculations
Use (6) #9 Bars A, = 6.0 in.2

Alternative method is to use the conservative unity equation:
1
Ja
Jb
+ -5
1.0
Fb
a'
Eq. (7-1)
Fa = 679 psi
[assume grouted solid]
= f
-(1.33)
',
2,500
(1.33)
1,110 psi
7.3.1.2
5.3.2
-47*4
+679
''i
1,110
0.89 e 1.0
:. OK
Check Tension Steel For Unity Equation

Estimate (8)#9
13-94

Ob62949 0509239 215

and
Code Reference
Calculations
d=264-24=240in.
= 8.0 h2
A,
np = 15.3 x
.O044 = .O68
/(.o68) + 2(.068)
- .O68
.306
j = .89
Mt = 8.0 x 24 x 4/3 x .89 x 240/12
=
4557 kip-ft
4240 kip-ft
2.
OK
Check Shear:
V = lSO(136 kips)
A.4.9.1
204 kips
V
f,, = bjd
7.5.2.1
204,000 lb
fv = (7.5 in.)(0.91)(246 in.) = 122 psi
M
-
7.5.2.3
Vd
F,, =
E -4
F,, S 35 psi(1.33)
50 psi (1.33)
66.5 psi
Eq. (7-6)
46.6 psi
Shear reinforcement must be provided

F,,
1SK
Max. F,,
1.33
100 psi
75 psi x 1.33
122 psi
100 psi
(Does not help to raise fJ

13-95

(.-.
N.G.)
Eq. (7-9)
5.3.2
A C 1 TITLE*NDG
93
0662749 0509240 T37

and
Calculations
Use 10 in. brick wall first floor then 8 in.
f,=bjdv -
204,000 lb
96.3 psi
100 psi
:.
OK
(9.5 in.)(0.91)(246in.)
A,
vs
Fsd
7.5.3
Use (2) #5 @ 24 in. O.C. horizontal.

Since wall is in Seismic Zone 4 provide total vertical plus horizontal
k4.5
reinforcement of at least 0.002 times the gross cross-sectional area of

wall. The minimumin each direction shall not be less than 0.0007
times the gross cross-sectional area.
Vertical
+ Horizontal Steel = O.O02t(Zw) = 0.002(7.5 in.)(22 ft x
12 in./ft) = 3.96 i n 2
Minimum steel in either direction = 0.0007~(2,,,)= 1.39 in.2

Provide 5-#5 horizontally at 24 in. O.C.
Provide 8-#5 vertically at 36 in. O.C.
The Code requires reinforcement perpendicular to provided shear

reinforcement in theamount
AV
of -.
3
7.5.3.2
This will be satisfied by the
computed flexural steel requirements and by the minimumwall

reinforcement required for Seismic Zone 4.
13-96

A C 1 TITLE*UDG 93
Obb2949 0509243 973
14
REINFORCEMENT AND CONNECTORS
14.1 GENERAL
Code Chapter 8, titled "Details of Reinforcement," Code 5.14, titled "Anchor Bolts Solidly
Grouted inMasonry,"
and Specifications Section 3, titled "Reinforcement and Metal
Accessories," address most of the issues in this chapter of the MDG.
14.1.1 Steel Reinforcement

Steel reinforcement for masonry consists of deformed reinforcing bars, deformed wire, or
welded wire fabric, completely embedded in the masonry.
Materialrequirementsfor
reinforcement are specified as detailed in Specs. 3.2.1.1. Those items are also discussed in
MDG 3.5, and will be briefly mentioned here for completeness.
Specs. 3.2 addresses material requirements for reinforcing bars, joint reinforcement, wire,
and welded wire fabric. Deformed reinforcing bars must conform to ASTM A 615, A 616,
A 617, or A 706 (billet, rail, axle, and low alloy respectively). Deformed wire must conform
to ASTM A 496, and deformed welded wire fabric must conform to ASTM A 497.
Typical uses of each type of reinforcement are shown in Figs. 14.1-1 through 14.1-3. Fig.
14.1-1 shows deformed reinforcing bars in a grouted masonry wall. Fig. 14.1-2 shows joint
14-1

93
Ob629990509292
BOT 9
reinforcement in bed joints of a concrete masonry wall.Fig. 14.1-3 shows welded wire fabric
in the topping of a floor slab connected to a masonrywall.
I
"
"
"
"
"
Fig. 14.1-1 Typical Application of Deformed Reinforcing Bars in Grouted Masonry Wall
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
...................................
Fig. 14.1-2 Typical Application of Bed Joint Reinforcement
14-2

Ob62747 0509243 74b
Welded Wire Fabric
Fig. 14.1-3 Typical Use of Welded Wire Fabric
14.1.2 Connectors
In Code 2.2, a connectoris defined as "a mechanical device for securing

two or more pieces,
parts, or members together, including anchors, wall ties, and fasteners." Anchors connect
wythes of masonry to intersecting masonry wythes or
other structural elements; wall ties
interconnect wythes of multiple-wythemasonry;and
fasteners connectnon-structural
elements to masonry.
Material requirements for connectors are detailed in Specs. 3.2.1.2.
Those items are also
discussed in MDG 3.5, and will be briefly mentioned here for completeness.
Connectors must conform to ASTM A 36 (plate, headed and bent bar anchors), ASTM A
325 (high-strength bolt anchors),ASTM A 366 (sheet steel anchors and ties), ASTM A 185
(weldedwirefabricties),ASTM
A 82 (plain wireties and anchors), or AST" A 167
(stainless steel sheet anchors and ties). Optional requirementsfor stainless steel connectors
14-3

A C 1 TITLE*MDG 93
0bb2949 05092LlLl 682 W
are given in ASTM A 167. Optional requirementsfor galvanized steel connectors are given
in ASTM A 641, ASTM A 153, or ASTM A 525 as appropriate.
Typical uses of each type of connector are shown in Figs. 14.1-4 through 14.1-6. Fig. 14.14(a) showshow dovetail anchors are used to connect masonry wall panels
to steel and
concrete columns; in Fig. 14.1-4(b) anchor bolts are used to connect structural elements of
floors and roofsto masonry walls;and Fig. 14.1-4(c) indicates howstrap connectors are used
to connect wythes of intersecting masonrywalls. Fig. 14.1-5 shows the use of adjustable ties
and wire tiesto interconnect masonry wythes. Fig. 14.1-6 gives
an example of fasteners used
to connect non-structural elements to masonry.
(a) Dovetail Anchors
(b) Anchor Bolts
(c) Strap Connectors
Fig. 14.1-4 Typical Anchors
14-4

A C 1 TITLE*MDG 93
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0509245 519 W
(a) Adjustable Ties
(b) Wire Ties
Fig. 14.1-5 'Qpical Wall Ties
Power
Actuated Fasteners
Holding Furring Strips
Fig. 14.1-6 Typical Fasteners
14.13 ConnectionsBetweenIntersectingWalls
According to Code 5.13.4.2(e),masonrywalls

support shallbeanchored
dependingupon one another for lateral
or bonded at locationswherethey
14-5

meet or intersect, using
A CT1I T L E * H D G
0662949 0509246 455
93
interlocking units, reinforcement,or connectors. One example of the use of connectors for
this application is shown in Fig. 14.1-4(c). Additional illustrations of these techniques
are
given in Code C. Fig. 5.13-2, Code C. Fig. 5.13-3, and Code C. Fig. 5.13-4.
14.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
14.2.1Requirementsfor
Steel Reinforcement
In general, steel reinforcement must

be Sufficiently strongto resist the forcesto which it will
be subjected; it must be sufficiently corrosion resistant
to last as long as the structure in
which it is used; and it must have enough embedment
at each end to transmit the forces
acting on it.
Inunreinforcedmasonrydesign(Code
Chapter 6), reinforcementisnotused
to resist
calculated tensile stresses from applied loads, but rather to control the effects
of movements
from temperature changes, shrinkage, and other effects.
In reinforced masonry design (Code Chapter
7), reinforcement resists calculated tensile
stresses and sometimes calculated compressive stresses from applied loads. For example,
flexural stresses in reinforcement caused
by wind forces actingperpendicular to the masonry
wall are limited to Code allowable values, the reinforcement area must not be significantly
reduced by corrosion; and the reinforcernent must
be firmly anchored,at each point, against
the stresses developed at that point.
14.2.1.1StrengthRequirementsforReinforcement
- The designer supplies
a sufficiently
large reinforcement area so that thetensile or compressive stress in the reinforcement does
not exceed the corresponding allowable values (Code 7.2.1).
14.2.1.2 Corrosion Resistance
and ProtectionRequirementsforReinforcement
- In the
context of the Code, the corrosion resistance and protection of reinforcing bars and welded
14-6

93 W Obb2949 O509247 391
wire fabric are provided for by ensuring that the reinforcement has sufficient cover
as
specified in Code 8.4. Joint reinforcement requires both corrosion resistant materials and
sufficient cover.
14.2.13
EmbedmentRequirementsforReinforcement
anchorageprimarilyform
- Weldedwire
fabric derivesits
the grip of thecrosswires.Deformedreinforcingbars
anchoredprimarily by interlock at the deformationsthemselves.
are
If the cover and the
distance between reinforcing bars are large, failure occurs by yielding and fracture of the
reinforcement itself, or by pullout of the reinforcing bar. If the cover to the reinforcing bar
or the spacing between adjacent bars is relatively small, failure can occurby splitting from
the reinforcement to the free surface, or by splitting from one bar to another. Code 8.2.1
prohibits the use of reinforcing bars larger than bar size #ll.
Code 8.5 specifies that at least the required embedment length be provided on each side of
each critical section. The required embedment length corresponds to a uniform allowable
bond stress of 160 psi.
By treating anchorage requirements for deformed reinforcing bars in terms of a required
development length, additional checks
are required for some specific situations. In addition
todesignagainst
bar-to-bar and bar-to-surfacesplitting,discussedpreviously,
another
significant check concernsthe required development lengthfor reinforcing bars terminating

at a simple support or point of inflection. At first glance, since the reinforcing bars stress
at the simple support is zero, no development length would apparentlybe required beyond
the simple support, regardless of the bar diameter. However, if the reinforcing bar stress
(and consequent reinforcing bar force) increases away from the simple support, at a rate
faster than that force can be resisted
by bond, the reinforcing bar will be insufficiently
anchored at the simple support, and additional embedment must be provided, either by a
standard hook or by extending the reinforcing bar past the simple support.
A code for a different material (14.2.1), which also uses the development length approach,
14-7

A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93
Obb2949 0509248 228
addresses this issue. The Code currently contains no provisions or recommendations. The
author suggests a check for this situation in MDG Example 14.2-3.
Code 8.5.3.2 requires that for flexural members that are part of a primary lateral load
resisting system, no less than 25% of the positive moment reinforcement is
extend into the support and anchored to develop the allowabletensilestress,
required to
F,. This
anchorage attempts to provide a ductile response in the event of overstress.

Code 8.5.3.3(b) requires that at least one third of the total reinforcement provided for
moment at a support be extended beyond the point of inflection a certain limiting distance
to provide for possible shifting of the moment diagram.
14.2.2 Design ofSteelReinforcement
Examples of design of reinforcement for strength and corrosion resistanceare given in the
MDG. Code 8.2 addresses limitations on sizesof reinforcing bars and joint reinforcement.
Code 8.3 covers placement limits for reinforcement.
143 CONNECTORS
143.1 Requirements for Connectors
In general, connectors must be sufficiently strong

to safely resistthe forces to which they will
be subjected; they must be sufficiently corrosion resistantto last as long as the structure in
which they are used; they must have sufficient anchorage

at each end to transmit the forces
acting on them; and they must
be sufficiently stiff so that the masonry they connect actually
behaves as assumed in design.
two wythes of a masonry cavity wall must have

an adequate
For example, ties connecting the
factor of safety against failure underthe loads imposedby wind or earthquake forces acting
14-8

93
0662949 0509249 L b 4 W
on the outer wythe; their area must not be significantly reduced by corrosion; they must
remain firmly attached to both wythes; and their stiffness must be consistent with that
assumed in computing the distribution of load between the wythes.Usually,
this last
requirement means that the ties, when loaded axially, must be rigid compared to the walls
when loaded out of plane. The Code requires that wythes of multiwythe wallsbe connected
using wire ties or cross wires of joint reinforcement. Code 5.8.1.5,5.8.2.2 specifies the
number and size of the ties.
143.1.1 Strength Requirements for Connectors - The Code assumes that connectors with
negligible shear stiffness (for example, dovetail anchors andwire ties) act primarily in tension
and compression rather thanshear. Connectors with significant shear stiffness (for example,
bolts) can act in shear aswell as tension or compression. The strength of a connector itself
is provided for by ensuring that theconnector hassufficient cross-sectional area toresist the
forces acting on it. This is accomplished either by specifymg maximum allowable loads on
connectors (Code 5.14), or by specifylng maximumspacing requirements (Specs. 3.3.3.5(b)).
Connectors acting in compression must have sufficient elastic buckling resistance. In the
case of wire ties, this is ensured by limits on maximum cavity width and spacing (Code
5.8.2.1(f)).
143.1.2
Corrosion Resistance and Protection Requirements for Connectors - The Code
requires that a connector either be of stainless steel (Specs. 3.2.1.3), or have a sufficient
thickness of corrosion-resistant galvanizing (Specs. 3.2.1.4). Embedded connectors must be
I
protected by a sufficient thickness of alkaline cementitious material (Specs. 3.3.3.5 (a)).
143.13 EmbedmentRequirements for Connectors - Headed connectors(for example,

bolts) transfer tensile forces by direct bearing against the surrounding mortar or grout.
Typical bolt heads have sufficient area to preclude local bearing failure of the surrounding
cementitious material. Headed connectorslocated far from a free edge and
loaded in
tension or shear eitherfail in the anchor itself, or by the breaking out of a roughly conical
14-9

Obb2949 0509250 9 8 b
volume of grouted masonry surroundingthe

anchor (Fig. 14.3-1). A headed connectors
tensile or shear capacity as governed by steel
failure depends on the connector steel
embedment depth anditscross-sectional
area; a headed connectors tensile or shear
capacity as governed by grout, mortar, or
unitfailure
depends on the embedment
depth of the connector, the tensile strength

material,
and
of the surrounding
proximity
of
the
the connector to other
connectors or to free surfaces.
Fig. 143-1
Connectors without heads (for example, flat anchors, bolts,

forces by frictional resistance between
Typical
Conical
Failure
Headed Anchor
of
or wall ties) transfer tensile
the connector and the surrounding cementitious
material,bond, and bearing. If the cover to the connector issmall and the connector
transfers sufficient force to the surrounding material, failure can also occur by transverse
splitting betweenthe connector andthe free surface. This type of failure is discussedfurther
in MDG 14.2.1.3 dealing with reinforcing bars.
The Code requires that embedment requirementsfor connectors be satisfied inthe following
ways: headed anchors, as shown in Code C. Fig. 5.14-1, must be embedded as specified in
Code 5.14; and walltiesmust
be embedded as specifiedinSpecs.
3.3.3.5. No specific
requirements apply to unbent anchors without heads.

143.1.4
StiffnessRequirements
for Connectors
- Althoughdesignistypicallymore
be sufficiently stiff
concerned with strength rather than stiffness, in general, connectors must
so that the masonry they connect actually behaves as assumed in design. As noted above,
connectors(with
the exception of bolts) are usuallyassumed
to transfer tensile and
compressiveforces only. The axialstiffness of mostconnectors is simplygivenby

14-10

the
~~
~~
A C 1 T I T L E t M D G 93 D 0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0 5 0 9 2 5 1 B12
product of their cross-sectionalarea and modulusof elasticity, divided by their unsupported

length. Even ties with small cross-sectional areas have a higher axial stiffness than the outof-plane stiffness of the masonry wythes they connect,and are therefore sufficiently stiff to
satisfy the general requirement given above.
However, adjustable ties, described in Code 5.8.22, are usually much more flexible than
straight ties. Their flemiility is due to the fact that they deform in flexureand shear, as well
as axially; also, adjustable ties have a gap between the two parts comprising them.
The
flexibility of adjustable ties is intended to be controlled by the maximum limitation (Code

5.8.2.2(c)) of 1-1/4 in. on misalignment of bed joints between wythes.
143.2 Design of' Connectors

Design procedures for connectors are illustrated in MDG examples 14.3-1 through 14.3-16.
REFERENCES
14.2.1
Building Code
Requirements
for
Reinforced
Concrete AC1 318-89 and
Commentary AC1 318R-89 (Revised 1992), American Concrete Institute, Detroit,

1992.
14.2.2
"BondandAnchorage
to Concrete," AC1 Committee 408, AmericanConcrete
Institute, 1988.
14.2.3
Cheema, T. S. and Klingner,R. E., 'Tensile AnchorageBehavior of Deformed

Reinforcement in Grouted Concrete Masonry," AC1 Journal, V. 82, No. 3, MayJune 1985, pp. 372-380.
14.2.4
Cheema, T. S. and Klingner, R. E., "Failure Criteria for Deformed Reinforcement

Anchored in Grouted Concrete Masonry," AC1 Journal, V. 82, No. 4, July-August
1985, PP. 434-442.
14.2.5
Cheema, T. S. andKlingner,
R. E., "Design Recommendations for Tensile
Anchorages of Deformed Reinforcement in Grouted Concrete Masonry,"

14-11

AC1
TITLE*NDG 93 m 0662949 0509252 759 M
Journal, V. 82, No. 5, September-October 1985, pp. 616-621.
14.2.6
Soric, Zorislav andTulin,Leonard
G., "BondStress/DeformationinPull-Out
Masonry Specimens, Journal of Structural Engineering,

ASCE, V. 115, No. 10,
October 1989, pp. 2588-2602.
14-12

A C 1T I T L E g M D G
93
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0509253 695
Example 14.2-1 TMS Shopping Center Design of a Straight Bar Anchorage
A straight bar anchorage is to be designed. To make this example relevant to the overall
building designs which are part of this MDG, the design will involve the anchorage of a #6
foundation dowel,embedded vertically intothe foundation of the TMS Shopping Center and
one of its walls. Use of this example does not implythat such a foundation-wall connection
wouldalwayshave
to bereinforced.MDGExamples14.3-3and14.3-4
deal with an
unreinforced connection.
and
Calculations
Use #6 dowel, Grade 60. The

requireddevelopmentlength
is
given by
Eq. (8-1)
ld
= (0.0015)(0.75 in.)(24,000 psi)
rd
= 27 in.
A s o check l d not less than 12 in. for bars. .: OK
14-13

8.5.2
A CT1I T L E t M D G
0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0509254 5 2 1
93
Example 14.2-2 TMS Shopping Center - Design of a Hooked Bar Anchorage
A hooked bar anchorage is to be designed. To make this example relevant to the overall
building designs which are part of this MDG, the design will involve the anchorage of a #6
foundation dowel, embedded vertically
into the foundation of the T M S Shopping Center and
one of its walls. Use of this example does not implythat such a foundation-wall connection
wouldalwayshave
to bereinforced.
MDG Examples 14.3-3 and 14.3-4 deal with an
unreinforced connection.
Code Reference
Use #6 dowel, Grade 60.
As previouslycomputed
in MDG Example 14.1-1,
the
total
required
embedmentlength is 27
in.
equivalent
The
e m b e d m el ennt g t h
provided by a standard
hook is equal to
8.5.5.2
B""*d
1, = 11.25db or
1, = 11.25(0.75 in.)
1, = 8.44 in.
The remaining required embedment length is therefore
27 in. - 8.44 in. = 18.6 in.

Use 19 in. additionalstraightembedmentmeasuredfrom
standard 90" hook.
14-14

start of
A C 1 TITLE*NDG 93
Example 14.2-3
0662949 0509255 4bA
T M S ShoppingCenter Design of Anchorage at aSimpleSupported

Lintel
An anchorage at a simple support is to be designed. The design will involve the anchorage
of the main reinforcement of the lintel

shown below. The lintel, designed in MDG Example
11.3-2, is above the 10 ft x 10 ft opening in the wall on Grid Line 3 of the TMS Shopping
Center. The lintel has bottom reinforcement consisting of 3-#6 bars. It has an allowable
flexural capacity of 46.4 ft-kips and a design shear of 11,976 lb.
As pointed out in the text of this chapter, the current Code does not require a check for
anchorage at a simple support. An approach to this problem, consistent with other codes
which use a development length approach, would be to calculate the ratio of (allowable
flexural capacity/ service-level shear), and compare itwith the required development length.
That procedure will be followed in this example. This check is not a
Code.However,it
is consistentwiththeCode's
part of the current
intent, andsimilarprovisionsmaybe
included in future editions of the Code.
and
Calculations
See Above
i#
6
bars
Shear
Allowable Flexural Capacity at Simple Support = 46.4 f t - kips
14-15

A C 1T I T L E S H D G
93 W 0662949 0509256 3 T 4 W

and
Calculations
For a #6 bar,
2, = 0.0O15dfls
Eq. (8-1)
2, = 0.0015(0.75 in.)(24,000 psi)

2, = 27 in.
The ratio of allowable flexural capacityto service level
shear gives the available development
length:
(46.4 ft-kips x 12 in./ft / 11.98kips)
46.5 in.
This exceeds the required development length of 27 in. and therefore no bar extension or
hook is needed at the simple support for this situation.
However for flexural elements that are part of primary
a
lateral load
resisting system, at least 25% of the positive moment reinforcement

mustextendinto
the support and be properlyanchored.
For this
example to satisfy this Code provision 1-#6 would extend beyond the
support adistance
of27
in. A shorter extensionispossible
standard hook is used.
14-16

if a
8.5.3.2
AC1
Example 143-1
TITLExMDG 73 m Obb2949 0507257 230
Design of AnchorBolts of a ShearWall to Roof Diaphragm
Bolts will be designed for the connection of a CMU nonloadbearing shearwall to metal roof
deck. The bolts transfer the wind-induced shears from the metal deck roof diaphragm to
the wall. Bolt heads will be anchored in a bond beam formed by grouting the top course
of the wall. The free endsof the bolts will project through a steel plate. Angles at theedge
of the roof deck will be welded to the plate. Assume wall length is 81.5 ft.
and
Calculations
Angles Welded To Plate

Metal
Assume total shear fromthe metal deck
Deck
is 26,600 lb.
Welded to Angle
Half of this shear is
transferred in from each side. Try 1/2in. diameter A 307 bolts. Assume bolt
threads will be outside shear plane, so
effective tensile stress area equals gross
area. Use the
B,
350
lesser of:
7
i-
Eq. (5-5)
Eq. (5-6)
Assume f', = 2,000 psi and Ab = 0.20 in2
B,,
350 J2,OOOpsix 0.20in2
B, = 1,565 lb
Assume bolt is in the center of the wall.
14-17

Example 143-1 Coned.

~
~~~
~~
Code Reference
However, the distance measured from the anchor bolt to the nearest
free surface (Ih) is given by:
7.63 - db
2
Zbe -
7.63 h - 0.5 in.
lk = 3.56 in.
Because 1, is less than 12 db, the value of B, in Code Eq. (5-5) must be
reduced by linear interpolation to zero at

an
B,, (reduced) = B,,
B,, (reduced)
B,, x
(Zk -
lacdistance of 1 in.:
1 in.)
12 db
(3.56 h - 1 in.)
12 x 0.5 in.
B,, (reduced) = 0.43 x B,,

B,, (reduced) = 0.43 x 1,565 lb = 668 lb (governs)
B,
0.12 x 0.20 in2 x 36,000 psi
B"
864 lb (does
not
govern)
14-18

5.14.2.2
73 M 0 b b 2 7 4 9 0509259 O03 M

~~~~
Code Reference
The governing loadper bolt canbe increased by one-third, because the

loading combination involves wind.
The allowable load per bolt is therefore 668 lb (1.33) = 891 lb/bolt
Number of bolts = (26,600 lb)/(891 Ib/bolt) = 30 bolts
Wall length is 81.5 ft; mace bolts at 32 in. alone toD of wall
14-19

5.3.2
Example 143-2
73 W 0662747 0507260 825 W
DPCGymnasium
- Design of Wall Ties in an UnreinforcedMulti-
wythe Noncomposite (Cavity) Masonry Wall

two wythes of the DPC Gymnasium for Wall
Wall ties are to be provided between the
Construction Option A. The ties will transfer out-of-plane loads between the two wythes.
Reference
multi-wythe
of Wythes
5.8.2.2
wallsshallbe
by
wall
connected
ties
consisting
either of #9 gage
or
24 "
Code
3/165.8.1.5
in. diameter wire.Cross
w i r e osjfo i n t
reinforcement may be
used
for
this
purpose.
1'24"1
Sheet metalties are not

permitted.
Use 3/16-in. wall ties meetingASTh4 A 82, with hot-dippedgalvanizingSpecs.
3.3.3.5
meeting ASTM A 153 Class B2 (1.50

oz/ft2).
3.2.1.4
Embedties at leastSpecs.
0.5 in. in mortar beds of each wythe.
Spacingrequirements:
One wall tie p e r 4.5 ft2 ofwall;maximum

spacing 36 in.horizontallyand
vertically.
5.8.2.2
5.8.1.5
Space ties at 24 in. each direction.
14-20

24 in.
A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
Example 14.33
DPC
Gymnasium
0 b 0b 52709b94l29 6 3
Design of Shear
Wall-Floor
Connection
for
Composite Nonloadbearing Wall

The connection to be designed for the walls on Grids 1 or 2 and the foundation or floor
slab. The Gymnasium is located in Seismic Zone 2. Assume Wall Construction Option C
composite wall with filled collar joint.
The connection will be designed for the in-plane
shear carried by the wall as a vertical diaphragm.
and
Calculations
The seismic shear carried by the wall on Grid Lines 1

or 2 is 22.6 kips from MDG Example 9.2-2. That
shear will be carried by the interface between the wall
and the foundation.
The allowable stress is the least of:

1-5
{Pnt
or
120 psi
or
v + 0.45
[2]
14-21

6.5.2
A C 1 TITLElrMDG 9 3
Obb2949
05092b2
bTB

and
Calculations
The allowablestresscan
be increased by 1/3forloadcombinationsinvolving5.3.2
earthquake.
In evaluating the last of these, conservatively assume N, = O (neglect
compressive axial stresses from self weight). Assume
solidgrouted,and
exceeding608psi,this
v therefore equals 37psi.

37 psivaluewill
the wall is not
For allvalues of
belowerthan
that givenby the
6.5.2(c)
other two equations, and will therefore govern.

The Coderequiresfullmortaring
of foundationcourses.BeginningSpecs.
2.3.3.3(d)2
with the first bedjoint above the foundation assume face shell bedding
only.
Using an 8 in. wall with face-shell bedding, plus the filled collar joint
(1 in.), plus the outer wythe (3.63 in.), the available area is:
(81.5 ft)(12 in./ft)(1.25 in.
+ 1.25 in. + 1 in. + 3.63in.)
= 6,973 in2
The maximum shear stress for a rectangular cross sectionis

fv
fv
V0
Eq. (6-7)
1.5 -
Therefore f v = 1.5 x (22,600 lb / 6,973 in.2) = 4.86 psi.
14-22

A C 1 T I T L E + M D G 73
m 0662749 0507263 534 m
Example 14.33 Contd

Code Reference
This is much less than 37 psi increased by 1/3, and the design is acceptable withoutdowels.
An analogous calculation would also have
to be carried out forthe out-of-plane loads onthe
wall due to wind in the east-west direction. Although no allowableshear values for this case
are specifically provided in the Code, the Code C recommends the shear allowable in Code
6.5.2 be used for limiting out-of-plane shear stress.
14-23

A C 1 T I T L E * N D G 93
Example 143-4
DPC
Gymnasium
O662949 0509264 470
Design of Shear
Wall-Floor
Connection
for
Unreinforced Multiwythe Noncomposite (Cavity) Wall

The connection to be designed is between the walls on Grids 1 or 2 and the foundation or
floor slab.
It is assumed that because the gymnasium is located within Seismic
Zone 2,
minimum reinforcement is required in the wall. However, for purposes of this calculation,
no dowels will be assumed between the floor andthe wall. The connection will be designed
for the in-plane seismicshear carried by the wall as a vertical diaphragm, andfor the out-ofplane shear due to wind loads. Assume Wall Construction
and
Option A.
Calculations
Design of this connection for in-plane shear is

very similar to that of MDG Example 14.3-3,
with one exception: in MDG Example 14.3-4,
Shear Is
Transferred On
Inside Face
Shell Only
Flashin
shear is transferred only on the inner face shell

of the inner wythe. The reason for this is that
. &.
the flashing actsas a bond breaker through the
.*
entire bottom bedjoint of the outer wythe, and
*.
9
Q
..
.C
"
.. .
.P
. -.
..
..
.
through the outer faceshell of the firstbed

joint up from the bottom in the inner wythe.
Desim for In-Plane Shear:

The governing shear, due to wind, is 22.6 kips per MDG Example 9.2-2.
14-24

Example 1 4 3 4 Contd.
I
Code Reference
That shear will be carried by the interface between the wall and the
foundation. Allowable stress, F,, is the least of:
6.5.2
or
120 psi
or
Y + 0.45
(21
The allowable stress can be increased by 1/3 for load combinations
5.3.2
involving seismic stress.
In evaluating the last of these, conservatively assume N,,= O (neglect

As in MDG Example
compressiveaxialstressesfromselfweight).
14.3-4, the governing (lowest) value of v will be 37 psi. Using an 8 in.

wall with face-shell bedding, the availablearea on the inside face shell
only is:
(64ft) x (12 in./ft) x (1 face) x (1.25 in.)
= 960 in.2
The maximum shear stress for a rectangular cross section is
&=x
- 1.5
V
-
Eq. (6-7)
14-25

AC1
TITLE*MDG 93 m Obb2949 0 5 0 9 2 b b 2 4 3 m

and
Calculations
Therefore fv = 1.5 x (22,600 lb / 960 in.2) = 35.3 psi

This is less than 37 psi increased by 1/3, and the design is acceptable without dowels.
Desiyn for Out-of-Plane Shear:
The critical point on these walls for out-of-plane wind is at the peak of the roof, where the
walls are 30 ft high.Windloadis
20 psf.Assuming
the wall to be simply supported
between the foundation and the roof diaphragm, the maximum base shear per foot of wall
length is therefore
Again assuming that only the inner face shell of the inner wythe is effective in resisting
shear, the available cross-sectional area per foot of wall length is therefore
(12 in.)
(1.25 in.)
15.0
in?
The corresponding shear stress is

1.5 x 300 lb
15 i a 2
TheCode does notspecificallyprovideallowable
20 psi
shear stress for out-of-planeforces.
However Code C recommends using the Code 6.5.2 values for both in-plane and out-ofplane shear. Thus the actual shear stress is again less than 37 psi increased by 1/3, and the
design is acceptable without dowels.
14-26

A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 9 3 9 O662949 0509267 1 8 T W
Example 143-5
TMS ShoppingCenter
- Joist ConnectiontoLoadbearingWall
A joist connection detail is to be designed for the wall on Grid Line A of the TMS Shopping
Center. The detail must transfer in-plane gravity loads, in-plane shear loads, and out-ofplane wind loads.
~~~
Code Reference

Two details are shown below:
T"i-
4.75"
.Steel Joist
'
"-
Alternate Detail
Preferred Detail
W recommenned unless bond beam

mechanically attached to wall by grout
andlor reinforcement
a) The
b)
gravity-load joist reaction is 4.54 kips per joist from MDG Example 9.2-1
The in-plane seismic shear on the walls on Grid Lines A and C is the same as on
Grid Lines 1 and 2 11.5 kips from MDG Example 9.2-2.
From MDG Example 9.1.12 the wall is 204.7 ft long, and the joist spacing is 5 ft, the
in-plane shear per joist is
11.5 kips x (5 ft / 204.7 ft) = 281 lb /joist
14-27

A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93 D 0662949 0509268 016

c)
Code Reference
The out-of-plane shear fromwindloadsisbasedonauniformpressureof20psf:

203 lb / joist x 5 ft spacing = 1,015 lb /joist
The connections between the joist and the wall must be designed for these loads, using the
same procedures demonstrated in MDG Example 14.3-1.
In-Plane Shear:
Shear per joist (each end) is 281 lb. Try 1/2-in. diameter A 307 bolts. Assume bolt threads
will be outside shear plane, so effective tensile stress area equals gross area. Use the least
Of:
350
7-
(Shear inMasonry)
Eq. (5-5)
or
B, = 0.12Abfy
(Shear
in Bolt)
Eq. (5-6)
Assume f L = 2,000 psi and Ab = 0.20 in.2

For Shear in Masonry:
Bv = 350 V2,OOO psi x 0.20

B,, = 1,565 lb/bolt
i
n
.
'
Checkallowableboltloadconsideringedgedistance.Thedistancemeasuredfrom
anchor bolt to the nearest free surface (Ih) is given by:
14-28

the
73
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0509267 T52
Example 143-5Contd.
and
Calculations
- 7.63 in. - db
la 2
- 7.63 h - 0.5 h.
la -
lk
Because lb, isless
3.56 in.
than 12 db(6 in.), the value of B, in Code Eq. (5-5)
5.14.2.2
must be reduced by linear interpolation to zero at an Zbc distance of 1
in.:
B, (reduced) = B,,
(Za -
1 in.)
12 db
(3.56 in. - 1 in.)
12 x 0.5 in.
B, (reduced)
B,, x
B,, (reduced)
0.43 x By
B, (reduced)
0.43 x 1,565 lb = 668 lb
For shear in bolts : B, = 0.12 x 0.20 i n 2 x 36,000 psi
B, = 864 lb (does not govern)

.m.
B, (reduced) = 668 lb governs
The governing allowable load per bolt (668 lb) can be increased by
one-third because the loading condition involves earthquake.
14-29

5.3.2
0662949 0509270 774
Example 143-5Contd.
and
Calculations
The allowable load per bolt is therefore
668 lb x (1.33) = 891 lb / bolt

The applied loadof 281 lb per bolt is less than this value, thus the design using one bolt per
joist is acceptable.
Out-of-Plane Shear:
The shear load on the end of the joist is 1,013 lb. This exceeds the allowable load per bolt
(computed above) of 891 lb. Try 3/4-in. diameter A 307 bolts. Assume bolt threads will be
outside shear plane, so effective tensile stress area equals gross area. Use the lesser of:
B,,
Eq. (5-5)
350
Assume f,
= 2,000 psi and A b = 0.44 in.2
B,,
350 J2,OOO psi x 0.44
in.
B,, = 1,910 lb
B,, = 0.12 x 0.44
B,,
in? x
1,900 lb
14-30

36,000 psi
(go==)
T I TAL C
E 1w M D G
93
Ob62949 0509273 6 0 0

and
Calculations
Code Reference
The distance measured from the anchor bolt to the nearest free surface (Ik) is given by:
- 7.63 in - db
la
- 7.63 in. - 0.5 in.

lb# 2
lh
3.56 in.
Because lb, is less than 12 db, the value of B, in Code Eq. (5-5) must be reduced by linear
interpolation to zero at an lb, distance of 1 in.:
By(reduced)
B,, x
By(reduced)
B,, x
(lk -
1)
12 db
(3.56 in. - 1 in.)

12 x 0.5 in
B,, (reduced) = 0.43 x Bv

B, (reduced)
0.43 x 1,910lb
820 lb (governs)
The governing allowable load per bolt (820 lb) can be increased by
5.3.2
one-third because the loading condition involves wind.

The allowable load per bolt is therefore
820 lb x (4/3) = 1,090 lb / bolt
The applied load of 1,015 lb per joist is less than this value, and the connection design is
acceptable.
14-31

AC1
Example 143-6
TITLEgMDG 73 m 0662749 0507272 547
RCJHotel
- ConnectionBetweenCanopyBeam
and Column
The connection between the canopy beam and columnof the RCJ Hotel is to be designed.
The canopy beams are 11.5 in. wide by 23.5 in. deep masonry beams; the column is 11.5 in.
square, and is constructed of 6 in. hollow clay units.
and
~~~~~~~
Calculations
A connection detail is shown below. The beam must be designed as described in thisMDG
Example 11.3-1.
Column Reinforcement = 4 #7 With #2 Ties
12" O.C. Hook Bars A t
Top Into Beams
---_
"
--
A Reinforcement
Beam
#7 Bars With 12"

Hooks TyDical
(2 Bars ?p.
. 4Bottom)
-"
11.5" Actual
12" Nominal
Plan View Canopy Beams
14-32

TITLE*RDG 93 m Ob62949 0509273 4 8 3 m
AC1
Example 143-6Contd.
and
Cade Reference
Calculations
Beam Reinforcement
Hook At End With
Perpendicular Beam
Column Ties
12
1Column
Vertical Reinforcement
12
l
lf-
.-.
m
12 Nominal
Section View Beam/Cohunn Connection
14-33

A C 1 TITLE*NDG 93
Example 143-7
m 0662949 0509274
3LT
Typical
Reinforcing
Details
Typical reinforcing details are to be provided for the following situations:

a)
wall corners
b)
between wythes - walls
pilasters
c)
/ columns
Code Reference
Wall Corners:
Unless wall intersections are designed to prevent shear transfer
between the intersecting walls (isolate the walls from each other), they
must be able to transfer shear, using one of the following means:
e
50% of the units at the interfaceshallinterlock
Wallsshallbe
Intersecting,reinforcedbondbeamsshall
toothed andjoined by steel connectors
The approach of Code 5.13.4.2(e)2is
be provided
illustrated inFig.14.1-4(c).
Note that the intersection mustbe laid in running bondso that at least
some of the units overlap. The steel connectors must be at least 1/4
in. thick by 1-1/2 in. wide by 28in. long, including 2 in. long,90" bends
at each end. The connectors must be spaced no more than 4 ft apart.
14-34

5.13.4.1 (b)
A CT1I T L E S f l D G
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0 5 0 9 2 7 5 256 D
93
Example 143-7Contd.
and
Calculations
Connections between Wythes:

Wythes of multi-wythe walls shall be connected by wall ties consisting
5.8.1.5
either of #9 gage or 3/16-in. diameter wire. Sheet metal ties are not
5.8.2.2
permitted.
Use #9 gagewirewalltiesmeeting
ASTM A 82,with hot-dipped
Specs. 3.3.3.5
galvanizing meeting ASTM A 153 Class B2 (1.50 oz/ft2). Embed ties

at least 0.5in.
in mortar beds of the outer face shell of the outer
wythe.
Pilasters / Columns:
As shown in sectionat left, ties are used

in pilasters and columns to resist shear
and to resist bucklingof the longitudinal
reinforcing
bars.
Ties
are more
effective if they are placeddirectlyin

contact with the longitudinal reinforcing
bars. Design of pilasters and columns is
discussed in detail in MDG Example

12.2-1.
14-35

5.9.1.6.(a)
A C 1T I T L E S f l D G
Example 143-8
m 0662949 0509276 L92
93
RCJ Hotel
to Exterior
Connection of Rigid
Roof
Diaphragm
Loadbearing Wall
A connection is to be designed between the roof diaphragm and the exterior loadbearing
wall of the RCJ Hotel. The connection must transfer gravity loads, in-planeshear, and outof-plane shear from the roofdiaphragm to the exteriorloadbearing wall. Differential
vertical movement must be accommodated between the interior and exterior wythes of the
loadbearing wall. Consider the wall on Grid Line F, for Wall Construction Option A and
Building Construction Option II.
Reference
~~
Roofing
Bellows
Insulation,
Code
~~
Metal Coping
2" Foam Gap
Treated
"
Precast Hollowcofe Planks
connection Detail
The detail is shown above. Refer to MDG Example 10.4.3
As in previous examples,the wall mustbe designed for gravity loads, in-planeshear and out14-36

A C 1 TITLEsMDG 9 3
m 0662949 0509277 O29 m
Example 143-8Contd.
and
Code Reference
Calculations
of-plane shear.
Gravity Load: The critical gravity load (DL
+ LL) is 1,725 lb/ft
from MDG Table
9.1.2.
The critical in-plane seismic shear is 14.5 kips, distributed over 29.3 ft. See MDG
Example 9.2-3.
The critical out-of-planeshear comes from the20 psf wind load, actingon a total wall
height of:
7.83 ft
in.0.67
0.17 in.
story
height
parapet
parapet extension
8.67 ft
Assuming the wall to be simply supported at the base and at a height of 7.83 ft, the
out-of-plane shear in lb/ft is then
20psf
(8.67ftI2 = gfj
2 x 7.83ft
Gravitv Load:
The connection resists gravity load by bearing. If one assumed all bearing to take place on
the inner face shell, the bearing stress is:
14-37

A C 1 T I T L E*M DG 9 3
0bb2949 0509278 Tb5
Reference
1,725 lb
1.25 in. x 12 in.
This will be less than the allowable
bearing
stress
Code
115psi
of Fh = 0.25 f;.
5.12.3
Although the Code does not provide for a minimum bearing length,
the author suggests that
more than the face shell thickness
of the masonry unit be used. A reasonable bearing length
would be 4 in.
In-Plane Shear:
The in-plane shear can either be transferred by shear stresses between the inner face shell
of the CMU and the plank, or by shear friction due to the tension developed in the dowel
bars. The shear stress is
14.5 kips x 1,0oO lbs/ kip
1.25in x 29.3ft x 12in/ft
33 psi
This is less than the governing shear allowable in the masonry of 37
6.5.2(c)
psi, which can be increased by one-third for this load cases involving
5.3.2
earthquake forces. The design will be acceptable for in-plane shear.

Out-of-Plane Shear:
The out-of-plane shear in lb/ft is less than the in-plane shear, and will not govern.
The desim is acceptable.
14-38

Example 143-9
Obb2949 0509279 9 T L
RCJ Hotel Connection of Floor DiaphragmtoNonloadbearing Wall
Design the connection between a floor diaphragm and a nonloadbearing wall in

Hotel. Use wall on Grid Line
the RCJ
2 between Grid Lines C and D on second floor using Wall
Construction Option B with Building Construction OptionI. The connection must transfer
shear loads only.
and
Calculations
A connection detail is shown below. Refer to MDG Example 9.2-4.
The connection is designed for in-plane seismicshear loads. Because the precast planksare
cambered, they cannot be attached directly to the wall. In-plane shear transfer is achieved
through the topping.
The total shear transferred through the floor to the wall is 139 kips, over a length of 29.3
14-39

Ob62949 0509280 bL3
Example 143-9Contd.
and
Calculations
ft from MDG Example 9.2-4 Table 2.

Because this shear must be transferred along 2 sides of the wall, through a topping 2 in.
thick, the corresponding shear stress is
139 kips x l,OOOlb/kip
2sides x 29.3ft/side x 12in/ft x 2in
Using
topping
f:= 3,000
psi,
the
allowable
98.7psi
shear stress of topping
per AC1 Code is (increased by 1/3 for seismic) 1.1
80.1 Psi
6.5.2(c)
5.3.2
The shear can be transferred by shear friction. Assuming a coefficient

of friction equal to unity, it is therefore necessary to generate a
clamping
stress
perpendicular
to
the
wall-floor
interface
98.7
ofpsi.
7.2.1.l(b)
Assuming the reinforcing steel has an allowable

stress
(againincreased
by one-third), thenecessary
24,000
of psi
5.3.2
steel percentage is
therefore
98.7 psi
24,OOOpsi x (4/3)
0.31 %
The required :steelarea per linear foot of topping is therefore:

% x 12in. x 2 in.
100
0.07 h2/ft
The required steel could be providedby welded wire fabricor by deformed reinforcing bars.
14-40

A C 1 TITLEJtMDG 93
Example 143-10
RCJHotel
Obb2949 0 5 0 9 2 8 1 5 5 T
- Connection of FloorDiaphragm to Interior badbearing
Wall
Design the connection between a floor diaphragm and an interior loadbearing wall in the
RCJ Hotel. Use Grid Line D between Grid Lines 1 and 2 (Wall Construction Option B
with Building Construction I). The connection must transfer gravity loads plus shear.
and
Calculations
The connection detail is shown below, refer to MDG Example 9.2-4:
@ 5'-O''
Each Cell Break
S5
Reinforcement As
Required
Out Planks To Set
Planks Set
On Face Shells
Grout Dams
Prior To Grouting
The connection is designed for gravity loads plus in-plane seismic shear. Because the precast
planks span perpendicular to the wall (in contrast to the previous example), they can bear
directly on the face shells.
14-41

A CT 1I T L E l r M D G
93
Obb2949 0 5 0 9 2 8 2 4 9 b
Example 143-10Coned.
~
~~
Code Reference
Desien for Gravitv Loads: (See

The maximum gravity load occurs
MDG Example 9.2-4, Table 2)

at the 2nd floor level, and is17.2kips/ft.
This load is
transferred from the planks to the wall by bearing of the planks on the face shells of the
units. For construction purposes, the planks should extend far enough over the edge of the
face shells so that they bear securely, but notso far that they obstruct the flow of grout into
the cells of the wall. The minimum grout space is given in Code Table 3.1.2.
The bearing stress on the face shells of the 6 in. wall units is
17.2 kips x l,OOOlb/kip
12 in x 2face shells x 1 in
This
bearing
stress
less
is
than the maximum

allowable
value
of
717 psi
0.25
5.12.3
Pm.If needed, some of the plank gravity load could be transferred by

bearing to the grout core of the wall.
In-Plane Shear: (See
MDG Example 9.2-4, Table 2)
The maximum in-plane shear transferred from the floor to the wall (2 sides) is 91 kips over
a length of 29.3 ft. This shear is transferred through the topping. The required amount of
steel required for transfer by shear friction is calculated as in MDG Example 14.3-9.
14-42

A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 93
Example 143-11
m 0662947 0509283
322
T M S ShoppingCenter Connection of SteelBeamBearingDetail
In the TMSShopping Center, design a bearing detail for theW 16 x 31 beam onGrid Lines
1 and B.
and
Calculations
The bearing detail is shown below:
Plate
x S" x 8"
\
Plate, f " x 4" x 12"
With 33"@x 4" Headed Stud
Flush With Top Of Grout
As in previous examples, the wall must be designed for gravity loads, in-plane shear, and
out-of-plane shear. Bearing under the plate must also be checked. These conditions are
described in more detail below. Use f,' = 2,000 psi.
14-43

A C 1 TITLEMMDG 9 3
Obb2949 0509284 2b9
Example 143-11Contd.
and
Calculations
GravityLoads:(SeeMDGExample
9.2-1)
The masonry bond beam must be designed for
the vertical reaction from the W 16 x 31.
The governing reaction is 15.8 kips.

First check bearing stress directly under the plate:
15.800 lb
5 x 8
in.
395 psi
This bearing stressis less than0.25 f L. If the stress distributionunder
5.12.3
the bearing plate is conservatively assumed as triangular rather than

uniform, the maximum bearing stress would double, to 788 psi. This
stress would require that fi be increased to 3,150 psi.
The bearing stress in the hollow wall under the the bond beam would
also need to be evaluated. See MDG Example 9.3-2.
Other Loads:
If in- or out-of-plane shears are present, they would be designed for using the techniques
illustrated in MDG Example 14.3-5.
14-44

AC1 TITLE*NDG 73 Obb27Y7 0507285 IT5
Example 143-12
TMS ShoppingCenter
- Roof DiaphragmConnection to Shear Wall
In the TMS Shopping Center, design the connection between the roof diaphragm and the
shear wall on Grid Line 2. The connection must transfer lateral loads from the roof to the
wall, but will not transfer vertical load.
and
Calculations
The connection detail is shown. The "butterfly plate," as given in detail at the bottom of
the figure, allows vertical flexibility.
The lateral tie must be designed for the in-plane shear transmitted to the wall.
In-Plane DiaDhraem Shear:
The total shear is 26.6 kips from MDG Example 9.2-1. Half comes from each side of the
wall.
The wall is 82 ft long. The shear per ft is therefore
1-1/2 in. x 22 gage metal deck with nominal fastening will be satisfactory for transferring
shear to open-web joists.
14-45

93 D 0bb2949 0509286 031 D

and
Calculations
Bond Beam With
2 4 5 Continuous
Open W e b S t e e l
$\
Detail Of "Butterfly
Plate"
14-46

A C 1 TITLEvMDG 9 3
Obb29q9 0509287 T 7 8
and
Calculations
Discussion
Reference
Code
Butterflv Plates:
Try 1/8-in. butterfly plates at 4 ft. Plate shear (horizontal) is
4 ft x 162plf = 648 lb
Dimensions of the legs of butterfly plate must be checked for horizontal shear and flexure.
14-47

A C 1 TITLEJMDG 9 3
Example 143-13
RCJHotel
0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0509288 904
- Connection of ExteriorNonloadbearingWall
to Exterior
Loadbearing Wall
The stair tower wall (Grid Line2) between Grid LineF and G is to be connected to the rest
of the RCJ Hotel through Grid Line F. Use Wall Construction Option B with Building
Construction Option I. Drag struts will provide the connection
at each floor level. The
figure below shows the overallarrangement of the stair tower with respectto the rest of the
RCJ Hotel. Story shears in the stair tower are (from top to bottom) 6, 37,60, and 52 kips
from MDG Example 9.2-4, Table 2. The drag struts must be designed for these forces.
Grid Line 2
""_
Grid Line F
Elevation
Plan
Code Reference
Shears are produced by the lateral forces transmitted to the tower at each floor level. For
purposes of this example, it is conservatively assumed that all the lateral force transmitted
to the tower at each level must be transmitted throughthe drag strut. The drag strut forces
at each floor level are therefore given by the difference between the story shear above and
below that floor level. From top to bottom, the drag strut forces are therefore 6,31,23, and
8 kips, as shown on the figure above.
14-48

A C 1 T I T L E + M D G 93
Obb2949 0509289 840

Reference
Code
The figure below shows how a typical drag strut will connect the stair tower to the rest of
the RCJ Hotel. The required area of the drag strut is determined by the load it must resist.
In this case, the critical drag strut has a tensile forceof 31 kips. Using
an allowable steel stress of24,000psi,
increased by 1/3 for loading
5.3.2
combinations involving earthquake, the required steel area is

Grid! Line F
Stair Tower
Connection Detail
0.97
14-49

in?
7.2.1.l(b)
A C 1 T I T L E S N D G 93
m 0662949 0509290
562

Code Reference
This can be satisfied using 3 4 5 bars, providing a total steel area of 0.93 in.2 The required
embedment length of the bars at each end (the stair tower bond beam and the topping of
the hotel slab) is determined by development length requirements. The development length
of the drag strut bars is measured from the near face of the wall in each direction.
Zr
0.0015 db Fs
Eq. (8-1)
Zr
= 0.0015 (0.63in.) 24,000 psi
Id
22.5 in.
14-50

Example 143-14
RCJ Hotel
93
0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0509293 4 T 9
Connection of InteriorNonloadbearingWall to Interior
Loadbearing Wall
Design the connection between corridor wall (nonloadbearing)and cross wall (loadbearing
on Grid Line C between Grid Lines 1 and 2) in the RCJ Hotel. Use Wall Construction
Option B and Building Construction Option I. The corridor slab is composed of precast,
prestressed concrete planks, spanning along the corridor. The planks are supported on W
10 structural steel beams which span across the corridor.
Code Reference
Grid Line 2
Cross Wall
W 10
c.
c.
Beam g
V
Partial
Plan
m
I
#4 Bars
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Section B-B
View
Grid Line 2
2 #4 Bars Plus
Room Slab
Beam
Section A-A
14-5 1

A C 1 T I T L E t M D G 93 H Obb2949 O509292 335 H

and
Code Reference
Calculations
The figures show plan and section views of the connection. TheW 10 beam sits in pockets
in each corridor wall. Precast, prestressed concrete planks
(8 in. thick) sit on top of the
lower flanges of the W 10 beam. The W 10 beams are tied to the cross walls and the rest
of the slab by the 2 in. slab topping (reinforced with welded wire fabric), and also
by 2-#4
bars placed above the planks on either side of the W 10 web.
14-52

A CT 1I T L E * M D G
93
Obb29Y9 0509293
271
I
Example 143-15
DPCGymnasium
- Roof DiaphragmConnection to Nonloadbearing
Wall
Design a connection between the roof diaphragm and a nonloadbearing wall of the
DPC
gymnasium.
Reference
Code
'V
Connection Detail
This detail concerns the wallof MDG Example 9.3-7. The bent plate is very similar to that
of MDG Example 14.3-12. Design calculations are also similar.
14-53
~

A C 1 T I T L E S N D G 93 W Ob62949 0509294 108
Example 143-16
RCJHotel
- Termination of FlexuralReinforcementforContinuous
Masonry Beam
For the continuous masonry beam designed in

MDG Examples 11.3-6 and 13.1-3, determine
the required lengths of the flexural reinforcement. This beam is located below the second
floor of the RCJ Hotel (Wall Construction A with Building Construction I) on Grid Line E
between Grid Lines 3 and 4.
d = 67 in.
b = 11.63 in.
Fb = 600 psi
n = 16.1
References
Calculations
Codeand Discussions
l. Shear Diagram and Shear Reinforcement per MDG Example 13.1-3.
6'-6"
12'""
Shear SteelShear Steel = 2#4 @ 8" Shear Steel

O C . Not Required
Not Required 134,7 kips
80.9 kips
80.9 kips
4"9"
4
12'""
134.7 kips
7'- 11"
D"
7'-11"
"
'4"9"
$-Eof Bearing
12'-8"
E-$of
Shear Diagram
14-54

Bearing
A C 1 TITLEaHDG 93
0662949 0509295 044 D
Calculations and Discussions
Reference
Code
2. Moment Diagram and Required Reinforcement per MDG Example 11.3-6.
-D
I
-341 ft-kips
2'-8"
$-Eof Beari
'-8"
%-Eof
Bearing-
2#7 X 17"6"
Moment Diagram
t
2#7 x 14'-4"'
4#6 -U
\2#7 x 17'""
1#7 X 14'"''
12"
T'
'I
I
kinforcement Layout
3. Positive Moment Reinforcement Anchorage and Cut-Off Lengths.

At least 25% of the positive moment reinforcement must extend into the support and be
anchored to develop
8.5.3.2
the
stress.
tensile
allowable
Choose to make 2 bars, of the total 4 required, continuous. This decision is based on the
symmetry of the bar locations (see MDG Example 11.3-6) and the need to have bars to
which to tie the stirrups.
14-55

~~
A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93 M 0662949 050929b T B 0 M
and
Reference
Calculations
The two extended bars must be anchored for length,

8.5.2
For a #6 rebar, 364, = 36(0.75 in.) = 27 in.

A standard hook
develops
equivalent
an length
= 11.25db, or
8.5.5.2
11.25(0.75 in.) = 8.44 in. for a #6 rebar.

A standard 90" hook for a #6 rebar consistsof a 6 bar diameter bend
bar
diameters
for
plus an extension of 12
The bar must be extended 27 in.
a total
length
- 8.44 in.
of 12 in.
8.5.5.1
8.5.4.1(b)
= 18.56 in. past the center of bearing before
hooking into the column. To fit into masonry cores use20 in. extension. It is 4 in. from the
face of the support to the center of bearing.
20 in.
+ 4 in. = 24 in. C 32 in. column
.: OK
To determine where the remainingtwobarsmay
be cut off,
it isnecessary to find the
flexural capacity of the section with 2-#6 bars.

P =
2(o*44
11.63 in.(67 in.)
= -pn +
0.00113
=
pn = 0.00182
-0.00182 + 42(0.00182)
(0.00182)2 = O.174
Mt = F,A,jd
Mt = (24ksi)[2(0.44 in?)](0.942)(67 in.)
12 in./ft
Mt = 111 ft-kip
based on steel stress allowable
OR
14-56

93
Obb2949 0509297 917

and
Calculations
Mm =
(600 psi)(ll.63 in.)(67 in.)2(0.942)(0.174)

12,000 h -1bIft -kips
M m = 428 ft-kips
based on masonry stress allowable
+M = 111 ft-kips occurs at 1 ft - 8 in. from the point of zero moment.

These bars may not terminate at the point at which they are no longer required to resist
flexure, but instead must be extended for a length equal to the greater of the member depth
or 12db.
8.5.3.1(c)
The member depth of 67 in. or 5 ft - 7 in., exceeds the distance from the point at which
+M
= 111 ft-kips to thecenter
of bearing.
Therefore,no
positive moment flexural
reinforcement bars may be terminated short of the supports.

Make all 4-#6 bottom bars continuous and hooked into the end supports for a distance of
32 in.
If the bars cannot bebe provided full length in one piece, provide lap
splices of 8.5.7.1.1
0.002dps r 12 in.
For #6 bars, lap length = 0.002(0.75 in.)(24,000 psi) = 36 in.
4. Negative Moment Anchorage and Cut-Off Lengths.
At least 1/3 of the total negative moment reinforcement must be extended beyond the point
of zero moment for a distance equal to the member depth or equal toone-sixteenth of the
span.
8.5.3.3(b)
14-57


and
Code Reference
Calculations
Since the total negative moment reinforcement consists of 5-#7 bars, extend 2-#7 bars for
a distance of
12.7ft(12 in./ft)
16
Id
9.53 in.
The total length of these bars is 2(3.17 ft)
+ 2(67 in./12) = 17.5 ft.
It may be desirable to
extend these bars full length of the beam, to provide something to which to tie the stirrup
bars.
To determine where the remaining bars may be cut off, it is necessary to find the flexural
capacity of the section with the 2-#7 rebars.
2(o.60 in.2)
= 11.63 in.(67
-+ 42pn
k = -pn
Mm=
in.)
0.00154
bn
0.0248
= -0.0248 + 42(0.0248) + (0.0248)2 = 0.199
(600 psi)(ll.63 in.)(67 in.)2(0.934)(0.199)
12,000 in.-lb/& -kips
Mm= 485 ft-kips
based on masonry stress allowable
OR
14-58

93
m 0662947 0509299
79T
Example 143-16Contd.
and
Calculations
Discussion
Reference
Code
M, = F,A,jd
Mt =
(24 ksi)[2(0.60 h2)](0.934)(67 in.)

12 in./ft
based on steel stress allowable
Mt = 150 ft-kips
GOVERNS
-M = 150 ft-kips occurs at 1 ft - 7 in. from the point of zero moment.

The remaining three bars may not terminate at the point at whichthey are no longer
required to resist flexure but instead must be extended for a length equal to the greaterof
orthe member depth
lub.
8.5.3.1(c)
The member depth of 67 in. governs over lub= 12(0.875 in.) = 10.5 in. for #7 bars. The
extension of 67 in. or 5 ft - 7 in. means that the bars terminate in the zone of positive
moment, or in the compression zone. Therefore the requirements of Code 8.5.3.1(e) need
not be met.
By inspection, the continuing reinforcement has embedment length r Zd beyond the point of
terminated reinforcement.
8.5.3.1(d)
The total length of the terminated bars is 2(1 ft - 7 in.)
+ 2(5 ft - 7 in) = 14 ft - 4 in.
Bond capacity to develop the bars should also be checked at the point of zero moment. See
MDG 14.2.1.3 and MDG Example 14.2-3
14-59

93
m Obb2949 0509300 231 m
15
EMPIRICAL DESIGN
15.1
HISTORY
Beginning with the Code of Hammurabi (2123 - 2081 B.C.), man hasbeen developing design
standards for structural masonry. Some of the first standards specified such requirements
as minimum wall thickness and maximum building height. The structural design of historic
buildings was based upon requirements for mass, minimum wall thickness, maximum wall
height, crosswalls, quality of materials, and workmanship.
The modern empirical standard (ANSI A 41.1, AmericanStandard
Building Code
Requirements for Masonry) was originally issued by the National Bureau of Standards as
Miscellaneous Publication 211 in1944.
The document has been the basis for empirical
design standards in model building codes, engineering reference standards, architectural

graphic standards, and textbooks.
These standardshave been based upon sometype of engineering rationale,including lateral
stability, buckling of masonry walls, compressive strength, minimum wall thickness, and
associated requirements. Masonry materials have substantial compressive strengthand
durability but low resistance to tensile stresses. Therefore, masonry should be designed
thick enough for the vertical compressive force resultant to act in the middle third of the
15-1

A C 1 T I T L E S N D G 93
Obb2949 0509301 178
structural element. Otherwise, flexural tension will develop in the nonreinforced masonry
which may exceed the allowable tensile stresses assigned to masonry in codes.
MONADNOCK BUILDING, CHICAGO, IL

Sixteen Story Building,Six Foot
Thick Walls. A Building Example
of Empirical Design Requirements
Before Rational Engineering Methods.
BRICK AND CONCRETE MASONRY

CONSTRUCTION EXAMPLE
Recommended Empirical Design
According to the Code Requirements.
Fig.15.1-1EmpiricalDesignMethodExamples
15.2GENERALDESCRIPTION
Code Chapter 9, Empirical Design of Masonry, describes requirements for nonreinforced

masonry only; reinforcementis not considered. Masonry designed
by the empirical structural
15-2

A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 93
0662749 0509302 004
design method has a proven success record, and has exhibited economics of construction.
If the proposed structural masonry systemis not permitted to be designed withthe empirical
design requirements, then the designer is required to design according to the rationaldesign
requirements presented in Code Chapter 6 for Unreinforced Masonry and Code Chapter
7 for Reinforced Masonry. Members not participating in the lateral force resisting system
of a building may be empirically designed by Code Chapter 9 even though the lateral force
resisting system is designed under Code Chapters 5, 6, 7, 8.
The Code empirical design section has been improved over the previous empirical standard,
ANSI A 41.1. Arbitrary masonry design requirements have been removed which required
very thick masonry walls,and unrealistic masonry sizeswhen compared to masonry designed
using rational requirements. The empirical design procedure continues to be successful
whenused
according to the criteria prescribed in the Code. The important difference
between this Code and previous codes is the restricted use of Empirical Design under
certain loading criteria and building configurations.
1 5 3 LIMITATIONS
In accordance with Code 9.1.1 the empirical design procedure shall not be used for masonry
structures with the following characteristics:
Location inSeismic Zone 3 or 4. Empirical design procedures have been
successfully used for centuries in Seismic Zones 0,1, and 2;
Design Wind pressure in excess of 25 psf;
Horizontal loads from sources other than permitted wind or seismic loads;
Foundation walls not satisfying Code 9.6.2;
Unreinforced masonry laid in other than running bond. (See Code 9.7.5.2);
Masonry veneer walls (this design material isusually
included in model
building codes);
Buildings taller than 35 ft that rely on masonry walls for lateral load resistance
15-3

~~
A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 93
m Obb2949
0509303 T 4 0
(except for masonry infill walls); and

8)
Cantilever
retaining
walls.
Masonry infill walls not part of the lateral load resistance system can be designed by the
empirical procedure.
15.4EMPIRICALDESIGNREQUIREMENTS
15.4.1MaterialsandSpecifications
Empirically designed masonry must be constructedin accordance with AC1 530.1/ ASCE6/
TMS 602 Specifications for Masonry Structures to assure compliance with the design. The
Specifications require the designer to specify selected materials and methods,as well as the
extent of quality control and inspection necessary for each project. The reader is referred
to MDG Chapters 3, 4,5, 6, and 7 for additional information.
15.4.2 Lateral Stability
Shear wall spacing requirementsare an integral part of the Code requirementsfor Empirical
Design. The structural integrityof an exterior masonry wall is based not only on flexural and
axial strength, but also on lateral stability normally provided by shear walls. Out-of-plane
forces caused by lateral wind or seismic loads, imposed on
an exterior wall surface, are
transferred to the roof or floor diaphragm system and then to the shear walls. Code 9.3.1.1
stipulates a minimum thickness of 8 in. for masonryshear walls. Code 9.3.1.3 specifies shear
wallspacingrequirements,whichpreviouslyhadbeenlistedin
other documents as
recommended practices.
15.43 Compressive Stress Requirements
Code 9.4 specifies conservative valuesof allowable compressive stress for empirical design
15-4

A C 1 T I T L E * H D G 93 W Ob62949 0509304 9 8 7 W
ofmasonry.Theallowablestresses
in CodeTable
9.4.2, are baseduponthe
cross-sectional area of themasonrywall,usingactualdimensions
gross
rather than nominal
dimensions.
15.4.4
Lateral Support
Lateral supportis a primary requirement in the structural design

of masonry walls usingthe
empirical requirements. Lateral support elements brace the masonrypermit
and the transfer
of loads to theresistingelements.Decisionsaboutthetypesandlocations
of support
a wall mayspan vertically

elements for the masonry affect the masonry design. For example,
between floors and roof. The floor to floor height then determines the span length of the
wall and the Code limits the h/t ratio. Alternatively, walls may span horizontally between
crosswallsandtheCodelimitsthenapply
to the
Z/t
ratio.Code
9.5 specifiesspan to
thickness ratios, which determine the required thickness for a given span (see Figs. 15.4-1
and 15.4-2). No matter what lateral support system is used, the masonry element must be
adequately anchored to the support element in order fortoitfunction properly. See MDG
15.4.7.
Fig. 15.4-1 h/t Ratios
15-5

Obb2749 0509305 AL3
A C 1 T I T L E 3 M D G 93
15.4-11for
Masonry Connection
to Steel Column
See Figure
1 r 'L
Expansion Gap.Typical
Steel
-Y
Column, Typical
1 = Horizontal Span
1 = Horizontal Span
"""""-
Typical
Simple Span Deflection
Fig. 15.4-2 Z/t Ratios
Lateral support design includes two distinct issues:

1)
Lateral support systems(crosswalls,
pilasters,buttresses, or other structural
frame members) based upon empirical and/or rational design methods, and
2)
Masonrywallthicknessbasedupon
h 'It or Z/t ratios and minimum thickness
requirements.
Code Table9.5.1, Code 9.5.1.1, and Code9.6.3 provisions forlateral support are summarized
in Table 15.4-1.
In computingthe ratio (Ut or h 'It)in Table 15.4-1 for walls bonded in accordance with Code
9.7.2 or Code 9.7.3, although not included inthe Code, it is recommended that the value for
thickness (t) shall be the sum of the nominal thicknesses of the wythes.
15-6

A C 1 TITLELMDG 9 3
Obb2949 050930b 75T
Table 15.4-1 WallLateral Support Requirements

~~
MAXIMUM
llt or h /t
CONSTRUCTION
Bearing Walls
Solid or Grouted
All Other
Non Bearing Walls
Exterior
Interior
Cantilever Walls
Solid
Hollow
Parapets (8 in. thick minimum)
20
18
18
36
6
4
3
The designer must not only determine the wall thickness but also design the lateral support
system and the connections transferring the forces from the wall to the lateral support. As
an example, roof diaphragms must be designed to transmit out of plane forces on walls to
the in-plane lateral force resisting shear walls. A bond beam, although not required by the
Code, is commonly installed at thelevel of the diaphragm support element to transfer
forces
from the wall to the diaphragm, and vice versa.
15.4.5 Thickness of Masonry
15.4.5.1 Minimum Thickness Criteria - Code 9.6.1 requires an arbitraryminimum nominal

masonry thickness to limit inadvertent axial load eccentricity in masonrybearing
wall
structures. Unreinforced masonry wall structures may crack under eccentric loading
that
produces tensile stressesin the wall. The arbitraryminimum thickness requirement, together
with appropriate details, will limit cracking.
15.4.5.2 Foundation Walls
- Masonry foundation walls as shown in Fig. 15.4-3, per Code

15-7

A C 1 TITLElwMDG 93
0bb2949 0509307 b 9 b
9.6.2, may be designed according to the empirical design chapter.
Drain
Fig. 15.4-3 Foundation Wall Section
The following empirical criteriaare intended for basement foundationwall design:

l.
Maximumheight
of wallbetween
lateralsupports(usuallybetweenthe
basement floor and the first floor) = 8 ft- O in. Cantilever walls (no lateral
support at top) are not permitted.
2.
Maximumequivalentfluidweightofbackfill
3.
Provisions
for
= 30 pcf
adequate drainage:
a. clean granular backfill,

b. an operational drain tile, and
c. backfill sloping away from
4.
structure (15.4.1).
Maximumheightoffinishgradeabovebasementfloor
= 8 ft- O in.Masonry
thickness requirements vary with the heightof finish grade. See Code Table
9.6.2.2 below.
5.
Type Mor S Mortar

15-8

A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 93 W 0662749 0507308 5 2 2
Code Table 9.6.2.2 Thickness of Foundation Walls
Nominal Thickness, in.
Foundation Wall
Construction
Unbalanced Fill, ft
Masonry of hollow units,

ungrouted
Masonry of hollow or solid

units, fully grouted
i
Masonry of hollow units
reinforced vertically with
#4 bars and grout at 24 in.
on centers. Bars located
not less than 4% in. from
pressure side of wall
15.4.6
Maximum Depth of
8
10
12
4
5
6
8
10
12
5
6
7
8
10
12
Bond
Code 9.7 addresses the required connections between the facing and backing of multiple
wythe masonry walls.
15.4.6.1 Masonry Headers - Before the development of metal ties, masonry headers were
used to connect the wythes of multiwythe walls. The details shown in Code C. Fig. 9.7-1
describe the Coderequirements
for the lapping ofmasonryunit
monolithicaction ofmultiwythewalls.
headers to achieve
The Codeestablishesminimumrequirements
to
connect the two wythes for any masonry material types. There is the potential for water
15-9

A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 93 M 0662949 0509309 469
transmission across wythes. Differential movement between

the inner and outer wythes due
to unequal gravityloading
or due to differential thermal or moisturebehaviorcould
potentially result infracture of the masonry header. If masonry headers are used, then the
same type of masonry unit should be used for both wythes, and movement joints must be
provided.
Masonry header details for both solid masonry units,per Code 9.7.21, and hollow masonry
units, per Code 9.7.2.2, are shown in Code C. Fig. 9.7-1. If both hollow and solid masonry
units are combined in a wall, then the stricter Code requirement governs.
15.4.6.2 Metal Ties - The alternate system for connecting multiwythe masonry walls metal
is
ties. See Code 9.7.3. The metal tie system has several advantages
compared to the masonry
header system: 1)it accommodates vertical and horizontal adjustment during construction,
resulting in straighter walls; 2) it allows minor differential movement between multiwythe
walls which may be caused by different masonry materials, shrinkage or expansion due to
moisture and temperature; and 3) it allows for a more watertight construction systemthan
has been experienced with masonryheader construction.
The empirical metal tie requirements shown in Code C. Fig. 5.8-2 have been successfully
used in multiwythe masonry walls, with cavity widthsnot exceeding four inches, to transfer
lateral loads to both wythes. A typical cavity wall system has a 4 in. brick masonry outer
wythe, a 3 in. cavity which includes 1 in. rigid insulation, and an interior concrete masonry
wythewhosethicknessis
based upon other empirical requirements described in this
Chapter.
15.4.7 Anchorage
15.4.7.1 Intersecting Walls - Intersecting masonry walls whichdepend upon each other for
lateral support must be anchored at the intersection to ensure structural integrity of the
building. Code 9.8.2 requirements represent past, successful standards for masonry walls.
15-10

A C 1 T I T L E * N D G 93 9 Obb2949 0509330 360
Interior nonloadbearing walls may be mortared or mechanically tied to the floor below for
lateral support.Withoutspecific
restraint at the top,suchwallsmust
be considered
cantilevered from the floor. It is undesirable to connect the interior nonloadbearing wall
rigidly to the roof or floor above, becausethe temporary live load deflection of the structure
will imposeunanticipatedstresses
whichmaycausecracking.
Connections that permit
vertical slip may be used (See MDG 15.4.7.2), or the intersecting walls may be anchored
with masonry bonding, as described in Code 9.8.2.1 and shown in Code C. Fig. 5.13-2, or
mechanical fastening as described in Code 9.8.22 through Code 9.8.2.5. and illustrated in
Code C.5.13.3.
15.4.7.2
Floor and Roof Anchorage - Floors and roofs must be anchored to the exterior
masonry wall to provide lateral support for the wall and to transfer lateral loads to the
horizontal diaphragm. Diaphragm connections are required not only at the bearing walls,
but also at the nonloadbearing walls, where floor or roof framing is parallel to the wall.
Examples of the fastening systemsdescriied in Code9.8.3 are shown in Fig. 15.4-4. Interior
nonloadbearing walls maybe connected to the floors or roof abovefor lateral support, if the
connection permits the diaphragm to freely deflect vertically.
Fill With CMU

Between Joists
Wood Floor
On Wood Joist
CMU
Header
Block
Joint Attached to
Bond Beam
Beam
Solid
CMU
6"O"
Long Into
ooked t o
STEEL ROOF JOIST
WOOD FLOOR JOIST
Fig. 15.4-4 Anchorage
15-11

A C 1 T I T L E x M D G 73 M 0 6 6 2 7 4 7 0507311 017 M
15.4.73
WallsAdjoiningStructuralFraming
- Code 9.8.4 presents a general minimum
requirement of metal anchor area and spacing that permits the masonry to be keyed to the
structure. Where masonry walls are anchored to structural framing for lateral support, care
must be taken to provide the lateral support while keeping the masonry isolated from
structural deformations. Inadvertent loading of unreinforced masonry walls connected to
ductile steel frames with rigid connections may cause masonry fracture.
15.4.8MiscellaneousRequirements
15.4.8.1 Chases and Recesses
- Lintels are required above openings wider than 12 inches,
per Code 9.9.1. See Fig. 15.4-5.
1
r
4"min.
--- ---
Section Through
Lintel
Lintels Required for

Openings > 12"
Fig.15.4-5OpeningSupport
15.4.8.2Lintels
- Lintels may be steel,concrete,
or masonry.Masonrylintelsmust
be
designed in accordance with Code 5.6 and Code 7.3.3. Code 9.9.2 requires a minimum lintel
end bearing length of 4 in. as shown in Fig. 15.4-6. The minimum bearing length allows for
minor imperfections within the several building materials involved. All masonry bearing
conditions mustbe sized for width, length, andmaterial type using a bearing pressure stress
analysis. The required end bearing lengths will be greater for heavier loads, or longer span
lintels. Lintel bearings, in general, do not require bearing plates. If they do the edge of the
bearing plate should be at least 1 in. back from the opening. Lintels rarely need anchor
bolts. For longlintels care should be take to avoid edge loading of the masonryby
15-12

A C 1 TITLEtMDG 93
0bb2747
0507332
T53 W
deflection of the lintel.
ening
Grout Hollow Units At

Lintel Bearing Or Use
Fig.15.4-6MinimumEndBearing
Length
15.4.83 Support on Wood - Code 9.9.3 prohibits the support of masonry by wooden girders
or other form of wood construction. The basis of the exclusion isthe concern of the wooden
elements fire resistance as comparedto that of the masonry, and the potential implications
to public health and safety.
15.4.8.4 Corbelling
- Code 9.9.4 states the provisions for corbelling in masonry walls
hollow and solid units.
of
Only solid units may be used for corbelling. The general design
requirements are shown in Code C.Fig9.9-1.
If the designerchoosesacorbelling
arrangement in excessof that permitted by Code 9.9.4, then the designer must verifygeneral
structural stability and flexural tensile stress capacity using other sections of the Code.
REFERENCES
15.4.1
"Guide
to Residential
Cast-In-Place
Concrete
Construction",
American Concrete Institute.
15-13

AC1
332R-84,
A C 1 T I T L E S M D G 93 9 0bb2949 0509333 99T
Example 154-1 TMS Shopping Center Empirical Design of Masonry Walls
Design the masonry walls for the TMS Shopping Center Wall Construction Option k See
MDG 9.1.1 for building plans and elevations.
Roof Deck Metal
Deck
Load Live Roof
With
No
Concrete Masonry ASTM C 90
Fill
= 30 psf
Load
Dead
Roof
(Hollow)
Grade N
= 15 psf
Weight
Unit
pcf
= 120
Thickness to be determined
Mortar ASTM C 270
Seismic Zone = 1
Wind Design
Type N
Pressure
psf
= 20
102"4"
12"
41"O"
41"O"
TMS Shopping Center Framing Plan
Code Reference
1. EMPIRICAL DESIGN CRITERIA CHECK
A.
Seismic Zone 1 < Zone 3 .: OK
9.1.1.1
B.
DesignWind Pressure = 20psf C 25 psf :. OK
9.1.1.2
C.
Building Height = 18 ft
35 ft .: OK
:. Empirical Design maybeused

15-14

9.2
A C 1 T I T L E * U D G 93
m 0662947 0507324 826 m

Reference
Code
2. DESIGN OF LOADBEARING WAILS, GRID LINES A & C

Try 12 in. hollow, concrete masonry units,based upon lateral support requirements
A.
8 in. < 12 in. :. OK
Minimum Shear Wall

Thickness:
9.3.1.1
B. Minimum Shear Wall Length

1.
Shear walls are required on Grid Lines A & C to resist wind in the east or
west direction. The Code requires shear wall spacing and shear wall length
considerations.
Solving for the minimum shear wall length
minimum length =
shear wall spacing
9.3.1.3
ratio
1 = - =824 1ftf t < L e n g t h W a l l G r i d L i n e A = 2 0 4 . 6 f t
> Length Wall Grid Line C
20 ft
For the TMS Shopping Center to comply withEmpirical Design,an additional

shear wall length of approximately 20 ft must be added on Grid Line C
2.
MinimumCumulativeLength = 0.4 x longdimension

minimum
length
= 204.7 ft x 0.4 = 81.9 ft
actual length (deducting openings) = North
204.7 ft - 6 X 3.33 ft
9.3.1.2
+ South walls
+ 21.33 ft + 20 ft = 226 ft > 81.9 ft
C. Compressive Stress:
1.
Wall Grid Line A

axial compressive stress,
fa
P Fa = 70 psi
-
9.4.2
As
15-15

A C 1 T I T L E r f l D G 93 W 0662949 0509315 7b2

and
Calculations
Compute compressive stressat base of wall for roof live
+ dead loads + wall
weight
2.
fa =
((30 psf + 15 psf) 1 ft x 40 ft x 0.5) + (18 ft x 55.5 psf x 1 ft)

12 in. x 11.63 in.
f,
13.6 psi
.-.OK
70 psi
WallGridLineC
Overhang on wall = 253 plf
D.
1,900 plf + 253 plf
12 in./ft x 11.63 in.
2,153 plf
= 15.4 psi
12 in./ft x 11.63 in.
Lateral Support:GridLines
70 psi
2.
OK
A&C
(a) 16 ft tall; assume lateral brace at roof with roof diaphragm

9.5.1
Use 12 in. hollow CMU
(b) 2 ft parapet cantilever - Assume 8 in. units
h - 2ft x 12 in./ft = 3 = 3
8 in.
:.OK

3. DESIGN OF NONLOADBEARING WALLS, GRID LINES 1,2, & 3
A.
Minimum Shear WallThickness:
8 in.
15-16

9.6.3
A C 1 TITLE*UDG 93 D Obb271r7 O507336 bT7 D
Reference
Code
Shear walls are required on Grid Lines 1, 2, & 3 to resist wind in the north or
south direction.
1.
Minimum length =
shear wall spacing
9.3.1.3
ratio
82 ft > 50.7 ft
GridLine 1 Walllength
Grid Line 2 Wall length
= 82 ft
> 50.7 ft
Grid Line 3 Wall Length
= 82 ft
- 10 ft - 3.33 ft
= 68.7 ft
2.
> 50.7 ft
2.
OK
Minimum cumulative length = 0.4 x long dimension

Minimum length = 204.7 ft x 0.4 = 81.9 ft
+2+3
= 82 ft - 3.33 ft - 10 ft + 82 ft + 82 ft
Actuallength
Actuallength
= 232.7 ft
C.
= GridLines
> 81.9 ft
2.
OK
Compressive
Stress
1.
WallGridLines
1&3
Try 12 in. hollow CMU
2.
WallGridLine
Try 8 in. hollow CMU

l8
fa
x 40 psf x
12 in. x 7.63 in.
7.87
15-17

70 psi
9.3.1.2
A C 1 TITLESMDG 93
Obb29V9 0509337 535

and
Calculations
Reference
fu
D.
fi
x 40
psf x fi
12 in. x 7.63 in.
Code
7.87 psi <' 70
Lateral Support
1.
GridLine 1 & 3, exteriornonloadbearing

(a) 16 ft tall, assume lateral brace at roof with roof diaphragm
- l6
"
l2 in'/fi
12 in.
fi x
:. OK
16 < 18
9.5.1

(b) 2 ft parapet cantilever
h' - 2 fi x 12 in./ft
t
8 in.
"
=
,a.
OK
9.6.3

2.
GridLine 2, interiornonloadbearing wall

9.5.1

4. COLUMN OR PILASTERDESIGN
At B-1, B-3, C-1.1, C-1.2, C-2.2

Note:ColumnsandPilasters
are notspecificallydescribedinCode
Chapter 9,
Empirical Design; however, the designer may make certain assumptions of

load distribution while utilizing the Code requirements.
A.
Column or Pilaster at B-1 and B-3
15-18

93
0662949 0509318 471
Control
Joint
Code Reference
&Beam
Thicken Wall with

12" x 15.63"CMU,
15.63"
Running Bond.
Base of Wall Reaction = Roof Load
Reaction
P -
(ai *
S)10 ft x 45 psf +
2
20,800 lb
23.6 in. x 15.6
"
A,
B.
+ Wall Weight
in.
= 54.2
psi
18 ft x 111 psf x 1.33 ft
70 psi
Column or Pilaster C-1.1,C-1.2,C-2.2

Author's Recommendation:
P
15.63"
23.63"

Thicken Wall with

r 1 2 " x 15.63" CMU,
Running Bond.
20,800 lb
9 3 D Obb29Y9 0509339 308

Reaction =
Code Reference
5 ft o v e h g IO ft width x 45 psf
+ wallwgt 18 ft x 111 psf x 1.33 ft

fa
14,100 lb
23.6 in. x 15.6
in.
36.7 psi < 70 psi
14,100 lb
:. OK
9.4.2
ShODDinP Center Desim Summarv

Use single wythe 12 in. hollow concrete masonry units, ASTM C 90, Grade N with ASTM
C 270 Type N mortar. For parapet use 8 in. hollow CMU. For pilaster add 12 in. x 16 in.
hollow concretemasonryunit;all
other specificationsremainsame.Many
details are required forasuccessfulproject
other design
as well as to satisfy the EmpiricalDesign
requirements in Code Chapter 9. The roof structure must be properly fastened to the top
of the walls to provide lateral bracing and to transfer diaphragm shear loads to the lateral
load resisting shear walls.
*For Pilaster DesiEo

See MDG 11.2
tN
TMS shoppins center Masonry wall Layout
15-20

m 0662949 0509320
93
02T
DPC Gymnasium Empirical Design of Masonry Walls
Example 15.4-2
Design the masonry walls for the DPC Gymnasium.See MDG 9.1.2 for building plans and
elevations.
ASTM C 216
Roof Deck Metal

Deck
With
Fill
Brick
NoMasonry
Load
Live
Roof
Grade SW 4 in. thickness
= 40 psf
Roof Dead Load = 20 psf

Seismic
Zone
ASTM C 90
= 20Concrete
psfMasonry
Design
Wind
Pressure
=2
= 120 pcf
Grade N,
Weight
Unit
Mortar, ASTM C 270

and
Reference
Calculations
1. EMPIRICALDESIGNCRITFdUACHECK
A. Zone
Seismic
2 < Zone 3
:. OK
9.1.1.1
However,
minimum
reinforcement
is
required
for
Seismic
Zone
B.
Design
Wind
Pressure
= 20 psf
< 25 psf
:. OK
k3.8
9.1.1.2
.: Empirical Design may be used

2. WALL CONSTRUCTION OPTION A: (4 in. brick, 3 in. cavity with rigid insulation,
hollow CMU with pilasters at 16 ft o.c.):
estimate clear spacing = 13 ft - 4 in. for interior wythe of CMU,
try 6 in. hollow, concrete masonry units,
A.
ShearWallDesign:
1.
Minimum shear wall thickness shall be 8 in. or more

Assume 6 in. concrete masonry units
shear wall t = 4 in. + 6 in.
2.
10 in. > 8 in.
.: OK
9.3.1.1
Minimum totalshearwall length

a.GridLines
9.3.1.2
1 and 2
15-21

A C 1 TITLEaMDG 93 M Obb2949 0 5 0 9 3 2 3 Tbb
Example
15.4-2
Contd.
and
Calculations
Shear Walls: North/South direction

minimum cumulative length = 0.4 x long dimension
min. length = 128 ft x 0.4 = 51.2 ft
actual length = 64 ft
+ 52 ft = 116 ft > 51.2 ft :.
OK
b. Grid Lines A and B
9.3.1.2
Shear Walls: East/West direction.

minimum cumulative length = 51.2 ft
actual length = (128 ft - 8 ft) x 2 = 240 ft > 51.2 ft
3.
:.
OK
Maximum spacing of shear walls

a. Grid Line A and B
9.3.1.3
Shear Wall Spacing/Shear Wall Length
= 64 ft/128 ft
- 8 ft
:.
OK
0.50 < 2
b. Grid Line 1 and 2
9.3.1.3
Shear Wall SpacingBhear Wall Length
= 128 ft/64 ft
=
B.
2.0
:. OK
Compressive Stress: Nonloadbearing Wall on Grid Lines 1and 2 (Assume gravity

loads are resisted by pilasters alone)
f, < F,
70 psi, 6 in. hollow CMU
P = bottom of wall reaction
Use 4 in. brick and 6 in. CMU, Type N mortar

C.
Lateral
Support:
1.
13 ft - 4 in. horizontal span wall;

15-22

9.4
Ob62949 0507322 9 T 2
A C 1 TITLEvMDG 9 3
Examde 15.4-2
Cont'd.
Code Reference
assume lateral support at pilaster
height = 30 ft < 35 ft :.
D.
OK
9.2
Pilaster Design:
1.
Pilastersmustberationallydesigned
loads. See MDG Chap.
for combined lateral androofgravity
11 and 12.
3. WALLCONSTRUCTIONOPTION
B:
(Compositewall
4 in.brick,
3/4 in.full
collar joint, and hollow CMU), determine the wall thickness. No pilasters.
Grid Lines A and B, try 12 in. hollow CMU for interior wythe,
Grid Lines 1 and 2, try 16 in. hollow CMU for interior wythe,
A.
Shear WallDesign:
Same as for Wall Construction Option A
B.
Compressive
Stress:
Lines
l. Grid
fa
1 and 2, nonloadbearing
< F,
9.3.1.2
70 psi for Type N mortar (Governed by hollow CMU allowable per
Code 9.4.2.2)
f a =
P
-
P = wall
wgt.
at bottomwall
of
reaction
A,
brick wgt. = 40 psf; CMU Wall wgt. = 80 psf(See MDG Appendix A)

2.
Grid Lines A and
B, loadbearing walls
15-23

9.4
9.3.1.2
Obb2949 0509323 839

and
Calculations
Discussion
fa
Reference
Code
C F, = 70 psi for Type N mortar (Governed by hollow CMU allowable per
Code 9.4.2.2)
fa = -
P = roof live and dead loads
+ wall wgt.
A*
brick wgt. = 40 psf; CMU wgt. = 80 psf
fa =
(24 ft ht x 80 Psf) 1 ft + (32 ft x 60 psf) 1 ft

= 25.0psi
12 in. x 12 in.

C.
7opsi
9.4
Lateral
Support:
1.
GridLines 1 and2
9.5.1
2.
GridLines A and B
9.5.1
DESIGN SUMMARY
WALL CONSTRUCTION OPTION A:
Use double wythe, 4 in. brick, 3 in. insulated cavity, 6 in. hollow concrete masonry units,
ASTM C 90 with ASTM C 270 Type N Mortar. Pilasters at 16 ft.

WALL CONSTRUCTION OPTION B
Use composite wall:
15-24

A C 1 TITLELMDG 93
Ob62949 0509324 7 7 5
and
Code Reference
Calculations
loadbearing wall:
4 in. nominal brick, 3/4in.

full
collar
jt.,
12 in.
hollow
concrete masonry units

mortar, ASTM C 270 Type N
nonloadbearing wall:
4 in. brick, 3/4 in.full
collar jt., 2 wythes 8 in.hollow
concrete masonry units

mortar, ASTM C 270 Type N
Authors Notes: The empirical design for this construction option may be an impractical and
uneconomical solution depending on localmasonry construction experience. A rational
approach should be considered in accordance with MDG Chapters 11and 12 to determine
a reinforced wall design. Intermediate lateral braces, such as steel columns or buttresses
may also be considered.
SEISMIC ZONE 2 REQUIREMENTS
The Code A.3.8 requires minimum steel reinforcement for structures in Seismic Zone 2.
General steel reinforcement requirements are as follows:
l. Vertical Reinforcement (from support to support)

a. at each wall corner,
b. at each side of each opening,
c. at ends of walls,
2. Horizontal Reinforcement
a. at bottom and top of wall openings,
b. at structurally connected roof level,
c. bottom of walls, and other areas, see A.3.
d. uniformly distributed inwalls.
15-25

TITLEaNDG 73 m 0662747 0507325 601 m
AC1

and
Calculations
Control Joints (CMU)

Exp. Joints(Brick)
#4 Typical
24 '-8''
I
28 "O"
24 '-0"
LIA
24 '-0"
1- 23 '-0"
128 "O"
South Elevation, North Elevation Opposite Hand
Control Joint, Typical,
f For CMU
24
t {"-
I L"_
L A ""_
II
I I
I.
64 "O"
""_
"_
64 "O"
DPC Gymnasium
Seismic Zone 2 Reinforcement Requirements
15-26

""-
East Elevation
West Elevation
A C 1 T I T L E * M D G 73
0662947 050732b 5 4 8
Example 15.4-3 RCJ Hotel Empirical Design of Masonry Walls
Design the masonrywalls
for the RCJ Hotel.
Use WallConstruction
Option "A"
(Unreinforced brickand block noncomposite exterior walls

and unreinforced blockinterior
walls), and Building Construction Option I dimensions. See MDG 9.1.3 for building plan
dimensions and elevations.
Roof Deck
Masonry
Precast
Concrete
Concrete
ASTM C 90, Grade N
Roof (Hotel) Dead Load psf

= 95
Hollow
Floor Dead
psfLoad = 95
Units
Partition = 15psf
D. L = 10 psf
Curtainwall
Glass
Live
Roof
Mortar, ASTM C 270
Load = 20 psf
Mortar Type to be specified
Dwelling Room L L = 40 psf

Public Rooms L L = 100 psf
Corridors L. L = 100 psf
Stairs L L
100 psf
Seismic Zone = 2;
Pressure
Wind
Design
= 25 psf
Use modified framing plan shown on the next page

and
Calculations
~~~
~~~
The building scheme presented in MDG Figs. 9.1-6 through 9.1-15 cannot be designed by
the empirical sectionof the Code, since it does not satisfythe Code requirements for shear
walls in the east-west direction. A revised scheme, which may be designed empirically is
presented in the modified framing plan shown onthe next page. In this revised scheme,the
interior nonloadbearing wall on Grid Line 2 is removed and exterior nonloadbearingwalls
are added to Grid Lines 1and 4. All other aspects of the building scheme are as shown in
MDG Chapter 9.
15-27

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
0662949 0509327 484

and
Calculations
Reference
30 '
I
29 "8"
30
Code
30
30
[c'
7 '-8"
28 "8"
typical
E [c,
2 n d , 3rd, and 4th Floor Plan
RCJ Hotel - Modified Framing Plan

l. TYPICALINTERIORLOADBEARINGWALL
A. Empirical Design Criteria Check
1.
.-.
Seismic Zone 2 < Zone 3
OK
However, minimum reinforcement is required for Seismic Zone 2.

2.
Design WindPressure = 25 psf
3.
Maximum Height = 35 ft
25 psf mm. permitted .-. OK
35 ft mm. permitted .-. OK
B. ShearWall Design
Try 8 in. fully grouted concrete masonry units, unit strength = 4,500 psi
15-28

9.1.1.1
A.3.8
9.l.1.2
9.2
A C 1 TITLE*HDG
93
Ob62949 0509328 310

and
Reference
Calculations
Code
8 in.
1.
Minimumthickness
shear wall
2.
Minimum total shear walllength
9.3.1.1
Shear Walls: NortWSouth direction. Minimum cumulative length required = 0.4 x

long dimension. Min. length
= 150 ft x 0.4 = 60 ft required
= 9 x 30 ft = 270 ft
Actual
length
Note: stairwells and elevator shafts
> 60 ft :. OK
9.3.1.2
may be included, but the design is adequate
without them.
3.
Maximumspacingof
shear walls:
:. OK
ratio = 30 ft/30 ft = 1.0 < 4
9.3.1.3
with precast concrete slab diaphragms

C.Compressivestress:typicalinteriorwall
axial compressive stress,
fa =
P
- < Fa
A*
9.4.2
F, = 225 psi for fully grouted units, Type M or S Mortar, Code Table 9.4.2
wall wt.
140 pcf x
7.63 in. x 1 ft x 1 ft
89.0
12 in./ft
Check stresses at the base of the wall.

Loading Case: Reduced Live Load
+ Dead Load (ASCE7-88)
Dwelling unit live load reduction:

factor = 0.25
factor = 0.25
15
-
fi
15
= 0.441
46 x 30 x 34.33
15-29

A C 1 T I T L E v M D G 93
Obb2949 0509329 257

and
CaIcuIations
Discussion
Load
Live
Roof
Reference
Code
= 30 ft x 20 psf =
Roof Dead Load = 30psf

ft x 95
plf 600
plf2,850
Roof Load over Corridor: Concentrated Load that spreads through wall
LL = 4.0 ft x 30 ft X 20 psf =
lb2,400
DL = 4.0 ft x 30 ft x 95 psf =
11,400
lb
2nd,
3rd,
4th Floor L.L. = 30 ft (40 psf) (0.441) (3) =
1,590
plf
2nd,
3rd,
4th Floor D.L. = 30 ft (110 (3)

psf)
9,900
plf
2nd, 3rd, 4th Floor Corridor:
LL.
(30ft= 4
D.L. Wall
Concentrated Load that spreads through wall
ft) (100(0.441)
psf)
D.L.
(30
ft = 4
15,900
lb
(3) =
ft) (110 psf) (3) =
39,600 lb
= 35 ft (89.0 psf) =
plf 3,115
Total = 18,055 plf
+ 69,300 lb
The concentrated loads fromthe beams supportingthe roof and floors

over the corridors may be spread over
distance
a
thickness,say 12 in.
+ 4 (8 in.)
= bearing
plus
4
5.12.1
= 44 in. (spreads over both legs of
flanged wall).
18,055 plf
lb
fa = 12(7.63 in.) 44 69y300
h(7.63 in.)
+
197 + 207
404 psi
225 psk N.G.
Reevaluate using nominal 12 in. fully grouted wall.

=
19,700 plf
12 (11.63in.)
69y300lb
= 141 + 99
60 in. (11.63in.)
15-30

240 psi > 225 psi: N.G.
A C 1 TITLE*:MDG 93
m 0662747
0507330T77

and
Calculations
The reader should comparethe allowable compressive stresses within MDG Example 13.2-4
to this example to evaluate the alternate design method.
D. Lateral Support Design
1.
8 ft - 10 in. floor to floor dimension, 8 ft - O in. clear, assume lateral brace at each
floor with floor diaphragm action.
9.5.1
2. TYPICAL EXTERIOR LOADBEARING WALL

1.
Seismic Zone 2 < Zone 3 :.
OK
However,
minimum
reinforcement
2.
Design
Wind
Pressure = 25 psf
Height = 35 ft
Maximum
3.
9.1.1.1
is required for Seismic Zone 2.

25 psf :. OK
35 ft max. permitted
k3.8
9.1.1.2
:.
OK
9.2
B. Shear Wall Design

Try 8 in. fully grouted concrete masonry units.Per Code k3.5 brick outside wythe is not
used to resist shear loads.
See Calculations under item l.B above
C.Compressivestress:typicalexteriorwall
axial compress stress,
fu
P
-
Fu
9.4.2
A,
wall wt.
140 pcf x 7.63 in. x 1 ft x 1 fi
15-31

89.0 psf
0662949 0509333 905

and
Calculations
+ Dead Load
Loading Case: Reduced Live Load

Check stress at base of wall
Dwelling unit live load reduction:
15
factor = 0.25 + -
J;I;
factor
15
= 0.25 +
= 0.520
46 x 15 x 34.33
Load
Live
Roof
15psf
ft x 20
ft x 95
Roof Dead Load = 15psf
plf 300
=
=
plf1,425
lb 1,200
Roof Load Over Corridor
LL. = 4.0 ft (15psf)

ft) (20
D.L. = 4.0 ft (15 ft) (95 psfj =
5,700 lb
2nd,
3rd,
4th
Floor
L.L. = 15(40
psf)
ft
Floor
2nd,
4th
3rd,
D.L. = 15 ft (110 (3)

psf)
(0.520) (3) =
D.L. = 4.0 ft (15 ft) (110

(3)psf)
4,950
plf
2nd, 3rd, 4th Floor Corridor: Concentrated Load
LL. = 4.0 ft (15 ft) (100 psf) (0.520)

(3)
936
plf
that spreads through wall.

9,360
lb
19,800
lb
Wall D.L. = 35 ft (89.0 psf) =
plf 3,115
Total = 10,726 plf
+ 36,060 lb
The concentrated loads from the beams supporting

the roof and floors
over the corridors maybe spread over a distance
15-32

= bearing plus 4
5.12.1
AC
T I1T L E * M D G
Obb2949 0509332 841
93
Examele 15.43 Contd.

Code Reference
(thickness), say 12 in.
+ (4) (8 in.) = 44 in. (spreads out over bothlegs
of flanged wall.
fa
10,726 pl
12(7.63 in.)
369060 lb
= 224.7 psi
44 in. (7.63 in.)
225 psi:
:
,
OK
9.4
Use fully grouted 2,500 psi unit, Type M or S Mortar

See item 1.D above
3. EXTERIOR NONLOADBEARING WALL, COLUMN LINE 1AND 4
Between B-C, C-D, D-E, and E-F

1.
.: OK
Seismic Zone 2 < Zone 3
However, minimum reinforcement is required

for
2.
Design Wind Pressure
3.
Maximum Height = 35 ft
25 psf
S
9.1.1.1
Seismic Zone 2
k3.8
:. OK
9.1.1.2
25 psf m a . permitted
35 ft max. permitted
:. OK
9.2
B. Shear Wall Design

Try 8 in. solid, concrete masonry units. Per Code k 3 . 5 , brick outside wythe is not used
to resist shear loads.
1.
Minimum shear wall thickness 8 in.
2.
Minimumtotal shear wall length:

Shear Walls to resist an east or west wind.
minimum cumulative length = 0.4 x long dimension
min. length = 150 ft x 0.4
60 ft
15-33

9.3.1.1
Obb29Y9 0509333 7 8 8 D

and
Calculations
actual length (see modified framing plan)
=8ftx8x2
= 128 ft > 60 ft
3.
=.OK
9.3.1.2
Minimum wall length by shear wall ratio:
2 wall l e n a spacing
64 ft
67.67 ft
= 0.95 > 0.25
.: OK
9.3.1.3
C. Compressive Stress:
typical exterior or interior nonloadbearing wall
axial compressive stress, f,
P
- < F,
9.4.2
A,
estimate average wall wgt. = 89 psf

Loading Case: Wall Weight only
Wall D. L. = 35 ft x 89 psf = 3,115 plf
fa
3,115 lb
= 12 in. x 7.63 in.
34.0 psi
160 psi
.-. OK
The low axial compressive stress can be adequately supportedby many types of concrete
masonry units and type of mortar. The same masonry unit and mortar as theadjoining
wall described above is recommended, for ease of construction.

See item 1.D above
MINIMUM REINFORCEMENT
Use single wythe 8 in. fully grouted concrete masonry units with special strengths noted
15-34

AC1
TITLE*NDG 93 W 0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0509334 bL4 W

i
Code Reference
above, ASTM C 90 with ASTM C 270, Type M or S Mortar. The Code Appendix k3.8
requires minimum steel reinforcement for structures inSeismic Zone 2. General steel
reinforcement requirements are as follows:
1. Vertical Reinforcement (from support to support)

a. at each wall corner,
b. at each side of each opening,
c. at ends of walls,
2. Horizontal Reinforcement,
a. at bottom and top of wall openings,
b. at structurally connected roof and floor levels,

c. bottom of walls, see Code Appendix A 3
d. uniformly distributed inwalls.
The figure on the next page shows typical reinforcement locations.

Authors Notes: Code Appendix A.3.6 and A.3.7 specify additional connection requirements
for the anchorage of masonry walls to floor and roof diaphragms and at tops of columns.
Many architectural design details are required for a properly functioning masonry structure.
Required masonry joints, including control joints and expansion joints, are described in
MDG Chapter 10. The cavity must be adequately flashed, weeped and vented. See MDG
Chapter 6. Another critical detail location is the top of the wall, where the coping must be
capable of withstanding differential movement of the brick and block wythes. See MDG
Chapter 10.
15-35

O662949 0509335 550

and
Calculations
Code Reference
QQ
'Typical Floor Thickness
Vertical #4 Reinforcement At:

1. End Of Each Wall,
2. Each Side Of Each Opening.
Horizontal # 4 Reinforcement At:

1. Bottom And Top Of Wall Openings,
Extend 24" Or 40 d b Past Opening
2 . Roof And Floor Levels And Top Of Wall
3. And A t Bottom Of Wall.
SOUTHELEVATION
Typical Reinforcement Locations
15-36

T IA
T LCE1 v M D G
93 W 0662949 0509336 497 W
16
PROVISIONS FOR SEISMIC DESIGN
16.1 INTRODUCTION
Masonry buildings, likethose of other buildings, respond to theseismic inertial forcescaused
by ground shaking.Soil
characteristics and many other factors will influence the actual
ground motion to which a building will be subjected in an earthquake. Because the resisting
forces are caused by an inertial response, thebuildings distribution of mass, stiffnesses, and
strength are important characteristics which must be considered in assigning design forces
to be carried to the resisting elements of the building. Unlike designing for wind forces, in
which all structural elements are normally assumed to remain elastic, earthquake-resistant
design assumes that structuralelements must retaintheir
integrity even when stressed
beyond the elastic limit. Therefore it is important to detail masonry elements for ductility,
that is, the ability to resist cyclic inelastic deformation without significant loss of strength.
Code Appendix A provides special provisions to be used in masonry design to improve the
ductile performance characteristics of masonry elements consistent with earthquake
probabilities in the various seismic zones.

This chapter of the MDG is intended to provide a general overview of the additional Code
seismic requirements(Appendix A) pertaining to the configuration, materials, element
design, and reinforcement detailing of masonry structures. Additional information regarding
the seismic design of masonry is available in references such as (16.1.1), (16.1.2),and (16.1.3).
16-1

93
Obb29Ll9 0509337 323
An important part of seismic design is the conceptual planning

of the building to determine
the proper configurationandlayout

discontinuity,and
of shear walls.If
possible,largeplanasymmetry,
abrupt changeinbuildingstiffnessshouldbeavoided.Collapse
of
buildings in earthquakes throughout the world has been attributed to designs having these
irregularities.
Conceptual designis followed by the lateral force determinationand distribution andlateral
force design. The inelastic deformation capacityof lateral force resistingelements (masonry
shear walls) should beadequate. Design provisions and reinforcernent details given in Code
Appendix Aare intended to provide the building with a lateral-force resisting system which
should retain asubstantialportion
of itsstrengtheven
if it is subjected to reversed
displacements into the inelastic range.

Code Appendix A 2 does not require special provisions for Seismic
Zones O and 1 because
of the low inelastic deformation demands on building structures in these zones. Special
Code provisions(k3)
are given for Zone 2, with additional Code provisions(A.4) for Zones
3 and 4.
Under severeseismicloads,masonryelementscanbesubjected
to reversedinelastic
deformations and high axial, flexural, and shear forces. Masonry elements in Zones 3 and
4 should be designed to withstand these conditions without significant loss of strength or
stiffness.
16.2 MATERIALS
Code Appendix k 4 . 4 does not allow the use of Type
N mortar nor masonry cement in
Seismic Zones 3 and 4. Grout must properly surround all the reinforcement and fill all the
voids in the wall.
16-2

A C 1 T I T L E * f l D G 93
m O662949
0509338 2bT
163 DESIGN OF MASONRYELEMENTS
In Seismic Zone 2, Code Appendix A.3.1 permits the tensile strength of masonry to be
considered; as such, masonry elements can be designed according to Code Chapter 6. In
Seismic Zones 3 and 4, Code Appendix A.4.2 does not permit consideration of masonry
tensile strength; therefore, reinforcement must be provided to carry all tensile forces, and
masonry elements shall be designed according to Code Chapter 7.
For the shear design of reinforced masonry shear walls in Seismic Zones 3 and 4, Code
Appendix A.4.9.1 requires that thecalculated seismic shear force be increased by 50 percent.
This provisionis intendedto
prevent brittle shear failure and assure desirable ductile
behavior. When compression stresses exceed 20 percent of the specified compressive

strength, good designpractice utilizes boundary elements such as returns andflanges, and/or
confinement for the compressive stress block toes of shear walls.
Code Appendix A.3.4 requires that all masonry walls and columns which are not considered
part of the lateral force resisting system be designed for vertical load and induced moment
corresponding to 2.25 times the drift resulting from Code seismic forces. An example is a
flexural wall that is perpendicular to the direction of the seismic shear force (Fig. 16.3-1).
This wall will experience out-of-plane drift from the displacement of the diaphragm, and
should be designed to resist internal shear and moments corresponding to 2.25 times the
Code-level drift. This induced displacement would result in out-of-plane wall shears and
moments, also influenced by P-A effects and boundary conditions (Fig. 16.3-1). If the
building has more than one level, relative displacements of the levels at the top and bottom
of this wall should be considered.
16-3

93
0 6 6 2 9 4 9 0509339 1 T b
r""""""""-
2.25 A
Applied
Force
Moment
Applied
Moment
Force
Wall A-Fixed At Top
Wall A-Free To Rotate At Top
Fig. 163-1 Effect of Out of Plane Building Drift on Flexural Walls
16.4
DETAILING
16.4.1
Reinforcement
In Seismic Zone 2, Code Appendix k 3 . 8 specifies that minimum vertical and horizontal
reinforcement of 0.2 in.2 be provided at key locations, as shownin Fig. 16.4-1. For walls laid
in other than running bond, Code Appendix k 3 . 9 and k 4 . 7 require minimum horizontal
reinforcement of 0.0007 and 0.0015 times the gross cross-sectional area of the wallfor
Seismic Zone 2 and for Zones 3 and 4, respectively. This can be satisfied either by joint
reinforcement or by bond beams as shown in Fig. 16.4-2.
16-4

A C 1 TITLE*NDG 93
m 0662947 0507340
918
,"- On Each Side Of Opening
At
TOP
T-T
At Top & Bottom

Of Opening
- At Floor
Or
Roof Level
T-.-~""-T""T"T""""
T-.-7""-7"""
r-t-t-
L I
"
"
"
"t+I"r""n
fi
A t Wall
Ends
RC Frame
A t Wall
Perimeter
Infill Masonry
Wall
Around
Opening
Fig. 16.4-1 Minimum Reinforcement Requirements (Seismic Zone
2)
A, = 0.0007
In Open Ended Bondbeams
Otherwise A, = 0.0015 4
I ""_
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Figure 16.4-2 Minimum
Horizontal Reinforcement in Walls Laid in Other Than

Running Bond (Seismic Zone 2)
16-5

A C 1 TITLExMDG 9 3 M O b b 2 9 4 90 5 0 9 3 4 38 5 4
Additional reinforcement requirementsare specified for masonry walls in Seismic Zones 3

and 4. In accordance with Code Appendix k4.5, all walls must be reinforced with both
having a minimum area of 0.002 timesthe gross
vertical and horizontal reinforcement
cross-sectional area of the wall. A minimum area of reinforcement equal to 0.0007 times
the gross cross sectional area must be provided ineach direction, at a maximum spacing of
4 ft. Fig. 16.4-3 shows minimum reinforcement requirements for masonry walls in Seismic
Zones 3 and 4. Horizontal reinforcement must be adequately anchored around vertical

reinforcement.
Code Appendix k 4 . 6 specifies minimum requirementsfor column ties which are shown in
Fig. 16.4-4. Lateral tiesshould be embedded in grout rather than in mortar joints for
columns in Seismic Zones 3 and 4, per Code Appendix k4.6.1.
4'
max
I
Horizontal
Steel
-> 0.0007Ag
Adequate
Anchorage
Vertical
Steel
>
0.0007Ag
Fig. 16.4-3 - Minimum Wall Reinforcement (Seismic Zones 3 and 4)
16-6

~~
A C 1 T I T L E + M D G 9 3 9 0662949 0509342 7 9 0 9
i!/i!i
t"t
t--t
C"+
Columns
Reslstlng
Overturning Forces
Ties 8" OS!.

Over Full
Height
Ties 8" O C .
116 Col. Ht.Or 18" Or
Maximum Column
Side Dimension
Whichever Is Greater
-1
Ties @ 16 Bar Diameters.

- 48 Tie Diameters, The Least
Column Ihmension Or
18" O.C.
It?
-+--r
-I"--c
-I--+
All
Columns
Other
Fig. 16.4-4 - Tie Requirements for Masonry Columns (Seismic a n e s 3 and 4)
16.4.2
Anchorage
Code Appendix k 3 . 6 requires that all masonry walls be anchored to floors and roofs, with
connections capable of resisting the horizontal forces required in Code 5.2 or a minimum
of 200 lb per linear foot of the wall, whichever is greater. Anchors must be embedded in
reinforced bond beams or reinforced vertical cells, as shown in Fig. 16.4-5.
16.43 MinimumDimensions
The nominal minimum wall thicknessrequired in SeismicZones 3 and 4 per CodeAppendix
k4.8.1 is 6 in., and the least minimum dimension of a masonry column per Code Appendix
k4.8.2 is 12 in. There is an exception for hollowclaymasonry
requirements are met (Code Appendix k4.8.1).
16-7

provided that specified
A CT 1I T L E M M D G
93
Obb2949 0 5 0 9 3 4 3 b 2 7
Fig. 16.4-5 - Anchorage of Masonry Walls to Roofs and Floors
REFERENCES
16.1.1
Schneider, R.R., W.L. Dickey, ReinforcedMasonryDesign,PrenticeHall,
Inc.,
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1987.

16.1.2Englekirk,
K.,Hart, G.C., Earthquake Design Of ConcreteMasonrv
Buildings,
Prentice Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1984.

16.1.3
Pauley, T.and Priestley, M. Seismic Design Of Reinforced Concrete And Masonrv

Buildings, Prentice Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1992.
16-8

A C 1 TITLExMDG 93
Obb29490509344563
A
APPENDIX
CLAY MASONRY SECTION PROPERTIES

Table 1 Minimum Thickness* of Face-Shkll and Webs
- ASTM C 652 Units

7
Nominal
Width (W)
of Unit, in
Face Shell
Thickness
Interior
(FST) min, in.
Web Thickness
(WT) min, in.
End Web Thickness

min, in
314
1/2
314
314
112
314
1/2
10
314
1/2
1 118
12
314
1/2
1 118
*Most manufacturers produce units which have greater face-shell thicknesses than the minimum values
listed in Table 1.
Table 2 Section Properties* - Hollow Clay Unit Walls - ASTM C 652 Units
Mortar Bedding
Solid or Fully
Grouted
Property per ft of Wall

Full
Face-Shell
li
Actual Unit Thickness = 3 V2"
4" Walls
I
kea
I A , in.2 I
18.0
22.0
42.0
42.934.0
35.7
S, in.3
19.4
20.4
24.5
e&, in.
1.07
0.93
0.58
1.27 r, in.
1.37
Moment of Inertia
I , in!
Section Modulus
Kern Eccentricity
Radius of Gyration 1.01
A-1

Table 2 Cont'd. Section
Properties Hollow Clay Unit Walls
- ASTM C 652 Units
Mortar Bedding
Solid or Fully
Grouted
Property per ft of Wall
Full
Face-Shell
Actual Unit Thickness = 5 IJ2"
6" Walls
Area
A , in.*66.0
24.0
32.8
Moment of Inertia
I, in.4 166
122
132
Section Modulus
S,in.3
44.2
48.1
Kern Eccentricity
eb in. 0.92
*
1.84
1.47
r, in. 1.59
2.25
2.01
Radius of Gyration
li
60.5
Actual Unit Thickness = 7 42"
S"walls
I
kea
A , in.2
30.0
Moment of Inertia
I, in.4
293
42.5
323
Section Modulus
S,in.3
78.1
86.1
Kern Eccentricity
e,, in.1.25
2.6
2.03
Radius of Gyration
r, in. 2.17
3.13
2.75
114
Moment of Inertia
51.6A , i n . 2
33.0
I, in?
857 544
Section Modulus
180.5
131 S,i n . 3
115
Kern Eccentricity
1.58
2.54e,, in.
3.47
3.47 r, in.
4.06
Radius of Gyration 2.75
Area
Moment of Inertia
Section Modulus 265
Radius of Gyration
113
621
Unit Thickness = 11 U2"
Actual
12"Wall
Kern Eccentricity
90.0
422
= 9 1/2"
Thickness
Unit Actual
10" Walls
Area
1.92
59.4 A , in.2
36.0
I , in.4
1,520
900
182 S,in.3
157
3.06e,, in.
4.36
r, in.
3.32 5.00
138
1,048
4.20
*Table 2 values are based on the minimum thicknesses given in Table 1.
A-2

A C 1 T I T L E S N D G 9 3 D Obb2949 0509346 336
Table 3 Average Wall Weights
Nominal
Width of Unit,
in
- Hollow Clay Units With Grout
I
None
4'
- O''
3'
2'
O"
O''
1'
- 6"
24.1 22.3 21.3 18.6
6"
27.6
32.1
35.7
42.0
44.1
49.7
- O"
Fully
29.7 26.0 40.7
39.5
45.5
63.3
48.3
52.5
61.0
85.8
76.3 65.3 107.8

59.8 54.3
70.4 63.5
60.0
A-3

1'
36.5 33.5
51.5 43.3
10"
12"
(psf)
Grout Spacing
4"
"
77.3
91.2
130.8
.5
Ob62747 0507347 2 7 2
CONCRETE MASONRY SECTION PROPERTIES

Table 4 Minimum Thickness of Face - Shell and Webs
Nominal
Width
(W)
of Units, in.
- ASTM C 90
Face-Shell
Thickness
Thickness
Web
(FST) Min., in.
min., in.
314
314
1 114
10
1 318
1 118
12
1 112
1 118
Table 5 Average Weight of Concrete Masonry Units (lb) ASTM C 90

Nominal Size
22.0
Density (pcf)
80
20.0 4 x18.0
8 ~ 116.5
6
14.5
23.5 6 21.5
x 8 ~ 119.0
6
17.0
8 x 8 ~ 39.0
16
90 110
36.0
225 33.525.030.5
100
120
130
140
25.5
25.5
27.5
30.0
50.5
54.5
28.0
48.0
1044.5
x 841.0
x 37.5
1634.531.027.5
12 x 8 47.0
x 16
43.0
39.0
35.0
31.0
A-4

A C 1 TITLExflDG 93
Ob62949 0509348 L O 9 D
Table 6 Average Weight of Ungrouted Completed Walls, plf7ft of height
Table 7 Section Properties
- CMU Walls - ASTM C 90 Hollow Units

Mortar Bedding
Shell Face
I
Solid or Fully Grouted
Full
Unit Designation 4 x 8 x 16
Average Unit Dimensions: Thickness = 3.63",Length = 15.63", Height = 7.63"
3.5
Area21.6
A , in.2
18.0
47.6
39.4
Moment of Inertia
I , in.4
38.0
6.3
21.7
Section Modulus
S, in.3
21.0
Kern Eccentricity
ek, in.
1.17
Radius
1.05of Gyration
1.35
r, in.
1.45
6 in. Walls
67.5
3.3
Area32.2
1.00
0.0
Actual Unit Dimensions: Thickness = 5.63",Length = 15.63", Height = 7.63"
A, in.2
24.0
139
Moment of
Inertia
I, i n . 4
130
49.5
Section Modulus
S, in.'
46.3
1.54
Kern Eccentricity
et, in.
1.93
Radius of Gyration
r, in.
2.33
0.94
208
A-5

1.62
9 3 M Obb2949 0509349 045 M
Table 7 Cont'd. Section Properties CMU Walls - ASTM C 90 Hollow Units

Mortar Bedding
perProperty
ft of
Wall
8 in. Walls
Area
Full
Average Unit Dimensions: Thickness = 7.63', Length = 15.63", Height = 7.63'
41.5
A , in.2
30.0
Moment of Inertia
334
I, in.'
309
116
Section Modulus
87.6
S) in.3
81.0
1.27
Kern Eccentricity
2.11
e,
2.20
Radius of Gyration
2.84
91.5
43
10 in. Walls
Solid or Fully Grouted
Shell Face
in.
2.70
r, in.
3.21
Unit Designation 10x 8 x 16

Actual Unit Dimensions: Thickness = 9.63", Length = 15.63", Height = 7.63"
Area
A, in.*
33.0
Moment of Inertia
635
I ) in.'
567
Section Modulus
132
S) in.3
118
Kern Eccentricity
e,, in. 1.60
3.57
2.62
Radius of Gyration
r, in. 2.78
4.14
3.55
12 in. Walls
Area
1,571
0
1.94
36.0
140
I ) in.'
929
Section Modulus
183
S) in.3
160
Kern Eccentricity
3.17
e,)
in.
4.44
r, in.
5.08
Radius of Gyration
4.29
116
Unit Designation 12x 8 x 16

Actual Unit Dimensions: Thickness = 11.63", Length = 15.63", Height = 7.63"
A, i n e 2
Moment of Inertia
1,065
50.4
3.36
A-6

57.8
A C 1 TITLE*HDG 93
0662949 0509350 867 H
Table 8 SI Units Conversion Factors'
To convert from
kilometer
to'
inch
foot
Length
millimeter (mm)
meter (m)
Yard
meter (m)
mile (statute)
multiply by2
25.4E
0.3048E
0.9144E
1.609
(km)
Area
foot
square inch
square
square yard
centimeter square
meter
(cm2)
6.452
(m2)
(m2)
square
0.09290
0.8361
Force
kilogram-force
kip-force
pound-force
(N)
newton (N)
kilonewton (kN)
newton
Pressure or Stress (Force perArea)
kilogram.force/square
meter
(Pa)
(MPa)
kip-forcehquare inch (ksi)
newtonhquare meter (Pa)
(N/m*)
pound.force/square
foot
(Pa)
pound.force/square
(Pa) inch (psi)
pascal
megapascal
pascal
pascal
pascal
9.807
4.448
4.448
9.807
6.895
1. W E
47.88
6895
Bending Moment or Torque
inchpound-force
foot-pound-force
meter-kilogram.force
(N-m)
newton-meter (Nem)
newton-meter
newtonmmeter (Nm)
0.1130
1.356
9.807
Mass
ounce-mass (avoirdupois)
pound-mass (avoirdupois)
ton (metric)
ton (short, 2000 lbm)
pound.mass/cubic foot
pound.mass/cubic yard
pound.mass/gallon
gram (g)
kilogram (kg)
megagram (Mg)
megagram (Mg)
Mass per Volume
kilogram/cubic meter (kg/m3)
28.35
0.4536
1.OOOE
0.9072
16.02
0.5933
119.8
Temperature
deg Farenheit (F)

deg Celsius (C)
deg Celsius (C)

deg Farenheit (F)
k = (fF - 32)/1.8
tF
= 1.8k
+ 32
This list gives practical conversion factors of units found in masonry technology. The reference source for information on SI units and
more conversion factors is "Standard for Metric Practice" ASTM E 380. Symbols of metric units are given in parentheses.
* E indicates that the factor given is exact.
A-7


Masonry Designer's Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Masonry Designer's Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MASONRY

Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures

COPYRIGHT ACI International (American Concrete Institute)

Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures

John H. Matthys, editor

COPYRIGHT ACI International (American Concrete Institute)

The Masonry Society

Direct all correspondence to:

COPYRIGHT ACI International (American Concrete Institute)

m Obb2949 050B49L 373

Reauirements for Masonrv Structures is shortened to

MSJC Code or Code. Specifications or Specs. means SDecificationsfor Masonry Structures.

the professionalsociety of the masonry

of their members to write the document. The

COPYRIGHT ACI International (American Concrete Institute)

Guides development. AC1 had the qualifications and resources

to publish the MDG.

The MDG should be a valuable reference to engineers, contractors, architects, inspectors,

Engineering and Director of the Construction

coordinator for the production of the document.

of concepts of authors and numerous

reviewers. In addition manyof the example problems were developed

COPYRIGHT ACI International (American Concrete Institute)

Section 9.0 Introduction and Section 9.3 on IntrawallLoad

- Computer Calculations for RCJ Hotel

- Section 5.1 on Submittals,Section 6.1 on

Preparation, Section 7.1 on Hot Weather Construction, and Section

Methodology and Philosophy

Chairman, Department ofCivil

- Section 3.5 on Metal

Connectors and Reinforcement

COPYRIGHT ACI International (American Concrete Institute)

Methodology and Philosophy

Masonry Consultant, Austin, Texas

- Section 3.4 on Masonry and

Engineering, Drexel University, Philadelphia,

Pennsylvania - Section 13.2 on Shear Walls and Chapter 16 on Provisionsfor

- Smith & Huston, Consulting Engineers, Seattle, Washington - Lateral

Albert W. Isberner - Consultant, Portage, Wisconsin

on Testing and Section 5.5 on Compliance

- Raths, Raths, and Johnson, Willowbrook, Illinois - Development and

Center, DPC Gymnasium andRCJ

and Section 6.5 on Quality

Assurance/Quality Control Checklist

- Chapter 14 on Reinforcement and Connectors

of Architectural Engineering, North Carolina A&T

University, Greensboro, NorthCarolina

Section 9.2 on Intenvall Load Distribution

COPYRIGHT ACI International (American Concrete Institute)

Section 13.1 on Design for Shear in Masonry Components

12.0 Introduction and Section 13.0

- Section 5.3 on Inspection and

Section 6.4 on Cleaning

Kentucky - Section 11.1 on Walls

- Wiss, Janney, Elstner Associates, Northbrook, Illinois

Placement and Section 6.5 on Quality Assurance/Quality Control Checklist

the development of this document were

is extended to allreviewers for their voluntarycontributionsin

production of this unique document.

COPYRIGHT ACI International (American Concrete Institute)

Obb27q7 0508496 955

- National Concrete Masonry Association - Herndon, Virginia